BS 5500-1997

BRITISH STANDARD BS 5500 : 1997
I?lÆWp?Y&ti?l$l
Amendments Nos.1,2,
3a&4
Specification for
Unfired fusion welded

pressure vessels
ICs 23.020.30
NO COPYING WITBOUT BSI PERMISSION EXCEET AS PEBNII"ED BY COPYRIGHT LAW
COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

Licensed by Information Handling Services
BS 6600 :1997 Issue 5, January 1998
Committees responsible for this

British Standard
The preparaiion of this British Standard was entrusted to Technical Committee
PW1, Pressure vessels, upon which the following bodies were represented:
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Industry Board (ACRIB)

British Chemical Engineering Contractors' Association
British Compressed Air Society
British Compressed Gases Associati ' 'on
British Gas pic

British Refrigeration A s s o c i o n
Department of Trade and Industry (Mechanid EngineeringDivision (ME))
Electricity Association
Energy Industries Council
Engineering Equipment and Materials ' Users'Association
Health and safety Executive
Insütution of Chemical Engineers
LP Gas Acsociaüon
Lloyd's Register of Shipping
Power Generation ContractorsAssociation (PGCA (BEAMA L a ) )
Process Plant Association
Safety Assessment Federation Ltd.
Society of Briüsh Gas Industries
The Welding Mht~
The foliowing bodies were also represented in the drafting of the standard,through
subcommittees and panels:
AEA Technology
Associon of Consuiting Engineers
BEAMA Ltd.
British Cryogenics Council
British iron and Steel Producers' A s s o c i o n
GAMBICA (BEAMA Ltd.)
Institute of R e f r i g d o n
This British Standard, having
beenprepared under the Institution of Gas Engineers
direction of the E n g i n a g Institution of Mechanical Engineers
Sector Board,was published Institution of Plant Engineers
under the authorityof the
Standards Board and comes inta Minishy of Defence
effect on 'kmmision and Distribution Associaton (BEAMA Ltd.)
16 January 1997
n b e s Investments Limited
Q BSI 1998 University of Liverpool
First published March 1976 Welding Manufacturers' Association (BEAMA Ltd.)
Second edition January 1982
Third edition January 1985
Fourth edition January 1988 Amendments issued since publication
FiRh edition January 1991
Sixth edition January 1994 Amd. No. Date Text affected
Seventh edition January 1997
9601 May 1997 Indicated by a sideline in the margin
The foilowing BSI references
relate to the work on this
standard
9641 I September 1997 I Indicated by a sideline in the margin
commiaee reference P W 1 9830 October 1997 Indicated by a sideline in the margin
ISBN O 680 27047 6 9873 January 1998 Indicated by a sideìine in the margin

S T D . B S 1 BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 9 L b Z q b b S üb7115LO 2 7 6 9
h e 1, January 1997 BS 5 5 0 : 1997
Contents
Page
Committees responsible Inside front cover
Summary of pages xii
Foreword xv
Specification
Section 1. General
1.1 Scope 111
1.2 Interpretation 111
1.3 Definitions 1/2
1.4 Responsibilities 1/2
1.4.1 Responsibilities of the purchaser 1/2
1.4.2 Responsibilities of the manufacturer 112
1.4.3 Responsibilities of the Inspecting Authority 1/3
1.4.4 Certificate of Compliance 1/3
1.6 Information and requirements to be agreed and to be documented 1/6
1.5.1 Information to be supplied by the purchaser 116
1.5.2 Information to be supplied by the manufacturer 116
1.6 ThiClniesseS 1/9
Section 2. Materials
2.1 Selection of materials 211
2.1.1 General Y1
2.1.2 Materials for pressure parts 211
2.1.3 Materials for non-pressure parts 2/2
2.2 Materials for low temperature applications 2/2
2.3 Carbon, carbon manganese and alloy steels Y4
2.3.1 Materials covered by British Standards Y4
2.3.2 Materiais not covered by British Standards 214
Section 3. Design
3.1 General 3/1
3.2 Application 311
3.3 Corrosion, erosion and protection 3/3
3.3.1 General 3/3
3.3.2 Additional thickness to allow for corrosion 3/3
3.3.3 Linings and coatings 3/3
3.3.4 Wear plates 3/3
3.4 Construction categories and design stresses 314
3.4.1 Construction categories 314
3.4.2 Design stresses 3/4
3.5 Vessels under internal pressure 316
3.5.1 Cyiindricaì and sphericd shells 316
3.5.2 Domed ends 3ff
3.5.3 Cones and conical ends 3111
3.5.4 Openings and branch connections 3/15
3.5.5 Flat ends and flat plates 3/37
3.5.6 Spherically domed and bolted ends of the form shown in
figure 3.536 3/43
O BSI 1997 1
BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997
page
3.6 Vessels under external pressure 3148
3.6.1 General 3/48
3.6.2 Cylindrical shells 3149
3.6.3 Conical shells 3/61
3.6.4 Spherical shells 3164
3.6.6 Hemispherical ends 3/72
3.6.6 Torispherical ends 3/72
3.6.7 Ellipsoidal ends 3/72
3.6.8 Procedure by which the departure from the mean circle may be
obtained 3/72
3.7 Supports, attachments and internai structures 3/72
3.7.1 General 3/72
3.7.2 supports 3/73
3.8 Bolted flanged connections 3/74
3.8.1 General 3/74
3.8.2 Notation 3/79
3.8.3 Narrow-faced gasketed flanges 3/81
3.8.4 N-faced flanges with soft ring type gaskets 3185
3.8.6 Ungasketed s e d welded flanges 3185
3.8.6 Reverse narrow-face flanges 3185
3.8.7 Reverse full-face flanges 3186
3.8.8 Full-faced flanges with metal to metal contact 3/86
3.9 Flat heat exchanger tubesheets 31119
3.9.1 Notation 31119
3.9.2 Characteristics of perforated plates 31121
3.9.3 Tubesheets of exchangers with floating heads or U-tubes 3121
3.9.4 Tubesheets of fixed tubesheet exchangers 31130
3.9.6 Allowable shell and tube longitudjnal stresses 31135
3.9.6 Allowable tube joint end load 31135
3.10 Design of welds 31139
3.10.1 General 3139
3.10.2 Welded joints for principal seams 31139
3.10.3 Welded joints for other than principal seams 31140
3.10.4 Welded joints in thne dependent applications 31140
3.11 Jacket constn rction 31142
3.11.1 General 31142
3.11.2 Jacketed cylindrical shells W142
3.11.3 Welded jacket connections 3142
3.11.4 Compensation 31143
3.12 Manholes and inspection openings 31144
3.13 Protective devices for excessive pressure or vacuum 31144
3.13.1 Application 3144
3.13.2 Capacity of relief device(s) 31144
3.13.3 Pressure setting of pressure relief devices 31144
Section 4. Manufacture and workmanship
4.1 General aspects of construction 41
4.1.1 General 4/1
4.1.2 Material identifcation 41
4.1.3 Order of completion of weld seams 4/1
4.1.4 Junction of more than two weld seams 41
4.2 Cutting, forming and tolerances 41
11 O BSI 1997
STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1777 Lb24667 0670532 O47 B
Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
page
4.2.1 Cutting of material 4/1
4.2.2 Forming of shell sections and plates 4/2
4.2.3 Assembly tolerances 4A
4.2.4 Tolerances for vessels subject to internal pressure 4/4
4.2.5 Tolerances for vessels subject to external pressure 4/5
4.3 Welded joints 4/5
4.3.1 General 4/5
4.3.2 Welding consumables 4/5
4.3.3 Preparation of plate edges and openings 4/6
4.3.4 Assembly for welding 4/6
4.3.5 Attachments and the removal of temporary attachments 46
4.3.6 Butt joints 4/6
4.3.7 Welding: general requirements 4/7
4.4 Heat treatment 4R
4.4.1 Preheat requirements 4/7
4.4.2 Normalizing: ferritic steels 4f7
4.4.3 Post-weld heat treatment 4/7
4.4.4 Methods of heat treatment 4/8
4.4.5 Post-weld heat treatment procedure 4/9
4.5 Surface finish rn
Section 5. Inspection and testing
5.1 General 511
5.2 Approval testing of fusion welding procedures 5A
* 5.3 Welder and operator approval 5/4
v,
* 6.4 Production control test plates 5/5
5.4.1 Vessels in materiais other than 9 % Ni steel 515
5-4.2 9 % Ni steel vessels 515
5.5 Destructive testing 515
5.6 Nondestructive testing 515
5.6.1 General 5/5
5.6.2 Parent materials 5/5
5.6.3 Components prepared for welding 516
5.6.4 Nondestructive testing of welded joints 516
5.6.5 Choice of nondestructive test methods for welds 5f7
5.6.6 Nondestructive testing techniques for welds 518
5.7 Acceptance criteria for weld defects revealed by visual examination
and nondestnictive testing 5/10
5.7.1 General 5/10
5.7.2 Assessment of defects 5/10
6.7.3 Repair of welds 5/10
5.8 Pressure tests 5/18
5.8.1 General 5/18
5.8.2 Basic requirements 5/18
5.8.3 Hydraulic testing 5/19
5.8.4 Pneumatic tests 5/19
5.8.5 ‘Standard’test pressure 5/19
5.8.6 Proof hydrauiic test 5/20
5.8.7 Combined hydraulidpneumatic tests 5/22
5.8.8 Leak testing 5/22
5.8.9 Vessel nameplate 5/22
O BSI 1997
iii
~
S T D m B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 II L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob705L3 T 8 5 I

BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 2, September 1997
page
6.8.10 Final inspection 5/22
0.9 Inspection requirements for cast components 5/22
6.9.1 Examination 5122
6.92 Defects 5/22
5.9.3 Identification and marking 5122
Annexes
A Recommendations for design where loadings and components are
not covered by section 3 A/1
B Recommendations for cylindrical, spherical and conical shells under
combined loadings, including wind and earthquakes BI1
C Requirements for the assessment of vessels subject to fatigue CI1
D Requirements for ferritic steels in bands MO to M4 inclusive for
vessels required to operate below O "C DI1
E Recommendations for welded connections of pressure vessels W1
F An alternative design approach for compensation using the pressure
area method F/1
G Recommendations for methods of calculation of stresses from local
loads, thermal gradients, etc. GI1
H Recommendations for post-weld heat treatment of dissimilar ferritic
steel joints Hl1
J Recommendations for pressure relief protective devices J/1
K Requirements for the derivation of materiai nominal design strengths
for construction category 1and 2 vessels K/1
L Not auOcated U1
M Guidance on safe extenial working pressure for cylindrical sections
outside the circuiarity limits specified in 3.6 Ml1
II N Requirements for vessel design and the provision of information

concerning statutory obligations for the demonstsation of the
continued integrity of pressure vessels throughout their service life NI1
P Recommendations for stainless steel components with higher design
stresses P/1
Q Recommendations for preparation and testing of production control
test plates W1
R Guidance on additional information for flat ends and fiat plates FU1
S Guidance on optional documentation for supply with vessel s/1
T Recommendations for arc welded tube to tubeplate joints TI1
U Guidance on the use of fracture mechanics anaiyses u11
v Requirements for testing and inspection of serially produced
pressure vessels VI1
Aluminium Supplement
Requirements for aluminium and aluminium alloys in the design and
constmction of unñred fusion welded pressure vessels M1
Tables
1.6-1 Purchaser options and features requiring approval by the purchaser 1/7
2.1-1 Material banding Y1
2.1-2 Temperature above which time dependent properties shall be
considered 2/2
2.2-1 Bolting materials for low-temperature 2/3
2.3-1 Design strength values: index of steels 2/4
2*3-2to Design strength values
2.3-12 2/6
2.3-13 Additional materiais that may be used for category 3 construction 2/41
iv
O BSI 1997
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 m L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70514 9 1 1 m
Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
page
3.4-1 Construction categories 315
3.5-1 Values of e/D X lo3 for unpierced domed ends in tem of h$D
and PF 3/10
3.5-2 Thickness of branches 3/19
3.5-3 Design values of t,JTr 3/20
3.5-4 Values of CTJT for figures 3.5-9 to 3.511 when t,jTr = O 3/26
3.6-1 Derivation of Le 3/63
3.6-2 Values for G and N which may be assumed 3/64
3.6-3 E values for ferritic and austenitic steels and aluminium alloys
(Young's modulus) 3/64
3.6-4 Values of (o$E)(dew)2for internal fiat bar Stiffeners 3/70
3.6-5 Values of (@ ( di') ~for)external
~ fiat bar stiffeners 3/71
3.8-1 Recommended design stress values for flange bolting materials 3/76
3.8-2 Bolt root areas 3/78
3.8-3 Recommended surface finish on gasket contact faces for body
flanges and fianges fitted with covers 3/79
3.8-4 Gasket materials and contact facings: gasket factors (m) for
operating conditions and minimum design seating stress (y> 3/88
3.8-5 Values of T, 2, Y and U (factors involving x) 3/90
3.9-1 Values of AC as a function of F, and R for all tubesheets, and Co for
U-tubesheets only 31122
3.9-2 Values of Fifor typical tube joints 31136
4.2-1 Circumference 4/4
4.2-2 Tolerance on depth of domed ends 44
4.4-1 Requirements for post-weld heat treatment of ferritic steel vessels 4/10
*
m 4.4-2 Altemative requirements for post-weld heat treatment of ferritic steel
* vessels 4/11
5.1-1 Inspection stages in the course of which participation by the
Inspecting Authority is mandatory 5/2
5.1-2 other principal stages of inspection 5/3
5.2-1 Tensile test temperature 5/3
5.2-2 Weld procedure tests for butt welds in 9 % Ni steel 514
5.6-1 Thickness limits for examination of internal flaws 516
5.7-1 Radiographic acceptance levels 5/11
5.7-2 Ultrasonic acceptance levels applicable to ferritic steels and weld
metais in the thickness range 7 mm to 100 mm inclusive 5/12
6.7-3 Visual and crack detection acceptance level 5/14
5.7-4 Radiographic acceptance levels (reassessment of category 2
construction) 5117
5.7-5 ultrasonic acceptance levels (reassessment of category 2
construction) 5117
A. 1 Ciassification of stresses for some typical cases a16
c.1 Details of fatigue design curves c16
c.2 Classification of weld details c18
c.3 Values of M I , M2 and M3 c117
c.4 Weld defect acceptance levels c119
c.5 Fatigue test factor F c119
D.l Impact requirements for plates, forgings, castings and tubes d16
D.2 Design reference temperatwe d17
D.3 Design reference temperature for heat exchanger tubes D/7
G.1 Values of Ki mdK2 GI11
6.2 Design factors Ki and& g170

=
~~ ~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 Lb2LibbS Ob70515 8 5 8
Page
6.3 Design factors K3 and f i and allowable tangential shearing stresses gi71
6.4 Design factor K6 g172
6.6 Values of constants C4,C5,K5,K7 and& g174
6.6 Values of Klo andKi1 g176
6.7 Circumferential stress factor Cl g186
6.8 Bending stress factor C2 g186
G.9 Meridional stress factor C3 . g187
6.10 Branch bendmg stress factor C4 g157
H. 1 Classification of materials w2
P.1 Design strength d u e s p11
T.1 Tube to tubesheet joints: essential tests and the suitability of joint
spes for optional tests T/7
2.3-1 Design strength values: aluminium and aluminium alloys AA/2
6.7-1 Acceptance levels AA/9
6.8-1 Principal stages of inspection M 11
Figures
1.6-1 Relationship of thickness definitions 119
3.6-1 Domed ends 3/7
3.6-2 Design curves for unpierced domed ends 3/9
3.6-3 Geometry of coneícylinder intersection without knuckle: large end 3/12
3.6-4 Values of coefficient B for conelcylinder intersection without knuckle 3/13
3.6-6 Geometry of coneícylinder intersection with knuckle: large end 3/14
3.6-6 Geometry of condeylinder intersection: small end 3/14
3.6-7 Offset cone 3/15
3.6-8 Positions of openings or nozzles in dished ends 3/18
3.6-9 Design curves for protruding nozzles in spherical vessels (dD< 0.5)
and for protx-uding nozzles in cylindrical and conical vessels
(dD< 'h) 3/21
3.6-10 Design curves for flush nozzles in spherical shells (dD< 0.5) and for
flush nozzles in conical shells (dD< %) 3/23
3.6-11 Design curves for flush nozzles in cylindrical shells (O < dD < 0.3) 3/25
3-6-12 Design curves for flush nozzles in cylindrical shells (0.2 < dD 5 1.0) 3/27
3.6-13 Nozzle in a conical shell 3/29
3.6-14 Notation applicable to spheres 3/29
I 3.6-16a Notation applicable to oblique nozzles in spheres 3/29
I 3.6-17 Notation applicable to spheres 3/30
I 3.6-18 Notation applicable to cylinders 3/30
3.6-19 Notation appiicable to cylinders 3/30
3.6-20 Notation applicable to cylinders 3/30
3.6-21 Notation applicable to cylinders 3/30
3.6-22 Promdingrim 3/30
3.6-23 Flush rim 3/30
3.6-24 Arrangement factor g 3/31
3-6-26 Branch compensation 3/32
3.6-26 Notation applicable to spheres and cylinders 3/33
vi O BSI 1997
W e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Page
3.5-29 Modified flush branch compensation 3/34
3.5-30 Modified protruding branch compensation 3/35
3.5-31 Qpical welded flat ends and covers 3/38
3.5-32 m i c a l non-welded flat ends and covers 3/39
3.5-33 Flat unstayed heads design curves 3/41
3.5-34 Value of coefficient Z for noncircular fiat heads 3/42
3.5-35 Qpical stays: areas supported by stays 3/44
3.5-36 Spherically domed and bolted end 3/45
3.6-1 Stiffening rings for cylindrical vessels subject to external pressure 3/50
3.6-2 Design curves: calculation of minimum cylindrical shell thickness
(values of n for which p , is a minimum) 3/51
3.6-3 Values of E for use with equation (3.12) 3/52
3.6-4 Curves for evaluation of allowable pressure p 3/53
3.6-5 Schematic representation of stiffeners 3/57
3.6-6 Design of stiffeners 3/60
3.6-7 Values of ß for use with equation (3.13) 3/66
3.6-8 Conical sections: typical Meners 3/67
3.8-1 Loose keyed flange with mating components 3/84
3.8-2 Forces and lever anns on loose keyed flange 3/84
3.8-3 Location of gasket load reaction 3/90
3.8-4 Values of 1: U, YandZ 3/99
3.8-5 Values of F (integral method factors) 3/100
3.8-6 Values of V (integral method factors) 3/100
3.8-7 Values of FL (loose hub flange factors) 3/101
3.8-8 Values of VL (loose hub flange factors) 3/101
3.8-9 Values off (hub stress correction factors) 3/101
3.8-10 Ungasketed, seal-welded-type flanges 3/102
3.8-11 Contact face between loose and stub flanges in a lap joint where
diametersA2 andB2 are defined by the same component 3/102
3.9-1 Design curves: determination of C, 3/122
3.9-2 Design curves: determination of F, 31123
3.9-3 Design curves: determination of F, 31124
3.9-4 Design curves: determination of Fi 3/125
3.9-5 Design curves: determination of 4 3/126
3.9-6 Qpical clamped and simply supported configurations for floating
head or U-tubesheets 3/127
3.9-7 Characteristic for perforated thin plates, e e 2P 3/128
3.9-8 Characteristic for perforated thick plate, e? 2F 3/129
3.9-9 Tubesheet: determination of F, 31131
3.9-10 lùbesheet: determination of H for Xa > 4.0 3/132
3.9-11 lùbesheet: determination of H for Xa e 4.0 3433
3.9-12 Determination of the buckling length Lk 31136
3.10-1 Butt welds in plates of unequal thickness 3441
3.10-2 Butt welds with offset of median lines 3/142
3.11-1 Some acceptable types of jacketed vessels 31143
3.11-2 Qpical blocking ring and sealer ring construction 3/143
5.6-1 Iìlustration of welded joints for nondestructive testing 5/8
~
O BSI 1997 vii

BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997
Page
6.7-1 P A a l nondestructive testing (NDT) category 2 constructions 5/13
A. 1 Stress categories and limits of stress intensity A/5
A.2 Curve for evaluation of A A,.
B. 1 Stresses in a cylindrical shell under combined loading Wd
B.2 Stresses in a spherical shell under combined loading B/4
B.3 Stresses in a conical shell under combined loading B/5
c.1 Illusbtion of fluctuating stsess c/1
c.2 Example of pressure vessel fatigue loading cycle and determination
of stress ranges CI4
c.3 Fatigue design S-N curves for weld details applicable to ferritic
steels up to and including 350 OC, austenitic stainless steels up to and
including 430 "C and aluminium alloys up to and including 100 "C c/5
c.4 Fatigue design S-N curves for bolting applicable to ferritic steels up
to and including 350 O C , austenitic stainless steels up to and
including 430 "C and duminium alloys up to and including 100 "C Cl5
C.6 interaction criteria for assessing slag inclusions C/7
C.6 Deviations from design shape at seam welds CD1
c.7 Weld toe dressing CR2
D.l Permissible design reference temperature/reference
thicknesdmakrid impact test temperature relationships for
aswelded components DE
D.2 Permissible design reference temperature/reference
thicknesdmaterial impact test temperature relationships for
post-weld heat-treated components D/3
D.3 Reference thickness: slip-on and plate flanges, tubeplates and flat
ends D/4
D.4 Reference thickness: weld neck flanges, tubeplates and fiat ends D/5
D.6 Location of Charpy V-notch specimens in weld metal (aswelded
Vessels') D/8
D.6 Location of Charpy V-notch specimens in weld metal (stress relieved
vessels) D/8
D.7 Location of Charpy V-notch specimens in heat affected zone D/8
D.8 Example of detail for avoidance of severe thermal gradients DAO
D.9 Examples of details for attaching non-critical components to
pressure shell DAO
E.l m i c a l weld preparations for butt welds using the manud metal-arc
process Ex?
E.2 m i c a l weld preparations for circumferential welds where the
second side is inaccessible for welding E/3
E.3 ?s.pid weld preparations for butt welds using the submerged arc
welding process E/5
E.4 'spicai weld preparations for butt welds using the manual inert gas
arc welding for austenitic stainless and heat resisting steels only W6
E.6 ?slpicai weld details for circumferential lap joints E/7
E.6 m i c d full penetration joint preparations for one-sided welding only:
aluminium and its alloys W8
E.7 ?srpicai full penetration joint preparations for two-sided welding only:
duminium and its alloys E%
E.8 'spical full penetration joint preparations for one-sided weldmg with
temporary backing or permanent backing: duminium and its alloys WlO
E.9 Standard weld details W14
Mu O BSI 1997
~
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL L777 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob705L8 5b7
page
E.lOa) Limitations on geometry of fillet weld applied to the edge or a part W15
E.lOb) Qansverse and longitudinal sections of branch connections W15
E.ll Weld details for set-in branches W16
E.12 Set-on branches W17
E.15 Set-on branches w20
E.16 Set-on branches EX21
E.17 Set-on branches w22
E.18 Set-on branches Ex3
E.19 Set-in branches: fillet welded connections E/24
E.20 Set-in branches: partial penetration butt welded connections m5
E.21 Set-in branches: full p e n e m o n connections EX26
E.22 Set-in branches: full penetration connections m7
E.23 Set-in branches: full penetration connections with asymmetrical butt
joints EY28
E.24 Set-in branches: full penetration C O M ~ C ~ ~ Owelded
~S from one side
OdY W29
E.25 Forged branch connections EA30
E.26 Forged branch connections W31
E.27 Set-on branches with added compensation rings W32
E.28 Set-in branches with added compensation rings w33
* E.29 Set-in branches with added compensation rings E/34
m w35
* E.30 Set-in branches with added compensation rings
E.31 Set-in branches with added compensation rings E66
E.32 Studded connections €937
E.33 Socket welded and screwed connections EA39
E.34 Flanges W40
E.35 Flanges W41
E.36 Flanges w43
E.37 Jacketed vessels: t y p i d vesselí'blockjng ring attachments W44
E.38 Jacketed vessels: typical blocking rindjacket attachments W44
E.39 Jacketed vessels: typical sealer rings W46
E.40 Jacketed vessels: typical through connections W47
E.41 Flat ends and covers W47
E.42 'Itibeplate to shell connections: accessible for welding on both sides
of the shell W50
E.43 Tubeplate to shell connections: accessible for welding from outside
of shell only W51
E.44 Tubeplate to shell connections: accessible for welding on both sides
of shell w52
E.45 Tubeplate to shell connections EY53
E.46 Tubeplate to shell connections w55
E.47 Tubeplate to shell connections w57
F.1 Maximum branch to body thickness ratio F/3
F.2 Reinforcement of openings and branches F/4
F.3 Reinforcement of non-radial branches F/l 1
O BSI 1997 ix
~ ~ ~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 PI Lb2LibbS Ob70519 LIT3 W

BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997
Page
6.1 Restriction on vessellattachment geometry gi3
6.2 Vessel with central radial load g14
6.3 Vessel with radial load out of centre g14
6.4 Graph for finding equivalent length Le g15
6.6
6.6
Y(J
Chart for finding 64 - -
cylindrical shells with load: circumferential moment per
g16
miliimetre width g17

6.7 Cylindrical shells with radial load: longitudinal moment per
millimetre width g18
6.8 Cylindrical shells with radial load: circumferential membrane force
per millimetre width g19
6.9 Cylindrical shells with radial load: longitudinal membrane force per
millimetre width g110
6.10 Circumferential bending moment due to a radial line load variation
round circumference g112
6.11 Longitudid moment from radial line load variation round
circumference g113
6.12 Circumferential membrane force from raùial line load variation
round circumference g114
6.13 Longitudinal membrane force from radial line load variation round
circumference g115
6.14 Circumferential bending moment due to a radial line load variation
along cylinder GI17
6.10 Longitudinal moment due to a raàial line load variation along
cylinder g118
6.16 Circumferential membrane force due to a radial line load variation
along cylinder g119
6.17 Longitudinal membrane force due to a radial line load variation
along cylinder g120
6.18 Maximum radial deflection of a cyhdrical shell subjected to a radial
load W uniformly distributed over a square 2C X 2C Gí21
6.19 Maximum radial deflection of a cylindrical shell subjected to a radial
load W uniformly distributed over a square 2C X 2C Gf22
6.20 Graphs for finding the square 2C1 X 2C1 equivalent to a rectangular
loading area2Cx X 2C+ g123
6.21 Circumferential moment g126
6.22 Longitudinal moment GE6
6.23 Sector &esses g130
6.24 Maximum stresses at a nozzle or attachment on a cylindrical shell g131
6.26 Chart for finding s and u g139
6.26 Spherical shell subjected to a radial load g140
6.27 Deflections of a spherical shell subjected to a radial load W g140
6.28 Moments and membrane forces in a spherical shell subjected to a
radial load w g141
6.29 Spherical shell subjected to an external moment g142
6.30 Deflections of a spherical shell subjected to an external moment M g142
6.31 Moments and membrane forces in a spherical shell subjected to an
external moment M g143
6.32 Maximum stress in sphere for intend pressure (flush nozzles) g148
6.33 Maximum stress in sphere for internal pressure (protruding nozzles) g148
X O BSI 1997
Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
pc
page
6.34 Maximum stress in sphere for thrust loading (flush nozzles) 6/49
6.36 Maximum stress in sphere for thrust loading (protruding nozzles) 6/49
6.36 M u m stress in sphere for moment loading (flush nozzles) 6/50
6.37 Maximum stress in sphere for moment loading (protruding nozzles) 6/50
6.38 Maximum stress in sphere for shear loading (flush nozzles) 6/51
6.39 M u m stress in sphere for shear loading (protruding nozzles) 6/51
G.40 Shakedown d u e s for pressure loading (flush nozzle) 6/52
6.41 Shakedown values for pressure loading (protruding nozzle) 6/53
6.42 Shakedown Aues for thrust and moment loadings (flush nozzle) 6/53
6.43 Shakedown dues for thrust and moment loadings (protruding
nozzle) 6/54
6.44 Shakedown values for thrust and moment loadings (flush nozzle) 6/54
6.46 Shakedown vaiues for thrust and moment loadings (protruding
nozzle) 6/55
6.46 Shakedown d u e s for thrust and moment loadings (flush nozzle) G/55
6.47 Shakedown dues for thrust and moment loadings (protruding
nozzle) 6/56
6.48 Qpicai brackets 6/59
6.49 Qpicai reinforcing plates on cylindrical shells G/60
6.60 mid ring support 6/62
6.61 'i)pical steelwork under ring support 6/62
6-62 Leg supports for veríical vessels 6/62
6.63 ?5.picai ring girder g163
6.64 Qpicaì supports for horizontal vessels 6/65
6.66 Cylinàricai shell acting as beam over supports 6/67
6.66 Factor for bending moment at m i d q a n 6/68
6.67 Factors for bending moment at supports 6/69
6.68 Portion of shell ineffective against longitudinal bending 6/70
G.69 Ciumferenüai bending moment diagrams 6/72
G.60 Saddle supports 6/73
6.61 Qpicai ring Meners 6/75
6.62 Nozzle geometxy 6/79
6.63 "kadent fluid and metal tempemimes 6/80
6.64 Inner surface thermal stress factors Ki and kl 6/81
6.66 ûuter surface thermal stress factorsK2 and 6/82
6.66 M m temperature factors Kb and KS 6/83
J. 1 Qpicai pressure term relationships Jn
T. 1 Tube to t u b e p k connections,tube end fusion t11
T.2 Tube to tubeplate connections,c a s t e W weld TB
T.3 Tube to t u b e p k connections,plain fillet weld Tß
T.4 Tube to tubeplate connections,front face bore fillet weld TA
T.6 Tube to tubeplate connections,groove plus filiet weld t14
T.6 Tube to tubeplate connections,groove weld T/5
T.7 nibe to t u b e p b connections,back face inset bore weld T/6
T.8 - connections, back face stub bore weld
Tube to tube~late T/7
Index 1
List of references m
COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards xi

BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 5, January 1998
Summary of pages
The following table identiñes for each page of the standard the issue which forms the authorized veision of the
document when assembled to include the originaì pages and amendments identiñed on the inside &ont page.
Page no. Issue Page no. Issue Page no. Issue Page no. Issue
h n t cover 5 2/17 1 3/20 1 3166 1
inside &ont cover 5 2/18 1 3/21 1 3167 1
i 1 2/19 2 3/22 1 3/68 1
ii 1 2/20 1 3/23 2 3169 1
iii 1 2/21 1 3/24 1 3/70 1
iv 2 2/22 1 3/25 1 3/71 1
V 1 2/23 1 3/26 1 3/72 1
vi 2 2/24 2 3/27 1 3/73 1
vii 1 2/25 1 3/28 2 3/74 1
wi 1 2/26 1 3/29 2 3R5 2
ix 1 2/27 2 3/30 2 3/76 2
X 1 2/28 1 3/31 2 3/77 1
xi 1 2/29 1 3/32 1 3/78 2
xii 5 2/30 1 3/33 1 3/79 2
xiü 4 2/31 3 3/34 1 3/80 2
xiv 4 2/32 1 3/35 1 3/81 2
xv 2 2/33 1 3/36 3 3/82 1
wi 2 2/34 1 3/37 3 3/83 2
Smtwn 1 2/35 2 3/38 3 3/84 1
2/36 1 3/39 3 3/85 1
2/37 1 3/40 3 3/86 1
2/38 1 3/41 2 3/87 2
1/4 2/39 1 3/42 1 3/88 2
ll5 2/40 1 3/43 2 3/89 1
2/41 3 3/44 1 3/90 1
2/42 blank 3/45 1 3/91 1
Secth3 3/46 1 3/92 1
31 1 3/47 1 3/93 1
3/2 1 3/48 2 3/94 1
3/3 2 3/49 1 3/95 1
2 3/4 2 3/50 1 3/96 1
2/2 1 35 2 3/51 2 3/97 1
243 1 3/6 1 3/52 1 3/98 1
2/4 1 3/7 3 3/53 1 3/99 1
2/5 1 3/8 1 3/54 2 31100 1
2/6 1 3/9 1 3/55 1 31101 1
2f7 1 3/10 1 3/56 1 31102 1
2/8 1 3/11 3 3/57 1 31103 1
229 1 3/12 2 3/58 1 31104 1
2/10 1 3/13 1 3/59 1 31105 1
2/11 1 3/14 2 3/60 1 31106 1
2/12 1 3/15 2 3/61 1 Y107 2
2/13 1 3/16 2 3/62 1 3/108 1
2/14 1 3/17 2 3/63 1 3/109 2
2/15 1 3/18 1 3/64 1 3410 1
2/16 1 3/19 1 3/65 2 w111 1
xii
COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards o BSI 1998
h e 4, odober 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
P a e no. issue Page no. I issue Page no. Issue Page no. iswe
3/112 1 &tÙm 5 c/12 1 En4 1
3/113 2 5/4 1 C/13 1 En5 1
3/114 1 5/5 1 CA4 1 En6 1
3/115 1 5/6 1 CA5 2 En7 1
3/116 3 5/7 2 CI16 2 En8 1
Y117 2 5/8 2 C/17 2 En9 1
3/118 1 5A3 1 C/18 2 EßO 1
3/119 1 5/10 1 c/19 2 Eß1 1
3/120 1 5/11 1 CI20 1 Eß2 1
3/121 1 5/12 1 CI21 2 Eß3 1
3/l22 2 5/13 1 CI22 2 EB4 1
3/123 1 5/14 1 C/23 1 E55 1
3/13 1 5/15 1 C124 blank Eß6 1
3A25 1 5/16 1 Annex D Eß7 1
3A26 1 5/17 1 D/1 2 E/38 1
3/127 1 5/18 1 DI2 2 El39 1
3128 1 5/19 2 Dß 2 W40 1
Y129 1 5/20 1 D/4 1 W41 1
W130 2 5/21 1 D/5 1 W42 1
3/131 1 5/22 1 D/6 1 W43 1
W132 1 Annex A Df7 3 W44 1
3/13 1 A/1 Dn-A 1 W45 1
3/12 1 A/1 Df7-B blank El46 1
3/135 2 AL3 DA 1 w47 1
3/136 1 N4 Dl9 1 33/48 2
31137 1 AA5 DAO Il w49 2
3/138 2 A/6 Annex E EX50 1
3/139 1 Ai7 E4 1 E61 1
3/14 2 A/8 E/2 1 m 2 1
3/141 2 m 1 E63 1
3/142 2 w4 1 E/54 1
3/143 2 E/5 1 E/55 1
3/144 1 E76 1 E/56 1
smtion 4 E37 1 m 7 1
4/1 1 E% 1 EX58 blank
a 2 BI6 blank El9 1 AnneCr:F
943 1 Annex C w10 1 F/1 1
444 1 CI1 2 w11 1 FI2 1
4/5 2 C/1-A 1 w12 2 Fß 2
4/6 1 C/1-B blank W13 1 FI4 1
4r7 2 C/2 2 W14 1 F/5 1
4/8 1 Cß 2 W15 1 FI6 1
4/9 1 c/4 1 W16 1 Ff7 1
4/10 1 C/5 1 W17 1 FA? 2
4/11 1 C/6 2 W18 1 Fl9 2
4/12 blank Cf7 2 w19 1 FI10 1
ssct.ion 5 C/8 1 En0 1 F/11 1
5/1 Il Cl9 1 En1 1 FI12 2
5/2
5ß II CAO
c/11
1
1
En2
En3
1
1
F/13
F/14
1
1
OBSI Standards
COPYRIGHT British 1997 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards xiii
BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 4, January 199û
Page no. I Issue Page no. issue Page no. I issue

Annex G GI49 1 JI2 Il
GI1 2 GI50 1 Annex K
GI2 1 GI51 1 KI1 Il
Gß 1 GI52 1 K/2 Il
GI4 1 GI53 1 An- L
GI5
GI6
Gi7
1
1
1
GI54
GI65
GI56 2
1
1 M
Annex M
Ib,,
G/8 1 GI57 1 Ml1
GI9 1 GI58 1 w
GI10 1 GA% 1 V
GI11 1 GI60 1 VI
GI12 1 GI61 1 h i d e back cover
GI13 1 GI62 1 Annex P Back cover
GI14 3 GI63 1 PI1 11
GI15 1 GI64 2 PI2 I bìank
GI16 1 GI65 1 A n mQ
GI17 1 GI66 3 w1 11
GI18 1 GI67 1 w Il
GI19 1 GI@ 1 Annerr:R
GE0 1 GI69 1 W1 Il
GI21 1 GffO 2 R/2 I blank
v
GI22 1 GI71 4 Annex S
GE3 1 GR2 2
GE4 1 Gi72-A 1
GI25 1 GîBB blank Annex T
GI26 1 Gi73 1 TI1
GE7 1 GI74 2 TI2
GE8 1 Gîi5 1 TB
GE9 1 G/76 1 TI4
G130 2 GR7 1 TI5
GB1 1 Gîi8 1 TI6
GB2 1 Gi79 1 Ti7
G/33 1 GI80 1 TI8 blank
GB4 1 GI81 1
GI36 1 GI82 1
6/36 1 G/83 1
GB7 1 GM 1 Annex V
GA8 1 GI85 1 VI1 Il
Gß9 1 GI86 1
GI40 1 GA7 1
GI41 1 GI88 1 M 1 1
GI42 1 GI89 1 AA/2 1
GI43 1 GM blank AA/3 1
GI44 1 Annex H M4 1
GI46
GI46
GI47
1
1
1
/1
Annex J
AAl5
M 6
AAf?
1
2
2
Gl4û 1 JI1 Il AA/8 2
xiv
COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards OBSI 1998
Foreword
This British Standard has been prepared by Technical Committee F'VE/l. It is a new
edition of the 1994 version and incorporates all technical changes up to and including
Amendment No. 4 (September 1996) associated with that version.
This edition has been published, for the first time, using an electronic process which
has made it necessary to amend certain aspects of the table and figwe numbering.
The table and figure numbers are now derived from the number of the main clause in
which they are cited, not from subclause or sub-subclause numbers. This will reduce
the opportunity for error in future updating.
Despite the various amendments that have been made to this standard since it was
first published in 1976, some of the requirements can still be traced back to the
proposals in ISO/DIS 2694 Pressure vessels drafted by Technical Committee 11 of the
International Organization for S t a n d a r u i o n @O) which were taken into account in
preparing the original edition.
BS 5500, which covers pressure vessels manufactured from carbon, ferritic doy,
austenitic steels and aluminium, replaced the following standards
Fusion welded pressure vessels for general purposes

BS 1500 Part 1 Carbon and low &y steels
Part 3 Aluminium
Fusion welded pressure vessels for use in the chemkd, petroleum and
allied industries
BS 1515 Part 1 Carbon and ferritic &y steels
Part 2 Austenitic stainkss steel
Previous editions have stated the intention of integrating into one British Standard
the requirements for design, manufacture, testing and inspection of fusion welded
pressure vessels. It is intended to keep under review the question of publishing
'
appropriate supplements covering other types of pressure vessels.
I If there is s a c i e n t demand from industry) the standard will be extended to cover
I other non-ferrous materials like nickel and titanium.
The requirements of this standard vary considerably depending upon the thickness
and type of material to be used. When this combination is such as will permit
satisfactory fabrication by relatively straightforward processes, spot nondestructive
testing is permitted without any penalty in design thickness; in certain cases visud
inspection only is permitted with an appropriate penalty on design thickness.
The strengths that may be assumed for design purposes of materials covered by
current British Standards are individually specified in table 2.3-1.
Design strengths in the creep range are given for a range of design lifetimes that may
be extended, on expiry) on the basis of periodic 'fitness-forcontinued-servicereviews'
based on inspection and consideration of actual load-temperature history. This
approach recognizes the limitations inherent in any simple design method for vessels
operating in the creep range and also provides a flexible basis that may be used in
cases where the design strength values which have been derived from IS0 data, are
significantly different from those used with success in the past. Specific requirements
for these reviews are not given in this standard
Recommendations covering aspects requiring further consideration in particdar cases
are given in the mexes. The British Standards Institution will be pleased to receive
constructive proposals based on experience or research that may lead to
improvements in these annexes.
O BSI 1997
xv
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1777 W l b 2 q b b 7 Ob70525 7 T 7
Reference is made in the text to a number of standards which have been withdrawn.
I Such standards are identified in the list of references (see page II). Consideration is
currently being given to whether replacement standards are available or are being
developed, for example, in the European programne and to the implications for
BS 5500 of such replacement standards. When a decision is made about any
replacement standards,these will be identified by the issue of an amendment.
A s with the previous editions, it is intended to keep this standard up to date by the
issue from time to time of replacement pages, or additional pages where necessary.
Each replacement or added page will carry an issue number (with date) indicating its
relationship to the original standard, the pages of which are marked ‘Issue 1’.
For example
Issue 1will indicate an original page or one that has been added to the original
standard and has not been amended since insertion;
Issue 2 wiil indicate a first amendment of either an original page or an added page;
issue 3 will indicate a second amendment of either an onginai page or an added
page.
Sidelining on replacement pages will indicate that changes of technical or reference
significance have been made at that point.
It should be noted that the effective date of amendment to this edition is later than
the publication date to allow users time to amend their own working procedures and
documentation.
The following figures are reproduced by courtesy of the American Welding Research
council.
Figure G.32 was originally published as figure 2 on page 21 of WRC Bulletin 90
September 1963
September 1963
Figure G.34 was origndy published as figure 7 on page 24 of WRC Bulletin 90
September 1963
Figure G.35 was origmaliy published as figure 8 on page 24 of WRC Bulletin 90
September 1963
Figure G.36 was origirdy published as figure 9 on page 25 of WRC Bulletin 90
September 1963
Figure G.37 was orighdiy published as figure 10 on page 25 of WRC Bulletin 90
September 1963
Figure G.38 was originally published as figure 11on page 26 of WRC Bulletin 90
September 1963
September 1963
Figures G.40 to G.47 are reproduced by courtesy of the International Jourmal of
So1id.s ancl Stmcctures, 1967.
This standard is included in the list of ‘Standards Significant to Health and Safety at
Work’ published by the UK Health and Safety Executive and is also referred to in
HSE guidance publications.
Compliance with a British Standard does not of itself confer immunity
from legal obligations.
xvi
O ES1 1997
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 3 6 2 4 b b 9 Ob7052b b 3 3
Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Section 1. General
1.1 scope b) Low pressure, above ground storage tanks which

have a single vertical axis of revolution designed for
1.1.1 This British standard specifies requirements for the storage of liquids at a pressure not
the design, construction, inspection, testing and exceeding 1 bar1).
verification of compliance of unfired fusion welded
pressure vessels. The materiais of construction are e) Vessels in which the stresses calculated in
specified in section 2. The term 'pressure vessel' as accordance with the equations given in section 3 are
used in this standard includes branches up to the point less than 10 % of the design stress permitted by
of connection to the connecting piping by bolting, section 3.
screwing or welding, and supports, brackets or other d) Strip wound compound or other special designs
attachments directly welded to the pressure containing of vessels which may be appropriate for very high
shell. The term 'unñred' excludes vessels that are pressures.
subject to direct generated heat or fiame impingement e) ?i.ansport vessels, i.e. vessels used for transport of
from a fired process. It does not exclude vessels contents under pressure.
subject to electrical heating or heated process streams. f) Vessels for specific applications which are covered
1.1.2 In addition to the defïnitive requirements this by standards listed in the BSI Catdogue.
standard also requires the items detailed in 1.5 to be NOTE. The titles of the publications referred to in this standard
documented. For compliance with this standard, both are listed on the last page.
the definitive requirements and the documented items 1.1.5 This standard does not address the nature or
have to be satisfied.
consequences of a fire in the vicinity of a pressure
1.1.3 This standard applies only to pressure vessels vessel. Any consideration of the effect of a fire hazard
manufactured under the survey of a competent in the design of a pressure vessel would have to be
engineering Inspecting Authority or Organization. The under the direction of the plant owner or his
intent of this requirement is regarded as satisfied responsible agent such as the plant architedengineer,
where inspection is carried out by competent with analysis of the consequences of a fire aciJacent to
personnel of a separate engineering inspection a pressure vessel being undertaken in accordance with
department maintained by the purchaser of the vessel. a comprehensive specification of the fire conditions,
An inspection deparhnent maintained by the impingement parameters, analytical methods and
manufacturer does not satisfy this requirement except: assessment criteria
a) that specific responsibilities may be delegated at
the discretion of the Inspecting Authority or
Organization; or
1.2 Interpretation
b) in the case of vessels for the mufacturer's own If any ambiguity be found or doubt arise as to the
use and not for resale. meaning or effect of any part of this standard or as to
whether an- ought to be done or omitted to be
This standard applies only to vessels made by
manufacturers who can saüsfy the Inspecting Authority done in order that this standard should be complied
or Organization that they are competent and suitably with in full,the question shall be referred to the
Pressure Vessels k h n i c a l Committee (PvE/l) of the
equipped to fulñl the appropriate requirements of this
standard British Standards Institution, whose interpretation of
the requirements of this standard upon the matter at
The requirements for testjng and inspecting senally issue shall be given free of charge and shall be final
manufactured pressure vessels are given in annexV. In and conclusive. Parties adopting this standard for the
all other respects the appropriate requirements in the purposes of any contract shall be deemed to adopt this
specification apply provision unless they expressly exclude it or else
Glass lined steel vessels require special design import an arbitration provision in terms extending to
considerations subject to the limits imposed by the interpretation of this standard However, this provision
method of construction which should have the is limited to questions of interpretation and does not
agreement of the Inspecting Authority. confer upon the committee any power, duty or
1.1.4 This standard does not cover the following. authority to adJudicate upon the contractual rights or
a) Storage tanks designed for the storage of liquids duties of any person under a contract except in so far
at near atmospheric pressures, i.e. where the as they may necessarily be affected by the
pressure additional to that due to the hydrostatic interpretation arrived at by the committee.
head does not exceed 140 mbarl) above or 6 mbar
below atmospheric pressure in accordance with
such standards as BS 799, BS 2594, BS 2654, BS 7777.
' ) 1 mbar = lo2 N/m2 = 100 Pa.

1 bar = IO5 N/m2 = 0.1 N/mm2 = 100 kPa
O BSI
COPYRIGHT British 1997
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards 1/1
~ ~
~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70527 5 7 T 9
BS 5500 : 1997 h e 2, September 1997 Section 1
Findings or ruiings of the committee upon all Where the purchaser elects to perform the design
enquiries, including matters of interpretation, which are function for the vessel, the purchaser shall be
of sufficient importance that both enquiries and replies responsible for maintahhg a complete design dossier
be made public as soon as possible will be published for the vessel (see 1.6.1) and for ensuring that all the
in an enquiry reply form for inclusion in the information contained in it, or agreed modifications to
BS 5500 ring binder as Enquiry Cases. Their availability it, comply with this standat-$ the purchaser shall also
will be notified in BSI News. be responsible for the accuracy of all design
After t a h g into account any public comment thereon, calculations for the vessel.
Enquiry Cases may be incorporated, as appropriate, 1.4.2 Responsibilities of the manufacturer
into the standard as amendments which will form part
of the next convenient annual updating. The manufacturer shall be responsible for the
completeness and accuracy of all design calculations
and for compliance with all applicable requirements of
1.3 Definitions this standard for the whole vessel. During fabrication,
For the purposes of this British Standard the following unexpected factors may arise which justify deviations
definitions apply. from the specified requirements but which do not
affect the safety as intended by this standard. Such
1.3.1 purchaser deviations shall be submitted to the purchaser for
The organization or individual who buys the finished approval and shall be recorded in accordance
pressure vessel for its own use or as an agent for the with 1.6.2.2e.
owner. Where the Inspecting Authority is not nominated by
1.3.2 manufacturer the purchaser, the manufacturer shall appoint an
Inspecting Authority. The manufacturer shall be
The organization that designs, constructs and tests the responsible for ensuring that the Inspecting Authority
pressure vessel in accordance with the purchaser's is provided with any information the manufacturer is
order. The design function may be camied out by the required to supply, as specified in this standard.
purchaser or his agent, independently from the
organization that constructs and tests the vessel "he organization which discharges the manufacturer's
(see 1.4.2). responsibilities for construction and testing shall
assume overall responsibility for cornpliance with this
1.3.3 Inspecting Authority standard during all related activities including part
The body or organization that verifies that the vessel manufacture and subsequent fabrication to completion
has been designed, constructed and tested in at works andor site. It shall satisfy the Inspecting
accordance with this standard. Authority, as necessas: under the general provisions
of 1.1that it is competent to ensure by appropriate
1.3.4 Regulating Authority contsol or surveillance of such activities, whether
The authority in the country of installation that is carried out by itself or by subcontractors, that all the
legally charged with the enforcement of the relevant requirements of this standard are met.
requirements of the law and regulations of that country Examinations carried out by the Inspecting Authority
relating to pressure vessels. do not absolve the manufacturer from his
responsibility for compliance with the applicable
1.4 Responsibilities requirements of this standard
Where the purchaser elects to perform the design
1.4.1 Responsibilities of the purchaser function for the vessel, the manufacturer shall be
The purchaser shall be responsible for furnishing the responsible for ensuring that all the design information
manufacturer and the Inspecting Authority with the he requires to construct and test the vessel is provided
information required by 1.6.1. by the purchaser and for ensuring that all construction
Where the Inspecting Authority is nominated by the and testing is carried out in compliance with this
purchaser, the purchaser shall be responsible for standard. The manufacturer shall also be responsible
ensuring that any information which the manufacturer for the accuracy of any information he provides to
is required to supply, as specified in this standard, is enable the purchaser to fulñl the design function.
made available to the Inspecting Authority.
Where necessary, it shall be the responsibility of the
purchaser to ensure that the Inspecting Authority is
acceptable to the Regulating Authority.
l/2
COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards O BSI 1997
~ ~~ ~~ ~
~ ~ ~~~~ ~ ~~ ~~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 1 6 2 4 b b 9 Ob70528 40b m

Mon1 Issue 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
1.4.3 Responsibilities of the Inspecting Where some of the activities covered by this standard
Authority are performed under the surveillance of a second
The Inspecting Authority shall be responsible for Inspecting Authoriu each Inspecting Authority shall
verifyjng: attach a statement to Form X, countersigned as
required thereon, confirming which part of the total
a) that all parts of the vessel have been designed in works has been carried out under its survejilance.
accordance with the requirements of this standard as
are applicable for the conditions specified by the The countersigned Certificate and its attachments (if
purchaser according to 1.6.1; any) shall be furnished to the purchaser with a copy of
the Regulating Authority if required.
b) that the vessel has been constructed and tested in
accordance with this standard and any additional Where the purchaser or his appointed design I
requirements in respect of purchaser options consultantícontractor elects to perform the design I
covered by this standard (see table 1.51). function for the vessel, the purchaser or his appointed I
design consultantícontractor shall complete the section I
1.4.4 Certificate of Compliance of Form X which certifies that the design of the vessel I
On completion of the vessel the manufacturer shall complies with this standard. I
issue Form X to c e m that the vessel has been NOTE. Form X may be reproduced as hard copy or by electronic
designed, constmcted and tested in every respect in means provided that such reproductions are fair copies of the
accordance with this standard and with any additional original. All copies should state ‘Reproduced from BS 5500’ with a
reference to the current issue.
requirements in respect of purchaser’s options covered
by this standard. Form X shall be countersigned by the
Inspecting Authority as required.
O BSI 1997
S T D * B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 7 7 W L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70527 3 4 2 I
BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 2, September 1997 Section 1
Form X Certificate of Compliance
Vessel description m e ..................................................

Approx. overall dimensions......................................................................
Approved drawing number(s) ..................................................................
..........................................................
Year of manufacture ...................... Relevant BS 5500 edition including Amd. No..............................................

Purchaser ......................................... Purchaser's serial no. ......................................................................................
Manufacture Name of manufacturer ..............................................................................

Manufacturer's serial number ................................. ........................... (see note 1)
Name of Design Organization (if not above manufacturer) ................................................................................
Name of inspecting Authority....................................................................................................................................
Design Design conditions of Design Design temp. Construction Corrosion

principal components pressure category allowance
(see notes 2 and 3) bar "C mm
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
...
.................................................................................................................................................. .............................
.................................................................................................................................................. .............................
..................................................................................................................................................
Other factors affecting design (e.g. weight, nature of contents, environment)

(see notes 3 and 4)
......... ...
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
Pos&weld heat treatment Component Temperature Holding time

"C h
.................................................................................................................................................................
......
.................................................................................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
Pressure test Location Test pressure Test medium and Date
temperature
(see note 5) bar
.................................................................................................................................................................................
......
.................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................................
l/4 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

COPYRIGHT O BSI 1997
Section 1 b e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Form X (continued)
Certificate of Compliance (design)
We hereby certify that the design of this vessel complies with BS 5500
Date:
For manufacturer (see note 6):
Position: Name of company
We hereby confirm that we have checked the design of the above vessel and that this complies with BS 5500.
Date:
For Inspecting AuthonQc
Position: Name of company:
Certificate of Compliance (construction and testing)
We hereby certify that this vessel has been constructed and tested in compliance with BS 5500.
Date:
For manufacturer:
Position: Name of company
We hereby confirm that the construction and testing of the above vessel has been d e d out under our
surveillance and that to the best of our knowledge and belief all aspects of this work comply with BS 5500.
Date:
For Inspecting AuthonW.
Position: Name of company:
We hereby confirm that the construction and testing of the above vessel has been carried out under our
surveillance and that to the best of our knowledge and belief all aspects of this work comply with BS 5500.
NOTE 1. The suffix 'XX' is to be added to the serial number of each vessel for which any deviations or concessions have been
authorized (see 1.5.2.2e).
NOTE 2. The design conditions associated with the operational duties specified by the purchaser should be given.
If a purchaser wishes to change the operational duty of a vessel, revised design conditions, consistent with the vessel scantlings, will be
established separately, as appropriate.
NOTE 3. Where the design covers operation below O "C the various combinations of temperature, pressure and calculated membrane
stresses considered in determining the design minimum temperature (see annex D) should be stated.
NOTE 4.Where appropriate, cross reference to drawings or specifications will suffice.
NOTE 5. Where a vessel is tested in a different orientation to that in which it will normally operate, this should be stated.
NOTE 6. This part of the Certificate to be signed by the purchaser in cases where the purchaser elects to perform the design function
(see 1.4.4).
O BSI 1997 lI5

~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70531 T T O
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Section 1
1.5 Information and requirements to be 1.5.2.1 Before commencement of manlCfucture

agreed and to be documented The manufacturer shall submit the information
specified in 4.1.1 for approval before commencement
1.5.1 Information to be supplied by the of manufacture. In submitting this information, the
purchaser manufacturer shall identm, in an appropriate manner,
The following information shall be supplied by the any features of the proposed design and/or in the
purchaser and shall be fully documented. proposed manufacturing, inspection or test procedures
Both the defínitive requirements specified throughout which by the terms of this standard require to be
the standard and the documented items shall be approved by the purchaser.
satisfied before a claim of compliance with the NOTE. Table 1.5-1 lists and classifies such features. The features
standard can be made and verified. should be identified in an appropriate document such as purchase
order, approved drawing or an approved w o r h g procedure (e.g.
a) The normal working conditions of the required weid preparation procedure, heat treatment procedure, welding
vessel, together with details of any kmsient cyclic procedure etc.).
and/or adverse conditions in which the vessel is 1.5.2.2 On completion of construction
required to operate and any special requirements for
in-service inspection. The manufacturer shall supply to the purchaser for
record purposes a copy of the following
b) Any requirements relating to the various options documentation, as finally approved, for each vessel or
covered by this standard (see table 1.51). batch of vessels.
c) Any special statutory or other regulations with a) A fully dimensioned drawing of the vessel, as
which the finished vessel is required to comply built, together with any relevant supporting
d) The name of the Inspecting Authority to be information as specified in 4.1.1 and which is not
commissioned by the purchaser. covered by items b to g.
e) The name of the Regulating Authority (if any). b) A list of materials (including welding
f) The requirement to obtain copies for record consumables) used in the construction of the vessel
purposes of any documents other than those listed with details of any special heat treatments carried
in 1.6.2.2a to g (see table 1.51). ('ib faciiitate the out by the material supplier.
identification of such documents, a check list of NOTE. For materials specified to a British Standard the date of
optional documents is given in annex S.) the standard is to be given. Where other materials are used
(see 2.1.2.lb) the full specification is to be supplied.
Where the purchaser elects to perform the design
function for the vessel, the purchaser shall supply c) The welding procedures used during vessel
any additional design information required by the manufacture (see 5.2.2).
manufacturer in accordance with 1.4.2. The design d) The procedures used for radiography, ultrasonic
dossier maintained by the purchaser in accordance inspection andíor crack detection of welds
with 1.4.1 shall cover all the information (whether (see 5.6.6.1 to 5.6.6.4).
supplied by the purchaser or by the manufacturer) e) Records of any specific deviations from the
which the manufacturer would otherwise be requirements of this standard (see table 1.51). The
required by 4.1.1 to submit before commencing manufacturer shall add the suffix 'XX' to the seriai
manufacture. number of any vessel for which a specific deviation
has been approved.
1.5.2 Information to be supplied by the
manufacturer f) A Certificate of Compliance (Form X) for each
vessel (see 1.4.4).
The information in 1.5.2.1 and 1.5.2.2 shall be supplied
by the manufacturer and shall be fully documented. g) A facsimile of the vessel nameplate (see 5.8.9).
Both the definitive requirements specified throughout NOTE. The duration for which a manufacturer will retain ail
records he is required to generate during the manufacture of a
the standaxd and the documented items shall be vessel is influenced by a number of factors which are outside
satisfied before a c l a h of compliance with the the scope of this standard.
standard can be made and verified.
116
O BSI 1997
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1997 W L b 2 4 b b ï Oh70532 737
Section 1 Issue 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Table 1.6-1 Purchaser options and features requiring approval by the purchaser
(see 1.5.1,1.6.2)
Purchaser option or feature requiring approval by purchaser Classification
(see 1.5.2.Ze)
~ ~~
Requirements for additional records, documentation additional to that Purchaser option

specified in 1.5.2 (1.6.1)
Any special requirements governing the selection, heat treatment or Purchaser option
testing of materials (2.1.1,3.4.2,5.6.2)
Use of castings and appropriate inspection procedure (2.1.2) Variation
Use of materials other than those covered by listed British Variation
Standards (2.1.2.3)
Design strength values for materials qualified by notes b, 1 d, f, 8,17 to Basic requirements
tables 2.31 to 2.3-12
Use of increased design stresses for certain ailoy steels as per Purchaser optionhrariation
note 6 to tables 2.3-1 to 2.3-12
Use of steels with carbon content greater than 0.25 % (2.3.2) Variation
I Heat treatment of non-BS materials (2.3.2) Basic requirement
Use of design methods other than detailed in section 3 Variation
(3.2.2,3.5.4,3.8.1,3.9)
Any relaxation of the design pressure for protected vacuum Purchaser optionhariation
vessels (3.2.3)
The design lifetime for high temperature applications (3.2.4) Basic requirement
The service lifetime for applications where fatigue strength is a Basic requirement
potential ljfe-limiting factor (3.2.4)
* The provisions for corrosion (3.3) Basic requirement
r
n
* I Contained media giving rise to stress corrosion cracking and whether Basic requirement
I associated post-weld heat treatment is required (3.3.1)
The construction category for vessel or component parts (3.4.1) Basic requirement
Properties of alloy steels used for design purposes when post-weld Basic requirement
heat treatment exceeds time and temperature limits given in
table 4.41 (3.4.2)
I Use of bolt stresses in excess of values given in table 3.81 (3.8.1) Variation
Use of plate material for flanged hubs (3.8.1) Variation
I Special requirements for leak tightness of flanges (3.8.1) Purchaser option
I Design of tubesheets outside limits specified in 3.9 Variation
I Design of tubesheets with simultaneous shell and tubesheet- Variation
I pressures (3.9.4.3.4)
Commencement of manufacture before approval of all information Viwiation
specified in 4.1.1
Any modifications to information supplied in accordance with 4.1.1 Fonnal revision of orgmal documentation
Relaxation of amount of dressing on thermally cut edges of ferritic Variation
I alloy steel and aluminium (4.2.1 and 4.2.1 of the Aluminium
Supplement)
Supplementary nondestructive testing of cut edges and rectification Purchaser optionhrariation
of defects (4.2.1)
Procedures for forming and inspection of shell sections and Basic requirement
I plates (4.2.2 and 4.2.2 of the Aluminium Supplement)
Assembly tolerances for thicknesses > 200 min (4.2.3) Basic requirement
O BSI
~~~ ~ ~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 W L b 2 4 b b 9 Ub70533 873 W

Table 1.6-1 Purchaser options and features requiring approval by the purchaser
(see 1.6.1,1.6.2)~.(continued)
(see 1.5.2.2e)
Departures from specified tolerances on circumference of ends, Variation
circumference, straightness and circularity of shells (4.2.4)
Commencement of production welding prior to approval of welding Variation
procedures, welders, welding operators (4.3.1); or assembly of
category 3 components (4.3.1)
Use of welding consumables other than those used in the welding Variation
I procedure test (4.3.2 and 4.3.2 of the Aluminium Supplement)
Consumables used in the welding of 9 % Ni steel (4.3.2) Basic requirement
Preparation of aluminium plate edges (4.3.3 of the Aluminium Variation
Supplement)
Use of attachments of different nominal composition to shell (4.3.6) Variation
I Use of backing strips for welds (4.3.6 and 4.3.6 of the Aluminium Variation
I Supplement)
Thinning of welds by dressing or grinding to less than thickness Specific deviation
shown on drawings (4.3.7)
Use of single layer welds for attachment of branch pipes in aluminium Vdation
vessels (see 4.3.7 of aluminium supplement)
Approval of welding procedure (preheat requirements) (4.4.1) Variation
Modified post-weld heat treatment procedures (4.4.3,4.4.4,4.4.6) Variation
Welding carried out after final post-weld heat treatment (4.4.3) Specific deviation
l Post-weld heat treatment of aluminium (4.4.3 of the Aluminium Basic requirement
I Supplement)
Requirements for special finish (4.6) Purchaser option
Criteria for welding procedure tests (all weld tensile) (6.2.5) Basic requirement
Welder to retake whole or part of approval test (5.3.3) Purchaser option
I Production test plate requirements (6.4 and 6.4 of the Aluminium Purchaser option
I Supplement)
I Production control testing of 9 % Ni (6.4.2) Basic requirement
Reduction in width of standard production test plates for Variation
aluminium (6.4.2 of the Aluminium Supplement)
Details of procedure, welder and production control testing of Purchaser option
I aluminium (6.6 of the Aluminium Supplement)
Necessity of microexamination of welds in aluminium (5.6) Purchaser option
Comprehensive schedule covering nondestructive testing Purchaser option
requirements (6.6.1)
Acceptance standards for defects revealed by nondestructive testing Basic requirement
I in parent material (6.6.2 and 6.6.2 of the Aluminium Supplement)
Nondestructive testing techniques for examination of authorized Basic requirement
repairs to parent materials (6.6.2)
Any relaxation in requirements for ultrasonic/radiographic Variation
nondestructive testing of welds, other than full penetration butt
welds, in category 1 components (6.6.4 and 6.6.4 of the Aluminium
Supplement)
Use of magnetic particle or penetsant methods for examination of Purchaser optiordvariation
m e A welds in category 1 components and categories 1and 2 in case
of aluminium vessels (6.6.4 and 6.6.4 of the Aluminium Supplement)
1B
~~
~~
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL 1777 m l b 2 L i b b ï Ob7053Li 70T H
Mon1 Issue 3, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Table 1.5-1 Purchaser options and features requiring

- - approval
__ by the purchaser
(see 1.5.1,1.6.2) (continúed)
(see 1.5.2.2e)
Grouping of nozzles and branches for examination of internal Basic requirement
flaws (5.6.4)
Use of magnetic particle or penetrant methods for examhation of Purchaser optionhrasiation
category 3 components (5.6.4)
Repair of aluminium welds (5.6.4 of the Aluminium Supplement) Basic requirement
Choice of non-destructive testing technique (6.6.5,5.6.6) Basic requirement
Method used to provide reference points for accurate location of Basic requirement
nondestructive testing reports (5.6.6 and 6.6.6 of the Aluminium
Supplement)
Acceptance criteria for non-main consmction weld (5.7.1 and 5.7.1 Basic requirement
of the Aluminium Supplement)
Weld defect acceptance criteria different to those in table 5.7-1 Purchaser optiodconcession
Acceptance of specific welds with defects in excess of levels specified Specific deviation
in table 5.7-1
Repair of welds (5.7.3) Basic requirement
Options permitted in pressure tests specified in 6.8 and 5.8 of the Basic requirement
Aluminium Supplement
Agreement to waive repeat test on vessel repaired after pressure Specific variation
test (5.8.2)
O ES1 1997
119
=
~ ~
STDmBSI B S 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b 7 ü b 7 0 5 3 5 blrb H
BS 6500 : 1997 h u e 2, September 1997 section 1
1.6 Thicknesses The relationships between the defined thicknesses are

shown in Figure 1.61. This figure indicates:
Thicknesses are referred to in several ways in this
standard in accordance with the following definitions. a) on the left hand side, that the thickness calculated
from the rules is increased by the amount of the
a) Minimum thickness; the thickness calculated in specified allowances (for effects such as corrosion)
section 3 and some design annexes, to satisfy the and possibly by an unspecified margin (in
relevant design requirement. consideration, for example, of matenah availability);
b) Nominal thickness; the thickness as specified on b) on the right hand side, that the nominal thickness
the construction drawing which includes all should be reduced by any negative supply
allowances and tolerances. (i.e. negative plate thickness) tolerance and any
c) Analysis thickness; the thickness used in design manufacturing (i.e. dishing) allowances as well as by
calculations and assessments, which equals the the specified design allowances, to arrive at the
nominal thickness less corrosion allowances and less analysis thickness.
any other allowances and tolerances. NOTE. Following the replacement of BS 1501 by BS EN 10028, it
The nominal thickness, less any negative tolerance should be noted that plate conforming to this latter
permitted by the specification to which the material is specification is normally supplied in accordance with
BS EN 10029 class B which permits a negative tolerance
ordered, shall not be less than the minimum thickness of 0.3 mm for all nominal thicknesses. However, the purchaser
plus any allowances specified for corrosion, may specify a zero negative tolerance.
erosion etc.
A + Tolerance* h
Actual
Nominal thickness Nominal thickness
A thickness range
Unspecified
margin
- Tolerance* 7
Specified design
11 allowances
Specified design e.g. erosion or corrosion
allowances Y Analysis
e.g. erosion or corrosion
Minimum thickness thickness
Figure 1.6-1 Relationship of thickness definitions
1/10 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

~~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 m L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob7053b 582 =

Issue 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Section 2. Materials
2.1 Selection of materials 2.1.2 Materials for pressure parts

2.1.1 General 2.1.2.1 All the materials used in the manufacture of
pressure parts shall either:
2.1.1.1 The selection of the m a t e m of construction a) comply with the appropriate British Standard
for pressure containing parts and their integral referred to in the design strength tables of this
attachments shall take into account the suitability of standard, except as otherwise permitted by this
the material with regard to fabrication2) and to the section; or
conditions under which they will eventually operate.
b) be agreed between the purchaser and the
The aluminium supplement gives requirements specific manufacturer (see table 1.51) provided thak
to aluminium and aluminium alloys. This section shall
be modified as given in the aluminium supplement for 1) they comply with 2.3.2 and are covered by a
unñred fusion welded pressure vessels constructed of written specincation:
aluminium alloys. i) at least as comprehensive as the British
Standards listed in the design strength tables of
2.1.1.2 Any special iimits, for example with respect to this standard for the nearest equivalent materi+
composition, heat treatment, or nondestructive testing, and
which the manufacturer or the purchaser is permitted
to spec@ in relation to the particular end use of ii) as a minimum specifying the manufacturing
material, shall be the subject of agreement between the process, compositional limits for all
purchaser and the manufacturer at the time of enquiry constituents, deoxidation practice, heat
and order (see table 1.51). treatment and appropriate mechanical
properties for acceptance and other purposes;
2.1.1.3 For the ease of reference throughout this 2) the n o n i d design strength of materials for
standard, ferritic materials, with the exception of the time independent stresses shall be derived in
following, have been grouped into ‘ M bands as accordance with the principles of K.3. The
summarized in table 2.1-1 nominal design strength of materiah for time
- l%Ni; dependent stresses shali be derived in accordance
- martensitic stainless steel; with the principles of K.4.
* - ferritic stainless steel; Consideration of whether time dependent stresses
-
I
* - austenitic stainless steel; are applicable shall be given when the design
temperature exceeds the values given in
- clad materi% table 2.1-2.
- duplex austenitic-ferritic stainless steel; 3) the d e m of the procedure used for
- quenched and tempered fine grain steel. determination of the nominal design strength used
are agreed between the purchaser and the
1 Table 2.1-1 Material banding I manufacturer and are recorded.
4) An equivalent ‘M band for the material is
chosen and agreed between manufacturer,
MO
1Ml 1 Carbon and carbon manganese steel
inspection authority and purchaser. This ‘ M
banding shall be used to assist in the selection of
I M2 I Carbon molybdenum steel I manufacturing and inspection requirements of
sections 4 and 5 (see 2.1.1.3).
I
Low alloy manganese chromium
1 ~ 4 molybdenum vanadium steel
M5 3%Ni
I
M6 9Ni
I M7 I 1to l%Cr %Mo I
M8 ‘/Cr%MoWV
M9 2WCrlMo
1MlO 15Cr%Mo I
M11 9CrlMo
M12 12CrlMolV
2)Seeannex G of BS 5135 : 1984 for general guidance on the susceptibility of materials to lamellar tearing during fabrication.
O BSI 1997
2/1
~ ~~~~~~~~ ~ ~~~
STDmBSI B S 5500-ENGL 1777 m lb24bb7 Ob70537 417 m

BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 1,Januaqy 1997 Section 2
Table 2.1-2 Temperature above which time 2.2 Materials for low temperature
dependent properties shall be considered applications
I iM band
MO & M1
Material type
Carbon and carbon

1 Temperature
"C
2.2.1 Special consideration shall be given to the
selection of materials for vessels designed to operate
below O "C or, where it is considered by the purchaser
manganese steel or manufacturer that there would otherwise be undue
risk of brittle fracture in pressure testing a vessel at
Carbon molybdenum the temperature of the available test fluid.
3%Ni 2.2.2 Table 2.2-1 specifies bolting material suitable for
use at low temperature and the minimum design
M9 9Ni temperature for each material.
M4 Low alloy Mn, Cr, Mo, V 470 2.2.3 The impact requirements for ferritic steels in
M7 lCr %MO band MO to M4 inclusive used for vessels designed to
M8 operate below O "C shall be in accordance with
%Cr%Mo%V 490
annex D.
M12 12Cr 1Mo V Annex D shall also be used as specified in 6.8.2.4
1 M10
2 W r 1Mo
where R, 5 350 N / m 2
I 5 ~ %MO
r
II 460
when it is agreed by the purchaser and manufacturer
to carry out the f m d pressure test of a vessel at a
temperature higher than that of the available test fluid.
2.2.4 Requirements for the use of ferritic steels in
bands M5 (3% % Ni) and M7 to M10 inclusive, used for
2%Cr 1Mo
where Re > 350 N/mm2 I 350
such vessels, shall be agreed between the purchaser
and manufacturer.
Stainless steels 2.2.6 The imp& requirements for ferritic steels in
Type 321 and Type 347 540 band M6 (9 % Ni) used for vessels designed to operate
Type 304 and Type 316 560 below O "C shali be in accordance with the British
Standards listed in table 2.3-1 for M6 steels.
2.2.6 Austenitic stainless steels (including the high
nitrogen and warm worked varieties) are not
susceptible to low stress brittle fracture and no special
requirements are necessary for their use at
temperatures down to - 196 "C.
2.2.7 Aluminium and duminium alloys are not
susceptible to low stress brittle fracture and no special
requirements are necessary for their use at
temperatures down to -196 "C.

M o n2 Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
i'able 2.2-1 Bolting materials for low-temperature

Uateriaiholting Material specification Bolting Application
Ipecifîcation grade
temperature
:arbon steel bolting in BS 3111 grade 013 B or 4.8 Nuts and bolts Not required for -30
Kcordance with BS 1768, BS 3111 grade li3 P or 6.8 BS 1769. At room
3s 1769, BS EN 20898-1 or temperature for
35 EN 20898-2 BS 3111 grade 10/2 P or 6.8 BS 1768 and
BS 970 grade 070M20 B or 4.8 BS EN 2089
BS 970 grade 080M40 P or 6.8
n)w alloy steel bolting in BS 1506 grade 630 6.818.8 Nuts and bolts At room temperature -50
Kcordance with BS 1768or S or 8.8
BS 970 grade 135M44
35 EN 20898-1 or S or 8.8
3s EN 20898-2 BS 970 grade 708M40
AW alloy steel bolting in
rccordance with BS 4882
BS 1506grade 162
BS 1506 grade 253
BS 1506 grade 253
2w2m
4í4M
Lf4
Nuts Not required')
I -50
BS 1506 grade 630 B7/B7M Nuts and bolts

BS 1506 grade 631 B7A
BS 1506 grade 670 B16
BS 1506 grade 6û1 B16A
BS 1506 grade 671 B16B
BS 1506 grade 630 L7íL7M Nuts and bolts At -100 "C - 100
3 % nickel steel bolting in BS 1506 grade 509-650 L9 Nuts and bolts At -196 "C -196
Kcordance with BS 4882 BS 1506 grade 509-690 L9A
lustenitic stainless steel BS 1506 grade 304S31, S51, B8+ Nuts and bolts Not required') - 196
)olting in accordance with S61, S71
3s 4882 BS 1506 grade 31GS31, S33, B8M+
551, S53, S61, S63,S65, S67
BS 1506grade 321-S31, S51 B8T+
BS 1506 grade 304S31, S61, L8+ At -196 "C -250
S71
BS 1506grade 316S31, S33, UM+
S61, S63, S65, S67
BS 1506 grade 321831 UT
BS 1506 grade 347-S31 L8C
'recipitation hardening alloys BS 1506 grade 286S31 L17B+ Nuts and bolts At -196 "C - 196
n accordance with BS 4882 BS 3076 grade NA20 L8OA
)Impact energy values shali be as materialbolting specification at the temperature indicated.
')'Not required' indicates that the material may be used, without impact testing, down to the minimum design temperature given in
:olumn 6.
O BSI 1997
33
= L b 2 ~ b b 7Ob70539 =
~
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 291

BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Section 2
2.3 Carbon, carbon manganese and alloy 2.3.2 Materials not covered by British Standards
steels 2.3.2.1 Other materials as specified in 2.1.2.lb shall
2.3.1 Materials covered by British Standards comply with the general requirements of 2.3.2.2
to 2.3.2.11.
2.3.1.1 Permissible materials complying with
appropriate British Standards shall be as given in 2.3.2.2 The maximum allowable phosphorus and
table 2.313). sulfur content shall not exceed 0.05% each in the ladie
analysis.
Hot testing to confirm the properties of material
supplied shall not be required for materials listed in For ferritic steels intended for welding, the upper h i t
table 2.3-1. of the carbon range (in the ladle anaiySis) should not
normally exceed 0.25%, but in the cases of such steels
Additionally, it is permissible to use materials with a carbon content higher than 0.25% intended for
complying with British Standards listed in welding, they shall only be used subject to special
table 2.3-13 for the construction of only category 3 agreement on welding procedures between the
components provided the qualifying requirements purchaser, the manufacturer and the Inspecting
indicated in table 2.313 are satisfied. Authoril~(see table 1.51).
Nondestructive testing requirements shall be as
specified in 6.6.2. 2.3.2.3 The deoxidation practice shall be appropriate
to the type of steel ordered particularly where it
Where relevant, the restrictions in 2.3.2.2 shall apply influences the level of elevated or low temperature
2.3.1.2 Nominal design strength values for materials properties. It is permissible to use semi-killed steel in
complying with appropriate British Standards shall be accordance with this standard for plates, seamless and
as given in tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-13. welded tubes in carbon and carbon manganese steels
These values are for design purposes as specified in with an upper limit of the specified tensile strength
the relevant sections of this standard only and shall range of 640 N h 2 and with a thickness not
not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection of exceeding 100 mm. Rimming steel shall only be used
material. for welded tubes in carbon and carbon manganese
NOTE.1. Their derivation is described in annex K. steel types with an upper limit of the specified tensile
NOTE 2. Values between those given in the various columns of the strength range of 490 N/mm2 under service temperature
table may be linearly interpolated. conditions between O "C and 380 "C.
Table 2.3-1 Design strength values: index of 2.3.2.4 Mechanical properties at room temperature
steels shall be specified for acceptance tests in accordance
with BS EN 10002-14)covering &, Re (see annex K)
Standard Table and minimum elongation at fracture.
number
The specified minimum percentage elongation at
Steel plates BS 1501 : Part 1
BS 1501 : Part 2
2.3-2
2.3-3
fracture referred to a gauge length of 5.65 s5)
shall
be appropriate to the type of steel with a lower limit of
BS 1501 : Part 3 2.3-4 16 % for plates, 15 % for castings and 14 % for tubes
and forgings, unless the use of the steel is subject to
Steel sections BS 1502 2.3-5 special agreement (see 2.1.1.2).
and bars The rate of testing and methods of acceptance testing
Steel forgings BS 1503 2.3-6 shall generally be consistent with appropriate British
Steel castings BS 1504 2.3-7 Standards for similar product forms.
Steel pipes and BS 3059 : Parts 1 and 2 2.3-8 2.3.2.6 For materials that will be used above 50 a O C ,
tubes yield point or proof stress properties shall be specified

BS 3601, BS 3602 : 2.3-9 by the manufacturer for acceptance tests in
Partsland2 accordance with BS EN 10002-54).
BS 3603 2.39 2.3.2.6 Stress rupture properties shall be specified for
BS36M: Parts1 and2 2.310 materials which wiil be used in the creep range. These
BS 3605 : Parts 1 and 2 2.3-11 shall be determined in accordance with the procedure
laid down in IS0 63034).The manufacturer of the
BS 3606 2.312 vessel shall be assured that the product supplied is
3)In certain applications higher design strengths than those specified in tables 2.3-4 to 2.3-12 for common grades of stainiess steel are
permitted (see annex P).
4)Acceptanceof properties obtained by other recognized test methods (e.g. other national standards) shall be subject to agreement
between the purchaser, manufacturer and inspection authonm.
5)S0 is the original cross-sectional area of the gauge length of the tensile test specimen.
24
O BSI 1997
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 = 1b24bb7 Ob705L1O T O 3
capable of complying with the specified properties by 2.3.2.10 It is permissible to use electric resistance
a statement that the manufacturing processes have welded or induction welded tubes in the as-welded
remained equivalent to those for the steel for which condition provided the specified upper limit of tensile
the test results were obtained. strength does not exceed 540 N/mm2 and they are not
intended for service below a temperature of O "C.
2.3.2.7 Charpy V-notch impact test properties at
appropriate temperatures shall, where necessary, 2.3.2.11 The heat tseatment condition to which the
comply with 2.2.3 to 2.2.5. specified properties relate shall be clearly stated in the
material specifications. These properties can be
2.3.2.8 Materials shall be supplied in a heat treated affected by reheating during fabrication and, where
condition appropriate to the nearest equivalent British necessary (see 3.4.2 or 4.4), the manufacturer shall
Standard unless otherwise agreed between the discuss the application and proposed heating or
purchaser, the manufacturer and the material supplier reheating of the steel with the material supplier.
(see table 1.51). However, the test plates shaii be supplied and tested in
NOTE. Plates for hot forming may be supplied in any suitable a condition corresponding to the material specification
condition as agreed between the manufacturer and the material
supplier. specifically requested by the manufacturer. The heat
treatment to be given to the test pieces and the
2.3.2.9 Carbon and carbon manganese steel plates for acceptance properties shall be agreed between the
cold forming shall be supplied in the normalized manufacturer and the material supplier at the time of
condition except when their thickness is less than order.
25 mm, when it is permissible to supply plates asrolled
if guaranteed elevated temperature properties are not
required
Low alloy steel plates for cold forming shall be
supplied in the normaiized and tempered condition
except that, where metalurgidy suitable and where
post-weld heat treatment will suffice as the tempering
treatment, plates supplied in the normalized condition
shall be permitted.
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards Y5
~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1797 D 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70541 7LiT D

3 3 3
a a- o) m-
O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0
O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0
O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0
O 0
3 , a Nm 0 0
N
O 0
3 2 z g
0 0
z z g g
M
g e e &
$
8
Y
O
O
3
3
E oo 2 N
5:
n
6-'
" W
Co t-
o) t-
m 3
e3
Y
e Z 3 N
3 - 3
a
3
w
.-ME
o 2 m o o
rn
k 326;
I.I
2
a
a
3
>
3
-
a
9
5 5
s
m
3
Y
2
..
pi
o
O E
2-
m m m
a-0 z o :
Y
i
I
2/6
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL I777 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70542 B a b
Section 2 Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
3 3 3 ir; 3
m- m- me m" o,-
O 0 0 0
O
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
9 90 80 9
O 0
0
O
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
0
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
O 0 0 0
Z Z O NL D
N 5 3 g g O 0
3 3 R N
0 0 O
32h;,l
0 0 0
53"
0 0 0
* -F
3
v,
*
8 O
3
o,
t-
2
g
* 3m r w: 3 2 '
Y
s
3r
O BSI i997
~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 W Lb24bb7 Ob70543 712

c
I
I
O
O
O
O
0
0
0
0
Z 3 S N
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
O
O
O
0
0
0
0
3 2 S %
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
g g
O
O
0
s0 g0
0
S S W N
0 0
O
o
O
0
33"
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
m m m m
zzZ?z?i
9 s
m m
3 3
P P 3 E z z
28
O BSI 1997
~
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL 1777 m 1 b 2 4 b b î Ob70544 b59

I 3 3 3 3 2
z
c,
a" m- a- a- a-
c
I 0
O
0
0
c o o 0
0
0
s s o w
0
0
0
N
0
0
0
N
O
0
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 Q
O
g g o
0 0 0 0
32"
0 0 O
O
0
O
0
0
0
0
Z 2 W N
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Q X X Q
O
s2?"
0 0 0
3
3
3
N
3
a t - i o m m
41213412
O BSI 1997 2/9

=
~ ~~~
~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70545 595

O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0
15953 N N $qXz N N
O 0
s s o m 0
N
0
N
O 0 0
3 3 E : W
0
3 8 3 %
5 3 8 4 5 3 8 % 538%
.=r 3
3 3
io
3
3
3
4
3 3
E a
N
E
2/10 O BSI 1997

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 3 9 9 7 LbZqbbS Ob705i-lb 421
c>
t 2 3 CD 2
z". .
3-
3 3 2 2 5
0 0 0 0
O 0 0 0
O 0 0 0
o s
s o o
o m
0
N N
(o
2
t-
2
3
o,
Q,
o: 2
N t- m
s: o,
3
* t-
3 s: 3
0:
m o,
N
*
2 3 3
u
2 3 E-
3 3 3
LD
E
3
3 i
E
E
E
$ 2
O BSI
~ ~
STD.BSI BS 55DO-ENGL 1997 L b 2 4 b b S ü b 7 0 5 4 7 3bB m

z
U
2 2 2 3 2 3
O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 ~ N
0 N
L a s 3 0NLNa s 3 oN m
N 3 3 " 3 ~ " ~ 3 0 N LN a
N 3
N
Ln
2
3
N 3
m 3 m 3
3 M N Cu
N N
O
m P-
N
d<
W
m
N
P-
O
N
m
N 8
B
N 3 3
N
N 3 3
M
i! a
N
P-
OJ
ci1
m
N
u3
tN
-
m m m
3
3
t-
N io
N w N
m m
b
N La
N *
N
N La
N *
N
N
6
Cu z 3
in
Cu N s
N
z
N
* Y *O *u3 * *O
in
N La
P-
13 N lo 2
5 VI VI
..
&
M u 3
8 O
W
Tp
O
*
m O
u3
O 8
* m*
i
2/12
O BSI 1997
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1777 1 b 2 4 b b î üb70548 2 ~ 4
O BSI
~~~ ~ ~~~
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL 1777 D 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70547 130

I 3
Y In- m
z If: N N-
O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 o o o c
O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 o o o c
O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 o o o c
O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o o c
32" 32="" 3 3 N A
m
3
ot - o
m t -0 O d *
N ' C a 3 N N
8 & 8 * O 0
O m m
E z'q3 2
. E VI VI VI VI
N
E
ru
Fi
E
E $
1: 2

S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob705517 7 5 2
w
z
c>
N 3 N N
1 39 s9
O O
5:
O
5:s
O
3
O
5:
O
5:
u
I &
9 S B 9 O
w B
b & 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
O BSI 1997
COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards 2/15
~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 1b2LIbbS O b 7 0 5 5 1 8 7 9
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,J a n m 1997 Section 2
N (9 3 3 2
O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0
O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0
O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0
8383 5 3 g g
t-
3
8 E;
3
o08
3
3
s s s 3
3 3 3” s”
2/16
O BSI 1997
~~ ~~ ~ ~~
S T D * B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 m Lb2Libb9 Ob70552 7 2 5 m

i 2
O 0 0 0 o o o c
O 0 0 0 o o o c
O 0 0 0 o o o c
O 0 0 0 o o o c
Z 3 % N 3 3 "
3 3 8 %
01 o
-$,
o, B
N
3
ir
2 2
3
" a o3 N
3 3 3
3
3 2
t - o m i r C o m o m m m o
3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 O
N
0
N
0
N
0
N
L ON BN%N%
N
1 -
E
3
i 3
. 3
32
O BSI 1997 2/17

STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 l b 2 4 b b 9 U b 7 0 5 5 3 bbl,

STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1797 m L b 2 4 b b 7 Ub7055Li 5 T B m
Section 2 Issue 2, January 1998 BS SSOO : 1997
I
E!
3
R 2
3
If:
3
9
4
m
3
l-
3
5
2
d
2
5
Q BSI
Issue 1, January 1997 Section 2
328% 328%
01
Y
9,
s 3
9
W
E?
2 %-I
z
ir
s
5
Fj,
o 3
e;
P
b
3
2420 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

I
&
O 0
9 9 9 8
0 0 0 0
i z o m
0 0 O
0
0
8 8 8 8
0
z s o m
0
0
0
0
,ozm
0 0
3 2 o w
0 0
O 0 0 0
8 8 8 8
0 0 0 0
s 3 o m
O
8 80 0
8
a o 0 0
0
8
3 5 0 ' N
0
g g o
o
8 o
o
9 o
8 o
o
8 o
oi u3 3 No N
8 cs
o o o o
u 3 ~ 3 m No Q
l c
c
3 8 8 % 3 8 3 %
N
rn
N
3
d i
O,
Q) 3
3 3 m 2
(o t- t-
3 i 3
o m N N o m N I D O,
3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
o 3
3 m m 3 3
m n 2 w t - m m
m
3 N 3 9 2 3 I3D 3
O
3 9 2 2 9
mO, mt- w t - lDm

3 2 25 52 z 2 3 3 2 2
o 3 o m
20: s z 33 d
3 2
N
"E
E
z
E
Y z
O BSI 1997
2/21
~
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL 1977 W L b 2 4 b h 9 ü b 7 0 5 5 7 2 0 7 D

m
3 E: E: E: E:
z 5 5 5 2-
8 8 8 8
O 0 0 0
8
O
80 8
0
8
0
8
O
00 80 80 8
O
00 80 80
O 0 0 0
N N
m 3 2 5 2
3 3 3 4 - 4
3
3
3
3 P-
3
3
2 E?
r---l
3 m t - m
3 3 2 2
m t -
3 1
m
o at m
u -3 i
N
Q Q
N N
81
2/22
O BSI 1997
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1977 H Lb2LibbS Ob70558 2 4 3
Section 2 h e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
*
rn
*
O O
O
gEl N
7 VI VI
vi
m
O
Y
m
m I
i N t- t- E- m
Y
8r 2 z I
: z
I I
O BSI 1997 2/23

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 2 9 9 7 l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70559 O A T
BS 5500 : 1997 h u e 2, September 1997 Section 2
z
Y
9 9 9 2
o o o c
O O O C
z 2 a x
O
3
W
2 w
m
s: z E:
3
. P-
t 3
N
O
ce
id m
i o
N
3
3
m
W ir
N
8
n
m
3 FI! 3 m m
m
N 3 N
w
N
e
N
3
3 os O
N
d<
o
N
P-
N
in
3 3
O
m 2 m 3 (0
o,
rl m
N 2 m Ln
N
N
d<
g:
N 3 3
3
(r;
P-
N
v
o,
CI
~ ~~

COPYRIGHT
O BSI 1997
- ~
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL L777 Lb24bb9 üb705b0

I
z
Y
1ci
3 W
Li
3
"O 009 9 8
0 0
0
o
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
O
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
O
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
o 8o 8
o 2c
O 0 0 o o o c
c s % g g O 3
3 0 00 "0
N N
s 'S g l 0& 3
0 0 0 0
Losl& 3 ' 3N0 N
-
t-
3
O
m 2
3
r-
P-
m
in E?
3 2 3
3
ot-t- t-
m m m 2
3 3 3 3
- 3
- a m 0: 2 3 3
m m m 3 3 3 3
O 0
8%s3 i3 2
3 2 2
o m m t-m E; m m
m a a 2 3 3 2 2
m m m m e 3 P-P-
3 2 4 4 4
-0 m0m0 N e tc mu)
3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
z 3 1
4 3 3 5E 2 N
2 2
N
P - W W o m u) 3 3
4 2 2 3 s 3 133
t- O 0
2 3 3
O BSI 1997
2/25
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 17%' LbZqbbS O b 7 D 5 b l 738
m m w
3
3 3
m
Y 9 2 90: 24
i? u 3-
3
0 3
3
6 Li
3
O 0 0 0
m m
3 3

M o n2 Issue 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
3
$ 3
3
v z-
0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0
O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0
o 0 0 0 O 0 0 0
O 0
3 3 0 m 0 0 Z Z0 O0 I n
O 0
N N N N
z
3
3 o
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
i
3
u3
2
2
3
3
3 2 5 O
3
t-
2
3
3
3 3
3
o? 3
3 3 u3
3 3
3 3 3
In
d<
3
2 W
3
O
2
c-
N
O
t-
I
n
3
3
3
m
3
In
2 *
N
N
3
t-
3
O
3 e
N
O *
m
N
P R e t - W t-
3 3 3 3 h
3l
O BSI
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 m 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob705b3 5 0 0 m
I
Y z z z z s O
N O
N O
N
2 2 2 4 ,5 2- u
3 u 3
3 u 3u U
4 U
3 3V 3V 3 U3 V
3 U ~
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0
3'13ov3
N N
3 3 " 3 3 2 , " 3 3 N
0 N
m
NU:
mc;
m c
1
N 3 - 2
lo
v3 N
W
% M g:
m O
3 z in
o)
3 3 e
3
8 m
Q,
r-
E N io 3
:: 9 m 3
E 3
N
O
N % 2
m
2 3
'
N
io
N
io 3
o)
3
O
O
N
O
N
N m
N
3
3
3
3
O
2
O
3
N
%
N R O
3
t-
s
m
c:
O
N 3 R N
3 o:
O
Io
E
. E
2/28
= Lb2'4669
~ ~
STD.BSI B S 55110-ENGL 1997 U 6 7 f l 5 b l i 4Y7

M o n2 Issue 1, Januaq 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
$
U
o:
O 0 0 0 o o o c
o 0 0 0 o o o c
O 0 0 0 o o o c
O 0 0 0 o o o c
SI??" Z Z ? N l
8 P
3
t- a
J
t-
b t-
o)
m
Ir
m
3
m
3
O
3
a
a
O : o O
z g f
3
B
O BSIStandards
COPYRIGHT British 1997 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards 2/29
I
Y
m
E (i
qo
k
.I
8 8 8 8
356%
O 0 0 0
O
0
O
0
0
0
g g g g
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
0
O
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8 8 8 8
O 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
8
O
O
80 80 80
0 0 0
8o o
8 o
0 c
o o o c
E
- N N 3 3 g z s 3 oNI n
N 5 3 oN I N
n Z S O
N C
N
33638
2
3
t- In
N
3
m
t- 4 u3
N
N
N
3
m O
m
N
9a m
N
m
*
r(
t-
N
m W
M N
z 2
N
N w
rn
3
P- m
E a
N O
3
Lo
t-
N
in
2 5 t-
O
d
O
Y

section 2 Isssie 3, Janmuy 1998 BS 5500 : 1997
m
m d m m
3833%
3 3 2 %
8 2 8 3
B O
o) 2
3 3
2 - 24 %1 O
3
2
3
N
3
m
3
Lo
3
W
3
m
3
3
24
2
(D
3
2
z
8
al N
E
4 5
N
E
p E - 2
COPYRIGHT British Standards

O BSI 1998 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards 2/31
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 I1b2Libb7 O b 7 0 5 b 7 1 5 b M
BS 6 6 0 :1997 h e 1, January 1997 Section 2

I _ I ..
I?
8 5 8 7
8io 8 v3
m
O
2
D
3 a
3
3
$ 2 5: 3
N I:-
3235
u 2 B &w
i e w
- --
8
Y
z"
O BSI
~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 W L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob705b7 T29

BS 5500 :1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Section 2
3 5: 5:
-
8
O
m
Lb
id
Aid
O
%
O
P
*
O
id
O
8
N
In
z
id
O
x
O
3
3
5
3
9
3 W
3
o t-
3 2
8
e3 3 i
8 N
2
P-
3
O L- t-
id
N
8
* 52 3
W
4 e5 3 4 4
O
2
O
2
In
O
-
N
E
4- s
E
d z

~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 2777 W lib2'4bb7 0 6 7 0 5 7 0 7i-10 =

O BSI
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 7 7 9 l b 2 4 b b 7 O b 7 0 5 7 1 bA7 m

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 = Lb2LibbS Ob70572 513 =
O BSIStandards
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 M L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70573 4 5 T M
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,Jaaiuary 1997 Section 2

~~
S T D S B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 W 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70574 37b W

* m
CD
m*
8 8
u
v
3
o,
3
m
x 2
O
o, P-
o, m s
3
3
3 3
B 3 2
3 m 3 c-
ol
3 3 3 3
4 3
2 m
3
4
3 3 E?
o,
4 E?
3
E? 3
m
P-
E?
b
3 3 E
O BSI
STDSBSI BS 5500-ENGL 1997 W Lb24bb7 Ob70575 2 2 2 W
BS 5 5 0 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Section 2

Table 2.3-13 Additional materiais that may be used for category 3 construction
Product form Material standards, BS references Conditions for use
Plate BS EN 10025 Fe36OBFN Seenotes1,4and5
Fe 36oc
Fe 43OA
Fe43ûB I
Plate,sheet BS 1449 : Part 1 37n3HR See notes 1 , 2 and4
or strip 37/2XR
m5HR
BS1449: Part2 304 S15 See note 3
310 S24
Q BSIStandards
= l b 2 4 b b 7 üb70577
~
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1777 UT5
Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Section 3. Design
3.1 General 3.1.6 Supports, attachments and internal structures

(non pressure parts) shall be designed in accordance
3.1.1 The minimum thicknesses or dimensions to with 3.7.
ensure the integrity of the vessel design against the
risk of gross plastic deformation, incremental collapse 3.1.7 Detailed requirements to safeguard against
and collapse through buckling shaii be determined brittle fracture of vessels, ferritic steels in categories
using the m a t e m specified in section 2 and the MO to M4 inclusive, are given in annex D (see also 2.2).
calculations specified in 3.1.2 to 3.1.6 or 3.2.2. Detailed requirements to safeguard the vessel against
fatigue failure are given in annex C.
3.1.2 Minimum thicknesses or dimensions for
particular components of vessels under internal
pressure (see 3.5) shall be calculated in accordance 3.2 Application
with the subclauses identified in a) to f). 3.2.1 In the design of a vessel the following loads
a) cylindrical and spherical vessels (3.5.1); shall be taken into account, where relevant
b) domed ends (3.5.2); a) internal and/or external design pressure;
e) conical ends and truncated cones (3.5.3); b) maximum static head of contained fluid under
d) openings and branch connections (3.5.4); operating conditions;
e) flat ends and fiat plates (3.5.5); e) weight of the vessel;
f ) spherically domed and bolted ends d) maximuni weight of contents under operating
(see figwe 3.536) (3.5.6). conditions;
3.1.3 Minimum thicknesses or dimensions for e) weight of water under hydrauìic pressure test
particular components of vessels under external conditions;
pressure (see 3.6) shall be calculated in accordance f ) wind loading;
with the subciauses identified in a) to f). g) earthquake loading;
a) cylindrical shells (3.6.2); h) other loads supported by or reacting on the
b) conical shells (3.6.3); vessel.
e) spherical shells (3.6.4); Consideration shall be given to the effect of the
d) hemispherical ends (3.6.5); following loads where it is not possible to demonstsate
the adequacy of the proposed design, e.g. by
e) torisphencal ends (3.6.6); comparison with the behaviour of other vessels:
f) ellipsoidal ends (3.6.7). 1) local stresses caused by supporting lugs, ring
3.1.4 Minium thicknesses or dimensions for bolted girders, saddles, internal structures or connecting
fiange connections, flat heat exchanger tubesheets and piping or intentional offsets of median lines in
jacketed construction shall be calculated in accordance a x e n t components;
with 3.8,3.9 and 3.11, respectively. 2) shock loads caused by water hammer or surging
NOTE. Recommended methods of calculating stresses arising from of the vessel contents,
local loads (on spherically or cylindrically shaped vessels) due to 3) bending moments caused by eccentricity of the
nozzles, supports, etc., and thermal gradients are given in annex G.
centre of the working pressure relative to the neutral
3.1.5 Since the thicknesses determined by the various axis of the vessel;
equations are minima, the specified nominal thickness 4) stsesses caused by temperature differences
shall include the amount of any negative tolerance including transient conditions and by differences in
permitted by the specification to which the material is coefficients of the- expansion;
ordered.
5) fluctuations of pressure and temperature.
NOTE. Following replacement of BS 1501 by BS EN 10028 it
should be noted that plate to this specification is normally Where portions of a vessel are subjected to high cyclic
supplied to BS EN 10029 class B, which permits a negative forcedmoments or thermal stresses in service which
tolerance of 0.3 mm for all nominal thicknesses, however the will not be reproduced during the pressure test
purchaser may specify a ‘zero’ negative tolerance.
specified in 5.8, the possibility of unacceptable local
strain accumulating over the life of the component
shall be given appropriate consideration.
O BSI
-~ ~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 l b Z ‘ i b b 9 Ub70578 T I 1
3.2.2 Design requirements specified in this section b) the maximum pressure which can be attained in
will provide satisfactory designs for the types of service where this pressure is not limited by a
loading accounted for by the equations6) therein. If a relieving device.
component is subjected to loading other than that The design pressure shall include the static head where
accounted for in the equations, reference shall be applicable.
made to other design criteria (such as in annex A),
unless it is possible to demonstrate the adequacy of Vessels subject to external pressure shall be designed
the proposed design by comparison with the behaviour for the maximum differential pressure to which the
of similar existing components. vessel may be subjected in service. It is recommended
that vessels subject to vacuum be designed for a full
NOTE 1. The equations in this section are based on mean
diameter rules and are not necessarily applicable when the ratio negative pressure of 1 bar7) unless a vacuum break
of the outside diameter of the vessel to the inside diameter of the valve or similar device is provided, in which case it is
vessel DdDi exceeds 1.3. The design of such vessels should be permissible for a lower design pressure to be used by
given special consideration, taking into account that the factor of agreement between the purchaser and the
safety against gross plastic deformation will be greater than that manufacturer (see table 1.51).
implied by the equations in this section, and that the onset of
plasticity (iocally at the bore) will occur at relatively low pressure. 3.2.4 The maximum design temperature which is used
NOTE 2. An aid to the selection of standardized pressure vessels to determine the appropriate nominal design strength
is given in BS 5276 : Part 4,where a range of dimensions and
pressure ratings for basic unpierced cylindrical pressure vessels for the selected materid shall be not less than the
with domed ends is given. actual metal temperature expected in service. The
NOTE 3. Where the specified design strength of a material is time maximum design temperature shall include an
dependent, the design procedures covering situations where adequate margin to cover uncertainties in temperature
internal pressure is not a dominant form of loading (e.g. see 3.6) prediction. Where different metal temperatures can
may not in themselves provide adequate margin against the confidently be predicted for different parts of the
possibility of creep deformation leading to instability or creep
rupture during the agreed design lifetime. in such cases the design vessel, it is permissible to base the design temperature
procedures specified in this section should, where indicated, be for any point in the vessel on the predicted metal
supplemented by appropriate analysis to confirm that this lifetime temperature.
will be achieved. The design procedures included in this section
do not necessaxily cover mechanisms (e.g. creep ratchetting) An appropriate design lifetime shall be agreed between
which can significantly increase the deformation rate of the purchaser and the manufacturer for each vessel
components operating in the creep range and subject to frequent whose maximum design temperature is such that the
temperature cycling. Where such cycling is likely, deformation nominal design strength in tables 2.32 to 2.312 is time
rates should be confirmed by appropriate supplementary analysis.
dependent (see table 1.51).
For other components for which no requirements are NOTE 1. No vessel designed on this basis should remain in service
specified in this section, reference shall be made to beyond the agreed design lifetime unless a review is then made of
other methods of evaluating the stress systems (such its continued fitness for service based on inspection for creep
as in annex A). damage and consideration of its temperature/stress history and the
latest materials data Particular attention should be paid, during
By agreement between the purchaser and the inspection, to geometrical discontinuities and details subject to
manufacturer, it is permissible to use designs based on load or temperature cycling. Subject to satisfactory periodic
requirements other than those given in this section review, it is permissible to extend service lives beyond the original
provided they can be shown to comply with the design design life.
criteria in annex A, but in no case shall the minimum An appropriate service life and design margin
thickness for pressure loadmg oniy be less than that (as in C.l.2) shall be agreed between the purchaser
required by 3.6.1 to 3.6.3 (see table 1.51). and the manufacturer for each vessel of which any
The design pressure of vessels (or vessel parts) for integral part requires a detailed fatigue analysis (as
which the strength cannot be satjsfactorilycalculated in C.2) (see table 1.51).
shall be determined from the results of a proof NOTE 2. No such vessel should remain in service once the agreed
hydraulic test carried out in accordance with 6.8.6 in service life has been completed, without a periodic review based
on the inspectiodmonitoring of the part(s) in question.
the presence of the Inspecting Authority
Where, during normal operation, a vessel is subjected
3.2.3 The design pressure (i.e. the pressure to be used to more than one loadin$) ítemperature condition, the
in the equations for the purposes of calculation) shall thickness shall be determined from that condition
be not less than: which results in the greatest thickness.
a) the pressure which wiil exist in the vessel when
the pressure relieving device starts to relieve, or the
set pressure of the pressure relieving device,
whichever is the higher (see 3.13)
@Theequations in this section may be used with any consitent set of units.
7)1 bar = lo6 N/m2 = 0.1 N/mm2 = 100 kPa.
*)In this context, the term ‘loading’ means any combination of loads (including pressure loading) acting simultaneously.
3/2
O BSI 1997
~
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL I1777 Lb24bb9 0b70579 778 9
3.2.6 The minimum design temperature which is used When in doubt consideration shall be given to
to determine the suitability of the material to resist undertahg corrosion tests to be carried out on the
brittle fracture shall be the lowest metal temperature actua3 metal (including welds) or combination of
expected in service. in the case of components metals under exposure to the actual chemicals used in
thermally insulated errternally, the lowest metal service.
temperature shall be taken to be the minimum NOTE 2. It is very dangerous to assume that the major constituent
temperature of the contents of the vessel at the of a mixture of chemicals is the active agent, as in many cases
appropriate loading condition. In the case of small traces of impurities exert an accelerating or inhibiting effect
out of all proportion to the amount of impurity.
components not thermally insulated, the minimum
temperature of the components under operating Fluid temperatures and velocities should be equivalent
conàitions and the method used for assessing the to those met in operation. Corrosion tests should be
lowest metal temperature shall be subject to continued for a sufficiently long period to determine
agreement the trend of any change in the rate of corrosion with
In cases where the calculated membrane stress can respect to time.
vary with the minimum design temperature, 3.3.2 Additional thickness t o allow for corrosion
e.g. auto-refrigeration during depressurisation, the The additional thickness specified over and above that
various combinations of stress and temperature shall required for design conditions shall be adequate to
be evaluated to determine the one which is most cover the total amount of corrosion expected on either
onerous for the purpose of selection of materials or both surfaces of the vessel and shall be agreed
(see D.3.1). between the purchaser and the manufacturer (see
3.2.6 Provision shall be made in the design to permit table 1.51). It shall be at least equal in magnitude to
thermal expansion and contraction so as to avoid the expected wastage due to corrosion during the
excessive thermal stresses. specified life of the vessel and shall be a minimum
of 1mm unless a protective lining is employed.
3.2.7 Unless otherwise agreed (see 3.2.2), wind and
Where corrosion effects are negligible no excess
earthquake loadings shaii be calculated in accordance
thickness need be specified
with annex B and the higher permissible stresses given
inA.3.6 apply 3.3.3 Linings and coatings
It is permissible for vessels to be fully or partially lined
3.3 Corrosion, erosion and protection (or coated) with corrosion-resistant material. It is
permissible for linings to be loose, intermittently
3.3.1 General attached to the vessel base material or integrally
The word ‘corrosion’as used in this standard shall be bonded to the vessel base material. The surface finish
taken to mean corrosion, oxidation, scaling, abrasion, for coated vessels shall be agreed between the
erosion and all other forms of wastage. purchaser and the manufacturer (see table 1.51).
The purchaser and the manufacturer shall give joint Provided contact between the corrosive agent and the
consideration to the likely effect which corrosion (both vessel base material is excluded, it shall not be
internal and external) wili have upon the useful life of necessary to make a corrosion allowance against
the vessel (see table 1.51). The purchaser shall specify internal wastage of the base material.
where the contained media could give rise to stress Corrosion-resistant linings shall not be included in the
corrosion crackkg and whether associated post-weld computation of the specified wall thickness except in
heat treatment is required. In these cases the the case of clad steels, when as agreed between the
manufacturer shall review the materials used, the purchaser and the manufacturer, the combined
material hardness, residual stress and post-weld heat thickness of steel and cladding is permitted to be used
treatment. in c a l c u l h g the wall thickness (see table 1.51).
NOTE 1. Forms of corrosion, including the following, require The design of lining shall take into account the effects
consideration. of differential thermal expansion; integral linings shall
a) Chemical attack where the metal is dissolved by the have sufficient ductility to accommodate any strain
reagents. It may be general over the whole surface or localized likely to be imposed on them during service.
(causing pitting) or a combination of the two.
b) Rusting caused by the combined action of moisture and air. 3.3.4 Wear plates
c) Erosion corrosion where a reagent that is otherwise Where severe conditions of erosion and abrasion arise,
innocuous flows over the surface at a velocity greater than consideration shall be given to fitting local protective
some critical value.
or wear plates directly in the path of the impinging
d) High temperature oxidation (scaling).
matem.
O BSI 1997 3i3

~ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1797 m L b 2 q b b 7 Ob70580 b7T m

BS 5500 :1997 Issue 2, September 1997 Section 3
3.4 Construction categories and design 2) In designs where slight deformation is

important or where the proposed post-weld heat
stresses treatment times or temperatures will significantly
3.4.1 Construction categories exceed the limits given in table 4.41, plate which
For the purposes of this standard, a construction will meet the properties in the material
category in accordance with table 3.41 shall be agreed specification in the normalized plus simulated
between the purchaser and manufacturer for each (%hour) post-weld heat treated condition is to be
pressure containing component of the vessel (see specified.
table 1.51). A component is defined as a part of b) AUoy sîeeis
pressure equipment which can be considered as an 1) Manufacturem shall discuss the application and
individuil item for the purpose of calculation proposed heating or reheating of ailoy steeis with
e.g. flange, head, cyiindrical strake. the material supplier before selecting the
NOTE 1. Any one of the three construction categories in appropriate nominai design strength.
table 3.4-1will provide adequate integrity for normal purposes
within the material and temperature limitations specified therein. 2) The nominal design strengths given in
The justification for any special precautions (e.g. additional tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12 shall be used provided the
inspection andíor test requirements, secondary containment) to proposed post-weld heat treatment does not
reduce external risks in the postulated event of an escape of exceed the time and temperature limits given in
hazardous vessel contents involves consideration of matters by the
purchaser (and regulating authority) which are beyond the scope table 4.41. This does not apply to the limits
of this standard. Any modifications to the requirements of this permitted for maximum softening and optimum
standard which are required for the purpose should be covered, as creep properties for grades M7 and M9; in these
appropnate, under 1.6.1. and all other cases the properties used for design
NOTE 2. Construction categories, as defined in table 3.41 are purposes shall be subject to prior agreement
intended to apply to components of a vessel and not necessarily between the purchaser and the manufacturer (see
only to complete vessels which may therefore comprise
components in two or more categories. Category 3, however, is table 1.51). Appropriate time and temperature
commonly applied to complete vessels so that design stresses and limits for non-standard heat treatments shall be
inspection requirements are consistent throughout the vessel. established at the design stage. If acceptance tests
NOTE 3. The fatigue assessment of seam welds in accordance on material heat treated with a completed vessel
with annex C is influenced by the extent of nondestructive testing or in a non-standard manner are required, these
performed, and hence by the choice of construction category. shall be specified in the supplementary
3.4.2 Design stresses specification together with acceptance criteria
agreed between the purchase and the
3.4.2.1 Categories 1 and 2 manufacturer (see table 1.51).
Except as qualified in 3.4.2, the design stresses for c) Aluminium
British Standard materials shall not exceed the
1) Post weld heat treatment of aluminium vessels
appropriate nominal design strength value given in
is not normally necessary or desirable.
tables 2.3-2 to 2.312, etc. for the material of
constsuction at the design temperature. 2) The nominal design strengths given in
table 2.31 of the aluminium supplement for
The design stresses of materiais not covered by British
materiais in the annealed condition shall be used
Standards, as permitted by 2.1.2.lb, shall not exceed in the design of welded constructions.
the values derived in accordance with 2.1.2.lb.
3) In the light of current experience materiais for
The following points shall also be taken into account. vessels subject to external pressure shall be
a) Carbon and carbon manganese steeis restricted to materiais 3103,5154A, 5083
1) The nominal design strengths given in and W9).
tables 2.32 to 2.312 are intended for general use
with the steels listed and acceptance tests on
material heat treated with a completed vessel are
not required, any reduction in properties of such
steels due to post-weld heat treatment being
consistent with the overall benefit obtained by
stress relief of the structure. A purchaser requiring
such tests, or tests on samples subject to
non-standard heat treatments, shall specm them
in the supplementary specification together with
appropriate acceptance criteria (see table 1.51).
')In view of the lack of appropriate data it is recommended that use of 5154A and 5083 materials be restricted to below 66 "C and the
use of 3103 be restricted to 50 "C.
~~
314
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 m l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70581 5 2 b m
Won3 h e 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Table 3.4-1 Construction categories -

Permitted material Maximum nominal
(BS 5500 band) thickness of
component
Im)
I 100 % All None, except
(see 5.6.4.1) where NDT
method limits
to 3.2.2 below O "C
2 Limited random 40
(spot) (see6.6.4.2) M1 See general note
M2 (b) to tables 2.3-2
30 temperatures
to 2.3-12; also
note 3 to 3.2.2 below O "C
I
Austenitic steel 'i
Aluminium alloys
10504 3103, 5154,
5154A, 5083
supplement;
40 also 3.4.2.1 e) 3)
-I
Visual only (see C & CMn steel 133)
5.6.4.3) (R$) 5 432 N.ihnn2)
Austenitic steel 25
1) In the case of flat ends and flanges, the limitation on thickness applies to the governing dimension of the attachment weld and not
to the thickness of the flat end or flange itself.
2, For definition of R, see K.2. The limit of 432 N / m 2 is not intended to apply to pipe fittings as specified in BS 3799.
3, This thickness shall only be exceeded if no benefit is taken of it in design.
3.4.2.2 Categorg 3. A welded fiat end or a dished end can be treated as a

The following design stress limits shall apply category 2 component even though the circumferential
irrespective of the orientation of the main welded seam joining it to the vessel is category 3, provided
seams. Main welded seams are defined as type A welds that the cylindrical flange meets the thickness
(see figure 5.61). requirements for the cylinder.
It is permissible to use category 1 or category 2
a) Carbon and carbon mangarase steel stresses in the calculations for the following category 3
The design stress shall not exceedlo) &/5. components, provided that the components do not
b) Austenitic steel include materials listed in table 2.3k
The design str- shall not exceed 120N/mm2 or 1) Details such as nozzles and attachments remote
from type A welds where remote is defined as no
120 (&) , whichever is the smaller, where t is closer than 2.5 e.
R is the internal radius of the
cylinder, end or cone and e is the minimum
the design temperature ( O C ) .
thickness of the cylinder, end or cone calculated to
In cases where the specified minium yield strength 3.5.1, 3.6.2 or 3.5.3 using category 3 stresses.
(1.0 % proof stress) is less than 230 N / m 2 the design 2) Flanges and flanged flat heads.
stress so calculated shall be multiplied by 0.8. 3.4.2.3Additional limit for staticallu cast
e) Aluminium and aluminium alloys. components
The design stress shall not exceed 10)&/5. In the case of Static castings the design stress shall not
It is permissible to include category 2 components in a exceed 0.7 X the nominal design strength value given
category 3 vessel although all type A welds in a in tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12, unless the quality specification
category 2 component, including any circumferential (see 2.1.2.3) makes full provision for the detection and
welds joining it to any other component, shali meet repair of potentially harmful defects in ali critical
category 2 requirements. sections (see 6.9), in which case it is permissible to
take this limit as 0.9 X the nominal design strength
value given in tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12.
'O)For definition of R,,, see K.2.
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards 36
~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 m 1b2Ltbb9 Ob70582 Ltb2 m

BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,Januasy 1997 Section 3
3.5 Vessels under internal pressure 3.6.1.3 Minimum thickness for combined loading
3.6.1 Cylindrical and spherical shells 3.6.1.3.1 Cylindrical and spherical shells
Where a shell is subjected to loads in adàition to
3.6.1.1 Notation internal pressure (see 3.2.2) it is not possible to give
For the purposes of 3.6.1.2 and 3.6.1.3 the following explicit equations for the minimum thickness and
symbols apply All dimensions exclude corrosion solution by trial and error is necessary (see annex B).
allowances.
3.6.1.3.2 A p p r o x i m a t i o n for cylinder
Di is the inside diameter of shell; Where the effect of such loadings is to produce an
is the outside diameter of shell; axial load Wand a bending moment M , a first
DO approximation to the thickness required shall be
e is the minimum calculated thickness of shell determined in the following manner. The fírst
P b ; approximation is always an overestimate by an amount
f is the nominal design stress; which is greater for cylinders with larger values of el&.
M is the longitudinal bending moment; NOTE 1. Where equations (3.5) and (3.6) indicate that an increase
in the thickness over that given by 3.6.1.2a is required, reference
P is the design pressure; should be made to annex B to establish the minimum thickness.
Q is the longitudinal force in cylinder due to M The first approximation to the minimum thickness is
or W per unit length of inside circumference the largest of the values given by equations (3.5)
(positive if tensile); see equation (3.7); and (3.6) and by 3.6.1.2a.
Ez, is the inside radius of shell; For Q tensile:
W (for vessels with a vertical longitudinal axis onìy); 0.25pDi + Q 0.25pD0 + Q
a) for points above plane of support: is the e= or e = (3.5)
f - 0.5~ f
weight of vessels, fittings, attachments and fluid
supported above point considered, the sum to be For Q compressive (Le. term '- Q having positive
value):
given a negative sign in equation (3.7);
b) for points below plane of support: is the 0.25pDi - Q 0.25pD0 - Q
e= or e =
weight of vessels, fittings, attachments and fluid f f + 0.5p
below point considered plus weight of fluid In these equations:
contents not supported above point considered,
the sum to be given a positive sign in (3.7)
equation (3.7).
Where Q is compressive, o, given by
02 is the nett longitudinal compressive stress.
0 Q Poi
z- e &
3.6.1.2 Minimum thickness f o r pressure loading
onlg is not to exceed the limit given in A.3.6.
The minimum thickness for pressure loading only shall
be calculated from the following equations. These calculations shall be performed for all
a) Cylindrical shells combinations of load expected in service.
Conditions during pressure testing shall be the subject
of special consideration.
NOTE 2. For dealing with local stresses in the neighbourhood of
or the points of application of the additional loads see annex G.
NOTE 3. For dealing with torsional loading, wind or earthquake
loading see annex B.
b) Spherical shells
e = PDi (3.3)
4f - 1.2p
or
e= PDO
4f + 0.8p (3.4)

~~
~
STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 m l h 2 4 h b 7 Ob70583 I T 9 m

3.5.2 Domed ends

3.6.2.1 Notation (see figure 3.51)
For the purposes of 3.5.2.2 to 3.5.2.4 the following
symbols apply. All dimensions exclude corrosion
allowances.
D is the outside diameter of end

DC
e
is the outside diameter of crown section of
torispherical end measured to tangent between
crown and knuckle.
is the minimum calculated thickness after
D
a) Elliptical end
dishing;
f is the nominal design stress;
h is the outside head height, i.e. external height of
end measured from plane of junction of end with
cylinder skirt;
NOTE.h = R - ((E - D/2)(R + D/2 - 273)'
(approximately).
he is the smallest of h, @/4(R + e) and -4
P is the design pressure;
R is the inside spherical radius, for torispherical
ends,
r is the inside knuckle radius, for torispherid
ends.
NOTE. The derivation of these mies is given in Part 1 of PD 6550, b) Torisphencal end
the Explanatory Supplement to BS 5500.
hqiiz2zi
3.5.2.2 Limitations
The foliowing design limitations shall appiy to
ellipsoidal and torispherical ends
a) ellipsoidal ends: 0.0020 Ie I0.120
he 2 0.180
\II
b) torispherical ends 0.0020 5 e I0.120
r r0.06D
r r2e c) End with manhole (elliptical or torispherical)
R 5D
Figure 3.5-1 Domed ends
The two relationships in a) and the four relationships
in b) shali be fullilled simultaneously.
The thickness of the cylindrical or straight flange (see
figures 3.10-1 and 3.1@2) of a domed end shall comply
with 3.5.1.2(a).
O BSI 1997 3/7

BS 5500 : 1997 h u e 1,January 1997 Section 3
3.6.2.3 Unpierced ends Factor

3.6.2.3.1 Hemispherical ends O. 18 2.52
The thickness of hemispherical ends shall be O. 192 2.36
determined using equations (3.3) or (3.4) in 3.6.1.2. 0.208 2.17
3.6.2.3.2 EUipsoidd and torispherical ends (see 0.227 1.98
figure 3.52 and table 3.51)
0.25 1.80
The thickness of eliipsoidai and torispherical ends shall
be determined using the following procedure. 0.278 1.63
0.313 1.46
a) Calculate 2 from the design pressure p and the
f 0.357 1.30
design stress of the chosen rnatwkdJ 0.417 1.14
b) Enter figure 3.52 with this value, read up to the 0.50 1.00
appropriate hJD line for the proposed end shape
and then across to the dD axis for the The thickness shall be assigned the value of T in 3.6.4
corresponding dD value. for the purpose of determining local compensation T,
c) Multiply by D to obtain the end thickness. for isolated or closely grouped openings as if situated
Interpolation between hJD curves is permissible or, in a spherical shell of equivalent diameter as above,
dternativelly, values may be read from the next highest subject to the conditions in 3.6.4.2d and figure 3.58
hJD curve. being satisfiedll).
NOTE 1. The thickness of the spherical portion of a tonspherical If Tr reinforcement thickness is less than e given
end may be determined as for a hemispherical end of spherical by 3.6.2.3, then the dome end shali have a W o r m
radius R within the area of diameter D, - Zx, where:
minimum thichess e.
z = 0.5& X tonspherical thickness NOTE. In cases where the design strength is time dependent,
NOTE 2. Figure 3.5-2 may be used with values of he and D based these procedures should generally give adequate margins against
on internal dimensions, provided h&D < 0.27; beyond this value creep rupture. However, for domed ends made from ferritic
external dimensions are to be used. materials with a large D/e(> loo), and also for domed ends made
from austenitic materials, it is desirable to check that any end of
3.6.2.4 Pierced ends life deformation that may be expected is acceptable.
To determine the thickness of pierced ends they shall
first be considered as a sphere and the basic thickness
shall be determined from 3.6.1.2b t a h g Do or Di
(as appropriate) as follows:
Do = D for hemisphericai ends,

Di = 2R for torisphericd ends;
Do = D X (factor obtained from the following
table) for eliipsoidd ends.
")Symbols defined in 3.6.4.1.
3/8
O BSI 1997
~~ ~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70585 171

Section 3 k u e 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
1.0
0.1
'/D
o o1
I
U
7
c
O ,001-
0.001 0.01 1.0
@f
Figure 3.5-2 Design curves for unpierced domed ends
O BSI 1997
ITable 3.5-1Values of e/D X 103 for unpierced domed ends in terms of h$D and plf
?f
1.001 0.0015 0.0025 0.004 0.006 0.010 0.016 0.026 0.050 greater
values
O. 15 Z.13 2.70 3.73 5.22 7.20 10.9 880 xplf
O. 16 :1.95) 2.50 3.50 4.90 6.70 10.2 810 xplf
O. 17 11.80) 2.30 3.24 4.58 6.30 9.6 770 X plf
o.18 :1.65) 2.11 2.99 4.23 5.80 8.8 730 X plf
o. 19 (1.95) 2.77 3.95 5.43 8.3 695 X plf
0.20 (1.80) 2.55 3.64 5.00 7.7 650 Xplf
0.21 (1.65) 2.39 3.42 4.75 7.3 10.4 16.2 620 X plf
0.22 (1.52) 2.22 3.20 4.45 6.84 9.7 15.4 585 xplf
0.23 (1.40) 2.08 2.95 4.12 6.30 9.1 14.5 555 x plf
0.24 (1.92) 2.76 3.83 5.90 8.5 13.6 530 x py
0.25 (1.75) 2.58 3.56 5.50 7.8 500 X plf
0.26 (1.64) 2.40 3.34 5.15 7.35 475 xplf
0.27 (1.52) 2.25 3.12 4.80 6.80 445 X p l f
0.28 (1.41) 2.12 2.93 4.50 6.45 425Xplf
0.29 (2.00) 2.73 4.20
0.30 (1.86) 2.54 3.95
0.31 (1.71) 2.41 3.80
0.32 (1.61) 2.30 3.65
0.33 (1.52) 2.20 3.50 a."
0.34 (1.45)
0.35
0.36 319 X plf
O. 38 307 X py
1295 X plf
table is not valid for values of e/D X lo3 < 2.00.
NOTE 2. Intermediate values may be obtained by logarithmic interpolation.
NOTE 3. Values in parentheses are provided for pulposes of internolation.

S T D - B S I BS 5 5 O ü - E N G L L747 = Lb24bb7 üb70587 T q q
3.5.3 Cones and conical ends 3.5.3.3 Minimum thickness of conical shell
3.5.3.1 General The minimum permissible thickness at any point along
the length of a cone is given by one of the following
The following gives rules for cones and conical ends two equations:
subjected to pressure loading. Right circular cones are
covered in 3.5.3.3, cone to cylinder intersections e=- P D i X - 1 (3.7a)
where the cone and the cylinder are on the same axis 2f - p cos a
of rotation are covered in 3.5.3.4 to 3.5.3.6 and offset or
cones axe covered in 3.5.3.7. PDe 1
e=-X-
The rules do not apply to cones for which the half 2f + p cos a
angle at the apex of the cone is greater than 60",or for
which At the large end of a cone joined to a cylinder it is
permissible to replace D i in equation (3.7a) by D k
e cos a where 4 = Dc - el - 2r(lcos(a)) - sin (a).
< 0.001
DC NOTE 1. The thickness of the cone may have to be increased at
Short cones joining a jacket to a shell are not covered. the large and small ends to meet the requirements
of 3.5.3.4,3.6.3.5 and 3.6.3.6. It may also have to be increased
If construction category 3 applies, the category 3 locally or generally to provide reinforcement at branches or
design stress shall be used for ail calculations in 3.5.3. openings or to carry non-pressure loads.
NOTE 2. Since the thickness calculated above is the minimum
3.5.3.2 Notation allowable at that point along the cone, it is permissible to build a
cone from plates of different thickness provided that at every
is the inside diameter of the cone; point the minimum is achieved.
is the outside diameter of the cone; 3.5.3.4 Junction between the large end of a cone
a diameter used in cone design; and a culinder without an intermediate knuckle
is the mean diameter of the cone; This subciawe applies provided that:
is the mean diameter of the cylinder at the a) the junction is positioned more than 2 4 along the
junction with the cone; cylinder and 212 along the cone from any other
junction or major discontimi@, such as another
is minimum thickness of a cone as determined conekylinder junction or a flange;
* in 3.5.3.3;
rn b) the joint is a butt weld where the inside and
* is minimum thickness of cylinder as determined outside surfaces merge smoothly with the a a c e n t
in 3.5.1.2; cone and cylinder without local reduction in
is a minimum thickness at a junction at the large thiCkneSS;
end of a cone; e) the weld at the junction shall be subject to 100 %
is minimum thickness of cylinder at junction; nondestructive examination, either by radiography
or ultrasonics, unless the design is such that the
is minimum thickness of cone and knuckle at thickness at the weld exceeds 1.4ej, in which case
junction; the rules for the relevant construction category shall
is the design stress; be applied.
is length along cylinder = G, NOTE 1. The junction is defined as the intersection of shell
centre-lines, see figure 3.53.
p
is length along cone at large or small end =
cos a'
The minimum thickness el of the cylinder adjacent to
the junction is the greater of e, and ej where:
e.-- P D c ß
is the design pressure; (3.7c)
J - 2f
is inside radius of curvature of knuckle;
is a factor defined in 3.5.3.6
tan
) - 0.15 (3.7d) I
is the semi angle of cone at apex (in degrees or NOTE 2. The above is a trial and error calculation for ej. F e
answer is acceptable if the value given by equation (3.7~)is not
radians as appropriate to equation); less than that assumed in equation (3.7d). Figure 3.54 gives p
is a factor defined in 3.5.3.4 directly as a function of pg.
is a factor defined in 3.5.3.6;
is a factor defined in 3.5.3.6.
O BSI 1997
3/11
~
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1997 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70588 980

This thickness shall be mainwed for a distance of at The minimum thickness e1 of the cylinder a x e n t to
least 1.411 from the junction dong the cylinder. the junction is the greater of e, and ej. This thickness
The minimum thickness e2 of the cone a x e n t to the shall be maintained to a distance of at least 1.411from
junction is the greater of e and ej. This thickness shall the junction along the cylinder and 0.511 from the
be maintained for a distance of at least 1.42 from the cylinderknuckle tan-line.
junction along the cone. The minllnum thickness e2 of the knuckle and the cone
It is permissible to modify a design according to the e a c e n t to the junction is the greater of e and ej (e is
above nile with the following procedure, provided that to be determined at the diameter of the junction of
the requirements of 3.6.1.2 and 3.6.3.3 continue to be cone and knuckle). This thickness shall be maintained
metr the thickness of the cylinder may be increased to a distance of at least 1.42 from the junction along
near the junction and reduced further away provided the cone and 0.7h from the cone/knuckie tan-ìine. I
that the crosssectional area of metal provided by the The value of ej is given by:
cylinder within a distance 1.41from the junction is not
less than 1.4qZl. In addition, the thickness of the cone (3.7e)
may be increased near the junction and reduced
further away provided that the cross-sectional area of where:
metal provided by the cone within a distance 1.412
from the junction is not less than 1.4e212. (3.7f) I
3.6.3.6 Junction between the large end of a cone P
(1+ y)
and a cglinder with an intermediate knuckle y = l +
1.2
This subciause applies provided that:
a) the junction is positioned more than 211 along the and
cylinder and 212 dong the cone from any other 0.02%- a
junction or major disConthui@,such as another
condcylinder junction or a fiange;
p=-
a l+l/+zä
NOTE 3. The above is a triai and error calculation for ej. "e
b) the knuckle is of toroidal form and merges answer is acceptable if the value given by equation (3.7e) IS not
smoothly with the adjacent cone and cylinder, less than that assumed in equations (3.7f) and (3.7h).
c) the inside radius of curvature of the knuckle,
r 5 0.30,.
NOTE 1. The junction is defined as the meeting point between the
centrelines of cylinder and cone, extended as necessary (see
figure 3.5-5).
NOTE 2. This subclause does not prescribe a lower limit to the
radius of curvature of the knuckle.
Figure 3.5-3 Geometry of conekylinder intersection

without knuckle: large end
3/12
O BSI 1997
~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL L977 w Lb2Libb7 Ob70587 A L 7
W o n3 Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
i
m Cu
-=l
O BSI
~ ~~
S T D - B S I B S 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1997 1 b 2 4 b b 9 ü b 7 0 5 7 0 539 m
Figure 3.5-6 Geometry of conekylinder intersection

with knuckle: large end
3.6.3.6 Junction between the small end of a cone

and a culinder
This subclause applies provided that
a) the junction is more than 211 along the cylinder
and along the cone from any other junction or
major disconünui@,such as another coneícylinder f /A \
junction or a fiange;
b) the minimum thickness of the cylinder e1 is
maintained for a distance I1 and that of the cone e2
is maintained for a distance 12 from the junction (see
figure 3.5-6);
c) the thicknesses meet the requirements of 3.5.1.2 O"I
and 3.6.3.3
Figure 3.6-6 Geometry of conekylinder
d) the Cylinder is subject to the full axial pressure intersection: small end
force.

Minimum thicknesses el and e2 shall be chosen so that 3.5.3.7 m'et cones

This nile is for offset cones between two cylinders
e1 = P-
WH (3.7i) (see figure 3.57). The cylinders shall have parallel
2f
e(y)
where: centre lines offset from each other by a distance no
greater than the difference of their radii.A minimum
I & = 0.4 + 0.5 thickness shall be calculated in accordance
with 3.5.3.4 above, for the junction at the large end A
and minimum thickness shall be calculated in accordance
z=s
cos a
+ {F when s < i
with 3.5.3.6 above, for the junction at the small end
The greater of these shaii apply to the whole cone. The
angle (a) is taken as the maxjmum angle between cone
or and cylinder.
1 + sz 3.5.4 Openings and branch connections
x s whens 2 1
2 cos a
3.5.4.1 General
with, in both C-S, s = e2
- The amount of compensation to be provided at an
el opening shall be not less than that specified in 3.5.4.
NOTE 1. The above requirements do not provide values for e l and
e2 separately. They may be adjusted relative to each other to suit
The design charts are based on approximate analyses
the needs of the design, for example to obtain a favourable value considering intend pressure loading oniy, but the
of I1 or 12 for use in the procedure that follows. effect of other loads shall be taken into account by the
It is permissible to modify a design according to the selection of an appropriate value of the factor C and
above nile with the following procedure, provided that using the procedure in 3.5.4.3.
the requirements of 3.5.1.2 and 3.5.3.3 continue to be The effects of attachments and discontinuities in the
met: the thickness of the cylinder may be increased proxjmity of the openings shall be taken into account
near the junction and reduced further away provided and in no case shaii branch connections be less than
that the cross-sectional area of metal provided by the the thickness specified in 3.5.4.7. Where it is proposed
cylinder within a distance 11 from the junction is not to use material for branches or added compensation
less than Ilel. In addition, the thickness of the cone which is dissimilar to the main shell material, 3.5.4.3.7
may be increased near the junction and reduced shall be used. Ail branch connections, nozzles and
further away provided that the cross-sectional area of openings not covered in 3.5.4.2a to 3.5.4.2d shall be
metal provided by the cone within a distance 12 from designed on the basis of special analysis, experimental
the junction is not less than hez. evidence, or tests to the satisfaction of the purchaser
NOTE 2. When using the modification to check a given geomem, (see table 1.51). The use of the alternative methods
the procedure for finding el is as follows. Guess e,. given in annex F is permitted subject to the restrictions
Caimiate 1, = .\/D,el stated in the annex
Calcuiate the metai area Al withii a distance Il from the junction NOTE. The basis on which these requirements are founded is
4.
along the cylinder. Then a better estimate of el is given by el = outlined in Part 2 of PD 6550, the Explanatory Supplement to
BS 5500.
A similar procedure can be used to find e2. 11
NOTE 3. Where el = e2 then a torisphericai knuckle of the same
thickness may be included. Il and l2 continue to be measured from
the junction (the point where the centre lines of cone and cylinder
meet).
NOTE 4.The calculations in 3.5.3.6 are for minimum thicknesses.
Actual thicknesses may exceed the minima without leading to any
increase in 1, or 4.
offcet t
Figure 3.5-7 Offset cone
O BSI
For the purposes of 3.6.4.2 to 3.6.4.6 the following T is the minimum shell thickness as
I
symbols apply Ali symbols exclude corrosion calculated by equations for pressure loading
allowances. only in 3.5.1,3.6.2.4 and 3.6.3 for plain
::
spherical, cylindrical or conical shell
are the cross-sectional areas used in section;
calculating compensation for d a c e n t
branches (see figure 3.525); Ta is the nominal thickness of the shell plate
and includes any corrosion allowance and
mill tolerance;
At Tr is the total analysis thickness of shell as
required by 3.6.4
C is a factor applied to TdT
T'r is the modified analysis thickness of shell
D is the mean diameter of spherical or (see figures 3.529) and 3.530);
cylindrical section of shell (ZR, for conical
section of shell) (see figure 35-13), or in the t is the minimum branch thickness calculated
case of domed ends, the mean diameter of using branch design stress by equations for
the equivalent sphere derived in 3.5.2.4. pressure loading only in 3.6.1 for a plain
With regard to figures 3.514 to 3.521, it is cylinder;
sufficiently accurate to take the mean ta is the nominal thickness of the branch wall
diameter of the shell as the inside diameter and includes any corrosion allowance and
of the shell + mill tolerance;
d is the mean of the inside and outside h is the total analysis thickness of branch as
diameter of a branch, or the bore of an required by 3.6.4
opening not provided with a branch; in the
case of non-circular openings or branches, t'r is the modified analysis thickness of branch
see 3.6.4.3.6 in the case of oblique nozzles, (see figures 3.529 and 3.530);
see fig 3.515% a is the one-half apex angle of cone
is the avemge value of d for any two (see figure 3.513);
dA
adjacent openings being considered;
d, is haif the length of a reinforcing plate in
the axial direction (see figure G.47);
3.6.4.2 Application
dP is half the length of a reinforcing plate in
the circumferential direction (see The requirements in 3.6.4 are valid for the design of
figure G.47); circular and obround openings and nozzles (including
oblique nozzles), m g e d singly or in groups, in
fs is the design stress of shell; spherical, cylindrical, domed and conical shells,
fn is the design stress of rim or forging; positioned to comply with 3.10.1.2, provided that the
is the arrangement factor from following conditions a) to d) are satisfied.
g
figure 3.524); NOTE.In cases where the design strength is time dependent,
these procedures should generally give adequate margins against
H is the distance along shell within which creep rupture. However, for vessels made from ferritic materials
shell thickening is assumed to contribute to with a large DIT,(> 100) and also vessels made from austenitic
reinforcement of opening; materials, it is desirable to check that any end of life deformation
that may be expected is acceptable.
h is the distance along branch within which a) Sph,erìcd shelds
branch thickening is assumed to contribute
to reinforcement of opening; 1) Openings and nozzles n o m to sheU suyfaxe
K is the compensation ratio; i) The major axis (mean dimension or, where no
branch is fitted, the bore) of the opening does
P is the pitch measured between centre lines not exceed one-half of the diameter of the shell.
of two openings along mid-thickness of U) The ratio of the major to minor axes of the
shell; opening does not exceed 2.
R C is the mean radius of conical shell section 2) Oblique n o z z h
at opening (see figure 3.513);
The nozzle is of circulas cross-section complying
S is the shortest distance, measured along the with a)l)i) and the angle between the axis of the
mid-thickness line, between the bores of nozzle and a line normal to the shell surface does
a a c e n t openings not provided with not exceed 50".
branches or between the mean diameters of
adjacent branches (see figure 3.525);
3116
O BSI 1997
~~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 1b24bb7 üb70593 248
b) Cylindrical shells 3.5.4.3 Design of isolated openings and branch

1) Openings and nozzles normal to ULe shell connections
surjììe 3.5.4.3.1 General
The ratio of the major to minor axis of the
opening does not exceed 2. The thickness of shell, Tr , shall be not less than T and
the thickness for a branch connection, &, shall be not
2) Oblique nozzles less than t.
The nozzle is of circulas cross section and the
angle between the axis of the nozzle and a line Where external loads are negiigible, as with a manway, I
normal to the shell surface does not exceed 50". the factor C shaii be taken as 1.1. I
3) Protruding nozzles Where external loadings are not negligible stresses

d - t does not exceed onethird of the mean shall be calculated (for example using annex G) and
diameter of the shell. evaluated in accordance with annex A. It is permissible
to omit the calculation if the value of C is taken as 1.0
4) Flush nozzles and if it is possible to demonstrate the adequacy of the
d-t does not exceed onethird of the mean design by comparison with simiiar existing designs.
diameter of the shell if D/Ta > 200. (If DITa I200,
no limit is placed on the permissible diameter of a Other loadings shall be evaluated in accordance with
flush nozzle.) annex G and the thickness of shell or branch increased
e) Conical sheUs if necessary, such as by selection of a value of C less
than 1.0.
1) Openings and nozzles normal to the sheU
surjìàce For vessels operating in the creep range C I1.
i) The major axis (mean dimension or, where no 3.5.4.3.2 ûpmings not fitted with branch pieces
branch is fitted, the bore) of the opening does
not exceed one-third of the diameter of the d
Ifp=- I0.1, no further reinforcement is
shell. D
U) The ratio of the major to minor axes of the
required.
opening does not exceed 2. For larger values of p the value of VTr = O shown in
2) Oblique n o z z b figure 3.510 for spherical or conical shells or shown in
The nozzle is of circular cross-section complying figure 3.511 for cylindrical shells, shall be taken, and
with c)l)i) and the angle between the axis of the the factor C = 1.1used to obtain the shell thickness T,
nozzle and a line normal to the sheil surface does This requires an iterative process. A value of Tr is
not exceed 50". assumed and the associated value of p is calculated.
With VTr = O, figures 3.510 or 3.511 shall be used to
d) Domed ends obtain CTAT with C = 1.1, this gives a derived value of
1) Opmings and nozzles normal to the sheU Tr . Iteration shall continue und the assumed and
su?gii derived values of Tr are equal.
i) The major axis of the opening does not
exceed onehalf of the b e t e r of the sphere 3.5.4.3.3 Branch connections
for a hemispherical end or onehalf of the It is permissible to reinforce branch connections by
diameter of the equivalent sphere (obtained means of an increase in shell thickness or nozzle
from 3.6.2.4) for a torispherical or thickness or by a combination of such increases,
semi-eliipsoidal end subject to the branch thickness limits specified
U) The ratio of the major to minor axes of the in 3.5.4.3.4~and external pipework loads. The design
opening does not exceed 2. charts covering the following cases shall be used:
iii) Openings and nozzles in torispherical and figure 3.59, protruding nozzles in spherical vessels
semi-eliipsoidal ends are positioned to comply with d D < 0.5 and protruding nozzles in cylindrical
with the requirements shown in figure 3.58. and conical vessels with d/D < !h;
Where reinforcement is provided by means of
pads or local thickening of the head plate, the figure 3.510, flush nozzles in spherical vessels with
distance L shall be measured from the edge of dD < 0.5 and flush nozzles in conical vessels with
the weld or taper nearest the outside of the d D < %;
vessel. Where a dished end has uniform figure 3.511, flush nozzles in cylindrical vessels
thickness, the distance L shall be measured with O < d/D < 0.3;
from the outside of the nozzle or rim of the figure 3.512, flush nozzles in cylindrical vessels
opening. with 0.2 < d D 5 1.0.
2) Oblique nozzles
The nozzle of the circular cross-section complying
with d)l)i) and the angle between the axis of the
nozzle and a line normal to the shell surface does
not exceed 50".
O BSI
~~
S T D - B S I ES 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1777 lb2Libb7 üb70574 184 m

- D (mean diameter 1
a) When reinforcement is provided by means of pads (or local thicknening of shell)
L2DI10 L 3 DI10
b) When no local reinforcement is provided
Figure 3.6-8 Positions of openings or nozzles in dished ends (for weld details see
annex E)
3/18 O BSI 1997

A value of shell thickness Tr 2 T shall be chosen, and Table 3.6-2 Thickness of branches
an estimate of the branch thickness 4- 2 t made so that
Branch nominai size Minimum thickness
the mean branch diameter d and hence dD and
(where necessary) p can be calculated. An appropriate mm mm
value of C from 3.6.4.3.1 shall be used, CTJT shall be 15 2.4
entered in the relevant design chart to obtain &/Tr. In 20 2.4
the case of flush nozzles in cylindrical vessels where
0.2 < dD<0.3 a vdue 4-1 shall be derived from 25 2.7
figure 3.511 and a value of 4-2 shall be derived from 32 3.1
figure 3.512 and the required thickness 4- obtained as
follows: 40 3.1
50 3.6
4- = 4-1 + 10(dD - 0.2)14-2 - 4-11
If the value of i+ obtained differs from the estimate, a 65 3.9
revised value of Tr shall be used and the calculation 80 4.7
repeated. 100 5.4
figures 3.59 to 3.512 are provided for ease of
application in manual cdculations and definitive 125 5.4
thicknesses shall be obtained from the data in 150 6.2
table 3.53 and figure 3.512. Where it is required to 200 6.9
determine tJTr for CTJT and p values that are not
explicitly tabulated, the following procedure shall be 250 8.o
used. 300 8.o
a) For the nearest listed p value below that required, 350 8.8
find the nearest tabulated CTJT values bounding the 400 8.8
exact value above and below. Interpolate linearly to
obtain &/Tr corresponding to the required value of 450 8.8
CTdT 500 10.0
b) Similarly obtain tJTr for the exact CT,/T value for 600 10.0
* the nearest tabulated p value greater than that
r
n NOTE 1. It is recommended that branches of up to 80 mm
* required. nominal size in aluminium vessels should be forged or machined
c) Finally interpolate linearly to obtain &/Tr for the €romwrought material, as indicated in figure E.33, types (i), (ii)
exact value of p. or (iii), in preference to pipe connections welded directly to the
shell.
Extrapolation of the data beyond the limits presented
NOTE 2. These tabular values incorporate a margin of strength,
is not permitted If the chosen CTJT value for the suggested by experience, to cover additional loading by
vessel is greater than CTJT from the figure for which connected pipework of the order normally to be expected with a
4 = O for the relevant value of p, then no reinforcement properly designed and supported piping arrangement. The use of
of the branch is required and 4- can be chosen as the table 3.5-2 is described in 3.0.4.7b.
minimum permitted by table 3.52. For aùàitiord ease
of application, table 3.54 gives d u e s of CTdT for
various values of p when UTr = O in figures 3.59
to 3.511.
O BSIStandards
~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 L b 2 q b b S Ob7057b T 5 7
Table 3.6-3Desim values of UTy ~~
a) Associated with figure 3.6-9

P
CTdT 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1
3.2
3.1 .o4
3.0 .11
2.9 .15 .O6

2.8 .19 .13
2.7 .22 .17 .O7
2.6 .25 .21 .13
2.5 .29 .24 .17 .O6
2.4 .33 .28 .21 .13
2.3 .36 .31 .25 .18 .o4
2.2 .40 .35 .29 .22 .13
2.1 .45 .39 .33 .26 118 .o0
2.0 .49 .44 .37 .30 .23 .12
1.9 .55 .49 .42 .35 .28 .19 .11

1.8 .61 .54 .46 .39 .32 .25 .20 .10
1.7 .68 .61 .52 .45 .37 .30 .26 .19 .O7
1.6 .75 .68 .59 .51 .42 .35 .31 .26 .17 .04
1.5 .85 .77 .68 .58 .49 .40 .36 .31 .25 .15 .O2
1.4 .95 .88 .79 .68 .58 .47 .43 .37 .32 .24 .15 .O1
1.3 1.08 1.00 .91 .80 .68 .56 .51 .45 .39 .33 .25 .14
1.2 1.22 1.14 1.04 .93 .a1 .68 .61 .55 .4û .41 .34 .25 .14
1.1 1.37 1.29 1.19 1.08 .96 .82 .75 .67 .58 .51 .43 .35 .25 .O9
1.0 1.53 1.44 1.35 1.24 1.13 .99 .91 31 .71 .62 .52 .44 .34 .21 .O6

Section 3 Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
fr lTr
Figure 3.5-9 Design curves for protruding nozzles in spherical vessels (dD < 0.5) and
for protruding nozzles in cylindrical and conical vessels (dD < %)
I
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards 312 1
Table 3.6-3 Design values of UT, (continued)

b) Associated with figure 3.6-10
o
CT,/T LO 3.6 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1
4.0 .5 .38 .27 .14
3.9 .53 .41 .30 .17

3.8 .56 .44 .33 .21
3.7 .59 .47 .36 .24 .o0
3.6 .63 .51 .38 .27 .O9
3.5 .67 .54 .42 .29 .14
3.4 .72 .58 .45 .32 .17 .O6
3.3 .78 .62 .48 .35 .21 .12
3.2 .86 .67 .52 .38 .24 .17 .O2
3.1 .96 .73 .56 .41 .27 .21 .10
3.0 1.12 .80 .61 .45 .30 .24 .16
2.9 1.42 .89 .66 .49 .33 .27 .20 .O7

2.8 2.00 1.01 .72 .53 .36 .30 .24 .14
2.7 1.20 BO .58 .40 .33 .27 .19 .o0
2.6 1.52 .90 .64 .43 .36 .30 .23 .10
2.5 2.00 1.04 .71 .47 .40 .33 .26 .16
2.4 1.26 .80 .53 .44 .37 .30 .21 .O4
2.3 1.68 .91 .60 .49 .41 .33 .25 .12
2.2 2.08 1.09 .66 .55 .45 .37 .29 .18 .10
2.1 1.34 .76 .62 .50 .42 .33 .23 .17 .O6
2.0 1.68 .90 .72 .56 .46 .37 .27 .22 .15
1.9 2.00 1.10 .84 .65 .52 .42 .32 .27 .20 .10
1.8 1.36 1.02 .77 .60 .47 .37 .31 .26 .18 .O4
1.7 1.68 1.26 .96 .71 .54 .42 .36 .31 .24 .14 .O0
1.6 2.00 1.58 1.22 .90 .65 .49 .42 .36 .30 .22 .11
1.5 1.90 1.54 1.16 .82 .59 .50 .42 .36 .29 .20 .O7
1.4 2.33 1.90 1.50 1.09 .73 .61 .51 .43 .36 .27 .17 .O2
1.3 2.15 1.80 1.46 .94 .78 .65 .53 .43 .34 .25 .12
1.2 2.13 1.80 1.30 1.06 35 .66 .52 .42 .33 .22 .O8
1.1 2.09 1.72 1.38 1.16 .86 .69 .52 .42 .31 .17 .O
1.0 2.12 1.69 1.44 1.16 .93 .67 .50 .39 .25 .10

STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL I997 l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70599 7 b b D
Section 3 h e 2, September 1997 BS 5 5 0 : 1997
O BSI
P
CTdT 4.0 3.6 3.0 2.6 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1
3.1 .61 .49 .36 .24 .O4
3.0 .66 .54 .40 .28 .10
2.9 .71 .58 .44 .31 .15 0.7

2.8 .76 .63 .49 .34 .19 .13
2.7 .€E .69 .54 .38 .23 .17 .O7
2.6 1.02 .76 .59 .43 .27 .22 .13
2.5 1.32 .85 .65 .48 .31 .26 .18 0.05
2.4 2.00 1.02 .72 .54 .35 .30 .22 .12
2.3 1.30 .SO .60 .40 .34 .27 .18 .O6
2.2 1.78 .95 .68 .45 .39 .32 .24 .15
2.1 1.20 .77 .50 .44 .38 .30 .21 .O6
2.0 1.56 .92 .56 .49 .44 .36 .27 .16 .O5
1.9 2.00 1.15 .64 .56 .49 .42 .33 .23 .14 .O5
1.8 1.46 .75 .63 .56 .48 .39 .28 .21 .14 .O3
1.7 .90 .74 .64 .54 .44 .33 .26 .21 .12
1.6 1.16 .90 .74 .62 .50 .39 .32 .27 .20 .11
1.5 1.44 1.12 .89 .72 .59 .46 .38 .33 .26 .20 .O7
1.4 1.90 1.40 1.09 .84 .69 .55 .46 .40 .33 .27 .17 .O3
1.3 1.71 1.34 1.02 .84 .67 .57 .50 .41 .34 .26 .15
1.2 1.64 1.26 1.05 .85 .72 .61 .51 .42 .34 .26 .13
1.1 2.00 1.59 1.33 1.11 .95 .79 .65 .52 .43 .35 .25 .O9
1.0 1.96 1.68 1.42 1.22 1.04 .82 .66 .54 .45 .34 .22 .10

I-
&.
o
NOTE.For values of CUD 0.2 <CUD < 0.3 see 3.5.4.3.3.

Figure 3.5-11 Design curves for flush nozzles in cylindrical shells ( O < CUD< 0.3)
O BSI 1997 3/25

Licensed by Information Handling Services ~-
~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 L b 2 4 b b 7 O b 7 O b ü 2 080
Table 3.6-4 Values of CTJT for figures 3.6-9

to 3.6-11 when t,./Tr = O
P
Figure 3.6-10 I Figure 3.6-11
0.1 1.04 1.10 1.05
0.2 1.16 1.27 1.16
0.3 1.29 1.42 1.29
0.4 1.41 1.56 1.42
0.5 1.51 1.70 1.56
0.6 1.63 1.83 1.70
0.7 1.74 1.98 1.82
0.8 1.87 2.14 1.94
0.9 1.99 2.28 2.04
1.0 2.10 2.44 2.15

1.2 2.32 2.70 2.36
1.4 2.54 2.95 2.54
1.6 2.76 3.22 2.76
1.8 2.94 3.46 2.94
2.0 3.14 3.70 3.14
3/26
O BSI 1997
=
~~ ~
S T D - B S I B S 5 5 U O - E N G L 1777 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob7UbU3 TL7
Section 3 Issue 1, January 1997 BS 6600 :1997
or
CTJT Y
3.00 0.12
2.67 0.15
2.45 0.18
2.24 0.22
2.14 0.24
2.02 0.28
1.94 0.30
1.82 0.35
1.74 0.38
1.60 0.46
1.40 0.54
1.42 0.60
1.34 0.68
1.26 0.78
1.19 0.90
1.12 1.05
1.06 1.20
1.00 1.40
O 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
Y
NOTE 1. This figure may be represented by the following expression which may also be used for CTiíT values
greaterthan3
64
Y=
[4CTJT + 0.8 + ( 16(CTiqz - 12.8CTJT + 0.64}0.5]2
NOTE 2. For values of oYD 0.2 < drg < 0.3 see 3.6.4.8.3.
Figure 3.6-12 Design curves for flush n o d e s in cylindrical shells
(0.2 < d D I 1.0)
6 BSIStandards
~ ~ ~~
~~
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 L b 2 4 b b ï Ob70b04 9 5 3 m

BS Ssoo : 1997 Issue 3, January 1998 Section 3
3.6.4.3.4Limits on r e i n f m m t The rim shall be designed to a smooth profile,

The limits on reinforcement shall be as follows. concentsating material near the edge of the opening,
a) Where reinforcement is provided by uniform such that one-half of the total croF*esectional area
branch thickening, the thickness & of the branch, f a h g within the outermost exiremities of the
and protrusion if fitted, shall not be reduced within dimensions h and H as caìcula&edand measured
I a distance h =&measured h m the relevant
surface of the shell of thickness Tr (see
in 3.6.4.3.4a and b shaìì be not less than the following:
[2hf + T,(H + GI] (&(fn) if the rim protrudes;
figures 3.515, 3.516, 3.517, 3.519, 3.520 and 3.521). [ht,+ Tr (H + &)I (rJfJ if the rim is flush.
It is permissible to modify the distribution of NOTE. The cross-sectional area of the rim required in this
reinforcement so as to concentrate the material derivation will vary depenàing on the partacular combination of T,
and &. A triai procedure using different combinations of T, and tr
close to the opening in the shell. For flush nozzles, may be employed to establish the minimum area required. For the
onehalf of the totaì cross-sectional area of the protruding rim, the cross-sectional area shouid be equally disposed
branch wails failing within the distance h as about the sheii mid-thickness.
dc- and measured in this item a) shall be not 3.6.4.3.6 Obmund, diptical openings and oblique
less than hf (see figure 3.529). For protrudhg mzzh
nozzles, the corresponding cross-sectional area shall Noncircular openings and oblique nozzles shall be
be not less than 2h&,and the reinforcement shall be treated according to the rules for circular openings and
(approximately) equalur disposed about the shell nozzles normal to the shell with the following
mid-thickness (seefigure 3.5-30). The value of h is exceptions.
established for the uniform branch thickening case a) For a cylindricai shell with the minor axis of the
and shail not be r e c a ì c w if f is varied. opening parallel to the axis of the shell and for a
b) Where reinforcement is provided by uniform shell coNcal shell with the minor axis of the opening
thickening,the thickness Tr of the shell shall not be lying in a piane containing the axis of the conicai
reduced within a distance H measured h m the shell, d is the dimension of the minor axis of the
outer surface of the branch piece of thickness & or opening where a branch is not provided and d is the
the bore of the opening if no branch is fitted (see corresponding dimension of the opening plus the
figures3.514, 3.5-17, 3.518, 3.521 and 35-26), where
His the smaller of H = Cu2 and H = m. nozzle thickness where a branch is attached.
For all other cases, d is the dimension measured
It is permissible to concentrate the reinforcing across the major axis of the opening where a branch
materiai close to the opening. In this case,onehaif is not provided and d is the corresponding
of the total cross-sectional area taken between the dimension of the opening plus the nozzle thickness
outermost extremity of the dimension H on one side where a branch is attached.
of the nozzle and a similar point on the opposite b) In determining dimensions H and h, the value of
side of the nozzle, but excluding any are included d shallbe as given ina).
in a), shail be not less than T ! H +h). The value of H
shall be calculated and measured as in this item b) c) In the case of multiple openings the value of d A
used in 3.6.4.4.1 shall be determined using d as
(see ligures 3.529 and 3.530) and once established it
shall not be recal- given in a).
c) The required thickness of the branch, f (except 3.6.4.3.7 Dzssim.uar materials
for studded pads, see 3.6.4.8) shall be not greater The design procedure norma& assumesthe use of
than (2 - d D ) T r . Where the distribution of the similar material in the branch and shell but where this
reinforcement has been concentrated close to the is not the case and provided that the design stsength of
opening, as permitted in a) and b), the modified the branch,fn, is within the range 0.6fs to 1.5fs, the
thicknesses $i and (see ñgures 3.529 and 3.530) following shall apply:
if 0.6& < fn e&, the calcuiated branch thickness
shall be substitutd in this reiationship as (disregardjng here the requirement of table 3.52)
apPNP-. shall be increaseà to
d) The tmnsitions between secüons of shell or
between sections of branch or nozzle connecüons of
m e r e n t thicknesses shail be achieved by means of
a smooth taper. The requirements of 3.10.2 shall
where 2
k1
A check shall be made to ensure that complies
apply in the case of shell d o n s . with the minimum thickness requirements given in
table 3.52.
3.6.4.3.6 Rim &nforcemeîs and sefin nozzle
Where the thickness & is modified in accordance
fWWS with this subclause, it shall not be necessary to
It is permissible for the design of rim reinforcements recaicuiak the mean branch diameter, d, and iterate
(see figures 3.522 and 3.523) to be derived from that further and neither is it necessary to r e d c u h k h.
for branch connections in the following m e r .
If fn >fs, no reduction in f is permiaed.
In accordance with 3.6.4.3.3, a combination of Tr and NOTE 1. Where reinforcement is concentrated near the
$i shall be detennined, using ngUre3.59 if the rim is to opening, see also m es3.6-29 and 3.6-30.
be protruding (see figure 3.522) and ñgure 3.510, NOTE 2. For forged nozzle inserts, the procedure in 3.5.4.3.5
3.511 or 3.512 for a flush rim (see ngUre 3.523). includes the necessary thickening correction factor.

STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 LbE'Ybb7 0 b 7 0 b 0 5 8 9 T
M o n3 Issue 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Figure 3.6-13 Nozzle in a conical shell
P-
I
2 cos a
,/I
/
' Ai'1 \'
I
Figure 3.6-16a Notation applicable to

oblique nozzles in spheres
Figure 3.6-14 Notation

applicable to spheres

applicable to spheres
Figure 35-15 Notation

I applicable to spheres
O BSIStandards
\o
Figure 3.6-20 Notation applicable
Figure 3.6-17 Notation applicable to cylinders
to spheres
I
I
\D
Figure 3.6-18 Notation Figure 3.6-21 Notation applicable
applicable to cylinders to cylinders

applicable to cylinders
3/30
O BSI 1997
The dimensions T,, H, t, and h refer to the design of a branch connection using components of constant thickness from
which the design of the profiled rim is derived on an area basis
Figure 3.6-22 Protruding rim Figure 3.6-23 Flush rim
Spherical vessels Cvlindricai vessels
g = ( i + COS* ey2
For holes arranged
along the axial direction
( P = PL), g = 1
g=l For holes arranged along
the transverse direction
P=&,g=0.5
Cylindrical tube sheets

Take g = 1 or
4
g=-x-x
P-d l+cos'e
P 4 - d 2
___ Axial direction
whichever is larger
NOTE. For elliptical and oblique nozzles the value of d is the dimension of the opening in the direction of the relevant pitch.
Figure 3.6-24 Arrangement factor g
O BSI
~ ~~ ~
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1797 111 l b Z q b b 9 0b70b08 5 T 7

BS 5500 : 1997 h u e 1, Januasy 1997 Section 3
Total a r e a s h a d e d LL;LI = A ,
Total a r e a shaded m A ,
r / I
A / /
-'-- / +I
+2-;
/ /
I / / /
h I
i

Won 3 Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Figure 3.5-26 Notation applicable to Figure 3.5-28 Notation applicable

spheres and cylinders to spheres and cylinders
*
rn
*
Figure 3.5-27 Notation applicable to

spheres and cylinders
O BSI
~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 2 9 9 7 L b 2 4 b b 9 O b 7 0 b L O 1.57
Area 2 TrH- T,X
Area of weld metal may be

added to either area above Es!
jt-
H
a) Set-in
2 htr x fJfn
2 T,H + ( T,tJfJf"

added to either area above
b) Set-on
Figure 3.6-29 Modified flush branch compensation
3/34
O BSI 1997
~~ ~
~
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1797 m L b 2 4 b b î D b 7 0 b L 1 O93 D

Section 3 Issue 1,January 1997 BS BMW) : 1997
‘
-
U -
Area R = ht,f,/f,
Area
+
Area 1 TrH- T,X

added to either area above m
I Figure 3.5-30 Modified protruding branch compensation
O BSI
3.6.4.4 Design of groups of openings and branch b) The width of the pad is not less than HE.
connections c) The thickness of a pad does not exceed 40 mm or
3.5.4.4.1 Calculations the as-built shell thickness, whichever is the lesser.
The following calculations shall be carried out. d) The thickness of the pad is not less than Tí4.
a) A group of openings or branch connections is The amount of compensation to be provided shall be
deñned as being where the distance s is less equal to the amount which would have been necessary
than 3 4 m had the compensation been integrai.
b) Calculate reinforcement required as for the The design of reinforcing pads for branches where one
isolated case assuming that the full width H is or more of the criteria in a) to d) are not satisfied shall
available. be the subject of special consideration and the
c) Where the distance s is less than 2$F, the adequacy of the proposed design shall be
reinforcement calculated in b) shall be increased if demonstrated either by experience or by an hydraulic
required so that, for each ligament (see figures 3.524 proof test in accordance with 5.8.
and 35-25), As + An - At IgPT 3.6.4.5.2 Non-pressure considerations
d) Where the distance, s lies between 2@T and
Conditions a) to d) of 3.5.4.5.1 do not apply to
3$@, the reinforcement required shall be reinforcing pads which are used to limit the local
determined by linear interpolation as follows, using stresses due to mechanical loads on branches,
the dimensions determined in b). supports or mounting. However, the maximum
1) Calculate the compensation ratio Ki using the thickness of a pad which can be counted as effective
reinforcement required in b): reinforcement of a branch for pressure l o w shall be
limited to the value given in 3.5.4.5.1~.
If the thickness of the reinforcing pad is greater than
2) Calculate the compensation ratio K2 from the the vessel shell thickness, its size (cip X & in
following: figure G.47)shall be such that the design leg length of
the attachment welds to the vessel shell does not
exceed the vessel thickness (see 6.2).
NOTE. If Ki calculated from 1) is greater than unity, use Ki 3.5.4.5.3 General
= 1 in this equation.
Reinforcing pads are permitted to have one ventilation
3) Increase the dimensions calculated in b) if hole which shall remain open during welding andor
required so that, for each ligament, post-weld heat treatment.
A s + A n - At 2 Kgf"
Reinforcing pads shall not be used under conditions
e) The fmal thickness of the branch, t+ , shall be less where severe corrosiordoXidation is possible or where
than (2 - á/D)T,. there is the possibility of severe temperature gradients
f) The transitions between sections of shell or occurring, in service, across the thickness of the shell.
between sections of branch or nozzle connections of
different thickness shall be achieved by means of a 3.5.4.6 Vessels subject to external pressure
smooth taper. The requirements of 3.10.2 shall apply 3.5.4.6.1 Compensation of openings in single-walled
in the case of shell sections. vessels subject to extend pressure shall be designed
3.5.4.4.2 Ligament flficiency in accordance with the requirements for vessels
Where openings such as tube holes are drilled in a subject to internal pressure specified in 3.5.4, using an
definte pattern it is permissible to determine a internal design pressure equal to the external design
ligament efficiency and use it in accordance with pressure.
BS 1113.
3.5.4.6.2 Compensation required for openings in each
NOTE.in BS 1113 the ligament efficiency used in the thickness
caìculations is the minimum of the efficiencies of the longitudinal, shell of a double-walled vessel shall comply
diagonal, and circumferential ligament patterns. with 3.5.4.6.1 for the shell subject to externd pressure
3.5.4.5 Reiqforcing pads and with the requirement for vessels subject to internal
pressure irrespective of whether there is a common
3.5.4.5.1 Pressure considemtions branch connection rigidly attached to both shells or
It is permissible for the requirements in 3.5.4.1 not.
to 3.5.4.4 for the design of integral reinforcement to be
used for reinforcement of penetrations or openings 3.5.4.7 Branch pipes
incorporating pads, doubling plates, or studded, socket The design of branch pipes shall be governed by the
welded and screwed connections (see 3.6.4.8) but all following three main considerations.
of the following conditions shall be observed a) Ability to withstand design pressure. For this
a) The d.l)ratio is not greater than: purpose the minimum thickness of a branch shall be
one-third for double-sided pads, calculated in accordance with 3.5.1 for cyìindncal
onequarter for singlesided pads. shells.
3/36 O BSI 1997

= 1b2Libbï
~~
~
STD.BS1 B S 5 5 0 C - E N G L 1777 Ob70bL3 ï b b
Mon 3 Issue 3, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
b) Ability to withstand superimposed loading by The thickness of a studded connection shall be not
connected pipework or fittings. Notwîthstand~ngthe less than the largest of the following:
minimum thickness as required for a) or to comply
with 3.6.4.3, the branch, and its connection to the a) q ,the minimum thickness required for
vessel, should be analysed to demonstrate the ability compensation (see 3.5.4.1);
to withstand all relevant loads i.e. operational and b) t, the minimum thickness required for a flange
non-operational. If this analysis is not carried out the (see 3.8.3);
nomird thickness of a branch intended for e) the minimum thickness as given above for tapped
connection to externaì piping shall be not less than holes.
the smaller of
1) the value given in table 3.5-2 increased by the 3.6.6 Fiat ends and flat plates
amount of any required corrosion allowance; 3.6.6.1 Notation
2) the nominal thickness of the main portion of For the purposes of 3.6.5.2 the following symbols
the vessel shell. apply Ali dimensions exclude corrosion allowances.
The thickness of the branch need not be increased
if the nominal thickness of the shell is increased a is the smallest dimension of rectanguiar, eiiipticd
for piate availability reasons. or obround end
e) Suitability for the recommended forms of branch b is the greatest dimension of rectangular, elliptical
to shell attachment welds (see annex E). or obround end;
NOTE. In the case of stainless steel pressure vessels for the
food industry where the thickness to meet 3.5.4.7a is less C is the factor as given in figures 3.531a
than 2.5 mm, and where branch connections are formed by and 3.5-32a, b and d or, in the case of welded fiat
belling out as typified in figure E.2.25a, the minimum branch ends or plates (e.g. figures 3.5-31b and c), C is
thickness may be less than the thickness of the vessel,
provided that the compensation requirements of 3.5.4 are determined from figure 3.533;
satisfied, and that the minimum thickness is not less thm the d is the h e t e r of an opening (inside diameter of
minimum thickness specified in BS 4825 for stainless F , $ S . . ~ a branch);
pipes and fittings for the food indusm.
3.6.4.8 Studded, socket welded and screwed dA is the mean diameter of the two openings;
connections D is the diameter measured as in figures 3.5-31
Permissible forms of construction of studded, socket and 3.532;
welded and screwed connections are shown in Di is the diameter measured as in figure 3.531;
figures E.32 and E.33. Where required by 3.6.4
appropriate reinforcement shall be incorporated.
e is the minimum thickness of end or plate;
I
The thread forms on which joints are to be made shall ecyl is the analysis thickness of cylindrical shell;
comply with BS 21 Unless otherwise specified ecyl0 is the minimum thickness of cylindrical shell
(see 3.2.2) and shall not exceed the 1%thread size
designation unless taperhaper thread joints are used. PDM
Taperhaper thread joints shall not be used with thread ep is the calculated minimum thickness of end with
size designations greater than the following: openings;
2% where pressure I1.25 N/mm2
F is the total bolt load;
3 where pressure I1.05 N/mm2 f is the nominal design stress
NOTE. In cases where the design strength is time dependent,
4 where pressure 5 0.90 N/mm2 components designed by the procedure specified in this section
should be reviewed to ensure that creep deformation (local or
Irrespective of thread form, screwed connections in general) will be acceptable throughout the agreed design lifetime.
excess of the 1%thread size designation shall not be
used when the design temperature exceeds 260 "C. If G is the gasket diameter, as defined in 3.8.2,for
parallel threads are used, a collar and a facing around blind flanges with gasket entirely within the bolt
the hole shall be arranged to provide a joint face. circle (see figure 3.532~);
Welded sockets complying with BS 3799 or of H is the total hydrostatic end force;
equivalent form are permitted. The maximum diameter p is the design pressure;
of holes tapped in plates shall not exceed the thickness
of the plate before addition of the corrosion allowance. R is the distance of centre of circular opening from
Stud holes shall straddle the centre line of the vessel the centre of the circular end;
where practicable and shall be tapped to a depth of P
- is the distance between centre of two openings;
not less than the diameter of the stud plus 3 nun. There
shall be a minimum of 6 mm of metal between the
Y is the corner radius (see figure 3.5-31); 1
bottom of the stud hole and the pressure retaining u is the distance between flat end and end of
surface of the vessel before the addition of the thickness reduction (figure 3.5-31a);
corrosion allowance.
O ES1Standards
~
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1997 Lb2LiLbS O b 7 0 b 1 4 8T2
w is the minimum length of shell of thickness ecyl in

figure 3.531b and e:
w 2 ll(0+ ecy1)ecyl
2 is the coefficient for rectangular, elliptical or
obround ends given in figure 3.534.
r 2 Twice the nominal thickness of end or pìate;
C = 0.35
ifu 5: T + [1.1 - 0.8 (3$]*

Otherwise, C = 0.41.
W
I-
"i
b)
Dotted lines indica alternative profiles. T 2 5 mm or ecy1/4.The end may be undercut as shown to
make provision for the radius T or to improve access for
nondestructive testing of the weld (see figure E.41)
provided that r < ecy, and the thickness of the end is
nowhere less than eWl.
NOTE. The thickness of the cylinder, ecyineed only be maintained over a distance w from the end. The thiclaess of the cylinder
may be increased above ecYl@ut not so as to exceed e>local to the end and be reduced to a value not less than eCyloat more
distant points provided that the total cross-sectional area of the shell walls falling within the distance w from the end is not less
than wecyl. C is determined from figure 3.833.
Figure 3-5-31wpical welded flat ends and covers (for typical weld joint details, see figure E.41)
3/38 O BSI 1997

P
O
-il
I J
a) Fiat cover with a full face gasket G = 0.41 b) Blind flange with a full face gasket C = 0.41
c) Blind flange with gasket entirely within the bolt circle
Circular end plates Non-circular end plates
0.3G PZ +6Wm,hG
e=
ande,= 4 7
- G being measured dong the shorter axis
or el = {y whichever is the greater

andel=
iin"T,
-
where
Or el = -whichever is the greater
G, Wml,hG, SF*and SFO are as defined in 3.8.2; where

el is the minimum thickness at and beyond gasket;
minimum thickness of end plate is the greater of e and el. m is the minimum bolt spacing;
.nis the number of bolts;
minimum thickness of end plate is the greater of e and el
Figure 3.5-32 wpical non-welded flat ends and covers
O BSI 1997
3/39
~~
S T D m B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 9 7 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob7ObLb b 7 5
a) Where reinforcement of a circular end is obtained

OD by increasing the thickness of the whole end, the
P minimum thickness is the greater of:
ep = e i”
D - d - R
for fiai ends in accordance I
with figure 3.5-31 or 3.5-32a) or b) (1) I
G
% =edc- d - R for flat ends in aixordance I
with figure 3.532~)
and
t t! t t I t u t (3) I
P
Holes may extend up to the inside of the shell if the
end is welded or the inside of the gasket if the end
d) Cover with seif-sealingjoint is bolted.
b) Where reinforcement of a long rectangulas flat
plate @/a> 3) is obtained by increasing the
C = 0.17 + 0.75 - thickness of the whole end, the minimum thickness
is the greater of:
where
$=e{- a
F i s the total bolt load;
a-d (4) I
H i s the total hydrostatic end load. and
Figure 3.6-32 ’&pical non-welded flat ends

and covers (continued)
(5) I
I
Equation (5) does not apply if the lines joining the I
centres of the two holes are perpendiculax to the
axis of the end.
3.6.6.2 Flut unstuyed h e a d s 1 2 ) Holes may extend up the inside of the shell if the
3.6.5.2.1 Calculations plate is welded or the inside of the gasket if the end
The minimum thickness of an unstayed flat end is bolted.
without an opening shall comply with the following: c) For all other cases:
circular head: e = C m f Every opening shall be provided with reinforcement
rectanguh, elliptical or obround end e = CZaWJ of O.& axisymmetrically disposed about the centse
For blind flanges with the gasket entirely within the of the opening. The thickness of material considered
bolt circle, the minimum thickness shall be calculated as reinforcement shall not increase away from the
in accordance with the formulae given in opening. The limit on b m c h material that may be
figure 3.532~. included as reinforcement is the lesser of the two
For a blind fiange with full face gasket, bolt spacing values Z.5ta and 2.5T,.
shall not exceed where
2 X bolt 0.d. + (EL200 OOO)0.25 X &/(m + 0.5)
is the branch nominal thickness;
where is the flat plate nominal thickness.
Ta
E is the modulus of elasticity of fiange material,
at the design temperature, given in table 3.63 There is no limit on the extent of reinforcement
( i Nhnm2); across the surface of the piate except the edge of
the piate itself. The same piece of metal shall not be
m is the gasket factor given in table 3.84. used to reinforce more than one opening.
if necessary the blind flange thickness shall be NOTE 1. In no case is there a limit on the number of openings.
increased to enable this requirement to be met. NOTE 2. Obround openings for which the ratio of the major
and minor axes does not exceed 2, may be replacell for purpose
Flat heads with openings where or d/a < 0.5 shad of calculation by a circumscribing circular opening (which need
be provided with reinforcement as follows. not be concentsic).
12) For supporting information, see annex R.
3/40
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1777 m 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Db70b17 5 0 1
Section 3 Issue 2, May 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
O
o O o O
ci
O BSI 1997
~~
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 1b29bbS Ob70bLB 448
1.60
1.50
ru
4-
1.40
t
.-U
0)
.-
Y-
.&-
o
" 1.30
1.20
1.10
O 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1

Ratio a l b
NOTE.In the case of long flat ends (where a/b < 0.2) other than as shown in
figure 3.5-32, a minimum value of CZ equal to 0.71 should be used in accordance
with 3.5.5.2.1 to determine the thickness required.
Figure 3.6-34 Value of coefficient 2 for noncircular flat heads
3142
O BSI 1997
STD.BS1 B S 55UU-ENGL 1777 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70bL7 384
Section 3 Issue 2, September 1997 BS 5500 :1997
3.5.5.3.3 Stays
Where an opening of diameter greater than OB is The design stress of stays, calculated on the least
present, the flat head shall be designed in cross-sectional area, shall be not greater than the
accordance with the basic principles used in 3.8 for following:
flange design.
if, in the case of welded enddcovers, the nominal for solid staybass: 0.75f
design stress of the cylinder and endcover are for staytubes: O.70f
different, the lower value shall be used in every case.
This ensures that at the junction with the cylinder, the for staybolts 0.65f
cylindrical end of the flat head is not thinner than the
adjacent cylinder (see figure 3.531a). wherefis the design stress fi-om tables 2.3-2 to 2.312
or 3.8.1.4, as appropriate.
3.6.5.2.2 Additional loads For the purposes of calculation, the gross area
Where the external load on the end (or the loading due supported by each stay shall be as shown in
to reverse pressure) can exceed 10 % of the load due to figure 3.535g. In the case of stays of the type shown in
design pressure, or where, in the case of welded figure 3.535b it is permisible to use the nett area
ends/covers, the temperature difference between the supported in the equations.
endcover and the vessel b m c h exceeds 50 "C (30 "C The design stress in attachment welds shall not exceed
for austenitic steel), the design shall be given special 0.5fin fiilet welds and 0.6f in penetsation welds.
consideration.
Stays shall be of welding quality wrought materiais
3.6.5.3 Flat stayed plates without openin#s complying with section 2 and shall be compatible with
3.5.5.3.1 Plate th2ckness the material of the plates which they support. Stays
shall not be welded, except at the point of attachment.
The thickness of stayed and braced carbon and carbon Where nece-, long stays shall have additional
manganese steel and aluminium plates shall be support to prevent sagging.
calculated in accordance with the following:
3.5.5.3.4 Tube to tubqlute connections
t
7
e=KD - The central line of tubes that are to be expanded shall

not be closer together than 1.125d + 12.7 mm, measured
*
m
where at the t u b e p b , where d is the outside diameter of the
* tube in millimetres.
D is the diameter of a circle drawn through at NOTE. This subclause does not apply to tubeplates covered in 3.9.
least three points of support pitched at
reasonably reguiar intervals circumferentially; 3.5.6 Spherically domed and bolted ends of the
e is the minimum caiculated thickness; form shown in figure 3.5-36
f is the design stress; 3.5.6.1 General
K is a constant depending on method of Except as specified as follows for bolted ends of the
attachment of stay to plate (see figure 3.5-35). form shown in figure 3.536, conical and domed and
K shall be a mean value when more than one bolted ends shall be designed by treating the domed
type of support is involved; end and the bolted flange as two separate components
in compliance with the relevant clauses of this
p is the design pressure. standard.
NOTE.The method of determining the thickness of the flange ring
Designs in which plate deflection andor differential involves assessing the final thickness in order to arrive at the
expansion are significant shall be given special location of the centroid and hence the value of hr and is thus a
consideration. 'trial and error' calculation.
These equations are approximate in that they do not take account
3.5.5.3.2 Methods of support of the structurai continuity that exists at the junction of the head
The method of support shall be chosen from the and flange. A more exact (and often less conservative) analysis is
given by so ehren^'^). The stresses calculated using this approach
typical methods shown in figure 3.535a to f. should be assessed in accordance with annex A.
NOTE. When it is undesirable to drill a plate for the attachment of
stays, e.g. when the plate is to be lined, the use of stays of the
type shown in figure 3.5-35a o r b is recommended.
J. E. SOEHRENS. The design of floatingheads for heat exchangers. Pressure Vessel and Piping Design. CoUected Papers 1927 ta
13)
1959, ASME.
O BSI 1997
3/43
~
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL L777 Lb2Libb7 Ob70b20 OTb
Inside diameter of
stay tube is
greater than i t s
diameter length
Jacket
a) K = 0.55 b) K = 0.55
C) K = 0.50 d) K = 0.50
2112 t o r r whichever
is the lesser
e) K = 0.45
/ I
f) K = 0.45
Figure 3.5-35 Typical stays: areas supported by stays

COPYRIGHT O ES1 1997
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1797 W l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70bZL T 3 2 m
tube as in ( b )
Area supp
by one Sta
Equaliy spaced
g>
NOTE. For weld details see annex E.
Figure 3.5-35 '@pical stays: areas supported by stays (continued)
112 A
Full aenetration k 1/4(A+B)

weid
Use any suitable type of gasket
Figure 3.5-36 Spherically domed and bolted end
O BSI
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL 1997 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70b22 977
For the purposes of 3.6.6.2 and 3.6.6.3 the following is the total moment acting upon flange for
symbols appls All dimensions exclude corrosion gasket sealing conditions;
allowances.
is the total moment acting on flange for
is the outside diameter of flange or, where operating conditions;
slotted holes extend to outside of flange, the is the design pressure;
diameter to bottom of slots; is the inside radius of curvature of spherical
is the inside diameter of flange; crown section;
is the bolt pitch correction factor (see 3.8.2); is the nominai design stress for flange material
is the nominal design stress for material of at atmospheric pressure from table 2.3-2 to
spherical crown section; 2.3-12;
is the hydrostatic end force on area inside of is the nominal stress for flange material at
flange (i.e. force applied via connection to design temperature (operating conditions)
flange) = 0.785B2p; from table 2.3-2 to 2.3-12;
is the gasket load; is the minimum flange ring thickness;
is the radial component of membrane force is the flange minimum thickness required for
developed in spherical crown section, actjng at operating condition;
edge; is the flange minimum thickness required for
is the hydrostatic end force due to pressure on bolting-up condition;
flange face, = H - HD, where H is defined is the minimum thickness of spherical crown
in 3.8.2; section;
is the radial distance from bolt circle to circle is the angle between tangent to domed crown
on which HD acts; section at its edge and a plane p d e l to
is the radial distance from gasket load reaction flange face.
to bolt circle = (C - G)/2 where C and G are
as defined in 3.8.2;
is the axial distance from midsurface of
crown section at edge to centroid of flange
ring cross-section;
is the radial distance from bolt circle to circle
on which HTacts;
3/46
O ES1 1997
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777
3.5.6.2 Subject to internal pressure (concave to 3.5.6.2.3.2 FuU faced finges

pressure)
3.5.6.2.1 Crown section
The minimum thickness of the spherical crown section
shall be:
5-pR1
te = -
where HD,h D , HT, h, HG, h G , and h R are defined
(3.8) in3.8.4.1andHrandk,aredeñnedin3.5.6.1.
6f
3.5.6.2.2 f i n g e ring Bolt loads and areas shall be in accordance
with 3.8.4.2. Flange design shall be in accordance
The bolting area required, the bolt loads and the gasket with 3.8.4.3. Flange thickness shall be checked so that
width check shall be calculated in accordance with 3.8.
3.5.6.2.3 f i n g e ring thichm?.ss
The minimum thickness, T, of the flange ring shall be T 2 2 F (A -AB -- 2B d )
the greater of Tfo or Tfidetermined as follows, but
shall be not less than twice the crown thickness, i.e. where
T 2 2t,. A and B are defined in 3.5.6.1.
d is the diameter of the bolt holes.
3.5.6.2.3.1 Narrow .faced gashted f i n g e
a) Operating condition:
Fis determined from 3.5.6.2.3.1.
3.5.6.3 Subject to external pressure (convex to
pressure>
Tfo = F + (3.9)
The crown section and flange ring shall comply with
the following.
where a) Crown section
The minimum thickness of the spherical crown
section shall be the greater of:
1) thickness determined in accordance
with 3.5.6.2.1;
2) thickness of a spherid shell of radius R1 under
external pressure determined in accordance
with 3.6.4.
b) f i n g e ring
The thickness of a naxrow faced gasketed flange ring
shall be determined in accordance with 3.5.6.2.3.1
except that
NOTE. The product Hrhr may be negative if the sense of this Mop = HD@D- h ~+ )HT@T - hc) - 4 4
moment is opposite to the moments H$LD,HGhGandH,$. This NOTE. The gasket should be checked against excessive
negative sense is indicated in figure 3.5-36. The absolute values of deformation under the action of the bolt load and the external
p and Mop should be used in the equations for F a n d J,,. pressure thrust.
b) Bolting up condition: The thickness of a full faced flange ring shall be
determined in accordance with 3.5.6.2.3.2 except that
(3.10)
O BSI 1997 3/47

STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1777 Lb24bb7 Ob70b24 741
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 2, May 1997 Section 3
3.6 Vessels under external pressure is the analysis thickness of flange of stiffener
section (see figure 3.65);
3.6.1 General
is the analysis thickness of web of stiffener
These requirements take account of loading due to section (see figure 3.65);
pressure and temperature and, where significant
loaduigs as listed in 3.2.1 are present, support shall be -
-
provided for such loads, if nece-, by increasing the m a . stress in stiffener flange (at factored load)
shell thickness or by other means. yield stress of stiffener
The thickness of a component under external pressure (see equation (3.17));
shall not be less than the thickness required by this are the nominal design strengths from
standard for similas components under the same tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12 for shell and stiffener
internal pressure, or that required by 3.6, whichever is respectively;
the greater.
The allowable deviation from the shape assumed in -
design shall be specified on the drawing or in the sinhaL+sinaL
associated documentation. (See the notes to 3.6.2.1 (see table 3.6-2);
and 3.6.4.)
is the second moment of area of stiffener cross
NOTE 1. in cases where the design stsength is time dependent,
components designed by the procedure specified in this clause section about axis through centroid parallel to
should be reviewed to ensure that creep deformation (local or cylinder axiq
general) will be acceptable throughout the agreed design lifetime. is the unsupported length of shell (see
NOTE 2. For more information on the background to this section figure 3.65);
see proceedings of 1.Mech.E. Conference, 7 December 1972, on
Vessels under Buckling Conditions, and in particular the following is the -ce between heavy stiffeners (see
papers. figure 3.65);
C187/72 Buckling under external pressure of cylinders with either is the effective length of shell acting with
torisphencal or hemispherical end closure, by G.D. Galletly and
R.W. Aylward. stiffener (see table 3.6-1);
C190/72 Collapse of stiffened cylinders under external pressure, by are components of Le;
S.B. Kendrick.
C191/72 Collapse of domes iisider external pressure, by C.N.
Newland. is the distance between light stiffeners (see
NOTE 3. The derivation of these mies is given in Part 3 of figure 3.65);
PD 6550, the explanatory supplement to BS 5500.
NOTE 4. Some worked examples for the design method are given = (CoSh aL, - COS aL)l(sinh aL + sin aL)
in Enquiry Case 5500/52. (see table 3.62);
3.6.1.1 Notation is the required external design pressure;
For the purposes of 3.6.2 to 3.6.3 the following major is the elastic instability pressure for collapse of
symbols apply. All dimensions exclude corrosion spherical sheil (see equation (3.25));
allowances. is the elastic instaJiliQ pressure for collapse of
cylindrical shell (see equation (3.12));
A is the modified area of stiffener = R2As1R2,; is the elastic instability pressure for collapse of
Ac is the cross-sectional area of stiffener plus conical section between stiffeners (see equation
effective length of shell = (A, + eLe); (3.19));
As is the cross-sectional area of stiffener; is the elastic instabdity pressure of stiffened
B = 2eNlu(A + be); cylinder (see equation (3.13));
b is the width of stiffener in contact with shell; is the pressure at which mean circumferential
stress in cylindrical shell midway between
C is a parameter dependent on stiffener stiffeners reaches yield point of material (see
- proportions (see figure 3.65); equation (3.11));
= A(R - &) - Xc + el2 or Xc, whichever is
1 d
d
larger where Xc is given by equation (3.15);
is the radial height of stiffener between fianges
is the pressure at which mean circumferential
stress in conical section between stiffeners
reaches yield point of material (see equation
(3.18));
E is the modulus of elasticity of material of part is the pressure causing circumferential yield of
under consideration at design temperature (see stiffener (see equation (3.16));
table 3.6-3); is the pressure at which membrane stress in
e is the analysis thickness of shell plate; spherical shell reaches the yield point of
material (see equation (3.24));
3/43
O BSI 1997
is the mean radius of cylindrical, conical or b) Calculate p m as follows (using the same value for
spherical shells or sections, or crown radius of e assumed in calculating fi).
torisphericai ends;
(3.12)
is the radius of standing flange of stiffener,
is the radius of centroid of ring stiffener The value of E is obtained directly from figure 3.63.
cross section; e) Calculate pm/py and determine ‘ lp from curve a)
of figure 3.6-4.
is the mean knuckle radius of torispherical
ends; d) Calculate the allowable pressure p. If this value is
less than required, the assumed value of e shali be
is the radius of toe at point of rotation; increased or the spacing of the stiffeners, if any,
is the radiai distance of frame centroid from shall be a u s t e d until the required value is obtained
toe; NOTE. The design curve in figure 3.6-4 only applies to cylinders
that are circular to within 0.5 % on the radius measured from
is the factor relatingfto effective yield point of the true centre. A procedure by which the departure from the
material, for the purposes of 3.6 s may be taken mean circle may be obtained is given in 3.6.8. For cylinders
to be 1.4 for carbon, carbon manganese and outside this tolerance, p may be estimated by the procedure
ferritic alloy steels and 1.1for austenitic steels given in annex M.
and aluminium alloys 3103, 5154A, 5083 and 3.6.2.2 Stwening rings for cglindrical shells
545414) 3.6.2.2.1 Genera.!
is the outstanding width of flange of stiffener Any stiffening rings assumed to act in the derivation of
(see figure 3.65); p shall comply with 3.6.2.2 and 3.6.2.3. The size of the
= ?du& stiffenersl5) (acting at Ls) necessary to comply with
these requirements will depend significantly upon the
= 1.28/@,
use that is made of occasional heavy stiffeners or
is the mean elastic circumferential strain at diaphragms (acting at Lc) to control the effective
collapse; length and overall collapse of the stiffened cylinder;
is the angle of inclination of conical shell to stiffeners used for this latter purpose are hereafter
vertical iuris; termed ‘heavy’stiffeners and all other stiffeners ‘light’
is a parameter = + 1 for internal stiffeners, stiffeners.
-1 for external stiffeners; NOTE. Stiffeners may take the form of purpose-built rings
encompassing the shell. Such rings may be located internally,
is Poisson’s ratio (to be taken as 0.3); externally or partly internally and partly externally to the vessel.
Geometric discontinuities or other s h c t u r a l features may also
= A(l - p/2) /(A + be)(l + B) = O for no provide effective stiffening as illustrated in figures 3.6-5 and 3.64.
stiffeners. Rings for supporting trays, etc. in fractioning columns and similar
constructions may be used as stiffeners provided that they are
adequate for the duty and that they also comply with 3.6.2.3.
3.6.2 Cylindrical shells Stiffening rings and other features used as stiffeners
3.6.2.1 Unsupported cglinders shall, where practicable, extend and be completely
The thickness of unsupported cylinders, or cylindrical attached around the circumference; any joints shall be
lengths between points of support, shall not be less so designed as to develop the full stiffness of the ring
than that determined by the following procedure. (see also 3.10). Stiffening rings arranged with local
spaces between the shell and the ring, as shown in
a) Estimate a value for e (e.g. not less than that figure 3.61, shall be subject to special consideration,
required for internai pressure (see 3.6.1)) and but in no case shall the length of the unsupported shell
calculate py as follows. It is permissible to use the plate exceed the value:
approximation y = O to simplify the calculation but circumference
this may lead to an underestimation of the allowable
pressure p. 4n
where n is derived from figure 3.62.
sfe (3.11) Welds attaching stifïening rings to the shell should be
= R(l - yG) designed in accordance with 3.10. Intermittent welds
should not be used where crevice corrosion is likely to
Occur.
’*)It is permitted for carbon, carbon manganese and ferritic alloy steels to take sf as 1.4 RJ1.5 or 1.4Re(d1.5 (whichever is the lower)
for applications and temperatures where time dependent properties in tables 2.3-2 to 2.3.12 do not govern the values off.
15) An approximate first estimate of the size of stiffener likely to be required can be obtained by designing each stiffener with a
cross section of 10 % of the cross section of the shell wall between stiffeners. A full calculation shall be subsequently carried out to
check design adequacy.
O BSI 1997 3/49

a) Calculate p, from equation (3.13), taking the first

I r Stiffener term as zero, n = 2, and L, as half the distance from
the centre h e of the stiffener to the centre line of
the next stiffener on one side plus half the distance
to the centre line of the next stiffener on the other
side.
The value of p, shall not be less than 1 . 8 ~
in the
case of fabricated or hot formed stiffeners and 2p in
the case of cold formed stiffeners.
b) Calculate pys from equation (3.16).
c) Calculate F, from equation (3.17), taking n = 2.
The value Fn shall be equal to or less than 1.0, but
greater than O.
If the calculated values of p, or F,, are outside the
UnsuppÓrted length not t o limits specified, use one of the following procedures:
exceed value specified in 3.6.2.2 1) perform a more rigorous assessment (le. use
methods B or C if appropriate);
Figure 3.6-1Stiffening rings for 2) introduce additional or heavier stiffening;
cylindrical vessels subject to external
pressure 3) increase the shell thickness.
3.6.2.3.1.2 Method B
3.6.2.2.2 Limiting proportions of stiff- (see Method B s h d be used for a more rigorous
assessment than method A. A s in method A, it shall be
figure 3.6-5)
used for vessels stiffened only by light stiffeners, but
To ensure lateral stab%@,stiffeners shall comply with account is taken of the increased resistance to collapse
the following. of the vessel when treated as hawig a finite length
a) The proportions of Stiffeners (other than flat bar between the planes of substantial support provided by
stiffeners) shall be such that: the vessel ends. The following calculations shall be
’
1) c Sf#fEPyS
performed.
a) Calculate p, from equation (3.13), for values of
2) For stiffeners flanged at the edge remote from
the vessel shell: n = 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 and 6 using the appropriate d u e of I,
in each case and taking L, as the distance between
either d/e, I i . i a domed or flat ends, and L, as defmed in method A.
In each case, the value of p, shall not be less
than 1 . 8 ~in the case of fabricated or hot formed
stiffeners and 2p in the case of cold formed
or wflef I0.324- stiffeners.
b) For flat bar stiffeners: b) Calculate pysfrom equation (3.16).
c) Calculate F, from equation (3.17) for values of
n = 2,3,4,5 and 6 using the appropriate value of p,
Where o, is obtained from table 3.64 or table 3.G, in each case.
depending on whether the stiffener is internal or In each case the value of F, shall be equal to or less
external, using the d u e of n from figure 3.62. than 1.0 but greater than O.
3.6.2.3 Stwened cglinàers If the calculated values of p, or F, are outside the
limits specified, either additional or heavier stiffening
3.6.2.3.1 A l m t i v e methods of assessrnent
shall be introduced or the shell thickness increased.
The thickness of stiffened cylinders shall be assessed
by any of the methods described in 3.6.2.3.1.1
to 3.6.2.3.1.3 (see figure,s 3.65 and 3.6-6).
3.6.2.3.1.1 Method A
Method A which comprises a simple and conservative
assessment of each stiffener assuming that ascent
stiffeners support individual bays in an inñnitely long
vessel, shall be used for vessels stiffened only by light
stiffeners with the vessel ends treated as light
stiffeners. The following calculations shall be
performed.
3/50
O BSI 1997
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1777 m Lb24bb7 Ob70b27 450
O ES1
~~ ~ -
S T D * B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70b28 377
BS 5500 : 1997 h e 1,January 1997 M o n3
{m+m &
E = 1
n2- i+-
2
1 e2
(n2 - 1 + 2 2 ) 2
I
where n is an integer, > 2, obtained from figure 3.62 to minimize p,.
Figure 3-63 Values of E for use with equation (3.12)
3/52 O BSI 1997

STD.BSI B S 55üO-ENGL 1997 D l b 2 4 b b 9 0 b 7 0 b Z î 2 2 3 m
.ci- ò o ò ò o o
V
O BSI 1997 3/53

S T D . B S 1 B S 5500-ENGL 1997 Lb2LibbS Ob70b30 T 4 5

~
~~
S T D - B S I B S 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1 9 9 7 W l b 2 4 b b 7 O b 7 0 b 3 L 981
Suggested working form

Cylindrical shell external pressure
Simplified hand calculation. Method A for light stiffeners
units =
Shell check Material:
Young's modulus E= 1
Design stress f=
Stress factor S=
(1.4 for ferritic steels 1.1 for austentic steels)
Poisson's ratio ,u = 0.3
With no stiffeners (figure 3.6-6) For stiffeners (figure 3.6-6)

Unsupported shell length L = A = (= +1 for internal stiffeners or = - 1 for external
stiffeners)
maxjmum distance between stiffeners
Ls =
Allowable external pressure Assuming y = O and L = Ls Requi !df=
Corroded assumed
thickness e=
L12R We=
From figure 3 . 6 3 E =
PY = sfelR=
Pm = EedR =
p/py(from figure 3 . 6 4 ) =
:.(allowable) p --
Stiffener check Material:
e2112R2 -
Ls/2ïdE -
a = 1.28l@ aL=
N= from figure 3 . N
If LJ2ïdE 50.1 withn=2
from table 3 . 6 1 LdL, -
-
i
NOTE. Use linear interpolation. I I I
Hence Le =
tfLJ2n.R > 0.1 withn=2 Cross-sectional area AS

from table 3 . 6 1 z = Stiffener stress fs
NOTE. Use logarithmic interpolation, see Enquhy Case No. 5500/52. Radius RS
Le = ZR Flange radius Rf
2nd moment of area Is
Modiñed area = R2 AJR2 A
A, = A, + eLe
x, = (0.52Le + As[0.5e + 1(R -R,)]) / A c
1, = + Is + As[0.5e + A(R - RS)l2- AJ?
pn = 3EIc I s L s NOTE.pn to be > 2p (> 1.8p for fabricated or hot formed stiffeners)
3 = greater of 1(R - Rf) - X , + el2 and Xc
for fabricated or hot formed stiffeners O < F n 5 1.0

Check stiffener proportions comply with 3.6.2.2 ifp, 5 2p or Fn > 1.0 see 3.6.2.3.1.1
Date Calculation by Checked by
O BSI 1997 3/55

S T D - B S I BS 55OO-ENGL L977 IL b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70b32 B L B H
3.6.2.3.1.3 M e t b d C 3.6.2.3.2 Equations for a s s e s r n t of s t i f l m d

Method C shall be used for vessels having planes of cylirzders
substantial support intermediate between the vessel The following equations shall be used for the
ends i.e. designs employing only heavy stiffeners or assessment of stiffened cylinders.
those with heavy stiffeners and intermediate light Eeß (n2 - 1)
p,=--+ (3.13)
stiffeners.
NOTE. These intermediate planes of substantial support can be
R XE''
diaphragms, bolted flanges, etc. or can be deliberately introduced
as heavy stiffeners. ß for the values of n = 2, 3,4, 5 and 6, as required,
is obtained from figure 3.67;
The following calculations shall be performed
a) Light stflfms IC is the second moment of area of the composite
cross section of stiffener, and effective length
1) Calculate pn from equation (3.13) for values of (Le) of shell acting with it, about axis pasallel to
n = 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 and 6 using the appropriate value of axis of cylinder passing through centroid of
ICin each case and taking Ls as half the distance combined section (see figure 3.65);
from the centre line of the light stiffener to the
next line of support on one side plus half the The value of Le shali be determined from table 3.61
distance to the next line of support on the other for the value of n that is used for determining pn from
side, and Lc as the distance from the centre line equation (3.13) for methods A, B and C.
of the heavy stiffener to the centre line of the next NOTE. The values of n used throughout this clause should not be
heavy stiffener or point of substantial support. confused with n used in figures 3.6-2 and 3.6-3.
In each case the value of p n shall not be less ICmay be evaluated as follows:
than 1 . 8 ~ in the case of fabricated or hot formed
stiffeners and 2p in the case of cold formed $Le + Is + As[& + A(R - RS)l2- AJe2
IC= 3 (3.14)
stiffeners.
2) Calculate pys from equation (3.16). where
3) Calculate Fnfrom equation (3.17) for values of Le + As[e/2 + A(R - R,)] (3.15)
n = 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 and 6 using the appropriate value of
pn in each case.
In each case the value of Fnshall be equal to or (3.16)
less than 1.0 but greater than O.
If the calculated values of p , or Fn are outside the NOTE. The simplificationA = O is always permissible but will
result in a larger stiffener section.
limits specified, either additional or heavier stiffeners
shall be introduced or the shell thickness increased
b) Heavy stiflëners
1) Calcuiate p , from equation (3.13), taking the in the case of fabricated or hot formed
first term as zero, n = 2 and Ls as Le. stiffeners
The value of pn shall not be less than 1.ûp in the
case of fabricated or hot formed stiffeners and 2p or (3.17)
in the case of cold formed stiffeners.
2) Calculate pysfrom equation (3.16).
3) Calculate Fnfrom equation (3.17) for value of
-_
1
in the case of cold formed stiffeners
,
n = 2.
The value of Fnshall be equal to or less than 1.0
but greater than O.
If the calcuiated values of p n or F n are outside the
limits specified, either additional or heavier stiffeners
shall be introduced or the shell thickness increased
3/56
O BSI 1997
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 L b 2 4 b b S Ob70b33 75Li e
-IWfl-
1
-IWf r*
i Internai stiffener
CG,: centroid of stiffener

CG,: centroid of stiffener plus effective length of shell - Le
For unequal spacing of stiffeners,Le shall be taken as the average value using table 3.6-1 for the two adjacent
bays.
Figure 3.6-5 Schematic representation of stiffeners
O BSI
composite section
--py1- -1 -
a) Structurai members
-
>’’
where
Af is the area of flange;
A, is the area of web;
If is the second moment of area of flange about its own ceníroid
I, is the second moment of area of web about its own centroid.
L, or f ,
k
I I
Axes o f elastic
centre of effective h
F’
/- -
-----
--d
NOTE. A, of one flange to be taken as the shaded area minus e(ew + Le). Combined As and ICof both flanges shail be taken when
evaluating their adequacy as stiffeners, in accordance with 3.6.3.2.
b) Bolted flanges
Figure 3.6-6 Schematic representation of stiffeners (continued)

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 L b 2 4 b b ï Ob7üb35 5 2 7 I
Section 3 Issue 1, Janmuy 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
0.4 hi
NOTE. For plain cylinders enclosed by dished ends, the effective unsupported length of the cylindrical shell is the tangent length
plus 0.4 X i n t e n d depth of each end.
Ends to be designed in accordance with 3.6.5, 3.6.6, or 3.6.7 as appropriate.
c) Dished ends and junctions

Figure 3.6-6 Schematic representation of stiffeners (continued)
O BSI 1997 3/59

~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70b3b 4 b 3

BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 1,Jcuiuary 1997 Section 3
Design step á ) Plain cylinder with no 3) Cylinder with light stiffeners (c) Cylinder with light and heavy
kiffeners stiffeners of equivalent points of
substantial support
Heavv stiffeners
substantial support
Determination of L for L is determined for each bay separately y:

evaluation of Z in
equations (3.21) and
,
L1 = (BI - b l ) + 0.4hl@ay 1) L, = B, - b - b"2 (bay 2)
(3.22)
z = rcR
-
L
Bay 1 Bay2 Bay3

Determination of L, and
L, for evaluation of p,
in equation 3
Method A (L, assumed
Not applicable as there are no
stiffeners
L, =
B, + O.&, + B,
2
(stiffener i) ; L, = '+
L, is determined for each (light) stiffener separately as:
(stiffener 2)
infinite)
(d- l)EIc
Pn= pLs
Method B Not applicable as there are no Lc (for purpose of evaluating j?) = A + + 0.4/~"~
(L, assumed finite) stiffeners Ls is determined for each (iight) stiffener separately as above
Ee,û (n2 - ~)Ez,
P n = R + p
L,
Method C (taking Not applicable as there are no Proceed as for method B above L, for the purpose of evaluation 13
account of intermediate stiffeners is determined for each bay between
points of substantial heavy stiffeners as:
support) L,, = B +0.4h'i (bay
a) for design of light
stiffeners L,, = ~ ' @ay
2 ~ ' 2 )
b) for design of heavy L, is determined for each light

stiffeners stiffener separately as above
Not applicable as there are no L, is determined for each heavy

intermediate points of substantial stiffener as:
support as defined in 3.6.3.2
LC1 =
Figure 3.6-6 Design of stiffeners
3/60 O BSI 1997

~~ ~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1 7 7 7 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob7ilb37 3 T T
Section 3 Issue 1, Jaaiuary 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
3.6.3 Conical shells The altemative methods of assessment for stiffened

The procedures specified in 3.6.2 for cylindrical shells cylinders in 3.6.2.3 shall apply except that p,, pys and
shall be modified in accordance with 3.6.3.1 to 3.6.3.3 F, shall be determined from the following modified
to determine the thickness of conical shells with an versions of equations (3.13), (3.16) and (3.17).
angle of inclination û to the vertical axis 5 75".
3.6.3.1 Unsupported lengths (see figure 3.643a) Eeß cos3 û + (n2- 1) EI', cos 8
Pn= - (3.20)
Unsupported lengths shall be designed using the Rmean (Enax)3Ls
following equations. where
a) Assume a value for e and calculate pycas follows:
ß is dgermined from figure 3.6-7 takjng L@ as
L&em COS
esf cos e
Pyc = (3.18) I', is the second moment of area of composite
&ax
cross section including stiffener and effective
length (Le) of shell acting with it (see
This equation is obtained from equation (3.11) by figure 3.6-5a).
substituting e' for e where e' = e cos 8, for R
adt&ingy=O For the purposes of evaluating IC, the effective length
b) Calculate pmc as follows: of each bay on either side of the stiffener under
consideration shall be taken as onehalf of Le as
derived from table 3.61 talang:
Ee&cos3û (e cos 812 e2
Pmc = (3.19) in place of
&nean lusZ 12R
Ls inplaceof- LS
This equation is obtained from equation (3.12) by 2m cos 8 2nR
substituting for e, R and E as follows:
where
e' = e cos 8
4 is measured in plane of stiffener under
R' = kern CO$ û consideration.
E' = E COS^ 6 The value of Le shali then be obtained by taiung the
E is determined from figure 3.6-3 using L'I2R' appropriate value of L,JLs from table 3.61 and
and2R'le' where L' = L cos 8. multiplying it by L,lcos 6.
c) Calculate pmclpyc and determine PIPycfrom
curve a) of figure 3.6-4.
d) Calculate the allowable pressure p. If this value is
less than required, the assumed value e shall be
increased or the spacing of the stiffeners (if any) NOTE. The simplificationA = O is always permissible but wiii
shall be alusted until the required value is obtained. result in a larger stiffener section.
3.6.3.2 Stwened conical shells
3.6.3.2.1 Procedure where sheU thickness and
s t q f m SLwspacing is constant along length of cone
(see figure 3.6-813)
The requirements for stiffening ring proportions in the case of fabricated or hot formed I
in 3.6.2.2 shail apply without modification. stiffeners or
'(3.22)
- _
- 2p + Ed' ['"z - 1) 0.01@]
~ y s &naxsfs Pn - 2~
in the case
- of cold formed stiffeners
where d' = X f + e# (see figure 3.6-5a). i
O BSI
BS 5 5 0 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Section 3
3.6.3.2.2 Procedure where sheU thickness and

s t i I f m s2zdspacing vary along length of cone (see
figure 3.68~)
The minimum shell thickness for any length between
planes of substantial support shall be determined using
equations (3.18) and (3.19). The requirements for
stiffening ring proportions in 3.6.2.2 shall apply
without modification. It is permissible to use the
alternative methods of assessment for stiffened
cyiinders in 3.6.2.3 with equations (3.20, 3.21 and 3.22)
with any of the following.
a) Where the stiffener pitch and size is constant, use
the minimum thickness anywhere along the length of
the section under consideration (i.e. e1 in
figure 3.6-8~)in calculating p , and pYs;take I’, as
defined in c).
b) Consider each stiffener separately using the
appropriate minimum shell thickness and I&,= for
the two half bays on either side of the stiffener and
ß = O (Le. ignoring the first term in equation (3.20) in
the calculation of pn).
c ) Consider each stiffener separately using the
appropriate minimum shell thickness and &ax for
the two half bays on either side of the Mener.
Where n > 2, calculate p , as in b) i.e. with ß = O, and
where n = 2, calculate pn from the following equation;
e+
E ~ ~ C O S ~ ECOS e(n2 - 1)
(3.23)
Pn= %em LC
where
-
e is the minimumthickness in total cone length;
ß is determined from figure 3.67 taking Lc/2R as
L a e m COS @
Ri is the radius in plane of stiffener under
consideration at axial distance Xi from small
end of the cone;
N is the number of bays between light stiffeners
in length L,;
rci is the combined second moment of area of
stiffener and shell at rurial distance Xi from the
small end of the cone using Le as determined
in 3.6.2.3.2 and taking values for e separately
for each bay.
3/62
Table 3.6-1 Derivation of L, Table 3.6-1 Derivation of Le (continued)

ez 2 10-4 & = 10-7
Lo_ n L, n
2nR 2RR 2 3 4 6 6
- 2 3 4 5 6
O 1.0980 1.0980 1.0980
O 1.0980 1.0980 1.0980 1.0980 1.0980 1.0980 1.0980
0.01 1.0823 1.0823 1.0663 1.0663 1.0504 0.01 0.9072 0.9072 0.8913 0.8913 0.8913
0.02 1.0663 1.0504 1.0265 0.9947 0.9629 0.02 0.4297 0.4297 0.4218 0.4218 0.4218
0.03 1.0504 1.0027 0.9549 0.9019 0.8435 0.03 0.2759 0.2759 0.2759 0.2759 0.2759
0.04 0.9907 0.9231 0.8515 0.7838 0.7082 0.04 0.2207 0.2207 0.2207 0.2191 0.2191
O. 05 0.8976 0.8276 0.7512 0.6716 0.5952 0.05 O. 16% O. 1655 O. 1655 O. 1623 O. 1623
0.06 0.7921 0.7298 0.6609 0.5871 0.5143 0.06 O. 1490 O. 1487 O. 1487 O. 1461 0.1461
0.07 0.6866 0.6321 0.5707 0.5025 0.4343 0.07 O. 1324 0.1318 0.1318 o. 1299 O. 1299
0.08 0.6111 0.5630 0.5088 0.4480 0.3877 0.08 0.1159 O. 1149 O. 1149 O. 1136 0.1136
0.09 0.5355 0.4940 0.4470 0.3935 0.3410 0.09 0.0993 0.0980 0.0980 0.0974 0.0974
o. 1 0.4600 0.4249 0.3852 0.3390 0.2944 o. 1
- 0.0828 0.0812 0.0812 0.0812 0.0812
7
% = 10-5
NOTE When dei rming L, f r heavy sti-eners, L, ! ould be
used instead of Ls.Where stiffeners are spaced unequal
distances apart, Le shall be taken as the average of the two
values of Le, calculated as above, taking L,or L, corresponding
n to the lengths of the bays on each side of the stiffener under
Ls consideration.
5 8 2 3 4 5 6
NOTE 2. For intermediate values of 7
2 use logarithmic
O 1.0980 1.0980 1.0980 1.0980 1.0980 interpolation. 12R
0.01 1.0823 1.0823 1.0663 1.0663 1.0504 NOTE 3. For intermediate values of 2? useilinear interpolation.
2?&
0.02
0.03
1.0345
0.9019
1.0186
0.8807
0.9947
0.8541
0.9629
0.8117
0.9311
O. 7639
For & > 0.1
0.04 0.7242 0.7003 0.6724 0.6326 0.5929

0.05 0.5602 0.5411 0.5220 0.4934 0.4647
0.06 0.4483 0.4350 0.4218 0.4005 0.3793
0.07 0.3752 0.3661 0.3547 0.3388 0.3206 where
0.08 0.3263 0.3163 0.3084 0.2964 0.2805 a=L,
0.09 0.2920 0.2847 0.2775 0.2660 0.2525 2&
0.1 0.2578 0.2531 0.2467 0.2355 0.2244 x is the value of L&, in table 3.6-1 at a = 0.1,
2 is the value from following table.
This expression is also an acceptable approximation where

&
s 0.07 5 < 0.1
2RR-
Ls_
2idz
n
- 2 3 4 5 6
O 1.0980 1.0980 1.0980 1.0980 1.0980
0.01 1.0663 1.0504 1.0504 1.0504 1.0345
0.02 0.8276 0.8196 0.8037 0.7878 0.7719 e2 n
0.03 0.5252 0.5199 0.5146 0.5040 0.4934 m 2 3 4 5
O. 04 0.3740 0.3700 0.3661 0.3621 0.3541 210-4 0.273 0.257 0.235 0.207
3.05 0.2960 0.2928 0.2897 0.2865 0.2801 10-5 O. 159 0.157 o. 154 O. 147
0.06 0.2661 0.2632 0.2604 0.2575 0.2521
10-6 0.091 0.090 0.090 0.089 0.087
3.07 0.2362 0.2336 0.2311 0.2285 0.2241
3.08 0.2063 0.2040 0.2018 0.1996 0.1961 10-7 0.051 0.051 0.051 0.051 0.051
3.09 0.1763 0.1744 0.1725 0.1706 0.1681
3.1
- O. 1464 o.1448 o. 1432 0.1416 0.1401
16) It is always safe to use the approximation Le = ZR to determine L,.
O BSIStandards
Table 3.6-2Values for G and N which may be 3.6.3.3 Condcglinder intersections
6assumed
O
G
1.000
N
O
3.6.3.3.1 Intersection at large end of cone
It shall not be necessary to provide additional
thickening or local stiffening when the following
procedure is followed.
0.2 1.000 o. 100 When 8 2 30", the intersection may be viewed as a
0.4 1.000 0.200 plane of substanüal support and the cone and cylinder
0.6 0.999 0.300 treated separately provided that n, the mode number
for minimum overall buckling pressure obtained from
0.8 0.996 0.400 figure 3.62, or from equation 3.13 when light stiffeners
1.0 0.990 0.497 are present, does not equal 2 for either the cone or
1.2 0.979 0.593 cylinder.
1.4 0.961 0.685 When 8 < 30", or n = 2, the minimum thickness of both
the cylinder and the cone shall be determined
1.6 0.935 0.772 from 3.6.2.1 by assuming L to be the effective
1.8 0.899 0.851 unsupported length of the cylinder (figure 3.6-5) plus
2.0 0.852 0.921 the axial length of the cone. Light stiffener dimensions
and spacing, if appropriate, shdl be determined
2.2 O. 795 0.979 from 3.6.3.2 and assumed for the cone as well as the
2.4 0.728 1.025 cylinder. In this case & = L as defined above.
2.6 0.653 1.058 NOTE. Additional thickening and/or local stiffening wiii generally
be necessary at the intersection at the small end of the cone to
2.8 0.573 1.078 keep the maximum hoop stress under external pressure within
acceptable limits. This stress should be calculated by suitable
3.0 0.492 1.088 means and where necessary, additional stiffening should be
provided or the thickness of the conical section increased to the
3.2 0.411 1.090 value required by this clause for the actual design pressure
3.4 0.335 1.085 multiplied by the factor (max. hoop stress X dpR).
3.6 0.264 1.077 3.6.4 Spherical shells
3.8 0.200 1.066 The thickness of a spherical shell shall be not less than
4.0 o. 144 1.054 that given by the following procedure.
a) Assume a value for e and calculate fiss as
4.2 0.095 1.042 follows:
4.4 0.054 1.032
%fe (3.24)
4.6 0.019 1.023 Pyss =
4.7 0.004 1.019 b) Calculate Pe as follows (using the same value for
O.OO0 1.018 e assumed in calculating pyss).
(4.731
4.8 O.OO0 1.015 (3.25)
5.0 0.0o0 1.009 e) Calculate pJpyss and determine plfiss from
5.2 0.000 1.005 curve b) of figure 3.64.
5.4 O.OO0 1.001 d) Calculate the allowable pressure p: if this value is
5.5 O-O00 1.000 less than required, the assumed value of e shall be
increased until the required value of p is obtained.
> 5.5 O.OO0 1.000 The design curve in figure 3.64 applies only to spheres
that are spherical to within 1% on the radius and in
which the radius of curvature based on an arc length
of 2 . 4 4 G does not exceed the nominal value by
more than 30 %.
NOTE. Enquiry Case 5500L33 gives guidance on verification of
shape of vessels subject to external pressure.
For some applications this criterion for applicability
can be too stringent to be met owing to difficuities of
manufacture and measurement. In such cases it is
permissible to divide the pressure obtained from the
above procedure by the factor (.Rma/1.3R)2 where
&,,ax is the maximum local radius of curvature either
measured or estimated conservatively

I
, Table 3.6-3 E values for ferritic and austenitic steels and aluminium alloys (Young's modulus)
I Temperature
T Ferritic materials
NIm2
210 x 103
Austenitic materiais
N/mm2
203 X 103
I Temperature
"C
-200
Aluminium
N/mm2
76.6 X 103
209 X 103 200 x 103 -20 70.5 X 1@
202 x 103 193 X 103 O 69.9 X 103
199 x 103 185 x 103 20 69.3 X 103
191 x 103 176 X 103 100 67.4 X 103
181 X 103 168 x 103 150 65.4 X 103
174 X 103 159 X 103 200 62.3 X 103
162 X 103 151 X 103
142 X 103
1 3x 103
*
VI
*
O BSIStandards
BS 5500 : 1997 h e 1,January 1997 Section 3
1
ß=
(n2 - i +J}’o(. {n2(’J + ir
Figure 3.6-7 Values of ß for use with equation (3.13)
3/66
O BSI 1997
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 W l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70b43 b T 3 l
i
a) Unstiffened lengths (see 3.6.3.1)
Figure 3.6-8 Conical sections: typical stiffeners
O BSIStandards
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1997 = lb24bb7 O b 7 O b 4 4 53T
j
See 3.6.3.3
b) Stiffened conical shells (see 3.6.3.2.1)

Figure 3.6-8 Conical sections: typical stiffeners (continued)
3/68
O BSI 1997
e) Stiffened conical shells with varying thickness and stiffener pitch (see 3.6.3.2.2)
*
r
n
x. Figure 3.6-8 Conical sections: typical stiffeners (continued)
O BSI
~ ~ ~ ~
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70b4b 302

Table 3.6-4 Values of (aJE) (d/ewpfor internal flat bar stiffeners

n d/R
0.01 0.02 0.04 0.06 I 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 10.16 0.18 0.20
2 0.0119 0.0236 0.0466 0.0691 0.0913 0.114 O. 135 0.157 0.180 0.202 0.225
3 0.0239 0.0461 0.0865 0.123 0.156 O. 187 0.217 0.247 0.276 0.305 0.334
9 0.0395 0.0734 O. 130 0.176 0.216 0.252 0.286 0.319 0.353 0.386 0.421
5 0.0577 O. 103 0.171 0.223 0.266 0.304 0.341 0.378 0.416 0.456 0.498
6 0.0778 O. 132 0.208 0.262 0.306 0.347 0.387 0.428 I
0.472 0.517 0.570
7 0.0981 O. 160 0.240 0.294 0.340 0.382 0.427 0.474 0.527 0.580 0.643
!3 0.119 O. 186 0.268 0.322 0.369 0.415 0.465 0.517 0.580 0.647 0.725
9 0.139 0.210 0.290 0.345 0.394 0.445 0.502 0.565 0.638 0.720 0.812
10 0.158 0.231 0.310 0.365 0.417 0.474 0.536 0.614 0.696 0.792 0.903
11 0.176 0.249 0.328 0.383 0.440 0.502 0.575 0.662 0.758 0.874 1.010
12 0.193 0.266 0.343 0.400 0.461 0.531 0.614 0.715 0.831 0.966 1.121
13 0.209 0.280 0.356 0.416 0.483 0.560 0.657 0.768 0.903 1.058
14 0.224 0.293 0.368 0.431 0.502 0.594 0.700 0.831 0.981
15 0.237 0.304 0.379 0.446 0.527 0.628 O. 749 0.894 1.068
16 0.249 0.314 0.389 0.461 0.551 0.662 0.797 0.961
17 0.260 0.324 0.399 0.476 0.575 0.696 0.850 1.034
18 0.270 0.332 0.409 0.493 0.599 O. 734 0.903 1.106
19 0.279 0.339 0.418 0.507 0.623 O. 773 0.961
20 0.287 0.346 0.427 0.522 0.652 0.816 1.019
NOTE 1. S i c e (a$E)(dew)2 is limited to a maximum value of 1.14, values of the expression should not be extrapolated beyond
that value.
NOTE 2. For intermediate values of dR,use logarithmic interpolation
Example. For n = 2, the value of (o$E)(dew)2is required for dR =0.05.
fien:
(a$E)(d/e,)2= antilog log(0.0466) + [log(0.0691) - log(O.O466)] [o,o6
''O5 -"'"1
- o,o4 = 0.0567

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70b47 249
Section 3 Issue 1, Janmuy 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards 3îi1
3.6.5 Hemispherical ends 3.7 Supports, attachments and internal

Hemispherical ends shall be designed as for spherical structures
shells.
3.7.1 General
3.6.6 Torispherical ends
Supports, attachments and internal structures shall be
'ibrispherical ends shall be designed as spherical shells designed to withstand all loadings iikely to be imposed
of mean radius R equal to the external dishing or in service due to pressure, weight of vessel and
crown radius. The shape limitations in 3.6.2 shall contents, machinery and piping loads, wind,
apply. earthquake, etc.
3.6.7 Ellipsoidal ends NOTE. Deformations iikely to occur under such loads and rapid
changes in temperature can give rise to significant stresses in
Ends to tsue semi4liposidal form shall be designed as supports and attachments and will require particular
spherical shells of mean radius R equal to the consideration.
maximum radius of the crown, i.e. @/4h. The shape For vessels designed to withstand external pressure, the support
limitations in 3.6.2 shall apply arrangements should distribute loadings as evenly as practicable
and should avoid points of high load concentration.
3.6.8 Procedure by which the departure from The effects on the shell of a pressure vessel of local forces and
the mean circle may be obtained (see 3.6.2) moments which may come from typical attachments and supports
Where difficulty is experienced in determining the are covered in some detail in annex G. Criteria for the assessment
of the stresses caused are given in that annex and more generally
departure from the mean circle by more direct in annex A.
methods, use of the following procedure is permitted.
It is permissible to weld or stud bolt supports, etc. to
Radi are measured at 24 equally spaced intervals
the shell of a pressure vessel Weld design shall comply
around the circumference. This can be done either by
with 3.10. In the design of stud connections, particular
swinging an ann internaily or by extenial
measurements with the cylinder mounted in a lathe. It attention shall be given to fatigue 10- and to the
is necessary to rotate the internal arm or cylinder
specification of attachment methods which wiil
consistently meet the design duty. Where significant
about an axis near to the true centre of circularity of
the section under ~onsideration.~~) tensile stresses are likely to be developed through the
thickness of a shell plate as a result of a local
The radial measurements need to be corrected for the attachment, suitable tests shall be specified by the
mean and for the error in positioning the centre. This manufacturer at the design stage (to be carried out as
is done by finding the coefficients bo, a1 and bl in the in 4.2.2.6) to check that the shell material is locally
Fourier series expansion of the radial measurements suitable for such loads.
from the assumed centre:
The materials for attachments connected direct to the
R,, = bo + ai sin rp + bl COS ya, + shell comply with 2.1. The welding of ali attachments
+ c (a,
n=2
W
sin ma, + b, cos m q )

shall be carried out by welders and procedures
approved in accordance with section 5.
For 24 e q d y spaced measurements

r = 0 , 1 , 2,.... 2 3 , 9 = 1 5 "
and
. r=23
. r=23
bl = 1E R,cos ra,
r=O
The departure from the mean circle at any point r a, is
R, - bo - al sin r ~-, bl COS YY,
where R, are the radial measurements from the
assumed centre.
17) See also Enquiry Case 5500/33

~~~
~
STD.BSI B S 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1777 Lb24bb7 O b 7 ü b 4 7 OLL
Section 3 h u e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
3.7.2 Supports 3.7.2.3 Horizontal uessels

3.7.2.1 Design Where practicable, only two supports s h d be provided
The design of supports shall enable inspection and for horizontal vessels.
maintenance to be carried out during the life of the NOTE. Horizontal vessels may be supported by means of saddles,
equivalent leg supports or ring supports (see annex G). For
vessel. Care shall be taken that the temperature thin-walled vessels where excessive distortion due to the weight
gradients in external structures immediately d a c e n t of the vessel may be expected, ring supports as shown in
to the shell do not produce stresses in excess of those figure G.52 are recommended. Vessels designed to withstand
laid down as pennissible. If nece-, lagging shall be extenial pressure should be supported close to the ends or
applied to limit the temperature gradient to a value alternatively at stiffeners.
producing acceptable stresses. Loads arising from Horizontal cylindrical vessels that are provided with
differential thermal expansion of the shell and the v e r t i a external tower-like extensions shall, where
supporting stsucture in general shall not produce necessary, have the extensions supported
stresses in either in excess of those permitted by the independently of the vessel with suitable provision to
appropriate specification. ensure that loads imposed on the vessel due to thennal
NOTE. External stays or internal framing which support internal expansion or contraction are acceptable.
parts may be used to provide a stiffening effect on the shell where
external supports are attached. Steel supporting structures that do 3.7.2.4 Internal structures
not form part of the vessel should comply with BS 449 or BS 5950.
When such supports are to be constructed in reinforced concrete,
3.7.2.4.1 As far as practicable, internal stnictures and
BS 8110 should be consulted. fittings shall be arranged to avoid imposing local
In cases where the design strength is time dependent, components concentsated loads on the walls of the vessel,
designed in accordance with this clause should be reviewed to consideration being given to the necessity for a
ensure that creep deformation (local or general) will be corrosion allowance and avoidance of crevices where
acceptable throughout the agreed design lifetime. corrosion may start.
3.7.2.2 Vertical vessels 3.7.2.4.2 Where possible, local loads from internal
3.7.2.2.1 Bmclcet support structures, or from vessel contents, shall be carried by
Where vertical vessels are supported on lugs or means of appropriate stiffeners andor spacers, directly
brackets attached to the shell, the supporting members to the vessel supports and thus to the foundations
under the bearing attachments shall be as close to the without stressing the vessel walls or ends.
shell as clearance for insulation wiii permit.
NOTE. The choice between a number of brackets and a ring girder
will depend upon the condition for each individual vessel.
3.7.2.2.2 Column support
Vertical vessels supported on a number of posts or
columns shall, if necessaq be provided with backing
or stiffening by means of a ring girder, internal
partitions or similar devices in order to resist the
forces tending to buckle the vessel wall.
3.7.2.2.3 Skirt support
Skirt supports (for typical details see annex G ) shall be
not less than 6 mm thick Openings shall be made in
the side of the skirt to permit inspection of the bottom
of the vessel, if it is not readily visible through the
supporting framework. AU such openings shall be
reinforced if necesaq Where the product of skirt
diasneter (in m e t r e s ) , thickness (i millimetres),
and temperature at the top of the skirt above ambient
(in " C ) exceeds 1.6 X lo7 (in mm2."C), account shall be
taken of the discontinuity stresses in both skirt and
vessel induced by the temperature gradient in the
upper section of the skirt.
NOTE. It is recommended that these stresses should be calculated
by the methods of references (1) and (2)18) and assessed by the
criteria of annex A.
(1) Weil, N.A. and Murphy J.J. Design and analysis of welded pressure vessel supports. l'ram. ASME J. Eng. f o r Z n d . 1960,
February: 1.
(2) Bergman, D.J. Temperature gradients for skirt supports of hot vessels. Trans. ASME J. Eng. for Ind. 1963, May: 219.
O BSI 1997
3/73
STDmBSI BS 5500-ENGL I 9 9 7 W Lb2LibbS Ob70b50 ô 3 3 m
BS 6600 : 1997 Ifsue 1,January 1997 Section 3
NOTE 5. The design rules have been derived from considerations

3.8 Bolted flanged connections of strength. Where operation for long periods of time at high
temperature is required, without the need for bolt retightening,
3.8.1 General special consideration may be needed in the design, taking into
NOTE 1. W o r k i n g f o m . Suggested working forms with sketches account the possibility of reduction in gasket load due to creep of
covering the following types of flanges are provided at the end the bolts and the flanges. In the design of large diameter flanges
of 3.8.4.The sketches show the loads and dimensions as defined special consideration should be given to the choice of gasket, size
in 3.8.2. and pitch of bol& and sequence of bolt tightening when closing
1) Narrow-face flange design: smooth bore; the joint. Where operation requires a specific degree of
leak-tighîness, this should be identified by the purchaser. Although
2) Narrow-face flange design: stepped bore; rules for leaktightness cannot be given in this standard, the
3) Narrow-face flange design: slip-on hubbed type; manufacturer and gasket supplier need to accommodate any
4) Lap-type joint loose flange with hub; relevant requirements of the purchaser. Special consideration
should also be given to applications where flanges are subject to
5) Lap-typejoint loose flange without hub; significant additional loading.
6)Narrow-face flange design: smooth bore (external pressure
case); 3.8.1.1 Bolting-up condition
7) Narrow-face flange design: stepped bore (external pressure The bolting-up condition shall apply when the gasket
case); or joint contact surface is seated during assembly of
8) Narrow-face flange design: slipan hubbed type (external the joint at ambient temperature and with the oniy
pressure case); loading coming from the bolts.
9) Reverse narrow-face flange design: flange diameter = shell NOTE.The minimum bolt loading to achieve a satisfactory joint is
outside diameter, a function of the gasket and the effective gasket area to be seated.
10) Reverse narrow-face flange design: slip-in type;
11) Reverse narrow-face flange design: flange diameter = shell 3.8.1.2 Operating condition
outside diameter (extemal pressure case); The operating condition shall apply when the
12) Reverse narrow-face flange design: slip-in type (external hydrostatic end force due to the design pressure tends
pressure case); to part the joint and the bolt load has to maintain
13) Full-face flange design with soft ring type gasket; sufficient pressure on the gasket to ensure a tight joint.
14) Reverse full-face flange design to 3.8.7.2; NOTE. The minimum bolt load under this condition is a function
15) Reverse full-face flange design to 3.8.7.3 of design pressure, gasket material and the effective gasket
16) Full-face flange design with metal to metal contact. contact area to be kept tight under pressure. More than one
operating condition may require consideration. In the case of
Circular bolted flanged connections used in the external pressure there is no minimum bolt load but flange
construction of vessels to this specification shail eithec stresses still require consideration.
a) comply with an appropriate British Standard for 3.8.1.3 Classtfication
pipework flanges (e.g. BS 1560 or BS 4504), and be For the purposes of 3.8, flange connections shall be
of appropriate rating; or classified as follows.
b) comply with the requirements for bolted fianged a) N a m - f a c e d jZunga
connections specified in 3.8.
NOTE 2. For the application of flanges coupling to ANSI B16.6,
These are flanges where all the face contact area lies
see Enquiry Case 5500/58. inside the circle enclosed by the bolts. Narrow-faced
NOTE 3. The recommendations for the surface finish of the gasket flanges with ring-type gaskets shall comply
contact surface given in the note to 3.8.1.6 apply to ail body with 3.8.3 and those with ungasketed seal welded
fianges and flanges fitted with covers, whether standard or flanges with 3.8.6.
special
b) FuU-facedflarlres
Where a standard pipework flange mates with a piping These are flanges where the face contact area, either
fiange the surface finish shall be the same as that directly or via a gasket or spacer, extends outside
specified for the mating pipework flange. the circle enclosing the bolts. Full-faced flanges with
NOTE 4. A flange is attached to and supported by a nozzle neck, soft ring-type gaskets shall comply with 3.8.4 and
pipe, or vessel wall, which will be referred to as the shell.
full-faced flanges with metal to metal contact shail
comply with 3.8.8.
c) Reuerse jZunga
These are flanges where the shell is attached at the,
outer edge, rather than the inner edge, of the flange.
Narrow-face reverse flanges with gaskets shall
comply with 3.8.6.
Full-face reverse flanges with soft ring-type gaskets
shall comply with 3.8.7.
3/74 O BSI 1997

~ -~ ~~~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b 7 U b 7 0 b 5 1 77T m

3.8.1.4 General requirements for bolting For threaded portions of bolt, root areas for use in the I
If steel bolts or studs smaller than 12 nun are to be calculation of A b shall be determined as follows: I
used, the bolting material shall have a design stress a) for metric bolting to BS 3643 the root area is
at 50 "C as given in table 3.81 of more than 160 N/mm2. based on the minor diameter d3 as defined in A.3 of
If aluminium bolts or studs are used, special attention BS 3643 : Part 1 : 1981;
shall be given to the risk of fracture through b) for inch series bolting to BS 1580 the root area is
overtightening. the 'section at minor b e t e r ' as tabulated for
NOTE 1. In the case of small diameter bolts it may be necessary unified c o m e thread series (LJNC) in column 8 of
to give consideration to the use of torque spanners or other means table 15 and for unified &thread series (8 UN) in
for preventing the application of excessive load on the boit.
column 8 of table 20 of BS 1580 : Parts 1 and 2 : 1962.
NOTE 2. Table 3.8-1 gives recommended bolt stresses for
determining the minimum bolt area in 3.8.3.2. The values in NOTE. Table 3.8-2 gives boit root areas for some commonly used
table 3.8-1may be increased by 20 96 if controlled boit tensioning is bolt sizes.
used. Boit design stresses may be multiplied by 1.6 for test
conditions. These stresses are nominal insofar as they may have
to be exceeded in practice to provide against all conditions that
tend to produce a leaking joint. However there is sufficient margin
to provide a satisfactory closure without having to overload or
repeatedly tighten the bolts. It is permissible to use higher values
than those given in table 3.8-1 in specific cases based on known
operating experience or more rigorous analysis, by agreement
between the purchaser and the manufacturer (see table 1.51).
Special means are required to ensure that an adequate
preload is obtained on tightening large diameter bolts
and this aspect shall be considered when the nominal
bolt diameter is greater than 38 mm.
O BSI 1997 3/75

~ ~ _ _ _ _ _ _
STDmBSI BS 5500-ENGL 1997 D Lb2LIbb9 Ob70b52 b o b H

BS 5500 : 1997 h e 2, May 1997 Section 3
I
I
I o o o m m a a t - m
L - - b b t - W a a
CD
3
-
c-
3
3
2
N
41
-
m o m * m Lo
41
r n i l ) [ B m
mmle e
I

S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1797 H L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70b53 5 4 2 H
-
m
O
O ES1 1997
Table 3.8-2 Bolt root areas 3.8.1.6 Where flanges are constructed by welding,
weld dimensions shall be in accordance with annex E.
Metric bolting to BS 3643
Fiange construction shail be of one of the following
forms as applicable:
a) face and back welded fiange (see figure E.34a);
M10 X 1.5 52.3 M42 X 3 1153 b) bore and back welded flange (see figure E.34b);
M12 X 1.75 76.25 M45 X 4 1262 c) welded neck flange (or taper hub flange) (see
M14 X 2 104.7 M48X4 1458 figure E.35a) or parallel hub (long forged weld neck)
M16 X 2 144.1 M52 X 4 1742 type;
d) welding neck fiange fabricated from plate (see
M18 X 2.5 175.1 M56 X 4 2050 figure E.35b);
M20 X 2.5 225.2 M64X4 2743 e) lapped type (see figure E.35~);
M22 X 2.5 281.5 M70 X 4 3328 NOTE. This form is known as a lapjoint. The bolt load is
transmitted indjrectiy through a loose backing flange to a
M24 X 3 324.3 M72 X 4 3535 narrow lap or stub flange. The loose flange may have a hub.
M27x3 427.1 M76 X 4 3969 The stub flange incorporates the gasket contact face. It may be
attached to the shell by any of the arrangements permitted for
M30 X 3 544 M82 X 4 4668 other flange constructions, not just that shown in figure E.35~.
1
M33 X 3 675.1 M90X4 5687 f) Slip-on hubbed fiange (see figure E.36a);
M36 X 3 820.4 M95 X 4 6375 g) Fillet welded fiange (see figure E.36b).
NOTE. For design purposes a distinction is made between the
M39 X 3 979.7 M100 X 4 7102 flanges listed in a) to d), in whch the bore of the flange coincides
I UNC bolting to BS 1680 with the bore of the shell, and those with a fillet weld at the end
of the sheii and in which the two bores are different. They are
size z 3 a r e a Nominal size Root area known as smooth bore and stepped bore flanges respectively.
in mm2 Any fillet radius between flange and hub or sheii shall
% 276.8 be not less than 0.259, and not less than 5 mm.
133.5 1 363.2 Hub flanges shall not be made by machining the hub
directly from plate material without special approval
199.4 by the purchaser (see table 1.51).
8 UN bolting to BS 1680 Fiilet welds shall not be used for design temperatures
363.2 1% 1503 above 370 "C.
478 2 1729 3.8.1.6 Machining
609 2% 2226 The bearing surface for the nuts shall be parailel to the
756 2% 2787 flange face to within 1".Any back facing or spot facing
to accomplish this shall not reduce the flange
919 2% 3419 thickness nor hub thiclmess below design values. The
1097 3 4103 diameter of a spot facing shall be not less than the
1290 dimension across comers of the nut plus 3 nun. The
radius between the back of the flange and the hub or
sheli shall be maintained.
NOTE. The surface finish of the gasket contact face should be in
accordance with the gasket manufacturers' recommendations if
any, or should be based on experience or should follow the
recommendations given in table 3.83. The flatness of the flange
faces should also be in accordance with the gasket manufacturer's
recommendations or based on experience.
3/78
O BSI 1997
~~ ~ ~
~
S T D * B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 Lb2‘ibbS 0b7Ub55 315
Section 3 h u e 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Table 3.8-3 Recommended surface f f i s h on gasket contact faces for body flanges and flanges
fitted with covers
~ ~~~
Type of gaskets Rewired surface texture range Machining details

R,l) Roughness
grade no?)
)I.m
Compressed asbestos fibre (CAF) 12.5to 6.3 N10to N9 Continuous spiral groove
Fibrous substitutes for CAF or concentric groove
Polytetranuoroethylene (FIFE) finish
Exfoliated graphite sheet
Rubber and reinforced rubber sheet
Exfoliated graphite sheet 6.3 to 3.2 N9to N8 25 to 12.5 Continuous spiral groove
Spiral wound filed w i ~ or concentric groove
CAF (€2); or finish
(SI
Rubber and reinforced rubber sheet
Flat metal jacketed asbestos filied (RI 3.2 to 1.6 N8to Ni’ 12.5 to 6.3 Produced by a variety of
Solid flat metal ring (S) 1.6to 0.8 N7to N6 6.3 to 3.2 tool shapes showing no
Octagonal or oval metal ring (R) definite tool markings to
the eye
Metallic solid or hollow ‘O rings including 0.8 to 0.4 N6 to N5 3.2 to 1.6
Willis type rings (R)
Fuiiy trapped rubber ‘O rings of
rectanguiar section
‘)Raand R, are defined in BS 1134 : Part 1.
2)Roughnessgrade no. is extracted from IS0 1302 : 1978.
NOTE. (R) or (S) indicates a preference for the rougher or smoother end of the range respectively.
3.8.2 Notation b is the effective gasket or joint seating width:

For the purposes of 3.8.3 the following symbols apply b = bo when bo < 6.3mm
All dimensions are in the corroded condition.
NOTE.M e r and modified notation is given in subsequent
b = 2.52 6
when bo > 6.3 mm
subclauses. (this expression is valid only with dimensions
expressed in millimetres);
A is the outside diameter of the fiange or, where
slotted holes extend to outside of flange, the
c is the bolt circle diameteq
diameter to bottom of slots; CF is the bolt pitch correction factor,
A2 is the outside diameter of the contact face bolt spacing
between loose and stub flanges in a lapjoint; = j(2 X bolt outside diameter) + 6t/(m + 0.5)
Ab is the actual total cross-sectional area of bolts at where ‘bolt spacing’ is the distance between
bolt centre lines ( i calculated value < 1, CF = 1);
I the section of least diameter under load;
D is the inside diameter of shell;
Am is the total required cross-sectionai area of
bolts, taken as the greater of Aml and A d ; d is a factoq for integral method flange design
Am1 is the total cross-sectional area of bolts required

for operating conditions, = wml/sb;
U
v
= hdO2;
is the total cross-sectional area of bolts required for loose method flange design
A d
for gasket seating, = Wd/Sa;
B is the inside diameter of fiange;
Bz is the inside diameter of the contact face
between loose and stub fianges in a lapjoint;
bo is the basic gasket or joint seating width, = ND
with the exception of the ring-joint for which
bo = N/8;
O BSI
BS 5500 : 1997
~~ ~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 - l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70b5b 251

Issue 2, September 1997 Won 3
is a factor; Matm is the total moment acting upon flange for

for integrai method flange design bolting-up condition;
-_
- F. MOP is the total moment acting upon flange for
h,' operating condition;
for loose method flange design m is the gasket factor given in table 3.84;
3.
- N is the contact width of gasket, as limited by
ho' gasket width and flange facing:
is a factor for integral method flange design P is the design pressure;
(from figure 3.8.5); Pe is the external design pressure;
is a factor for loose hubbed flanges (from Sa is the bolt nominal design stress at atmospheric
figure 3.87); temperature given in table 3.81;
is the hub stress correction factor for integral Sb is the bolt nominal design stress at design
method flange design from figure 3.89 (for temperature given in table 3.81;
values below limit of figure use f = 1);
SFA is the design stress of flange material at
is the assumed diameter of gasket load reaction. atmospheric temperature given in table 2.3-1;
When bo < 6.3mm, G = mean diameter of gasket
contact face, SFO is the design stress of h g e material at design
temperature given in table 2.3-1;
when bo > 6.3mm, G = outside diameter of
gasket contact face less 2b; SHA is the lower of design stresses of hub and shell
materials at atmospheric temperature from
is the diameter of location of load reaction tables 2.3-2 to 2.312;
between loose and stub fianges in a lapjoint,
normally assumed to be the mean diameter of SHO is the lower of design stresses of hub and sheii
the contact face between them; mat& at design temperature given in
tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12;
is the analysis thickness of hub at small end;
SH is the calculated longitudinal stress in hub;
is the analysis thickness of hub at back of
flange; SR is the calculated radial stress in flange;
is the total hydrostatic end force = 0.785Qp; ST is the calculated tangential stress in flange;
is the hydrostatic end force applied via shell to T is a factor from figure 3.84,
flange = 0.785B2p; t is the minimum allowable flange thickness,
is the hydrostatic end force due to pressure on measured at the thinnest section;
flange face = H - HD; U is a factor from figure 3.84;
is the compression load on gasket to ensure V is a factor for the integrai method, from
tight joint = 2b X 3.14Gnzp; figure 3.86;
is the hub length; VL is a factor for the loose hubbed flanges, from
figure 3.86,
= &;
is the radial distance from bolt circle to circle Wmi is the minimum required bolt load for operating
conditions = HG + H;
on which HD acts = (C - B - ~ $ 2 except for
slip-on hubbed and stepped bore flanges for wm2 is the minimum required bolt load for gasket
Which hD = (c- B)B; seating = 3.14bGy;
is the radial distance from gasket load reaction W is the flange design bolt load = 0.5(Am + Ab)&;
to bolt circle = (C - G)l2; X is the nominal gap between the shell and the
is the radial distance from bolt circle to circle loose flange in a lap-joint;
on which load reaction acts for the loose fiange Y is a factor from figure 3.84;
in a lap-joint = (C - G1)/2;
Y is the gasket or joint contact surface seating
is the radial distance from bolt circle to circle pressure;
on which HT acts = (2C - B - G)/4;
z is a factor from f ï e 3.84;
NOTE. For the stub flange in a lap joint C is replaced by G , in the
definitions of h,, hG and h,
rz
K = A/B except for reverse flanges where K = BIA;
M = MamCFIB (bolting-up condition), or
= MopCdB(operating condition);
3/80
O BSI 1997
STDmBSI BS 5500-ENGL 1797 H L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70b57 178 I
3.8.3 Narrow-faced gasketed flanges 3.8.3.3 Flange moments

Flange moments shall be calculated for both the
3.8.3.1 General
bolting-up and operating conditions.
One of the three following design methods shall be a) Bolting-up condition
applied to circular narrow face flanges with ring type
gaskets or joints under internal pressure, taking The total flange moment shall be:
account of the exceptions given. Matm = WG
a) Integral method ( i which account is taken of b) Operating condition
support from the sheii and the stresses in the shell The total flange moment shall be:
are evaluated and compared with allowable
stresses). The integral method shall not be applied to Mop = HDhD + H ~ h q+ HGhG
the slip-on hubbed fiange (see figure E.36a) or to the For fiange pairs having different design conditions, as
loose fiange in a lap joint (see suggested working for example when they trap a tubesheet, bolt loads
forms (1) and (2)). shall be calculated at bolting-up and operating
b) Loose method (in which the flange is assumed to conditions for each fiangeígasket combination
get no support in bending from the sheii and separately Wm1 and W d shall then be taken as the
correspondingly imposes no bending stresses on it). greater of the two calculated values. For the fiange on
The loose method shaU only be applied, except for which Wm1 was the lower calculated value, the value
loose flanges in lap joints (see figure E.35c), if all of of HG shall be increased as follows:
the following requirements are met: HG = Wm1 -H
1) go 5 16 nun 3.8.3.4 Flange stresses and stress limits
B
2) - 5 300 3.8.3.4.1 f i n g e stresses
go
3 ) p 5 2 N/mm2 Flange stresses shall be determined for both bolting-up
4) operating temperature 5 370 "C and operating conditions from the moment, M, as
follows, where:
(see suggested working forms 1 , 2 and 5).
c) Loose hubbed flange method, which shall be M = Matm 3and M = M CF respectively
-
applied to the slip-on type of hubbed flange and the B Op B
loose hubbed flange in a lap joint (see suggested a) Integral method
working forms 3 and 4). m
The face and back welded fiange, bore and back
welded flange, parallel hub fiange, welding neck flange
longitudinal hub stress SH =
m
(1.333te + l)M
I
and fillet welded flange may all be designed by either radial flange stress SR=
At2
of the loose or integral methods (see figures E.34, E.35
and E.36 for these types of flanges). The design YM
tangential flange stress ST= - ZSR
methods allow for a taper hub, which may be a weld; t
the hub assumed for purposes of calculation shall have b) Loose method
a slope of not more than 1: 1, i.e. g1 5 h + go. YM
NOTE 1. in more unusual shapes of hub it may be necessary to tangential flange stsess ST = 7
choose values of gi and h defining a simple taper hub fitting
within the profile of the actual assembly. S R = SH =0
NOTE 2. There is no minimum value of h for a slip-on hubbed c) Loose hubbed fiange method
flange.
M
NOTE 3. The nile for calculating the moment M is independent of
the method being used.
longitudinal hub stress SH=
m
(1.333te + l)M
3.8.3.2 Bolt loads and areas radial flange stress S, =
Bolt loads and areas shd be calculated for both the At2
bolting-up and operating conditions. YM
tangential fiange stsess ST= tz - ZSR
a) Bolting-up condition
The minimum bolt load, WmZ, shall be 3.14%.
b) ûpemting condition
The minimum bolt load, Wml, shall be H + HG.
The required bolt area A, shall be the greater of Aml
a dA d .
The actual bolt area, Ab, shall be not less than Am.
NOTE. Recommended values for the gasket factor, m,and the
gasket seating pressure, y, are given in table 3.8-4for various
gaskets.
O BSI
3.8.3.4.2 Stress limits If the diameters A2 and B2 are defined by the same
Flange design stresses axe the nominal design strength component, as shown in figure 3.811, then X = O.
values given in 2.3 except that these values shall be The bearing stress shall not exceed 1.5times the lower
divided by a factor K if D > 1000 mm. design stress of the two flanges, using design stresses
K = (1 + D/2000)x Y3 if 1000 < D < 2000. at ambient temperature for the bolting-up condition
and design stresses at design temperature for the
K = 4/3 if2000 < D. operating condition.
NOTE.l. The effect of the rule is that for D > 2000 mm the flange
design stress will nonnally be yield2. The diameter of the load reaction between stub and
loose flanges shall be as follows:
The flange stresses as calculated in 3.8.3.4.1 shall not
exceed the following values, using design stresses at G1 = (A2 + B2)/2
ambient temperature for the bolting-up condition and unless otherwise agreed with the purchaser.
design stresses at design temperature for the operating The stub flange shall meet the requirements for a
condition: flange loaded directly by the bolts as given in 3.8.3.4
SH5 the smaller of l.SS,o or l.SSrn,or SH5 the or 3.8.4, except that the bolt load is assumed to be
smaller of 1 . 5 s or
~ 1.5s~~; imposed at diameter GI, which therefore replaces C in
SRruid ST5 Sm or SFA; the calculations. The diameter of the bolt holes, d,
required in 3.8.4, shall be zero.
0.5(S~+ SR)5 SFOor SFA;
0.5(S~+ %) 5 Sm or SFA. The moment arm on the loose flange for all
components of load shall be hL where hL = (C - G1)n
NOTE 2. Go and S,, the hub design stresses, are the design
stresses of the shell material except for the case of welding neck
such that
or slipan hubbed construction. Mop = Wm1 X h~ a d
3.8.3.5 Narrow-faceflanges subject to external Maw = w, x hL
pressure (See suggested working forms 6 , 7 and 8.)If The loose flange stresses and stress limits shall meet
the flange is subject to both internal and external the requirements of 3.8.3.4.
pressure it shall be designed for both conditions, NOTE. The option to use integrai or loose design method applies
except that external pressure need not be considered to the stub flange.
where the external design pressure p e is less than the
3.8.3.7 Split ring flanges
internal design pressure p.
It is permissible to split the loose flange in a lap-joint
The design of m e s for external pressure shall be in
across the diameter to make it readily removable from
accordance with 3.8.3 except that:
the nozzle neck or vessel. The design shall be in
pe replaces p accordance with 3.8.3.6 modified as follows.
Mop = HDWD- h ~+ )H T ( - ~~ G I a) When the flange consists of a single split ring,it
Wmi = Ami = O shall be designed as if it were a solid flange (without
Where the flange for external pressure is one of a splits), using 200 % of the moment M required
flange pair having different design conditions, Wml in 3.8.3.6.
shall be that calculated for the other member of the b) When the flange consists of two split rings, each
pair and shall be the greater of Mop as calculated ring shall be designed as if it were a solid flange
3.8.3.6 and WmlhG. (without splits), using 75 % of the moment M
required in 3.8.3.6. The pair of rings shall be
3.8.3.6 Lap-joints (See suggested working forms 4 assembled so that the splits in one ring are 90" from
and 5.) The stub flange may take any of the forms the splits in the other ring.
listed in 3.8.1.5 and either the narrow-faced (see 3.8.3)
or full-faced (see 3.8.4) method shall be applied c) The splits shall be located midway between bolt
Separate calculations shall be carried out for the holes.
stresses in the loose and stub flanges. d) Where the loose split flange is keyed into the
Bolt loads and areas shall meet the requirements back of the mating component, as shown in
of 3.8.3.2 or 3.8.4.2 as appropriate. figure 3.81, the following design method shall be
w e d The following symbols are in addition to, or
Bearing stress at the contact face between the two m o m , those given in 3.8.2.
flanges shall be determined for both bolting-up and
operating conditions using the following equation.
3/82
O BSI 1997
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 IL b 2 4 b b 9 O b 7 0 b 5 9 TbO
Section 3 Issue 2, May 1997 BS 5 5 0 : 1997
43 is the outside diameter of the contact face; The centroid position is based on the area of the total
fiange ring.
fbo is the b e g stress; 5 1.5f cf for the weaker of
fiange or mating component); Determine flange stresses using the equations given
in 3.8.3.4.1b with
fso is the shear stress; 5 0.5f cffor the flange
material); M = -u w ~forca~singie split flange
B
Hh is the radial component of the contact face force
= W t a n a; M = +M if flange is not split
HV is the contact face force = W,
where CF may be taken = 1.0
hh is the lever arm for H h (see figure 3.82).
B = A - 2g0 (see figure 3.82)
NOTE. hh may be negative if the line of action of Hh lies
above the centroid of the flange cross section; For the purpose of determining factor Y (see
figure 3.84 and table 3.85, K shall be taken as
h, is the lever ann for Hv (see figure 3.82); A/(A - 29,) (see figure 3.82).
h, is the lever ann for W (see figure 3.82); In no case shall the dimension tl be less than the
t is the flange thickness at the outer diameter; greater of the values given by the following equations:
tl is the minimum fiange thickness (see figure 3.82); W’
ti =
a is the key slope (see figure 3.82). n (A - %JOYS0
I 1.9vM”
O BSI 1997
3/83
~
~~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 Lb2qbbS Clb70bb0 7 8 2
Figure 3.8-1 Loose keyed flange with mating

components
I
Centroid
\
1 qF I_
0, Outside diameter
of contacting
surfaces
H I I
I U
:W
!
Figure 3.8-2 Forces and lever arms on loose keyed flange

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 W LbZLibbS Ob70bbL b17
Section 3 b u e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
3.8.4 Fuiì-faced flanges with soft ring type 3.8.4.3 Flange &sign
gaskets (see suggested working form 13) The flange thickness shall be not less than the value of
Full-faced flanges with non-metallic gaskets not less t from the following equation:
than 1.5 mm thick and extending beyond the circle
enclosing the bolt holes shall be in accordance with
the requirements of 3.8.4.
where
3.8.4.1 Additional and modified notation for 3.8.4 1M = HRhR
For the purposes of 3.8.4 the following symbols are in The bolt spacing SM not exceed:
addition to or modify those given in 3.8.3.
2db + (E/200000)0-25X 6rJ(m + 0.5)
Al is the inside diameter of gasket or inside diameter where E is expressed in N h 2 . If necessary the flange
of flange face, whichever is greateq thickness shall be increased to enable this requirement
is the basic gasket seating width effective under to be met.
b0 initial tightening up = Go - C; The minimum spacing shall be determined by
b’ &;
is the effective gasket seating width = 4
consideration of the space necessary to apply a
spanner to the nuts and possible interference from
NOTE. This expression is valid only with dimensions gussets and other obstructions.
expressed in millimetres.
3.8.5 Ungasketed seal welded flanges
2b” is the effective gasket pressure width, taken Ungasketed seal welded f h g e s (see figure 3.810) shall
as5mm; be designed with 3.8.3, except that:
d is the diameter of bolt holes; a) only the operating condition is to be considered;
db is the bolt outside diameteq b) G = 4, where 4, is outside diameter of seal weld
E is modulus of elasticity of f h g e material at lip;
design temperature from table 3.63; C) HG = O.
G is the diameter at location of gasket load reaction 3.8.6 Reverse narrow-face flanges
=C-(d+2b”);
* 3.8.6.1 Reverse narrow-faceflanges under
UI GO is outside diameter of gasket or outside diameter
* internal pressure (see suggested working forms 9
of flange, whichever is less;
and 10)
H is the total hydrostatic end force Reverse flanges with narrow-face gaskets under
= 0.785(C - d)2p; internal pressure, and for which the ratio of diameters
HG is compression load on gasket to ensure tight B/A is less than 1.1, shall be designed in accordance
joint = 2b” X 3.14Gmp; with 3.8.3 except that:
HR is the balancing reaction force outside bolt circle a) the limits on go and B/go to the application of the
in opposition to moments due to loads inside bolt loose flange option do not apply;
circle; b) A is the inside diameter of the flange;
hG is radial distance from bolt circle to circle on c) B is the outside diameter of the flange;
which HG a ~ t =s (d+ Zb”)/2; d) HD = 0.785p@;
h R is radial distance from bolt circle to circle on e) HT = HD - H where HT is the net pressure load
which HR acts = (Go - C + d)/$ on the flange faces;
hT is radial distance from bolt circle to circle on f ) h~ = (2C - G - 0)/4;
which HT acts = (C + d + 2b” - B)/$
g) h D = (B - C - g1)/2. If the flange is slipped into
M is balancing radial moment in flange along line of the shell with a fillet weld on the outside, so that
bolt holes; (B = O), h D becomes instead:
n is number of bolts. h D = (B - c)/z
3.8.4.2 Bolt loads and areas h) Mop = H T ~ T+ H D ~ D ;

i) K = B/A;
Bolt loads shall be calculated in accordance
with 3.8.3.2, taking: j) M = (Mam or Mop)C~/A
NOTE.l. The sign of which may be negative, has to be
Wmi = H + HG + HR respected.
where NOTE 2. The moment due to gasket reaction is taken as O for the
operating condition since this assumption gives higher stresses.
HR = H D ~ +DHT~T +H G ~ G
hR
W d = 3.14Cb’y
O BSI 1997
3/85
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 section 3
3.8.6.2 Reverse narrow-faceflanges under NOTE 1. The sign of hfTwhich may be negative has to be
external pressure (see suggested working forms 11 respected.
and 12) NOTE 2. The moment due to gasket reaction is taken as O for the
operating condition since this assumption gives higher stresses.
Reverse narrow-face flanges under external pressure
shall be designed according to the rules of 3.8.6.1 3.8.7.3 Design following method of 3.8.4
together with the modifications of 3.8.3.5 except that Design for the operating condition shall be in
the formuìa for Mop in 3.8.3.5 shall be replaced by accordance with 3.8.4 with the following modifications.
Mop = HDWD+ h ~ + )H T ( - ~h~). a) A is inside diameter of flange;
3.8.7 Reverse full-face flanges (see suggested b) Al is inside diameter of gasket or contact face,
working forms 14 and 15) whichever is the greater,
3.8.7.1 General e) B is outside diameter of flange;
For intenial pressure, the design method shall be in d) Go is outside diameter of gasket or contact face,
accordance with 3.8.7.2 or 3.8.7.3 as appropriate. For whichever is the lesser;
both design methods, the bolting loads at the ambient e) HD = 0.785p@;
condition and the gaskets shall be in accordance f ) HC = HD - 0.785pG;where Hc is the hydrostatic
with 3.8.4. force on the fiange-face outside the bolt circle
NOTE. Two alternative design methods are provided for reverse diameter;
fuil-face flanges. The first follows the approach of 3.8.3 at the
operating condition and assumes resistance to rotation comes g) h D = (B - c - g1y2;
from the flange itself; the second foliows 3.8.4 and requires a h) hc = (D - C)/4;
larger bolt area
i) Ml = H D ~ - D Hchc
For external pressure, because of the balance of
forces, bending moments and thus flange stresses are j) M2 = H A ;
minimal. However the bolt spacing criteria of 3.8.4.3 k) M is greater of Ml and M2;
shall stiil apply and this may be used to obtain a 1) Wml depends on which is greater, Ml or M2 as
minimum flange thickness. follows.
3.8.7.2 Design following method of 3.8.3 1) KMl > M2 then:
Design for the operating condition shall be in h R = (c- Al + d)/4
accordance with 3.8.3 with the following modifications. HR = M/hR
a) A is inside chneter of fiange; Wml = HGR + HD - Hc where HGR is the
b) A l is inside diameter of gasket or contact face, greater of HG and HR.
whichever is greater; 2) I f M 1 < M2 then:
e) B is outside diameter of fiange; h R = (Go - c + d)/4
d) D is the shell internal diameteq HR = (Mi - Ml)/hR
e) d is the diameter of the bolt holes; Wmi = HG + HD - HC + HR.
f) N = (C - A1)/2;
3.8.8 Full-faced flanges with metal to metal
g) Go is the outside diameter of the gasket or contact (see suggested working form 16)
contact face whichever is the lesser;
These rules shall be applied when there is metal to
h) H = 0.78sp(C - d)2; metal contact both inside and outside the bolt circle
i) HG = 2b X 3.14Cmp; before the bolts are tightened with more than a small
j) HD = 0.785p02; amount of preload and the seal is provided by an
O-ring or equivalent.
k) H'T = HD - 0.785pAi2;
1) HT = 0.5(H - HD + HIT); Manufacturjng procedures and tolerances shall ensure
that the flange is not dished so as to give initial
m) h D = (B - g1 - c)n,except for the slip-in type contact outside the bolt circle.
flange (B= O),for which: NOTE 1. The d e s are conservative where initial contact is at the
h D = (B - c)n; bore.
n) h'T = (2c - D - Ai)/% NOTE 2. It is assumed that a self-sealing gasket is used
approximately in line with the wall of the attached pipe or vessel
o) h = (2C + d - 2A1)/6; and that the gasket seating load and any axial load from the seal
may be neglected.
PI Mop = H D ~ +DH T ~ ' - TH T ~
s> K = B/A;
r) M = MopC~/A.

S T D - B S I BS 55UU-ENGL I 9 9 7 =
L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70bb3 471
3.8.8.1 Additional and modified notation The flange thickness shaU be not less thart
For the purposes of 3.8.8 the following symbols are in
addition to or mod@ those given in 3.8.3
Where two flanges of different internal diameters, both
d is the diameter of bolt holes;
designed in accordance with this section, are to be
G is the mean diameter of gasket; bolted together to make a joint,the foliowing
HR is the balancing reaction force outside the bolt additional requirements apply
circle in opposition to moments due to loads a) the value of M to be used for both fianges shall
inside the bolt circle; be that calculated for the smaller internal diameter;
hR is the distance from the bolt circle to the circle b) the thickness of the flange with the smaller bore
on which HR acts = (A - (312; shall be not less than
M is the balancing radial moment in the flange along
line of bolt holes;
n is the number of bolts. where Ml and M2 are the values of M calculated for
the two flanges.
3.8.8.2 Design
The following rules apply where the flange is to be
bolted to an identical flange or to a flat cover.
Bolt loads shall be calculated in accordance
with 3.8.3.2 taking:
Wmi = H + HR
where
HR = M A R
and
M = HDhD + H T ~
*
Kn
w,=o
*
O BSI 1997
3/87
_ _ _ _ ~ ~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 M L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70bb4 328 H

BS 6600 :1997 h u e 2, May 1997 Section 3
Table 3.8-4 Gasket materiais and contact facings: gasket factors (m) for operating conditions and
minimum design seating stress íu)
NOTE. This table gives a lis¿ of many commonly used gasket materials and contact facings with suggested design values of m and y
that have generaiiy proved satisfactory in actual service when using the methods of 3.8. The design values and other details given in
this table are suaested only and are not mandatow.
Gasket material Gasket Min. design 3ketches Dimension
factor m seating N (min.)
stress y
N/mm2 mm
Rubber without fabric or a high percentage of asbestos') fibre: 10
0.50 O
1.00 1.4
Asbestos') with a suitable 3.2 mm thick 2.0 11.0
binder for the operating 1.6 mm thick 2.75 25.5
conditions 0.8 mm thick 3.50 44.8 €3
1.25 2.8
Rubber with asbestos') fabric

insertion, with or without wire
reinforcement 3-PlY 2.25 15.2
2-PlY 2.50 20.0
I-PlY 2.75 25.5

1.75 7.6
Spirai-wound metal, asbestos') Carbon 2.50 To suit

filled Stainless or monel 3.00 application3)
Corrugated metal, asbestos') Soft aluminium 2.50 20.0

I inserted Soft copper or brass 2.75 25.5
or iron or soft steel 3.00 31.0
Corrugated metai, jacketed
asbestos') iìlied Monel or 4 to 6 % chrome 3.25 37.9
Stainless steels 3.50 44.8
corrugated metai Soft aluminium 2.75 25.5
Soft copper or brass 3.00 31.0
iron or soft steel 3.25 37.9
Monel or 4 to 6 % chrome 3.50 44.8
Fiat metai jacketed asbestos') Soft aluminium 3.25 37.9
filled Soft copper or brass 3.50 44.8
Iron or soft steel 3.75 52.4
Monel 3.50 55.1
4 to 6 % chrome 3.75 62.0
')New non-asbestos bonded fibre sheet gaskets are not necessaril direct subs1 ,utes for asbestos based materials. in art llar
pressure, temperature and boit load limitations may be applied. Z e within the manufacturer's current recommendati&s.
2)See BS 903 : Part A26.
3)SeeBS 3381 : 1989. Advice should be sought from the gasket manufacturer on design seating stress.
NOTE 1. in selecting gasket materials for use with aluminium alloy flanges account should be taken of the relative hardness values of
the gasket and flange materials.
NOTE 2. Advice should be sought from the gasket manufacturer on the ability of a gasket to resist the maximum load resulting from
bolt load and possibly vacuum load.

STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 Lb2Libb9 Ob7Dbb5 2 b 4
Table 3.84 Gasket materials and contact facings: gasket factors (m) for operating conditions and
minimum design seating stress (y) (continued)
NOTE. This table gives a list of many commonly used gasket materials and contact facings with suggested design values of m and y
that have generally proved satisfactory in actual service when using the methods of 3.8. The design values and other details given in
this table are suggested only and are not mandatom
Gasket material Gasket Min. design Sketches 3imension
factor m seating V (min.)
stress y
N/m2 nm
soft aluminium 3.25 37.9 .o
m
Grooved metal
Iron or soft steel 3.75 52.4
Monel or 4 to 6 % chrome 3.75 62.0
Solid flat metal soft aluminium 4.00 60.6
Iron or soft steel 5.50 124
Monel or 4 to 6 % chrome 6.00 150
Stainless steels 6.50 179
R i g joint*) Iron or soft steel 5.50 124
Monel or 4 to 6 % chrome 6.00 150
Stainless steels 6.50 179
Rubber O-rings:
below 75" BS O to 0.25 0.7
between 75" and 85" ES and IRH
I 1.4
Rubber square section rings:

below 75" BS and IRH O to 0.25 1.0
between 75" and 85" BS and IRH 2.85)
Rubber T-section rings:

below 75O BS and IRH O to 0.25 1.0
between 75* and 85O ES and IRH 2.8
')b = NI8
')This value has been calculated.
O BSI 1997 3/89

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 m Zb24bb9 Ob70bbb L T O m
0.D.contact face
Gasket
6.3 mm
NOTE.The gasket seating width factors 6, and 6 shown apply only to flanges joints in which the gasket is contained
entirely within the inner edges of the bolt holes.
Figure 3.8-3 Location of gasket load reaction
Table 3.8-6 Values of I: 2, Yand U

(factors involving K )
K T
I rable 3.8-6 Values of I: 2, Yand U
[factors involving K ) (continued,)
K T Z Y U
1.001 1.91 1.0211 1.901 48.121 92.21 101.33
1.002 1.91 500.50 1.022 1.90 45.96 88.04 96.75
1.003 1.91 333.83 1.023 1.90 43.98 84.30 92.64
1.004 1.91 250.50 525.45 1.024 1.90 42.17 80.81 88.81
1.005 1.91 200.50 1.025 1.90 40.51 77.61 85.29
1.006 1.91 167.17 319.71 351.42 1.026 1.90 38.97 74.70 82.09
1.007 1.91 143.36 274.11 301.30 1.027 1.90 37.54 71.97 79.08
1.008 1.91 125.50 239.95 263.75 1.028 1.90 36.22 69.43 76.30
1.009 1.91 111.61 213.42 234.42 1.029 1.90 34.99 67.11 73.75
1.010 1.91 100.50 192.19 211.19 1.030 1.90 33.84 64.91 71.33
1.011 1.91 91.41 174.83 192.13 1.031 1.90 32.76 62.85 69.06
1.012 1.91 83.84 160.38 176.25 1.032 1.90 31.76 60.92 66.94
1.013 1.91 77.43 148.06 162.81 1.033 1.90 30.81 59.11 63.95
1.014I 1.91 71.93 137.69 151.30 1.034 1.90 29.92 57.41 63.08
1.015 1.91 67.17 128.61 141.33 1.035 1.90 29.08 55.80 61.32
1.016 1.90 63.00 120.56 132.49 1.036 1.90 28.29 54.29 59.66
1.017 1.90 59.33 111.98 124.81 1.037 1.90 27.54 52.85 58.08
1.018 1.90 56.06 107.36 118.00 1.038 1.90 26.83 51.50 56.59
1.019 1.90 53.14 101.72 111.78 1.039 1.90 26.15 50.2 1 55.17
1.020 1.90 50.51 96.73 106.30 1.040 1.90 25.51 48.97 53.82
3/90
O BSI 1997
~
S T D - B S I B S 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1997 Lb2Libb9 Ob70bb7 037

Section 3 h u e 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Table 3.8-6 Values of T, 2,Yand U

(factors involving K ) (continued)
K T Z I Y lu
I
I
l'able 3.8-5 Values of T, 2,Yand U
[factors involving K ) (continued,)
K IT IZ IY U
1.041 1.90 24.90 47.81 53.10 1.076 1.88 13.68 26.36 28.98
1.042 1.90 24.32 46.71 51.33 1.077 1.88 13.56 26.03 28.69
1.043 1.90 23.77 45.64 50.15 1.078 1.88 13.35 25.72 28.27
1.044 1.90 23.23 44.64 49.05 1.079 1.88 13.18 25.40 27.92
1.045 1.90 22.74 43.69 48.02 1.080 1.88 13.02 25.10 27.59
1.046 1.90 22.05 42.75 46.99 1.081 1.88 12.87 24.81 27.27
1.047 1.90 21.79 41.87 46.03 1.082 1.88 12.72 24.52 26.95
1.048 1.90 21.35 41.02 45.09 1.083 1.88 12.57 24.24 26.65
1.049 1.90 20.92 40.21 44.21 1.084 1.88 12.43 24.00 26.34
LOW 1.89 20.51 39.43 43.34 1.085 1.88 12.29 23.69 26.05
1.051 1.89 20.12 38.68 42.51 1.086 1.88 12.15 23.44 25.57
1.052 1.89 19.74 37.96 41.73 1.087 1.88 12.02 23.18 25.48
1.053 1.89 19.38 37.27 40.96 1.088 1.88 11.89 22.93 25.20
1.054 1.89 19.03 36.60 40.23 1.089 1.88 11.76 22.68 24.93
1.055 1.89 18.69 35.96 39.64 1.090 1.88 11.63 22.44 24.66
1.056 1.89 18.38 35.34 38.84 1.091 1.88 11.52 22.22 24.41
* 1.057 1.89 18.06 34.74 38.19 1.092 1.88 11.40 21.99 24.16
rn 1.058 1.89 17.76 34.17 37.56 1.093 1.88 11.28 21.76 23.91
*
1.059 1.89 17.47 33.62 36.95 1.094 1.88 11.16 21.54 23.67
1.060 1.89 17.18 33.04 36.34 1.095 1.88 11.05 21.32 23.44
1.061 1.89 16.91 32.55 35.78 1.096 1.88 10.94 21.11 23.20
1.062 1.89 16.64 32.04 35.21 1.097 1.88 10.83 20.91 22.97
1.063 1.89 16.40 31.55 34.68 1.098 1.88 10.73 20.71 22.75
1.064 1.89 16.15 31.08 34.17 1.099 1.88 10.62 20.51 22.39
1.065 1.89 15.90 30.61 33.65 1.100 1.88 10.52 20.31 22.18
1.066 1.89 15.67 30.17 33.17 1.101 1.88 10.43 20.15 22.12
1.067 1.89 15.45 29.74 32.69 1.102 1.88 10.33 19.94 21.92
1.068 1.89 15.22 29.32 32.22 1.103 1.88 10.23 19.76 21.72
1.069 1.89 15.02 28.91 31.79 1.104 1.88 10.14 19.58 21.52
1.070 1.89 14.80 28.51 31.34 1.105 1.88 10.05 19.38 21.30
1.071 1.89 14.61 28.13 30.92 1.106 1.88 9.96 19.33 21.14
1.072 1.89 14.41 27.76 30.51 1.107 1.87 9.87 19.07 20.69
1.073 1.89 14.22 27.39 30.Il 1.108 1.87 9.78 18.90 20.77
1.074 1.88 14.04 27.04 29.72 1.109 1.87 9.70 18.74 20.59
1.075 1.88 13.85 26.69 29.34 1.110 1.87 9.62 18.55 20.38
O BSI 1997
3/91
STD-BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1’777 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob7übbô T73
Fable 3.8-6 Values of T, 2, Yand U

[factors involving KI (continued) I Table 3.8-5 Values of T 2,Yand U
K T IZ I Y lu
ii
1.111 1.87 9.54 18.42 20.25 1.146 1.86 7.38 14.29 15.71
1.112 1.87 9.46 18.27 20.08 1.147 1.86 7.34 14.20 15.61
1.113 1.87 9.38 18.13 19.91 1.141 1.86 7.29 14.12 15.51
1.114 1.87 9.30 17.97 19.75 1.14s 1.86 7.25 14.03 15.42
1.115 1.87 9.22 17.81 19.55 1.150 1.86 7.20 13.95 15.34
1.116 1.87 9.15 17.68 19.43 1.151 1.86 7.16 13.86 15.23
1.117 1.87 9.07 17.54 19.27 1.152 1.86 7.11 13.77 15.14
1.118 1.87 9.00 17.40 19.12 1.153 1.86 7.07 13.69 15.05
1.119 1.87 8.94 17.27 18.98 1.154 1.86 7.03 13.61 14.96
1.120 1.87 8.86 17.13 18.80 1.155 1.86 6.99 13.54 14.87
1.121 1.87 8.79 17.00 18.68 1.156 1.86 6.95 13.45 14.78
1.122 1.87 8.72 16.87 18.54 1.157 1.86 6.91 13.37 14.70
1.123 1.87 8.66 16.74 18.40 1.158 1.86 6.87 13.30 14.61
1.124 1.87 8.59 16.62 18.26 1.159 1.86 6.83 13.22 14.53
1.125 1.87 8.53 16.49 18.11 1.160 1.86 6.79 13.15 14.45
1.126 1.87 8.47 16.37 17.99 1.161 1.85 6.75 13.07 14.36
1.127 1.87 8.40 16.25 17.86 1.162 1.85 6.71 13.00 14.28
1.128 1.87 8.34 16.14 17.73 1.163 1.85 6.67 12.92 14.20
1.129 1.87 8.28 16.02 17.60 1.164 1.85 6.64 12.85 14.12
1.130 1.87 8.22 15.91 17.48 1.165 1.85 6.60 12.78 14.04
1.131 1.87 8.16 15.79 17.35 1.166 1.85 6.56 12.71 13.97
1.132 1.87I 8.11 15.68 17.24 1.167 1.85 6.53 12.64 13.89
1.133 1.86 8.05 15.57 17.11 1.168 1.85 6.49 12.58 13.82
1.134 1.86 7.99 15.46 16.99 1.169 1.85 6.46 12.51 13.74
1.135 1.86 7.94 15.36 16.90 1.170 1.85 6.42 12.43 13.66
1.136 1.86 7.88 15.26 16.77 1.171 1.85 6.39 12.38 13.60
1.137 1.86 7.83 15.15 16.66 1.172 1.85 6.35 12.31 13.53
1.138 1.86 7.78 15.05 16.54 1.173 1.85 6.32 12.25 13.46
1.139 1.86 7.73 14.95 16.43 1.174 1.85 6.29 12.18 13.39
1.140 1.86 7.68 14.86 16.35 1.175 1.85 6.25 12.10 13.30
1.141 1.86 7.62 14.76 16.22 1.176 1.85 6.22 12.06 13.25
1.142 1.86 7.57 14.66 16.11 1.177 1.85 6.19 12.00 13.18
1.143 1.86 7.53 14.57 16.01 1.178 1.85 6.16 11.93 13.11
1.144 1.86 7.48 14.48 15.91 1.179 1.85 6.13 11.87 13.05
1.145 1.86 7.43 14.39 15.83 1.180 1.85 6.10 11.79 12.96

rable 3.8-6 Values of 7: 2,Yand U
[factors involving K ) (continued)
Y T z
I Table 3.8-6 Values of 7: 2,Yand U
K T z Y U
1
1.181 1.E 6.07 1.2161 1.831 5.18 10.04 11.03
1.182 1.85 6.04 11.70 12.86 1.217 1.83 5.16 10.00 10.99
1.183 1.85 6.01 11.64 12.79 1.218 1.83 5.14 9.96 10.94
1.184 1.85 5.98 11.58 12.73 1.219 1.83 5.12 9.92 10.90
1.185 1.85 5.95 11.50 12.64 1.220 1.83 5.10 9.89 10.87
1.186 1.85 5.92 11.47 12.61 1.221 1.83 5.07 9.84 10.81
1.187 1.85 5.89 11.42 12.54 1.222 1.83 5.05 9.80 10.77
1.188 1.85 5.86 11.36 12.49 1.223 1.83 5.03 9.76 10.73
1.189 1.85 5.83 11.31 12.43 1.224 1.83 5.01 9.72 10.68
1.190 1.84 5.81 11.26 12.37 1.225 1.83 5.00 9.69 10.65
1.191 1.84 5.78 11.20 12.31 1.226 1.83 4.98 9.65 10.60
1.192 1.84 5.75 11.15 12.25 1.227 1.83 4.96 9.61 10.56
1.193 1.84 5.73 11.10 12.20 1.288 1.83 4.94 9.57 10.52
1.194 1.84 5.70 11.05 12.14 1.229 1.83 4.92 9.53 10.48
1.195 1.84 5.67 11.00 12.08 1.230 1.83 4.90 9.50 10.44
1.196 1.84 5.65 10.95 12.03 1.231 1.83 4.88 9.46 10.40
1.197 1.84 5.62 10.90 11.97 1.232 1.83 4.86 9.43 10.36
1.198 1.84 5.60 10.85 11.92 1.233 1.83 4.84 9.39 10.32
1.199 1.84 5.57 10.80 11.87 1.234 1.83 4.83 9.36 10.28
1.200 1.84 5.55 10.75 11.81 1.235 1.83 4.81 9.32 10.24
1.201 1.84 5.52 10.70 11.76 1.236 1.82 4.79 9.29 10.20
1.202 1.84 5.50 10.65 11.71 1.237 1.82 4.77 9.25 10.17
1.203 1.84 5.47 10.61 11.66 1.238 1.82 4.76 9.22 10.13
1.204 1.84 5.45 10.56 11.61 1.239 1.82 4.74 9.18 10.09
1.205 1.84 5.42 10.52 11.56 1.240 1.82 4.72 9.15 10.05
1.206 1.84 5.40 10.47 11.51 1.241 1.82 4.70 9.12 10.02
1.207 1.84 5.38 10.43 11.46 1.242 1.82 4.69 9.08 9.98
1.208 1.84 5.35 10.38 11.41 1.243 1.82 4.67 9.05 9.95
1.209 1.84 5.33 10.34 11.36 1.244 1.82 4.65 9.02 9.91
1.210 1.84 5.31 10.30 11.32 1.245 1.82 4.64 8.99 9.87
1.211 1.83 5.29 10.25 11.27 1.246 1.82 4.62 8.95 9.84
1.212 1.83 5.27 10.21 11.22 1.247 1.82 4.60 8.92 9.81
1.213 1.83 5.24 10.16 11.17 1.248 1.82 4.59 8.89 9.77
1.214 1.83 5.22 10.12 11.12 1.249 1.82 4.57 8.86 9.74
1.215 1.83 5.20 10.09 11.09 1.250 1.82 4.56 8.83 9.70
O BSI 1997 3/93

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70b70 b 2 L
Table 3.8-6Values of 2, Yand U

(factors involving K> (continued)
U T z Y lu
II Fable 3.85 Values of 2, Yand U
[factors involving K ) (continued)
K IT IZ I Y U
1.251 1.82 4.54 8.80 9.67 1.286 1.80 4.06 7.86 8.64
1.252 1.82 4.52 8.77 9.64 1.287 1.80 4.05 7.84 8.61
1.253 1.82 4.51 8.74 9.60 1.288 1.80 4.o4 7.81 8.59
1.254 1.82 4.49 8.71 9.57 1.289 1.80 4.02 7.79 8.56
1.255 1.82 4.48 8.68 9.54 1.290 1.80 4.01 7.77 8.53
1.256 1.82 4.46 8.65 9.51 1.291 1.80 4.00 7.75 8.51
1.257 1.82 4.45 8.62 9.47 1.292 1.80 3.99 7.72 8.48
1.258 1.81 4.43 8.59 9.44 1.293 1.80 3.98 7.70 8.46
1.259 1.81 4.42 8.56 9.41 1.294 1.80 3.97 7.68 8.43
1.2% 1.81 4.40 8.53 9.38 1.295 1.80 3.95 7.66 8.41
1.261 1.81 4.39 8.51 9.35 1.296 1.80 3.94 7.63 8.39
1.262 1.81 4.37 8.49 9.32 1.297 1.80 3.93 7.61 8.36
1.263 1.81 4.36 8.45 9.28 1.298 1.80 3.92 7.59 8.33
1.264 1.81 4.35 8.42 9.25 1.299 1.80 3.91 7.57 8.31
1.265 1.81 4.33 8.39 9.23 1.300 1.80 3.90 7.55 8.29
1.266 1.81 4.32 8.37 9.19 1.301 1.80 3.89 7.53 8.27
1.267 1.81 4.30 8.34 9.16 1.302 1.80 3.88 7.50 8.24
1.268 1.81 4.29 8.31 9.14 1.303 1.80 3.87 7.48 8.22
1.269 1.81 4.28 8.29 9.11 1.304 1.80 3.86 7.46 8.20
1.27C 1.81 4.26 8.26 9.08 1.305 1.80 3.84 7.44 8.18
1.271 1.81 4.25 8.23 9.05 1.306 1.80 3.83 7.42 8.16
1.272 1.81 4.24 8.21 9.02 1.307 1.80 3.82 7.40 8.13
1.273 1.81 4.22 8.18 8.99 1.308 1.79 3.81 7.38 8.11
1.274 1.81 4.21 8.15 8.96 1.309 1.79 3.80 7.36 8.o9
1.275 1.81 4.20 8.13 8.93 1.310 1.79 3.79 7.34 8.07
1.276 1.81 4.18 8.11 8.91 1.311 1.79 3.78 7.32 8.05
1.277 1.81 4.17 8.08 8.88 1.312 1.79 3.77 7.30 8.02
1.278 1.81 4.16 8.05 8.85 1.313 1.79 3.76 7.28 8.00
1.279 1.81 4.15 8.03 8.82 1.314 1.79 3.75 7.26 7.98
1.280 1.81 4.13 8.01 8.79 1.315 1.79 3.74 7.24 7.96
1.281 1.81 4.12 7.98 8.77 1.316 1.79 3.73 7.22 7.94
1.282 1.81 4.11 7.96 8.74 1.317 1.79 3.72 7.20 7.92
1.283 1.80 4.10 7.93 8.71 1.318 1.79 3.71 7.18 7.89
1.284 1.80 4.08 7.91 8.69 1.319 1.79 3.70 7.16 7.87
1.285 1.80 4.07 7.89 8.66 1.320 1.79 3.69 7.14 7.85
3/94
O BSI 1997
Section 3 Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 :1997
ï'able 3.8-6Values of T, 2, Yand U Table 3.8-5 Values of I: 2,Y and U

[factors involving K ) (continued) (factors involving K ) (continued)
K IT Iz Y U K T Iz IY lu
1.321 1.79 3.68 7.12 7.83 1.356 1.77 3.38 6.53 7.17
1.322 1.79 3.67 7.10 7.81 1.357 1.77 3.38 6.52 7.16
1.323 1.79 3.67 7.09 7.79 1.358 1.77 3.37 6.50 7.14
1.324 1.79 3.66 7.07 7.77 1.359 1.77 3.36 6.49 7.12
1.325 1.79 3.65 7.05 7.75 1.360 1.77 3.35 6.47 7.11
1.326 1.79 3.64 7.03 7.73 1.361 1.77 3.35 6.45 7.09
1.327 1.79 3.63 7.01 7.71 1.362 1.77 3.34 6.44 7.08
1.328 1.78 3.62 7.00 7.69 1.363 1.77 3.33 6.42 7.06
1.329 1.78 3.61 6.98 7.67 1.364 1.77 3.32 6.41 7.04
1.330 1.78 3.60 6.96 7.65 1.365 1.77 3.32 6.39 7.03
1.331 1.78 3.59 6.94 7.63 1.366 1.77 3.31 6.38 7.01
1.332 1.78 3.58 6.92 7.61 1.367 1.77 3.30 6.37 7.00
1.333 1.78 3.57 6.91 7.59 1.368 1.77 3.30 6.35 6.98
1.344 1.78 3.57 6.89 7.57 1.369 1.77 3.29 6.34 6.97
1.335 1.78 3.56 6.87 7.55 1.370 1.77 3.28 6.32 6.95
1.336 1.78 3.55 6.85 7.53 1.371 1.77 3.27 6.31 6.93
1.337 1.78 3.54 6.84 7.51 1.372 1.77 3.27 6.30 6.91
*
VI 1.338 1.78 3.53 6.82 7.50 1.373 1.77 3.26 6.28 6.90
*
1.339 1.78 3.52 6.81 7.48 1.374 1.77 3.25 6.27 6.89
1.340 1.78 3.51 6.79 7.46 1.375 1.77 3.25 6.25 6.87
1.341 1.78 3.51 6.77 7.44 1.376 1.77 3.24 6.24 6.86
1.342 1.78 3.50 6.76 7.42 1.377 1.77 3.23 6.22 6.84
1.343 1.78 3.49 6.74 7.41 1.378 1.76 3.22 6.21 6.82
1.344 1.78 3.48 6.72 7.39 1.379 1.76 3.22 6.19 6.81
1.345 1.78 3.47 6.71 7.37 1.380 1.76 3.21 6.18 6.80
1.346 1.78 3.46 6.69 7.35 1.381 1.76 3.20 6.17 6.79
1.347 1.78 3.45 6.68 7.33 1.382 1.76 3.20 6.16 6.77
1.348 1.78 3.45 6.66 7.32 1.383 1.76 3.19 6.14 6.75
1.349 1.78 3.44 6.65 7.30 1.384 1.76 3.18 6.13 6.74
1.350 1.78 3.43 6.63 7.28 1.385 1.76 3.18 6.12 6.73
1.351 1.78 3.42 6.61 7.27 1.386 1.76 3.17 6.11 6.72
1.352 1.78 3.42 6.60 7.25 1.387 1.76 3.16 6.10 6.70
1.353 1.77 3.41 6.58 7.23 1.388 1.76 3.16 6.08 6.68
1.354 1.77 3.40 6.57 7.21 1.389 1.76 3.15 6.07 6.67
1.355 1.77 3.39 6.55 7.19 1.390 1.76 3.15 6.06 6.66
O BSI 1997 3/95

=
~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 9 7 Il b 2 q b b 9 Ob70b72 qTLI
Fable 3.8-6 Values of Z 2, Yand U Table 3.8-6 Values of 1: 2, Yand U

(factors involving K ) (continued]
Y T Z Y U K T Iz IY lu
1.391 1.76 3.14 6.05 6.64 1.42E 1.74 2.94 5.64 6.2C
1.392 1.76 3.13 6.04 6.63 1.427 1.74 2.93 5.63 6.16
1.393 1.76 3.13 6.02 6.61 1.428 1.74 2.92 5.62 6.17
1.394 1.76 3.12 6.01 6.60 1.429 1.74 2.92 5.61 6.1E
1.395 1.76 3.11 6.00 6.59 1.430 1.74 2.91 5.60 6.15
1.396 1.76 3.11 5.99 6.58 1.431 1.74 2.91 5.59 6.14
1.397 1.76 3.10 5.98 6.56 1.432 1.74 2.90 5.58 6.13
1.398 1.75 3.10 5.96 6.55 1.433 1.74 2.90 5.57 6.11
1.399 1.75 3.09 5.95 6.53 1.434 1.74 2.89 5.56 6.i a
1.400 1.75 3.08 5.94 6.52 1.435 1.74 2.89 5.55 6.09
1.401 1.75 3.08 5.93 6.50 1.436 1.74 2.88 5.54 6.08
1.402 1.75 3.07 5.92 6.49 1.437 1.74 2.88 5.53 6.07
1.403 1.75 3.07 5.90 6.47 1.438 1.74 2.87 5.52 6.05
1.404 1.75 3.06 5.89 6.46 1.439 1.74 2.87 5.51 6.04
1.405 1.75 3.05 5.88 6.45 1.440 1.74 2.86 5.50 6.03
1.406 1.75 3.05 5.87 6.44 1.441 1.74 2.86 5.49 6.02
1.407 1.75 3.04 5.86 6.43 1.442 1.74 2.85 5.48 6.01
1.408 1.75 3.04 5.84 6.41 1.442 1.74 2.85 5.47 6.00
1.409 1.75 3.03 5.83 6.40 1.444 1.74 2.84 5.46 5.99
1.410 1.75 3.02 5.82 6.39 1.445 1.74 2.84 5.45 5.98
1.411 1.75 3.02 5.81 6.38 1.446 1.74 2.83 5.44 5.97
1.412 1.75 3.01 5.80 6.37 1.447 1.73 2.83 5.43 5.96
1.413 1.75 3.01 5.78 6.35 1.448 1.73 2.82 5.42 5.95
1.414 1.75 3.00 5.77 6.34 1.449 1.73 2.82 5.41 5.94
1.415 1.75 3.00 5.76 6.33 1.450 1.73 2.81 5.40 5.93
1.416 1.75 2.99 5.75 6.32 1.451 1.73 2.81 5.39 5.92
1.417 1.75 2.98 5.74 6.31 1.452 1.73 2.80 5.38 5.91
1.418 1.75 2.98 5.72 6.29 1.453 1.73 2.80 5.37 5.90
1.419 1.75 2.97 5.71 6.28 1.454 1.73 2.80 5.36 5.89
1.420 1.75 2.97 5.70 6.27 1.455 1.73 2.79 5.35 5.88
1.421 1.75 2.96 5.69 6.26 1.456 1.73 2.79 5.34 5.87
1.422 1.75 2.96 5.68 6.25 1.457 1.73 2.78 5.33 5.86
1.423 1.75 2.95 5.67 6.23 1.458 1.73 2.78 5.32 5.85
1.424 1.74 2.95 5.66 6.22 1.459 1.73 2.77 5.31 5.84
1.425 1.74 2.94 5.65 6.21 1.460 1.73 2.77 5.30 5.83
3/96 O BSI 1997

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 1 b 2 4 b b 9 0 6 7 0 b 7 3 330
Fable 3.8-6Values of 2, Yand U Table 3.8-5 Values of T 2,Yand U

(factors involving K ) (continued) (factors involving K ) (continued)
K IT Z Y U K
1.461 1.72 2.76 5.29 5.82 1.496 1.71 2.62 4.99 5.48
1.462 1.73 2.76 5.28 5.80 1.497 1.71 2.61 4.98 5.47
1.463 1.73 2.75 5.27 5.79 1.498 1.71 2.61 4.98 5.47
1.464 1.73 2.75 5.26 5.78 1.499 1.71 2.60 4.97 5.46
1.465 1.73 2.74 5.25 5.77 1.500 1.71 2.60 4.96 5.45
1.466 1.73 2.74 5.24 5.76 1.501 1.71 2.60 4.95 5.44
1.467 1.73 2.74 5.23 5.74 1.502 1.71 2.59 4.94 5.43
1.468 1.72 2.73 5.22 5.73 1.503 1.71 2.59 4.94 5.43
1.469 1.72 2.73 5.21 5.72 1.504 1.71 2.58 4.93 5.42
1.470 1.72 2.72 5.20 5.71 1.505 1.71 2.58 4.92 5.41
1.471 1.72 2.72 5.19 5.70 1.506 1.71 2.58 4.91 5.40
1.472 1.72 2.71 5.18 5.69 1.507 1.71 2.57 4.90 5.39
1.473 1.72 2.71 5.18 5.68 1.508 1.71 2.57 4.90 5.39
1.474 1.72 2.71 5.17 5.67 1.509 1.71 2.57 4.89 5.38
1.475 1.72 2.70 5.16 5.66 1.510 1.71 2.56 4.88 5.37
1.476 1.72 2.70 5.15 5.65 1.511 1.71 2.56 4.87 5.36
1.477 1.72 2.69 5.14 5.64 1.512 1.71 2.56 4.86 5.35
1.478 1.72 2.69 5.14 5.63 1.513 1.71 2.55 4.86 5.35
1.479 1.72 2.68 5.13 5.62 1.514 1.71 2.55 4.85 5.34
1.480 1.72 2.68 5.12 5.61 1.515 1.71 2.54 4.84 5.33
1.481 1.72 2.68 5.11 5.60 1.516 1.71 2.54 4.83 5.32
1.482 1.72 2.67 5.10 5.59 1.517 1.71 2.54 4.82 5.31
1.483 1.72 2.67 5.10 5.59 1.518 1.71 2.53 4.82 5.31
1.484 1.72 2.66 5.09 5.58 1.519 1.70 2.53 4.81 5.30
1.485 1.72 2.66 5.08 5.57 1.520 1.70 2.53 4.80 5.29
1.486 1.72 2.66 5.07 5.56 1.521 1.70 2.52 4.79 5.28
1.487 1.72 2.65 5.06 5.55 1.522 1.70 2.52 4.79 5.27
1.488 1.72 2.65 5.06 5.55 1.523 1.70 2.52 4.78 5.27
1.489 1.72 2.64 5.05 5.54 1.524 1.70 2.51 4.78 5.26
1.490 1.72 2.64 5.04 5.53 1.525 1.70 2.51 4.77 5.25
1.491 1.72 2.64 5.03 5.52 1.526 1.70 2.51 4.77 5.24
1.492 1.72 2.63 5.02 5.51 1.527 1.70 2.50 4.76 5.23
1.493 1.71 2.63 5.02 5.51 1.528 1.70 2.50 4.76 5.23
1.494 1.71 2.62 5.01 5.50 1.529 1.70 2.49 4.75 5.22
1.495I 1.71 2.62 5.00 5.49 1.530 1.70 2.49 4.74 5.21
O BSI 1997
3/97
Table 3.8-5Values of I: 2,Yand U I'able 3.8-6Values of I: 2,Yand U

- K .) (continued)
(factors involving . (factors involving
- K-) (continued)
.
K T Z / Y lu K IT 12 Y U
1.531 1.70 2.49 4.73 5.20 1.556 1.69 2.41 4.57 5.02
1.632 1.70 2.48 4.72 5.19 1.557 1.69 2.40 4.56 5.01
1.533 1.70 2.48 4.72 5.19 1.558 1.69 2.40 4.56 5.00
1.534 1.70 2.48 4.71 5.17 1.559 1.69 2.40 4.55 4.99
1.535 1.70 2.47 4.70 5.17 1.560 1.69 2.40 4.54 4.99
1.536 1.70 2.47 4.69 5.16 1.561 1.69 2.39 4.54 4.98
1.537 1.70 2.47 4.68 5.15 1.562 1.69 2.39 4.53 4.97
1.538 1.69 2.46 4.68 5.15 1.563 1.68 2.39 4.52 4.97
1.539 1.69 2.46 4.67 5.14 1.564 1.68 2.38 4.51 4.96
1.540 1.69 2.46 4.66 5.13 1.565 1.68 2.38 4.51 4.95
1.541 1.69 2.45 4.66 5.12 1.566 1.68 2.38 4.50 4.95
1.542 1.69 2.45 4.65 5.11 1.567 1.68 2.37 4.50 4.94
1.543 1.69 2.45 4.64 5.11 1.568 1.68 2.37 4.49 4.93
1.544 1.69 2.45 4.64 5.10 1.569 1.68 2.37 4.48 4.92
1.545 1.69 2.44 4.63 5.o9 1.570 1.68 2.37 4.48 4.92
1.546 1.69 2.44 4.63 5.08 1.571 1.68 2.36 4.47 4.91
1.547 1.69 2.44 4.62 5.07 1.572 1.68 2.36 4.47 4.91
1.548 1.69 2.43 4.62 5.07 1.573 1.68 2.36 4.46 4.90
1.549 1.69 2.43 4.61 5.o6 1.574 1.68 2.35 4.46 4.89
1.550 1.69 2.43 4.60 5.05 1.575 1.68 2.35 4.45 4.89
1..%1 1.69 2.42 4.60 5.05 1.576 1.68 2.35 4.44 4.88
1.552 1.69 2.42 4.59 5.04 1.577 1.68 2.35 4.44 4.88
1.563 1.69 2.42 4.58 5.03 1.578 1.68 2.34 4.43 4.87
1.554 1.69 2.41 4.58 5.03 1.579 1.68 2.34 4.42 4.86
1.555 1.69 2.41 4.57 5.02 1.580 1.68 2.34 4.42 4.86

STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 19%’ L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70b75 2 0 3
*
v1
*
O BSI 1997
3/99
0.10
0.9 0.20
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
O. 8
0.60
F O .70
0.7 O. 80
0.90
1.00
0.6 1.25
1.50
0.5 2.00
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Figure 3.8-6 Values of F (integral method factors)
O .6
0.5
O. 4 .1 o
*12
.1 4
.16
V 0.3 .I a
.20
.25
0.2 .3n
.35
.40
.45
.SO
0.1 .60
.70
.ao
1.90
.00
O .25
.s o
.o o
Figure 3.8-6 Values of V (integral method factors)
Y100 O BSI 1997

Seclion 3 h u e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
20, I I I I
100
80
60 0.10
40 0.1 2
30
20 0.14
0.16
7 0.1 2
6 0.1 4 10 0.16
a 0.20
5 0.16 6
0.1 8
4 0.2 o 4 0.25
3
0.25 2 0.30
3
0.3 O 0.3 5
FL 0.3 5 VL 1 0.10
0.4 O 0.8
2 O.'& 5
0.4 5 0.6
0.5 o 0.5 o
0.4
1.5 0.6 O 0.3 0.6 O
0.7 o 0.2 0.7 O
1.0 0.60
0.90 0.8 o
0.9
O. 8 1.00 8%
0.06
0.9 O
1.00
0.7
O. 6 1.5 o 0.04
0.03
o .s 2.00 1.50
0.02
O .I 0.01 2.00
1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 1.o 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5 .O
91 'go 91 /go
Figure 3.8-7Values of FL (loose hub flange Figure 3.8-8 Values of VL (loose hub flange
factors) factors)
25 O
0.0 5
0.1 o
20
0.1 5
0.2 o
15 0.2 5
0.3 O
0.3 5
0.4 o
10
0.4 5
9
0.50
8
I 0.6 O
6
f 0.7 O
5
0.8 O
4
0.9 O
3
1.0 o
2.5
1.1 o
2
1.2 o
1.5
1.3 O
1
I
Figure 3.8-9 Values off (hub stress correction factors)
O BSI 1997
31101
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 Cs l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70678 7 1 2 E
3
Figure 3.8-10 Ungasketed,
seal-welded-type flanges
Figure 3.8-11 Contact face between loose and stub flanges in

a lap joint where diameters A2 and B2 are defined by the
same component
3/102
O BSI 1997
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 = L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob7Ob79 8 5 9 1
II
U 5
E
z
o)
3
II 6
a
8
A
2
II
m
I S
& %
3
O
II t
a, II
X
8 II o" 3
m eo 51
3
Il
?!
2
II
8
II I
II
Q! 1? 'i
?
4
.-
I,
i 3
i
i
O BSI 1997
COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards 31103
~~~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 2 7 9 7 II l b 2 4 b b 7 O b 7 0 b ö ü 5 7 0
U
a
v)
c
II
s
d
-L
L
O
3/104
O ES1 1997
~~~
STD.BSI B S 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1977 m 1 b 2 4 b b î Ob7ClbAl 407 9
II
8 c
II
ar:
II
-
c
VI
O
m
II
-c 4.-
II
c
O
O BSI 1997
~~
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70b83 28T Sp
II
3m
II
D II
8
I I .-u
-c
v)
O
Il
-
U
m 9
i t
c
O s
II
l a
O BSI 1997
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70b84 1 1 b W
a
I
c
I
I
l
r
II
I
l
ci?
1
s
i
II
II
<c E
0
II
s
II
II
c: c c
O E
!2
~~
31108
O BSI 1997
II
<
I
i I
l
s II
L
O
m
O
*
M
*
ln
II
+
8 Il
c II
O
II
II
JI 1 E
:I
O BSI 1997
Al
o tf
a?
--c
- .
7-
Ob
üo U
n
c
v)
II
m
O
7
B
II
c -e, c II
O c
i
1
II
i
1

S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 9 l b 2 4 b b 9 Db70bô7 7 2 5
i
c II
Il
f
II
9
I
F
Il
7
II
F
n
II I 3 II
O BSI 1997
_ _
II II
II _
_ II
- t
bl
tI
II
II
.-O
-0
s
u)
f
m
4
II
r
.d
E;
c
L
11 II
II
c cior" E
'E
II
s

u
.E
I
Y I
I
O
a
a
I
O
V
(d
s
II -I
O ES1 1997
II
2
.5
I
a II
L:
I P
3
II
II
3
a 1
E
5
II
E
d
c
I -
:
d
i
II
II e
e
5 bE
P L
3/114
O BSI 1997
I
=!
6
I
i I
II
i
‘F
i 5 5
<
L
c Il II
II
t
I
:
c
I
II
II c
II
c
c
2
I
6 c 3
I f 4E
Y
i
tl I II
I I
II E II II
u u
2 1
6 i 4
II Il
II
I a
a
m
-
VI
+
O
II
b
c
O
O BSI
~
STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL L997 m l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70b92 292 E

BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 3, October 1997 Section 3
Il
t
f
C
I
t
f
e
i
L
e
Il
i
s
II
c
n I
II
-II
8 0
.- 8
-I: U
o)
2
f
O
m
-
O
e 2
L O
3/116
O BSI 1997
~~~ ~~
~
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1997 m L b 2 4 b b 9 067Ub93 1 2 9 W

I
; II
\
3
i F
II
II C
< I
T
I
E
O
> II
.
I
.!i
Y
'O
3
5 L
i
s.-
Y
I II a
a
4 m
II
<
f
I
5
GI c
f
O
E
m u
I
O BSI
II
II
L
II 2II
e L
II
5
II
I C
c c
Bx 1
I
-I/
E
c
I- =$
3/118
O BSI 1997
3.9 Flat heat exchanger tubesheets is the outside diameter of shell;

The minimum thickness of flat heat exchanger is the diameter of outer tube limit circle;
tubesheets shall be calculated in accordance with 3.9.1 is the diameter to which shell fluid pressure is
to 3.9.6, the analyses used to obtain the equations exerted,
being based on the following assumptions.
is the diameter to which tube fluid pressure is
a) The tubes are of uniform size.
exerted
b) Where the exchanger has a pair of tubesheets,
they are both of the same thickness. is the effective pressurized diameter of
expansion joint bellows as determined by
c) The tubesheet is of constant thickness across the bellows manufacturer or otherwise agreed;
specified diameter.
is the f l e d rigidity of the tubesheet as given
d) The tubed area is uniformly perforated and in 3.9.4.2;
nominally circular (untubed partition lanes in
multipass units are accepted). is the minimum tubesheet thickness exclusive
of corrosion allowance and partition grooves;
e) Any untubed annular ring is sufficiently narrow to
be treated as a ring whose cross section rotates is the channel analysis thickness (including
without appreciable distortion (i.e. D1 and Dz I any corrosion allowance) for a minimum
Do + 6e). distance of i.=
f) The tubesheet thickness (less corrosion is the shell analysis thickness (including any
allowance) is not less than: corrosion allowance) for a minimum distance
0.75 X tube 0.d. for tubes 25 mm o.d and less; of 1.-
22 mm for tubes 30 mm 0.d and less; is the tube thickness (nominal);
25 mm for tubes 40 mm 0.d and less; is the elastic modulus of tubesheet material at
30 mm for tubes 50 mm 0.d and less. design temperature;
Tubesheets not covered by a) to f) shall be given is the elastic modulus of channel material at
special consideration and the design method shall be design temperature;
agreed by the manufacturer, the purchaser and the is the elastic modulus of shell material at
Inspecting Authority (see table 1.51). mean metal temperature;
When tubes are expanded into the tubesheet and not is the elastic modulus of tube material at mean
welded, the total thickness of the tubesheet minus the metal temperature;
corrosion allowance in the area of the expansion shall
be not less than the tube 0.d Where leakage cannot be is the nominal design strength;
tolerated, the minimum thickness of tubesheets with NOTE. In cases where f is time dependent, components designed
expanded oniy tubejoints shall be 35 mm, unless by the procedure specified in this clause should be reviewed to
ensure that creep deformation (iocai or general) wiii be
satisfactory performance has been demonstrated with acceptable throughout the agreed design lifetime.
thinner tubesheets. The minimum thickness, including
corrosion allowance, shall in no case be less is the reduced design strength to calculate
than 19mm. revised tube stresses in floating head
NOTE 1. The derivation of these mies is given in Part 4 of
exchangers using nominal tubesheet thickness;
PD 6550, the Explanatory Supplement to BS 5500. is the tubesheet factor given in figure 3.99;
NOTE 2. The definitions and descriptions of heat exchanger is the factor for outer tube load given by
components, such as channel, floating head etc., are given in
BS 3274. figures 3.9-2 and 3.9-3;
3.9.1 Notation is the factor for inner tube load given by
figures 3.94 and 3.95;
For the purposes of 3.9.2 to 3.9.4 the following major
symbols apply All dimensions exclude corrosion is the effective 'solidity' of perforated
allowances, except where othenvise indicated. tubesheet, value between 2 1 and x2 depending
on estimated effect of tube wall thickness:
C= Co + AC design factor to be derived from unless experimental results are available, a
figure 3.9-1 in conjunction with table 3.9-1; value equal to (xl+ x2)/2should be used;
Co is the basic design factor to be derived from is the tubesheet factor given in figure 3.9-10 or
figure 3.9-1 as a function of U 4 or from or 3.911;
table 3.41 for U-tubesheets (UN = O); is the expansion joint strajn factor, = 1.00 for
AC is the corrective design factor to be derived 1
shell without expansion joint, =
from table 3.9-1 as a function of actuai value of 1+(nDESe$)/L
Fs and R; for shell with bellows joint (where bellows
stiffness is known), = O for thin wali bellows
d is the outside diameter of tubes; joint;
dh is the tube hole diameter in tubesheet;
~ ~
O BSI 1997
3/119
~~ ~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 m 1 b 2 4 b b 7 O b 7 0 b 9 b 9 3 8 m
k is the axial modulus of the tube bundle (full is the maximum effective tube stress for outer
length) as given in 3.9.4.2; tube;
K is the mean strain ratio, tube bundle/shell
given by equation in 3.9.4.2; = 1 - N[$T
KC is the edge moment required to rotate the

channel through unit angle as given in 3.9.4.2; z1-N-
[" io2y
KS is the edge moment required to rotate the sheil is the factor, calculated in 3.9.4.2, which
through unit angle as given in 3.9.4.2; quantifies the eiastic characteristic of the
KI.? represents the combined edge restraint due to bundle and tubesheet;
the channel and shell as given in 3.9.4.2 is the factor, given in 3.9.4.2, dependent on the
L is the tube length between inner faces of edge restraint due to both channel and shell;
tubesheetq is the thermal expansion coefficient of shell
N is the number of tube holes in tubesheet; material at mean metal temperature;
P is the tube pitch (spacing between centres); is the thermal expansion coefficient of tube
material at mean metal temperature;
P is the tubesheet design pressure (see 3.9.3.1);
is a tubebundle factor, given in 3.9.4.2,
Pi is the shell side design pressure;
dependent on the tubesheet f l e d rigidity
P'i is the effective shell side design pressure for and the tubebundle axial modulus;
fixed tubesheets given by equations
= (XZ - xi) = 4N%(d - 4/Do2;
in 3.9.4.3.1;
is the tube side design pressure; is the flexural efficiency of tubesheet and tube
Pz walls given by figure 3.9-7 or 3.94
P'2 is the effective tube side design pressure for
fixed tubesheets given by equations is the mean shell metal temperature less 10 OC;
in 3.9.4.3.2; is the mean tube wall metal temperature
less 10 O C ;
Pd is the effective differential design pressure
given by equation in 3.9.4.3.4 is the ligament efficiency of tubesheet in shear
NOTE. Ail these design pressures are gauge pressures and given by equations in 3.9.2.1;
algebraic signs should be observed. is the ligament efficiency of tubesheet and
Pe is the effective pressure due to restrained tube walls in bending given by equations
differential thermal expansion given by in 3.9.2.1;
equations in 3.9.4.3.3 is Poisson's ratio for unperforated plate;
PBt is the equivalent bolting pressure for operating is the Poisson's ratio for the channel;
condition given by equation in 3.9.4.3.6;
is the Poisson's ratio for the shell;
PBs is the equivalent bolting pressure for
boltjng-up condition given by equations is the design stress factor = 2. This factor
in 3.9.4.3.6; allows for the fact that the stress calculated
using these requirements is the average
S is the spring rate for bellows-deflectiorúunit bending stress across the ligament at the
force; surface of the plate, and the permissible value
R = D1/Do when pi > p2, = D2/Do when p2 > pi, is higher than the n o d design stress,
= the greater of Di/Do and D2/D0 when is the design stress for shew, in absence of
Pi = PZ; definition of design stress for shear in
section 2, T should be taken as 0.5J
U = [1.35 iSEtDo
r ~ i 'h; ]factor for use in
figures 3.9-1 to 3.95,
V = g f f a c t o r for use in figures 3.9-1 to 3.9-5;
wii is the maximum effective tube stress for inner

tube;

3.9.2 Characteristics of perforated plates 3.9.3.1 Design equations

3.9.2.1 Ligament emciencg The tubesheet design pressure shall be derived giving
due consideration to loss of either pressure:
The ligament efficiency shall be calculated from:
P = IP2 - Pi1
P u d = -P - d h The minimum thickness of a tubesheet withjn the
P
outer tube limit circle shall be the greater of the values
where the following conditions apply: given by the following equations:
a) tubes are not expanded into the tubesheet for the
full depth of the tubesheet; or
b) tubes are welded; or
c) tubes have significantly lower elastic modulus e= (shear)
Ar
than the tubesheet material, i.e. non-ferrous tubes in
ferrous tubesheet. C is dependent on clamped or simply supported edge
conditions for the tubesheet, see figure 3.9-6 for typical
Where the tubes ase expanded for the full depth of the edge conditions.
tubesheet or are explosion-bonded to the tubesheet, it
is recognized that the effective ligament efficiency is Where the tubesheet is extended to provide a flange
increased and in such cases the ligament efficiency for bolting (as in figures 3.%, 3.9-6d, 3.9-6e), the
shall be calculated from: thickness of the extension between the gasket position
and the outside diameter of the tubesheet shall be not
p = A = p - (dh - less than e1 as given in figure 3.532c, second equation.
P
The maximum effective tube stresses for an inner, Wti,
NOTE. intermediate values of ,u between those given by the
foregoing equations may be used by agreement between and an outer, Wto, tube, as given by the following
manufacturer and purchaser. equations, shall be checked in accordance with 3.9.6,
where a positive value denotes tension and a negative
3.9.2.2 Eflective elastic constant value compression. The two equations wili usuallx but
The effective elastic constant for the tubesheet, q, shall not necessarilx give values of opposite sign, and both
be taken from figure 3.9-7 or 3.48: shall be considered in assessing the possibility of loss
for thin plates, where e < U:use figure 3.9-7; of tube staying action:
for thick plates, where e 2 U:use figure 3.9-8.
3.9.3 Tubesheets of exchangers with floating
heads or U-tubes
For the purposes of 3.9.3.1, floating heads are denoted
as those completely immersed in the shell side fluid; The maximum absolute value of the tube end joint
for such heatexchangers, both tubesheets shall have load shall be checked against that permitted in 3.9.6.
the same thickness. NOTE. Where the nominal tubesheet is thicker than the minimum
required, account can be taken when calculating the tube
longitudinal stresses. The tubesheet design stressf can be lowered
tubesheet thickness
nominal thickness
I:as defined in 3.9.1, should then be recalculated usingf ' and the
new factors obtained from figures 3.9-2 to 3.9-5. From this, the
revised tube longitudinal stresses may be calculated.
O BSI 1997
3/12 1
Table 3.9-1 Values of AC as a function of Fs and R for all tubesheets, and Co for U-tubesheets only
(for other types of tubesheets Co is obtained from figure 3.9-1)
R Stationary tube heet - simply supported
I Co AC CO AC
Fs = 0.45 1 Fs = 0.60 I Fs = 0.80
I 1.0
I
0.433 O 0.560 O O
1.05 0.433 O 0.576 -0.002 +0.002
1.10 0.433 O 0.592 -0.010 +0.010
1.20 0.433 O 0.625 -0.025 +0.025
1.30 0.433 O 0.660 -0.040 +0.040
I NOTE. Fimire 3.9-6b shows a simDlv sumorted U tubesheet and figure 3.9-6e shows a clanwed U tubesheet.
1.0
1
C = Co + AC (see table 3.9-1)
0.9
- ') Stationary tubesheet, simp1
O. 8
') Stationary tubesheet,
0.7
I
O. 6
O. 5
I 0.4
O. 3
o. 2
I I I 1 I I I I I I I I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 9 1 0
u/ v
' For floating tubesheets simply supported or clamped, no distinction is made.
1
NOTE. Solid lines apply to construction b) + a) and b) +c) as shown in figure 3.9-6. Broken h e applies to construction d) + a)
and d) + c) as shown in figure 3.9-6.
1 Figure 3.9-1 Design curves: determination of Co

STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1997 l b 2 4 b b 9 Ub7Ob99 b 4 7
10
9
8
5
3
imply supported, both ends

Stationary tubesheet, clampe
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0
u/ v
NOTE 1. For U-tubesheets, Fo = 1
NOTE 2. Solid lines apply to construction b) + a) as shown in figure 3.9-6. Broken line applies to construction d) + a) as shown in
figure 3.9-6 and also to constructions d) + c) or e) + c) as shown in figure 3.9-6.
Figure 3.9-2 Design curves: determination of F,
O ES1 1997
31123
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70700 179
BS 5500 : 1997 h u e 1, January 1997 M o n3
u/ v
NOTE 1. For U-tubesheets,Fo = 1.
+ c) as shown in figure 3.9-6.
NOTE 2. Applies to construction b)
Figure 3.9-3Design curves: determination of F,
31124
O BSI 1997
~ ~~ _ _ _ _ ~~
S T D - B S I BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1777 W Lb2LIbb7 Ob7070L 025

4.0
A and O pitch
Simply supported, both ends
Stationary tubesheet, clamped,
3 .O floating tubesheet, simply supported
2.0
1.o
0.9
0.8
0.7
Fi
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
o. 2
0.1 Y
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910
u/v
NOTE 1. For U-tubesheets, Fi = - 1.

NOTE 2. Solid lines apply to construction b) + a) as shown in figure 3.9-6. Broken line applies to construction d) + a) as
shown in figure 3.9-6.
Figure 3.9-4 Design curves: determination of Fi
O BSI 1997
W125
~
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL 1777 m L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70702 T b L
BS 6600 : 1997 h e 1,January 1997 Section 3
I
-
A and o pitch
Stationary lubesheel,
floating tubesheet, clamped
3.0
2 .o
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
Fi 0.6
O. 5
O. 4
0.3
o. 2
0.1
L 3 4 5 6 7 8 910
u/Y
NOTE 1. For U-tubesheeîs, Fi = - 1.
NOTE 2. Applies to construction b) + c) as shown in figure 3.9-6 and also to constructions d) + c) or e) + c) as shown in
figure 3.96.
Figure 3.9-6 Design curves: determination of Fi
3/126
O BSI 1997
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70703 7 T B m
Section 3 Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5 5 0 :1997
i--u
-&I-
a) Simply supported b) Simply supported
+ e +
c) Clamped d) See note 2 below
d
e) Clamped
NOTE 1. Where a full faced gasket is used the tubesheet is clamped.
NOTE 2. if either shell or channel is welded to a U-tubesheet then:-

4.3D* + 0.65 DiK, ~ 2 , 3
U-tubesheet is simpiy supported if
1.3D* + 0.5DiKo
4.3D*+ 0.65 DiKo <2.3
U-tubesheet is clamped if
1.3D* + 0.5DiKo
where D* and KOare calculated in accordance with 3.9.4.2. For KO,K, is zero if the channel is gasketted to the tubesheet
and K, is zero if the shell is gasketted to the tubesheet.
Figure 3.9-6 Typical clamped and simply supported configurations for floating head or
U-tubesheets
O ES1 1997 31127

BS 5500 :1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Section 3
1.o
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
o.1
C
P
Figure 3.9-7 Characteristic for perforated thin plates, e < 2P
W128
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 Lb2LtbbS Ob70705 770
0.:
O.
fi
Figure 3.9-8 Characteristic for perforated thick plate, e 2 2P
O BSI 1997 3429

S T D - B S I BS 55OO-ENGL 1997 9 l b Z q b b 9 Ob7070b b 0 7
BS 5500 : 1997 h e 2, May 1997 Section 3
3.9.4 Tubesheets of fixed tubesheet exchangers

For the purposes of 3.9.4.1 to 3.9.4.4 fixed tubesheet
heat exchangers shall be considered as those having
tubesheets fixed to both ends of the shell, with or
without a shell expansion joint except as limited
by 3.9.6. Both tubesheets in a fixed tubesheet
exchanger shall have the m e thickness. NOTE 1. Kc is zero when the channel is gasketed to the tubesheet.
3.9.4.1 Design considerations Es(es)2.5

Ks =
The thickness of the tubesheets shall be the greater of [12(1 - vs2)]o.75 (Dl + es)0.5
the values given by the equations in 3.9.4.2. While this KO = Kc + Ks
thickness will be adequate for the tubesheets it is ßD1
possible that the temperature differential between xa = -
2
tubes and shell may result in overstressing of the
shells, tubes or tubetutubesheet joints. This shall be
checked in accordance with 3.9.4.4 and, where
nec- suitable provision shall be made for NOTE 2. In a given design, the minimum tubesheet thickness is
obtained when z = 0.5, and this may be achieved by aitering either
expansion and /or contraction. e, or e,.
Where the tubesheet is extended to provide a fiange
for bolting (as in figure 3.9-6d) the thickness of the
extension between the gasket position and the outside
diameter of the tubesheet shall be not less than el as
given in figure 3.532c, second equation. If the
tubesheet has a large unpierced annular gap between
the tube bundle and the shell, its thickness shall be
checked in accordance with 3.5.5.3.1. The calculation is an iterative one. A value shall be
assumed for e and the calculation made. If e calculated
NOTE.'hbesheet design is usually based on the corroded is less than e assumed, it is permissible to make the
condition of ail components. Because of the increased edge
constraint,from the sheii when new, the corroded case may be tubesheet of thickness e assumed. For minimum
less conservative than the new case. The effect is generally not tubesheet thickness, the iteration should be repeated
significant, but when specified by the purchaser, the design should una
be checked for the new condition.
0.985e assumed < e calculated < 1.000e assumed.
3.9.4.2 Design equations
3.9.4.3 Eflective shell and tube design pressure
The minimum thickness of the tubesheet shall be the
greater of the values given by the following equations: 3.9.4.3.1 The effective shell side design pressure, p'1,
shall be calculated from:
whichever has the

greatest absolute value. I
where p'1 and p'2 are the effective shell and tube
design pressure determined in accordance I
with 3.9.4.3.1 and 3.9.4.3.2;
or,where design on the basis only of simultaneous
action of both shell and tube side pressure is where
specificaìly permitted (see table 1.51):
O. 1 5 5 D ~ d
e= (shear)
At
NOTE. Equations containing the term p~~ are not applicable for
where use in the shear equations in 3.9.4.2.
pd is the effective differential design pressure

determined in accordance with 3.9.4.3.4
W130 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

= Lb24bb9
~~ ~~ ~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 Ob70707 5 4 3
z=
6.0I O
0.1
0.2
Fq 0.4
0.5
0.8
1.o
4.0 2.0
4.0
8.0
40.0
and
above
2.0
O
O 4.0 6.0 8.0I
Fq
14.0
12.0
10.0
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
O
O 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0
xa
NOTE. Linear interpolation should be used for values of z lying between those given.
Figure 3.9-9 Tubesheet: determination of F,
O BSI
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 H LbZi-lbb9 Ob70708 LiBT
Z=
0.5
0.4
0.2
0.8
?:¿
O
2.0
4.0
8.0
40.0
and
above
O 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.O
xa
NOTE. Linear interpolation should be used for values of z lying between those given.
Figure 3.9-10 Tubesheet: determination of H for X , > 4.0

STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 2 7 9 7 L b Z q b b 7 ü b 7 0 7 0 7 32b
*
cn
*
o 1.o 2.0 3.0 4.0
xa
Note. Linear interpolation should be used for values of z lying between those given
Figure 3.9-11 Tubesheet: determination of H for X , e 4.0
O ES1 1997
31133
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 7 7 lb2LIbb7 Ob70710 O38
3.9.4.3.2 The effective tube side design pressure, p'2, 3.9.4.3.5 Equivalent bolting pressures, when fured
shail be calculated from: tubesheets are extended for bolting to heads with ring
type gaskets, shall be calculated from:
whichever has the
greater absolute
value when p', is
2flatm
positive PBS = o z"
0.667 @ I t - p', + PBt + pe)
1 whichever has the
greaterabsolute where
I value when p', is

negative Mop is the total moment acting upon extension
under operating conditions (see 3.8.2);
is the total moment acting upon extension
where Matm
under bolting-up conditions (see 3.8.2);
= pz [1 + (1O.MK(1.5
+ JKF,)
+A)
Where full faced gaskets are fitted pBt = p~~= O.
NOTE. The load on the gasket trapped between a tubesheet and
any pass-partition plate may be neglected in the calculation of bolt
load and tube plate thickness.
3.9.4.4 Shell and tube longitudinal stresses
NOTE. Delete the term pgt in these equations for use in the shear The maximum effective shell and tube stresses
equations in 3.9.4.2. calculated as follows shall be checked in accordance
with 3.9.6.
3.9.4.3.3 The pressure due to differential thermal
expansion, pe, shall be calculated from: The stresses shall be calculated with and without the
effect of shell and tubesheet corrosion (if applicable)
using the nominal tubesheet thicknesses.
4JE,es(%~s - @t) The effective longitudinal shell stress shall be
= (D - 3es)(l + JKF,) calculated from:
3.9.4.3.4 The effective differential design pressure, p d , (D - eSlP,*
shaii be calculated from:
4%
where
P,* = y ~ + ~2
s - P ' t - Pe)
or
whichever has the PS* = P's + P 2 - P't
greatest absolute value
or
or
pd allows oniy for the simultaneous action of both

shell and tube side effective design presswes and it is or
oniy permissible to be used as a design basis with P,* = Y b 2 - P't - P,)
specific agreement between the manufacturer and the
purchaser (see table 1.51). or
NOTE 1. It is not permissible to enter the equations in 3.9.4.3.1 PS* = PZ - P ' t
with Cpl - p z ) in place of p', or the equations in 3.9.4.3.2 with
(pl - p z ) in place of pstto determine an effective shell side or or
tube side design pressure for k e d tubesheets.
NOTE 2. Equations containing the terms pgt or pgc are not P,* = P's
applicable for use in shear equations in 3.9.4.2. where
Y = 1.0 if the algebraic sign of ps* is negative, or
= 0.5 if the algebraic sign of ps* is positive.
NOTE.When the design is based on simultaneous differential

pressure (see 3.9.4.3.4) only the first three equations for p,*
apply.
3/13
O BSI 1997
~~ ~~
STD.BSI B S 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1 7 7 7 m 1 b 2 4 b b 7 O b 7 0 7 1 1 T 7 4 m
The effective longitudinal tube stress shall be Compressive shell stresses shall be limited to the
calculated fi-om: allowable value given in A.3.5. Compressive tube
stresses shall be limited to:
where or
S [l -&]whenC>- r
Lk
or where
r is the radius of gyration of tube

= 0.25.\ld2+(d - 2et)z
Lk is the buckling length (see figure 3.9-12); I

f is the design stress from tables 2.32 to 2.312;
s’ is the factor 1.4 for ferritic steels, or 1.1for
austenitic steek,
Et is the elastic modulus of tube materie
S is the safety factor

= 3.25 - 0.5F0 for floating head and U-tube
exchangers, and
= 3.25 - 0.5F, for fixed tubesheet exchangers.
The safety factor S shall be not less than 1.25 and shall
where not exceed a value of 2.0.
3.9.6 Allowable tube joint end load
For joints a, b and c the tube joint end load shali be
= 1.0 if the algebraic sign of p t * is negative, or limited to:
= 0.5 if the algebraic sign of p t * is positive; tube cross-sectional area X tube design stress X F,
For joints d, e and f the tube joint end load shali be
limited to:
0 jq1
P 4 = Pt--232 tube cross-sectional area X tube design stress X Fe X
X F , X G
where
Fr is the reliability factor from table 3.9-2

Fe is the expansion factor (not greater than 1.0)
NOTE. When the design is based on simultaneous differential = 1for grooved holes
pressure (see 3.9.4.3.4) only the first three equations for p: apply
The maximum absolute value of the tube end joint = 1for explosion expandedíwelded tube ends
load shall be checked against that permitted in 3.9.6. expanded length
- for plah holes
tube 0.d.
3.9.5 Allowable shell and tube longitudinal
stresses I$ is the material factor (not greater than 1.0)
Tensile shell and tube stresses calculated in -
- tubesheet design stress
accordance with 3.9.3.1 and 3.9.4.4 shall be checked tube design stress
to ensure that they do not exceed the allowable values
in section 2.
O BSI
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,J a n m 1997 Section 3
Table 3.9-2 Values of F, for typical tube j lints

Joint F;)
a Welded with minimum weld throat 2 0.80
4( = -L tube thickness
2 b Welded with minimum weld throat < 0.55
tube thickness
c Expanded and welded with minimum 0.80
weld throat 2 tube thickness
d Expanded and welded with minimum 0.55
weld throat < tube thickness
Lk is the larger of: e Expandedonly 0.50
a -
- b f Explosion expandedhvelded 0.80
&'fi These values of F, can be increased if the procedure is
approved
.. . . . . with a. pull. out test.
and checked . . In the case of . .
welded tube ends, the procedure IS to be m accorciance w m
I II
BS 4870 : Part 3.
NOTE.Typical examples of arc welded tube to tubeplate joints
are given in annex T.
Lk is the largest of:

-a - b
9 fiWC
Lk is the largest of:
4, is the largest of:

-a b
f i ,-
f i ' c, 4 e
NOTE.For U tubes, L is the straight length between tubesheet

and bend
Figure 3.9-12 Determination of the buckling

length L k
3/136 O BSI 1997

Load case: Clause

Consistent units: dimensions = ; p/f/r/E=
reference
Sheiiside Tubeside U-tube tubesheet thickness 3.9.3
Design pressure Pi P2 Pressure acting on
Corrosion allowances P = IPZ - Pl1 3.9.3.1
Tubesheet design temperatures ‘/I
v=[&]
fibesheet material
Allowable stress at design bending f R = DIID,, if pi > p2
temperature shear T =Dz/Do if p , > p ,
= m a . of above if p i = p z
Design stress factor (3.9.2.3) CO Table 3.9-1
Young’s modulus tubesheet E AC Table 3.9-1
C = Co + AC
tubes Et Bending e, = CDoV 3.9.3.1
If tubes expanded to fuiidepth and E1 EE 3.9.3.1

Ishear e, =
.._
.D = A. = [P - (dh - et)]/P=
Otherwise,
Min.acceptable thickness
= greater of e values I e
/.=
I A [P - dh]/P =
Pressure factors ref. 3.9.1 Tubesheet thickness = e + allowances
-
X2 = 1 - N[(d - 2eJ/Do]2= Floating head tubesheet thickness 3.9.3
x, = 1 - N ( ~ J D , =) ~ Pressure acting on 3.9.3.1
S=X,-X1= ... p = IP, - P,l =
Fs = 0.5(Xi + X,) =
1-1
Figures
3.9-7 or
3.9-8
Figure 3.9-1
Table 3.9-1
3.9.3.1
3.9.3.1
O BSI 1997
31137
~~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 m 1 b 2 4 b b ï Ob70714 783
Suggested working form - fixed tubesheet design

Loaácase: Assume thickness + e I I I
D* = tlE2/12(1 - 9)
Consistent units: dimensions 0 = 4 m
I I Shellside I Tubeside X- = ßD,/2 I I I

Design pressure I Pl I P? 2 = 2KdpD* I I I
Corrosion allowances Fq (ref. Figure 3.9-9)
nbesheet design temperature (1 + JKF,)
Tubesheet material H íref. F i m e 3.9-1Oì
Allowable stress at
design temperature
bending If W', íref. 3.9.4.3.1) I I I
shear z P', (ref. 3.9.4.3.2) I I I
Shell Tube Tubesheet Pe (ref. 3.9.4.3.3) I
Young's modulus Es Et E Shellside loading ref. 3.9.4.2 and 3.9.4.3.1
1 Coefficient of US a, - (a) 0.667 (P's - Pel
expansion
Metal temperature I e, I e, I @IP's
Ligament efficiency (ref. 3.9.2.1) Deflection efficiency
(ref. figures 3.9-7
{ If tubes expanded fulldepth and and 3.9-8)
Et 2 E
I
,ü = A = [P - (dh - ea]P = e < 2P or e 2 2P
Otherwise,
,ü = A = [P- dh]/P = II= tl=
Tubeside loading ref. 3.9.4.2 and 3.9.4.3.2

I
I
1
Jfuctor (ref 3.9.1)
Shell without bellows +J= 1
(a) If p', positive
greater abs. of
0.@7@'t +PBt + Pe)
I I I
Hi-
Bellow to shell diameter D = ;spring rate S = @) If pfSnegative O.667(Pft- p's + p, +
greater abs. of
Shell with thin wail-bellows +J= o @'i - P's - pB3
Shell with bellows of known
spring rate
+J= P2B = (a) or @) as applicable
I I I
I I I
Edge support factor (ref 3.9.4.2) pzs = (a) or @) as applicable
but OMIT p,, term
I l l
K, = Ec(e32.5/([12(1 - v:)]o.75(Dz +e,)o.5)=
K, = E5(es)2.5/([12(1 - v:)]o.75(Di + =
Shear e2, = O.155D,g2&~
If agreed, combined loading ref 3.9.4.2 and 3.9.4.3.4

I Struinfactor (ref. 3.9.4.2)
K = Ese5(D - es)/Eflet(d - et) =

%be bundle modulus (ref 3.9.4.2)
1 K = 4NEte,(d - eJLD,
Equivalent bolting pressures (ref 3.9.4.3.6)
M~~ = pBt = Z K M , / ( D ~ =) ~
I M,, = pgt = z & , / ( D ~ ) ~ =
3/138
O BSI 1997
STD.BSI BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1 7 7 7 m l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob707L5 bJT .
I
Section 3 h e 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Suggested working form - fixed tubesheet design [concluded)

pdB = greater abs. of (a) to (g)
p,, = greater abs. of (e) or (0
tubes If pa results from term containing p ,
Hole dia. in on P = A o pitch then B = 1.5, otherwise 52 = 2. 5;1=
tubeshee t expanded /welded
Shear e,, = 0.155D$,$Xt

I I I
Min.acceptable thickness
= greater of above e values
Check e assumed /e is within 1.5 %

1.1 I I
lùbesheet thickness = e + allowances =
3.10 Design of welds 3.10.2 Weld joints for principal seams

3.10.1 General NOTE. Typical forms of weld preparation for the principal seams
of vessels covered by this standard are indicated in annex E.
3.10.1.1 Vessels shall be designed with the minimum
practical number of seams with adequate access for Where phtes of different thicknesses are joined by
the deposition and inspection of weld metal to comply means of butt welding, a tapered transition shali be
with sections 4 and 6. A s far as possible seams shali provided as shown in figure 3.10-1.
be positioned clear of supports, etc., so as to be readily Where the design requires intentional offsets of median
visible in service after removing any M a t i o n . When line, and meets the requirements of C.3.4.6.4, special
openings occur in welded seams or within 12 mm of consideration of additional stresses (see 3.2.1) shall
any main Sems additional inspection requirements not be required provided the offset of ascent parts is
shall apply (see 6.6.4.2). faired by means of a taper as shown in figure 3.10-2
Where more than two weld seams meet at one point, and, in the case of longitudinal joints (or
consideration shall be given to the desirability of circumferential joints in spherical vessels), the
intermediate post-weld heat treatment (see 4.1.4) intentional offset does not exceed 10 % of the nominal
3.10.1.2 It is permissible to weld nozzles, pads, thickness of the thinner plate.
branches, pipes and tubes and non-pressure parts to The design of principal seams where the deposited
pressure parts, provided that the strength and weld metal will have a yield strength (or proof stress)
characteristics of the material of the pressure part are less than either of the materials being joined
not influenced adversely Attachments of non-pressure (see 4.3.2) shall be the subject of special consideration
parts by welds which cross, or for which the minimum and, if required, shall be justified by the manufacturer.
nominal distance between the edge of the attachment The ductility of the heat affected zone shall be taken
weld and the edge of the exisîing main welds or nozzle into account as necessary The location of such seams
welds, is less than the smaller of twice the nominal where they may be subject to high benclhg stresses
thickness of the pressure part or 40 mm, shall be shall be avoided
avoided; if this is not possible, such welds shall cross
the main weld completely rather than stop abruptly
near it in order to avoid stress concentration.
Full penetration butt welds shall be used for any radial
joints in stiffening rings and in other similar members
used for stiffening and support purposes. The
soundness of all such welds shall be demonstrated on
completion by appropriate radiographic or ultrasonic
inspection, unless the attachment of these members to
the shell is designed to preclude the possibility of a
defect in the radial joint propagating into the shell.
Corner joints with fiilet welds oniy shall not be used
unless the plates forming the corner are properly
supported independently of such welds.
O BSI 1997
3/139
~~
S T D W B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 D l b 2 q b b 7 U b 7 0 7 l b 5 5 b H
3.10.3 Welded joints for other than principal

seams
NOTE 1. Recommended forms of weld preparation for branches,
studded connections, flanges, jacketed vessels, tube to tubeplate
connections, tubeplate to shell connections and flat end
connections are detailed in annex E.
It is important to note that the intention of annex E is to
exemplify sound and commonly accepted practice and not to
promote standardization of connections that may be regarded as
mandatory, or to restrict development in any way
Forms of weld preparation in accordance with
annex E shall be acceptable for vessels complying with
this standard subject to both:
a) the appropriate requirements of sections 4 and 5
being met;
b) the use of established British practice as
conveyed by the information in annex E.
NOTE 2. in the design of weld details, consideration should be
given to the non-destructive testing requirements in 6.6.4. It is
accepted, however, that the most suitable detail for a particular
service condition may not necess- be the most amenable to
radiographic andor ultrasonic inspection. Where the welding of
heavy scantlings is involved, details should be selected to
minimize the local restraint imposed on the weld during cool~ng'~)
NOTE 3. The recommended shapes of fillet welds, partial
penetration welds and full penetration welds are given in the
relevant figures of E.2. These weld shapes and dimensions are
linked to the thickness of one of the welded components and are
based upon sound and commonly accepted practice.
NOTE 4. For guidelines on arc welded tube to tubeplate joints see
annex T.
Bolt holes drilled in flange rings that are fabricated
from bar or s t a k plate which is rolled and butt
welded to form the ring, should be drilled to avoid the
weld joint. Where this is not possible then surface and
volumetric nondestructive testing shall be carried out
at the weld location in accordance with 6.6.4.
Stresses in welds subject to fatigue loading shall be
assessed in accordance with annex C.
3.10.4 Welded joints in time dependent
applications
In cases where the design strength is time dependent,
due consideration shall be given to the importance of
achieving adequate long t e m ductility of the weld
material and heat affected zones, as well as that of the
parent matmiid.
19) See annex G of BS 5135 : 1984 for general guidance on the susceptibility of materials to lamellar tearing during fabrication.
~~~
3 / 1 4 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

STD.BS1 BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1777 9 L b 2 4 b b ï O b 7 0 7 1 7 Li92
M o n3 Issue 2, May 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
1 4 O ( slope i:4 )max., I.
Tapers may include

weld if desired
4 k- Parallel length
Internal and external offsets need not be symmetrically disposed

a) Plates of unequai thickness
Internal and e x t e r n a l o f f s e t s
need not be symmetrically
eld if desired but no

uired if difference
hickness e 3 mm
b) End thicker than shell median plane approximate coincident
c) End thinner than shell

Figure 3.10-1 Butt welds in plates of unequal thickness (see annex E for details
of weld p r e p d o n )
O BSI
STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1797 Lb2LibbS O b 7 0 7 1 8 3 2 9 m
Offset may be internal

or e x t e r n a l
Taper may include weld
I i f desired
4 1-Parallel length
Taper may be inside vessel or outside

a) Plates of unequal thickness b) End thicker than shell median plane offset
Figure 3.10-2 Butt welds with offset of median lines (see 3.10.2)
3.11 Jacket construction 3.11.3.1 Notation

3.11.1 General For the purposes of 3.11.3.2 and the figures referred to
in the note to 3.11.3 the following symbols apply AU
3.11.1.1 Jacketed vessels, excluding jacketed troughs, dimensions exclude corrosion allowances.
shall be designed in accordance with the requirements
for each element stated elsewhere in this standard. The
inner vessel shall be designed to resist the full e, is the minimum thickness of the vessel at the
junction with the blocking/sealing ring ( i mm);
differential pressure that may exist under any
operating condition, including accidental vacuum in the is the analysis thickness of jacket (in mm);
inner vessel due to condensation of vapour contents tc is the minimum thickness of blockingkealer ring
where this circumstance can arise. Particular attention (in mm);
shall be given to the effect of local loads and
differential expansion. D is the id. of jacket ( i mm);
3.11.1.2 Where the inner vessel is to operate under d is the 0.d. of vessel ( i mm);
vacuum and the hydraulic test pressure for the jacket p is the design pressure of jacket (in N/mm2);
is correspondingiy increased to test the inner vessel is the design stress (in N/mm2) (see 3.4).
externally, care shall be taken that the jacket shell is f
designed to withstand this extra pressure (see 6.8). 3.11.3.2 Blocking and sealing rings
NOTE. in cases where the design strength is time dependent,
components designed by the procedure specified in this section The thickness of blocking and sealing rings shall be
should be reviewed to ensure that creep deformation (local or determined as follows.
general) will be acceptable throughout the agreed design lifetime.
a) The thickness of a blocking ring shall not be less
3.11.2 Jacketed cylindrical shells (see than 29 or the following, whichever is the greateq
figures 3.11-1 and 3.11-2)
Where jackets are retained with stays they shall be
calculated as fiat surfaces, unless an alternative design
basis ciw be justified by detailed analysis of local
stresses d a c e n t to the support points. Where leakage
for type 1 jackets, tc = 0.433 (D - d) -
tf
past a stay would be dangerous, such as in certain
chemical processes, the plates shall not be perforated
for the supporting stay.
3.11.3 Welded jacket connections
NOTE. Qpical recommended forms of attachment for types 1
for type 2 jackets, tc = 0.866
v
b) The thickness of a sealing ring shall not be less
and 2 jackets are illustrated in annex E, as referenced below. For than tj or the thickness required by 3.6.3 or the
vessels in cyclic service or subject to large temperature
differentials or transients, special considerations should be given following, whichever is the greateq
to the suitability of the actual construction details for the stated
design and operating conditions. In particular if blocking rings are
proposed for such applications, the type or detail shown in
figure E.38e should be used unless it can be demonstrated by
appropriate stress analysis, testing or reference to previous
for type 1jackets, tc = 0.433 (D - d ) -
t
w
practice that an alternative form of connection would be
satisfactory.
Vessel to blocking ring attachments: Figures E.37a, b and c for type 2 jackets, tc = 0.75
Blocking ring to jacket attachments: Figures E.38a, b, c, d, e, f
and g
Sealer ring details and attachments: Figures E.39a, b, c and d
3/142
O BSI 1997
For a blocking or sealing ring of type 2, the vessel

cylinder thickness for a distance of 1.4 d m on
either side of the junction with the ring shall not be y--- -- \
k-
- I-
less than er where:- I
I I
er = 0.612 w
NOTE. Outlet branches are designed as follows.
a) Through connections
' -- - ---
m i c a l constructions in which the outlet passes through the

jacket space are shown in figure E.40a and b. I
b) Flexible construction
Where considerable expansion and movement are anticipated,
the bottom outlet pipe can be arranged to pass through a
stuffing-box mounted on the outside of the jacket bottom plate.
3.11.4 Compensation 'he 1 ' h e2
Jacket of any length Jacket covering a portion
Where reinforcement is required it shail be in confined entirely to of cylindrical shell and
accordance with 3.6.4. cylindrical shell one head
Figure 3.11-1 Some acceptable types of
jacketed vessels
Sealer
ring
ocking ring
Stays
For thickness of sealer ring see 3.11.3.21, For thickness of blocking ring see 3.11.3.2a
a) Without stays b) Alternative, with stays
Weld profiles are diagrammatic only

Figure 3.11-2 Typical blocking ring and sealer ring construction
O BSI 1997
3/14
~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 1 b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70720 T87
3.12 Manholes and inspection openings NOTE 3. The use of a bursting disc as a pressure relieving device
may be applicable in the following cases:
Attention is drawn to the Factories Act 1961, a) where pressure rise may be so rapid that the inertia of a
Section 30. All vessels required by Statutory relief valve would be a disadvantage;
Regulations to have openings, and all vessels subject to b) where even minute leakage of the fluid cannot be tolerated
corrosion shall be provided with inspection andor c) where service conditions may involve heavy deposits or
access openings so located as to permit a complete gumming up such as would render a relief valve inoperative.
visual examination of the interior of the vessel. NOTE 4. A register of all protective devices fitted to each vessel
Manholes and inspection openings shall comply with or system should be maintained by the user. The register should
relate the location and service conditions of each device to its
BS 470. individual identification markings.
NOTE. A range of standardized davits for branch covers of steel Where the total capacity of the devices necessary to protect an
pressure vessels is given in BS 5276 : Part 1. installation from overpressure requires appropriate account to be
taken of operating and fault conditions, the register should also
include a record of the relevant calculations.
3.13 Protective devices for excessive
pressure or vacuum 3.13.2 Capacity of relief deviceCs)
3.13.1 Application 3.13.2.1 The total capacity of the pressure relief
device or devices fitted to any vessel or system of
3.13.1.1 Every pressure vessel shall be protected from vessels shall be sufficient to discharge the maximum
excessive pressure or vacuum by an appropriai% quantity of fluid, liquid or gaseous, that can be
protective device, except as provided for in 3.13.1.2. generated or supplied without occurrence of a rise in
Each compartment of a subdivided vessel shall be vessel pressure of more than 10 % above the design
treated as a sepasate vessel and suitabiiity connected pressure.
to a protective device. Where a vessel is provided with NOTE 1. The safety valve standards only cover liquid or gaseous
an impervious movable partition, as in a gas loaded fluids. For applications where the valve(s) may be required to
hydraulic accumulator, protective devices have to be discharge a twephase mixture, the type and capacity of proposed
provided for the spaces on both sides of each partition. safety valves should be discussed with the valve manufacturer.
NOTE 2. Any requirements for additional safety valve capacity to
Safety valves and burstllig discs shall comply with prevent excessive pressure in the event of fire should be specified
BS 6759 or BS 2915. The installation and other safety by the purchaser after due consideration of potential fire risks and
devices shall comply where appropriate with BS 1123, resulting hazards.
BS 2915 or BS 6759. 3.13.3 Pressure setting of pressure relieving
NOTE 1. Other protective devices may be accepted provided they devices
are proved to be suitable for the purpose and reliable. Where
these depend on outside sources of energy for their operation, 3.13.3.1 Safety valves shall normally be set to operate
there should be at least two independent sources, and at least two at a nominal pressure not exceeding the design
such devices, each having at least 75 % of the required discharge
capacity, should be provided. pressure of the vessel at the operating temperature.
However, if the capacity is provided by more than one
3.13.1.2 When a vessel is fitted with a heating coil or safety valve, it is permissible for only one of the valves
other element whose failure might increase the
to be set to operate in this way and for the additional
pressure of the fluid in the vessel above the design
valve or valves to be set to operate at a pressure not
level, the designed relieving capacity of the protective
more than 5 % in excess of the design pressure at the
device shall normally be adequate to limit this increase
to the maximum value specified in 3.13.2. operating temperature, provided it complies with the
overall requirements of 3.13.2.1.
However, when the source of pressure (or
temperature) is externai to the vessel and is such that 3.13.3.2 Bursting discs fitted in place of, or in series
the pressure cannot exceed the design pressure, it is with, safety valves shall be rated to burst at a
permissible for a pressure protective device not to be maximum pressure not exceeding the design pressure
provided on the vessel. of the vessel at operating temperature at the
NOTE 1. Examples are the generation of pressure by a compressor temperature of the disc coincident with vessel
or pump whose maximum output pressure cannot exceed the operating temperature. Where a bursting disc is fitted
design pressure, or heating by steam or other fluid whose downstream of a safety valve, the maximum bursting
temperature cannot exceed the design temperature. pressure shall also be compatible with the pressure
NOTE 2. Vessels connected together in a system by piping of rating of the discharge system (see annex C of
adequate capacity, free from potential blockages and which does BS 2915 : 1984).
not contain any valve that can isolate any vessel may be
considered as a system of vessels for the application of pressure NOTE. In the case of bursting discs fitted in parallel with valves
relief. to protect a vessel against rapid increase of pressure (e.g. see
note 3 to 3.13.1.2) the bursting discs should be rated to burst at a
maximum pressure not exceeding 1.25 times the design pressure
of the vessel at operating temperature at the temperature of the
disc coincident with vessel operating temperature.
3/14
O BSI 1997
STD.BSI BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1 7 7 7 l b 2 L i b b 9 Ob70721 9 1 3
Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Section 4. Manilfacture and workmanship
4.1 General aspects of construction mark is unavoidably cut out during manufacture of a
pressure part, it shall be transferred by the pressure
4.1.1 General part manufacturer to another past of this component.
The aluminium supplement gives requirements specific The transfer of the mark shall be witnessed by the
to aluminium and duminium alloys. This section shall manufacturer's inspection department (see table 5.1-1).
be modified as given in the aluminium supplement for Records of applicable batches of welding consumables
unfired fusion welded pressure vessels constructed of shall be retained.
duminium and aluminium alloys.
4.1.3 Order of completion of weld seams
Before commencing mufacture, the manufacturer
shall submit for approval by the purchaser a fully Where any part of a vessel is made in two or more
dimensioned àrawing showing the pressure portions of courses, the longitudinal seams shall be completed
the vessel and carrying the foliowing information before commencing the adjoining circumferential
(see 1.6.2). seam(s) and, where practicable, the longitudinal seams
of macent courses shall be staggered by 4e or 100 mm,
a) A statement that the vessel is to be constructed in whichever is the greater, measured from the toe of the
accordance with this standard.
welds.
b) Specification(s) with which materials shall
comply. 4.1.4 Junction of more than two weld seams
c) Welding procedures to be adopted for all parts of Where more than two weld seams meet at one point,
the vessel. consideration shall be given by the manufacturer to the
desirability of intermediate stress relief.
d) Largescale dimensional details of the weld
preparation for the longitudinal and circumferentiai
seams, and details of the joints for branch pipes, 4.2 Cutting, forming and tolerances
seatings, etc., and the position of these seams and
other openings. 4.2.1 Cutting of material
e) Heat treatment procedure. 4.2.1.1 Method
f) Nondeslmctivetesting requirements. AU material shall be cut to size and shape preferably
g) Test plate requirements. by thermal cutting or machining. However, for plates
less than 25 mm thick, it is permissible to use cold
h) Design pressure(s) and temperature(s) and major shearing provided that the cut edges are dressed back
slmcturd loadings. mechanically by not less than 1.5mm to provide a
i) Test pressure(s). suitable surface to permit a satisfactory examination of
j) Amount and location of corrosion allowance. the edges prior to welding.
By agreement between the purchaser and the It is permissible for plates less than 10 mm thick,
manufacturer, it is permisible to commence the which are cold sheared, not to be dressed where the
manufacture of individual parts of the vessel before cut edges are to be subsequently welded.
approval of the drawings of the complete vessel (see NOTE. Where preheat is specified for welding the type of material
table 1.51). being cut by a thermal process, it may also be necessary to
preheat during cutting.
No modifications shall be made to the approved design
except with prior agreement between the purchaser Surfaces which have been thermally cut shall be
and the manufacturer (see table 1.51). dressed back by machining or grinding to remove
severe notches, slag and scale. Slight oxidation of the
4.1.2 Material identification cut edges of MO and M1 type steels produced by
The manufacturer shall maintain, to the satisfaction of machine thermal cutting shall not be regarded as
the Inspecting Authority, a positive system of detrimental.
identification for the material used in fabrication in The cut edges off&tk alloy steel, which are cut by a
order that all material for pressure parts in the thermal process, shall be dressed back by grinding or
completed work can be traced to its origin. The system machining for a distance of 1.5mm unless the
shall incorporate appropriate procedures for verifymg manufacturer can demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the identity of material as received from the supplier the Inspecting Authority that the material has not been
via the material manufacturer's test certificates andor adversely affected by the cutting process (see
appropriate acceptance tests. In laying out and cutting table 1.51).
the material, the material identifcation mark shall be
so located as to be clearly visible when the pressure
part is completed2o).Where the material identification
'O) For vessels required to operate at low temperature, see D.4.2.
O BSI 1997 41
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 Lb2'ibb9 Ob70722 B5T
4.2.1.2 Examination of cut edges 4.2.2.3 Cold forming

Before casrYing out further work, cut surfaces and heat 4.2.2.3.1 Femitic steel
affected zones shall be examined for defects, including If the inside radius of curvature of a cold formed
lamiiions, cracks and slag inclusions. Independent cylindrical pressure part is less than 10 times the
examination by the Inspecting Authority may be nominal thickness in the case of carbon and carbon
required in the case of category 3 components (see manganese steels, or 18 times the nominal thickness in
table 6.1-1). the case of all other ferritic materials, an appropriate
Visual methods may be supplemented by appropriate post forming heat treatment shall be applied to restore
nondestructive testing techniques when agreed properties to levels which will ensure that the material
between the purchaser and the manufacturer (see 6.6.3 properties are not sgnif~cantlyaltered from those
and table 1.51). assumed in design.
Major defects shall be notified to the inspecting All domed ends which have been cold formed shall be
Authority and the method of their rectification agreed heat treated for the m e purpose unless the
between the purchaser and the manufacturer (see manufacturer demonstrates that the cold formed
table 1.51). properties are adequate and the material properties are
not significantly altered fì-om those assumed in design.
Any material damaged in the process of cutting to size
and preparation of edges shall be removed by 4.2.2.3.2 Austenitic sted
machining, grinding or chipping back to undamaged Cold formed austenitic steels do not require a
metal. subsequent softening heat treatment (as described
in 4.2.2.4.2) when the minimum design temperahre is
4.2.2 Forming of shell sections and plates -196 "C and above and any of the following conditions
4.2.2.1 General a) or b) or c) are satisfied, unless particular corrosion
Mor to forming, a visual exasnination of all plates resistance or other purchase requirements are
shall be carried out, followed by measurement of the specified.
thickness. a) When the specified minimum elongation at break
A 2 30 % and a level of 15% cold deformation is not
A s far as practicable, all hot and cold forming shall be exceeded. Or,
done by machine; local heating or hammering shall not
be used. the residual elongation after cold forming is
demonstrated to be 1 15%. This can be assumed to
By agreement between the purchaser and the be demonstrated in the case of material where the
manufacturer, it is permissible for the manufacturer to specified minimum value for elongation at break A is
be required to demonstrate that the forming and heat less than 30 %, but the actual elongation as measured
ireahnent operations will not significantly alter the in the material acceptance certificate is 2 30 %.
material properties from those assumed in design (see b) With levels of cold fonning above 15%, proof is
table 1.51). provided in individual cases that the residual
Heavy scale remaining after any hot forming operation elongation at break A after cold forming is at
shall be removed by a suitable descaling process which least 15 %.
will not impair the quality of the material or have an e) For cold formed heads (semi-eliiptical,
adverse effect on the corrosion resistance of the torispherical and hemispherical ends) the acceptance
exposed surfaces. certificate for the base material @rior to cold
NOTE. D.4.3 gives recommendations for forming and heat forming) shows the following values for elongation
treatment of carbon and carbon manganese steel vessels designed at breakA
to operate below O "C.
2 40 % for wall thickness < 15 mm;
4.2.2.2 Plates welded prior to hot or cold forming 2 45 % for wall thickness > 15 mm.
It is permissible to butt weld plates together prior to NOTE 1. It is expected that for such head material there will be at
forming provided that the joint is nondestmctively least 15 96 residual elongation after cold forming. This can be
checked using the following formuia for level of deformation in
tested after forming by a method agreed between the dished end forms.
purchaser and the manufacturer (see table 1.51). NOTE 2. A, the elongation at break, is fully defined in
S i c e welds in items subjected to hot forming BS EN 10002-1
temperatures, or normalized, will generally suffer For conditions a) and b) the level of deformation shall
significant strength reduction, the manufaclmer shall be determined for sheil and cone forms by:
ensure that the filler metal used will sahsfy the weld
joint design requirements after such heat treatment. deformation % = - 1 - -
where
R,
50e( 22
e is the nominal thickness of the initial product;
Rm is the mean radius of the final product;
Rmo is the mean radius of the initial product;
42 O BSI 1997
and for dished end forms by: 4.2.2.6 Examination of formed plates
Db All plates, after being formed and before carrying out
deformation % = 100 In - further work upon them, shall be examined visually
De - 2e
where and checked for thickness.
Where required by 3.7.1 additional examination by
e is the nominal thickness of the initialproduct; suitable nondestructive testing methods shall also be
carried out (see table 1.51).
is the diameter of the blank or the diameter of
the intermediate product; 4.2.3 Assembly tolerances
De is the external diameter of the final product; 4.2.3.1 Middle line alignments
In is the natural logarithm. The root faces of the welding preparations shaìl be
aligned within the tolerances permitted by the welding
Where the preceding conditions a) or b) or c) do not procedure specification and the components shall be
exist, cold formed austenitic stainless steels shall be aligned as indicated on the drawings within the
softened after cold forming by a softening treatment as following tolerances. The tolerances shall be applied to
described in 4.2.2.4.2. the intended position of the middle lines of a x e n t
4.2.2.4 Hot forming components whether coincidentally or intentionally
offset.
4.2.2.4.1 Femitic steel a) For longitudinal joints in cylindrical components
Forming procedures involving plate heating shall be and joints in spherical components, the middle lines
agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer of a a c e n t plates shall be aligned within the
(see table 1.51). following tolerances.
The forming procedure shall specify the plate heatmg
rate, the holding temperature, the temperature range For plate thickness e 1 mm.
and time in which the forming takes place and shall up to and
give details of any heat treatment to be given to the including 10 mm
formed part. When required by the purchaser or For plate thickness e 10 % of thickness or
Inspecting Authority the manufacturer shall provide over 10 nun up to and 3 mm, whichever is the
data to support his procedure (see table 1.51). including 50 mm smaller.
4.2.2.4.2 Austenitifi steel For plate thickness e e/16 or 10 mm,
Austenitic steel plates to be heated for hot working over 50 mm up to whichever is the smaller.
shall be heated uniformly in a neutral or oxidizing 200 mm
atmosphere without flame impingement, to a For plate thickness e tolerances are to be
temperature not exceeding the recommended hot over 200 mm agreed between the
working temperature of the material. Deformation shall purchaser and the
not be carried out after the temperature of the manufacturer (see
materials has fallen below 900 "C. Local heating shall table 1.51).
not be applied.
After hot working is completed the material shall be b) For circumferentialjoints, the middle lines of
heated to the agreed softening temperature for a e a c e n t plates shall be in aiignment within the
period not less than 30 min. The softening following tolerances.
temperatures and period for warm worked, high proof
material shall be agreed between the purchaser and For plate thickness e 1 mm.
the manufacturer (see table 1.51). After softening, the up to and including
surface shall be descaled. 10 mm
4.2.2.6 ManrCfacture of shell plates and ends For plate thickness e 10 % of thickness of
over 10 mm up to and thinner part plus 1 nun,
Shell plates shall be formed to the correct contour to including 60 mm or 6 mm, whichever is
ensure compliance with tolerances specified in 4.2.3. the smaller.
Where practicable, head plates and ends shall be made For plate thickness e 10 % of the thickness of
from one plate. Dishing and peripheral fianging of end over 60 mm up to thinner part.
plates shall be done by machine, flanging preferably 200 mm
being done in one operation. Sectional flanging is
permitted provided that it is agreed between the For piate thickness e tolerances are to be
purchaser and the manufacturer (see table 1.51). The over 200 mm agreed between the
flanges shall be cylindrical, of good surface and free purchaser and the
from irregulanties. manufacturer (see
table 1.51).
O BSI 1997
4/3
4.2.3.2 SuMace alignment 4.2.4 Tolerances for vessels subject to internal

The misalignment at the surïace of the plates for plate pressure
thickness e shall be as specified in a) and b). if this 4.2.4.1 Iblerances for ends
misalignment is exceeded, the surface shall be tapered
with a slope of 1:4 over a width that includes the 4.2.4.1.1 Circumfmme
width of the weld, the lower surface being built up Unless otherwise agreed between the purchaser and
with added weld metal, if necessaq to provide the the manufacturer (see table 1.5-1),the external
required taper. ?kimming of plate surfaces is not circumference of the completed end shall not depart
permitted where this reduces the thickness below the from the calculated circumference (based upon
required minimum. nominal inside diameter and the actual plate thickness)
a) For longitudinal joints in cylindrical components by more than the amounts shown in table 4.2-1.
and joints in spherical components, the surfaces of
a x e n t piates shall be aligned within the following I Table 4.2-1 Circumference I
tolerances Outside diameter (nominal inside Circumferential
diameter plus twice actual plate tolerance
For piate thickness e d4. thickness)
up to and including Up to and including 650 mm 3 mm
12 mm
Over 650 mm fo.25 % of
For plate thickness e 3 mm. circumference
over 12 mm up to and
including 50 mm
For plate thickness e the lesser of d16 or
over 50 mm 10 mm.
b) For circumferential joints, the surfaces of

aaacent plates shali be aligned within the following
tolerances
For piate thickness e d4.

up to and includmg
20 mm
For plate thickness e 5 mm.
over 20 mm up to and
including 40 mm
For plate thickness e the lesser of e h or
over 40 mm 20 mm.
4.2.3.3 Attachments, nozzles and fittings

All pads, reinforcing plates, manhole frames, lugs,
brackets, stiffeners, supports and other attachments
shali fit closely, and the gap at all exposed edges to be
welded shall not exceed 2 mm or one-Mentieth of the
thickness of the attachment at the point of attachment,
whichever is greater.
Table 4.2-2 Tolerance on depth of domed ends
Except where specific dimensions are shown on the
fuliy dimensioned drawing, the maximum gap between Diameter of end Permissible increase
the outside of any branch or shell and the inside edge in depth of dishing
of the hole of the shell, flange, reinforcing ring or Up to and including 3000 mm 1.25 % of diameter
backing ring shall not exceed 1.5 mm for openings up Over 3000 mm up to and 38mm
to 300 mm, and 3 mm for openings over 300 mm. To including 7600 mm
achieve this gap it is permissible to machine over a
sufficient length of the outside diameter of the vessel Over 7600 mm 0.5 % of diameter
or nozzle to accommodate the attachment to which it
is to be welded. This machined length shall not extend
beyond the toes or edges of the attachment welds, and
shali not reduce the shell or nozzle wall thickness to a
value less than the design thickness plus the corrosion
allowance.
44
S T D - B S I B S 55OO-ENGL L977 D L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70725 5b9
Section 4 h e 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
4.2.4.2 Iblerances for cylindrical shells The general profile shall be checked using a
The shell sections of completed vessels shall comply template embracing an arc of 20 Normally,
O.
with 4.2.4.2.1 to 4.2.4.2.3. departures, referred to the mid-thickness line, shall

4.2.4.2.1 Ciwmfwence
not exceed
The tolerances on circumference shall comply 6 5 0.05 e + 0.0020 (maximum 25 mm)
with 4.2.4.1.1. where
4.2.4.2.2 Straightness
6 is the maximum local irregulariu
Unless otherwise agreed between the purchaser and
the manufacturer (see table 1.5), the maximum e is the plate thickness;
deviation of the shell from a stmight line shall not D is the shell outside diameter.
exceed 0.3 % either of the total cylindrical length or of
any individual 5 m length of the vessel. Measurements It is permissible for this marrimwn value to be
shall be made to the surface of the parent plate and increased by 25 % if the length of the irregularities
not to a weld, fitting or other raised part. does not exceed onequarter of the length of the
4.2.4.2.3 C i r c u h ~ t y(out-ofroundness) shell part between two circumferential seams with a
The tolerance on the circularity of the shell shall be as maximum of 1m Any local deviation from
follows. circularity shall be graduaL
a) The difference between the maximum and 4.2.5 Tolerances for vessels subject to external
minimum internal diameters measured at any one pressure
cross section expressed as a percentage of the Tolerances shall be within those specified in 3.6.
nominal shell outside diameter, D (in mm), shall not
exceed:
(0.5 + !g)% 4.3 Welded joints
4.3.1 General
or 1% whichever is the smaller.
No production welding of joints shall be commenced,
Measurements shall be made to the surface of the except by specific agreement between the purchaser
parent plate and not to a weld, fitting or other raised and the manufacturer (see table 1.51), until
Part. a) the welding procedures proposed have been
For vessels fabricated from pipe the permissible
approved in accordance with 5.2;
variation in diameter (measured externally) shall be
in accordance with the specification governing the b) welder/operators have been approved in
manufacture of the pipe or tube. accordance with 6 . 3
At nozzle positions a greater outaf-roundness is e) where stipulated by the purchaser, production
permitted if it can be justified by calculation and is conh-o1test plate requirements have been agreed;
agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer d) any examination required by the Inspecting I
(see table 1.51). Authority on the assembly of category 3 components I
There shall be no discernible fiats or excessive has been undertaken (see table 5.1-1). I
peaking at welded seams. Any local deviation from
circularity shall be gradual. 4.3.2 Welding consumables
in the case of vessels to be instalied in the vertical 4.3.2.1 Welding consumables (e.g. wire, electrodes,
position, which are to be checked in the horizontal flux,shielding gas) shall be the m e Qpe as those
position, the checks shall be repeated &er turning used in the welding procedure. By agreement between
the shell through 90 "about its long axis.The the purchaser, the Inspecting Authority and the
measurements shall be averaged and the amount of manufacturer alternative consumables are permissible
out-of-roundness calculated from the values so within the limits specified in BS EN 2883 (see
determined. table 1.51). To ensure that no unacceptable
The cold rolling of a welded shell to rectify a small deterioration occm, the storing and handling of
departure from circularity is permitted, provided an welding consumables shall be controlled in accordance
approved nondestructive testmg method is carried with procedures written on the basis of the makers'
out after the departure from circularity has been information.
remedied The manufacturer of the vessel shall provide evidence
b) Irregularities of profile shall also be checked by that the deposited weld metal is suitable in all respects
means of templates in the following cases: for the intended duty and has tensile properties
1) vessels which have been subject to a fatigue derived from the weld procedure tests not less than
analysis in accordance with C.1.6 those specified for the parent material, except in the
2) all vassels constructed of steel having a case of 9 % Ni (M6) steels which shall comply
specified minimum yield strength, Re, exceeding with 4.3.2.2 to 4.3.2.4.
400 N/mm2.
O BSI 1997 45
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 W l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob707Zb 4 T 5 m
4.3.2.2 Although ferritic consumables are suitable for 4.3.6.2 Removal of attachments
certain 9 % Ni applications, their selection shall have Temporary attachments shall be removed prior to the
particular regard to toughness requirements of the first pressurization unless they have been designed to
weldment. Weld metal properties and thickness limits the same quality as permanent attachments. The
for welded joints made with a ferritic filler shall be the removal technique shall be such as to avoid, as far as
subject of agreement between the purchaser and the practicable, impairing the integrity of the pressure
manufacturer (see table 1.51). containment and shall be by chipping and grinding or
4.3.2.3 For plates of 9 % Ni and of thickness 20 m thermal cutting followed by chipping or grinding. Any
and above, circular section all-weld metal tensile test rectification necessary by Welding of damaged regions
pieces shali be used to measure the 0.2 % proof after removal of attachments shall be undertaken in
strength (Rp0.2). For plates of 9 % Ni and less than accordance with an approved welding procedure
20 mm thick, Rpo.2 shall be measured from a transverse (see 6.2). The area from which tempomy attachments
tensile test piece in accordance with the method given have been removed shall be dressed smooth and
in annex B of BS 7777 : Part 2. examined by appropriate nondeshetive testing
NOTE 1. Nickel based and some austenitic filler materials w
ill
methods.
undermatch the parent material yield strength and may also NOTE. Attention is also drawn to the requirements of 4.4.3.1
undermatch the parent metal tensile strength. The weld metal and 4.4.3.2 which apply to vessels subject to post-weld !wat
properties of these consumables should satisfy a minimum 0.2 % treatment.
proof strength of 360 N/mm2.
4.3.6.3 Attachments of dissimilar metal
NOTE 2. The tensile strength of the transverse tensiles should
meet a minimum value of 655 N/mm2 (equivalent to 95 % of It is permissible to attach dissimilar metal attachments
minimum parent metal properties). to intermediate pieces, in turn connected directly to
the shell. Compatible welding materials shall be used
4.3.2.4 It is permissible when welding 9 % Ni materials for dissimilar metal joints.
to use austenitic stainless steel consumables down to NOTE. General recommendations for welding consumables and
-196 O C , but for temperatures below - 101"C this is post-weld heat treatment of dissimilar femtic steel joints are given
only by agreement between the purchaser and the in annex H.
manufacturer (see table 1.51). 4.3.6 Butt joints
4.3.3 Preparation of plate edges and openings 4.3.6.1 Butt welds between plates of unequal
4.3.3.1 Weld preparations and openings of the thickness
required shape shal be formed in accordance Where a butt welded seam is required between plates
with 4.2.1. of different thicknesses, the thicker plate shall be
reduced in thickness by one of the methods shown in
4.3.3.2 The profile of the weld preparation shall be as figures 3.10-1 and 3.10-2. The thicker plate shall be
specified in the approved welding procedure (see 5.2). trimmed to a smooth taper for a distance of not less
4.3.4 Assembly for welding than four times the offset including, where necessary,
the width of the weld. If necessary it is permissible to
4.3.4.1 Joints shall be fitted in accordance with the add weld metal beyond the width of what would
dimensional tolerances specified in the welding otherwise be the edge of the weld, to obtain the
procedure specification and 4.2.3. required taper.
4.3.4.2 It is permissible to use tack welds and 4.3.6.2 Backing strips
incorporate them in the final weld but they shall be For construction category 1, with the exception of
sound and have been made to an agreed and approved materiah and thicknesses permitted for construction
welding procedure (see 6.2). category 2, permanent backing strips shall not be used.
4.3.6 Attachments and the removal of In all other cases it is pennissible to use permanent
temporary attachments backkg strips when the second side is inaccessible for
welding, subject to agreement between the purchaser
4.3.6.1 Attachments and the manufacturer (see table 1.51) and provided
Attachments welded directly to the shell shall be of the that nondestructive testing can be satisfactorily carried
same nominal composition as that of the shell out where applicable. Only by agreement between the
immediately dacent, unless otherwise agreed between purchaser and the manufacturer, is it permissible for
the purchaser and the manufacturer (see table 1.51), circumferential butt joints in tubes to be welded with
and the welding procedures and operators shall be tempow, permanent or consumable backing rings
approved in accordance with section 6. Welds of (see table 1.51).
permanent attachments to pressure parts shall be Where a backing strip is to be used, the material shall
examined by appropriate nondestructive testing be such that it will not adversely influence the weld.
methods (sec 6.6). Unless otherwise agreed between the purchaser and
Temporary attachments welded to the pressure parts the manufacturer, backing strips shall be carefully
removed prior to any special nondestructive tests on
- shall be kept to a practical minimum.
the joint (see table 1.51).
4 6 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1997 l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70727 3 3 1 I
4.3.7 Welding: general requirements 4.4.1.2 The preheat requirements for welding shall be
established between the purchaser and the
4.3.7.1 All surfaces to be welded shall be thoroughly manufacturer at the time of approval of the welding
cleaned of oxide scale, oil or other foreign substances procedures (see table 1.51).
to a clean metal surface and for a distance of at
least 12 mm from each welding edge. 4.4.1.3 The temperature shall be checked during the
period of application. The methods to check
4.3.7.2 Distortion due to welding shall be minimized temperature shall be thermocouples, contact
by suitable attention to the welding sequence. pyrometers or temperature indicating crayons.
4.3.7.3 Each run of weld metal shall be thoroughly 4.4.1.4 Where preheat is specified welding shall
cleaned and all slag removed before the next run is continue without interruption. If, however, continuity is
deposited. affected, preheat shall be maintained or the joint shall
be slowly cooled under an insulation blanket. Before
4.3.7.4 The second side of joints welded fi-om both
recommencing welding preheat shall be applied.
sides shall be cleaned back to sound metad before
depositing weld metal at the second side, unless the 4.4.2 Normalizing: ferritic steels
agreed welding procedure (see 6.2) has demonstrated 4.4.2.1 Hot formed parts of vessels shall receive a
that satisfadory fusion and penetration are obtained. normalizing or grain refining heat treatment, either
In the case of category 3 components, an independent before or after welding, Unless the process of hot
examination of the second side of such joints may be forming was performed within such a temperature
required by the Inspecting Authority (see table 5.1-1). range and followed by cooling in such a manner as
would provide this treatment for the material
4.3.7.6 Stray arcing is to be avoided. Where it does concerned (see 2.3.2.8).
occur the area affected shall be dressed by grinding
and surface crack detected 4.4.2.2 Where normalizing is undertaken, the parts
shall be brought to normalizing temperature at a
4.3.7.6 Unless speciñcally approved by the Inspection suitably controlled rak and shall be maintained at the
Authority, butt welds and a x e n t plates shall not be temperature long enough for thorough soaking. Actuai
thinned by dressing or grinding to less than the heating rates are not critical but shall be controlled to
thickness shown on the drawing (see table 1.51). the extent necessary to avoid any possibility of
4.3.7.7 Designs required for welds are given in 3.10. mecMcal damage to the parts in question during the
heating process. They shall then be uniformly cooled at
NOTE. The relatively high residual magnetism of 9 M Ni steel can
disrupt the welding arc. To avoid this potential problem it is the appropriate rate.
generally advisable to ensure that the item to be welded has a low NOTE. This is generally achieved by cooling freely in still air.
residual magnetism and to avoid practices that will cause Where the geometry of the parts is such that the
magnetic induction, such as the use of magnetic handling devices cooling rate will not be the same throughout, the
and magnetic particle inspection.
necessity for a further stress relieving treatment shall
be considered with particular attention being paid to a
4.4 Heat treatment slow rate of cooling.
In the case of alloy steels, the range of cooling rates
4.4.1 Preheat requirements
experienced shall not result in mechanical properties
4.4.1.1 The manufacturer shall state the proposed different from those specified
preheat temperature to avoid hard zone crackjng in the 4.4.3 Post-weld heat treatment
heat affected zone, for each type of weld including
those for all attachments and tack welds. No welding 4.4.3.1 Post-weld heat treatment in accordance
shall be carried out when the temperature of the with 4.4.6 shall be carried out foliowing completion of
parent metal within 150 mm of the joint is less than all welding in the following cases.
5 "C. a) Ferritic steel vessels designed to operate above
O "C where the thickness at any welded connection
Austenitic steels do not require preheat for welding. exceeds that listed in table 4.41 (see table 1.51)
The preheat temperature shall depend upon the unless otherwise agreed between purchaser,
composition and thickness of the metal being welded manufacturer and Inspecting Authority to permit a
and upon the weld process and arc energy being used greater thickness based upon fracture mechanics
NOTE 1. Guidance on the selection of preheat temperature to suit analyses in accordance with annex U.
particular combinations of plate composition and thickness for b) Ferritic steel vessels designed to operate below
processes with different arc energies and diffusible hydrogen
content for carbon and carbon manganese steel can be made by O "C when post-weld heat treatment is necessary in
reference to: accordance with annex D
a) BS 5135; c) Vessels intended for service with media liable to
b) 'Welding steels without hydrogen cracking' by F R Coe, the cause stress corrosion cracking in service, where, I
Welding Institute, 1973. following the review required by 3.3.1, it was felt I
NOTE 2. For guidance on preheating for arc welded tube to that this cracking was stiil a risk with the vessel. I
tubeplate joints, see annex T. d) Where specified by the purchaser (see table 1.5-1). I
O BSI 1997
u7
~~~ ~ ~~
STDmBSI BS 5500-ENGL 1797 E L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70728 2 7 8 E

BS 5500 : 1997 h u e 1, January 1997 Section 4
In special circumstances, and by agreement between 4.4.4 Methods of heat treatment

the purchaser and the manufacturer, welding is
4.4.4.1 Wherever possible, the vessel shall be heat
permitted to be carried out on lightly loaded and
non-pressure parts of the vessels previously subjected treated by heating as a whole in an enclosed funiace.
to heat-treatment, without subsequent reheat treatment, Where it is impracticable to heat treat the whole vessel
provided suitable tests and controls are instituted to in a furnace it is permissible to adopt the methods
establish that the material will not be adversely described in 4.4.4.2 to 4.4.4.6, but it should be noted
affected (see table 1.51). that they may not ensure the same degree of immunity
from susceptibaty to stress corrosion cracking.
Where pressurized components contain fillet welds
only the thickness to be used when applying the 4.4.4.2 It is permissible to heat treat the vessel in
requirements for post-weld heat treatment in 4.4.3 shall sections in an enclosed fumace, providing the overlap
be the same as that specified in 4.4.3.3a for two is at least 1500 mm or 5@, whichever is the greater.
components butt welded together. Where this method is used the portion outside the
NOTE 1. Recommendations for post-weld heat treatment of fumace shall be shielded so that the longitudinal
dissimilar ferritic steels are given in annex H. temperature gradient is such that the distance between
NOTE 2. For guidance on post-weld heat treatment for arc welded the peak and half peak temperature is not less than
tube to tubeplate joints, see annex T.
2.5 @e, where R is the internal radius.
4.4.3.2 The heat treaiments apply specifically to the
4.4.4.3 It is permissible to heat treat circumferential
final post-weld heat treatment to be carried out on the
seams in shells locally by heating a shielded band
vessel. In cases where intermediate stress relieving
around the entire circumference. The width of the
treatments are necessary, consideration shall be given
to carrying these out at lower temperatures. heated band shall be not less than 5@, the weld
being in the centre. Sufficient insulation shall be fitted
4.4.3.3 Where the vessel contains welded joints to ensure that the temperature of the weld and its heat
connecting parts which differ in thickness, the affected zone is not less than that specified and that
thickness to be used in applying the requirements for the temperature at the edge of the heated band is not
post-weld heat treatment shall be: less than half the peak temperature. In addition, the
a) the thinner of the two parts butt welded togetheq adjacent portion of the vessel outside the heated zone
b) the thickness of the shell in connection to flanges, shaii be thermally insdated such that the temperature
gradient is not harmful.
tube plates or similar connections;
NOTE. A minimum total insuiated band width of lofle, is
c) the weld throat thickness of the shell or end plate recommended for the purpose of complying with this requirement.
to nozzle weld in nozzle attachment welds,
4.4.4.4 It is permissible to heat treat locally branches
d) the base material thickness in material integrally or other welded attachments by heating a shielded
clad with an austenitic or nickel base corrosion circumferential band around the entire vessel. In such
resistance material (ciad plate); cases either:
e) the base material thickness divided by four where a) the requirements of 4.4.4.3 shall apply with the
an austenitic or nickel based corrosion resistance exception that the width of the heated band shail
material is weld deposited on the base material
surface. cover a minimum distance of 2.5@ in each
direction from the edge of the weld which connects
4.4.3.4 When additional welds or weld rep& have the nozzle or attachment to the vessel; or
been made to a vessel after post-weld heat treatment, a b) modifications shall be agreed between the
further heat treatment shall be carried out in purchaser and manufacturer where the requirements
accordance with 4.4.4. The thickness to be used in in a) cannot be strictly applied (see table 1.51).
defining the time required at this further heat treatment
temperature shall be the thickness of the weld applied 4.4.4.6 It is permissible to heat the vessel interna&
after the original post-weld heat treatment. for which purpose it shall be fully encased with
thermal insuiating material.
4.4.3.6 For austenitic steels the details of any
post-weld heat treatment shall be agreed between the 4.4.4.6 It is permissible to post-weld heat treat vessels
purchaser and the manufacturer (see table 1.51). of different thicknesses (not exceeding a ratio of 2 : 1)
in the same furnace charge according to the heat
treatment requirements for the thickest vessel in the
charge.
4B
O BSI 1997
~~
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 m Lb2Libbï 0 b ï 0 7 2 9 104

Section 4 h e 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
4.4.5 Post-weld heat treatment procedure f ) When the vessel or component has attained a
uniform holding temperature as given in
4.4.5.1 Post-weld heat treatment temperature and
table 4.41 the temperature shall be held for the
time at temperature shall be as given in table 4.41 or period given in table 4.41.
table 4.42.
NOTE. It is acceptable to use either table 4.41 or 4.42. The use of
g) Vessels or components in ferritic material shall be
table 4.42 is likely to result in residual stresses higher than those cooled in the furnace to temperature not exceeding
resulting from the use of table 4.4-1, with implications on, for 400 "C at a rate not exceeding the value for heating
example, any defect analysis or stress corrosion cracking. It in b).
should be noted that table 4.42 is anticipated to be the
requirements in the proposed European Standard for Pressure NOTE. Below 400 "C the component may be cooled in stiil air.
Vessels (see also 6.2.4). h) Vessels or components in austenitic materiais
In cases where the requirements in either table 4.41 or shall be rapid cooled from the solution treatment
4 . 4 2 cannot be strictly applied, modifications shall be temperature.
agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer NOTE. Rapid cooled may be in air or quenched. Intergranular
(see table 1.51). corrosion can occur if the cooling rate is not sufficiently rapid
to avoid inter-granular chromium carbide precipitation. The
For vessels made from materials of grades other than same requirement applies to locally solution-treated welds. in
MO or M1, the temperature range is only advisow. The these cases inter-granular corrosion is not necessarily readily
validity of any given case shall be decided by the visible by inspection.
manufacturer and the requirements modified as 4.4.6.3 Local post-weld heat treatment of vessels or
necessary This shall be by agreement between the components shall comply with the following.
purchaser and the manufacturer (see table 1.51).
a) The rate of heating from the temperature given
4.4.6.2 Furnace post-weld heat treatment of vessels or in 4.4.5.2a shall not exceed that given in 4.4.5.2b
components shall comply with the following. or 4.4.5.2~ as appropriate.
a) The temperature of the furnace at the time the b) The rate of coolmg down to 400 "C for ferritic
vessel or component is placed in it shall not exceed: materials shall not exceed that given in 4.4.5.2g.
1) for ferritic materials, 400 "C for vessels or NOTE. Below 400 "C lagging may be stripped.
components of less than 60 mm thickness and not c) The rate of cooling down for austenitic materials
of complex shape. 300 "C for vessels or shall be the same as 4.4.5.2h.
components of 60 mm thickness or over or of
complex shape; 4.4.5.4 The temperature specified shall be the actual
temperature of any part of the vessel or zone being
2) for austenitic materials, 300 "C. heat treated, and shall be determined by
b) The rate of heating from the temperature in a) for thermocouples in effective contact with the vessel.
ferritic materials shall not exceed the following:
4.4.6.5 A sufficient number of temperatures shall be
1) 240 "Cíhfor vessel or component thicknesses recorded continuously and automaticaliy Several
not exceeding 25 mm; thermocouples shall be applied to ensure that the
2) 6000 " C h divided by the thickness in whole vessel, or zone, being treated is within the range
millimetres for vessel or component thicknesses specified and additional pyrometers utilized to check
exceeding 25 mm. that undesirable thermal gradients do not occur
c) The rate of heating from 300 "C for austenitic
materials shall not exceed 4.6 Surface finish
1) 220 " C h for vessel or component thicknesses
not exceeding 25 mm; 4.5.1 Except where otherwise agreed between the
purchaser and the manufacturer, the whole of the
2) 200 'Cíh for vessel or component thicknesses internal surface of the vessel shall be cleaned and shall
exceeding 25 mm. be free from loose scale, grit, oil and grease (see
d) During the heating and cooling periods, variation table 1.51).
in temperature throughout the vessel or component
shall not exceed 150 "C within 4500 mm and the 4.6.2 When special types of finish are to be provided,
temperature gradient shall be gradual.Above 500 O C ,
on the inside or outside surface of the vessel, e.g.
this variaton shall not exceed 100 "C. degree of polish, they shall be specified by the
purchaser at the time of order (see table 1.51).
e) During the heating and holding periods, the
furnace atmosphere shall be so controlled as to
avoid excessive oxidization of the surface of the
vessel or component. There shall be no direct
impingement of flame on the vessel or component.
O BSI
Table 4.4-1 Reauirements for post-weld heat treatment of ferritic steel vessels
Materi Post-weld heat Post-weld treatment conditions
Grade treatment
(see 4.4.3.3) min. to max.
MO and Carbon and carbon 1 I Optional I 580to620

thickness
M1 manganese steels
Carbon and carbon 540 .

(see 4.4.3.1)
Reauired
Optional
81)
12K
2 'h
160
I r2;
manganese steels (min.
M2
KCV of 27 J at -20 "C)
Carbon molybdenum
steel
I Optional
(see 4.4.3.1)
Required
I 630to670')
12% 1 100
I 515 I Optionai 1 630 to 6701)

Low alloy manganese
chromium molybdenum
vanadium steel >15
I (see 4.4.3.1)
I Reauired
12% 2%
l-
I
160
I /w
3%Ni Optional within thickness limits 580 to 6201)
agreed between purchaser and
I
manufacturer, otherwise reauired 2M
9Ni I AU thicknesses Not required - -
1 1; I
M7 lCr%Mo Ali thicknesses Required 630 to 6701) (optimum high 2%
1HCrEMo temperature properties)
650 to 7001) ímax. softening) 6o
1 1
I
M8 lhCr%MoL/V I All thicknesses Required I 680 to 7201) 12% I 180
M9 2'kCriMo r
5 Ail thicknesses Required 630 to 6701) (high tensile) 60
680 to 7201) (max. creep 180
resistance)
490 710 to 7501) (max. softening) 180
M10 5Cr%Mo All thicknesses Required 710 to 7501) 120
This range is advisory only (see 4.4.5.1).
2, Post-weld heat treatment is not required for joints welded with Ni base and other austenitic filler metals up to a thickness of 50 mm.
3, For ferritic weld metals and for joints in excess of 50 nun, the basis for acceptance should be agreed between the purchaser and the
manufacturer. Post-weld heat treatment of this material should be avoided where possible because of the high degree of control
needed to ensure that the parent metal properties are not degraded.
NOTE 1. By agreement large vessels in MO and M I steels may be heat treated by following the equivalent time temperature formula:
b
a+->t
2
where
a is the number of minutes in range 580 "C to 620 O C ;
b is the number of minutes in range 550 "C to 580 OC;

t is the time in minutes rwuired by this table.
NOTE 2. For maximum heatkg and cooling rates see 4.4.5.2 and 4.4.6.3.
4/10
O BSI 1997
Section 4 Lssue 1, January 1997 BS 6500 : 1997
Table 4.4-2 Alternative requirements for post-weld heat treatment of ferritic steel vesseis
~ ~
Material Material Steel group Reference Heat Post-weld heat treatn

or type EN treatment
~
Grade group Nominal Holding Temperature

according to condition')
BS EN 288-3 thickness2) time
tn
mm I
I
min. "C
MO and Carbon and st 1 Unalloyed 10028-2 N or 5353) I 30 55040ii
M1 carbon 102161 to 5 Nand T >35 590 1 t,, - 5
manganese
steel
St('FiIS
10217-1to 5
10222-2
190 1 40 + 0.5tn
st 2
_i
Weldable 100283
normalized 10216fg
fine grain 10217-fg
steels 102224
M2 Caxbon St 1 16Mo3 10028-2 N or 5353) 550-620
molybdenum 10216-2 Nand T >35 590 + 50.5tn
t, -
40
steel 10217-2,4
10222-2
10222-2 QandT 40 + 0.5t, 550-620
M7 lCr%Mo st 5 13CrMo4-5 10028-2 N or 630-680
l%Cr%Mo 102162 Q and T > 13515
10217-2, 4
10222-2 >60 60 + t,
2UCrlMo 1OCrMo9-10 10028-2 NandT As specified for 670-720
11CrMo9-10 102162 or steel 13CrMo4-5
10217-2, 4 QandT
10222-2
M10 5Cr %Mo 16CrMo20-5 10216-2 NandT 700-750
10222-2 or
QandT
10216-2 A 700-750
M11 9CrMo XI 1CrMo9-1

10222-2
10216-2
10216-2
NandT
A 'W 90 + t,
740-780
M12 12CrMoV St 6 X2OCrMoNi 10216-2 NandT As specified for steel 730-770

Vl-1-1 10222-2 XI 1CrMo9-1
M5 3%Ni St 7 MnNi and Ni 100284
steel except 102163 N
X8Ni9 10217-3,5
102223 535 30
10028-4 NandT 235 2 90 t,-5 530-580
10216-3 or 190 40 + 0.5t,
10217-3, 5 QandT
10222-3
M6 9Ni X8Ni9 10028-4 See material Normaiiy welded with austenitic filler
10216-3 standard metal. In view of possible carbon
10217-5 diffusion, post-weld heat treatment
10222-3 should be avoided.
A annealed
N normalized or air quenched
Q quenched
T tempered
' Nominal thickness is that required by 4.4.3.3 or 4.4.3.4
1
3, For thickness < 35 mm, post-weld heat treatment is only necessary in special cases (e.g. to reduce the danger of stress corrosion
cracking or hydrogen cracking (sour gas)).
4, Tubes with diameters < 102 mm and a wall thichess < 13 mm and components with such a thickness and intended for operating at
design temperatures over 490 OC need not be post-weid heat treated.
O BSI 1997
4/11
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70732 7T9
Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Section 5. Inspection and testing
5.1 General The other principal inspection stages covered in

sections 4 and 6 are summarized in table 5.1-2.
6.1.1 The aluminium supplement gives requirements The Inspecting Authority shall have access to the
specific to aluminium and aluminium alloys. This works of the manufacturer at ali times during which
section shall be modified as given in the aluminium work is in progress, and shall be at liberty to inspect
supplement for d i e d fusion welded pressure vessels
the manufacture at any stage and to reject any part not
constructed of aluminium and aluminium alloys. compiying with this standard. The Inspecting Authority
6.1.2 Each pressure vessel shali be inspected during shall have the right to require evidence that the design
construction. Sufficient inspections shall be made to complies with this standard.
ensure that the materials, construction and testing The Inspecting Authority shall notify the manufacturer
comply in all respeds with this standard. Inspection before construction begins regarding the stages of the
by the Inspecting Authority shall not absolve the construction at which special examinations of
manufacturer from his responsibility to exercise such materials will be made, and the manufacturer shall give
quality assurance procedures as will ensure that the reasonable notice to the Inspecting Authority when
requirements and intent of this standard ase satisfied. such stages will be reached, but this shall not preclude
Table 5.1-1 summarizes the inspection stages covered in the inspecting Authority from making examinations at
sections 4 and 6 in the c o m of which the Inspecting any other stages, or from rejecting material or
Authority is required to check by direct participation workmanship whenever they are found to be defective.
in, or witnessing of, particular activities that the
manufacturer’s quality assurance procedures are
effective. Otherwise the manner in which the
Inspecting Authority performs its surveillance of the
manufacturer and discharges the responsibilities
defhed under 1.4.3 is a matter on which it shall
exercise its discretion in the light of its knowledge and
experience with the quaiity system and associated
working procedures used by the manufacturer to
comply with this standard
O BSI 1997 5/1

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 E 1 b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70733 b35 E
BS 5500 : 1997 h u e 2, September 1997 Mon5
Table 5.1-1 Inspection stages in the course of which participation by the Inspecting Authority is
mandatory (see 5.1)
Inspection stage I Clause No. I Remarks
Correlation of material certificates with 4.1.2 The manufacturer is required to make the
materials and check for conformity with certificates available to the Inspecting Authority
material specification for independent checking
Identifcation of material and witnessing of 4.1.2 Origin of material to be demonstsated from
transfer of identification marks in available records to the satisfaction of the
manufacturer’s works Inspecting Authority. Any transfer of
identification marks to be witnessed by the
manufacturer’s inspection department.
NOTE.Examination of material at product maker’s works,
witnessing of acceptance, tests, etc. by the inspecting
Authority is not required unless specified by the
purchaser (see 1.5.1)
Examination of material cut edges and heat 4.2.1.2 For category 3 components the Inspecting
affected zones Authority should not normally perform this
examination on every joint of each component
but shall exercise its discretion consequent to
the results of examhation canied out.
I Approval of weld procedures 4.3.1
5.3
The Inspecting Authority is required to witness
tests unless the procedures are already
approved
Approval of welders and operatom 4.3.1 The Inspecting Authority is required to witness
5.3 tests unless the welders and operators are
already approved
Examination of set up of seams for welding, 4.3.1 For category 3 components the Inspecting
including dimensional check, examination of Authority should not normally perform this
weld preparations, tack welds, etc. examination on every joint of each component
the results of examination carried out.
Inspection of second side of weld preparations 4.3.7.4 For category 3 components the Inspecting
after fmt side is completed and root cleaned Authority should not normally perform this
examination on every joint of each component
the results of examination carried out.
Examine nondestructive test reports and check 6.6.6.7 The manufacturer is required to make the
compliance with agreed procedure and reports available to the Inspecting Authority for
acceptabiity of any defects independent checkmg
Examine heat katment records and check 4.4.3 The manufacturer is required to make the
compliance with agreed procedure records available to the Inspecting Authorii~for
independent checking
Witness the pressure test and where necessary 5.8 On all categories
record the amount of permanent set
Examine completed vessel before despatch. 6.8.9 On all categories
Check marlung 5.8.10
5/2
O ES1 1997
Won5 Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Table 6.1-2 Other principal stages of inspection I 6.2.3.2 I'ests shall be conducted at room temperature
except for either of the following applications.
Inspection stage Iclause~o. I
a) Applications where the design temperature
Viual examination of materialf or 4.2.2.1 exceeds the relevant temperature given in table 5.2-1.
flaws, laminations, etc. Thickness in such cases the all weld tensile test as required
checking by 6.2.3.1 shall be carried out (or be referred to a
Wilnessing of production weld tests (if 5.4 previous test carried out) at any temperature within
specified) the range given in table 5.2-1. The yield stress value
Examination of welded joints after 4.2.2.2 obtained in this test shall be not less than the
forming specified minimum yield stress value for the parent
material at the corresponding temperature.
Examination of plates after fonning 4.2.2.6
b) Applications operating below O "C (annex D gives
details for the impact testing of weld procedure test
5.2 Approval testing of fusion welding plates for steels in bands MO to M4.6.2.6 gives
procedures requirements for steels in band M6).
5.2.1 Approval testing of welding procedures shall be I Table 5.2-1 Tensile test temperature
- I
conducted, recorded and reported in accordance with Material Design
BS EN 2883 or BS 4870 : Part 3 as appropriate (see temperature
annex T) as modified by 6.2.3 to 6.2.6 inclusive. "C
6.2.2 The manufacturer shall supply a list of all the C and CMn steels 250
welding procedures required in the fàbrication of the (including MO, M1 and
vessel, together with test pieces which are
representative of the various thicknesses and materiah
'
to be used to prove each welding procedure. The l%Cr%Mo 350
production and testing of these test pieces shall be 2%Cr%Mo 350
witnessed by the purchaser or his Inspecting Authority 5Cr %MO 350
except that, in cases where the manufacturer can
furnish proof of previously authenticated tests and Stainless steel 400
results on the same type of joint and material within
the permitted vasiables of BS EN 2883 or BS 4870 : 5.2.3.3 The following tests shall be can-ied out on
Part 3, he is not required to perform any further tests. branch connections.
All welding shall be performed in accordance with a a) A welding procedure test on a branch connection
welding procedure specification or other work (see figure 4 of BS EN 2883) will only quaMy a weld
instsuction which conforms to BS EN 2882. procedure specification for welding a branch
connection in accordance with BS 5500 when
6.2.3 Additional testing shail be carried out as mechanical properties of the joint have been
specified in 5.2.3.1 to 6.2.3.6 as appropriate. established by an equivalent butt weld (see
6.2.3.1 In addition to the requirements given in figures 1and 2 of BS EN 2883).
table 1of BS EN 2883, for butt welds in plate b) Alternatively a weld procedure approval test on a
over 10 mm thick, one aü weld metal tensile test shaü butt joint in plate or pipe (see figures 1and 2,
be carried out. respectively, of BS EN 2883) shall give approval for
The test shail be d e d out in accordance with pipe branch connections and nozzle to sheii
BS 709. Depending on which parameter the design connections, where:
criteria are based, the tensile andlor yield strength shall 1) the joint details and geometsy for the branch
be not less than the corresponding specified minimum connections have been accepted by the
values for the parent metal. Due account shall be taken contracting parties, and
of special cases where undermatching weld metal has 2) a welded branch connection using the same
to be employed. The elongation shall be not less joint details and geometry has been previously
than 0.8 times the specified minimum value for the demonstrated as sound in any steel, on the basis
parent metal. of volumetric and surface nondestructive
examination.
O BSI 1997 5/3

STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL L q q 7 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70735 408
6.2.3.4 A pre-existing weld procedure test performed 6.2.6 For the all weld tensile test, the amount by
in accordance with BS 4870 : Part 1, previously which the tensile strength or yield stress is permitted
acceptable to an Jnspecting Authority, shall remain to exceed the specified minimum value for the parent
acceptable providing it satisfies the intent of the metal shall be subject to agreement between the
technical requirements of BS EN 2883. However, the purchaser and the manufacturer (see table 1.51).
range of approval of such a test shall be in accordance
with the m g e s in BS EN 2883 except as modified 5.2.6 Where 9 % Ni steels are concerned, the
by 6.2.3. requirements of 4.3.2 shall apply and additionally those
given in table 5.2-2.
NOTE. Existing procedures conforming to BS 4870 : Part 1are
considered technically equivalent to those speciñed in BS EN 2883
when similar types of tests have been carried out. Thus the bend
tests speciñed in BS 4870 : Part 1 are considered equivalent to 5.3 Welder and operator approval
those specified in BS EN 2883 even though the exact number and
bend ande differ. S i a r l y visual, radiographic, ultrasonic, surface
6.3.1 Approval testing of welders and operators shall
crack detention, transverse tensile, hardness, macro and impact be conducted, recorded and reported in accordance
tests are considered equivalent. with BS EN 287-1, except as modiíied by 6.3.5 or with
Where BS EN 288-3 calls for a type of test to be performed that BS 4871 : Part 3, as appropriate (see annex 'i').
has not been carned out on the preexisting BS 4870 : Part 1
procedure qualification tests,additional tests, as described in 5.3.2 AU welders and welding machine operators
clause O of BS EN 288-3, should be carried out. For example, if engaged on the welding of pressure parts of vessels
impact tests have not been carried out on the BS 4870 : Part 1test fabricated in accordance with this standard shall pass
plate it is only necessary to do an additional set of impact tests on
a test piece made in accordance with BS EN 288-3. the welder approval tests which are designed to
demonstrate their competence to make sound welds of
6.2.3.6 The alteniative methods of approval of the types on which each is to be employed.
welding procedures addressed in BS EN 2881 are not
permitted for welding on pressure vessels made in 5.3.3 Welders who have passed the specified tests
accordance with BS 5500. shall be approved for welding on all vessels within the
6.2.4 The preheat, interpass temperature, intermediate limits of the procedure provided they remain in the
and post-weld heat txaiments of test plates shali be employ of the same manufacturer. A welder who welds
the m e as for production welding, except for the successfully all the test pieces required for a welding
following. procedure test in accordance with 6.2 shall not
a) As permitted within the requirements of normally be required to undertake separate welder
BS EN 2883 or BS 4870 : Part 3. approval tests. If a welder has not been engaged on the
fabrication of vessels using the process and equipment
b) It is permissible to increase the preheat appropriate to the procedure for a period of more
temperature used during fabrication by up to 100 "C than 6 months, or if there is any reason to doubt his
without reapprovd ability to make satisfactory production welds, the
c) Welding procedure qualification tests that have purchaser is permitted, at his discretion, to require him
been post-weld heat treated for time and to retake the whole or part of the approval test (see
temperatures in accordance with the requirements in table 1.51).
table 4.41 shrul qualify for vessel heat trealments in
NOTE 1. The approval tests of a welder, when completed to the
accordance with the lower temperatures andor satisfaction of a recognized Inspection Authority, may be accepted
shorter times in table 4.42,but not vice versa. by other Inspecting Authorities, subject to mutual agreement prior
NOTE. The time at temperature as applied to a pressure vessel to the commencement of welding and unless otherwise stated in
may be increased up to two times that applied to a welding the enquiry and order.
procedure approval test plate (see also 4.4.4). Conversely, the time NOTE 2. The welder's qualification should be endorsed by an
at temperature may be reduced from that applied to the welding Inspecting Authority every 2 years in accordance with 10.2 of
procedure approval test plate, down to the minimum time allowed BS EN 287-1.
for a pressure vessel in accordance with table 4.41.
I Table 6.2-2 Weld procedure tests for butt welds in 9 % Ni steel I

Operating B u t t welds: weld procedure mechanical test f o r joints u p to 50 mm thickness
temperature
All weld metal (see Transverse tensile Bend tests (see Impact tests f o r weld
note 1) (see note 1) note 2) metals (see note 3)
(10mm to 50 mm)
All 2 2 To BS EN 2883 3 test specimens:
27 J average value
NOTE 1. 0.2 % proof strength value of the filler metal shall be demonstrated as required in 4.3.2.
NOTE 2. For undermatching strength filler metais, longitudinal bend tests may be used in lieu of root and face or side bend tests.
NOTE 3. Where non nickel-base austenitic filler metais are used, the weid fusion boundary is to be impact tested and is to comply
with the same requirements as the weid metai. The location of the Charpy V-notch on the fusion boundary will be dependent upon the
weid preparation and welding process and is to be agreed with the inspecting Authority. Weid procedure test records should indicate
their location by means of a sketch.
514
O BSI 1997
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL L997 L b 2 4 b b 9 067173b 3 4 4
W o n5 h e 1, Januaty 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
5.3.4 A list of welders and operators, together with 5.6 Non-destructive testing
records of their approval tests, shall be retained by the
5.6.1 General
manufacturer.
NOTE. The manufacturer may be required to submit to the
The non-destructive testing of welded joints for ñnal
purchaser evidence of approval of any welder or welding machine acceptance purposes (see 5.6.4) shall depend on the
operator engaged in the fabrication of a vessel. constniCtion category of the component as determined
5.3.5 Welders who previously held approvals in by table 3.4-1, or as otherwise agreed (see 3.4.1).
accordance with BS 4871 : Part 1 are considered to be Nondestructive testing of parent piate is also required,
approved to work with the following provisos. as appropriate, at the following stages:
a) The range of approval of the welder is in a) examination of piate welded prior to hot forming
(see 4.2.2.2);
accordance with BS EN 287-1.
b) e- ' ion of areas subject to significant
b) Welder approval tests in accordance with through thickness tensile stress (see 4.2.2.6
BS 4871 : Part 1 are considered technically equivalent and E.2.5.9).
to BS EN 287-1 except that for all MIG and MAG Viuai examination shall accompany ail nondestructive
welding, bend tests should have been carried out. If testing and this examination shall be recorded
bend tests for these processes have not been carried
out during the BS 4871 : Part 1 test, reapproval in Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, a
comprehensive schedule shall be prepared by the
accordance with BS EN 287-1 should be performed.
manufacturer covering the non-destructive testing
e) The prolongation of a BS 4871 : Part 1approval requirements for vessels, identifying the foliowing (see
test should be made at six-monthly intervals by the table 1.51).
employerlmanufacturer, in accordance with 10.2 of 1) The stages during the manufadme of the vessel
BS EN 287-1, for the period of two y e m hom the (and its components) at which nondestructive
date of effect of BS EN 287-1, i.e. from 1May 1992. testing as required by this standard wiil be carried
d) The prolongation of a BS 4871 : Part 1 approval out. This shall include any supplementary
test in excess of the initial two year period (i.e. nondestructive testing required under the provisions
after 1May 1994) shall be made in accordance of 4.2.1.2, 5.6.4.1.2 and 5.6.4.3.
with 10.2 of BS EN 287-1 in conjunction with an 2) The choice of nondestructive testing method and
Inspecting Authority. relevant procedure to be used
3) The acceptance criteria.
*
zo
* 5.4 Production control test plates NOTE. It is recommended that this schedule should similarly
cover any additional nondestructive testing used by the
5.4.1 Vessels in materials other than 9 % Ni steel manufacturer as part of his quality control process.
Production control test plates shall not be required Nondestructive testing personnel shall hold an
unless specified by the purchaser at the time of order appropriate certificate of competence (e.g. Personnel
(see 1.5.1) or as detailed in annex D. In such cases the Certification in Nondestructive Testing (PCN)21))
number of test plates to be provided and the detailed which is recognized by the inspecting Authoriw;
tests to be made on these, including acceptance otherwise the Inspecting Authority shall satisfy
criteria, shall be agreed between the purchaser and the themselves as to the competence of such personnel.
manufacturer (see table 1.51). 5.6.2 Parent materials
NOTE. Recommendations covering the preparation and testing of When nondestructive testing of parent materials is
production test plates, when these are required, are given in
annex Q, and in annex T in the case of arc welded tube to
required by the purchaser (see table 1.51), the
tubeplate joints. procedure to be adopted shall be in accordance with
appropriate British Standards as follows.
5.4.2 9 % Ni steel vessels
Production control test plates shall be provided until Castings BS 4080
such time as the manufacturer has demonstrated that Forgings BS 6072
production welding produces satisfactory weld
properties. The number of test pieces provided and the BS 6443
detailed tests to be made on these shall be agreed Pipes and tubes Appropriate annex of particular
between the purchaser and the manuîacturer taking product standard
account of the special requirements for 9 % Ni steel
Plate BS 59%
procedure tests specified in 5.2.6, the acceptance value
being in accordance with 4.3.2 (see table 1.51). AU product forms BS 6072
More comprehensive ultrasonic examination of plate in
5.6 Destructive testing regions near attachment openings and welds may be
Destructive testing shall not be required. necessary (see 5.6.6.2).
'1 Administered by the Central Certification Board, c/o British InstitUte of Non-destructive Testing, 1 Spencer Parade, Northampton
NN15AA.
O BSI
~
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 m L b 2 4 b b î Ob70737 2 8 0

BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Sedon 5
Acceptance standards for flaws revealed by 6.6.4.1.1 Examination for intemal jïuws
nondestructive testing of unwelded parent materials The full length of all Qpe A welds shall be examined
s M be agreed by the manufacturer and the purchaser, by radiographic or ultrasonic methods. Unless
or the Inspecting Authority (see table 1.51). Where otherwise agreed between the purchaser and the
repairs by welding are authorized, nondestructive manufacturer (see table 1.5-1), the fuli length of all
testing techniques for the repair and subsequent welded joints of Qpe B in or on pressure parts shall
acceptance standards shall also be agreed by the be examined by ultrasonic andor radiographic
manufacturer and the purchaser, or the Inspecting methods where the thinnest part to be welded exceeds
Authority (see table 1.51). the limits given in table 5.61. Where a branch
6.6.3 Components prepared for welding compensation plate is used, the shell and the
compensation plate shall be considered as one
Where nondestructive testing is specified to
component of thickness equal to the combined
supplement the visual examination of fusion faces for thickness of the shell and compensation ring unless:
welding or of plate edges (see 4.2.1 and 4.3.3.2), the
method s M be either magnetic particle or penetrant a) the branch to shell weld is separate from, o r is
inspection. completed and inspected before, the branch to
NOTE. Suitable techniques may be selected from BS 6443 or
compensation ring weld, and
3s 6072,as appropriate. b) the outer compensation ring to shell weld is not
Particular care shali be taken to ensure that residues completed until the welds referred to in a) have
from testing materials do not have a deleterious effect been completed.
on the quaiity of any subsequent welding. 6.6.4.1.2 Examination for suflòxe jïuws
6.6.4 Non-destructive testing of welded joints The fuli length of all Qpe B and all other attachment
NOTE. Guidance on nondestructive testing of arc welded tube to welds shall be examined by magnetic particle or
tubeplak joints is given in annex T. penetrant methods. Qpe A welds shall be examined by
6.6.4.1 Components to construction category 1
these methods when agreed between the manufacturer,
the purchaser and the Inspecting Authority (see
The finalnondestructive testing shall be carried out table 1.5-1).
after completion of any post-weld heat treatment,
except when working in materials and thickness
permitted for coristniCtion category 2 (see table 3.41).
Imperfections revealed by nondestructive testing shall
Grade of steel Thickness
be assessed in accordance with 6.7.2.1 and 6.7.2.2.
Where a vessel is made up of a number of category 1 mm
components that have been stress relieved and Austenitic, MO and MI 40
examined as sub-assemblies and are then assembled to
complete the final vessel, the whole again being stress M2 30
relieved, oniy the welds that were made to complete M3 20
the vessel, together with any intersecting weld seams M4 15
for a distance of three m a r i a i thicknesses from the
point of intersection, shaii be examined after the final M5 to M10 inclusive 10
stres relief of the whole vessel.
6.6.4.2 Components to construction category 2
Where a further stress relief of the complete
(see table 3.41)
fabrication is carried out following the repair of a
defect revealed by the final nondestructive testing of Category 2 construction shall be subjected to partial
the vessel, only the area of the repair shall be nondestructive testing, as specified in 6.6.4.2.1
re-examined This examination should include the and 5.6.4.2.2. Such nondestructive testing shall be
repaired area, together with a distance of three employed at as early a stage in the fabrication process
maî~ridthicknesses (not repair weld thicknesses) on as practicable as a measure of quality control and the
either side of the repair, and should include a similar locations selected for testing shall be representative of
distance along any weld seams intersecting the area of all welding procedures and the work of each welder or
repair. operator employed. Results of nondestructive testing
shall be assessed in accordance with 6.7.2.1
and 6.7.2.3.
In cases where fabrication procedures require main
seams to be welded at site, such s e m s shall be 100 %
examined by radiographic andor uitrasonic methods
generally in accordance with 6.6.6.1 and the results
interpreted against the acceptance levels specified
in 6.7.2.4.
516
S T D * B S I BS 5500-ENGL I 9 9 7 I b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70738 117
6.6.4.2.1 Exumimtimfw intemal Jaws 6.6.4.3 Components to construction category 3

Radiographic andor ultrasonic methods shall be in (see table 3.41)
I
accordance with 5.6.5.1. At each inspection location Unless details producing significant through thickness
the minimum length of weld examined shall be 200 mm tensile stress (see E.2.5.9) are used, nondestructive
or the length of the weld whichever is the lesser. testing for internal flaws shall not be required.
a) sheu, f m d heads,jlut ends, communicating However, subject to agreement between the
chambers and jackets manufacturer and purchaser, or Inspecting Authority
For the purposes of this clause, a welded seam is (see table 1.51) it is permissible to use magnetic
considered to be the complete length of a butt joint particle, or penetrant methods as aids to the required
between two plates forming part of a vessel as visual examination.
illustrated by m e A in figure 5.61. At least 10 % of Acceptance criteria for flaws revealed by visuai
the aggregate length of these seams shall be subject examination, including aided visual examination, shall
to examination. All the following locations shall be be in accordance with table 5.7-3.
included
5.6.6 Choice of non-destructive test methods for
1) At each intersection of longitudinal and welds
circumferential butt joints. Where inclusion of all
intersections exceeds the 10 % allowance then the 5.6.6.1 Internal p a w s
higher sum shaU be included. The choice as to whether radiographic or ultrasonic
2) If necessary, randomly selected locations on testing is used to satisfy the requirements of this clause
longitudinal and circumferential butt joints in shall be agreed between the purchaser, the
shells and end plates sufficient to make the total manufacturer and the Inspecting Authority (see
amount of examination up to at least 10 %. table 1.51).
3) When openings occur in or within 12 mm of NOTE. Radiographic and ultrasonic methods both have advantages
welded seams, such seams SM be examined on and disadvantages in so far as flaw detection, identification and
siang are concerned. Radiography is particularly suitable for the
each side of the opening for a length not less than detection and identification of 'volume' defects such as cavities
the diameter of the opening. These shall be and solid inclusions and incomplete penetration where a gap
included as an addition to a). exists. Ultrasonic flaw detection is very suitable for the detection
and sizing of planar defects such as cracks, lack of fusion and
b) Nozzles and branch uttachments 'tight' incomplete penetration in femtic steels. The choice should
Butt joints as illustrated by m e A in be based on the most suitable method to the particular application
figure 5.61 shall, by agreement between the and material. An important consideration is joint geometry which
may have an ovemding influence on choice of method. In
manufacturer and the Inspecting Authority, have the exceptional cases it may be necessary to employ both methods on
total number of nozzles and branches divided into the same seam.
groups of 10 or less (see table 1.51). The complete
Circumferential and longitudinal butt joints of at 6.6.5.2 Surface flaws
least one nozzle or branch in each group of 10 or NOTE. Magnetic particle and penetrant testing do not indicate the
less shaU be examined. depth of surface imperfections and their application is to ensure
that no unacceptable surface defects are present.
5.6.4.2.2 Examination for surfbce jluws The choice of method depends on material, magnetic
Magnetic particle andor dyepenetrant methods shall methods being quicker and more economic for ferritic
be in accordance with 5.6.5.2. Such examinations shall steels, but unsuitable for austenitic steels, where
be conducted on both of the following: penetrant methods shall be employed.
a) the full length of all welds attaching nozzles, It is permissible to use alternative methods of
branches and compensating plates, to shell and end nondeshctive testing for the assessment of the depth
plates; of surface defects by agreement between the
b) at least 10 % of the length of all other attachment manufacturer and the purchaser andor the Inspecting
welds to pressure components. Authority (see table 1.51).
O BSI 1997
5/7
~ ~
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1777 W l b 2 L i b b 9 Ub70737 053
I-X
I
x -x
Y -Y
See figures E.25 and E.26
me A QPe B
Main seam welded joints within main shells, transitions Welded joint connecting flanges, tube sheets or flat ends
in diameter, communicating chambers, jackets and to main shells, to nozzles and to communicating
nozzles. Main seam welded joints within a flat or chambers. Welded joints connecting nozzles or
formed head or withii a sphere. communicating chambers to main shells such as set-on
Connections of forged branches to shell and nozzles and set-in connections shown in figures E.9 to E.47,
such as shown in figures E.25 and E.26. except in the special cases shown in figures E.25 and
E.26 (Qpe A).
Butt welds in stiffening rings and support rings.
Welds attaching compensating plates to shell and end
plates. They may be fillet welds or full penetration
welds.
Butt welds in a compensating plate.
Butt welds in flange rings and blocking rings which are
fabricated from bar or plate stock then rolled and butt
welded to form a ring.
NOTE 1. See BS 499 for definition of butt welds and joints.
NOTE 2. Refer to 3.6.3.4~ for additional nondestructive testing requirements for welded joint between the large end of a
cone and a cylinder, without an intermediate knuckle.
Figure 6.6-1 Illustration of welded joints for non-destructive testing
6.6.6 Non-destructive testing techniques for 6.6.6.1.1 Marking and ident@cation of radiographs
welds Each section of weld radiographed shall have suitable
6.6.6.1 Radiographic techniques symbols affixed to idenw the foliowing:
Normally radiographic examination shall be in a) the job or workpiece serial number, order number
accordance with BS 2600 : Part 1 or Part 2, BS 2910 or or similar distinctive reference number,
BS 7257, as appropriate. b) the joint;
Radiographic sensitivity shall be determined in c) the section of the joint;
accordance with BS 3971 : 1980 and the values given in d) mows, or other symbols, alongside but clear of
section A of table 7 of BS 3971 shall be regarded as the the outer edges of the weld to cleariy identify its
maximum acceptable percentage sensitivity values for position.
thicknesses up to 150 nun. For thicknesses NOTE. The location of the welded seam may be identified for
between 150 mm and 250 nun, the d u e s given in instance with a letter L for a longitudinal seam, C for a
section A of table 7 of BS 3971 for 150 mm shall be circumferential seam, with the addition of a numeral (1,2,3,
employed etc.) to indicate whether the seam was the first, second, third,
etc., of that type.
It is pemllssible to use other techniques by agreement
between the manufacturer and the Inspecting Authority The symbols consisting of lead arrows, letters and/or
provided it can be demonstrated that they wiii achieve numerals shall be positioned so that their images
comparable sensitivities (see table 1.51). appear in the radiograph to ensure unequivocal
identification of the section.
5/8
O BSI 1997
Where radiographs are required of the entire length of 6.6.6.6 Marking, all non-destructive testing
R welded seam, sufficient overlap shali be provided to methods
ensure that the radiographs cover the whole of the Permanent marking of the vessel alongside welds shall
welded sean and each radiograph shali exhibit a be used to provide reference points for the accurate
number near each end. location of the seam with respect to the test report.
Radiographs of repair welds shaU be clearly identified The method of masking shall be agreed between the
R1, R2, etc., for the first repair, second repair, etc. purchaser and the manufacturer (see table 1.51).
Stamping shall not be used where it may have a
6.6.6.2 Ultrasonic techniques deleterious effect on the material in service (for low
ultrasonic examination shall be in accordance with temperature applications see D.6.2).
BS 3923 : Part 1 level 2B with a maximum transfer
of 6 dB. 6.6.6.7 Reporting of non-destructive testing
examinations
6.6.6.3 Magnetic particle techniques
6.6.6.7.1 General
Magnetic particle inspection techniques shall comply in
all respects with BS 6072. Their use shall be limited to The following general information shall be given on
applications where surface flaws are being sought. reports.
Particulas care shall be taken to avoid damage to a) The date and time of the examination and report.
surfaces by misuse of the magnetic equipment b) The name(s) and quahfications (e.g. PCN
employed and if such damage occurs it shall be certZicate category and reference number) of the
remedied to the satisfaction of the Inspecting personnel responsible for the examination and the
Authority interpretation.
6.6.6.4 Penetrant techniques c) Identiñcation of the vessel and seam under
examination.
Dye or fluorescent penetrant examination of welds
shall be carried out in accordance with BS 6443. d) Brief description of joint design, material, welding
process and heat treatment employed (if any).
6.6.6.6 Sufluce condition and preparation for e) Cleaning and surface preparation or dressing prior
non-destructive surface testing to nondestructive testing.
The surface condition and preparation for f) Description and location of all relevant indications
nondestructive testing shaìl be as follows. of defects, together with all permanent records, e.g.
a) Radwgraphy radiographs, photographs, facsimiles, scale drawings
Surfaces shall be dressed only where weld ripples or or sketches, as appropriate. Corresponding reports
weld surface irregularities will interfere with of visual examination shall be provided
interpretation of the radiographs. 6.6.6.7.2 Additional inforrnutim for s p h f i c methods
b) ultrasonics The following additional information for specific
The condition of the surfaces that will be in contact methods shall be given on reports.
with the probe shail be in accordance with BS 3923. a) Radiography
NOTE. Depending on the profile and surface condition, dressing
of the weld area may be necessary even when contact is only 1) Image quality indicator pattern and sensitiv&
to be made with the parent metal. achieved (see BS 3971).
c) M w t i c particle method 2) Details of the radiographic technique.
The surface shall be free of any foreign matter b) UltmsmzcS
which would interfere with interpretation of the test 1) Report on parent metal examination including
and shall, where necessaq be dressed to permit internal soundness, thiclmess and surface
accurate interpretation of indications. condition.
NOTE. If non-fluorescent testing media are employed, a 2) Details of the ultrasonic technique and
suitable contrast medium (e.g. complying with BS 5044) may be
applied after cleaning and prior to magnetization. equipment employed.
d) Penetmnt method c) Magnetic particle method
The surface shall be free of any foreign matter Details of the technique(s) employed.
which would interfere with the application and d) Penetmnt method
interpretation of the test. Case shall be taken to Details of the materials and techniques employed.
avoid inasking of flaws by distortion of surface
layers by any dressing process which may be
necessary

STDoBSI BS 5500-EN¿L 1997 D l b 2 4 b b ï Ob70741 7 0 2 D
5.7 Acceptance criteria for weld defects 6.7.2.3 Category 2 construction (see figure 5.7-1)
revealed by visual examhation and The locations selected under 6.6.4.2.1 shall be deemed
to be representative of the welds on which they are
non-destructive testing placed. An examination of an intersection shall be
6.7.1 General representative of two welds. A defect detected on the
Subject to the requirements of annex C , the main circumferential seam shall be representative of the
constsuctional welds of pressure vessels shall comply whole circumferential seam. A defect detected on the
with 5.7.2. It is permissible for other joints such as longitudinal seam shall be representative of the whole
tube to tubeplate welds to be the subject of special longitudinal seam. A defect detected on a nozzle or
requirements agreed between the purchaser and the branch weld shall be representative of a group of ten
manufacturer (see table 1.51). or less nozzle or branch welds.
a) Tables 5.7-1, 5.7-2and 5.7-3.Planar defects
6.7.2 Assessment of defects
If any defects are present in the samples examined,
Defects shall be assessed amorclmg to one or other of the total length of the welded seam represented by
the alternatives in 6.7.2.1 to 6.7.2.4. Defects that are each 10 % sample shall be examined by the same
unacceptable shall be either repaired or deemed not to nondestructive testing methods and assessed in
comply with this standad accordance with 6.7.2.4 which permits some
Where flaws repeatedly occur that are acceptable in relaxation in non-planar defects.
accordance with this clause but outside the acceptance b) Tables 5.7-1,5.7-2and 5.7-3.Non-planar defects
levels specified in BS E N 287-1 and BS E N 2883 for
procedure and welder approval, the reasons for this If there are no planar defects but the sample
shali be invesügatd and appropriate corrective action contains defects in excess of the maximum as given
taken to improve future welding performance. in tables 5.7-1,5.7-2 and 5.7-3, two further random
checks shall be made on the represented welds.
6.7.2.1 Cafegory 1 and category 2 constructions These random checks shall be assessed against
If any flaws present do not exceed the levels specified tables 5.7-1, 5.7-2 and 5.7-3.
in tables 5.7-1,5.7-2 or 5.7-3, the weld shall be accepted If these checks indicate that the two additional areas
without further action. are acceptable then the original sample shall be
NOTE.Details for vessels intended for operating in the creep assessed in accordance with 6.7.2.4. If outside these
range m a y require special consideration. requirements, the area shall be repaired, re-examined
6.7.2.2 Category 1 construction by the same nondestructive testing methods and
reassessed in accordance with 6.7.2.4.
When acceptance leve@) different from those given
in tables 5.7-1,5.7-2 or 5.7-3 have been established for a The route to be followed in the event of various
particular application and are suitably documented, it imperfections being found shall be as shown in
is permissible for them to be adopted by specific figure 5.7-1.
agreement between the purchaser, the manufacturer 6.7.2.4 Acceptance levels (reassessment of
and the Impeding Authority (see table 1.51). category 2 construction)
S i ì y particular flaws221 in excess of those The acceptance levels given in tables 5.7-1, 5.7-2
permitted in tables 5.7-1,5.7-2 or 5.7-3 are permitted to and 5.7-3, except as modified by tables 5.74 and 5.7-5,
be accepted by specific agreement between the shall be applied.
purchaser, the manufacturer and the Inspecting
Authority after due consideration of material, stress 6.7.3 Repair of welds
and environmental factors in each case (see N o rectification, repair or modification shall be made
table 1.51). without the approval of the purchaser and Inspecting
Authority (see table 1.51).
Unacceptable imperfections shall be either repaired or
deemed not to comply with this standard. Repair welds
shall be carried out to an approved procedure and
subjected to the same acceptance criteria as original
work.
Repair welds of vessels subject to fatigue loading shail
be assessed in accordance with annex C.
For example see PD 6493.
5/10
O BSI 1997
~
~~ ~
STD.BSI B S 55OO-ENGL 1777 IL b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70742 b 4 8 m

Table 6.7-1 Radiographic acceptance levels

Imperfection type Permitted maximum
Planar Cracks and lamellar tears Not permitted
defects
~ ~~
Lack of root fusion Not permitted

Lack of side fusion
Lack of inter-run fusion
Lack of root penetration Not permitted
Cavities a) Isolated pores (or individual pores a,< e/4and
in a group) p 3.0 mm for e up to and including 50 mm
a, 4.5 mm for e over 50 mm up to and including 75 mm
a, 6.0 mm for e over 75 mm
~~
b) Uniformly distributed or localized 2 % by areal) for e 5 50 mm and pro rata for greater
porosity thicknesses
c ) Linear porosity Unless it can be shown that lack of fusion or lack of
penetration is associated with this defect (which is not
permitted) it should be treated as for individual pores in a
soul>
d) Wormholes isolated Z5 6mm, w 5 1.5mm
e) Wormholes alimed As h e a r porosity
f ) Crater pipes As wormholes isolated
Solid a) Individual and paraliel to major Main butt Z=eI100mm
nclusions weld axis welds w=e/1014mm
NOTE. Inclusions to be separated on the Outer quarters of
major weld axis by a distance equal to or
greater than the length of the longer and the
sum of the lengths of the inclusions shall no1 w = e/ûI4mm
exceed the total weld length. welds
b) Individual and randomly oriented As isolated pores

(not parallel to weld axis)
c) Non-hear group As localized porosity
ibbreviations used
s
is the parent metal thickness. In the case of dissimilar thichesses e applies to the thinner component;
u is the width of imperfections;
is the length of imperfections;
is the diameter of imperfections;
t
is the mean length of the circumferential weld.
Area to be considered should be the length of the weld affected by porosity, but not less than 50 mm, multiplied by the maximum
vidth of the weld locally.
JOTE 1. The simultaneous presence of more than one type of allowable flaw within a given length of weld is permitted and each type
,hould be individually assessed.
JOTE 2. ‘Inner half‘ of cross-section refers to the middle region, the remainder being the ‘outer quarters’.
O BSI
-
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 m l b 2 L i b b 9 Ob70743 584 m

Table 6.7-2 Ultrasonic acceptance levels applicable to ferritic steels and weld metals in the
thickness range
- 7 mm to 100 mm inclusive
Echo response height Type of indication (see note 1) Maximum permitted dimensions
mm mm ~~
Greater than DAC All Nil

50 % to 100 % DAC Threadlike (ni) Greater of
[(DAC - 6 dB) to DAC] i.e. h < 3 e
112
-ors5
Volumetric (Vl) worl15

i.e. h L 3
Planas longitudllial (Pi) Lesser of
ie.hr3 e
lS-orI5
2
Nozzle and branch attachment Inner half of Outer quarter of
welds volumetric (Vi) and cross-section cross-section
threadlike (Th) c c
L = - 5 100 L =- I100
8 16
20 % to 100 % DAC Planar surface (Ps) 115
[(DAC - 14dB) to DAC] (see note 2)
ie.hr3
Multiple (M) 1, w o r h 1 5
(see note 3)
Isolated (Is) 115
i.e. h < 3
20 % to 50 % DAC Threadlike (Th) l 5 e
[(DAC - 14 dB) to i.e. h < 3
(DAC - 6 Db)) Volumetric (Vi) worlse
ie. h < 3
Planar longitudinai (PI) 1 S eS
i.e. h I 3
Planar transverse (Pt) 155
i.e. h 2 3
Nozzle and branch attachment Inner half of outer quasterpOf
welds volumetric (Vl) and cross-section cross-section
threadlike (Th) C I L =c$ s 100
L = - -== 100
4- I
Less than 20 % of DAC All No h i t

[less than (DAC - 14dB))
Abbreviations used
I is the parent metal thickness. in the case of dissimilar thicknesses, e applies to the smaller thickness;
iL is the throughwaii dimension of flaw;
w is the width of flaw;
! is the length of flaw;
7 is the mean length of the circumferential weld.
5/12
O BSI 1997
~
~~ ~
~ ~~~
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1777 l b 2 4 b b 9 0670744 420
Table 5.7-2 Ultrasonic acceptance levels applicable to ferritic steels and weld metals in the
thickness range 7 mm to 100 mm inclusive (continued)
NOTE 1. The foiiowing definitions apply to the types of indication covered in table 5.7-2
Planar longitwlinal (PI): indication having a planar nature, which lies parallel to, or closely-parallel to, the weld axis (e.g.
longitudinal crack, lack of side-wall fusions, lack of inter-run fusion).
Planar tmmverse (Pt): indication having planar nature, which lies transverse to the weld axis (e.g. transverse crack).
Planar suvue (Ps):indication of PI or Pt,which lies within 25 % of e or 6 mm (whichever is the smaller) of the nearest surface
where e is the parent metal thickness or, in the case of dissimilar joined thicknesses, the smaller thickness (e.g. longitudinal and
transverse cracks, lack of sidewall fusion, lack of root fusion and lack of root penetration).
Multiple (M):group or cluster of indications in which individual indications cannot be resolved at the reference sensitivity (see
note 3) (e.g. group or cluster of cavities or inclusions).
Volumetric 0: indications having measurable length and/or width and measurable through-wall dimension, and which cannot be
classified as planar (e.g. h e a r or globular cavity or inclusion).
Threadlike (Th): indication having measurable length but no measurable width or through-wall dimension, and which cannot be
classified as planar (e.g. linear inclusion).
isolated point (Is): indication having no measurable dimension and which can be resolved at the reference sensitivity from
neighbowing indications. (It is not possible to define from the ulirasonic information alone whether an isolated point indication is
actually a pore, inclusion, short crack or small area of lack of fusion.)
NOTE 2. Indications shall be disregarded only by agreement between the manufacturer and the Inspecting Authority.
NOTE 3. Where adjacent, linearly-aligned inclusions are separated by a distance of less than twice the length of the longest inclusion,
they shall be considered as continuous. The total, combined length shall be assessed against the appropriate flaw size criteria in
table 5.7-2.
10 O h NDT
I
Assess against table 5.7-1, 5.7-2 or 5.7-3
I
I I I
PI Fail Fail
Non-planar defects (5.7.2.3b) Planar defects
I
Examine two (5.7.2.3a)
additional areas
I
Assess against table 5.7-1,5.7-2 or 5.7-3 I I
I Fail 2
Pass
- I Examine 100 %
I Accept I Assess original defects against
5.7.2.4
I
Assess against 5.7.2.4
,
I
Pass
I
Fail (a)
l I
Repair all planar and/or other
non-permitted plus non-planar
defects according to 5.7.3
I
Assess against 5.7.2.4
Pass Fail
Return to point
Ø l
Accept
(a) and repeat
Figure 5.7-1 Partial non-destructive testing (NDT)category 2 constructions
O BSI 1997 5/13

S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 E L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70745 357 E
ï'able 6.73 Visual and crack detection acceptance level

imperfection designation Remarks Limits for imperfections
Planar Not permitted
Porosity As cavity type defects in table 5.7-1
Bad fit-Up, An excessive or insufficient gap h I0.5 mm + O.la, max. 2 nun
Met welds between the parts to be joined
Gaps exceeding the appropriate limit

may in certain cases be compensated
for by a corresponding increase in the
throat
Undercut Smooth transition is required Long imperfections: not permitted
Short imperfections: h 5 1.0 mm
Excess weld metal Smooth transition is required Forb > 20mm, then h I1mm + O.lb
m a . 5mm
For b 5 20 mm, then h I3 mm
Excessive convexity h I1mm + 0.106,

maximum3mm
5/14
O BSI 1997
~ ~~
STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 D l b 2 L i b b 9 Ob7074b 273 m

Table 5.7-3 Visual and crack detection acceptance level (continued)

Imperfection designation Remarks Limits for imperfections
Fillet weld having a throat For m y applications a throat rZ~lmm+0.30~,
thickness greater than the thickness greater than the nominal one max5mm
nominal value may not be cause for rejection
Fillet weld having a throat A fiilet weld with an apparent throat Long imperfections:
thickness smalier than the thickness smaller than that specified not permitted
nominal value should not be regarded as being Short imperfections:
imperfect if the adual throat thickness h I0.3 mm + O.la,
with a compensating greater depth of m a . 1m
penetration complies with the specified
value
*
F
m
*
Excessive penetration
NOTE. b can be either the wtuddesign root

gap or the width of the excessive penetration
___________
Linear misaligrunent See 4.2.3
~~
O BSI 1997 5/15

~ ~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 m L b 2 4 b b 7 üb70747 2 2 T m
BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 M o n5
hble 6.7-3 Visual and crack detection acceptance level (continued)

[mperfection designation Remarks Limits for imperfections
hcompletely ñiied groove Smooth transition is required Long imperfections:
not permitted
Short imperfections:
h 5 O.lt,
max. 1.5mm
h
t
Excessive asymmetry of It is assumed that an asymmetric fillet h 5 2 mm + 0.20a

fillet weld weld has not been expressly specified
Root concavity Smooth transition is required h I1.5 mm

Shrinkage groove
Overlap Not permitted
Poor restart Not permitted

Stmy fiash or arc strike See 4.3.7.6
NOTE. The definitions of short imperfections and long imperfections are as follows.
a) short imperfections
One or more imperfections of total length not greater than 25 mm in any 100 mm length of the weid or a maximum of 25 % of the
weld length for a weid shorter than 100 mm.
b) long imperfections
One or more imperfections of total length greater than 25 mm in any 100 mm length of the weld or a minimum of 25 % of the weld
length for a weld shorter than 100 nun.
These definitions are identical with 3.3 and 3.4 of BS EN 25817 : 1992.
5/16 O BSI 1997

M o n5 Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5 5 0 : 1997
Table 5.7-4 Radiographic acceptance levels (reassessment of category 2 construction)

Imperfection type I Permitted maximum
I a) Isolated pores (or individual pores in a
group)
rp 5 e/4 I6 mm
b) Uniformly distributed or localized porosity 2 % by areal)

e) Solid inclusion, individual and pasallel to Main butt welds I = 2e w = e/4r4mm
major welds axis
NOTE. Inclusions to be separated on the major weld Nomle and branch Inner half of Outer quarter of
axis by a distance equal to or greater than the length attachent cross section cross section
of the longer inclusion and aggregate length not to
exceed the total length w = e/2 5 4 mm w=ei4 5 4 mm
1 Ic/2 5 1 O O m m 1 5 c/4 5 1 O O m m
I d) Solid inclusions, non-linear group I 4 % by areal) I
Area to be considered should be the length of the weld affected by porosity, but not less than 50 mm, multiplied by the maximum
width of the weld locally.
NOTE. The symbols are as defined in table 5.7-1.
Table 6.76 Ultrasonic acceptance

- levels (reassessment of category
- - 2 construction)
Echo response height Type of indication Maximum permitted dimension
mm mm
Greater than DAC Au Nil

50 % to 100 % DAC Threadlike (Th) 1 < greater of e or 10
{(DAC - 6dB) to DAC} i.e. h < 3
Volumetric (U) w o r Z 5 10
i.e. h 2 3
* Planar longitudinal (Pi) 155
m*
i.e. h > 3
Nozzle and branch attachment Inner haif of Outer quarter of
welds volumetric (Vi) and cross section cross section
threadlike (ïh) C
L= I100 L = - 5 100
4 8
20 % to 100 % DAC planar surface (ps>
{(DAC - 14 dB) to DAC} i.e. h > 3
Multiple (M) 1. w or h 5 10
Isolated (Is) 1510
i.e. h < 3
20 % to 50 % DAC Threadlike (ïh) 152e
((DAC - 14 dB) to i.e. h < 3
(DAC - 6 a)} Volumetric (Vi) w or 1 5 2e
i.e. h 2 3
Planas longitudinal (Pi) e
i.e. h 2 3 IIs
Planar transverse (Pt) 155

i.e. h 2 3
Nozzle and branch attachment Inner half of Outer quarter of
welds volumetric (Vi) and cross section Cros section
threadlike (Th) c l L =C p 100
L = - I100
2
NOTE. The symbols and notes are as defined in table 5.7-2.
O BSI 1997
5117
~~ ~ ~~~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 IL b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70747 T T 2 W

5.8 Pressure tests The required test pressure shall be maintained for not
less than 30 min except in the case of vessels less
5.8.1 General than 500 mm diameter and 10 mm thck when it is
A pressure test shall be carried out on all vessels permissible for the test period to be the subject of
constructed in accordance with this standard to agreement (see 5.8.2.2 and table 1.51). During the test
demonstsate, as far as it is possible with a test of this the vessel shall exhibit no sign of general plastic
nature, the integrity of the finished product. The firct yielding.
pressurization shall be carried out under controlled On completion of the hydraulic test, release of the
conditions with appropriate safety precautions. Some pressure shall be gradual and from the top of the
permanent diiation of a vessel is likely on first vessel.
pressurization but this possibility needs special
consideration only where fine chensional tolerances Adequate venting shall be ensured before drainage,
are specified for the finished vessel, in which case the particularly in the case of large thin vessels, to prevent
effects of fabrication on the property values assumed coiiapse.
for design purposes shall be taken into account where 5.8.2.4 If it is considered by the purchaser or the
appropriate. manufacturer that there would be undue risk of brittle
5.8.2 Basic requirements fracture in testing at the temperature of the available
test fluid a vessel which would otherwise appear to be
5.8.2.1 Where practicable (see 5.8.2.5) the finished suitable for the specified service, it is permissible to
vessel, i.e. after post-weld heat treatment, if anx shall, elevate the test temperature to an agreed value
in the presence of the Inspecting Authority, withstand (see 6.8.2.2 and table 1.51). This value shall not
satisfactorily such of the following pressure tests as exceed the design reference temperature obtained from
may WPb figure D.1 or D.2 as appropriate for the material impact
a) 'Standard' hydraulic test for acceptance where the test temperature of the shell material.
required thickness of all pressure parts can be
calculated See 5.8.3. 5.8.2.5 Where it is not practicable to pressure test a
complete vessel due to its size or mode of
b) Pneumatic test for acceptance where the required
manufacture, the test procedure for the whole or parts
thickness of all pressure pasts can be calculated, but
of the pressure vessel shall be subject to agreement
where the use of liquid testing media is not
between the purchaser, the manufacturer and the
practicable. See 5.8.4.
Inspecting Authority at the design stage (see
c) Proof hydraulic test where the required thickness table 1.51).
cannot be determined by calculation. See 5.8.6.
d) Combined hydraulidpneumatic test. See 5.8.7. 5.8.2.6 Each chamber of multixompartment vessels
consisting of two or more separate chambers shall be
5.8.2.2 The procedure to be followed shall be agreed subject to the 'standard' test pressure specified in 5.8.5
beforehand, preferably at the design stage, between the without support from pressure in any aoining
purchaser and the manufacturer (see table 1.51) and chamber. Where, however, common dividing walls are
shall be such as to minimize the risk to personnel in designed for specific differential pressures and
the event of failure of the vessel during test. provided that this is clearly stated on the drawings and
Consideration shall be given to factos such as the test on the manufacturer's plate, it is permissible for
fluid, the size and location of the vessel under test and exceptions to be agreed between the purchaser and
its position relative to other buildings, plant, public the manufacturer (see table 1.51).
roads and areas open to the public and other
equipment and structures in the vicinity. This agreed 5.8.2.7 When any chamber of a multi-compartment
procedure shall define any areas at risk during the test vessel is designed for vacuum conditions, account shall
and how these are to be controlled. be taken of this in determining the pressure to be
applied to the chamber under test.
5.8.2.3 Unless otherwise agreed between the
purchaser and the mufacturer (see table 1.51) the 6.8.2.8 Vessels which have been repaired subsequent
pressure in the vessel under test shall be graduaìly to the pressure test shail be re-subjected to the
increased to a value of 50 % of the specified test specified pressure test after completion of the repairs
pressure; thereafter the pressure shall be increased in and after any heat treatment unless specifically agreed
stages of approximately 10 % of the specified test between the purchaser and the manufacturer (see
pressure until this is reached. At no stage shall the table 1.51).
vessel be approached for close inspection until the
pressure has been positively reduced to a level lower 5.8.2.9 AU temporary pipes and connections and
blanking devices shall be designed to withstand the
than that previously attained. The pressure(s) at which
'standard' test pressure determined in accordance
the vessel will be approached for close inspection shall
with 5.8.5.
be specified in the test procedure. Such pressure(s)
need not exceed design pressure but, if in excess of 5.8.2.10 Care shall be taken to ensure that the vessel,
this figure, shall not exceed 95 % of the pressure its supports and foundations can withstand the total
already attained and held for at least 15 min. load that will be imposed on them during the test.

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL Lïï7 m L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70750 714
6.8.2.11 No vessel undergoing pressure testing shall 6.8.4.2 The ‘standard’test pressure determined in
be subjected to any form of shock loading, e.g. accordance with 6.8.6 shail be applied.
hammer testing.
6.8.4.3 The test arrangement shall be such that the
6.8.3 Hydraulic testing temperature of the gas entering the vessel is not lower
6.8.3.1 The ‘standard’test pressure determined in than the agreed test temperature.
accordance with 6.8.6 shall be applied. NOTE. 1. Attention is drawn to the fact that if the gas pressure is
6.8.3.2 Water shall normally be used as the let down to the vessel under test from high pressure storage, its
temperature will fall.
pressurizing agent.
NOTE.l. To avoid the risk of freezing it is recommended that the NOTE.2. Attention is also drawn to the possibility of condensation
temperature of the water during the test should be not less occurring within the vessel.
than 7 “C. However if the temperature of the water during the test
is expected to be lower than this, special precautions may be 6.8.4.4 Prior to the pneumatic testing of vessels all
necessaiy to prevent such freezing especially in small diameter welds not nondestnictively tested in accordance
branch connections. with 6.6.4.1 shall be tested by magnetic particle and/or
NOTE2 Attention is drawn to the need to control the chloride dye penetsant methods.
conten$gJ test water in the case of austenitic stainless steel
vessels 6.8.5 ‘Standard’ test pressure
NOTE.3. Where other liquids are used, additional precautions may
be necessary depending on the nature of the liquid. 6.8.6.1 The test pressure for hydraulic, pneumatic and
6.8.3.3 Vessels and connections shall be properly
combined hydradidpneumatic tests shall, except when
vented before the test pressure is applied to prevent otherwise stated elsewhere in 6.8, be not less than the
the formation of air pockets. ‘standardtest pressure, pt, determined as follows for
vessels and components (see 3.4.1) subject to
6.8.4 Pneumatic tests (see also 6.8.7 and 6.8.8) membrane stress.
6.8.4.1 Fheumatic testing is potentially a much more
dangerous operation than hydraulic testing and is
permitted only to be carried out subject to the
pt = 1.25 (p- x ”)
ft t - c
I
following conditions. where
a) Either on vessels of such design and construction
that it is not practicable for them to be filled with P is the design pressure;
liquid, or on vessels for use in processes that cannot fa is the nominal design strength value (i.e.
tolerate trace liquids and where the removal of such category 1 or 2) for the material, or its nearest
trace liquids is impracticable. equivalent, at test temperature from the design
b) After consultation at the design stage (see strength tables of this standard;
table 1.51) with the Inspecting Authority and other
ft is the nominal timeindependent design stsength
relevant safety authorities on the adequacy of the
value (i.e. category 1 or 2) for the material, or its
safety precautions proposed by the manufacturer to
nearest equivalent, at the design temperature, or
ensure that as far as possible no person is exposed
to injury should the vessel fail during the test at the highest temperature at which
operation, and of any special precautions to timeindependent design strengths are given in
minimize the risk of such failure, and with written the design strength tables of this standard if this
approval by the Inspecting Authority before the test is lower than the design temperature;
of the procedure specified in 6.8.2 with particular t is the nominal thickness of the section under
reference to the following: consideration;
1) the adequacy of blast protection; c is the corrosion allowance.
2) the extent of area cleared for test safety
purposes;
3) the degree of confidence in stress analysis of
vessel details,
4) the adequacy of any nondestructive testing
carried out before the tese
5) the resistance of the vessel materials to fast
fracture;
6) the procedure to prevent local chilling during
filling and emptying of the vesel;
7) the extent of remote monitoring provided
during test.
‘Guide Notes on Safe Use of Stainless Steel in Chemical Process Plant’, (1978) paragraph 1.4,Institution of Chemical Engineers,
23)
George E Davis Building, 165-171 Railway Terrace, Rugby, Warwickshire ‘ 3 2 1 3HQ, England.
O BSI 1997 5/19

~~~
~
S T D B B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 E L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70751 b.50 W
In the case where the vessel to be tested comprises a 6.8.6.6 Where reasonably practicable, single wall
number of non-connected parts (e.g. the shellside and vessels subject to operation under vacuum Conditions
the tubeside of a heat exchanger) each part shall be shall be tested under vacuum or applied external
tested independently with the appropriate ‘standard‘ pressure to simulate vacuum conditions. Where
test pressure in each case. Where the vessel comprises practicable, the external pressure on the vessel under
a number of interconnected components (e.g. the test, whether resulting from vacuum in the vessel or
cylinder, head) with different ‘standard’test pressures, from applied extenial pressure, shall be 1.25 times the
the test pressure shall be not less than the lower design external pressure, but in no case shall it be less
bound test pressure as determined by the following than the design external pressure.
procedure: Where a test under vacuum or applied external
a) determine pt in accordance with 5.8.5.1 for each pressure is not reasonably practicable, single wall
cylindrical or dished main shell component of the vessels subject to vacuum shall be given an internal
vessel with a type A welded joint (see figure 5.61); pressure test at a gauge pressure of 1.5 b d 4 ) except
where the maximum possible vacuum is limited by
b) designate the highest and lowest values so antivacuum valves or other suitable means. In the
determined as pm and p a respectively; latter case the internal test pressure shall be a matter
c) where pm 5 1.35 X design pressure, the lower of agreement (see 6.8.2.2 and table 1.51).
bound test pressure = pm NOTE. In special cases where the vessel designed for vacuum
duty would not withstand this internal pressure test without
where PtH > 1.35 X design pressure, the lower bound overstrain or where the stability of the vessel under vacuum duty
test pressure = 1.35~ or p a whichever is higher. requires to be proven, alternative testing methods should be
agreed between the purchaser, the manufacturer and the
5.8.5.2 The vessel shall be analysed for the pressure Inspecting AuthonW.
test condition as follows. 5.8.6.6 Where the inner vessel of a jacketed vessel is
a) For internal pressure testing the general designed to operate at atmospheric pressure or under
membrane stress in any part of the vessel during test vacuum conditions, the test pressure need only be
shall not exceed 90 % of the minimum specified yield applied to the jacket space. In such cases p shall be
or proof stress of the material. taken as the differential design pressure between the
NOTE. Vessels may have to be designed specially to comply jacket and the inner vessel for the purpose of
with this requirement where it is proposed to carry out the test calculating pt (see also 5.8.5.2).
with the vessel in a different orientation to that in which it is
designed to operate, andior with a pressurizing medium which 5.8.6.7 The applied test pressure shall include the
is denser than the design contents. amount of any static head acting at the point under
consideration.
b) For external pressure testing an additional design
case shall be considered to ensure that a design 5.8.6 Proof hydraulic test
p r e m e of 0.8 multiplied by the external test
6.8.6.1 A proof testing procedure to be followed for
pressure is in accordance with 3.6. ’Iblerances shail
vessels (or vessel parts) of which the strength cannot
also be in accordance with 3.6.
satisfactorily be cdcuiated (see 3.2.2) shall be agreed
6.8.6.3 Where at the time of manufacture the (see 5.8.2.2 and table 1.51).
operating conditions of a vessel are not known, e.g. in 5.8.6.2 The procedure shall specify the method to be
the case of vessels made for stock, the hydraulic test used during the test to determine strain and inelastic
pressure shall be that pressure which will generate a behaviour.
membrane stress of not less than 85 % of the minimum It is permissible to adopt either of the following
specified yield or proof stress of the material at the methods within the limitations described in a) and b).
test temperature.
a) Strain gauge technique.
6.8.5.4 Normally where a vessel is lined or coated by Before the test is begun or any pressure has been
a process which could impair the integrity of the applied to the vessel, strain gauges of electrical
structure, e.g. glass hing, or weld cladding, the resistance or other types shall be affixed to both the
‘standard’pressure test shall be performed after inside and outside surfaces of the vessel. The
completion of this process. Alternatively, for other than number of gauges, their positions and their
weld clad vessels, it is permissible to reduce the directions shall be chosen so that principal strains
‘standard’test pressure after completion of lining to and stresses can be determined at all points of
not less than 1.1times design pressure provided that interest. The type of gauge and the cementing
the ‘standard’ test pressure as calculated in accordance technique shall be chosen so that strains up to 1%
with 5.8.5.1 has been applied before lining. can be determined.
24) 1 b x = lo5 N/m2 = 0.1 N/mm2 = 100 kPa
5/20
O BSI 1997
=
~~ ~~ ~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 1 b 2 4 b b 9 0b70752 5 9 7
b) Strain indicating coating technique 5.8.6.4 The highest pressure which is applied shall be
The use of strain indicating techniques shall be maintained for the time sufficient to permit inspection
limited to carbon or carbon manganese vessels of in accordance with 5.8.2.3.
wall thickness not greater îhan 25 mm and where the 5.8.6.5 Where the strain gauge technique given
thickness is calculated using 2fB in place off in the in 5.8.6.2a is adopted, strain readings shall be taken as
equations given in 3.5.1.2. the pressure is increased. The pressure shall be
1) The vessel shall be subjected to pressure not increased by steps of approximately 10 % until the
exceeding: ‘standard’test pressure, pt, is reached or until
significant general yielding OCCULS. Strain readings shall
be repeated during unloading. Should the plot of strain
versus pressure during the application of pressure and
(see 5.8.5.1 for nomenclature). unloading show evidence of non-linea& it is
2) After the release of this pressure the outside permissible for the pressure reached to be reapplied
surface in the areas not covered by the design not more than five times until the loading and
rules shall be coated with a substance which wiii unloading curves corresponding to two successive
indicate the onset of yielding. pressure cycles substantialiy coincide. Should
Strain indicating coatings shall be of the lime wash coincidence not be attained, the pressure py
type or other types by agreement between the (see 5.8.6.5.2) shall be taken as the pressure range
purchaser and supplier; strain indicating coatings of corresponding to the linear portion of the curve
the brittle lacquer type shall not be used. obtained during the final unloading.
A control specimen shall be prepared under NOTE. The term significant general yielding is intended to apply
to the type of yielding which occurs when the general stress level
simulated test conditions and strained to the onset in a substantial portion of the vessel under test exceeds the yield
of yield in order to demonstrate the ability of the point of the material. It is not intended to apply to the type of
coating to indicate first yield under the test yielding which occurs during the fist application of (test)
conditions. The onset of yield shall be taken as pressure to a component due to stress redistribution at points of
unavoidable stress concentration (e.g. inside crotch of nozzles).
1000 microstrain. Also it is not intended that readings obtained from gauges at such
The test conditions shall simulate: points should be considered in isolation against the requirements
of 5.8.6.5.
i) environmental conditions;
ii) loading rate; 5.8.6.5.1 If the ‘standard‘test pressure, pt, is reached
and a linear pressure/strain relationship obtained, the
iii) thickness of coating and curing conditions. expected design pressure shall be considered to be
NOTE. Strain indicating coatings can be used to identify the confirmed
position of high stress prior to the application of strain gauges.
5.8.6.3 Pressure shall be applied gradually untii either 5.8.6.5.2 If the h a l test pressure is limited to a value
the ‘standard’ test pressure for the expected design less than the ‘standard‘test pressure, pt, or the
pressure is reached for strain gauges vessels, pressure range corresponding to the linear portion of
or 1.511.25 times the ‘standard‘test pressure is reached the pressure/strain record (see 6.8.6.5) is less than pt,
for vessels with strain indicating coating, or significant the design pressure shall be calculated from the
yielding of any part of the vessel occurs. following equation:
When either of these points is reached, the pressure
shall not be further increased
If the strain gauge technique given in 5.8.6.2a is
adopted, it is permissible to disregard any indication of
localized permanent set provided that there is no is the design pressure;
evidence of general distortion of the vessel. is the pressure at which significant
If the strain indicting coating technique given yielding occurs or the pressure range
in 5.8.6.213 is adopted, the onset of yielding on corresponding to linear pressure/strain
(outside) surfaces shall be considered to indicate behaviour of most highly strained part of
significant yielding. vessel during find unloading
NOTE. The apparent difference in criteria is to allow for the fact (see 5.8.6.5);
that the greatest strains normally occur on the inside surface of are as defined in 5.8.5.1.
the vessel.
O BSI 1997
5121
STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL L q q ? Lb2LibbS Ob70753 423
6.8.6.6 Where the strain indicating coating technique d) the design pressure;
given in 6.8.6.2b is applied to the outside surface of e) the design temperature;
the vessel
f) the hydraulic or pneumatic test pressure;
a) if 1.5A.25 times the ‘standard’test pressure is
g) the date of manufacture;
reached without significant yielding, the expected
design pressure shall be considered to be confirmed; h) the i d e n m g mark of the inspecting Authority;
b) if significant yielding occurs at a pressure less i) any statutory marking required.
than 1.5h.25 times the ‘standard‘test pressure, the A facsimile of this nameplate shall be prepared and
design pressure shall be calculated from the submitted to the purchaser in accordance
equation in 6.8.6.6.2. with 1.6.2.2g.
6.8.7 Combined hydraulidpneumatic tests 5.8.10 Final inspection
In cases where it is desired to test a vessel that is An internal and external examination of the completed
partly ñlied with liquid, the pneumatic pressure shall vessel shall be carried out prior to despatch and the
be applied above the liquid level and at no point of the markjng on the vessel shall be checked.
vessel shall the total pressure applied during the test
cause the general membrane stress to exceed 90 % of
the yield or proof stress of the material. 5.9 Inspection requirements for cast
Ail the relevant requirements of 6.8.1 to 6.8.6 shall components
apply to the conduct of combined hydraulidpneumatic The following provisions satisfy the requirements
tests. of 3.4.2.3 for the detection and repair of defects in
castings with a cast factor of 0.9.
6.8.8 Leak testing
5.9.1 Examination
6.8.8.1 It is sometimes desirable to carry out a gas
leak test before the hydraulic or pneumatic test. It is For carbon, low alloy or high alloy steel castings
permissible to use other approved methods subject to produced either by static or centrifugal casting, a
agreement between the purchaser and the casting factor of 0.9 can be used provided the castings
manufacturer (see table 1.51). are examined in accordance with a quality
NOTE. Reference may be made to BS 3636. A test for this purpose
specification agreed between the manufacturer and
may be applied to any vessel without observing the requuements purchaser.
applying to pneumatic acceptance tests,providing the test NOTE. A suitable specification could be based upon appendix 7 of
pressure does not exceed 10 % of the design pressure. ASME Vi11 division 1.
5.8.8.2 It is permissible to carry out pressure testing 5.9.2 Defects
with air or gas up to 1.1 times the design pressure on Where defects are repaired by welding, the completed
any vessel that has satisfactorily withstood the repair shall be subject to re-examination and such heat
‘standard’hydraulic, pneumatic or combined treatment as is agreed between purchaser, inspecting
hydraulidpneumatic test. Authoriw, manufacturer and material supplier.
6.8.9 Vessel nameplate 6.9.3 Identification and marking
Each pressure vessel shall have a permanently In additional to any manufacturer and materiai
attached nameplate showing: marking, castings shall be identified as having a casting
a) the number and date of this British Standard, i.e. factor of 0.9. It is recommended that these castings are
BS 5500 : ~ x y z where
~ ~ ) wxyz is the year of painted a colour to differentiate them on the shop
publication of this issue of the specification; floor from castings of factor 0.7.
b) the name of the manufacturer;
c) the manufacturer’s serial number i d e n m g the
vessel;
25) Marking BS 5500 : wxyz on or in relation to a product represents a manufacturer‘s declaration of conformity, Le. a claim by or on
behalf of the manufacturer that the product meets the requirements of the standard. The accuracy of the claim is therefore solely the
claimant’s responsibiiiw. Such a declaration is not to be confused with third party certification of conformity, which may also be
desirable.
5/22
O BSI 1997
Issue 1,J a n m 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex A A.3.1 General criteria

A.3.1.1 Gross plastic deformation
Recommendations for design where There should be the same theoretical margin against
loadings and components are not covered gross plastic deformation for all design details as that
by section 3 provided against gross plastic deformation in major
membrane areas. For this purpose the required margin
A.l General against gross plastic defonnation may be assumed to
This annex gives design criteria for stress systems be R e ( d f for materials covered in tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12.
resulting from the application of loads and/or the use For other materials the value for the nearest equivalent
of components or types of component not covered material in tables 2.3 -2 to 2.3.12 should be assumed.
explicitly by section 3 (see 3.2.2), annex B or annex C. In establishing conformity with this criterion
The intention is to ensure that in such circumsmces investigations should take account of plastic behaviour.
the design basis is consistent with that underlying the If the theory of plastic limit analysis is employed, the
rules specified in section 3. Formal analysis in limit load may be taken as the load producing gross
accordance with this annex is only required in the case plastic deformation, although this may be a
of significant additional loadings or loadings from conservative estimate. It is also safe, though possibly
components significantly different to those covered in conservative, to assume that a load, which does not
section 3. Relevant experience of similar designs may change sign and which, on the basis of a shakedown
be considered in deciding whether an analysis is analysis satisfies A.3.1.2, will be less or equal to the
necessary. load for gross plastic deformation.
A list of references dealing with limit analysis of
A.2 Notation various configurations is given in A.6.
For the purposes of this annex the following symbols Where it is impracticable to perform plastic analysis,
WPb elastic analysis may be employed as detailed in A.3.2
(covering A.3.3 and A.3.4) to demonstrate compliance
e is the analysis thickness of main vessel with this criterion; alternatively strain measurements
section; may be made on the actual vessel during pressure and
load tests.
Rem corresponds to the minimum value of ReL or A.3.1.2 IncrernenM coUapse
Rpo.2 (Rp1.0 for austenitic steels) specified The stress systems imposed should shakedown to
for the grade of material concerned at a elastic action within the ñrst few opemting cycles. The
temperature T (tested in accordance with operating loads to be considered include pressure and
BS EN 10002-5); all loadings of the type listed in 3.2.1 where relevant.
f is the design strength listed in tables 2.3-2 to In demonstrating conformance with this criterion a
2.3-12 ; shakedown cuialysis (e.g. see 6.2.6) should preferably
NOTE. If it is required to evaluate the limiîs in this be employed.
annex for category 3 components, the value off may In cases where loads change sign during the cycle it
be taken as that permitted for components of should be demonstrated (e.g. see A.3.4.2.4) that the
categories 1 and 2 provided that there are no welded total range of maximum stress due to the range of
seams in the vicinity of the point under consideration. loads does not exceed twice the yield stress of the
fm is the general primary membrane stress material (2 X Rep$.
intensity; Alternatively elastic analysis as detailed in A.3.2 may
fL is the local primary membrane stress be employed (covering A.3.3 and A.3.4).
intensiw; A.3.1.3 BucMing
is the primary bending stress intensiw, For components or loadings associated with
fb
substantial compressive stress buckling should not
fg is the secondary stress intensity; occur under a combined load less than twice the
fi, fi are the principal stresses required to design combined load at design temperature. Care
and f 3 determine stsess intensities; should also be taken to avoid bucklig under test
conditions. The design and test combined loads are to
R is the mean radius of main vessel section; include pressure and simultaneous loadings of the type
V is Poisson’s ratio. listed in 3.2.1 in coqjunction with permissible
fabrication imperfections. Where significant
A.3 Non-creep conditions compressive stresses are present the possibility of
buckling should be investigated to satisfy this Criterion
The criteria in A.3.1 to A.3.6 apply for design and the design modified if necessary. While generally it
temperatures at which the design strength given in is not possible to do this by elastic analysis a relevant
tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12 is independent of time. criterion for cases where compressive stresses are due
to highly localized loads is given in A.3.3.
For compressive general primary membrane stress,
see A.3.6.
O BSI 1997 M1
~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70755 2 T b D
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Annex A
A.3.1.4 Fatigue A.3.3.3 Additional stress limits

The need or otherwise for a fatigue analysis should be Where significant compressive membrane stresses are
determined by application of annex C. present the possibility of bucklig should be
A.3.2 Demonstration of design acceptabilitg bg investigated and the design modified if necessary
stress analusis (see A.3.1.3). In cases where the external load is
A.3.3 and A.3.4 give alternative criteria for highly concentrated, an acceptable procedure would be
to h i t the sum of membrane and bending stresses
demonstrating the acceptability of design on the basis
(total compressive stress) in any direction at the point
of stresses estimated by the method given in annex G
or by other suitable elastic analysis. to 0.9 of the specified minimum yield point of the
material.
The criteria in A.3.3 apply only to local stresses in the
vicinity of attachments, supports, etc., and are generally Where shear stress is present alone, it should not
more conservative than those in A.3.4 in that any exceed 0.5f: The maximum permissible bearing stresses
bending stresses which occur at such locations are not should not exceed 1.5J
treated as secondary stresses. A.3.4 Specwc criteria for general application
The criteria in A.3.4 are intended for general (except buckling)
application in cases outside the scope of A.3.3. If The recommendations of A.3.4.1 to A.3.4.4 provide
design acceptability has been based on A.3.3 then the the criteria for acceptability of design on the basis of
use of A.3.4 is not required. elastic stress analysis. The analysis should take
It is the intent of A.3.3 that the criteria can be applied account of gross structural discontinuities (e.g. nozzles,
using only data which is presented in this standard. changes in shell curvature), but not of local stress
When A.3.4 is implemented, then more extensive concentrations due to changes in profile such as fillet
anaiysis may well be required together with the use of welds.
references not embodied in this standard The rules require the calculated stresses to be grouped
A.3.3 Specific criteria f o r limited application into five stress categories (see A.3.4.2) and
The criteria in A.3.3.1 to A.3.3.3 provide stress limits aPPr0Pnat.e Stress intensitiesf,, f ~ fb ,and fg to be
for elastically calculated stresses a x e n t to determined from the principal stressedfi,f2 andf3 in
attachments and supports and to nozzles and openings each category, using the maximum shear theory of
which are subject to the combined effects of pressure failure. Appropriate limits are given for the stress
and externaliy applied loads. intensities so calculated.
NOTE. if the loaded nozzle area or opening is less than 2.5- A.3.4.1 Tminology
from another stress concentrating feature, stresses as calculated
in accordance with annex G become unreliable and some other A.3.4.1.1 Stress intensity
method of assessing the total stress, for example finite element
stress analysis or proof test,is required. The stress intensity is twice the maximum shear
stress, i.e. the difference between the algebmically
A.3.3.1 Attachments and supports largest principal stress and the algebraically smallest
For these h i t s to apply the loaded area has to have a principal stress at a given point. lknsion stresses are
dimension in the circumferential direction not greater considered positive and compression stresses are
than one-third of the shell circumference. The stresses considered negative.
adjacent to the loaded area due to pressure acting in
the shell may be taken as the shell pressure stresses A.3.4.1.2 Gross structural discontinuity
without any concentrating effects due to the A gross structural discontinuity is a source of stress or
attachment. strain intensification that affecb a relatively large
Under the design combined load the following stress portion of a structure and has a significant effect on
limits apply the overall stress or strain pattern or on the structure
a) the membrane stress intensity should not as a whole.
exceed 1.2J Examples of gross structural discontinuities are end to
b) the stress intensity due to the sum of membrane shell and flange to shell junctions, nozzles and
and bending stresses should not exceed 2f: junctions between shells of different diameters or
thicknesses.
A.3.3.2 N o z z h and o p m i q ~ s
For these limits to apply the nozzle or opening has to A.3.4.1.3 Local structural discontinuity
be reinforced in accordance with 3.5.4. A local structural discontinuity is a source of stress or
The maximum stress intensity adjacent to the nozzle or strain intensification that af€ectsa reiatively small
opening due to internal pressure may be obtained volume of material and does not have a significant
from 6.2.5 in the case of spherical shells, or effect on the overall stress or strain pattern or on the
from 6.2.3.6 for cylindrical shells. structure as a whole.
Under the design combined load the stress intensity Examples of local structural discontinuities are small
due to the sum of membrane and ben- stresses ñiiet radii,small attachments and partial penetration
should not exceed 2.25J welds.
Ah?
O BSI 1997
STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1997 m l b 2 ' 4 b b 7 Ob7075b 3 3 2 m
Annex A Issue 1,Januasy 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
A.3.4.1.4 N m a l stress An example of a primary local stress is the membrane

The n o d stress is the component of stress normal to stress in a shell produced by external load and
the p h e of reference; this is also referred to as direct moment at a permanent support or at a nozzle
stress. connection.
Usually the distribution of normal stress is not uniform A.3.4.1.10 Sec0nda.y stress
through the thickness of a part, so this stress is A secondary stress is a normal stress or a shear stress
considered to be made up in turn of two components developed by the constraint of aqjacent parts or by
one of which is uniformly distributed and equal to the self-constraint of a structure. The basic characteristic
average value of stress across the thickness of the of a secondary stress is that it is self-limiting. Local
section under consideration, and the other of which yielding and minor distortions can satisfy the
varies with the location across the thickness. conditions that cause the stress to occur, and failure
A.3.4.1.5 Shear stress from one application of the stress is not to be
The shear stress is the component of stress acting in expected.
the plane of reference. An example of secondary stress is the bending stress
A.3.4.1.6 Membrane stress at a gross structural discontinuity
The membrane stress is the component of stress that is A.3.4.1.11 P e d stress
uniformly distributed and equal to the average value of The basic characteristic of a peak stress is that it does
stress itcross the thickness of the section under not cause any noticeable distortion and is
consideration. objectionable only as a possible source of a fatigue
A.3.4.1.7 Bending stress crack or a brittle fracture. A stress that is not highly
The bending stress is the component of stress that is localized falls into this category if it is of a type that
proportional to the distance from the centre of the wall cannot cause noticeable distortion.
thickness. Examples of peak stress are:
A.3.4.1.8 primary stress a) the thermal stresses in the austenitic steel
A primary stress is a stsess produced by mechanical cladding of a carbon steel vessel;
loadings only and so distributed in the structure that b) the surface stresses in the wall of a vessel or pipe
no redistribution of load occurs as a result of yielding. produced by thermal shock
* It is a normal stress, or a shear stress developed by the
CB
* imposed loading, that is necessary to satisfy the simple c) the stress at a local structural discontinu@
laws of equilibrium of external and internal forces and The current methodology of design against fatigue
moments. The basic characteriste of this stress is that failure given in annex C does not require a peak stress
it is not self-limiting. Primary stresses that considerably to be considered. Where alternative methods of fatigue
exceed the yield strength wiii result in failure, or at assessment are used it may be necessary to consider
least in gross distortion. A thermal stress not classified peak stress.
as a primary stress. Primary stress is divided into
'general' and 'local' categories. The load primary stress A.3.4.2 Stress categories and stress limits
is defined in A.3.4.1.9 A calculated stress depending upon the type of loading
Examples of general primary stress are: andor the distribution of such stress wiil fall within
a) the stress in a circular, cylindrical or spherical one of the five basic stress categories defined
shell due to internal pressure or to distributed live inA.3.4.2.1 to A.3.4.2.5. For each category, a stress
loads, intensity value is derived for a specific condition of
design. 'Ib satisfy the analysis this stress intensity
b) the bending stress in the central portion of a fiat should fall within the limit detailed for each category.
head due to pressure.
A.3.4.1.9 Primary local membrane stress A.3.4.2.1 General primurg membrane stress category
Cases arise in which a membrane stress produced by The stresses falling within the general primary
pressure or other mechanical loading and associated membrane stress category are those defined as general
with a primary and/or a discontinuim effect produces primary stresses in A.3.4.1.8 and are produced by
excessive distortion in the transfer load to other pressure and other mechanical loads, but excluding all
portions of the structure. Conservatism requires that secondary and peak stresses. The value of the
such a stress be cìassiñed as a primary local membrane stress intensity is obtained by averaging
membrane stress even though it has some these stresses across the thickness of the section under
characteristics of a secondary stress. A stressed region consideration. The limiting value of this intensity& is
may be considered as local if the distance over which the allowable stress vduef except as permitted in this
the stress intensity exceeds 1.if does not extend in the annex.
meridional direction more than O . m e , and if it is not
closer in the meridionai direction than 2.54?ë to
another region where the limits of general primary
membrane stress are exceeded.
O BSI 1997 Al3

S T D - B S I BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1997 = Lb24bb9 Ob70757 O79 I
I
BS 5500 :1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Annex A
A.3.4.2.2 Local primary membrane stress category For the purpose of establishing allowable stresses, the
following two types of thermal stress axe recognized,
The stresses failing within the local primary membrane
depending on the volume or area in which distortion
stress category are those defined in A.3.4.1.8 and axe
takes place.
produced by pressure and other mechanical loads, but
excluding ali thermal and peak stresses. The stress a) General thermal stress is associated with
intensityfL is the average value of these stresses distortion of the structure in which it occurs. If a
across the thickness of the section under consideration stress of this type, neglecting stress concentrations,
and is limited to 1.5J By definition, the local primary exceeds twice the yield strength of the material, the
membrane stress category includesf,in those cases elastic analysis maybe invalid and successive thermal
where it is present. cycles may produce incremental distortion. This type
is therefore classified as secondary stress in table A l
A.3.4.2.3 General or local primary membrane plus andfigurekl.
primaml bending stress c a t e g q
Examples of general thermal stress are:
The stresses falling within the general or local primary
1) the stress produced by an axial thermal
membrane plus primary bending stress category are
gradient in a cylindrical shell;
those defined in A.3.4.1.8, but the stress intensity
valuefb, (fm +fb) or (fi+fb) is the highest value of 2) the stress produced by the temperature
those stresses acting across the section under difference between a nozzle and the shell to which
consideration excluding secondary and peak stresses. it is attached.
fb is the primary bending stress intensity, which means b) Local thermal stress is associated with almost
the component of primary stress proportional to the complete suppression of the differential expansion
distance from centroid of solid section. The stress and thus produces no significant distortion. Such
inknsityfb, (f, +fb) or c f ~+fb) is not to exceed 1.5J stresses should be considered only from the fatigue
A.3.4.2.4 FYimary plus secondary stress category standpoint.
The stresses falling withjn the primary plus secondary Examples of local thermal stresses are:
stress category are those defined in A.3.4.1.8, plus 1)the stress in a small hot spot in a vessel wall,
those of A.3.4.1.10, produced by pressure, other 2) the thermal stress in a cladding material which
mechanical loads and general thermal effects. The has a coefficient of expansion different from that
effects of gross stnictural discontinuities, but not of of the base metal.
local stsuctwlal discontinuities (stress concentrations),
should be included The stress intensity value (f,+fb A.3.4.3 Wue of Poisson’s mtio
+fg) or ( f ~
+fb +fg> is the highest value of these The value of Poisson’s ratio to be used should be as
stsesses acting across the section under consideration follows.
and is to be limited to 3.0f (see also note 1to a) In evaluating stresses for comparison with any
figure k1). stress limits other than those allowable under fatigue
Fïgure A l and table A l have been included to guide conditions, stresses should be calculated on an
the designer in establishing stress categories for some elastic basis using the elastic value of Poisson’s ratio.
typical cases and stsess intensity limits for b) In evaluating stresses for comparison with the
combinations of stress categories. There will be aliowable stress limits associated with fatigue
instances when reference to definitions of stresses wili conditions, the eiastic equations should be used,
be necessary to class@ a specific stress condition to a except that the numerical value substituted for
stress categoy. A.3.4.2.6 explains the reason for Poisson’s ratio should be determined from the
separating them into two categories ‘general‘and following:
‘secondary‘ in the case of thermal stresses.
A.3.4.2.5 77wrrnd stress but not less than 0.3
Thermal stress is a self-balancing stress produced by a
non-uniform distribution of temperature or by differing
thermal coefficients of expansion. Thermal stress is
developed in a solid body whenever a volume of
material is prevented from assuming the size and shape
that it n o d y should under a change in temperature.
A/4
O BSI 1997
Annex A Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
*-m
+
+
*
m
*
Q
I-
F
O BSIStandards
COPYRIGHT British 1997 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards A/5
~~
S T D - E S 1 BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 Lb24bbS Ob70759 9 4 1 R
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex A
Table A.l Classification of stresses for some typical cases I

Vessel component Location Origin of stress Type of stress I Classification I
Cylindrical or Shell plate remote Internal pressure General membrane fm
spherical shell from discontinuities Gradient through plate fg
thickness
Axial thermal gradient Membrane fg
Bending fg
Junction with head Internal pressure Membrane fL
or h g e Bending fg
Any shell or end Any section across External load or General membrane averaged fm
entire vessel moment, or internal across full section. Stress
pressure component perpendicular to
cross section
External load or Bending across fuil section. fm
moment Stress component
perpendicular to
cross section
Near nozzle or other External load or Local membrane fL
opening moment, or internal Bending fg
pressure Peak (fillet or corner) 1)
Any location Temperature difference Membrane
between shell and end Bending
Dished end or
conical end
Crown Internal pressure Membrane
Bending
fm
I
Flat end
Knuckle or junction Internai pressure
to shell
Centre region Internal pressure
Membrane
Bending
Membrane
Ife
fL2)
fm
I
Bending Al
Junction to shell Internal pressure Membrane fL
Bending fg
Perforated end or m i c d ligament in a Pressure Membrane (average through fm
shell uniform pattern cross section)
Bending (average through
width of ligament, but
gradient through plate)
Peak 1)
Isolated or atypical Pressure Membrane
iigament Bending
Peak
Nozzle Cross section Internal pressure or General membrane (average fm
perpendicular to external load or across full section). Stress
nozzle axis moment component perpendicular to
section
External load or
moment
Bending across nozzle
section I fm
Nozzle wall internai pressure General membrane i fm I
!-I
Local membrane fL
Bending
Peak
Differential expancion Membrane
Bending
Peak
A/6 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

S T D . B S 1 BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 L b Z q b b î Ob707hû b b 3 I
Annex A Issue 1, January 1997 BS 6600 : 1997
I Table A.l Classification of stresses for some typical cases (continued)

~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Vessel component Location Origin of stress Type of stress Classification

cladding Any Differential expansion Membrane ('peak) 1)
Bending ('peak) 1)
Any Thermal gradient Bending (component of fg
through plate thiclu-tess stress proportional to
distance from centre)
Peak (component of stress i)
departing from linear
component fg)
Ihy Refer toA.3.4.1.11

I Any /Any Stress concentration-peak
(notch effect)
1)
') Consideration should also be given to the possibility of buckling and excessive deformation in vessels with large
diameter-to-thicknessratio.
A.3.5 Limit for longitudinal compressive general A.4 Creep Conditions

membrane stress in a cglindrical vessel In the absence of comprehensive design criteria for
Where the design temperature is not greater components in the creep range, the requirements
than 350 OC, and the vessel is not under external specified in section 3 should be applied, but see note
pressure, the longitudinal compressive stress oz in the to 3.2.4.
cylindrical section, is not to exceed Asf. A is obtained A.6 Bibliography
from figure A2 in terms of K, and in this context ERBATUR, EH., KIRK, A. and GILL, S.S. Plastic
K = pe/pyss, where p e and pyss are both defined in behaviour of oblique flush nozzles in cylindrical
equations (3.26) and (3.24) respectively, in 3.6.4, pressure vessels. an experimental investigation.
s andf are defined in 3.6.1.1 and a, is defined in B.3.2. Pressure Vessels and Piping, 1973,1,93118.
Where the vessel is subject to simultaneous ROBINSON, M., KIRK, A. and GILL, S.S. An
longitudinal compression and external pressure, the experimental investigation into the plastic behaviour of
following interaction formula shall be used to calculate oblique flush nozzles in spherical pressure vessels.
design values of longitudinal compressive stress and International Journal of Mech. Sciences,
external pressure in the cylindrical section. 1971,13,41-61.
OZ +- pex 5 1 ROBINSON, M., and GILL, S.S. A lower bound to the
Dz aììow Pex allow limit pressure of a flush oblique cylindrical branch in a
where spherical pressure vessel Intemational Journal of
Mech. S'&es, 1972,14 (No. 9), 579-601.
oz = design longitudinal compressive stress; ROBINSON, M., and GILL, S.S. Limit analysis of flush
oz,auow = allowable pressure stress from 3.6.4 radial and oblique cylindrical nozzles in spherical
using curve b) of figure 3.64 pressure vessels. Part 1, A parametric survey of results.
Pex = design external pressure; Pressure Vessels and P i p i n g , 1973,1,199-231.
ROBINSON, M., and GILL, S.S. Limit analysis of flush
pex,allow = allowable external pressure derived radial and oblique cylindrcal nozzles in spherical
from 3.6.2.1.
pressure vessels. Part 2, Application of results in a
NOTE 1. The design longitudinal compressive stress does not design procedure. Pressure Vessels and P i p i n g ,
include the longitudinal component of the design external 1973,1,233-244.
pressure.
NOTE 2. Where the simultaneous longitucìinal compression and
DINNO, K.S. and GILL, S.S. A method for calculating
external pressure result from wind loading and vacuum, and the lower bound limit pressure for thick shells of
where a low frequency of vacuum occurrence can be revolution with specific reference to cylindrical vessels
demonstrated, the wind loading can be based upon a 2 year figure with torispherical ends. International Journal of Mech.
rather than a 50 year figure. Sciences, 1974,16,415427.
A.3.6 Wnd and earthquake conditions DINNO, K.S. A lower bound analysis for the calculation
All allowable tensile stresses and stress intensities of limit pressure for a thick spherical vessel with a
(membrane or bending, primary or secondary) may be radial cylindrical nozzle. International Journal of
increased by a factor of 1.2 when wind and earthquake Mech. Sc-.ienceS, 1974,2,7594.
loadings axe calculated in accordance with B.6 DINNO, K.S. and GILL, S.S. A lower bound limit
and B.6; wind and earthquake loadings need not be pressure analysis for the oblique intersection of a flush
assumed to act simultaneously. Limitations on cylindrical nozzle and the torus of a cylindrical vessel
compressive sixesses inA.3.1.3, A.3.3.3 andA.3.6 are with a torispherical end. Journal of Stmin Analgsis,
not hereby relaxed. 1974,9 (NO 4), 247-262.
O BSI 1997
A17
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1797 = Lb24bb7 Ob707bL 5 T T Is
BS 5500 : 1997 h u e 1, January 1997 Annex A
o 2 i 6 a io 12 K
Figure A.2 Curve for the evaluation of A
Al8
O BSI 1997
~~ ~~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 1 b 2 4 b b 9 Ob707b2 43b
Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex B B.1.6 The calculation should be performed for the

combinations of load expected in service. The
Recommendations for cylindrical, thickness may be dictated by loads acting when the
spherical and conical shells under vessel is not under pressure. Conditions during
combined loadings, including wind and pressure test should be the subject of special
consideration.
earthquakes
B.2 Notation
B.l General
For the purpose of this annex the following symbols
B.l.l This annex deals with the determination and apply:
maximum permitted values of general primary
membrane stress intensity for cylindrical, spherical and P is the design (internal) pressure, defined
conical shells (excluding very flattened cones) subject in 3.2.3;
to combinations of loads in addition to internal M is the bending moment on shell acting in a
pressure. plane containing shell axis,at tramverse
The loadings considered are a bending moment acting section considered
in a plane containing the shell axis (e.g. due to wind T is the torque acting about shell axis at
loading in the case of a vertical vessel or weight transverse section;
loaàing in a horizontal vessel), an axial force (e.g. due W is the axial force on shell (positive if tensile)
to weight in a vertical vessel) and a torque about the at transverse section considered (this force
vessel axis (e.g. form offset piping and wind loads). excludes pressure load);
The relaxations permitted for wind and earthquake is the inside radius of shell (for conical shell,
loadings under B.5 (and 3.2.7) do not apply to the Ri
inside radius measured normal to axis of shell
compressive stress limits given in A.3.5. The latter at the t r w e r s e section considered);
limits are also applicable to vessels under external
pressure. e is the shell analysis thickness (before addmg
corrosion allowance);
B.1.2 The limits given in this annex are applicable to D is the mean diameter of spherical or
regions remote26)from shell discontinuities such as cylindrical section of shell;
changes in curvature, openings, stiffeners, etc., and a is the semi-apex angle of conical shell;
remote from the points of application of the additional
v, is the angle included by normal to shell at
loads (e.g. supports). For the treatnient of the stresses
transverse section considered and shell axis
local to points of application of load and shell
discontinuities under combined loads see annex A. (spherical shell only);
6 is the angle included by plane of action of
B.1.3 The general approach is that, with wind and moment M and an axial plane through point
earthquake loads excluded, the stress intensity considered (spherical and conical shells only);
according to the maximum shear stress criterion is the nominal design strength;
should nowhere exceed the design stress. For this
f
Ge is the circumferential stress, positive if tensile;
purpose the compressive stress in the thickness
direction (radial stress) is assumed to be 0 . 5 ~An
. 0, is the meridional stress (iongituW in a
increased level is permitted when wind and earthquake cylindrical shell), positive if tensile;
loads are included Limits for compressive stresses are 7 is the shear stress;
also included to guard agahst buckling. fi are the principal stresses in a plane tangential
B.1.4 The shell thiclniess should never be less than f2 } to shell surface, positive if tensile
that required for intenial pressure in 3.6.1.2a, 3.5.1.2b
and 3.5.3.1.2.1 for cylindrical, spherical and conical B.3 Equations for principal stresses and
shells respectively components thereof
B.1.5 It is not possible to give explicit equations for B.3.1 Principal stresses
thickness under combined loading and a solution by The principal stresses fi and f2, acting tangentially to
tsial and error is necessary. Moreover, it is necessary to the shell surface at the point under consideration,
determine the location of the maximum equivalent should be calculated from the following equations:
membrane stress and, if buckling is a possibiliw, the fi = 0.5 [OS + O, + . \ l ( t ~ -
~ + 4$ ]
location (which may not be coincident) of the region
of maximum buckling hazard. fz = 0.5 [OS + O, - .\l(~~,g- O,)’ + 4 9 ]
NOTE. In these equations ue and u, should be substituted with
correct signs.
26) Remote means ‘at a distance not less than @ ’.
O BSI 1997
B/1
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1977 = L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob707b3 3 7 2
BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex B
B.3.2 Stress components B.4 General primary membrane stress intensity

The stress components 06, a, and T should be The stress intensity acting at the point considered
calculW from the following equations: should be taken as the numerically greatest of the
a) CyZindrìcal sheu (see figure B.1) following:
PIZ, fi - f 2
a g =-
e fi + O.@
f 2 + O*@
NOTE 1. in these expressionsf1 andf2 should be substituted with
correct signs andp should be substituted with a positive sign.
2T NOTE 2. For a cylindrical shell subjected to internal pressure, a
= ZR, + e)ze bending moment M and axial force W (without an applied torque),
NOTE 1. The positive directions of W and Y are shown in the stress intensity may be determined directly from the stress
figure B.l component as follows:
NOTE 2. The positive and negative signs before the term Oe - 02
containing M refer to points A and B (see figure B. 1) respectively oz + O.5p
NOTE 3. The direction of T and sign of shear stress 5 are U, + 0 . 5 ~
immaterial. In these expressions aoand az should be substituted with correct
NOTE 4. Ali stress components should be calculated for points A signs and p should be substituted with a positive sign.
and B.
B.5 Calculation of wind loading
b) Spherical shiì (see figure B.2) In order to calculate wind loadings it is necessary to
determine:
a) the geographical location of the vessel and basic
wind speed together with the effects of topography,
height and environment;
b) factor for the design Me of the vessel;
c) pressure coefficient, depending on shape and
height/beter ratio.
Information and guidance on the use of these factors
and conditions is contained in BS 6399 : Part 2 : 1995.
The probability factor Spgiven in BS 6399 : Part 2
should be taken as unity, corresponding to a mean
2T 1 recurrence interval of 50 years.
+ (n(q + e>ze x -) Special consideration may need to be given to tall
slender vertical vessels which might be subject to
NOTE 5. The positive directions of Y and W a r e shown in
figure B.2. aerodynamic osciliation by wind forces.
NOTE 6. Note that 6 is measured from the point where M induces If the frequency of shedding of eddies coincides with
maximum meridional tension. the natural frequency of the vessel, critical conditions
NOTE 7. The two components of shear stress should be treated as can arise. These effects should be investigated for
positive and additive, irrespective of the direction of II: heighî/beter ratios of 10 or greater.
NOTE 8. All stress components should be evaluated at points in BRE Digest No. 119 gives information on eddy
the range 6 = O to 6 = 180".
shedding frequency. Methods for finding the natural
c) Conical sheu (see figure B.3) period of vibration in vessels can be found in the
a g = -PIZ,
X- 1 following publications:
e cos ci FREESE, C.E. Vibrations of vertical pressure vessels.
W L
J. Engng. Ind. 1959, Februq.
DE GHE'IT.0 and LONG. Check towers for dynamic
1 stability Hydrocarban Processing. 1966,45(2).
X X cos 0)
cos ci For vessels h a h g a large Dle ratio there may be risk
2T of shell instability due to high localized pressure.
'= (n ( ~4M2+, e) e x
2 01 sin 8)
n(mi +e)ze + This aspect should be investigated in such cases,
particularly for an empty vessel.
NOTE 9. The notes to a) and b) apply, but reference should also
be made to figure B.3. B.6 Calculation of earthquake loading
The stress limit given in A.3.6 is applicable in cases
where it is agreed that earthquake loads can be treated
as equivalent static loads and where the probable
incidence of the 'design' earthquake is not greater than
that of the wind loading given in B.5.
O BSI 1997
Annex B Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Figure B.l Stresses in a cylindrical shell under combined loading
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards B/3
~~
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1797 E L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob707b5 145 m

BS 5500 : 1997 h u e 1,January 1997 Annex B
tw
Sec ti on
Figure B.2 Stresses in a spherical shell under combined loading
B/4 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

Annex B Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Section c onsidered
R-
_I_
Figure B.3 Stresses in a conical shell under combined loading
O BSI Standards
COPYRIGHT British 1997 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards B/5
lisue 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex C C.1.2 Factors which irlfluencefutigue life

Assessment of vessels subject to fatigue C.1.2.1 Cyclic service loadings
C.l Introduction During service, pressure vessels may be subjected to
cyclic or repeated stresses (see figure (3.1). Examples
C.l.l General methodology of sources of such stresses include the foliowing:
This annex covers the assessment of vessels subject to a) application or fluctuations of pressure (including
fatigue and contains requirements to ensure that the testing);
vessel is designed to have a fatigue life which is at b) temperature transients;
least as high as the required service life. e) restrictions of expansion or contsaction during
An introduction to fatigue and the factors that can normal temperature variations;
influence fatigue life is given in C.1.2. A detailed d) forced vibrations;
fatigue analysis of a vessel, or a component of a vessel e) variations in external loads.
or bolting, need not be carried out if criteria given
in C.2 are satisfied. if these criteria are not satisfied Fatigue failure can occur during service if the fatigue
life of the material or any stxuctwal detail is exceeded
then a full fatigue assessment shaU be carried out in
accordance with C.3. The basic principles of this
C.1.2.2 Corrosion
assessment and the basis of the associated S N curves
are described in C.3.1. The application of the S N Corrosive conditions are detrimental to the fatigue
curves, together with the mo-g effects of various strength of steels and aluminium alloys. Fatigue c w k s
materials and plate thicknesses, are described in C.3.2. can occur under such conditions at lower levels of
C.3.3 identines the stresses to be used with the S N fluctuating stress than in air and the rate at which they
cuzves. Each curve refers to a group of details, propagate can be higher. The provisions of this annex
identitied as class C, D, E, F, F2,G or W. The class of do not include any allowances for corrosive conditions.
any given detail is chosen using C.3.4.1 to (2.3.4.4. Therefore, where corrosion fatigue is anticipated and
Stresses for the detail are then estimated using C.3.4.5 effective protection from the corrosive medium cannot
and C.3.4.6 and the design life found from figure C.3. be guaranteed, a factor is chosen on the basis of
experience or testing provisions by which the stresses
I
The detailed fatigue assessment of bolts is carried out
in accordance with C.3.6. Recommendations for specified in this annex are reduced to compensate for I
reducing the risk of fatigue at a weld toe by post weld the corrosion. If because of lack of experience it is not
heat tseatment, are given in C.4. certain that the chosen stresses are low enough, it is
advisable that the frequency of inspection is increased
until there is sufficient experience to just@ the factor
used
range,
1 Cycle
4
- w
Figure C.l Illustration of fluctuating stress
O ES1 1997
c/1
S T D - B S I B S 55017-ENGL 1 9 9 7 a l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70768 9 5 4
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, September 1997 Annex C
C.1.2.3 Temperature
There axe no restrictions on the use of the fatigue
design curves for vessels which operate at subzero
temperatures, provided that the material through which
a fatime crack might propagate is shown to be
sufficiently tough to ensure that fracture will not
initiate from a fatigue crack, (see Annex D).
There is a lack of data on the influence of creep on the
elevated temperature fatigue strength of steel and
aluminium,and this annex is therefore only applicable
to vessels which operate at temperatures below the
creep range of the material. Thus, the design curves
are applicable up to 350 "C for ferritic steels, 430 "C for
austenitic stainless steels and 100 "C for aluminium
alloys.
Where a pressure vessel is intended for cyclic
operation within the creep range, the design conditions
shall be agreed between the purchaser and the
manufacturer, having regard to the available service
experience and experimental information.
C/1-A British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

~
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1997 m Lb2Libbï 0670769 Aï0 m
C.1.2.4 Vibration Km is the stress magmfication factor due to

Pulsations of pressure, windexcited vibrations or misalignment;
vibrations transmitted from plant (e.g. rotating or Kt is the elastic stress concentration factor;
reciprocating machinery) may cause vibrations of
piping or local resonance of the shell of a pressure m is the index in equation of fatigue design
vessel. Due to the high number of stress fluctuations curve;
induced by vibration, fatigue cracking can occur at N is the design curve fatigue life (cycles);
welded joints, even at very low stress ranges. is the number of cycles experienced under
ni
S i c e in most cases vibrations cannot be anticipated at stress range Sri
the design stage, it is advisable to make an is the design pressure ( i N/m2);
examination of plant following initial start-up. If P
vibration o c c m which is considered to be excessive, Pr is the pressure fluctuation range;
the source of the vibration shall be isolated, or R is the mean radius of vessel at point
stiffening2?, additional support or damping introduced considered (in mm);
at the location of the local vibration. If vibration
remains and it was not taken into consideration as a snom is the maximum nominal stress in bolt due
source of fatigue loading at the design stage, a to direct tension (in N/mm2);
reevaluation using the detailed assessment (see C.3) Smax is the maxjmum stress at periphery of bolt
shall be performed. due to tension plus bending (in N / m z ) ;
C.1.3 Sgrnbols sb is the design stress value for bolting
material at maximum operating
For the purposes of this annex the following general
temperature, from table 3.81 (in N/mm2);
symbols apply Particular symbols are defined
throughout the text. sr is the stress range used in coqjunction
with fatigue design curves ( i N/mm2);
A is the constant in equation of fatigue a is the coefficient of thermal expansion
design curve; @er O C ) ;
Dmax is the maximum inside diameter of 6 is the total deviation from mean circle at
cylindrical vessel, including corrosion seam weld (see figure C.6) (in mm);
allowance (in mm); V is Poisson’s ratio;
Dmin is the minimum inside diameter of rJ is the direct stress ( i Nhnm2);
cylindrical vessel, including corrosion
allowance (i mm); ‘5 is the shear stress (in N/mz).
AT is the change of temperature difference C.2 Criteria for establishing need for detailed
(in O C ) ;
fatigue analysis
e is the nominal thickness of section being C.2.1 General
considered, including corrosion allowance A detailed figure analysis of the vessel or component
(in m); or bolting shall be carried out in accordance with C.3
E is the modulus of elasticity at the unless the conditions of either C.2.2 or C.2.3 are met,
maximum operating temperature from or if the design is based on previous and satisfactory
table 3.63 (in N / m z ) ; experience of stsictly comparable service.
C.2.2 Limitation on number of stress fluctuations
f is the design stress at maximum operating
temperature, from tables 2.32 to 2.312 Adetailed fatigue analysisneed not be carried out ifthe I
total number of stress fluctuations arising from all
(in N/mm2);
sources does not exceed the following: I
fi
f2
are the principal stresses at point being
considered ( i N/mm2);
6 x 109 re2)O7’(
~-
fI3
E
2.09 x 105
)” (C.1)
f3
where e is the maximum of greatest thichess
ff is the maximum stress actually adopted in or 22 nun, and where, usingff as a design stress, all the
design in place off (in N/mmz); relevant rules of section 3 (e.g. stability criteria need
ke is the mechanical loading, plastic not be considered) and A.3.4.2.4 are satisfied, thermal
correction factor; stress being treated as secondary and not peak.
is the thermal loading, plastic correction NOTE.ff need not be the same asf, the nominal design stress. It
k, may be less (to reduce stresses to increase the fatigue life) or it
factor; may be greater, in order to encompass thermal stresses.
27) Note that if stiffening introduces additional welds, they may need to be assessed using this annex.
Cl2
O BSI 1997
Annex C Issue 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
C.2.3 Simplmed fatigue analgsis using design The class D fatigue design curve or, if the vessel or
curves part under consideration contains any welds other than
The following steps shall be used to carny out a flush-ground butt or flush-ground repair welds, the
simplified fatigue analysis using design curves curve for the lowest class weld detail (see C.3.4.1) to
step 1 be incorporated in the vessel or part under
consideration or the class G curve shali be used. The
Idenbfy the various events to be experienced by the
vessel which will give rise to fluctuating stresses and design curves in, if this is not known, figure C.4 shall I
the frequencies at which they occur, as follows: be used to assess bolts.
ni is the expected number of stress cycles at the C.3 Methods for detailed assessment of fatigue
lowest frequency; life
% is the expected number of stress cycles at the C.3.1 Basic principles of assessment method
second lowest frequency;
n3 is the expected number of stress cycles at the
third lowest frequency;
C.3.1.1 Introduction I
The fatigue strength of a pressure vessel is usually
etc. governed by the faligue strength of details
step2 (e.g. openings, welds, bolting). Even plain material
For each frequency, calculate the maximum stress might contain flush-ground weld repairs and the
range (see C.3.3) due to pressure, due to change of presence of such welds leads to a reduction in the
temperature difference and due to mechanical loading. fatigue strength of the material. In view of this,apart
Add them to obtain Srl,$2, Sr3 etc. The stresses due from bolting and material which is certain to be free of
to all sources of fatigue loading will be included in Sri; welding, the fatigue strength of a vessel is assessed on
Sr2 will include stresses due to ail sources except that the basis of the fatigue behaviour of test specimens
which determines nl; Sr3will include stresses due to containing weld details similar to those under
all sources except those which determine nl and consideration, using S-N curves, in which the
n2 etc.; (note that discrete events, such as a pressure fluctuating or repeated stress range, Sr, is plotted
test, which will never be combined with another load agajnst number of cycles to failure, N. S-N curves
source, are considered separately). An example is based on fatigue test data obtained from plain material,
given in figure (2.2. to be used in conjunction with appropriate stress
* Note that a conservative estimate of the stress range concentration or fatigue stress reduction factors, are
m due to pressure change, pr, is: used to assess bolts and unwelded material.
*
sr= t ) 3 f C.3.1.2 S-N curves for assessment of weld details
The design S-N curves for the assessment of weld
and a conservative estimate of the stress range due to details given in figure (3.3 have been derived from
change of temperature difference AT between Nacent fatigue test data obtained from welded specimens,
points28) is: fabricated to normal standards of workmanship, tested
Sr = 2EaAT K.3) under load-control or, for applied strains exceeding
step3 yield (low-cycle fatigue), under strain control.
Check that the following equation is satisfied: Continuity from the low- to high-cycle regime is
achieved by expressing the low-cycle data in terms of
the pseudo-elastic stress range (i.e.strain range
multiplied by elastic modulus).
Such data are compatible with results obtained from
where pressure cycling tests on actual vessels when they are
expressed in terms of the nominal stress range in the
i = 1,2,3,etc. region of fatigue cracking (see [ip)).
e is the maximum of greatest thickness or 22 mm, The e w e s are used in conjunction with the fluctuating
Ni values are numbers of cycles obtained from the stress range, S,, regardless of applied mean stress, as
appropriate fatigue design curve in figures C.3 illustrated in figure C.l
or C.4, at Sri values calculated in step 2,
d u s t e d where necessary for elastic modulus
by first multiplykg Sr by 2.09 x 1$/E
(see C.3.2.2)
”) Adjacent points are defined as points which are spaced less than the distance 2.5@ apart, where R and e refer to the vessel, nozzle,
flange or other component considered. For temperature differences over greater distances, there is sufficient flexibility between the
points to produce a significant reduction in thermal stress.
”) The numbers in square brackets used in this annex relate to the bibliographic references given in C.6.
O BSI 1997
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Annex C
m
a,
M
E:
Em
$
L3
ci
o)
cci
O
.m
Y
z
'EFi
a,
ci
a,
a
a
s
a,
s
H
M
d
sed
H
O
a,
1
M
.r(
Y
d
I
a,
o)
m
a,
?
L.
O
c I
.-
c
v) o)
m
v)
v)
L
c
2
ccc
v) O
a a,
m
3
c
ä E
R
W
2
5
M
iz
c/4 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 LbZL(bb7 ü b 7 0 7 7 2 385
Annex C Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
5
1O00
200+
R I E=2.09x105N/mm2 4
L 100
L
2 3 45
Figure C.3 Fatigue design S N curves for weld details applicable to

ferritic steels up to and including 350 OC, austenitic stainless steels up to
and including 430 "Cand aluminium alloys up to and including 100 "C
Number of c y c l e s , N
Figure C.4 Fatigue design S-N curves for bolting applicable to ferritic steels
up to and including 350 O C , austenitic stainless steels up t o and
including 430 "Cand aluminium alloys up to and including 100 "C
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards c/5
STD.-BSI BS 5500-ËNGL 1797 I
I Z b 2 4 b b î Ob'70773 211
Regression analysis of the fatigue test data gave the Thus the fatigue Me corresponding to S, is the
mean S-N curve and standard deviation of log N [2,3]. allowable number of cycles at that stress range.
The curves in figure C.3 are two standard deviations If there are two or more types of stress cycle, their
below the mean, representing approximately 97.7 % cumulative effect shall be evaluated and the following
probability of survival. Comparison of these S-N curves condition met:
and fatigue test data obtained from cyclic pressure
tests on welded vessels indicates that they are
n1 + 3 + 3 + ...etc. =C,ni Ii
conservative, but not excessively so [i].
Ni N2 N3
I The design procedures given in C.2 and C.3.4
incorporate S-N curves three standard deviations
where ni are the numbers of times that each type of
(Ca
stress cycle, Sri,will occur during the life of the vessel
below the mean, representing approximately 99.8 % and Ni are the fatigue lives corresponding to Sri
probability of survival. obtained from the appropriate fatigue design curve.
The S-N curves in figure C.3 have the form: A cycle counting method is required to take account of
SrmN = A (C.5) either of the following.
where m andA are constants whose values are given a) The superposition of cycles from various sources
in table C.l. Different values apply for lives up to lo7 of loading which produce a total stress range greater
cycles and for above lo7 cycles. than the stress ranges resuiting from individual
C.3.1.3 S-N curves for steeì bolting sources.
The S-N curves for steel bolting are given in figure C.4. b) When a stress variation does not start and finish
They have been derived from strain cycling fatigue test at the same level.
data obtained from smooth machined unwelded This cycle counting method shall be used to determine
specimens, expressed in terms of strain range effective stress cycles and hence the values of S,.
multiplied by elastic modulus. The curves represent the and nj. The rainfiow or reservoir methods descrihed in
fatigue strengths of the materials and in order to use BS 5400 : Part 10 Section 9.33 and annex B
them to assess the fatigue lives of regions of stress respectively, are acceptable methods.
concentration in bolts, appropriate stress concentration C.3.2.2 Eflect of material
or fatigue strength reduction factors shall be included These provisions are applicable to aii the materials
when calculating the peak stress range (e.g. [4] described in section 2. However, since the fatigue lives
and [51). of weld details are independent of material yield
A design margin has been included when deriving the strength, for a given detail, the same set of S-N curves
design curves from the test data. The curves have also (see figure C.4) is applicable for all steels (ferritic and
been musted, where necessary, to incorporate the austenitic) and for all alumjnium alloys. The S-N
maximum effects of mean stress. Thus the curves are curves in figures C.4 and C.5 are actually related to
used in conjunction with peak stress range regardes material with a modulus of elasticity
of applied mean ctress. of 2.09 X lo5 N/mm2, which is the typical value for
ferritic steel at ambient temperature. When other
C.3.2 Application of S-N curves materials and/or temperaimes are being considered,
c.3.2.1 llJpes of operational cgck the modulus of elasticityE (in N/mm2), the dowable
The fatigue design curves are directly applicable (&er stress range Srfor a particular life and the stress range
any necessary adjustment for elastic modulus and obtained from the appropriate design curve at the
thickness, see C.3.2.2 and C.3.2.3) in circumstances in same life, S, are related as follows:
which the operational cycle being considered is the 5- E (C.7)
only one which produces significant fatigue loading. s - 2.09 x 105
Class Constants of S-N curve Stress range at N

for N lo' cycles for N > lo7 cycles = io7 cycles
m A 1) m A') N/mm2
C2) 3.5 4.22 x 1013 5.5 2.55 x 1017 78
D 3 1.52 X 10l2 5 4.18 x 1015 53
E 3 1.04 x 1012 5 2.29 x 1015 47
F 3 6.33 X 10l1 5 1.02 x 1015 40
€9 3 4.31 X 10l1 5 5.25 x 1014 35
G 3 2.50 X 10" 5 2.05 x 1014 29
W 3 1.58 X 10l1 5 9.77 x 1013 25
C/6 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

~~ ~~~ -
STDSBSI B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 L b 2 4 b b 9 üb70774 158 I

a) Coplanar embedded slag inclusions
+ 1,
i f S i 11
-
2
effective defect length = I , + 1, + S
i f s , 5 ?and Sz 5 -tl + t z
2
effective defect length = I , + 6 + S
I i
b) Effective length of multiple slag inclusions in the same or different planes

Figure C.6 Interaction criteria for assessing slag inclusions
C.3.2.3 Effect of plate t h k k m s The fatigue design curves for bolting do not take
The fatigue strengths of members containing surface account of stress concentrations in the bolt and
welds can decrease with increase in plate thickness. therefore the stress range shall include a stress
The S-N curves apply for section thicknesses, e, up concentsation factor or fatigue strength reduction
to 22 mm, but for e > 22 mm, stress ranges obtained factor (see C.3.3.4).
from the design curves for the details indicated in C.3.3.2 Stress in parmt plate
table C.2 should be multiplied by the factor (22/e)%. In
all cases, fatigue cracking from the weld toe into a In the case of parent plate stresses, Sr is the maximum
stressed member is being considered and e is the range of direct or normal stsess. S, shall be determined
thickness of that member. at aii points where there is a risk of fatigue cracking
I Taking different materials and plate thicknesses into

account, equation (C.5) can therefore be modified to
the following:
(see C.3.6.1 for individual weld details). In some
circumstances, not ali stress directions need be
considered (see C.3.4.5.1).
22um/4 s, x 2.09 x 105 Where stress cycling is due to the application and
.='(e) ( E removal of a single load, Sr is the same as the
mcurimum principal stress caused by the load acting
C.3.3 Stresses to be used withfatigue design S-N alone.
curves Where stress cycling is due to more than one load
source but the directions of principal stresses remain
I plus
E ? g z & s r n e n t shall be based on the primary
secondary stress categoy, as defined in A.3.4.2.4.
fixed, Sr is the maximum range through which any of
the principal stresses changes. That is the greatest of:
Direct stress is used rather than the stress intensity
(see A.3.4.1.1) used elsewhere in this British Standard. f i m a x - fimin
The fulì stress range is used, regardess of applied or k m a x -f2min
effective mean stress. The design S N curves already f3max -f3min
take account of peak stresses and residual stresses. where .fi,fi and f3 are the three principal stresses.
Post-weid heat treatment does not influence the design Rnsile stresses are considered positive and
stresses. compressive stresses are considered negative. in
See C.3.4.6 for guidance on the calculation of stress at practice, the through-thickness component,f3, is rarely
gross sîructurd discontinuities and due to deviations relevant and it can usually be ignored. This is certainly
from design shape. true for assessments at welded joints.
O BSI 1997 Cf7

S T D - B S I BS 5 5 0 D - E N G L 1997 M 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70775 0 9 4 M
Table C.2 Classification of weld details

a) Seam welds
NOTE. The highest fatigue strength transversely loaded seams are full penetration butt welds made from both sides or from one side
using consumable inserts or a temporary non-fusible backing medium. Then, in the absence of significant defects, the fatigue strength
of the joint depends on the overfill shape. In general, the overfill profile requirement for class D should be achieved with shop welds
made in the flat position. However, special care may be needed in the case of submerged arc welding since it is known that very poor
profiles can be obtained using this process.
There is a reduction in the fatigue strength of transverse butt welds if they are made from one side only, unless a joint resembling one
made from both sides can be achieved. This is possible using special consumable inserts or a temporary non-fusible backing medium
However, in all cases the weld should be inspected to ensure that full penetration and a satisfactory overfill shape have been achieved
on the inside of the joint.
As far as seam welds under longitudinal loading are concerned, there is an incentive to avoid the introduction of any discontinuous
welds. In the absence of signifcant defects, their fatigue strengths are oniy reduced if they contain discontinuous welds.
Joint type For stresses acting essentiallv alone the weld
Sketch of detail Class Comments
-
Full penetration butt D Weld shall be proved
weld flush ground free from
surfacebreakhg
defects and significant
subsurface defects
(see C.3.4.2) by
nondestructive testing
Fatigue cracks usually initiate at weld flaws

-
Full penelmtion butt D Weld shall be proved
weld made from both free from significant
sides or from one side defects (see C.3.4.2) bj
on to consumable nondestructive testing
insert or temporary
non-fusible backing
-
welds made from one free from significant
side without baclung defects (see C3.4.2) b)
nondestnictive testing
----
-
weld flush ground free from
surface-breahg
Fatigue cracks usually initiate at weld flaws defects and significant
subsurface defects
(see C.3.4.2) by
C/8
O BSI 1997
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1797 w L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70776 T20
Annex C Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Table C.2 Classification of weld details (continued)

a) Seam welds
Joint type For stresses acting essentially normal to the weld
Sketch of detail 3lass Comments
Fullpenetration butt Weld shall be proved
weld made from both free from signincant
sides or from one side defects (see C.3.4.2) bj
on to consumable c nondestructive testing
insert or temporary and, for welds made
non-fusible backing from one side, full
penetration
Overfill profile 6 2 150'
Overfill profile û < 150"
&U penetration butt Not recommended for

welds made from one
side without backing
-1- fatigue loaded joints
since fatigue life
criticaliy dependent on
root condition. If full
penetration can be
assured, then class E.
Weld shall be proved
free from significant
defects (see C.3.4.2) b
- nondestructive t e s w
Full penetration butt
welds made from one D Backing strip shall be
side on to permanent continuous and, if
backing attached by welding,
tack welds shall be
ground out or buried ii
main butt weld, or
continuous fillet welds
shall be used
Weld shall be proved
defects (see C.3.4.2) b
E Backing strip attached
with discontinuous
fillet weld
D Joggle joint
Weld shalì be proved

free from sgmfkant
defects (see C.3.4.2) b:
O BSI 1997 c/9

S T D . B E BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L
~~
1777 m L b 2 4 b b 7 ~ 0 b 7 0 7 7 79 b 7 = ~
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex C

a) Seam welds
Joint type For stresses acting essentially normal to the weld -
Sketch of detail - Comments
class
Fillet welded lap joint D Welds shall be
continuous
Based on stress range
on cross section of
weld
Full penetration butt F Weld shall be proved

welds made from one free from significant
side on to permanent defects (see C.3.4.2) by
backing nondestructive testing
F Weld shall be proved
defects (see C.3.4.2) by
-
Fillet welded lap joint F2 Refers to fatigue failure
in shell from weld toe
W Refers to fatigue failure
in weld; based on
stress range in weld
throat
CAO O BSI 1997

=
~ ~ ~ ~-
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 q b b S üb70778 8T3
Annex C Issue 1,Jan- 1997 BS 5500 : 1997

b) Branch connections
NOTE. There are three main sites for fatigue cracking in branch connections, the weld toes in the shell and the branch and the crotch
comer, although five should be considered as possible sites. in every case, account should be taken of the stress concentration in the
- of Dotential fatigue cracking due to the gross structural discontinuity introduced by the nozzle.
region I
-
Joint type Sketch of detail Class Comments
Crotch corner D Can be treated as
class C provided region
is free from welds
(including flmh-@ûund
repairs)
L C r a c k s radiate from corner into plate-

sketches show plane of crack
Weld toe in sheii F Class can be increased

if weld toe dressed
accoràhg to procedure
in c.4
Thickness correction
applicable (see C.3.2.32
e being the shell
thickness
-
Weld toe in branch F Class can be increased
if weld toe dressed
according to procedure
in c.4
applicable (see C.3.2.3:
e being the branch
thickness
O BSI 1997
CA1
~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 ILb24hbS Ob70777 7 3 T I
BS 6500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex C

b)Branch connections
~
Joint type Sketch of detail Comments

Weld metai Based on
@
stressed stress range
along its on
length cross-section
of weld
J
Cracks radiate from root

or defect through weld
Fillet or partid penetration welds
Full penetration butt weld

Weld metai- Based on
stressed jtsess range
normal to ln weld
its lengîh hOat
Cl12
O BSI 1997
~~ ~
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 M 1 6 2 4 b b S 0 b 7 0 7 8 0 4 5 1 I
Annex C Issue 1,January 1997 BS 6600 : 1997

c ) Attachments
NOTE. The most likely potential mode of fatigue failure at a welded attachment is from the weid toe, or the weld end in the case of
welds lying essentially parallel to the direction of applied stress, into the stressed member. Transverse attachments welded only on one
side may fail by fatigue crack propagation from the weid root, also into the stressed member. Such cracks are virtually undetectable
and therefore this practice is not recommended. The fatigue strength of members with edge attachments is lower than that of
members with only surface attachments; to allow for the accidental occurrence of edge welds, surface attachments less than 10 mm
from an edge are assumed to be on the edge.
Fatigue design is based on the normal strength in the stressed member in the vicinity of the attachment. The thickness correction
(see C.3.2.3) is applicable to all surface attachment details, e being the thickness of the stressed member.
Joint type For stresses acting essentially along the weld -
3ketch of detail class Comments
Attachment of any F Lr160mmeàge
shape with an edge distance 2 10 mm
fillet or bevel - butt F2 L > 160 mm edge
welded to the surface distance 2 10 mm
of a stressed member,
with welds continuous G L > 160 mm edge
around the ends or not distance E 10 mm
applicable (see C.3.2.3)
1111111111111111111 1111111 I111111111111

rc- 1 I / --lc
-
Attachment of any F L 5 160 mm,
shape with surface in \ \ Ws55mm
contact with stressed edge distance 2 10 mm
member, with welds \\ F2 L > 160 mm,
continuous around WI55mm
ends or not edge distance 2 10 mm
G L>160mm,W>55mrr
edge distance < 10 mm
Edge distance Thickness correction
-
Attachment of any G Thickness correction
shape on or does not apply
within 1Omm of the
edge of a stressed
member
O BSI 1997 CA3

BS 5MM : 1997 Issue 1,Jayluary 1997 Annex C

c ) Attachments (continued)
Joint type For stresses acting essentially normal to the weld
Sketch of detail Class Comments
Attachment of any F t555mm
shape with an edge edge distance 2 10 mm
ñüet or bevel, butt F2 t>55mm
welded to the surface edge distance 2 10 mm
of a stressed member,
with welds continuous G edge distance < 10 mm
around the ends or not
+ fi- -
Attachment of any F L I160 mm,
shape with surface in WI55mm
contact with stressed edge distance 2 10 mm
member, with welds F2 L > 160 mm,
continuous around w555mm
ends or not edge distance 2 10 mm
Edge distance G L > 160 mm,
W > 55 mm edge
distance < 10 mm
- applicable (see C.3.2.3)
CA4 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

-
STD.BS1 BS 55OU-ENGL 1797 L b Z q b b S Ob70782 22q
Annex C h e 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997

d) Supports
The classifications which refer to potential fatigue faiiure from the weld toe can be increased by one class, if
the weld toes are dressed (see C.4). However, the class for potential fatigue failure through the weld throat is
not affected. Therefore, for toe dressing to be effective, fuli penetration welds should be wed for directly
loaded welds.
Joint type Sketch of detail class Comments
-
Support on either F2 Refers to fatigue failure from
,,-Welded with f a:
horizontal or vertical G
vessel to vessel ai b:
Thickness correction applicable
(see C.3.2.3)
C:
W Refers to fatigue failure in weld;

based on stress range in weld throat
~ -
'Ilwuiion support a: F2 Refers to fatigue
b G failure from weld toe
Thickness correction applicable
(see C.3.2.3)
C:
W Refers to fatigue failure in weld

Saddle support G Thickna correction applicable

(see C.3.2.3)
Welded with fillet weld

to vessel all round
O BSI 1997 Ci15

STD.BSI B S 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1 7 7 7 l b 2 L i b b 7 D b 7 0 7 8 3 1bO
BS 6 5 0 : 199'7 h u e 2, September 1997 Annex C

e) Flanges
The classifications which refer to potential fatigue failure from the weld toe can be increased by one class, if
the weld toes are dressed (see C.4). However, the class for potential fatigue failure through the weld throat is
not affected. Therefore, for toe dressing to be effective, full penetration
- welds should be used.
Joint type Sketch of detail Class Comments
Fuli penetsation butt E Refers to fatigue failure from weld
weld made from both toe
Sides
Fillet welded from a: E

2 Refers to fatigue failure from weld
both sides toe. Thickness correction
b: W Refers to fatigue failure in weld;

'b based on stress range in weld at
throat
Welded from both a: F2 Refers to fatigue failure from weld
sides toe. Thickness correction
b: W Refers to fatigue failure in weld;

'b
Filiet welded from a: F2 Refers to fatigue failure from weld

both sides toe. Thickness correction applicable
(see C.3.2.3)
b: W Refers to fatigue fdure in weld

'b based on stress range in weld throat
Welded from both a. F2 Refers to fatigue failure from weld

sides toe. Thickness correction applicable
(see C.3.2.3)
b: W Refers to fatigue failure in weld

b
-
CA6
O BSI 1997
When the principal stress directions change during Where cychg is of such a complex nature that it is
I ascycling between two load conditions, Sr is calculated
follows. Determine the six stress components (three
not clear which two load conditions will result in the
greatest values of S, then the vector difference shall be
direct and three shear) at each load condition with found for all pairs of extreme load conditions.
reference to some fEed axes. For each stress Aite&vely, it will always be safe to assume:
component, calculate the algebraic difference between
the stresses. Calculate principal stresses from the sr = .i(umax - urnin)’ + (tlrnax - ?Imin)’ + (rhax - 7miinY (C. 10)
resulting stress differences in the usual way S, is the where q and z2 are the two components of shear
numerically greatest of these principal stresses. StseSS.
Where cycling is of such a complex nature that it is C.3.3.4 Stress in bolts
not clear which two load conditions will result in the In the case of bolts, S, is the maximum stress range at
greatest value of S,, they shall be established by the thread roots arising from direct tensile and bending
carrying out the above procedure for all pairs of load loads. S; is determined by multiplying the nominal
conditions. Aiternaîively, it wiii always be safe to stress on the core cross-sectional area, determined on
assume that S, is the difference between the the basis of the minor diameter, by an appropriate
algebraically greatest and smallest principal stresses stress concentration factor or fatigue strength
occurring during the whole cycle regardless of their reduction factor (e.g. [4] and [5]).
directions.
Unless it can be shown by reference to test data that a
C.3.3.3 Stress in weld metal lower value is valid, the fatigue strength reduction
In the case of weld metal in fillet or partial penetsation factor for threads shall not be less than 4.
joints,30) S, is the maximum range of stress across the
effective weld throat, calculated as the load carried by
C.3.3.6 Elastic-plustic conditions
the weld divided by the weld throat area, with the if the calculated pseudo-elastic stress range exceeds
assumption that none of the load is carried by bearing twice the yield strength of the material under
between the components joined. Since this can be consideration 0.e. Ao > me),it shall be increased by
expressed as a vector sum, Sr is the scalar value of the applying a plasticity correction factor, as follows (these
greatest vector difference between different stress correction factors are discussed in [9]):
conditions during the cycle. C.3.3.6.I Mecluxnicd loading
Where stress cycling is due to the application and For mechanical loading, the corrected stress range is
removal of a single load, keAq where:
sr= (C.9) for 2 5 AdR, 5 3,
where ke = Mi [ (Ad2Re) - l]0.5 +1 (C. 11)
o is the direct stress on weld throat; or for AdRe > 3
ke = Mz + IW3AdRe (C.12)
z is the shear stress on weld throat.
where M I , M2 and M3 are given in table C.3.
Where stress cyciing is due to more than one load C.3.3.6.2 l%errnd loading
source, but the directions of the stresses remain fixed,
Sr is based on the maximum range of the load on the
For thermal loading, the corrected stress range is
weld. &Ao, where:
Where the direction of the stress vector on the weld 0.7
&= (C. 13)
throat changes during a cycle between two extreme 0.4
0.5 + -
load conditions, Sr is the magnitude of the vector AdRe
difference between the two stress vectors.
Table C.3 Values of M I , M2 and IW3

Steel I Ml I M2 M3
Ferritic and austenitic, 0.443 0.823 o. 164
R,5 500 N/mm2
Ferritic, %
= 500 N/mm2 to 0.318 + (2.5R,/104) 0.998 + (3.5&/1@) 0.077 + (1.73R,/104)
800 N/mm
Ferritic, R, = 800 N/mm2 to 0.518 0.718 0.216
1000 N / m 2
30) Not applicable to butt joints (e.g. seams).
O BSI 1997
CA7
~~ ~
~
S T D - B S I B S 55110-ENGL 1797 L b 2 4 b b 7 üb70785 T33

C.3.3.6.3 Combimd ìaading Parts of the vessel that are unwelded shall be
If stressing is due to a combination of mechanical and considered as Class D on the basis that repair welds
thermal loads, the mechanical and thermal stresses may be required. Class C only relates to parts which
shall be separated and the correction factors ke and k, are certain to be free from welding.
calculated. The corrected stress range is then the sum C.3.4.2 Assessrnent of weid defects
of the corrected stresses due to mechanical and Fatigue cracks can propagake from weld defects and
thermal loading. the fatigue life of a joint may be limited by this mode
C.3.3.6.4 Elastic-phtic anaiysis of failure. This is true even for defects which are
If the total strain range A E (elastic-plastic)
~ due to any regarded as acceptable in table 5.7-1 and table 2 of the
source of load& is known from theoretical or aluminium supplement.
experimental stress analysis,correction for plasticity is Planar defects (e.g. unwelded land in partiai
not required and penetration welds, lack of fusion) are particularly
Au = E A q (C.14) severe but non-planar defects (e.g. slag inclusions,
porosity) may also be significant.
C.3.4 Detailed assessment of welded and The fatigue lives of defects or the tolerable defects for
unwelded components a given fatigue life shall be assessed using an I
C.3.4.1 Classification established defect assessment method such as that in
For the purpose of fatigue assessment, each part of a PD 6493. The fatigue strengths of defects are expressed
constsuctional detail which is subject to fluctuating in terms of quality categories, Ql to QlO, and a
stress is placed into one of six classes, designated D, E, design S N curve is assigned to each level. The S N
F, F2, G and W, as in BS 5400 : Part 10 corresponding to curves for categories Ql to Q6 (only those described as
the six fatigue design curves in figure C.3. The being applicable to as-welded joints shall be used)
classifications are described in table C.2. correspond to the classes D, E, F, F2,G and W fatigue
design curves in figure C.4. Thus, the fatigue strengths
The classification of each part of a detail depends of defects can be readily compared with those of other
upon the following: weld details.
a) the direction of the fluctuating stress relative to NOTE. The S-N curves in PD 6493 differ from those in the present
the detail; procedures in the high-cycle regime (N > lo7 cycles) in that they
include a cut-off stress at N = 2 X lo7 cycles. They should be
b) the location of possible crack initiation at the modified to be consistent with the present procedures by
detail; extrapolating them beyond lo7 cycles at a slope of m = 5.
c) the geometxid arrangement and proportions of Acceptance levels for embedded non-planar defects axe
the detail; summarized in table C.4. If there is any doubt that a
d) the methods of manufactwe and inspection. defect is non-planar or that it is embedded, it shall be
Thus, more than one class may apply for a given weld treated as being planar. Multiple slag inclusions on the
detail, since the class refers to one particular mode of same cross section (see figure C.5a) which are closer
fatigue failure, but there are a number of ways in than 1.25 times the height of the larger defect, shall
which a weld detail might fail. The sketches in also be treated as a planar defect. For other cases of
table C.2 indicate the potential mode of fatigue multiple slag inclusions it may be necessary to assume
cracking considered and the position and direction of defect interaction and to determine an effective defect
the relevant fluctuating stress. length, as indicated in figure C.5b.
Load-carrying fillet or partial penetration joints shall be Planar defects can be assessed using fracAure
assessed as class F2,corresponding to fatigue failure mechanics. PD 6493 describes the general procedure
from the weld toe in the stressed piate, and class W, and also gives a simplified method of assessment
corresponding to fatigue failure from the weld root in which is related to the quality categories.
the weld. The possibility of failure from the weld root C.3.4.3 change of chsification
is avoided if the effective weld throat thickness is such
that the stress range in the weld (see C.3.3.3) does not C.3.4.3.1 General
exceed 0.7 times the stress range in plate. It should be By agreement with the purchaser, the classification of
noted that conformity to the requirements in section 3 some weld details may be raised if the conditions
relating to weld size does not necessarily meet this in C.3.4.3.2 or C.3.4.3.3 are met.
criterion.
Cl18
O BSI 1997
Annex C Issue 2, September 1997 BS 5500: 1997
Table C.4 Weld defect acc ptance levels

~~
Class required Maximum length of slag inclusion (in mm) Maximum 95 of area
porosity on radiograph
97.72 % survival probability 99.86 % survival probability
Q1@> 2.5 2
Q2 (E> 4 2.5
Q3O 10 5
Q4 (FZ) 35 9
Q5(GI No limit 66
Q6 (W) and lower No limit No limit 5
NOTE 1. Tungsten inclusions in aluminium alloy welds do not affect fatigue behaviour and need not be considered as defects from the
fatigue viewpoint.
NOTE 2. For assessing porosity, the area of radiograph used should be the length of the weid affected by porosity multiplied by the
maximum width of weld.
NOTE 3. Individual pores are limited to a diameter of e/4 or 6 mm, whichever is the lesser.
NOTE 4. The above levels can be relaxed in the case of steel welds which have been thennallv stress relieved, as described in PD 6493.
C.3.4.3.2 Detailed stress aruùgsis Previously buried defects revealed by dressing, which
If, as a result of the stress analysis method used, the could limit the fatigue strength of the joint, should be
calculated or measured stsess range adJacent to a assessed (see C.3.4.2).
weld31) in class F, F2 or G incorporates the effect of C.3.4.4 UnClassijTed details
the stress concentration due to the joint geometry Except for partial penetration butt welds, which are
(see C.3.4.6), class E may be assumed. not classified, details not covered fully in table C.2
C.3.4.3.3 Weid toe dressing shall be treated as class G, or class W for loadcarrying
The classification of fillet welds may, where indicated weld metal.
in table C.2, be raked when dressing of the toes is NOTE. A higher classification could be used if superior resistance
carried out. When joints are treated in accordance to fatigue is proved by special tests or reference to relevant test
I with C.4, the S N curve two classes higher than that
results.
I for the untreated weld may be used 161. To justify a particular design S-N curve, tests shall be
performed at stress levels which result in lives of no
No benefit in terms of improved fatigue strength is more than 2 X 106 cycles, and the geometric mean
allowed for the dressing or flush-ginding of seam fatigue life obtained from tests performed at a
welds, except that joints designed as class D which fail particular stress range shall be not less than the life
to meet the weld overfdl shape requirement (see from the S N cume at that stress range multiplied by
table C.2) can be upgraded to class D by dressing the the factor F from table C.5.
weld flush with the parent metal and the detrimental
effect of misalignment (see C.3.4.6.4) can, to some 1 Table C.6 Fatigue test factor F -1
extent, be alleviated by weld toe dressing. A fatigue
Number of tests r’
strength higher than class D cannot be justified
because of the possible presence of defects which are 1 5
too small for reiiable detection by nondestsuctive 2 4.2
inspection methods but are of sufficient size to reduce
the fatigue strength of the joint. 3 3.9
4 3.75
10 3.5
31) If stresses are determined from stress analysis or strain measurements on prototype or actual vessels, the aim should be to
determine the stress close to the detail (e.g. crotch corner, weid toe) but exclucimg its stress concentration, equivalent to the
primary + secondary stress of annex A. In general, a suitable stress is that which would be measured over a gauge length of 3 mm
to 5 mm starting 0.3e from the detail, where e is the plate thickness, but no more than 5 mm. A similar criterion should be appìietl 11’use
is made of published data obtained for geometrically similar vessels.
O BSI 1997
CA9
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 E L b 2 q b b S 0 b 7 0 7 8 7 BOb E
C.3.4.6 Stresses to be considered C.3.4.6.2 Noz&

C.3.4.6.1 classesD to G Three possible stress concentrations due to stnictural
The fatigue lives of weld details which fall into discontinuities in nozzles shall be considered when
classes D to G are expressed in terms of the primary calculating s,.
plus secondary stress range on the parent metal a) Crotch comer. The class D, or exceptionally
surface a x e n t to the weld (see C.3.3.2), ignoring any class C (see C.3.4.1), fatigue design curve shall be
sires concentration due to the welded joint itself but used in conjunction with the maximum
including the effect of other stress concentrations circumferential (with respect to the nozzle) &ess
(see C.3.4.6). range at the crotch corner. Km is usually referred to
Short or discontinuous welds, where the relevant the nominal hoop range in the shell
potential failure mode is by fatigue cracking from the b) Weld toe in shü. The class F or F2 fatigue design
weld end or weld toe shall be assessed on the basis of curve, depending on the weld detail, shall be used in
the maximum principal stress range Sr,and classified conjunction with the maximum stress range in the
on the basis that the weld is oriented in the least shell at the welded toe. Consideration shall be given
favourable direction with respect to S,. to stresses in the shell acting in all radial directions
Continuous welds (e.g. seams, ring stiffener welds) may with respect to the nozzle in order to determine the
be treated differently if the maximum principal stress maximum stress at the weld toe. The possibility of
range acts in a direction which is within 30" of the stresses arising in the shell as a result of mechanical
direction of the weld. Then the weld can be classified loading on the nozzle as well as pressure loading
as being pasallel to the direction of loading with shall be considered.
respect to the maximum principal stress range and e) Weld toe in branch. This region shall be treated as
normal to the loading direction with respect to the described in item b), except that the maximum
minimum principal stress range (see C.3.3.2). stress range in the branch shall be used. Again, the
C.3.4.6.2 class W possibility of mechanical as well as pressure loading
shall be considered.
The fatigue lives of class W details are expressed in
terms of the maximum stress range on the weld throat C.3.4.6.3 Supports and attachments
(see C.3.3.3). Local concentrations of stress can arise in the shell
where it is supported (see annex G) or loaded through
C3.4.6 Estimation of stress an attachment. The appropriate fatigue design curve
C.3.4.6.1 Generai shall be used in codunction with the maximum stress
In arriving at the primary plus secondary stresses range in the shell at the weld toe determined using the
required for use in this annex, it is necessary to take same criteria as for nozzle weld toes in the shell
fuli account of stnictural discontinuities (e.g. nozzles) (see C.3.4.6.2). Annex G stresses may be used directly
but also some sources of stress not normally to calculate the stress range.
considered, in particular: C.3.4.6.4 Deviations from design shape
a) discontinuities such as cylinder to end junctions, Local increases in pressure-induced stresses in sheiis
changes in thickness and welded-on rings; which arise as a result of secondary bending stresses
b) deviations from the intended shape such as due to discontinuities and depastures from the
ovalis; peaking and mismatched welds, intended shape32)shall be taken into account when
c) temperature gradients. calculating pressure stresses for the fatigue assessment
of the shell at seams and attachments, even if the
Methods in this British Standard and in the published allowable assembly tolerances in 4.2.3 are met.
iiterature (e.g. 151, [7] and [SI)give the required stresses
for many geometries, or at least enable a conservative
assessment to be made.
Departures from intended shape include misalignment of abutting plates, an angle between abutting plates, roof-topping where there
is a flat at the end of each plate, weld peaking and ovality, as illustrated in figure C.6. In most cases these features cause local increases
in the hoop stress in the shell but deviations from design shape associated with circumferential seams cause increases in the
longitudinal stress.
When the stresses greater than yield arise as a result of deviation from design shape, the pressure test will lead to an improvement in
the shape of the vessel due to plastic deformation. It may be noted that vessels made from materials with yield strengths considerably
higher than the specified minimum are less likely to benefit in this way. The beneficial effect of the pressure test on the shape of the
vessel cannot be predicted and therefore if some benefit is required in order to satisfy the fatigue analysis, it is necessary to measure
the actual shape after pressure test. Similarly, strain measurements to determine the actual stress concentration factor should be made
after pressure test.
CEO
O BSI 1997
~~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 D L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70788 7 4 2

Annex C h e 2, September 1997 BS 5500: 1997
In the absence of detailed stress analysis of the A3 caters for poor angular alignment of plates in
particular case being considered, a conservative spheres and is given by
estimate of the effect of the additional bending stresses
due to departure from design shape may be obtained
by multiplying the appropriate nominal stress range by
the following stress magnification factor, K,: where
K,= 1 + A l +A2 +A3 +A4 (C. 15)
where 8 is the mgle between tangents to the
AI caters for misa&nmentand is given by: plates, at the seam (in degrees);
A4 caters for local peaking and is given by
66
A4 =-
where e
is the offset of centselines of where
4
abutting plates; 6 is the deviation from true fonn, other
el Ie2 where e1 and e2 are the thicknesses than above;
of two abutting plates; and other terms are defined in figure C.6.
n is 1.5 for a sphere or In the case of seam welds, the incorporation of a
circumferential seam in a cylinder tmnsition taper at thickness changes to confonn
and 0.6 for a longitudinal seam in a to 4.2.3 does not affect the value ofAl.
cylinder. Equation (C.15) will overestimate K, if local bending is
A2 caters for ovality in cylinders and is given by: restricted, for example in the case of short shape
defects, when there will be a stress redistribution
around the defect, or for defects in short cylindrical
vessels, which can get support from the ends, or when
adjacent attachments stiffen the shell. Also, ovality in
I
where long cylinders may not cause the estimated stresses
because of the shape improvement due to elastic
D is the mean diameter. deformation under pressure.
a) Axial misalignment b) Ovahty
c) Angular misalignment
Figure (3.6 Deviations from design shape at seam welds
O BSI 1997 Ca1

~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70787 b 8 9 m

By agreement with the purchaser, the effect of c) Threads shall be of a T' type, having a thread root
departures from design shape for which Km I2 may radius not less than 0.075 mm.
be ignored if the weld toes are burr machined using
I the procedure given in CA.
d) The ratio of fillet radius, at the end of the shank,
to shank diameter shall be at least 0.060.
C.3.6 Detailed fatigue assessment of bolts e) A fatigue strength reduction factor of at least 4
C.3.6.1 Mbmurn stresses in bolts shall be used in the fatigue analysis.
Service stresses in bolts arising from the combination C.3.6.6 Use of fatigue design curves
of such factors as preload, pressure and differential
thermal expansion may be higher than S b values in The method of analysis is as described in C.3.2.
table 3.81. However, in bolts subjected to fluctuating C.4 Recommendations for reducing risk of
stress they shall be limited as follows. fatigue at weld toe
a) The maximum nominal stress due to direct Fatigue cracks readily initiate at weld toes on stressed
tension, averaged across the bolt cross-section and members, partly because of the stress concentration
neglecting stress concentsation, shall not exceed Wb.
resulting from the weld shape but chiefly because of
b) The maximum stress S,, at the periphery of the the presence of inherent flaws. For members at
bolt cross-section resulting from direct tension plus least 13 mm thick, the fatigue lives of welds which
bending and neglecting stress concentrations shall might fail from the toe may be increased by locally
not exceed B b . A lower value may be applicable for machining and grinding the toe to reduce the stress
high strength steel bolts. concentration and remove the inherent flaws, as
C.3.6.2 W&ing of bolts follows.
These rules are not applicable if any bolts which will The weld toe is machined using a rotating conical
be subjected to fluctuating stress are welded. tungskn-carbide machining burr. In order to ensure
C.3.6.3 Lower strength category bolts that weld toe flaws are removed, the required depth of
The lower curve in figure C.4 is applicable to bolts in machining is 0.5 mm below any undercut (see
any of the steels and aluminium alloys in table 3.81. figure C.7). In addition,the root radius of the resulting
C.3.6.4 Higher strength categGry bolts weld toe groove, r, shall meet the following:
The upper curve in figure C.4 is applicable oniy to r 2 0.25e 2 4d.The area should be inspected using
bolts in high strength low alloy steels satisfying all of dye penetrant or magnetic particles. Such inspection
the following conditions. is facilitated if the machined toe is ground using emery
bands, a measure which is also beneficial ñ-om the
a) The steel shall have the following mechanical
properties, determined in accordance with fatigue viewpoint. The resulting profile should produce
BS EN 10002-1. a smooth transition from the plate surface to the weld,
as shown in figure C.7, with all machine marks lying
Yield strength: 510 N/mm2 to 980 N / m 2 transverse to the weld toe.
Ultimate tensile 690 Nhnm2 to 1130 N/mm2 The above technique is particularly suitable for treating
strength: weld toes. The ends of short or discontinuous welds
Minimum elongation 12 % on a gauge length can only be treated effectively if the weld can be
at fracture: of 5 . 6 s carried around the ends of the attachment member to
provide a distinct weld toe.
(see table 3 of BS 4882 : 1973 for mechanical
properties of bolting steels in table 3.81).
b) S,, shall not exceed 2.751, (the horn IB b limit
is unchanged).
Stressed plate
-!i----
L
I
d = depth of grinding below undercut = 0.5 mm

I
I Figure C.7 Weld toe dressing
c/22
O BSI 1997
Annex C Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Toe dressing only affects the fatigue strength of a

welded joint from the point of view of failure from the
weld toe. The possibility of fatigue crack initiation
from other features of the weld (e.g. weld root in fiilet
welds) shall not be overlooked.
Weld toe dressing cannot be assumed to be effective in
the presence of a corrosive environment which can
cause pitting in the dressed region.
C.6 Bibliography
1. HARRISON, J.D. and MADDOX, SJ. A critical
examination of rules for the design of pressure vessels
subject to fatigue loading. Froc. 4th Int. Con$ on
Pressure W s e l Tmhrwbgy, LMeckE., 1980
(or IIW Doc. Xm - 941430,1980).
2. GURNEY, T.R. and MADDOX, S.J. A reanalysis of
fatigue data for welded joints in steel. Weìding
Research Int. 3, (4), 1972.
3. GURNEY, T.R. Fatigue of welded structures.
Cambridge University Press, 1979.
4. PETERSON, R.E. Stress concentrationfactors.
J. Wiley and Sons, New York, 1974.
5. HEYWOOD, R.B. Designing against fatigue.
Chapman and Hail, 1962.
6. BOOTH, G.S. Improving the fatigue strength of
welded joints by grinding - techniques and benefits.
Metal ConsemLCtion, 18 (7), 1986,432437.
7. Engineering Sciences Data, Fatigue Endurance Data
* Sub-series, 3, Stress Concentrations. ESDU
m
* International Ltd., London.
8. WICHMAN, K.R., HOPPER, AG. and MERSHON, J.L.
Local stresses in spherical and q l i n d ~ dsheus due
to ex- loadings. Welding Research Council
Bulletin 107, March 1979 revision.
9. NEUBER, H. Theory of stress concentrations for
shear strained prismatic bodies with arbitrary
non-linear stxess-strain law. Trans. ASME Journal of
Applied Mechanics, 1969,544.
Additional references
MADDOX, S.J. Fatigue strength of welded structures.
Abinghn Publishing, Cambridge, England, 1991.
SPENCE, J. and TOOTH, AS. (Ed), Fressure vessel
design, concept and principies, E. & EN. Spon,
London, 1994.
O BSI 1997
CL23
k e 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex D D.3 Definitions

Requirements for ferritic steels in D.3.1 Design reference temperature
bands MO to M4 inclusive for vessels The design reference temperature & is the temperature
required to operate below O "C to be used in figures D.l and D.2 for determining the
suitability of materials for resisting brittle fracture.
D.l Introduction
D.3.2 Design reference temperature acCjustment
D.l.l The requirements specified in this standard, as The design reference temperature, &, shall not be
amplified by this annex, are intended to provide greater than the minimum design temperature a u s t e d ,
criteria for the a v o i h c e of brittle fracture. They take as appropriate, as follows:
into account good engineering practices which have
developed in the pressure vessel and other industries &S b + es+ ec+ s,
to ensure that materials and design details are where
adequate to resist britLle fracture under the design
conditions specified. The requirements also take i n t ~ is the minimum design temperature as defined
account a broad spectrum of results from experimental in 3.2.5;
test data is an adjustment dependmg on the calculated
0s
D.1.2 Where it is found difficult to meet the membrane stress, as follows:
requirements of this standard using the criteria 0s is O "C when the calculated tensile
specified, alternative methods of assessment, membrane stress is equal to or
e.g. fracture mechanics as outlined in annex U are exceeds 2f/3;
permitted to be used by agreement between the
--
-
-
-
purchaser, the manufacturer and the Inspecting
Authority
NOTE. Whilst this standard covers the requirements for the design
0s is +10 "C when the calculated tensile
membrane s h s s is equal to or
exceeds 50 N/mm2 but does not
-
I
and construction of new pressure vessels, the principles of this
annex may, with the agreement of the inspectingíinsuring
exceed 2fB,
_.
I
authority, be used for the assessment of vessels in service.
ûs is +50 "C when the calculated tensile
membrane stress does not
D.2 Application exceed 50 N/mm2. In this case the
*
..
membrane stress should take account of
D.2.1 The following additional requirements shall internal and external pressure, static head
apply to the design, materials and inspection of vessels and self-weight.
which have a minimum design temperature, &, less
than O "C.Fïgures D.l and D.2 spec& the design ûc is an austment depending upon the
reference temperature depending upon the reference construction category:
thickness and the material impact test temperature for ûc is O "C for category 1 components;
the as-welded and the post-weld heat treated
conditions respectively. ûc is - 10 "C for category 2 components; I
These requirements shaìl apply to all pressure parts 6~ is an adptment in applications where aU plates
and attachments welded thereto but not to incorporating subassemblies are post-weld heat
non-pressure parts such as internal baffles, etc. treated (PWHT) before they are butt-welded
provided that these are not attached to a pressure part together, but the main seams are not
by welding and are not otherwise an integrai part of a subsequently post-weld heat treated. In these
pressure past. The application of this annex is limited applications is +15 "C.
to ferritic steels in categories MO to M4 inclusive as
specified in tables 2.32 to 2.312 of this standard NOTE. In cases where the calculated tensile membrane stress can
except that rimming steels shall not be used at vary with the minimum design temperature, e.g. auterefrigeration
during depressurization, the coincident values of 0, and es should
minimum design temperatures below O "C. be evaluated, allowing, where appropriate, for the possibility of
Notes 18) and 19) of table 2.31 restrict or qualify the repressurization while stiil cold (e.g. by hydrauiic overfii). The
use of some ferritic steels in category M1 for vessels condition that results in the lowest value of 0, should be used for
the purpose of selection of materiais. The material impact test
designed to operate below O "C. temperature is the temperature determined in accordance
with D.4 at which figure D.1 or D.2 is entered to give the minimum
design reference temperature of the material for any given
reference thickness, or the maximum reference thickness for any
given design reference temperature. Alternatively, if the minimum
design reference temperature and the reference thickness are
known figure D.l or D.2 can be used to determine the required
material impact test temperature.
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards D/1
= Lb24bb9
~
STDSBSI B S 5500-ENGL 1997 Ub70792 L73
BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 2, May 1997 Annex D
D.3.3 Rt$erence thickness D.3.3.2 Weld neclcmnges,plate and slip-on [or

The reference thickness is the nominal thickness to be hubbed) flanges, tubephtes and jlat ends
used in figure D.l and D.2 and shail be determined as The reference thickness shall be the greater of
follows dependhg upon the type of component. onequarter the thickness of the flange, tubeplate or
NOTE. in this clause, thickness refers to the nominal thickness flat end, or the thickness of the branch or shell
including corrosion allowance of the item as ordered. Applications attached thereto (see figures D.3 and D.4).
where the actual thickness used exceeds this value by more than
the normal manufacturing tolerance, or where thicker material has If the distance from the fiange, tubeplate or fiat end to
been substituted for that ordered, wili be the subject of special the butt weld is not less than four times the thickness
consideration. of the butt weld, the reference thickness for the
as-welded condition shall be the thickness at the edge
D.3.3.1 Butt welded components
of the weld preparation.
The reference thickness of each component shall be The reference thickness of tubeplates having tubes
taken as the thickness of the component under
attached by welding shail be taken as not less than the
consideration at the edge of the weld preparation.
tube thickness.
NOTE. Where the shell to tubeplate joint is stress relieved but the
tubdtubeplate joint is as-welded, this may affect the selection of
materiais for the tubeplate.
20 I I I I I I I l
-60 -SO -40 -30 -20

Material impact test temperature
-10 O
OC -
10 20
Figure D.l Permissible design reference temperatureheference

thicknesdmaterial impact test temperature relationships for as-welded
components (see also table D.l note 2)
D/2 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

COPYRIGHT
O BSI 1997
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL L777 = L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70793 O U T I
Annex D h e 2, May 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Figure D.2 Permissible design reference temperatureheference

thickness/material impact test temperature relationships for post-weld
heat-treated components) (see also table D.l note 2)
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards Di3
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 = lb24bb7 üb70794 T 4 b
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex D
a) Siip-on and plate flanges
Fixed tubeplate or f l a t end

f
J-
I
I I
I
I
I I
I
L
u
b) Fixed tubeplates and flat ends
or fiat end
NOTE.For as welded and post-weld heat treated conditions, use the greater of e,/4 or e, in figures D.1and D.2.
Figure D.3 Reference thickness: slip on and plate flanges, tubeplates and flat ends
D/4 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

Annex D Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
TWeld neck flange

Fixed tubeplate or flat end
\
+---
As welded L < 4ez
L24ez
Post-weld heat treated
Fixed tubeplate
or flat end
Fixed tubeplate
or f l a t end
iit--x----
?-
J L
I
'
-\
As welded Use greater of é& or e, in figure D. 1 or use e,/4 in figure D.2, whichever is more onerous.
Post-weld heat treated Use greater o f e1/4or e, in figure D.2.
Figure D.4 Reference thickness: weld neck flanges, tubeplates and flat ends
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards D/5
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Annex D
D.3.3.3 Branches, mzzks and compensating plates D.4 Material impact test requirements
The reference thickness of each component shall be These requirements relate to the results of Charpy tests
determined separately by considering only the on Vnotched test pieces of 10 nun, 7.5 nun, 5 mm
thickness of that component. Where butt-welded or 2.5 mm width, tested in accordance with the
inserts are used, the reference thickness shall requirements of the relevant material specification for
correspond to the thickness at the edge of the weld parent metal and in accordance with BS EN 100451
preparation. and this annex for weld metal. It is permissible to
adopt impact test temperatures other than those
D.3.3.4 lhbes specified in the relevant material specification. Unless
The reference thickness shall be that of the nominal stated otherwise a minimum specified impact energy is
thickness of the tube including corrosion allowance. the average of the results of tests made on three test
D.3.3.6 Attachments pieces. Unless otherwise specified in the relevant
materiai specification, no individual value is permitted
Attachments welded directly to a pressure component to be less than 70 % of the specified minimum average
shall be regarded as part of the pressure component, due.
and the reference thickness shall be that of the shell or NOTE. Alternative toughness requirements may be established by
of the attachment at the point of attachment whichever reference to annex U when so agreed between purchaser and
is thicker. Intermediate attachments (see figure D.9) manufacturer.
shall be employed where it is required to attach
noncritical components to the shell. D.4.1 Plates, forgings, castings and tubes (except
heat exchanger tubes)
D.3.3.6 Unweided items The material impact test temperature is the
Unwelded items shall be taken as stress relieved and temperature at which the requirements of table D.l are
the reference thickness shall be taken as onequarter of met.
the thickness of the item. Impact testing is not required for materiais with a
reference thickness 10 mm and thinner provided that
the design reference temperature is not lower than the
corresponding values in table D.2.
Table D.l Impact requirements for plates, forgings, castings and tubes
Specified minimum Required impact energy value at the material impact test temperature
tensile strength 10mm X 10mm 10 mm X 7.5 mm 10mm X 5mm 10 mm X 2.5 mm
N/mm2
J J J J
< 450 27 22 19 10
2 450 I40 I32 I28 115
NOTE 1. Where the temperature specified in a material specification does not correspond to the appropriate Charpy V value in the
table, it may be converted to the corresponding value on the basis of 1.5 J per "C. Such conversion shall be permitted only in the
range 18J to 47 J of Charpy V energy. For example, 20 J at O "C may be regarded as equivalent to 27.5 J at +5 'C.
NOTE 2. For non-impact tested grades of standard steels listed in table 2.3-1 it may be assumed that a satisfactory impact value has
been achieved at +20 "C. (See however note 18) in tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12 which bans certain steels for applications below O "C and
note 19) which requires certain steels to be impact tested, to the requirements of table D.l if they are to be used below O "C, whether
or not impact testing is normally required.)
D/6
O BSI 1997
S T D S B S I BS 55OO-ENGL 1977 H l b 2 4 b b 7 O b 7 0 7 7 7 7 5 5 m
Annex D Issue 3, October 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
the design reference temperature is not lower than the AU test specimens shall be prepared after the test
corresponding values in table D.2. plates have been given a heat treatment that is the
same as that which wiii be appìied to the vessel. In the
Table D.2 Design reference temperature I case of production test plates the purchaser is
permitted to specify that the plates be heat treated
Reference
thickness
mm
As welded
I PWHT
with the vessel.
a) Procedure test plates
10 -15°C -30 "C Impact tests are required on procedure test plates
8 -20 "C -35 "C except when the purchaser is prepared to accept the
authenticated results of previous tests of the same
6 -25 "C -40 "C procedure.
4 -40 "C -55 "C b) Productwn weld test plates.
5 2 -55 "C -70 "C %st plates are required when:
i) specified by the purchaser; or
D.4.2 Heat exchanger tubes ii) (eD - ep) < 20 "C
The design reference temperature for heat exchanger Where
tubes shall not be lower than those given in table D.3.
The design reference temperature for BS 3606 : 243, Op (the permissible minimum temperature) is
245 and 261 grades shall be 10 "C higher than those the minimum temperature for which the
in table D.3. vessel wili be suitable.
This can be determined by a calcuiation, reversing

the sequence given in D.3.2, using actual material
Reference BS 3069 :320,360,440 data in figure D.l or D.2 as appropriate, to
thickness BS 3608 :320,400,440 establish the lowest temperature for which each
mm
Ikswelded I
Welded +
PWHT IUnwelded I component of the vessel will be suitable. The
highest of these temperatures is the permissible
minimum temperature of the vessel.
10 - 15 -30
NOTE.Substituting (e,- 20) 'C €or e,, when hitiaiiy
8 -20 -35 determining û, in accordance with D.3.2, for the purposes of
6 -25 -40 -80 material selection, will ensure a minimum margin of 20 "C
between required and permissible temperatures.
4 -40 -55 -95
Unless other tests are required by the purchaser the
2 -55 -70 - 110 test plates shall only be subject to impact testing.
Impact testing of production weld test plates may be
D.4.3 Welds waived, with the agreement of the purchaser, in the
When materials to be joined by welding are not case of welded seams made by a manual or
required by this standard to be impact tested, then multi-run automatic welding process in vessels made
impact tests are not required to be undertaken on the from steels for which impact testing has been
welding procedure test plates and production weld test waived in accordance with D.4.
p&s are not required. Where impact tested materials Impact testing of production test plates is not
are to be joined by welding the following requirement required in the case of welds in materials less than
be met. 10 mm thick. I
D.4.3.1 Weid test plates
As detailed in this clause, additional C h q y V-notch
impact tests shall be made on procedure and
production weld test plates produced in accordance
with section five and annex Q.
O BSI 1997
D/7
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1977 .
IIL b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70798 b 9 L E
BS 6M)o : 1997 h e 1, September 1997 Annex D
D.4.3.2 Positions of impact test specimens At least one set of test pieces shall be taken with the
Ali specimens shall be cut tsansverse to the weld with notch at the root of the weld (two if the root is
the axis of the notch perpendicular to the surface of illdefined). The other sets shall be distributed so as
the plate. The tests shall be done on sets of three to give a measure of the properties at different
specimens. positions through the thickness (see figure D.6).
a) As-welded vessels c) Heat affected zones
Weld metai test pieces shall be cut so that one face No impact tests are specified for the heat affected
of the specimen is substantially parallel to, and zone when multi-run processes are used with heat
within 3 mm of, the top surface of the weld (see inputs between 1M/mm and 5 M/mm.
figure D.5). If a heat input outside this range is used and the
NOTE. Test pieces may also be taken from the root of the weld has not been normalized, the heat affected
weld, at the purchaser’s request, but these should be for zone shall be impact tested. Where impact tests are
information purposes oniy specified on the heat affected zone, the specimens
b) Stress relimed vessels detailed in a) and b) shall be duplicated but with
The number of sets of tests on the weld metal shall their notches located in the heat affected zone
be related to the thickness of the test plates as and 1mm to 2 mm from the fusion boundary
follows: Individual specimens shall be etched to show the
fusion boundary and heat affected zone so as to
Number of sets ensure accurate location of the notch. (See
Plate thickness
figure D.7.)
Upto30mm 1
30mmto62mm 2
Over 62 rnm 3
Dfi-A
O BSI 1997
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 7 7 L b 2 4 b b ï O b 7 0 7 9 7 528 E
3 m m max.
1
Figure D.6 Location of Charpy V-notch specimens in
weld metal (as-welded vessels)
Figure D.6 Location of Charpy V-notch specimens

in weld metal (stress relieved vessels)
2 mm
Figure D.7 Location of Charpy V-notch specimens in heat affected zone
D/8 O BSI 1997

STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 D l b 2 Y b b 9 Ob7UôOO 07T 1
Annex D Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
D.4.3.3 ñequired impact values D.6.1.6 Welded tubesheet to shell and fiat end plate
The required minimum average impact value and the to shell attachments shall be generally in accordance
impact test temperature for each set of specimens with figures E.42 to E.47 inclusive. Such attachments
notched in the weld metal or heat affected zone and shall conform to figure E.44a orb, the prolongation of
taken from a procedure test shall be the same as those the tubeplate to provide a bolting flange being
in table D.1. optional.
D.4.3.4 Retests D.6.2 Manqfacture
If the specified average impact value is not attained or Ali materiais used shall be as specified. Pieces of
if one specimen oniy shows a value less than the plate, etc., of uncertain origin shall not be used even
specified minimum individual value, then three for apparently unimportant times.
additional specimens shall be selected from a position Hard stamping is only permitted for the purposes of
similar to that from which the set of specimens under plate identification and in any case shall be kept to a
consideration was taken. The average value of the six minimum. Only round nosed stamps shall be used.
specimens shall be not less than the specified Marking for vessel identification is specified in 6.8.9.
minimum average value and not more than two
specimens shall show values below the specified D.6.3 Heat treatment of components M e r
minimum average value, only one of which is forming
permitted to be below the specified individual d u e . All plates that have been cold formed to an internal
radius less than 10 times the plate thickness (more
D.5 Design, manufacture and workmanship than 5 % deformation) shall be given a normalizing
D A 1 Design treatment afterwards.
Cold formed dished ends with flanges shall be
D.5.1.1 As a general rule each design shall allow for normalized; plates that are cold pressed to form the
sufficient flexibility and be as simple as possible. segments of a sphere or a hemispherical end shall be
The occurrence of rapid changes in temperature likely normalized if the radius is less than 10 times the
to give rise to severe temperature gradients shall be thickness, and in all other cases except where the
avoided but where this is not possible, consideration manufacturer produces evidence that the forming
shall be given to special design d e m . technique used does not significantly change the
NOTE. A typical desirable design detail is given in figure D.8 as an impact properties.
illustration.
Pipe that has been locally bent (with or without local
D.5.1.2 Details that wiU produce local areas of high heating) to an internal radius less than 10 times the
stress, e.g. lugs, gussets producing discontinuous outside diameter of the pipe shall be normahed.
stiffening and abrupt s t r u c m changes, shall not be Unless it can be demonstrated that the temperature
permitted. Discontinuous stiffeners or continuous control during the forming operation is equivalent to
stiffeners attached by tack or intermittent welding shalì the normaiizmg procedure, ferritic steel parts that have
not be used. Saddle supports for vessels shall not be been hot formed shall always be normalized
welded directly to vessels; doubling plates shall always afterwards.
be used (see D.3.3.5).
D.5.4 Welding
D.5.1.3 Pipe supports and anchors shall be attached Because the notch ductility of weld deposit depends
to an encircling mechanically separate sleeve. upon the technique used, the procedure used in
NOTE. Screwed connections and socket-welded valves and fittings making the production joints shaU be the same as that
should preferably not be used. used for the weld procedure test subject to the
D.5.1.4 Nozzles and complicated structural variables permitted by BS EN 2883.
attachments shall be welded to shell plates in the
workshop and be considered as a separate
subassembly, which may also be evaluated individually
with regard to the desirability of a separate heat
treatment.
O BSI 1997 D/9

~ ~ ~~
STD.BS1 B S 55üO-ENGL 1 9 9 7 L b 2 4 b h ï O b 7 0 8 0 L TOb m

Gaskets
Vessel wal I
Flow -
Locating f l a n g e
Figure D.8 Example of detail for avoidance of severe thermal gradients
Non-cri tical Non-critical

component component
Ze, or 5 0 mm
wh’ichever
t \
Pressure shell Pressure shell
a) b)
Figure D.9 Examples of details for attaching non-critical components to pressure shell
DAO British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

~~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1 9 9 7 9 L b 2 4 b b ï Ob708û2 9 4 2 I
h e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex E
Recommendations for welded connections
of pressure vessels
E.l Typical details for principal seams
The details indicated in this clause have given
satisfactory results under specific manufacturing
conditions and are included for general guidance.
Modification may be required to suit particulas
manufacturing techniques and aii details adopted have
to be shown by the manufacturer to produce
satisfactory results by the procedure specified in
section 4 and section 4 of the duminium supplement.
Where no root gap is shown it is intended that the
joints be close butted For requirements governing the
use of backing stsips see 4.3.6.2.
The following details are given:
a) butt welds using the manual metal-arc process
(see figure E. 1);
b) circumferential butt welds where the second side
is inaccessible for welding (see figure E.2);
c) butt welds using the submerged arc welding
process (see figure E.3);
d) butt welds for manual inert gas welding (see
figure E.4);
e) circumferential lap welds (for category 3 vessels
* only) (see figure E.5);
o
* f) typical full penetration joint preparations for
one-sided welding only: aluminium and its alloys
(see figure E.6);
g) typical full penetration joint preparations for
two-sided welding only: aluminium and its aiioys
(see figure E.");
h) typical full penekation joint preparations for
one-sided welding with temporary backing or
permanent backing: aluminium and its alloys (see
figure E.8).
NOTE. The thicknesses quoted in figures E.l to E.8 are nominal
thicknesses.
O BSI 1997 E/1

S T D - B S I BS 5 5 D O - E N G L 1 9 9 7 L b 2 4 b b 7 üb70803 8 8 7
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex E
rigure iJame Qpplication

louble-welded butt joint hngitudinal and
60"min. vith single 'V' *cumferential butt welds
n plates not more
han 20 mm thick.
h e 'V' should be on the
nside of small diameter
lessels as shown in (2)
OlLti de+
ipposite.
Second side c h o u t to sound
.2) For small
iiameter vessels j,d--
metal before welding
i
4 = 1.5 mm where e, is less
han 10mm
4 = 3 mm where e, is
i0 mm or over
fi Imide
60'min.
'1 )ouble-welded butt joint ,ongitu&nal and
IO" vith single 'u' :ircumferential butt welds
I n plates where the
Mckness is greater than
!O nml
Second side c u t o u t t o sound

metal before welding
)ouble-welded butt joint mngitudinal and
10' vith double 'U' :ircumferential butt welds
Al- where the thickness is
veater than 20 mm
< >
'
Second side cut out t o--&loO
sound metal before
I
welding
;ingle-weldedbutt joint angitudinal and
30" vith backing strip :ircumferential butt welds.
m see 4.3.6.2) 3acking strip to be removed
+544=
ifter welding except where
Ithenvise pennitted in
Lccordance with 4.3.6.2
Indicate either t a r k or
Indicate either t a r k or
-7
1
continuous weld to suit
operating conditions
Weld dimensions are minima.
Over 7.5 to 12
1 Over i2 19 19
m
O BSI 1997
Annex E Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Figure Joint Nnme

_.I___ Application
a> Single-welded butt joint Butt welds in plates having a
loo with 'V' groove, without thickness not greater than 16 mm
backing strip
Single-welded butt joint Butt welds in plates having a

with 'U' groove, without thickness greater than 16 mm
backing strip
Single-welded butt joint Butt welds in plates up to 20 mm

with 'U' groove, without thick where the second side is
backing strip inaccessible for welding. initiai pass
to be made by the TIG process with
\R0.8 rnm inert gas backing
I
VA I
1.5 mm t o 2.5mm 4L 1.5 mm-0.8mm
O
Single-welded butt joint Butt welds in plates over 20 mm thicl
with 'U' groove, without where the second side is inaccessible
backing strip for welding. Initiai pass to be made b
the TIG process with inert gas
backing
1~Amto~~mm-J L f 0
1.5mm-0.8mm
Single-welded butt joint Butt welds in plates over 20 mm thicl
with 'u' groove with where the second side is inaccessible
consumable root insert for welding. initiai pass to be made b
the TIG process with inert gas
backing
1.Smm-0.8mm
Y-Ï-7
goo +'a Single-welded butt joint
with 'v' groove, without
backing strip
Butt welds in plates not exceeding
10 mm thickness
T ~.5mrnmin.aao-J'I- L1.5mm
Single-welded butt joint Butt welds in all thicknesses of plate
with backing strip
(see 4.3.6.2)
See figure E.l d) for dimensions

~~
here the second side is
inaccessible for welding
O BSI 1997 E/3

S T D - B S I BS 550Cl-ENGL 1 9 9 7 IL b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70805 b 5 L M
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Annex E
Joint Name Application

1) Joggle joint May be used for shell to shell and head to
shell (excluding cone to shell) connections
provided that
a) the contents are not corrosive;
b) the material is restricted to BS 5500

grade MO or M1 with a specified minimum
tensile strength not exceeding 460 Nlmm';
-Avoid sharp break e) the greater of the thicknesses being
joined does not exceed 16 nun;
-Depth of off set = e,
d) that when the flanged section of a
dished head is joggled, the joggle shall be
sufficiently clear of the knuckle radius to
ensure that the edge of the circumferential
seam is at least 12 mm clear of the
knuckle:
e) that when a shell with a longitudinal

seam is joggled
1) the welds are ground flush internally
and externally for a distance of
approximately 50 mm prior to joggling
with no reduction of plate thickness; and
2) on completion of joggiing, the area of
the weld is subjected to magnetic crack
detection or dye penetrant examination
and is proven to be free of cracks;
f) the offset section which forms the weld

backing is a close fit within its mating
section round the entire circumference
(machining of the mating spigot of the
offset section is permissible provided the
thickness remaining as backhg material is
nowhere less than 75 % of the original
thickness);
g) the profile of the offset is maintained

and is not d o w e d to deteriorate through
continuous production; the form of the
offset is a smooth radius without sharp
corners;
h) that on completion of welding, the weld

has a smooth profile and fills the groove to
the full thickness of the plate edges being
joined
i) that the junction of the longitudinal and

circumferential seams are radiographed and
found to be free from significant defects;
j) that heat treatment as necessary is

carried out on the basis of design
considerations and in accordance with
figures D. 1 and D.2.
*' is limit applies to weld preparation only; weid should be dimensioned to COI
ly with h) in the application column.
Figure E.2 Typical weld preparations for circumferential welds where the second side is
inaccessible for welding (continued)
E/4
O BSI 1997
~~ ~
STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1997 l b 2 4 b b 9 O b 7 0 ô û b 598 H
Annex E Lssue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Figure Joint Name Qpplication

Double-welded butt join Butt welds in plates 10 mm
with double 'V' md thicker.
kcond side need not be cut

lack to sound metal if both
'oot passes penetrate
e,(inmm) I10 I15 I20 125 I40 I50 165 I
Singie-weldedbutt joint 3utt welds in plates 4.5 mm

with single 'V' and a o 40 mm thick.
temporary backing bar
loint welded using
emporary copper backing
'-3mm to 3.5mm
e, (in mm) I 4.5 I10 I15 I20 125 140
A (in degrees) 1 GO 1 GO I GO I45 I 4 5 (min.)
Sigle-welded butt joint 3utt welds between plates
with manual metal-arc .O mm to 65 mm thick.
backing
danual metal-arc laid and
t- :ut back before submerged
u% welding
1 60"
15mm to 3 m m
e,(inmm) I l 0 I Up to65 1
A (in mm) I 4.5 I 6 (min.) I
Figure E.3 Typical weld preparations for butt welds using the submerged arc welding process
O BSI 1997
E/5
S T D - B S I B S C S D O - E N G L 1797 Ws L b 2 4 b b l üb70807 424 8111
BS SMH): 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex E
Figure Plate thickness Edge preparation Remarks

a) 1 m t o 2 m Inert gas backing or backing bar may
be used (see 4.3.6.2)
3mm Backing bar should be used
(see 4.3.6.2)
3mm Either a backing bar or argon backing

should be used. There should be no
access for air to the back of the weld
\ / i (see 4.3.6.2)
t- 1.5 mm max.
4 mm Frequently a filler rod is not used for
1or 2 runs the first run. Where the back of the
.rl. joint cannot be dressed after welding,

argon backing should be used, and
there should be no access for air to
the back of the weld (see 4.3.6.2)
L2.5 mm max
.c-u
6mm 2 or 3 runs If no backing bar is used, cut back to
sound metal and add sealing run
(see 4.3.6.2)
1.5 mm t o 2.5 mm
6 m Cut back after first run to sound
metai before welding underside
1.5mm to 2.5 mm
3mm Butt welds in plate not
exceeding 3 mm thick.
Double operator singie pass vertical

TIG process
3mm to 6mm Butt welds in plate between 3 mm an(
90' 6 mm thick
Double operator single pass vertical

TIG process
2.5mm t o 3mm
Figure E L Typical weld preparations for butt welds using the manual inert gas arc welding for
austenitic stainless and heat resisting steels only
W6
O BSI 1997
~ - ~ ~ ~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 Il b 2 4 b b 9 U 6 7 0 8 0 8 3bO I
Figure Joint Name Application

Circumferential joints only
Double full-fillet lap joini Not exceeding 16 mm plate.
4e min.
Category 3 vessels oniy.
Permitted for shell to end connections

provided that the weld is clear of the
knuckle at the end
e is the thickness of thinner plate joined

Single full-mlet lap joint Not exceeding 14 mm plate.
with plug weld
Plugs to be proportjoned to take 20 % of
total load.
\ A Category 3 vessels oniy
2e 21!2e

Figure
- E i Typical weld details for circumferential lap joints

~ ~~
S T D - B S I BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1777 1b24bb7 0 b 7 0 8 0 9 2 T 7
BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 1,J a n m 1997 Annex E
Material Edge preparation Remarks

:hickness
JptoSmm Suitable for a.c. argon TIG, d.c. helium TIG and pulsed
I MIG.
Penetration from one side oniy during welding can be

achieved
(Manual or mechanized)
% mm to 6.3 mm Suitable for a.c. TIG and pulsed MIG.
Controlled penetration possible

3mmto4mm Suitable for roiled or positional fixed pipes using a.c.

R6.4 m m TIG.
\
Coníxoiled penetration possible
(Manual)
t
1 mm upwards Suitable for roiled or positional fixed pipes using ac.
argon TIG.
Controlled penetration possible

(Manual)
Land 3 m m
5.3mm to 9.5mm Suitable for rolled pipes with a.c. TIG or pulsed MIG.
Controlled penetration possible. Root faces radiused

dightly
VOTE. These joint preparations are designed to permit a controlled penetration bead to be achieved on one-sided joints where
ìccessibility to the underside is restricted.
3pe joints preparations are also included.
Figure E.6 Typical full penetration joint preparations for one-sided welding only: aluminium and
its alloys
E78 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

S T D * B S I BS 55UO-ENGL 1 7 7 7 ILb2Libb9 [lb70810 T 1 9
Annex E Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Material thickness Edge meDaration Remarks

6.3mm to 9.5mm Suitable for two run procedures (one run from each side
without back cutting).
Conventional MIG or d.c. helium TIG may be used.
/--r=q
(Manuai or mechanized)
9.5 mm to 12.7 m Suitable for two run procedures (one run each side
Sighting ' V ' W without back cutting).
Conventional MIG dc. helium TIG may be used.

(Manual welding or mechanized)
Sighting 'V'
8.3mm to 12.7m Back chipped and sealed. 3 mm root face recommended

when helium and helium + argon mixtures are used.
\-jq 2 mm to 3mm
Conventional MIG only
5.3 mm to 25.4 m a) No back cutting required. Use 3 mm root face for argon
MIG and 4 mm root faces when helium + argon mixture 01
helium is used with conventional MIG.
12.7mm to 25.4 mm
1 2 rnm t o 4mm
b) Back cutting of reverse side when required using 2 mm
root face only.
One run from each side.
Mechanized welding recommended.
High current applications, helium, argon, or

helium + argon mix.
a) Root face at up to 9 mm up to 19 mm thick
b) Root face at 15 mm in excess of 19 mm thick
t.8 mm to 6.3 mm Double operator TIC a c . with argon.
Vertical-up welding.
Root gap of 1.5 mm may be tolerated

(Manual)
5.3mm to 12.7 nun Double operator TIG a.c. with argon.
Vertical-up welding.
Root gap of 1.5 mm may be tolerated

(Manual)
VOTE. These joint prep1 ions are designed primariiy for the use of two-si ed procedures which may involve either two or more weld
u n s without back &&ng on reverse side. Alternatively, procedures involving back cutting and a sealweld are also given.
Figure E.7 s p i c a 1 full penetration joint preparations for two-sided welding only: aluminium and
i t s alloys
O BSI 1997
EY9
~~ ~~
S T D - B S I BS 550U-ENGL 1 9 9 7 ILb2i-lbb7 Ob70811 9 5 5

BS 6 6 0 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex E
Material Edge preparation Remarks

thickness
Up to 3 mm Temporay backed, suitable for ac. TIG, pulsed
MIG, d.c. helium TIG and conventional MIG.
I l
3 mm to 4.8 mm Use 2 mm gap with conventional MIG.

Gap = 2 mm t o 4 m m
4 mm gap with TIG and pulsed MIG.
Permanent backing
4.8 mm to Temporary backing with conventionai MIG or a.c
12.7 mm argon TIG.
a) Nil root face with 3 mm root gap for TIG
b) 2 mm root face with 2 mm root gap for MIG

1.8mm to Permanent backed using conventional MIG.

12.7 mm
For ac.argon TIG nil root faces wiii suffice
3.5 mm to 19 mm High current MIG welding.
Argon shielded.
Temporary backing bar.
a) Root face for 9.5 mm thickness: take 6.3 mm
b) Root face for thickness in excess of 9.5 mm:

increase to 9 mm
(Mechanized recommended)
NOTE. The joint preparations are designed where temporary or permanent backing systems are required.
Figure E.8 Typical full penetration joint preparations for one-sided welding with temporary
backing or permanent backing: aluminium and its alloys
w10 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 IL b 2 4 b b 7 O b 7 0 8 1 2 871
E.2 Typical examples of acceptable weld details E.2.3 Selection of detail

E.2.1 General The connections recommended are not considered to
be equally suitable for all service conditions, nor is the
This clause is based upon annex G of ISO/DIS 269433). order in which they are shown indicative of their
The drawings are intended to convey recommendations
relative mechanical characteristics. In selecting the
in regard to connections welded manuaiiy by the
appropriate detail to use from the several alternatives
metal-arc process in steel pressure vessels with a shell shown for each type of connection, consideration
thickness of not less than 5 mm. They are also
should be given to the manufacture and service
generally suitable for aluminium connections welded
conditions that pertain.
by an appropriate process provided that groove angles
are increased to suit the welding process applied (see It is to be noted that for vessels subject to internal
note 3 to figure E.9). The following types of corrosion, only those connections that are suitable for
connections are covered. applying a corrosion allowance should be used Certain
types, such as those incorporating internal attachment
a) Branches without added compensation rings by fillet welds only, do not lend themselves to this and
1) set-on branches (see ñgures E.12 to E.18); their use on internal corrosive duties should be
2) set-in branches (see figures E.19 to E.24); discouraged.
3) forged branch connections (see figures E.25 E.2.4 Weld pmfile and size
and E.26). The limitations quoted in weld profiles and sizes are
b) Branches with added compensation rings based on commonly accepted sound practice, but they
1) set-on branches (see figure E.27); may be subject to modifications dictated by special
2) set-in branches (see figures E.28 to E.31). welding techniques or design conditions.
c) Studded connections and couplings E.2.4.1 Weld profiiles
1) butt-welded studded connections (see The weld profiles (for example bevel angles, root radii
figure E.32); and root faces) recommended are indicated by letters
2 ) socket welded and screwed connections (see and numbers in circles or squares, which refer to the
figure E.33). profiles shown in figure E.9. They are designed to
provide correct conditions for welding and to facilitate
d) Fianges (see figures E.34 to E.36). the deposition of sound weld metal in the root of the
e) Jacketed vessels (see figures E.37 to E.40). joint. This is particularly important in the case of
î) Flat ends covers (see figure E.41). single-bevel and single-J welds and, where these are
O ~ figures
g) Tubeplate to sheil C O M ~ ~ ~ (see S E.42 given as alternatives, it is recommended in general that
to E.47). preference be given to the latter where the depth or
throat thickness of the weld exceeds about 16 mm.
h) Flat end connections (flanges) (see figure E.34).
NOTE 1. Typical examples of arc welded tube to tubeplate joints E.2.4.2 Butt joints
are given in annex T. In cases where full penetration butt joints are
NOTE 2. The thicknesses quoted in E.2 and figures E.9 to E.47 are indicated, it is intended that they should be back
nominal thicknesses. chipped or gouged and back welded, or alternatively
E.2.2 Purpose that the welduig procedure should be such as to
ensure sound, positive root penetration.
The purpose of this clause is to exemplify sound and
commonly accepted practice and not to promote the E.2.4.3 Weld sizes
standardization of connections that may be regarded as The size of the welds, i.e. throat thicknesses, have
mandatory or to restrict development in any way A been proportioned to develop the full strength of the
number of connections have been excluded which, parts joined.
whilst perfectly sound, are restricted in their use to
certain applications, firms or localities. Furthermore, it E.2.4.4 Filkt welds
is appreciated that it will be desirable to introduce Where the leg length of a fillet weld necessary to meet
amendments and additions in the future to reflect the design throat thickness (or design leg length) at the
improvements in welding procedures and techniques as edge of a plate or section is such that the parent metal
they develop. does not project beyond the weld, melting of the outer
corner or corners, which reduces the throat thickness,
shall not be allowed. See figure E.lOa
33)~n
preparation.
O BSI 1997
EA1
~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL L777 IZb24bb9 Ob70813 7 2 8 I
BS 6500 : 1997 Issue 2, September 1997 Annex E
E.2.4.6 Mod@cutions This should be demonstrated by obtaining at least 25 %

Cases may well arise where sound modifications may reduction in area from three representative test pieces
be made with advantage: from the plate in a plane perpendicular to the plate
surface. In addition, the spigot and d a c e n t region of
a) to the weld profiles to suit special welding the plate should be subjected to appropriate
techniques; nondestmctive testing to confirm the absence of
b) to the weld sizes to suit design and service lamellar defects after the completion of welding and
conditions. post-weld heat treatment.
It is recommended however, that such modifications be E.2.6.9 When ultrasonic inspection is required, it may
approved by a competent engineer. be necessary to examine the welded connection
E.2.6 Notes applicable to the various tgpes of between the branch and shell prior to fitting the
connections shown i n m u r e s E.12 to E.47 compensation ring.
E.2.6.1 The dimensions and shape of the detail E.2.6.10 These details are not suitable where crevice
chosen can infîuence the feasibility andor efficiency of corrosion may occur.
ultrasonic examination. This may also be a function of E.2.6.11 Although the figure indicated is intended for
the equipment and time available. Where ultrasonic another purpose, it is considered that the form of
examination is specified, these factors should be given preparation illustrated is suitable for the connection
due considemtion. between the shell and a flat end.
E.2.6.2 When welds are made from one side onlx the When cut edges are not sealed by welding and are
penetration bead is to have a smooth contour and be exposed in service, they are to be inspected for
fiat or slightly convex. iaminar defects which may cause leakage.
E.2.6.3 The use of &-type compensation is not E.2.6.12 These weld details are recommended only
suitable for cases where there are severe temperature for shell thicknesses up to 16 mm in carbon and
gradients, especially when these are of a fluctuating carbon manganese steels with R, (see K.2) not
nature. exceeding 432 N/mmz for austenitic material without
E.2.6.4 When ring-type reinforcement is used, the limit on shell thickness or up to 16 mm for aluminium
materiai used for the ring is to be of the m e nominal and aluminium alloys. These weld details are not
strength as that of the shell. recommended for corrosive or fatigue duty
E.2.6.6 When partial penetration joints are used, root E.2.6.13 Acceptable only for grade MO and M1
defects may be present and these cannot always be materiais. This type of weld is liable to cracking of the
detected or interpreted by means of nondestructive root runs in thick sections and should be restricted to
testing. The use of partial penetration joints is not thicknesses up to 50 mm unless subject to specially
suitable for cases where there are severe temperature agreed welding procedures.
gradients, especially when these are of a fluctuating E.2.6.14 These details are acceptable only for
nature. grade MO and M1 materials, and either shell or pad
E.2.6.6 The use of socket welded and screwed thicknesses up to 38 mm.
couplings, such as those shown in figwe E.33, is E.2.6 Notes applicable to branches in figuresE.12
limited to a maximum of 50 mm in nominal diameter, to E.33
when these are connected directly to the shell.
E.2.6.1 Sections
E.2.6.7 The selection of details for parts of vessels The drawings of the recommended connections show a
involving jacketed construction is of a special nature, immerse section (see detail A, figwe E.10b) and a
and this should be borne in mind in selecting longitudid section (see detail B, figure E.lOb).
appropriate details.
E.2.6.2 Weld sizes
E.2.6.8 When spigots designed to permit butt welded
connections between sub-components (e.g. figures The sizes of the welds have been proportioned to
E.%a, E.44 and E.46) are not produced by means of develop the full stsength of the parts joined. See
forging, attention is drawn to the necessity of ensuring also E.2.4.3, E.2.4.4 andE.2.7.2.1.
that the though thickness properties are adequate for E.2.6.3 Weld pfh
the design.
While both single-bevel and singleJ welds have been
shown as acceptable in the smaller sizes, in general the
latter are to be preferred because of the sounder root
conditions obtained, and it is recommended that
singlebevel welds be limited in size to about 15 mm in
depth. See also E.2.4.1 and E.2.4.2.
w12
O BSI 1997
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 7 7 m l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70814 b b 4
Annex E Issue 1,Jan- 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
E.2.7 Notes applicable to branches without E.2.7.2.3 Rernovaì of intemal sharp edge in branch
compensation rings in figures E.12 to E.26 bore
E.2.7.1 Sehon branches It will be noted that the internal edges in the bores of
Consideration should be given to the necessity for set-in branches are shown radiused because a stress
examining the shell piate for laminations around the concentration occurs at this point. This precaution is
branch hole when set-on branches are used. recommended when the branch connection is fully
stressed or subjected to fatigue, but may not be
E.2.7.2 Set-in branches necessary where these conditions do not obtain.
E.2.7.2.1 Weld sizes E.2.7.2.4 Preparation of hole in sheU
The type of branch to shell connections and the sizes In the case of set-in branches of the types shown in
of welds employed may be influenced by several figures E.20a to E.23b inclusive, the hole in the shell
factors in the operational conditions for which the may be cut and profiled in two ways as follows.
vessel is designed. For general guidance in this annex a) The depth of the grooves B and D may be
weld sizes have been shown for the various constant around the hole as shown in figure E.lle.
connections recommended, based on the concept that This, the normal case, is the concept upon which the
the welded joints should develop the full strength in drawings have been prepared, for example see
tension of the branch radial to the sheil as indicated in figure E.20b.
figure E J l a and b. In general, it should therefore be
unnecessary to apply iarger welds than those shown. b) The roots of the weld grooves may be in one
plane, as for example when they are machine bored,
The simple, though approximate, assumption has been in which case the depths of the grooves will vary
accepted that the total throat thickness of the welds around the hole, as shown in figure E.llf.
should equal twice the branch thickness. It has also
been assumed that the welds should be reasonably E.2.8 Notes applicable to branches with added
symmetrical about the mid-thickness of the connection. compensation rings in figures E.27 to E.31
It is further recommended that,when the branch E.2.8.1 General
thickness exceeds half the thickness of the shell, full
penetration joints should be used with fillet welds Compensation rings should be a close fit to the shell
and ‘tell-tale’holes should be provided in them.
q u a i in total throat thickness to 20 % of the shell
thickness as shown in figure E.llc and d. This E.2.8.2 Set-in branches
additionai throat thickness is recommended to E.2.8.2.1 Gap between branch and sheU
compensate for the relative practical difficulty of
applying perfectly sound welds in nozzle connections It is recommended that the gap between the branch,
and of applying nondestructive tests for their shell and also the compensation ring should not
examination. These additional fillet welds are also exceed the following:
intended to provide a reasonable geometsic profile, and a) 1.5mm for branch diameters up to 300 mm; or
for practical reasons a minimum dimension of 6 mm b) 3 mm in other cases.
has been applied to the fillet weld size.
Wider gaps increase the tendency to spontaneous
There may be service conditions for which smaller cracking during welding particularly as the thickness of
welds are adequate. In such cases, when subject to the parts joined increases.
study by a competent engineer, the weld sizes may be
reduced. E.2.8.2.2 Inntemal compensation rings
E.2.7.2.2 Gap between branch and sheU Set-in branches with single compensation rings have
been shown with the rings on the outside of the shell,
It is recommended that the gap between the branch which is the normal case (see figures E.28a to E.30b).
and shell should not exceed the following: Similar connections may be used for the attachment of
a) 1.5 mm for branch diameters up to 300 mm; or internal compensation rings in the formed ends of
b) 3 mm in other cases. pressure vessels and in spherical vessels.
Wider gaps increase the tendency to spontaneous E.2.9 Notes appìicabk to jacketed vessels in
craclung during welding particularly as the thickness of figures E.37 to E.40
the parts joined increases. It is recommended that the gap between the shell of
the vessel and the jacket or blocking ring should not
exceed 3 mm. Wider gaps increase the tendency to
spontaneous cracking during welding, particularly as
the thickness of the pasts joined increases.
O BSI 1997 El13

S T D * B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1977 e L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob708LS S T O
B1 B2
91
a= 50" min.
s, = 1.5mm to 2.5 mm
s2= Ot03mm
B3 B4
í 1.5mm to 2.5mm
g, =
92 =
J1
a= 15" to 35"
s, = 2mmto3mm
s, = 2mmt03mm
g, = 1.5mm to 3 mm
g2 = (See note 2)
53 = Oto3mm 54
r= 6mmto13mm
b-m
NOTE 1. These recommendations have been included for general guidance. Discretion should be used in applying the maximum
and minimum dimensions quoted which are subject to variation according to the welding procedure employed (for example size
and type of electrodes) and also to the position in which the welding is carried out.
NOTE 2. It is recommended that in no case should the gap between the branch and sheli exceed 3 mm. Wider gaps increase the
tendency to spontaneous cracking during welding, particularly as the thickness of the parts joined increases.
NOTE 3. The details are applicable in principle to aluminium pressure vessels, but in practice the groove angle a should be
increased to a minimum of 45".
Figure E.9 Standard weld details
W14
O BSI 1997
_ _ _ ~
STD.BS1 BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 2 9 9 7 m l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob708Lb 437

Annex E Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 :1997
a) Desirable b) Acceptable because of full throat thickness
c) Not acceptable because of reduced throat thickness

Figure E.10 a) Limitations on geometry of fillet weld applied to the edge or a
part
\ \ \ \
Figure E.10 b) Transverse and longitudinal sections of branch connections
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards El15
S T D - B S I BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 2777 W lb2'4bb7 üb70817 373
Weld sizes
(B, + Fi)+ D = 2t approx.
4 b) (See ais0 figure E.20b)
'F2
Weld sizes
(Bi + Fi)+ (B, + F,) = 2t approx.
a) (See also figure E.2Oa)
F2 = t/3 or 6 mm whichever is larger

d) (See also ñgure E.22b)
Fi
Fi = t/10or 6 mm whichever is larger
c) (See also figure E.22a)
Figure E . l l Weld details for set-in branches
W16
O BSI 1997
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 Lb24bb7 Ob70ôLô 20T
L = t/3 min. but not less than 6 mm

Preference should be given to the detail shown in b) if t exceeds about 16 mm
*
m
*

b)
Figure E.12 Set-on branches (see E.2.4.2)
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards W17
~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1797 .
ILb24bb7 Ob70ôLS L 4 b
See E.2.5.1
and E . 2 . 5 . 2
I
min

a) Single root run technique
See E.2.5.1
and E.2.5.2
I
min
10
L = VJ min. but not less than 6 mm

b) Double root run technique
Dimensions are in miilimetres
NOTE. The backing ring should be of the same nominal composition as that of the vessel shell. Care should be
taken to ensure close fitting of the backing rings which should be removed after welding. After the removal of
backing rings, the surface should be ground smooth and examined for cracks by dye penetrants, magnetic, or
other equivalent methods.
Figure E.13 Set-on branches
Ex8 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

t
I I- t
83 84 or J 4 -
see E.2.4.1
see
Alternative detail
\
S = 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm
L = t / 3 min. but not less than 6 mm
See E.2.5.1
-7
84 or J4
.see E.2.4.1
v S = 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm
L = t / 3 min. but not less than 6 mm
NOTE. These details are recommended only where the bore of the branch is readily accessible for welding. The joint should be
back-gouged from the side most accessible and suitable for this purpose, generally the outside.
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards w19
Finished size
bored after
Finished size welding
bored a f t e r welding
b c
roo1
See E.2.5.1
a) Finished size
Finished size
bored afi welding
bored after
welding
1

Dimensions are in millimetres
b)
NOTE. Joints generaiiy used for small branch to sheii diameter ratios
u 2 0 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1797 Il b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70822 730 D
Annex E Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 :1997
Finished size
bored after
welding Finished size
Finished size bored after
- bored after welding welding
I 3 min.?
! 5 O min.
-J 2
See E.2.5.1
Finished size
bored after welding
t-
L N o gap
stub
b)
Dimensions are in millimetres
NOTE. Joints generally used for small branch to shell diameter ratios.
O BSI
~ _ _ _ _ _ ~~ ~
S T D * B S I 5s 5500-ENGL 1997 l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70823 b 7 7
See. E.2.5.1
and E.2.5.2
L = 10 mm to 13 mm
a>
See E.2.5.1
a n d E.2.5.2
Compensation stub
L=lOmmt013mm
b)
NOTE. Joints generally used for small branch to shell diameter ratios.
Ex2
O BSI 1997
~~ ~ ~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 D 1 b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70824 5 0 3 R
6 mm max.1
L = t/3 but not less than 6mm
a) For nozzles up to approximately 100 mm bore
E.2.5.1 ,E.2.5.2
€2.5.12
b) For nozzles up to approximately 50 mm bore and 6 mm wail thickness
1.5inmm
0.5 m m or see limitation -22
(b)
See €.2.5.1,€.2.5.2
onci E.215.12
L = u3 but not less than 6 mm

D = t w i t h m a x . t = 13mm
c) For nozzles over 50 mm bore and up to and including 150 mm bore, and with a wall thickness
over 6 mm
NOTE. Generally used for the attachment of nozzles to thick-wailed shells.
O BSIStandards
COPYRIGHT British 1997 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards W23
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 l b 2 4 b b 7 üb70825 4 4 T m
See E.2.5.1 ,E.2.5.5

and E.2.5.12
See E.2.5.1. E.2.5.5-
I QI
0 4 or J4
see E.2.4.l
F=t
D=t
¿=~~~IIIIw~x.
b>
NOTE. Generally used when t is less than T/2. For smaii diameter branches, attention is drawn to the details shown in
figure E.33 which may provide a preferable solution.
Figure E.19 Set-in branches: fillet welded connections
~ _ _ _ _
E44 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

= LbZLibb9 Ob7082b
_ _ _ _ _ ~~ ~ ~
~~ ~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 38b M
LSee E.2.5.1, E.2.5.5

E.2.5.13
F = 61nn1min. to 13mm m a ~ .
B+F=t
a)
F = B m m m i n . to13mmmax.
B+F=t
D=t
b)
NOTE. Generaiiy used when t is approximately equal to T/2.
Figure E.20 Set-in branches: partial penetration butt welded connections
O BSI 1997
~ ~~
S T D - E S 1 B S 5500-ENGL 1997 Lb24bb9 û b 7 0 8 2 7 212
See E.2.5.1 and
Fi = T/10min or 6 mm whichever is larger

al
F, = TB min. or 6 mm whichever is larger

b)
NOTE. Generaily used when t is greater than TB.
Figure E.21 Set-in branches: full penetration connections (see E.2.4.2)
Ei26
O BSI 1997
t
t-
J3 or 83
see E.2.4.1
T/6 min. or 6 mm whichever is larger
F2 =
b)
NOTE. Generally used when t. is greater than T/2.
Figure E.22 Set-in branches: full penetration connections (see E.2.4.2)
O BSI 1997
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 Zb24bb7 Ob70829 075
BS 5 5 0 : 1997 Isme 1, January 1997 Annex E
S = 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm
Fi = T/10 min. or 6 mm whichever is larger
al
J 1 or BI
see E.2.4.1
S = 1.5 mm to 2.5 m m
F2 = T/5 min. or 6 mm whichever is larger
b)
Figure E.23 Set-in branches: full penetration connections with asymmetrical butt joints
(see E.2.4.2)
El28 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

See E.2.5.1
and E.2.5.2
L = tB min. but not less than 6 mm
T = 1 6 m m ~ .
a>
J1
T = 25 mm max.
b)
NOTE.As a general recommendation, all set-in branches should be welded on the inside of the sheii as shown in
figures E.19a to E.23b if they are accessible for the purpose, otherwise preference should be given to setan branch
connections shown in figures E.12a to E.18~.However, the connections shown in figure E.24a and E.24b are
considered to be acceptable but only if assurance can be provided that the welding procedure employed will
ensure sound and consistent root conditions with uniform penetration.
Figure E.24 Set-in branches: full penetration connections welded from one side only
O BSI 1997
COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards W29
~ ~ ~~
S T D S B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 9 1bZLIbbS Ob70831 743 9

I
See E.2.5.1
and E.2.5.2
b>
NOTE 1. Conventional butt joints are used to weld the forged branch connection to the sheii and branch, and may not
necessarily be of the form shown.
NOTE 2. Forging should be to good practice and within the correct range of temperature for the materials used.
Figure E.25 Forged branch connections (see E.2.4.1 and E.2.4.2)

~~~~ ~~ ~ ~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 2 9 9 7 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70832 bAT
The parallel portion should be

sufficiently Long t o permit
satisfactory radiographic
examination when required
3
L S e e E.2.5.1
and E.2.5.2
See E.2.5.1, E.2.5.2
b)
NOTE. Conventional butt joints are used to connect the forging to the shell and may not necessarily be of the form shown. See
also E.2.4.1 and E.2.4.2. These forgings connecting branches to shells are used with various forms of profile.
Figure E.26 Forged branch connections
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards EX31
~
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1997 E Lb2LibbS üb70833 5Lb

I
For shell-to-branch
L~o
min.
connection see
figures E.ll to E.18
See E.2.5.1, E.2.5.2, E.2.5.3,
E.25.4, E.2.5.9 and E.2.5.12
consideration may be given

to this detail as required
weld dimensions increase
-
J4 or B4
see E.2.4.1

Dimensions in mm.
Figure E.27 Set-on branches with added compensation rings
EL32 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 llb24bb7 Ob70834 4 5 2
I E = l O m m min.
i/’ For shell to branch joints, see

figures E19 to E . 2 4
Consideration may be given to this

detail as t h e required weld size
E.2.5.3,E.2.5.4
See E.25.1,
+F f o r Tr whichever is t h e
Figure E.28 Set-in branches with added compensation rings
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards E433
~~
~ ~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 Lb2LibbS O b 7 0 8 3 5 397
BS 5 5 0 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Annex E
B +
F2 = tmin.
E = 10 mm min.
F2) + the smaller of the two
!s of €or (T, + F i ) = 2 t min.
I
See E.2.51,E.2.5.3, E.2.5.4,
E.2.5.5, E.2.5.9,E.2.5.14
\
\ Consideration may be given t o t

detail as the required weid size
I
\
t min.
the smaller of the two values
or ( & + R + 2r min.
íb) J4 0.r 84
see E.2.4.l
O BSI 1997
J 4 or 84
see E.2.4.1
See E.2.5.l; E.2.5.3, '
. E.2.5.4, E.2.5.5.E.2.5.9,
E.2.5.12
J4 or i34
see E.2.4.1
r Consideration may be
given to this detail as A
I w
Weld sizes
When T, > t (B, + F I ) = t
E= t
~.
(Bz + F 2 j = t
When T, < t (B, + F I ) = T,
E = T,
(B2 + F2 = 2t - T,
When T < t (B2 +F,j = T
in the case of (b), for B2 + 8'2) substitute D
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards E/35
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 9 l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70637 L b l M
See E.2.5.1, E.2.5.3,

E.2.5.b. E.2.5.9 and E.2.5.14
Consideration may be
given to this detail as
the required weld size
See E 2.51,
E.2 S.s, E.Z.',.it,
E.2.5.9, E,2.>.1G
E= 1Omm min.
L= t/3 min., but not less than 6 mm
a) (See also figure E.30a)
J4 or 84
see E.2.4.1
and E.2.5.12
-Consideration may be given

to this detail as the required
weld size increases
BI i-Fi = t
Ez = t but not less than 10 mm
82 + FZ =t
b) (See also figure E.30a)


~~
~~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1797 E L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70838 D T B E
Annex E Issue 1,January 1997 BS 6 6 0 : 1997
6 m m min.
-'15See
.2.E
60" min.
Con vent ion al

I
I
d) Butt welded studded connections (see E.2.4.2)
Figure E.32 Studded connections (see also 3.6.4.8)
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards m7
~
STD.BSI B S 55üü-ENGL 1997 lsl l b 2 4 b b 9 ü b 7 0 8 3 9 T 3 q E

The ring should

f i t closely to the
--1
1’
e) f)
The gap should not exceed 3 mm at any point
The bore should be

such that there is
adequate accessibility
for sound deposition
o f the internal fillet
g) Fïilet welded studded connections (see E.2.5.12)

NOTE 1. Fillet welded details are not recommended if the vessel is subjected to
pulsating loads when preference should be given to the details shown in a) to d).
NOTE 2. The sizes of the fillet welds should be based on the loads transmitted paying
due regard to di fabrications and service requirements, but in any case should not be
less than 6 mm.
NOTE 3. Each fillet weld should have a throat thickness not less than 0.7 times the
thickness of the shell or pad whichever is the lesser.
Figure E.32 Studded connections (see also 3.6.4.8) (continued)
E/38 O BSI 1997

Machining allowance
ax. 10mm but not greater than ï/2
Total thickness of shell plate plus weid has to be

adequate for number of threads required
I
(il
,
I
. 1.5 amrox
I__ Coupling to branch joint

I
/
I I
íbl I
NOTE 1. Small couplings i) to iv) inclusive may be attached to shells by the connections shown above and by any other
appropriate joint shown in figures E.12 to E.24.
NOTE 2. For aii sketches see E.2.5.6.
NOTE 3. For all sketches except for a) and b)(iii) see E.2.5.12.
Figure E.33 Socket welded and screwed connections (see also 3.6.4.8)
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards E/39
= L b 2 q b b S Ob70842 b92
~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997
7 Generally machined a f t e r welding
To project when
assembled for
IW
welding
I I
See E.2.5.5
Weld sues
B= t
c= t
A = t (min.) after machining flange to final thickness
(See note 1)
a) Face and back welded flange
See E.2.5.5
-t Generally machined a f t e r welding
Weid sizes
B= t
c= t
A = 1/2 t hut 5 mm min. after machining flange to final thickness
(See note 1)
b) Bore and hack welded flange
NOTE 1. The clearance between the bore of the flange and the outside diameter of the vessel should not exceed 3 mm at any
point and the sum of the clearances diametrically opposite should not exceed 5 mm.
NOTE 2. The connections shown here are applicable as flat end connections, but see also E.2.5.11.
Figure ES4 Flanges
W40 O BSI 1997

~~~
~
STD.BSI BS 5 5 U U - E N G L 1777 Zb24bb7 ü b 7 0 8 4 2 527
Annex E Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5 5 0 : 1997
See E.2.5.2
I I \ r Conventional butt joints
Alternative forms
a) Welding neck flange
t- -t
joints
See E.2 s.5
Weld sizes
B= t
c=t
A = '/it but 5 mm min. after machining flange to ñnai thickness
(See note 1 to figure E.34)
NOTE. The connection shown in b) is applicable as a flat end connection, but see also E.2.6.11.
b) Welding neck flange (fabricated from plate)
Figure E.36 Flanges
O BSI
STD,BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70843 4b5
BS 5 5 0 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex E
'¡gui.e E
c ) Lapped-type flange
Figure E.36 Flanges (continued)

Annex E h e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Generally machined before welding

r3mm min.
\
See note
in cases where hubbed

f l a n g e is not available
See E.2.5.5and E.2.5.12

4 t C C
F2 = 0.7t min.
Fi = t (min.), but should not exceed 16 nun. See alternative detaiis in figure E.34 a) and b)
a) Hubbed flange
Generally machined a f t e r welding See E.2.5.5 and E.2.5.12

/
im min.
note
F, = 0.7t min.
Fi = t (min.), but should not exceed 16 mm. See alternative details in figure E.34 a) and b)
b) Fillet welded flange
NOTE. The clearance between the bore of the flange and the outside diameter of the shell
or branch should not exceed 3 mm at any point and the sum of the clearances
diametrically opposite should not exceed 5 nun.
Figure E.36 Flanges
O BSI
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 Il b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70845 2 3 8
BS 5500 :1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex E
a)
Y,+ Y, 2 1.5tc or 1.5ts
(whichever is smailer)
Figure E.37 Jacketed vessels: typical vesselblocking ring attachments
(see E.2.6.1, E.2.6.6 and E.2.6.7; for notation, see 3.11.3)
I I f:
Minimum throat
Figure E.38 Jacketed vessels: typical blocking ring/jacket attachments

(see E.2.6.1, E.2.6.6 and E.2.6.7; for notation, see 3.11.3)

See E.2.5.1.E,2.5.2,
E.2.5.5, E.2.5.7 \ r Alternative types of butt joint may
be used, but the welding procedure
has to be such as to ensure sound
positive root penetration
r = 4mm
b = 3mm
0
See €25.1,
E. 2.5.5,
E.2.5.7
b = 6mm
g>
NOTE 1. For a) and b), Y 2 tj; these are recommended for type 1 jackets.
NOTE 2. For c), Y 2 0.83tj; this is suitable for both types 1 and 2 jackets.
NOTE 3. For e), f) and g), suitable for both types 1 and 2 jackets.
Figure E.38 Jacketed vessels: typical blocking rindjacket attachments
(see E.2.5.1, E.2.5.5 and E.2.5.7; for notation, see 3.11.3) (continued)
O BSI 1997
w45
STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 1 Lb2LibbS Ob708V7 O00 m
Min.2fc
but need not
exceed 15mm
r ? 3tj
b>
fc
See note 4
fs
.See note 4
---D
D-d
- d
I
y .
min
--
- 2
C>
NOTE 1. For a), Y = tc; this is recommended for type 1jackets oniy
NOTE 2. For b), Y = 0.7tCfor type 1jackets and Y = 0.83tc for type 2 jackets. This is recommended where tj c 16 m.
NOTE 3. For c) and d), Y = 1.25¿, for type 2 jackets. For type 1jackets a fillet weld (Y = 0.7tc) may be used.
NOTE 4. For the sealer ring to sheii welds and jacket to sealer ring welds (if any) the welding procedure should ensure sound
root penetration.
Figure E.39 Jacketed vessels: typical sealer rings (see E.2.6.1, E.2.6.6 and E.2.6.7; for notation
see 3.11.3)

To project when
set for welding
ground flush on
completion
/
Flush type branch attachment using a block (left-hand side) or

backing rings (right-hand side)
a) b)
AU linear dimensions are in millimetres.
Figure E.40 Jacketed vessels: typical through connections
J1 o r J 2
*
z
n
*
t , = 2eCj but not less than 1.25eCyl
a) Welded from one side only
See figure E.l
I M
b) Butt joints (see E.2.5.8)
See figure E.1

\
cc,
c) Butt joints (see E.2.6.8)
Figure E.41 Flat ends and covers (see E.2.5.1)
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards EY47
S T D - B S I BS 55flCI-ENGL 1 9 9 7 LbZllbbS CIb7CIBLI9 9 8 3 ICI
BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 2, September 1997 Annex E
d) Welded from one side oniy e) Welded from both sides

b 2 2e or e - 1.5 mm, whichever is less. b ? 2eCylor e - 1.5 mm, whichever is less.
w ? O.?ew, or 5 mm, whichever is less. w 2 0.7ec,l or 5 mm, whichever is less.
See E.2.5.12
4 I
f) Welded from both sides (see E.2.5.1) g) Welded from both sides
Penetration weld b 2 6 m. Penetration welds b 2 ecy,
Throat of fillet weld w 2 0.25eCylor 5 mm.
t J1 or J2
9
It =.L
2.
h) Welded from both sides i) Welded from one side oniy

=
b %,I b 2 2ecyl
See E.2.6.12 See E.2.5.12
NOTE 1. Restxicted to steels with minimum specified tensile strengths 5 460 N/mm2.
NOTE 2. For details of weld preparations (J1 etc.) see figure E.9.
NOTE 3. Details as shown in figure E.38f and g may also be used for category 3 consîmction.
Figure E.41 Flat ends and covers (see E.2.6.1) (continued)
E/& British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL L977 m L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70B50 b T 5 H
Annex E h e 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
60"
j>
NOTE. This form of construction is not to be used on vessels with an internal diameter exceeding 610 m.
- - _ _ _ /
/
* k>
vi See E.2.5.12
*
Not less than 3mm at

A i;;tii"rp good
I be welded t o f i a t plate
beforef i machining
t to ensure
any position round the

circumference
1)
4-
3 min. t
+s t not less than 2ts
m>
See E.2.5.12
Ail linear dimensions in mm
Figure E.41 Flat ends and covers (see E.2.5.1) (continued)
O BSI
~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-EMGL 1977 L b 2 4 b b 9 O b 7 0 8 5 1 531
+---I
B4 or J4
see E.2.4.1
Alternaiive shell to tubeplate joint with partiai penetration
a)
Weld size. F = 0.7t min. If t exceeds 16 mm, the shell should be bevelled as shown in the alternative sketch above or
consideration should be given to the full penetration joint shown in b).
L = t/3 but not less than 6 mm.

b)
Figure E.42 liibeplate to shell connections: accessible for welding on both sides of the shell
EY50
O BSI 1997
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1997 9 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70852 4-78
Alternative shell to tubeplate joint with p h a i penetration

a)
Weld size. F = 0.7t min. If t exceeds 16mm, the shell should be bevelled as shown in the alternative sketch above or
consideration should be given to the full penetration joint shown in b).
*
Cn
*
J3 o'r 83
see E.2.4.1
L = t/3 but not less than 6 mm
b)
Figure E.43 Tubeplate to shell connections: accessible for welding from outside of shell only
O BSI
~
STDSBSI B S 5500-ENGL 1797 1J Lb24bb7 Ob70853 304
r - - - - ---i
I I
I I
r-------i
\
'..\
1
r-----i
I
'
/ I L------I
I I
I
I - I
I
b)
NOTE.When using these details, special care should be taken to ensure that the tubeplate is not laminated.
Figure E.44 Tubeplate to shell connections: accessible for welding on both sides of
shell (see E.2.6.8)

S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 ILbZLIbb7 ü b 7 0 8 5 4 240
see E.2.512 r-------

I
1
I
\ I I
I-------
1
Weld sizes
D = 0.7t min.
b = 6mmmin.
8 = 30Dmin.
L = tí3 or 6 mm whichever is larger
a) Accessible for welding on both sides of shell
Figure E.& Tuberdate to shell connections
O BSI
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 1 6 2 4 b b 9 ü b 7 0 8 5 5 187
See E.2.5.10 and E2.5.12- +- -i+-- I
.- --
7
1
Weld sizes
L = t/3 but not less than 6 mm
g=5mmmin.
b) Accessible for welding on outside of shell oniy ("his detail is recommended for noncorrosive operating
conditions only).
Figure E.46 Tubeplate to sheil connections (continued)

W
u7
v!
v!
2 a
c)
Qi
c
W hm
v)
--I+-
I /
v!
u!
.=
W
W
vi
O ES1
b)
Weld size. F = 0.72 min. If F exceeds 13 mm preference should be given to the alternative joint details
above.
Figure E.46 Tubeplate to shell connections (continued)

~~ -
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 1 b 2 4 h b 7 Ob70858 7 9 b
F=5mmmin.
a>
Figure E.47 Tubeplate to shell connections
O BSI 1997 w57

h e 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex F & length of main body considered as effective

compensation, measured along the material
An alternative design approach for centre line from the edge of the opening
compensation using the pressure area without a branch or outside of the branch (or
method pad), (see equation (F.3));
NOTE.This method has extensive satisfactory use in European maximum length of pad or compensation plate
codes. The rules given are based on those contained in BS EN 286 Lp
considered to be effective as compensation,
modified slightly to align with proposais for the European unfired
pressure vessel standard currently being developed. measured along the material centre line from
the edge of the opening or outside of the
F.l Scope branch;
The use of this annex is limited to the compensation of p design or calculation pressure;
openings which conform to the geometric limitations
specified in F.3. inside radius of spherical shell, hemispherical
head or spherical portion of torispherical head,
F.2 Symbols inside radius of main body (shell or head), as
rh
Symbols used in this annex are as shown in figures E2 specified in F.4.2;
and E3 and are defined as follows (for any consistent
set of units): w angle ( 550 ") between the branch axis and a
line normal to the main body wall in an
oblique branch connection.
cross-sectional area of branch within the
compensation limits; F.3 Application
cross-sectional area of main body (shell or The design method specified in F.6 only applies to
head) within the compensation limits, cylindrical shells, spherical shells and dished ends
cross-sectional area of pad or compensation having circular or elliptical openings, where the
plate within the compensation limits; assumptions and conditions specified in F.4 are
satisfied.
pressure loaded area (as shown in figures E2
and E3, calculated using internal dimensions); F.4 Assumptions and conàitions
inside diameter of opening or branch; F.4.1 The geometry of the openings or branches and
inside diameter of shell or straight flange of main shell s h d fall within the following limits:
dished head; 4 -= 1
a) cylindrical shells, - 0..1)
Di -
outside diameter of branch
analysis thickness of branch maintained within
4
b) spherical shells and dished ends, -5 0.6 (F.2)
the length&; 2G-n
e) the ratio of branch thickness to main body
analysis thicknes of main body (shell or thickness d e m shall conform to the limits of
head) maintained within the length L,; figure E l
analysis thickness of pad or compensation F.4.2 The distance between openings, branches or
Plate; pads, measured from the edge of the opening or
nominal design stress of main body (shell or outside of the branches and pads shall be not less
head); than &, where:
the lower of the nominal design stress of the LIn = 1i(2., + e,)e, (E31
branch andJ The values to be used for r h are:
the lower of the nominal design stress of the a) for cylindrical sheiis
pad or compensation plate and$ ri, = Di 12 (34)
inside height of an ellipsoidal dished end; b) for spherical shells and hemispherical or
torispherical ends
length of external branch considered as
effective compensation measured from the rim = Tih (F5)
outside surface of the main body (ignoring an e) for semi-elliptical ends
additional compensation plate);
length of internal branch considered as
rim = Di (F1 + 0.02
Where the distance between openings is less than 2Lm,
(Fw
effective compensation, measured from the
inside surface of the main body (ignoring an the requirements of F.6.9 shall apply
additional compensation piate); F.4.3 Openings and branches in dished heads shall be
located in accordance with the iimits illustrated in
figure 3.58.
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards FA
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1737 a l b 2 4 b b 7 0b70860 5 4 4
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex F
F.4.4 Cylindrical shells, spherical shells and ends with F.6.2 Reirbforcement bg increased wall thickness
openings shall be reinforced where necessaq The Where reinforcement is attained by an increased wall
reinforcement of the main body can be obtained by the thickness of the main body, compared with that of the
following measures: shell without openings, this wall thickness shall exist
a) by an increased wall thickness of the main body for no less than a distance Lm (see equation E3)
compared with that of the shell without openings measured from the edge of the opening, as shown in
(seefigures E2a and E2b); figures E2a and E2b.
b) by set-on welded compensation plates (see
figures E2c and E2d);
F.63 Reirbforcement bu compensation plates
c) by set-in welded pads (see figures E2e and E2f); Such plates shall:
d) by setxm or set-in welded branches (see a) have close contact with the main body;
figures E2g and E2h); b) be of similar material to the main body they are
e) by combinations of the above mentioned welded on to. No credit shall be taken for stronger
measures (see ligures E2i and Ea). material in calculating compensation areas.
F.4.6 The reinforcement area of the main body with The width of compensation plates 4,considered as
openings cannot be calculated directly but shall be contributing to the reinforcement, shall not exceed &:
assumed in the first instance. That assumption shall be LpsL, (F.8)
verified by means of the method specified in F.6. The as shown in figures F.2c and F.2d
applied method is based on basic pressure thicknesses
derived from equation (3.1) for cylindrical shells and The value of ep used in the determination of Afp in
íkom equation (3.3) for spherical shells and spherical equation (F.7) shall not exceed e,and the nominal
sections of dished ends respectively and leads to thickness of the compensating plates shall not
relationships between a pressure loaded areaAp and a
exceed 1.5times the nominal thickness of the main
body
stress loaded cross-sectional area which is the sum
of A h , A& and Afi (see figure E2). ep5 1 . h (F.9)
The dculation may need to be repeated using a F.6.4 Reillforcement bu pads
corrected assumption of the reinforcement area. Only pads of the set-in welded type in accordance with
F.4.6 Where necessary, sufficient reinforcement shall figures E2e and F2f shall be used.
be provided in all planes through the axis of the The width of the pads&, Considered as contributing to
opening or branch. the reinforcement, shall not exceed &.
F.4.7 in the case of elliptical openings, the ratio &%Lm (F 10)
between the major and the minor axis shall not The value of q, used in the detemination ofAEp in
exceed 1.5. For design purposes, the diameter of equation (F.7) shall not exceed twice e,,,.
eliiptical openings in cylindrical shells shall be taken as
the opening axis p d e l to the longitudinal axis of the ep 5 2em (F.11)
cylinder. For eiiiptical openings in spherical shells and F.6.6 Reillforcement bg branches
dished ends the major axis shall be so taken. Branch pipes shall meet the requirements of 3.6.4.7
F.4.8 Expanded branches shall not be considered as and F.6.6, F.6.7 or F.6.8, as applicable.
reinforcement and shall be calculated in accordance F.6.6 Branch connections normal to the vessel
with F.6.1. Set+n or set-in branches may be wall
considered as reinforcement provided that the
atRachment weld dimensions conform to annex E. For branch connections n o d to the vessel wall, the
areasA,, Afm,Afi and Am shall be determined in
F.4.9 Reinforcement of openings by compensation accordance with figures E2g and E21, where the
plates is not limited by size. However, the effective lengths contributing to the reinforcement shall be not
width of such plates shall be calculated t a h g only the more than&, for the shell (see equation (E3)), and
main shell thickness, not the combined thickness.
Lb = 4 G F G z J CE 12)
E6 Calculation methodology for the branch.
F.6.1 Fundamental criteria The maximum value to be used in the calculation of
Ail openings shall satisfy the following general the part extending inside, if any, in the case of
relationship: set-through branches (see figures EZh, E2i and Ea)
shail be
P[Ap + 0.5 (Afm + Afb + Afp)] s f l i i n +fpAfp+fil% (F.?
NOTE. Simple formulae for Calculation ofA,, A,, A, and A, for Lb, = 0.5Lb (F 13)
various geometries are given below the diagrams in !$ures F.2 The dimensions of the compensation plate to be used
and E3. These formulae are considered to give acceptable results
within the accuracy of the method. However, if so desired, the in the calculation shall be
designer may calculate more precise values based on the hue %5 a d Lp 5 Lm (E141
geomem.
FI2
O BSI 1997
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1977 = 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob708bl Li80
Annex F Issue 2, May 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
F.6.7 Oblique branch connection in cylindrical F.5.8 Oblique branch connection in spherical
she& shells or dished heads
a) For branches on cylindrical shells lying in a plane For branches in spherical shells, or dished heads, lying
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the shell in a plane that contains the axis of the branch and the
and having an angle y, not exceeding 50" to the centse of the spherical shell, or dished head, having an
normal, the higher stress may occur in the lateral angle y not exceeding 50",as shown in figure E3c, the
section (figure E3a p d view I) or in the reinforcement of the opening shall be c a l c u l w as for
longitudinal section (figure F.3a partial view II). a normal connection in accordance with F.6.6, except
Equation (F.7) shall apply to both cases with the that the value ofA, shall be based on the major axis of
area^ Ap, A h , A@ and Afi as shown in the resultant opening whereas Lb shall be based on the
figure E3a partial views I and II, to be used in the diameter of the branch (not the chord of the opening),
dculation. In both cases, Lb shall be based on the using equation P.12).
diameter of the branch, (not the chord of the F.5.9 Openings and branches less than ZL, apart
opening) using equation v.12).
The reinforcement of each opening or branch shall be
b) Where branches on cylindrical shells lie in a checked individually in accordance with F.6.2 to F.6.8.
radial plane and have an angle y, in the longitudinal In addition, the requirement of F.5.1 shall be satisfied
direction, not exceeding 50" to the normal, as shown for the pressure area between the centselines of the
in figure E3b, the reinforcement of the opening shall ascent openings. The limits for material considered
be calculated as for a normal connection in as contributing to the reinforcement shall be as for the
accordance with F.5.6, except W the value ofAp individual openings except that no material may be
shall be based on the major axis of the resultant considered as contributing to more than one opening
opening whereas Lb shall be based on the diameter or branch.
of the branch (not the chord of the opening), using
equation (F.12).
2.0
1.5
1.o
0.5
0.0
0.0 0.3 0.8 1 .o
Max.
Figure F.l Maximum branch to body thickness ratio
O BSI 1997
F/3
~
S T D - B S I BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1 7 7 7 l b 2 L i b b 7 Ob70ôb2 3 1 7 I
BS 6500 : 1997 Issue 1,J a n m 1997 Annex F
Afm = %Lm
a) Cylindrical shells with isolated openings
A, = emL,
b) Spherical shells and dished heads with isolated openings

Reinforcement by increased w d thickness
Figure E 2 Reinforcement of openings and branches
FI4
Annex F Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Q i I I*
4, = em&
A,, = edL,
dl
Reinforcement by compensating plates
Figure F.2 Reinforcement of openings and branches (continued)
O BSIStandards
COPYRIGHT British 1997 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards FI5
-
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL 1997 l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob708b4 L 7 T I
BS 6500 : 1997 h e 1,January 1997 Annex F
AP = 2- L( m 2)
+-
A, = en&
AfP = e d . P
f)
Reinforcement by pads
F/6 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

Ah=e d m (set-in)
Ah= em (Lm + eb) (set-on)

Am = (Lb + em> (set-in)
= ebLb (set-on)
g)
do
Ap = a
‘;(m L +- a) 2
+-&+em)
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards FI7
STD.BSI BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L - 1 7 7 7 L b 2 4 b b 9 O b 7 0 8 b b Tb2 111
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 2, May 1997 Annex F
FI8 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 m L b 2 ’ i b b ï Ob7üAb7 ï T 7
Annex F Issue 2, May 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Ap L +-
( m
- y2
- 2) 2
+-(&+em)
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards F/9
~ ~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 D l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70ôbô 835 I

BS 5Fioo : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex F
.-
Q
A, = e,L,
* A b = eb (Lb + e,,,). This formula shall be adjusted if weld joins branch of weaker material to the sheil.
k) Extruded branch in a cylindrical shell.
A, = emLm
= eb (em + hi>
1) Intruded branch in a dished end
FA0 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

~
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1997 L b 2 4 b b 9 O b 7 0 8 b ï 771
Annex F Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Detail Z
l e x
A, = e J m (set-in)
(set-on)
(set-in)
= (set-on)
Partial view I
a) Cylindrical shell with a branch not mdiaily arranged (off centre)
Figure E3 Reinforcement of non-radial branches
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards FA1
~~ ~
STD.BS1 B S 5500-EN¿L 1 7 7 7 W L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70870 473

BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 2, May 1997 Annex F
O .-
Q 4
Section X-X
A , = en& (set-in)
A h = em (Lm + eb) (set-on)

A , = eb (Lb + e,) (set-in)
A, = e& (set-on)
Partial view II
a) Cylindrical shell with a branch not radially arranged (off centre)
Figure F.3 Reinforcement of non-radial branches (continued)
FI12 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

m
* b) Cylindrical sheii with a branch not radially arranged (oblique)
*
Figure F.3 Reinforcement of non-radid branches (continued)
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards FI13
~~ ~ ~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 ILb2Libb7 üb70872 2bb

BS 6500 :1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex F
A,= e,L,
c ) Spherical shell with a branch not radially arranged

Figure F.3 Reinforcement of non-radiai branches (continued)
FI14
O BSI 1997
~
~~
~~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL li777 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70873 I T 2
Annex G 6.2 Local loads on pressure vessel shells35)

Recommendations for methods of 6.2.1 General
calculation of stresses from local loads, 6.2.1.1 Introduction
thermal gradients, etc. This clause is concerned with the effect on the shell of
6.1 General a pressure vessel of local forces and moments which
may come from supports, equipment supported from
This annex, which has been updated in accordance the vessel, or from thnists from pipework connected to
with the recommendations in deals with branches. Limits on VesseYattachment geomem,
methods of calcuhting stresses due to local without which the methods given may be unreliable,
attachments on pressure vessels in some common are also stated.
cases. The determination of stress intensities from
calculated stresses and stress limits is covered in Stresses due to local loads and moments applied to
annexes A and B. cylindrical sheiis through attachments, including
are dealt with in 6.2.2 and 6.2.3.
Although it is impracticable in view of the many
variables involved to provide charts for use in the The methods in 6.2.2 cover the determination of
design and analysis of pad reinforced nozzles, stresses at the edge of the loaded areas (G.2.2.1),
references to some work in this field, which has been stresses away from the edge of the loaded
published in a form consistent with the approach in area (6.2.2.2) and deflections in a cylindrical shell due
this standard, have been included [33 to 351. to the application of radial load (6.2.2.3).
Although a simplified method for estimating transient Details are given in 6.2.3 of how to treat
the& stresses at a pressure vessel nozzle is included, circumferential moments (6.2.3.1) and longituàid
it is not considered practicable to provide design moments (6.2.3.2) in order to determine the maximum
charts for more general use in estimating thermal stresses at the outer edge of the a c W loaded
stresses because of the large number of vanables area (6.2.3.3) and the rotation of the attachment due
involved (see [22]). The designer will therefore have to to the application of these moments (6.2.3.4) to a
treat each vessel on an individual basis, and consider cylindrical shell.
the thermal stresses which arise, during both transient Stresses due to local loads and moments applied to
and steady state operation, according to the duty that spherical shelis through attachments including
the vessel has to perform. Where a comprehensive nozzles36) are dealt with in 6.2.4 to 6.2.6.
stress analysis is not justiñed, the various components A method is given in 6.2.4 for calculating stresses and
of thermal stress in the most highly stressed regions of deflections due to radial loads (6.2.4.2) and stresses
the vessel can be considered separately. These are the and deflections and slopes due to an external
stresses brought about by the following: moment (6.2.4.3) when applied to a spherical
a) the local through thickness temperature gradient; shell. 6.2.6 and 6.2.6 deal with the method of
b) the axisymmetrical component of the mid-wall calculating stresses arising at a nozzldshell junction
temperature distribution throughout the structure; due to application of pressure, external load and
external moment to a spherical shell. The method is
c) the non-symmetric component of the mid-wall based on the analysis given in [25]. Additional
temperature distribution; information based on [27] is supplied on the method of
d) the variation in through thickness temperature calculating shakedown conditions (6.2.6) and a
gradient throughout the structure. shell/nozzle junction due to any combination of
The bending and membrane components of the local pressure, extenial load and external moment.
thermal stress, when added to the stresses at the same The application of the daîa to the treatment of thrusts
position due to local loads and the stresses due to due to thermal forces in pipework which may be
internal pressure, should satisfy the criteria of annex k connected to branches is discussed in 6.2.7 its
Attention is also drawn to the recommendations given application to the design of supports is treated in 6.3.
in annex C to avoid fatigue cracking.
The dah are presented in the form of charts in terms
NOTE.If the loaded nozzle area or opening is less than 2 . 5 6 of non-dimensional functions of the variables so that
from another stress concentrating feature, stresses as calculated
in accordance with annex G become unreliable and some other any convenient system of consistent units may be
method of assessing the total stress, for example finite element used.
stress analysis or proof test,is required.
34)Thenumbers in square brackets used throughout this annex relate to the bibliographical references given in G.5.
'')An abbreviated procedure has been derived [43].
36)3.6.4gives a basic design procedure for branches in both cylindrical and spherical vessels under pressure which requires reference to
this annex in certain cases (see 3.5.4.3.1). The procedure specified in 3.5.4 for vessels and cylinders is based on considerations of
shakedown under pressure loading as desu-ibed in PD 6550 : Part 2 : 1989.
O BSI 1997
GA
~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1 9 9 7 Lb2LibbS Ob70874 0 3 9 m
BS 66ûû : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Annex G
6.2.1.2 Notation S is the position in shell at which force,

For the purposes of 6.2.1 to 6.2.4 the following moment or deflection is required;
symbols apply. t is the wall analysis thickness of shell
(in mm);
is the half length of side of square loading U defines the area over which the load is
area (in mm); distributed
is the half side of equivalent square W is the external load distributed over the
10- area (in mm); loading area (in N);
is the correction factor for a cylindrical X is the longitudinal distance of a point in
shell, longitudinal moment calculation; the vessel wall from the cenire of a
is the half length of rectangular loading loading area (in mm);
area in longitudinal direction (in mm); 6 is the deflection of cylinder at load or at
is the half length of rectangular loading any point of a sphere (in mm);
area in circumferential direction (in mm);
4 is the deflection of cylinder or sphere at
is the axial length of loading area for an positions detajled in 6.2.3.4 and 6.2.4.3
external longitudinal moment (see (in mm);
figure G.22) (in mm); 8 is the polar coordinate of point on a
is the circumferential length of 10- spherical vessel (in radians);
area for an external circumferential is the cylindrical coordinate of a point in
v,
moment (see figure G.21) (in mm); the vessel wall ( i radians);
is the distance from centre of applied load is the angle formed by the radius through
to mid-length of vessel (in mm); Pl
point A and the radius to the line load (see
is the modulus of elasticity (in N/mm2); figure G.10a) (in radians).
is the resultant longitudinal stress
(in N/mm2); 6.2.2 Radial loads on cylindrical shells
is the resultant circumferential stress The methods in this clause are not considered
(in Nhnm2); applicable in cases where the length of the cylinder L
is less than its radius r (see [30]). This applies either to
is the rotation of a fitting by an external
an open-ended cylinder or a closed-ended cylinder
moment (in radians); where the stiffness is appreciably modified from the
is the slope of a branch due to extemai case considered. For offcentre atbchments the
moment; distance from the end of the cylinder to the edge of
are c0nstant.q the attachment should be not less than rl2.
is the length of cylindrical part of shell In addition the C+ír ratio should not exceed that given
in figure G.l, dependmg on the value of rlt for the
(in mm);
vessel (see section k3.2 of [30]). This is because in thin
is the equivalent length of shell (in mm); shells the longitudinal axis is relatively flexible and
is the external moment applied to branch free to deform in relation to the transverse axis,
or fitting (in Nmm); causing the latter to cany a disproportionate share of
is the longitudinal or meridional bending the load. The applicabiiity of the methods to thick
moment per unit circumference shells is also limited in specific cases by the range of
(in N.mm/mm); rlt d u e s against which data is given.
For values of C&- > 0.25, the data should be used with
is the circumferentiaì bending moment per caution (see 2.3 of [22]).
unit length (in N m m h n ) ;
These restrictions apply only in relation to the method
is the longitudinal membrane force per of analysis in this annex They are not intended for
unit circumference (in Nlmm); practical cases where experimental or other evidence
is the circumferential membrane force per may support the validity of the design falling outside
unit length (in Nhnm); these restrictions.
is the mean radius of cylinder or sphere In cases where the applicabdity of the method given in
(imm); this clause may be in doubt further data may be found
is the mean radius of branch ( i mm); in [30].
GI2 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 m L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70875 T 7 5
Annex G Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5600 : 1997
I
I I
l
1 I
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
O 100 200 300

r
7 = --c
t
Figure G.l Restriction on VesseUattachment geometry (see 6.2.2 and 6.2.3)
6.2.2.1 Stresses at the edge of the loaded area 6.2.2.1.1 08--centreloading

The maxjmum stresses are at the edge of the loaded If the loaded area is a distance d from the centre of
area Figure G.2 shows a cylindrical vessel subjected to the length of a vessel of length L, the deflections,
a radial load distributed over a central rectanguiar area bending moments and membrane forces may be
ZC, x zc., assumed to be equal to those in a vessel of length Le
The cylindrical shell wall of the vessel is assumed to loaded at its mid-length. Le is called the equivalent
be simply supported at the ends, which means that the length and can be found from:
radial deflections, the bending moments and the 4d2
membrane forces in the sheil wall are assumed to be L,=L--
L
zero there. Since the stresses and deflection due to the
load are local and die out rapidly away from the Figure G.3 shows a cylindrical shell loaded in this way
loaded area, this is equivalent to assuming that the and figure G.4 gives a graph of LJL against dlL which
loaded area is remote from the ends. can be used to find Le.
O BSI 1997
G/3
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 L b Z q b b 9 Ob7087b 901 m
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex G
W
r Yr
Le 12 ¡,I2
L a -
AA
r-
I I
I Equivalent length' Le I
w---i I
I I
I - - - 7-
I
I

Annex G Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
1.0
0.75
0.5
4
\
W
4
0.25
i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i l
O o. 1 0.2 0.3 O .4
d / L
Figure 6.4 Graph for finding equivalent length Le
6.2.2.1.2 DetemLinat.iOn of stresses Each of the four graphs in each set is for a given value
of the ratio 2Cx/L and has curves for four values of the
The resultant longitudinal stress in the shell is given
by:
ratio c+/cx.
The circumferential moment M,+ is found from
figure G.6. The longitudinal moment M, is found from
figure G.7. The circumferential membrane force N+ is
The resultant circumferential stress is given by: found from figure G.8. The longitudinal membrane
force N, is found from figure G.9.
f++?
A moment is considered as positive if it causes
N, and N4 are positive for tensile membrane stresses. compression at the outside of the vessel.
Mxand M+ are positive when they cause compression A membrane force is considered as positive if it causes
at the outer surface of the sheli. tension in the vessel wall.
These quantities depend on the ratios: 6.2.2.1.3 Eflect of internal and extemal pressure
axial length of load - -2CX A conservative result is obtained for total stresses if
actual or equivalent length - L the siresses due to the pressure are simply added to
those due to local radial loads calculated in this clause.
and
This method cannot be used for vessels under external
circumferential length of loaded area -- ZC, pressure because the deflection due to the radial load
axial length of loaded area 2CX always increases the out-of-roundness of the shell. For
For a radial or a circular area of radiw Y,, C+ and C, the same reason it should not be applied to a
should be taken as 0 . 8 5 ~ ~ . cylindrical shell subject to an axial compressive load
For an oblique nozzle or eiliptical area C+ and C, as well as a radial load. In these cases the deflection
should be taken as 0.42 X the major and minor axis of due to the radial load should be found as in 6.2.2.3
the intersection of the shell or area as appropriate. and the effect thereof assessed in relation to shape
Non-dimensional functions of each can be expressed in requirements specified in 3.6 for such vessels. Annex M
t e m of the non-dimensional group: is intended for use with deflections due to shape
imperfections and may not always be conservative
with estimated deflections due to local loads
The numerical factor 64 is a scale factor without
theoretical significance and the value of the expression
can be found by calculation or from figure G.5
when r, t and C, are known. The moments and
membrane forces are found by interpolation from the
graphs of figures G.6, G.7, G.8, G.9.
O BSI 1997
G/5
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL Lï77 m L b 2 4 b b ï Ob70878 784
BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Annex G
64; $2() Values o f r / f

500 400 300 200 100
50
1000 20
10
100
10
1.0
0.4
O 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
C, / r
Figure G.6 Chart for finding 64

~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70679 blCI
l L
O.4
O.3
0.2
o. 1
O
I 0.4 1 10 1 O0 1000 0.4 1 10 100 1000
64; ($)2 6 4 :t ($)'
1
\
E"
o. 2 0.2
0.1 0.1
O O
CC l 10 1O0 1000 0.4 I 10 1O0 1O00
t
64z (-$)2 64; (+)*
NOTE. 64
'7 7 is found from figure G.5.
Figure G.6 Cylindrical shells with radial load: circumferential moment per miliimetre width
(see 6.2.2)
O BSI 1997 GI7

- ~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 m Zb24bb7 Ob70880 3 3 2

BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,Januaty 1997 Annex G
O. 3 2 C x / L = 0.01 I
?
€!
0.2
0.1
O
0.4 1 10 1O0 1000 0.4 1 10 100 1000
6 4 t1 (+)2
0.3 O.3
1 3
X \
P zx
0.2 o. 2
o. 1 o. 1
I I I I l I I I V I I
ot-” I iII1i-H I i=-ifl O
0.4 1 10 1O0 1000 0.4 1 10 100 1000
64; (+)2 6 4 tL ($y
NOTE. 64 7
‘(“.r
7 is found from figure G.5.
Figure 6.7 Cylindrical shells with radial load longitudinal moment per millimetre width
(see 6.2.2)
GB O BSI 1997
~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 W L b 2 4 b b 9 ü b 7 0 8 8 1 2 7 7 I
-0.3 - 0.3
=-.
I: 1
\
a
:-
2c, / L = 0.01 2CX/L=0.05
=? 2.
- 0.2 -0.2
- 0.1 - 0.1
I I I II I I I I I I ’N
0 1 O
0.4 1 10 100 1000 0.4 1 10 100 1000
64; (+)* t
64r (+)*
-0.3 - 0.3
1 1
\
x :
P P
*
B
* - 0.2 - 0.2
- 0.1 - 0.1
111 I I1111111 I I I I I
- - O O
0.4 1 10 1O0 1000 0.4 1 10 100 1000
6 4 1t: (+)* t
64r (-!$y
‘PJ
NOTE. 64 - - is found from figure G.5.
t r
Figure 6.8 Cylindrical shells with radial load circumferential membrane force per
millimetre width (see 6.2.2)
O BSI 1997 G/9

=
~
~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 W L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70882 L O 5
-0.2
,-O.lS
c
0.1
-0.05
O
0.4 1 10 100 1000
CJC, 2CJL = 0.2 C,/C, 2 C x / L =0.4

-01.15 -0.15
1 -0.1 1-0.1
: :
T
-0.O5 -0.05
O O
0.4 10 1 O0 1000 0.4 1 10 100 1000
64r
f ($)'
is found from figure G.5.
Figure G.9 Cylindrical shells with radial load: longituàinal membrane force per millimetre
width (see 6.2.2)
~ ~~~
GAO
O BSI 1997
STDmBSI BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 IL b 2 4 b b 9 O b 7 0 8 8 3 O 4 1 I
Annex G Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 :1997
6.2.2.2 Stresses away fm the edge of the loaded Consider a radial line load of length ZC,, applied at the
arm mid-length of a thin cylinder as shown in figure G.lOa.
Although the maximum stresses occur at the edge of The maximum stresses due to this load at points away
the load, it is necessary to find those at other positions from it are on the circumference passing through its
when the effect of one load at the position of another mid-length as A in the figure. The radius through A
is required. makes an angle pl with the line of the load.
This happens The moments and membrane forces at A, M+, M,, N+
N,, can be found from the graphs of
a) when longitudinal or circumferential moments are figures G.lO, G.ll, G.12 and G.13 in which the functions
resolved as in 6.2.3;
M e M x m N+UW and N,t/W are plotted against the
b) when loads are applied close together, e.g. if a nondimensional group p1r/Cr
bracket is fixed close to a branch. The diagram showing the load and its geometq as
In general the effect of one load at the position of figure G.lOa, is repeated on each chart for
another can be disregarded when the distance between convenience.
the centres of the loaded areas is greater than KlC+ Line loads are, of c o m , unusual in practice, and
for loads separated circumferentidy or K2Cx for loads loads distributed over an area having an appreciable
separated where Ki and K2 are found from circumferential width 2C+ are treated as follows.
table G.l and C+ and C, are for the grater load.
a) Find the value of the function M d q Mx/W N+UW
or NX#W at the edge of the load for the known
Table 6.1 Values of KI and A values of CdC, and 2Cx/L from the graphs in
figures G.6,G.7,G.8 and G.9.
. , b) Enter the corresponding graph in
0.4 0.01 a figure G.10,G.ll, G.12, or G.13 at this value.
0.05 6 The intercept on the curve for 2C,/L gives a value of
0.2 3 qqr/Cx = Z, e.g. if 64(r/t)(Cx/r)2
= 10, 2Cx/L= 0.01 and
0.4 1.5 CdCX= 1. Figure G.6 gives M+/W = O. 185. Entering
figure G.10 at M d W = O. 185 gives Z = 0.55 for
* 10 0.01 3
2Cx/L = 0.01 as indicated by the dotted lines in the
u1
* 0.05 2.5
0.2 1.5 left-hand graph of figure G.lO.
0.4 1.5 e) The value of M f l at A is then found by
substituting (plr/Cx + Z - CdCA for the actual value
5 of qqr/CXin the same graph.
4
Negligible The other quantities M x m N + W Nxt/W can be found
2.5
1.75 in the same way. This method is used in order to avoid
the use of a separate set of four charts for each value
3200 All values Negligible 2.5 of C+/C, considered
NOTE. The value of the nondimensional factor 64 Diagrams for circumferential bending moments and
forces are printed up the page to distinguish them
found from fi m e G.5. from those for longitudinal moments and forces which
are printed across the page.
6.2.2.2.1 Variation of stress round the circumference When the centse of the load is away from the
No exact analytical treatsrient of the variation of stress mid-length of the cylinder, the equivalent length Le,
round the circumference away from the edge of the found as in 6.2.2.1, should be substituted for L in all
loaded area is available. The following treatment is an cases.
approximation sufficiently accurate for practical For variation of stress along the cylinder due to radial
purposes. For an experimental verification of it loading see 6.2.2.2.2.
see [17].
O BSI 1997 GA1

~
~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 II L b 2 4 b b 9 0 b 7 0 8 8 4 T ô ô m
BS 5Mw) : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex G
(\I
a
Ln O rn-
8 8
c
OI
a)
12
-a
Ln
VI
Cu
._
N VI
9
h -.
in
O
d o
O
9
O
I
G/12 O BSI 1997

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 I1 b 2 4 b b 7 O b 7 0 8 8 5 714 I
moment per unit __

circumference at
(ai
For these values o f 64 -
O 1 2 3 4 5 6
NOTE. These charts apply in any consistent system of units.
Figure G.11 Longitudinal moment from radial line load variation round circumference
(see 6.2.2.2.1)
O BSI 1997 GA3

~
S T D - B S I B S 55170-ENGL 1 9 9 7 Lb2LibbS Ub7088b 8 5 0 m

BS 5500 : 1997 h e 3, September 1997 Annex G
-aJ
if
Q)
ul
,-.+..-
-wirin r i 1 III I II I I i I Ii I I I I
c o m.- I 1 in I I I 1 1 I I I I I I I i I I I I O
c*l v1 v1 O u
l ln Ln O ul
O != !c
o c 0
Iz
9 8 hl
9
c-4
9
I O I O I O O O
I I I +
M/PN I
GA4
O BSI 1997
S T D * B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 IL b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70887 7 7 7
- 0.2 - 0.2
-0.15 - 0.15
k
- 0.1 1 - 0.1
c c
=ix s?
- 0.05 - 0.05
O O
+0.05 +0.05
O .2 4 6 8 10 12 O 2 4 6c c8 10
m
-
-0.15
- O.
k
\
*
z
X
O o. 5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4
- 0.05
+o.os
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 6.13 Longitudinaì membrane force from radial line load variation round circumference
(see 6.2.2.2.1)
O BSI 1997
COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards GA5
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 W l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70888 b 2 3
6.2.2.2.2 Variation of stress along the cylinder 6.2.2.3 Defictions of cyiindrical shells due to radial
locub
Consider a radial line load, U: distributed over a length
2C, as shown in figure G.14a The deflections of a cylindrical shell due to local load
Values of M+, M,, N+, and N, at A can be found from are required for
the graphs of figures G.14, G.15, G.16 and G.17 in which a) finding the movement of a vessel shell due to the
the functions M f l M x m N+tíW and N,t/W are plotted thrust of a pipe connected to it;
against xIC, for given values of 64 (rlt)(Cxlr)2and b) finding the rotation of a branch due to a moment
2CX/L. applied by a pipe connected to it. (See 6.2.3.)
The resultant stresses in the shell a t A are given by: The deflection of the shell due to radial load is a
function of the non-dimensional parameters rlt, & E r ,
and Llr which is given by the full lines in the charts as
follows:
N 6Mx
longitudinal stress,fx = 2 figure G.18a for d u e s of rlt between 15 and 40;
t - F
The values for xlCx less than 1.0, for which no curves figure G.18b for d u e s of rlt between 40 and 100;
are plotted, fail within the loaded lengths, and the figure G.19 for values of rlt greater than 100.
curves should not be extended into this region. The In the case of a cylindrical shell, the deflections
values for x/Cx = 1 correspond to the maximum calculated are those at the centre of the attachment.
stsesses found from figures G.6, G.7, G.8, and G.9 for The method does not calculate deflections at any other
CdCX= o. position.
The diagr;un showing the load and its geometsy as For a central load, L is the actual length of the vessel.
figure G.14a has been repeated on each chart for For a load out of centre, L is the equivalent length Le
convenience. found as in 6.2.2.1.
D i for circumferential bencihg moments and For a point load, the d u e of GEr/W is given by the fuii
forces are printed up the page to distlliguish them line from the appropriate horizontal Ur line in the top
from those for longitudinal moments and forces which right-hand extension of each diagram as in the
are printed across the page. example with figure G.18.
For a load distributed over an area 2Cx X 2C4, the For a load distributed over a square of side 2C, the
moments and membrane forces at any value of xIC, value of GErIW is given by a h e joining the
are reduced in the same ratio as the corresponding intersections of the Llr and Clr lines in the top
values at the edge of the load found from right-hand and bottom left-hand extensions of each
figuresG.6, G.7, G.8 andG.9, Le. in the ratio: diagram as shown by the dotted line and example on
value for actuaì CdC, figure G.19.
value for CdC, = O The deflection due to a load distributed over a circular
Example. area of raàius r, is approximately the same as that for
A vessel is 2.5 m diameter X 6 m long X 12 mm thick a square of side 1.7rw
AradialloadWisappliedtoanarea300mmsquareat The deflection due to a load distributed over a
the mid-length of the shell. Find the circumferential rectangular area 2Cx X 2C4, is approximately the same
moment at a position 600 mm from the centre of the as that for an equivalent square of side 2C1 where Cl
loaded area measured along the axis of the vessel. is obtained as follows:
C+ = C, = 150 mm; r = 1250 mm; rlt = 104; Cl = when C, > C+ (G.1)
Cxlr= 0.12;2C,lL = 0.05; xlC, = 4 Cl = (C+)o.93 X when C+ > Cx (Ga
For a line load, interpolating in figure G.14 (or from figure G.20)
M@V = 0.054 at XIC, = 4 Equation (G.l) applies to a rectangular area in which
From figure G.6 at the ends of a line load when the long axis is parallel to the axis of the cyiinder.
CdC, = O, 64(r/t)(C,lr)2 = 90, and 2C,lL = 0.05, Equation (G.2) applies to a rectangular area in which
M@V= 0.153 and when CdC, = 1.0, MdW = 0.072 the long axis is circumferential.
:. when the load is distributed over an area 300 mm
square
.-.the circumferential moment at x = 0.025W
GI16
O BSI 1997
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 7 9 7 E 1b2i-lbb9 ü b 7 0 8 8 9 5bT =
.-2 :
u n O O
7
O 8 t-
8 8 N
O
M/% M/% o
Q) m
* PI
m
*
\D
rn rn
U 4
rn m
N N
c c
O
5
O
'? N 7
O
O
o M h o
O BSI 1997
GA7
0.175
0.15
0.125
0.10
?
€x
0.075
0.05
0.02 5
O
O 1 2 3 4 5 6
Longitudinal moment per unit

circumference at A = M,
0.05 0.025 l i i i i i i i i i i i i i i I
0.04 0.02
&0.03 0.015
\
E"
Pzx
0.02 0.01
0.01 0.005
O n"
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 O 1 2 3 4 5
NOTE.These charts apply in any consistent system of units.
Figure G.16 Longitudinal moment due to a radial line load variation along cylinder
(see 6.2.2.2.2)

~
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 m L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob7DöîL L L B m

Annex G Issue 1, J a n u q 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
o,
OD
r.
W i
5
$
2
a
Q
fi
E
3
.- E
m E
o
N
LI I I I I I I I I I I1 I I I I I I I I I I IVeo
m
-!
O 2 0
VI
7
c
o
ul
9
O O
I
I MAON
I +
O BSI 1997 G/19

S T D = B S I B S 5500-ENGL L997 R l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70892 0.54 R
T
Longitudinal membrane force A
per unit circumference at A d x
Load
O 2 4 6 8 10 O 1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 6.17 Longitudinal membrane force due to a radial line load variation along cyiinde
(see 6.2.2.2.2)
GE0 O BSI 1997

s
2
c
.C
M
.-E1
8
J/7
E
8
3
Y
.-c
a
ô
O
II
s
O
Y
?
c
O
cf
O
W
VI
N *-
\
c
N
O
=
*/I J / ,
-4 m
OVO1 INlOd
J/7
O ES1
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards GE1
~
S T D - ß S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70894 9 2 7 W
40
30
20
15
c
'80 2
6
5
4
3
cci
_-j
$820
15
.= 10
4 8
6
5
4
35 2 100 110 120 130140150 180 200 220 240260280300
Example. Find SErlW for Llr = 5, Clr = L/, rlt = 180. Enter Llr = 5 at both sides of chart, move horizontally to Clr = 9í. Join
intersection poinîs. Enter rlt at 180, move vertically to intersection line, then move horizontally and read 6ErIW = 55 000.
NOTE 1. For values of rlt less than 100 see figure G.18.
NOTE 2. Values of 6 are exclusive of the deflection of the whole shell as a beam.
Figure G.19 Maximum radial deflection of a cylindrical shell subjected to a radial load W
uniformly distributed over a square 2C X 2C
Gí22
Q BSI 1997
~~
STD.BSI BS 5.500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 W L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70875 A b 3

a) When C, is less than C,
10.0
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
\
G-3.0
2.5
.."
1.o 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
c, I C ,
b) When C+ is greater than C,
Figure 6.20 Graphs for finding the square 2C1 X 2Cl equivalent to
a rectangular loading area ZC, X 2C+
O BSI 1997
GI23
6.2.3 External moments applied to cylindrical The quantities with subscript 1 are equal to those for a
shells load W distributed over an area of 2C+ X 2Cx and are
External moments can be applied to the shell of a found from figures G.6, G.7, G.8 and G.9.
vessel by a load on a bracket or by the reaction at a Quantities with a subscript 2 are equal to those due to
bracket support. a similar load at a distance x = 5Cxfrom the centre of
For design purposes external moments are considered the loaded area for a longitudinal moment or at an
as described in 6.2.3.1 to 6.2.3.4. angle of qq = 5Cdr from the radius through the centre
The results are not considered applicable in cases of the loaded area for a circumferential moment. These
where the length of the cylinder, L, is less than its can be neglected if the value of Kz, from table G.l,
radius r (see [30]). For off-centre attachments the corresponding to the value of 2Cx/L for a longitudinal
distance from the end of the cylinder to the edge of moment, or that of Ki corresponding to the value of
the attachment should be not less than r/2. 2Cx/L for a circumferential moment, is less than 5.0.
In addition, the ratios C&r (6.2.3.1) and Otherwise they are found as follows.
C$r (6.2.3.2) should not exceed those given in a) For a iongitudind moment
fígure G.l, depending on the value of r/t for the vessels. 1) W e x/Cx = 5.0 and obtain values for a radial
For corresponding values of Cx/r and Cz/2r > 0.25 the line load from figures G.14, G.15, and G.16. It may
data should be used with caution (see [22]). be necessary to use different values of Le
These restrictions apply only in relation to the method (see 6.2.2.1) for the two resolved loads if the
of analysis in this annex. They are not intended for moment is distributed over an area which is not
practical cases where experimental or other evidence smaìl compared with its distance from the nearer
may support the validity of the design falling outside end of the vessel.
these restrictions. 2) Correct these values for a total circumferential
In cases where the applicabjlily of the method given in width equal to 2C+ as in the example in 6.2.2.2.2.
this ciause may be in doubt further data may be found b) For a cimmfërential moment
in [30].
1) Find the values at the edge of the loading area
6.2.3.1 Cimmfërential moments 2C+ X 2Cx from figures G.6, G.7, G.8 and G.9.
A circumferential moment applied to a rectangular area 2) Enter the corresponding graph in
Ce X 2Cx (see figure G.21) is resolved into two figure G.lO, G.ll, G.12 or G.13 at thisvalue. The
opposed loads: intercept on the curve for 2Cx/L gives a value of
f W = E acting on rectangles of sides 2C+ X 2Cx, !!y= z
ce CX
where C+ = -, ce which are separated by a distance of 3) The values for quantities with subscript 2 are
6 91,)" = G
-4 + Z from
then given by the ordinate for -
2Ce
-between centres. c x cx
3 the same graph.
For a round branch Ce = 1.7r0 = 2Cx 6.2.3.4 Rotation due to extemal moments
6.2.3.2 Longitudid moments It is sometimes required to find the rotation of a
Similarlx a longitudinal moment, applied to an area branch or bracket due to a moment applied to it. This
2C+ X C, (see figure G.22) is resolved into two is given approximately by
opposed loads
i = 361
- for a circumferential moment or
fW = K M acting on rectangles of sides 2C+ X 2Cx, Ce
CZ
3 1
cz which are separated by a distance of i=- for a longitudinal moment
where Cx = -, CZ
6
2cz where 61 is the deflection produced by one of the
-between centres.
3 equivalent loads W = - 5M or = -1.5M acting on an area
For a round branch C, = 1.7r0 = 2C+. CZ
of 2C+ X 2Cx as defined in figure G.21 or G.22; 61 is
6.2.3.3 Maximum stresses found from figures G.18 and G.19.
The maximum stresses due to the moment occur at the
outer edges of the actual loaded area The
circumferential and longitudinal moments and
membrane forces are given by:
M+ = M+1- M+2
Mx = Mx1 -Mxz
N+ = N+1 - N+z
Nx = Nx1- N d
GD4 O BSI 1997

STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1 7 9 7 l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70877 b 3 b
Exampk. A vessel is 2.5 m diameter X 4 m long X

12 mm thick; E = 1.86 X lo6 N / m 2 . !&
'W = +0.012 X 0.475 = 0.005
Find the maximum stress due to a longitudinal
moment of 1.13 X lo6 N m m applied to a branch - - - -0.085 X 0.824 = -0.070
Nx2t
W
350 mm diameter at the mid-length, and the slope of
the branch.
M+ = W &
! - !k
cz (w w ) = 5650 (0.09 - 0.023)
c+=,= 0.85 x 175 = 150 mm = 5650 X 0.067 = 379 N.mmhnm
w = k -15M
=f
CZ
1.5 X 1.13 X lo6 =
2 X 150
5650
MX = W (% 9) 5650(0.076
- = - 0.0057)
W acts on an area 2C+ X 2C,, where C, = 5 = 50 mm = 5650 X 0.0703 = 396 N.mm/mm

6
W N t N t
For this C =6- = 3-C,= - - 50
A
IV+ =- t (-$- - -$)= (-0.155 - 0.0215)
0.04,
area: C, 2 ' r 1250 - = 470 X (-0.1765) = -83N/mm
5 --2 X 50 = 0.025
L - 4000
= 470 X -0.07 = -33Nhnm
Flom figure G.5, 64 -r (-
G g = 10.
t r Maximum circumferential and longitudinal stresses can
The direct effect of each load W is found by then be determined in accordance with 6.2.2.1.2.
interpolating for CdCX= 3.0 in the charts of These will appear as both compressive and tensile
figures G.6, G.7, G.8 and G.9 for 2Cx/L = 0.025 which stresses depending on which edge of the loaded area is
gives: being considered
M+i/W= 0.09; M,l/W= 0.076; N+lUW = -0.155;
Nxlt/w = -0.14
The effect of one load at the outer edge of the other is
circumferential stress = + f
* = -6.92 15.8 (Wpositive)

v,
* found by interpolating for 64(r/t)(Cxlr)2= 10,
XE,= 5.0 and 2Cx/L = 0.025 in the charts of :. *
Maximum circumferential stress = 22.72 N / m 2
figures G.14, G.15, G.16 and G.17 for a radial line load,
and multiplying the results by a correction factor for Longitucìinal -
- NX f6Mx
the circumferential width of the load as in 6.2.2.2.2. stress t t 2
The values interpolated from figures G.14 to G.17
denoted by subscript 3, are:
= -2.75 * 16.5 (W positive)
M + f l = 0.065; M,$W = 0.012; N+3t/W = + 0.025; :. Maximum longitudinal stress = 19.25N/mm2
NaUW = - 0.085.
S7ope due to numzent. For this area CdC, = 3, and
I I
Quantity Values for Fignre
C,/C,=O
Correction factor =
value for C,/C, = 3
value for C,/C, = O
from figure G.20b the half side of the equivalent square
Ci = 2.8CX= 140ïììm.
In figure G.18b:
G.6 Cl/r = 0.112;
-- - 0.353
19 10.255
G.7
0.255 L/r = 3.2;
r/t = 100;
-- - 0.475
0.16 whence õEr/W = 17 O00
1.7 X 104 X 5650 - o.414
I" " I -o*18
G.8
G.9
-0.155
--
-0.18
-0.14
--
- 0.861 :.a1 = 1.86 X lo5 X1250 -
- 0.824 and from 6.2.3.4, the . 361

-0.17 t = -
slope cz
Hence - 3 X 0.414
- 300
@!! = +0.065 X 0.353 = 0.023 = 0.004 14 radians
W
N
W
x t x 0.861 = 0.0215
= +0.025
O ES1 1997 GI25

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 9 7 Cs Lb2LIbbS û b 7 0 8 9 ô 5 7 2
Figure 6.21 Circumferential moment Figure 6.22 Longitudinal moment
O BSI 1997
~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 E l b 2 4 b b 9 Ub70899 LI09 I
Suggested working form G1 Load case:
Shell mean raàius r = Shell thickness t = Shell length L = Offset from centre Moment M, =
lined=
For nozzle or circular Nozzle mean radius C+ = 1.7r0 =
Pad r, = c, = O.&, =
note I
For rectangular pad Ce = circumferential length =
Cx = %(axiallength) =
_r - W = -1.5Mc
- -
t- Ce
From table G.l, KI =

!F=
with -e From figure G.6 From figure G.7 From figure G.8 I From figure G.9
CX
as above I
z= From figure G.ll From figure G.12 I From figure G.13

!u---
CX
with From figure G.10 From firne G.11 From figure G.12 I Rom figure G.13
y=(cx
s + z)
O ES1
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards G/27
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 I
I l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70900 T 5 0 Io
Suggested working form G1 (continued) I

Clause 6.2.3 Circumferential moment on cylindrical shell I
Longitudinal stress at E N~+(inside) 6M, - G f H = (mide)
fx = T - (outside) 7 - (outside)
(see note 2)
Circumferential stress i%+ (inside) ôkf E f F = (inside)
atD & = t (Outside)
(see note 2)
=9 (outside)
For C, > C+ From figure G.20a Cl = From figure G.18 or 61 =

_C1 -- _
Cl - figure G.19 e = -361
=
c+ r 61Er -
-- cL4
E= _-
Le W
r
For C+ > C, From figure G.20a Cl = From figure G.18 or 61 =
_
Cl -
- _
Cl - figure G.19 e='=36
cx r 61Er -
-- CL4
E= Le-- W
r
NOTE 1. Position D corresponds to quadrants QIand Qz in figure G.24.
NOTE 2. To ensure correct summation in suggested working form G3, example A, letters have been inserted here for the stress
components and their signs.
GD8 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 = Lb24bb7 Ob7070L 797 m
Annex G h u e 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Suggested working form 6 2 1 Load case:

Cìause 6.2.3 Longitudinal moment on cylindrical shell
Sign convention: N,, N+ are tensile when +ve
Mx,M+ cause compression in the outer surface when +ve
with ML +ve in the direction shown;fx and fb are tensile when +ve
Shell mean radius r = Shell thickness t = Shell length L = Offset íi-om centre Moment ML =
lined=
For nozzle or circular Nozzle mean radius C+ = 0.85r, =

Pad ro = C, = 1.7 r, =
For rectangular pad C+ = h! (circumferentiai length) =

C, = (axial length) =
r_ - W
t - Y=
From table G.l, K2 =

I$=
From firne G.6 From figure G.7 From figure G.8 From figure G.9
with Q
CX 1M,1-
as above w -
C From figwe G.6 From f i m e G.7 From firne G.8 From figure G.9
Wlth L b = o
CX M,o- -- -
Nxot
w - W
Correction factor %=
Cf = M+O
Wlth From figure G.14 From figure G.15 From figure G.16 From figure G.17
X
_ -- 5 Mx3- --
Nx3t
CX w - w -
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards GI29
~~
S T D - B S I B S 55110-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70702 8 2 3

BS 5600 : 1997 h e 2, September 1997 Annex G
I Suggested working form 6 2 (continued) I

I Clause 6.2.3 Longitudinal moment on cylindrical shell I
bngituàinal stress at A
Ifx =
Nx+ (hide) 6Mx =
t- (outside) tZ
(see note 2)
L = (inside)
(outside) 1
Circumferential stress
atA & = 5,
t
(mide) 6M
(outside) -$ =
1 f J = (inside)
(outside)
(see note 2)
~~
For Cx > C+ From figure G.20a Cl = From figure G.18 or 61 =

_
C1 - _
Cl -
- figure G.19 e = -361
=
c+ r 61Er
-- - CZ
E= _ -
Le -
W
r
For C+ > C, From figure G.20a Cl = From figure G.18 or 61 =
Cl- -
- _
Cl - figure G. 19 e='=36
cx r 61Er
-- - CZ
E= h-
- W
r
-
NOTE 2. To ensure correct summation in suggested working form G3, example A, letters have been inserted here for the stress
components and their signs.
6.2.3.6 Summation of maximum stresses due to local NOTE 4. Absolute values of shear stress are used in the table.
loads on a cylindrical sheu This is because the actual shear stress pattern is complex and
because the formulae for shear stress due to shear force are
6.2.3.5.1 Geneml approximate.
Although the exact location of the stresses calculated NOTE 5. At the nozzle 0.d. where a compensation pad is fitted, or
at the edge of a load on an attachment or support, distribute N+,
in 6.2.3.1 to 6.2.3.4 is not known the stresses may be M+, N , and M , as in 6.3.1.5. For a nozzle with a pad, an
considered to lie within the 180" sectors shown in additional hoop moment is to be added to M+ as in 6.2.7.
figure G.23. The sign of the stress in one sector is NOTE 6. in the calculation of total stress intensity (lines 27 to 29
known to be reversed in the opposite sector. and 32 to 34 of the table) the pressure term has been omitted for
simplicity.
By dividing the loaded area into quadrants and
summing the maximum stresses in each quadrant, a
maximum combined stress is obtained The method for
Stress of one sign Stress of opposite sign
this is shown in suggested working form G3. The
stresses due to pressure are combined with those due
to the local loads. The combined stresses and stress
intensities are assessed against the allowable values
specified in A.3.3.
The stress components should be inserted into the
table according to the correct convention. l ò define
this convention, each stress calculated in suggested
working forms G1 and G2, including its algebraic sign,
has been assigned a letter. These numbers should be
entered into suggested working form G3, example A, in
accordance with the convention shown.
NOTE 1. "he signs of FR,Fc, ML,Mc and MT are positive when
they act in the direction shown in figure G.24.
NOTE 2. N, and N+ are positive for tensile menibrane stresses
and M, and M+ are positive when they cause compressive stresses
on the outer surface of the shell. Stressesf, and& are positive
when tensile and negative when compressive. This is in
Stress oi opposite sign S t res; o f one sign
accordance with 6.2.2.1.2. Longitudinal moment Circumferential moment
NOTE 3. The letters A to D apply to the stresses resulting from a
radial load FR.When FR is positive, A and C represent positive Figure 6.23 Sector stresses
numbers in quadrant QI on the inside and B and D represent
negative numbers in quadrant QI on the inside.
GBO
O BSI 1997
b) In the shell plus pad at the edge of a loaded area

1) Circumferentially
fp = pDL2Tt = -
2) Longitudinally
fp = pDl4Tt = -
c) In the shell at the edge of pad, attachment or
support.
1) Circumferentialìy
Q3
2) Longitudinally
FL
O0
where
Figure 6.24 Maximum stresses at a nozzle
or attachment on a cylindrical shell Ta = sheli plate analysis thickness
Tp = pad analysis thickness
Tt = Ta -i Tp
6.2.3.6.2 Stress fomzulae ta = nozzle analysis thickness
Pressure stress fomulae. & as deñned in 3.6.4.1
a) At nozzle 0.d. Tr as defined in 3.6.4.1
From figures 3.5-9 or 3.511 or 3.512 obtain value

for CTJT
Use this value in the foliowing expression
fp = (2.25/1.1)(CTJ2')(pD/2Tt) = -X =
NOTE 1. The formula may be used for both the longitudinal
and circumferential directions.
NOTE 2. It is permitted to calculate the pressure stress
intensity at the 0.d. of a nozzieísphere junction using a similar
approach to that for a cylindrical shell. CTiT can be obtained
from figure 3.5-10 andf calculated from
(2.25/1.1)(C~~r)(po/4~.
O BSI 1997 Gi31

~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 E 1 b 2 4 b b 9 Ob7070Li bTb I
BS SMW) : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Annex G
I Suggested working form 6 3 I case:

Nozzle o.d./pad o.d.1 loaded area
dimensionsl) I
Ciause 6.2.3.6 Summation of Radial load FR Shell thickness/
maximum stresses due to local Shear force FC Shell + pad
loads on a cyhàricai shell thicknessl)
Shear force Fr. I Shell i.d.
Torsion moment MT Design pressure
Ckcunferentkd Design stress (B
moment MC
Longitudinal Yield stress
moment M I ,
Circumferential stresses
Membrane component (Ndt) due to:

kQuadrant
Surface
QI
nside Outside
QZ
nside Outside
Q3
inside Outside
&4
inside Outside
1 Radial load A A A A A A A A
2 circumferential moment E E E E -E -E -E -E
3 Longitudinal moment I I -I -I -I -I I I
4 Sub-total due to local loads
5 Pressure cfp from 6.2.3.6.2)
6 fhb-totalv 4 3
Bending component (W&)due to:
7 Radial load B -B B -B B -B B -B
s Circumferential moment F -F F -F -F F -F F
9 Longitudinal moment J -J -J J -J J J -J
10 cf4b)
-
11 Total circumferential stress cfb)
Longitudinal stresses
Membrane component (NJt) due to:
12 Radial load C C C C C C C C
13 Circumferential moment G G G G -G -G -G -G
14 Longitudinal moment K K -K -K -K -K K K
15 Sub-total due to local loads
16 Pressure cfp from 6.2.3.5.2)
17 Sub-total),f(
Bending component (WJi?)due to:
18 Radiai load D -D D -D D -D D -D
19 Circumferential moment H -H H -H -H H -H H
20 Longitudinal moment L -L -L L -L L L -L
21 Sub-total cfxb)
-
22 Total longitudinal stress cfX,
Shear stresses (from 6.2.3.6.3) due to:
23 Torsion moment
24 Circumferential shear force
25 Longitudinal shear force
-
26 Total shear stress ( T )
Check of total stress intensity
(membrane + bending) to A.3.3.1
and A.3.3.2
27 fl=cf++fx+dv4 - f J 2 + + 4 Q
28 f2 = ~ f +fx
t2
+ - ilv4
- J J ~+ 491
29 f2 -f1
L)Deli
- e as appropriate
GA2 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

Annex G h e 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
:
[Sueeestedworking from 6 3 ícontinuedì
Maximum total stress intensity = maximum absolute value in rows 27,28 and 29 =
Mowable stress at nozzle = 2.25f = , or at edge of a compensation pad, attachment or support = 2f = 1)
Check of buckling stress to A.3.3.3

Row 4 + row 10 if row 4 is compressive
I l
Row 15 + row 21 if row 15 is cornmessive I I
I Maximum cornmessive stress in rows 30 and 31 =

Allowable stress = -0.9 x yield stress =
At edge of compensation pad, attachment or
support, check of membrane stress intensity
to A.3.3.1’)
32 f i m = cf+m +.J- + d ~ + m- JA’ + 1
4 9 12
33 fim = b+m + fm - dV+m - fm)’ + 43I12
34 fim -firn
Maximum membrane stress intensity = maximum absolute value in rows 32,33 and 34 =
Allowable stress = 1.2 f =
I ‘)Delete as armromiate
O BSI 1997 GI33

~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 E 1b24bbS Ob7070b 479

Suggested working form 63:

example A
Clause 6.2.3.6 Summation of

maximum stresses due to local
Load case: D5 - N - 1 at nozzle 0.d
Wal load FR
Shell + pad
219mm I
Shear force Fc 23 mm
loads on a cylindrical shell thicknessl)
Nozzle branch with reinforcing Shear force FI> I 6600 N I Shell i.d. I2494m I
plate attached with full
penetsation weld, see 6.3.1.6
Torsion moment MT 8 900 O00
N.mm 1 Design pressure
Circumferential
moment M r
Longitudinal
1 3 630 O00
Nmm
3 630 O00
I Design stz-ess
Yield stress
I Nhnm2-l
227.4 Nhnm2
moment ML N.Illm
Circumferential stresses Quadrant QI QZ Q3 &4

- Surface b i d e Outside w i d e Outside m i d e Outside m i d e Outside
Membrane component (N+/t)due to:
1 Radialload 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
2 Circumferential moment -9.4 -9.4 -9.4 -9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4
3 Longitudinal moment -7.8 - 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 -7.8 -7.8
4 Sub-total due to local loads -15.9 -15.9 -0.4 - 0.4 18.5 18.5 3.0 3.0
5 Pressure I& from 6.2.3.6.2) 123.1 123.1 123.1 123.1 123.1 123.1 123.1 123.1
6 Sub-total (f+,) 107.2 107.2 122.7 122.7 141.6 141.6 126.1 126.1
Bending component (SM+/&due to:
7 Radialload -7.2 7.2 - 7.2 7.2 - 7.2 7.2 -7.2 7.2
8 circumferential moment 68.4 -68.4 68.4 -68.4 -68.4 68.4 -68.4 68.4
9 Longitudinal moment 35.9 -35.9 -35.9 35.9 -35.9 35.9 35.9 -35.9
10 sub-totalCf+) 97.1 -97.1 25.3 -25.3 - 111.5 111.5 739.7 39.7
11 Totai circumferential stress (fb) 204.3 10.1 148.0 97.4 30.1 25:’ : 86.4 165.8
Longitudinal stresses
12 Radial load 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
14 Longitudinal moment -2.9 -2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 -2.9 -2.9
15 Subtotal due to local loads -11.0 -11.0 - 5.2 -5.2 13.7 13.7 7.8 7.8
16 Pressure (fp from 6.2.3.5.2) 123.1 123.1 123.1 123.1 123.1 123.1 123.1 123.1
17 Sub-total &,) 112.1 112.1 117.9 117.9 136.8 136.8 130.9 130.9
Bending component (WJ6?) due to:
18 Radialload -5.1 5.1 -5.1 5.1 -5.1 5.1 -5.1 5.1
19 Circumferential moment 42.5 -42.5 42.5 -42.5 -42.5 42.5 -42.5 42.5
21 subtotal (fxb) 79.5 -79.5 -4.7 4.7 -89.7 89.7 -5.5 5.5
22 Total longitudinal stress(fa 191.6 32.6 113.2 122.6 47.1 226.5 125.4 136.4
Shear stresses (from 6.2.3.6.3) due to.
23 Torsion moment 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1
24 Circumferential shear force 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
25 Longitudinal shear force 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0:s 0.8 0.8 0.8
26 Total shear stress ( 7 ) 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8
I)Delete aS aDDïODfi2Ik
G/34 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

~
~~~
S T D * B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 1b24bb9 Ob70707 3 0 5 I
Suggested working form 63: example A (continued)

Check of total stress intensity (membrane +
bending) to A.3.3.1 and A.3.3.2
fi = Li++ f x + m- 1 207.3 34.5 149.3 124.3 49.5 254.8 126.6 167.3
fi = SA+ +f, - du+- f
3 + 4 3 112 188.6 8.2 111.9 95.7 27.7 224.9 85.3 134.9
f i -f1 -18.7 -26.2 -37.4 -28.6 -21.7 -29.9 -41.3 -32.4

Row 4 + row 10 if row 4 is compressive 81.2 -113.0 24.9 -25.7
Row 15 + row 21 if row 15 is compressive 68.5 -90.5 -9.9 -0.5
. .
I I
support, check of membrane síxess intensity
to A.3.3.11)
32 fim I
= V+m + fm + d ~ + m- fim>' + 4 3 12
33 fim = Lf+m + fm - dV+m - fmY + 4 9 I/2 not applicable
34 fim -fi,
Maximum membrane stress intensity = maximum absolute value in rows 32,33 and 34 = 146.4
Mowable stress = 1.2 f= 181.9
I ')Delete as appropriate
m
*
O BSI 1997
G/35
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 2 9 9 7 B Lb2LibbS 0 b 7 0 9 0 8 2 4 1
Suggested working form 63:

example B
Lmd case: D5 - N - 1at pad edge ?4emke&4ad
4€&e&wa
9
-
o.d.1
400mm I
1
Clause 6.2.3.5 Summation of Radial load F R 14410 N Shell thickness/
maximum stresses due to local Shear force FC 6600 N
loads on a cylindrical shell 13-
Shear force FI, I 6600 N I Shell i.d. 2494mm I
Torsion moment MT 8 900 O00 Design pressure 1.1N / m 2
Circumferential 3 630 O 0 0 Design stress U, 151.6 Nhnm2

moment MC.
Longitudinal
moment MT I 3 630 O 0 0
N.mm
I Yield stress
Circumferential stresses I Quadrant QI QZ Q3

- Membrane component (N&) I Surface m i d e Outside nside Outside hside Outside inside Outside
due to:
1 Radial load 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2
4 Sub-total due to local loads -22.4 -22.4 9.0 9.0 26.8 26.8 -4.6 -4.6
3 Pressure Ifp from 6.2.3.5.2) 105.5 105.5 105.5 105.5 105.5 105.5 105.5 105.5
5 Sub-total 83.1 83.1 114.5 114.5 132.3 132.3 100.9 100.9
Bending component (6M&) due to:
7 Radial load -9.8 9.8 - 9.8 9.8 -9.8 9.8 -9.8 9.8
10 Sub-total (f+b) 101.5 -101.5 32.6 -32.6 -121.1 121.1 -52.2 52.2
-
11 Total circumferential stress (fm)
LongitwEinal stresses
184.5 -18.4 147.0 81.9 11.2 253.4 48.7 153.1

12 Radial load 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4
15 Sub-total due to local loads -16.5 -16.5 -3.6 -3.6 23.2 23.2 10.3 10.3
16 Pressure Ifp from 6.2.3.5.2) 52.8 52.8 52.8 52.8 52.8 52.8 52.8 52.8
17 Sub-total Ifrn) 36.3 36.3 49.2 49.2 76.O 76.0 63.1 63.1
Bending component (WJ?)due to:
18 Radial load -4.7 4.7 -4.7 4.7 -4.7 4.7 -4.7 4.7
21 Sub-total If,b) 62.3 -62.3 -10.2 10.2 -71.7 71.7 0.8 -0.8
- Total longitudinal stress If,)
22 98.6 -26.1 39.0 59.4 4.3 147.8 63.9 62.3
Shear stresses (from 6.2.3.5.3) due to:
23 Torsion moment 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7
24 Circumferential shear force 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
25 Longitudinal shear force 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
-
26 Total shear stress (r) 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3
Check of total stress intensity (membrane +
bending) to A.3.3.1 and A.3.3.2
27 fl = p++f, + .iv+- fxY+ 422 112 184.8 -16.5 147.2 82.7 13.3 253.6 65.0 153.3
18 fi = P++ f x - d(f+- f X l 2 + 43 1/2 98.4 -28.0 38.9 58.6 2.2 147.6 47.5 62.1
19 6 -f1 -86.4 -11.6 -108.4 -24.2 -11.1 -106.0 -17.5 -91.1
L)Del(
- e as appropriate
GB6 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 1bZLIbb9 O b 7 0 9 0 9 LBB

ISuggested working form 63: example B (continued)
I I
I
Maximum total stress intensity = maximum absolute value in rows 27,28 and 29 = 253.6
Allowable stress & llvI'_- A".& ''W-
. -
íacceDtableì
, or at edge of a compensation pad, attachment or support = Zf = 303.2 ')
30 Row 4 + row 10 if row 4 is compressive 79.0 -123.9 -56.8 47.6

31 Row 15 + row 21 if row 15 is compressive 45.8 -78.9 -13.8 6.6
Maximum compressive stress in rows 30 and 31 = - 123.9
I l
Ailowable . -
stress = -0.9 X vield stress = -204.7 íacceoîable) I
support, check of membrane stress intensity
to A.3.3.1')
32 fim = P+m + fm + dV+m - JLJ~+ 4 3 /2 I 83.5 83.5 114.8 114.8 132.6 132.6 101.4 101.4
33 firn = P+m + fm - d ~ + r n- fm>2+ 4 3 I 35.9 35.9 48.9 48.9 76.7 75.7 62.6 62.6
34 firn - f i m -47.6 -47.6 -65.9 -65.9 -56.9 -56.9 -38.7 -38.7
Maximum membrane stress intensity = maximum absolute value in rows 32,33 and 34 = 132.6 (acceptable)
Allowable stress = 1.2f = 181.9
6.2.3.6.3 Shear strass formulae Loads applied through square fittings of side 2Cx can
Due to: be treated approximately as distributed over a circle of
radius ro = C,.
a) torsion (MT) Loads applied through rectangular brackets of sides
W T 2Cx and 2C4, can be tseated approximately as
=-= 2
distributed over a circle of radius ro =
b) circumferential shear force (Fc) The following forces and moments are set up in the
wall of the vessel by any local load or moment.
W C -
- .rtd,Tl
7
a) Meridional moment 44,: acting per unit width on a
c) longitudinal shear force (FL) normal section, formed by the intersection of shell
with a cone of semi-vertex angle.
- 2FL - , X
doTl V, = sin-' G.26 and G.29)
- (SW f i e s
r
NOTE. in general the shear forces may be neglected but where
required the formuiae shown may be used. Formulae G.2.3.5.3b b) Circumferential moment M+: acting per unit width
and 6.2.3.5.3~ are from WRC 107 [30]. do is the outside diameter on a meridional section passing through the axis of
of the nozzle or pad, and Ti= Tr at the nozzle 0.d. and Ti= T, at a the shell and the axis of the branch.
pad 0.d. where Ta and T, are analysis thicknesses.
c) Meridional membrane force: acting per unit width
6.2.4 Local loads on spherical shells, rigid on a normal section as for the meridional moment
attachments M,.
The methods in this clause are not considered d) Circumferential membrane force: acting per Unit
applicable in cases where the ratio rdr is larger than width on a meridional section as defied for the
one-third. circumferential moment AI,+.
6.2.4.1 Initid ahelopment A moment is considered as positive if it causes
compression at the outside of the vessel.
This clause is concerned with the stresses and
deflections due to local radial loads or moments on A membrane force is considered as positive if it causes
spherical shells. Because these are local in character tension in the vessel wall.
and die out rapidly with increasing distance from the A deflection is considered positive if it is away from
point of application, the data can be applied to local the centre of the sphere.
loads on the spherical parts of pressure vessel ends as
well as to complete spheres.
For convenience, the loads are considered as acting on
a pipe of radius ro which is assumed to be a rigid body
fixed to the sphere. This is the condition for the
mqjorily of practical cases.
O BSI 1997
G/37
~~~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 9 1 b 2 4 h h 9 Ob70711 7 T T

These forces and moments and the deflection of the 6.2.4.2 Stresses and & ? t i o m due to radial loads
shell due to the load can be found in terms of the Figure G.26 shows a radial load applied to a spherical
nondimensional parametem: shell through a branch of radius r,.
s = 1.82x
- The deflections, moments and membrane forces due to
fi the load W can be found as follows from figures G.27
and and G.28. For explanation of these curves see 6.2.4.3.
For an example of their use see 6.2.4.4.
1.82r0
u=- a) Deflection from figure G.27 and the relation:
@ wr
These two factorc can be found quickly from the chart 6 = ordinate of curve X
in figure G.25, given x,r, and the ratio rlt. Et
The charts in 6.2.4.2 and 6.2.4.3 (figures G.27 to G.31) b) Meridional moment M, per unit width from
give graphs of non-dimensional functions of these figure G.28 and the relation:
deflections, forces and moments plotted against the M, = ordinate of M, curve X W
parameter s for given values of u which have been c) Circumferential moment M+ per unit width from
derived from [3] and [9]. figure G.28 and the relation:
The full m e s in each set of graphs give conditions at M+ = ordinate of M+ curve X W
the edge of the loaded area where u = s. The most
d) Meridional membrane force N, per unit width
unfavourable combination of bending and direct
stresses is usually found here. from figure G.28 and the relation:
N, = ordinate of N, curve X Wlt
The dotted curves for particular d u e s of u give
conditions at points in the shell away form the edge of e) Circumferential moment N+ per unit width from
the loaded area where x is greater than r, and u is figure G.28 and the relatiox
therefore less than s. N+ = ordinate of N+ curve X Wlt
Since the charts are nondimensional they can be used
in any consistent system of units.
The stresses and deflections found from these charts
will be reduced by the effect of internal pressure but
this reduction is smalì and can usualìy be neglected in
practice. (See [8] and 191.)

Values of rit
.o1 .OZ .O3 .O4 .O5 .06.07.08 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.70.8
x / r or r , / r
Figure 6.26 Chart for finding s and u
O BSI 1997 Gí39

STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL A777 m l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70îL2 7 7 2 m
1 W
Figure 6.26 Spherical shell subjected to a

radial load
- 0.4
- 0.3
i
w\ - 0.2
c
4i
(0
- 0.1
O 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0

S
Figure 6.27 Deflections of a spherical shell subjected to a radial load W
O BSI 1997
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 D L b 2 Y b b S O b 7 0 9 1 3 b 0 î D
Annex G h e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
,-En
Y-
E
L
.4-
c
V
O
L
3
MIØ'N
I I ! ! ! ! ! lJ.LLLw3
O BSI 1997 G/41

~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 Il b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70914 5 4 5 m
6.2.4.3 Stresses, àejketions and slopes due to an The slope of the branch due to the extenial moment is
extemalmoment found from:
Figure G.29 shows an external moment applied to a 61
i.b = -
f
spherical shell through a branch of radius r,. YO

in this case the deflections, moments and membrane where 61 is the maximum deflection at the edge of the
forces depend on the angle 6 as weii as on the branch for 6 = O and u = s, i.e.:
distance x from the axis of the branch. They can be
found as follows from figures G.30 and G.31. For Mi;
explanations of these curves see 6.2.4.1. d1 = Et x ordinate of full curve in figure G.30
a) Deflections from figure G.30 and the relation: for x = ro
Mcos of IM
6 = ordinate of curve X
Ei!
b) Meridional moment M, per unit width from
figure G.31 and the relation: M
Mcos 6
M, = orhaîe of M, curve X -
fi
c) Circumferential moment M+ per unit width from mer.idional
figure G.31 and the relation:
M+ = ordinate of M+ curve X -e
MCOS
@
d) Meridionai membrane force N, per unit width
from figure G.31 and the relation: I
M cos 6
Nx = ordinate of N, curve X -
t@
e) Cicumferential membrane force N,+ per unit
width from figure G.31 and the relation:
Equal and opposite maximum values of all the above

quantities occur in the plane of the moment, i.e. where
Y'
Figure 6.29 Spherical shell subjected t o a n
û (see figure G.29) = O" and 6 = 180". external moment
N o
v) u= -
* u
GI42 O ES1 1997

=
~~ -
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70715 481
*
m
* R
x
N
w
?
c
9
c
VL
d
/JIi y&
O BSI
S T D - B S I BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1997 m L b 2 4 b b 9 Db709Lb 31ô m
6.2.4.4 Examples b) 225 nun frmn the centre of the branch

6.2.4.4.1 A load of 4500 N is applied to a sphere u = 1.09 as before;
2.5 m diameter and 12.5nun thick through a branch _-- -225
X - - 0.18 from figure G.25
150mm diameter. (E = 1.86 X lo5 N h 2 . ) r 1250
Find the deflection and the stresses: s = 3.25
a) next to the branch; Interpolating between the dotted curves in
b) 225 mm from the centre of the branch. figure G.27 at u = 1.09 and s = 3.25 gives:
r_ - 1250
- - -loo;-=--?"' 75 - 0.06 - - - 0.022
6Et2
t - 12.5 r 1250 Wr
a) Next to the branch When deflection = - 0.022
s = u = 1.09 (from figure G.25) wi- -0.022 X 4500 X 1250 = -o.oo425nun
Ordinate of full m e in figure G.27 = -0.145. Ë$ = 1.86 X 105 X (12.5)2
wr Interpolating similarly in figure G.28 gives:
:. Deflection = -0.145 X
Etz M
5 W
= -0.01; A 2 = +0.005;
W
-
- -0.145 X 4500 X 1250 = o.o281 nun
1.86 x 105 x (12.5)~ N t
= -0.04; = +0.015
Ordinate of full M, curve in figure G.28 = + 0.067 W
:. Meridional M, = + 0.067W = 301 N m m / m m Whence the:
Ordinate of full M+ curve in figure G.28 = +0.02 meridional moment M, = -45 N m n / m m ;
.e.Circumferential moment M+ = + 0.02W circumferential moment M+ = +22.5 N m m h m ;
= 90 N.mm/mm meridional membrane force N, = - 14.4 NmUn;
Ordinate of full N, curve in figure G.28 = -0.11 circumferential membrane force N+ =
-0.11 w The resulting meridional stresses are:
:. Meridional membrane force Nx = ~
t -14.4 6 X 45
at the outsidef, = -
12.5 o
+ "
= -1.15 + 1.73 = +0.58 N / m 2
Ordinate of full N+ curve in figure G.28 = -0.034 at the insidef, = -1.15 - 1.73 = -2.88 N/mm2
The resulting circumferential stresses are:
N+ =
-0.034w -- - 0.034 x 4500
.
e
.
t 12.5 +6.25 6 X 22.5
at the outsidef+ = --
= -12.2 N/mm 12.5 (12.5)2
The resulting meridional stresses are given by = +0.5 - 0.865 = -0.365N/mm2
at the inside f+ = +0.5 + 0.865 = +1.365 N / m 2
N,+ 6M, -396 6 X 301
jX= t- 7 = '(12.5)2 Hence the deflection and stresses due to the load
are negligible at 225 mm from the centre of the
I.. At the outside fx = -3.17 - 11.5 =
-14.67 N / m 2 (compression) branch, which illustrates the local nature of the
stresses.
At the inside fx = -3.17 + 11.5 = +8.33N/mm2
(tension)
The resulting circumferential stresses are given by
!!kc+=--
6M -12.2 + 6 X 90
f+= t t 12.5 (12.5)2
I.. At the outside f+ = -0.98 - 3.46 = -4.44 Nhnm2
(compression)
At the inside f+ = -0.98 + 3.46 = +2.48 N/mm2
(tension)
G/44 O ES1 1997

-
= lb24bb9
~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 Ob70917 2 5 4
6.2.4.4.2 A moment of 1.13 X lo5 N.mm is applied to From figure G.31

the branch in example 6.2.4.4.1. Find the maximum M cos û
deflection, the maximum stresses next to the branch, Meridional moment Mx = 0.175 x
fi
~
and the rotation of the branch due to this moment, i€ - 0.175 X 1.13 X lo5
E = 1.86 x lo5 N/mm2.
- l/i%öx%
r
As before - = 100; = 0.06, and, next to the branch, = 158N-mm/mm
t r
s = u = 1.09 (from figure G.25). Circumferential moment ~ c o es
= 0.055 X -
The maximum stresses and deflection are at 6 = 0; M+ 6
.: cos û = 1 = 49.6 N.mm/mm
From figure G.30 Meridional membrane Mcos û
force N, = -0.129 x -
Mcos o{ t f i
6 = -0.17 X = - 9.3 Nhnm
Et2
Circumferential Mcos 8
- -0.17 X 1.13 X lo5 X 1 X 10 = -0.039 X -
- membrane force N+ t f i
1.86 X 105 X (12.5)2
:. Maximum deflection = -0.0066 mm = -2.81 Nhnm
The deflection at 8 = 180", on the opposite side of
The maximum stresses are the resulting meridional
the branch, wiil be +0.0066mm.
stresses given by:
Nx+ 6Mx -9.3 + 6 X 158
f x = t - t 2 =12.5-(12.5s
.'. at the outside f x = -0.74 - 6.04
= 6.78 N/mm2 (compression)
at the inside fx = -0.74 + 6.04
= + 5.3 N/mm2 (tension)
* The slope of the branch due to this moment will be:
m
*
O BSI 1997
-
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 7 7 l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob7071ô L q O
6.2.6 Local loads on spherical shell/nozzle is the shear load applied at nozzle (in N);
attachments
is the local wall analysis thickness of shell,
6.2.6.1 G d a x e n t to nozzle (in mm);
6.2.5.1.1 Intmduction is the wall analysis thickness of nozzle
The method of calculating local stress levels at a (in
nozzle junction is based on data given in [25]. Using
this data it is possible to estimate the maximum stress is the nondimensional parameter = -
which can occur at a spherehozzle attachment due to
the application of internal pressure, thrust, external is the maximum stress due to local 10-
moment and shear force. The method covers both (in N/mm2);
flush and protruding nozzles. In the or@d work the is the circumferential stress (in N/mm2);
nozzle length is treated as semi-infinite without any is the meridional stress (longitudinal in a
restriction on its length. It is, however, considered cylindrical shell) (in N/mm2);
necessary to stipulate a lower h i t on the internal
protrusion equal to $%-t. Nozzles with internal is the yield stress in simple tension
(in N/mm2);
protrusion less than $%-t should be treated as flush
nozzles. In this way some additional conservatism wiil are the extend moment shakedown factors;
be introduced for those protsuding nozzles where the are the internal pressure shakedown factors;
internal projection does not satisfy this
recommendation. are the radial thnist shakedown factors.
AU the stsess concenîmüon factors given in
figures G.32 to G.39 inclusive are based on the 6.2.5.2 Maximum stress at a spherdnozzle junction
maximum principal stress theory due to application of internal pressure
The stress concentration factom given in 6.2.6.2 Figure G.32 gives plots of stress concentration
to 6.2.5.7 are based on data obtained for a sphere of factors (s.c.f.s) against the nondimensional parameter p
constant thickness T',whereas in practice T is looked for various nozzleíshell wall üT ratios for flush
upon as the local shell thickness d a c e n t to the nozzles. The maximum stress,u,=, is then calculated
nozzle, the main vessel being of a smaller thickness í7 by multiplying the s.c.f. thus obtained by the nominal
For these curves to be valid the thickness of the shell PR
pressure stress given by - i.e.:
should not be reduced to T within a distance H as 2T"
defined in 3.6.4.3.4. PR
um= = s.c.f. x-
Work in progress shows that when the vessel thickness 2T'
is reduced from T' to T a t a distance H from the nozzle, Figure G.33 gives similar plots for protruding nozzles.
higher stresses than those given in figures G.32 to G.39 Before using figure G.33 a check should be made to
inclusive may occur for small values of p and high ensure that the intemal nozzle protsusion is equal to or
d u e s of ül".Further guidance cannot be given at the
greater than $%?$ if it is not, figure G.32 should be
present stage.
used as for a flush nozzle for obtaining the s.c.f.
This procedure provides a method of computing
maximum stresses which occur in the shell rather than 6.2.6.3 Maximum stress at a spherdmzzle junction
in the nozzle. In some instances calculated stresses due to application of radial load o r thrust
may be higher in the nozzle wall than in the vessel Fïgure G.34 gives plots of s.c.f. against the
shell, especially for very thin nozzles. These are not nondimensional parameter p for flush nozzles. The
considered for the reasons stated in [31]. maximum stress is calculated by muitiplying the s.c.f.
6.2.5.1.2 Notat.ion obtained from figure G.34 by:
For the purposes of 6.2.6 and 6.2.6, which are
applicable to radial n o d e s onlx the following symbols
appiy:
K
M
is a factoq
is the external moment applied at nozzle
(in N a m ) ;
&
,,a
i.e.
= s.c.f. x *
Figure G.35 gives similar plots for protruding nozzles.
Before using figure G.35 a check should be made to
ensure that the internal nozzle protsusion is equal to or
P is the internal pressure (in N/mm2); greater than if it is not, figure G.34 should be
Q is the radial thrust applied at nozzle (in N); used as for a flush nozzle for obtaining the s.c.f.
R is the mean radius of spherical shell ( i mm);
r is the mean radius of nozzle (in mm);
~
G/46
O BSI 1997
Annex G h u e 1, Januayy 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
6.2.6.4 Maximum stress at a sphmdmzzle junction The stress distribution away from the loaded area can
due to appll.ication of extemal moment then be calculated by the procedure outlined in 6.2.4
For flush nozzles the maximum stress at a and the values so obtained are to be multiplied by a
sphereínozzlejunction can be determined by using factor K, where K is the ratio of G ~as determined
~ ,
figure G.36. The first step is to read off the s.c.f. for the in 6.2.5, to the stress at the edge of the attachment, as
appropriate vessel nozzle geometry The maximum calculated in 6.2.4, where applicable.
stress is then obtained by multiplying the s.c.f. thus This method is conservative, but an alternative
obtained by the factm approach is available in [23].
J- i.e.
n+T‘ T’
6.2.6 Spherical shells: shakedown loads for
radial nozzles
omax = s.c.f. x 7 6.2.6.1 General

n+T 6.2.6.1.1 Introduction
Figure G.37 gives similar plots for protsuding nozzles. All the shakedown loads given in 6.2.6.2 to 6.2.6.6 are
Before using figure G.37 a check should be made to based on the maximum shear stress criteria
ensure that the internal nozzle protrusion is equal to or For vessels subjected to cyclic loading, be it pressure,
greater than if it is not, figure G.36 should be radial load, external moment or any combination of
used as for a flush nozzle for obtaining the s.c.f. these, it is essential to have a knowledge of the
6.2.5.6 Maximum stress at a sphmdmzzle &nction shakedown limit in order to prevent plastic cycling or
due to application of s h a r load incremental collapse. By keeping the cyclic loadings
within the shakedown limits it ensures that, after initial
Figure G.38 should be used for determining the s.c.f.
for flush nozzles. The maximum stress,urnax,is then plastic deformation, further deformation will be in the
calculated by multiplying the s.c.f. obtained in the first elastic range, ie. the vessel has ‘shaken down’ to
-=-
_I
I purely elastic behaviour. The method given does not

-
E
=
step by the factor SI2nT‘, i.e.:
necessarily imply a limited plastic deformation before
S
- amax = s.c.f. x -
2nfl’
shakedown is achieved.
The shakedown conditions can occur after different
Figure G.39 gives similar plots for protruding nozzles. numbers of cycles depending on the cyclic conditions
* Before using figure G.39 a check should be made to and stress level; in certain cases, the plastic
IB
* ensure that the length of the internal nozzle protrusion deformation before shakedown might be signifcant.
is equal to or greater than @?; if it is not, figure G.38 The method of predicting shakedown factors for
should be used as for a flush nozzle for obtaining internal pressure, radial nozzle thrust and external
the s.c.f. moment at a vesselhozzle junction in 6.2.6.2
to 6.2.6.6 is based on data given in [27]. From the data
6.2.5.6 Maximum stress at a sphere/moZzle .@netion
shakedown factors for flush and protruding nozzles
under combined loading can be estimated for each of the aforementioned
For a conservative estimate of the stsesses occuring individual loading conditions.
under the action of combined loading the maximum
Where the various loading conditions occur
stresses obtained ftom each of the individual loaàings
simultaneously a simple formula is given that considers
should be added together. This wiU always be the interaction between any of these loading conditions
conservative because the mcwrimUm stresses for
(see [27]).
individl.ial loadings may occur at different locations
and different directions (oeandor oz). No clear distinction between a flush and a protruding
nozzle is given. It is considered necessary to stipulate a
6.2.6.7 Stresses away from the loaded area lower limit on the length of the nozzle intemal
The method given in 6.2.6.1 and 6.2.5.6 for protrusion equal to @.Nozzles with internal
calculating local stresses at a spherdnozzle junction protrusion less than should be treated as flush
caters for the maximm stress levels only N o nozzles. By doing so, some additional conservatism will
information is given on stresses away from the loaded be introduced for those protniding nozzles where the
area internal projection does not saîkfy these
Stress disíxibutions in the vicinity of the spherdnozzle recommendations.
junction are required in cases where other loaded The shakedown factors given in 6.2.6.2 to 6.2.6.5 are
areas are in proximity to the one under consideration. based on data obtained for a sphere of constant
It is proposed to use the data already available in 6.2.4 thichess T’, whereas in practice T’ is looked upon as
to determine these stresses. The assumption here is the local shell thickness adjacent to the nozzle, the
that, although the magnitudes of local stresses may main vessel being of smaller thichess T For these
differ, the plot of stress level versus distance from the curves to be valid the thickness of the shell should not
loaded area remains basically similar. be reduced to T’within a distance H as defined
in 3.6.4.3.4.
O BSI 1997 GA7

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 L b 2 9 b b S Ob70720 8'49 m
0.01 10.0
Figure 6.32 Maximum stress in sphere for internal pressure (flush nozzles)
0.01 0.10 1.o 10.0
Figure 6.33 Maximum stress in sphere for internai pressure (protruding nozzles)
GM
O BSI 1997
~~ ~ -
S T D - B S I BS 55UU-ENGL 1777 W l b 2 4 b b 9 O b 7 0 7 2 1 7 8 5 W
Annex G Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1W7
0.01 0.1 1.0 10.0
-
P = a7 rJR
II Figure 6.34 Maximum stress in sphere for thrust loading (flush nozzles)
-
E
0.01 0.1 1.o 10.0
Figure 6.36 Maximum stress in sphere for thurst loading (protruding nozzles)
O BSI
- ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1797 Lb24bb7 Ub70922 bL1
BS 6600: 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Annex G
0.01 0.1 1.o 10.0
Figure 6.36 Maximum stress in sphere for moment loading (flush nozzles)
O
0.01 0.1 1.0 10.0
Figure 6.37 Maximum stress in sphere for moment loading (protruding nozzles)
GßO
O BSI 1997
20
15
+
x
10
O
0.01 0.1 1.0 10.0
p = '/E
R T'
Figure 6.38 Maximum stress in sphere for shear loading (flush nozzles)
20
15
+
u
v>
10
O
0.01 0.1 p = L/E 1.0 10.0
R T'
Figure 6.39 Maximum stress in sphere for shear loading (protruding nozzles)
O BSIStandards
COPYRIGHT British 1997 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards G/51
~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1797 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70724 4 7 4 D
6.2.6.1.2 Notation The moment shakedown factor can be defined as:

For the purposes of 6.2.6 the symbols are as deñned - = -Mp
m
in 6.2.5. n?T'o, T'
6.2.6.2 shalcedownfactor for intemal pressure Before using the relevant figures for the protruding
loading nozzles, a check should be carried out on the nozzle
Fïgures G.40 and G.41 should be used for determining this is less than @
inner projection. ~f i?the
then
the shakedown factors under intend pressure corresponding plots for flush nozzles should be used in
conditions for flush and protruding nozzles determining the necessary shakedown factor.
respectively. 6.2.6.5 Interaction between shakedown factors under
The pressure shakedown factor can be defíned as the combined loading conditions
ratio of the nominal pressure stress in the spherical For the case of the combined loading condition,
shell to the value of yield stress in simple tension, i.e.: [27] gives the following equation so that the overall
p-= - PR shakedown condition is obtained
2T'o;
6.2.6.3 shakedown factor for radial thrust at a
nozzle In this equation the values ofPo, ¿jo andEo are read
The relevant shakedown factors for flush and off from figure G.40 to figure G.47 inclusive for the
protruding nozzles subjected to radial loads (radial appropriate vessehozde geomew, while a,? and E
with respect to the vessel) should be determined from are as derived from the relevant equations (G.3), (G.4)
figures G.42, G.44,and G.46 and from figures G.43, G.45 and (G.5).
and G.47 respectively. Where the conditions are such that the relationship
The radial thrust shakedown factor can be defined as: given by equation (G.6) is not satisfied then a revised
nozzle/shell geometry (increased vessel shell or branch
q=-- wall thickness) should be used and the procedure
repeated until equation (G.6) is fulfiied
6.2.6.4 shakedown factor for mtmnd moment
Figures G.42, G.44 and G.46 should be used for
calculating the moment shakedown factor m for flush
nozzles. For protsuding nozzles the corresponding plots
for the shakedown factor are given in figures G.43,
G.45 and G.47.
0.01 0.10 1.0 10.0
Figure 6.40 Shakedown values for pressure loading (flush nozzle)
GE2 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

~~
~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 LbZlrbbS O b 7 0 9 2 5 3 2 0 M
= 1.0
, = 0.50
0.01 0.10 1.o 10.0
Figure 6.41 Shakedown values for pressure loading (protruding nozzle)
-
m
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
O
0.10 1.0 10.0
Figure 6.42 Shakedown values for thrust and moment loadings (flush
nozzle)
O BSI 1997
COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards GI53
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL 1997 .
IL b 2 4 b b 9 Ob7072b 2b7 D
BS 5 6 0 : 1997 h e 1, January 1997 Annex G
-
4
2.0
1.5
I
Thrust’
1.o
O .5
O
0.01
I 0.10 1.0
Figure 6.43 Shakedown values for thrust and moment loadings

(protruding nozzle)
10.á
-
m
I
- 5.0
-
4
2.0 - 4.0
1.5 - 3.0
1
1.0 - 2.0
0.5 - 1.0
0- 1 I 1 1 1 I I I l i L
O
0.01 0.10 1.o 10.0
nozzle)

~~
~~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL L997 H L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70727 I T 3
-5.0
4
2.0 - 4.0
1.5 . 3.0
l
1.0 . 2.0
0.5 . '
1.0
O -0
0.10 1.0 1o.ó

(protruding nozzle)
*
02
* -
m
5.0
-
4
2.0 4.O
1.5 3.0
1.0 2.0
O.S. 1 .o
0- O
0.01 0.10 1.o 1 I
nozzle)
O BSI
BS 5500 : 1997
at branches
-
4
2.0
1.5
1.o
0.5
O
0.01
(protruding nozzle)
0.10
6.2.7 The wett of external forces and moments
Large external forces and moments can be applied to

the branches of vessels by the thermal movements of
pipework.
The stresses due to these are likely to be greatly
overestimated if the forces in the pipe system are
determined by assuming that the connection to the
vessel is equivalent to an anchor in the pipe system.
More accurate values of the terminal forces and
moments can be found if the deflection due to a unit
radiai load and the slopes due to unit longitudinal and
circumferential moments distributed over the area of
the branch and its reinforcement are known.
These can be found for a given vessel and branch by
the methods given in 6.2.2.3 and 6.2.3 for cylindrical
vessels and by methods given in 6.2.4.2 and 6.2.4.3
for spherical vessels. Experiments in the USA,
discussed in [17], have shown that slopes and
deflections calculated in this way are sufficiently
accurate for practical purposes except that the slope of
a branch due to a circumferential moment is
about 75 % of the calculated value because of the effect
of local stiffening by the metal of the branch.
When the loads from the pipework are known, the
local stresses in the vessel shell can be found by the
methods given in 6.2, except that,in a branch with an
extenial compensating ring of thickness t2 subject to a
circumfwentid moment there is an additional
circumferential moment in the shell at the edge of the
reinforcing ring to N&d4 and [17] recommends that
G/36
.
Issue 2, September 1997
1.0

5.O
4.0
3.0
2 .o
1.o
O
10.0
this amount should be added to the value of M+

calculated in 6.2.3.
These corrections apply oniy to circumferential
Annex G
moments and are due to the effect of the rigidiíy of the

attachment of the branch which has little influence on
the effect of longituduial moments.
The tension at the inside of the shell due to the local
circmferenîkd bending moment M is added to the
Circumferential membrane stress lue to internal
pressure, but this stress will not be present when the
vessel is under hydraulic test.
Where nozzle branches with reinforcing plates are
attached with full penetration welds, i.e. in accordance
with figures E.2.27, E.2.28a, and E.2.31a, they may be
assumed (for the purpose of local stsesses evaluation)
to be integral with the shell and the siresses evaluated
in accordance with 6.2. Where nozzle branches with
reinforcing plates are attached, with partial penetration
welds, i.e. in accordance with figures E.2.28b, E.2.29,
E.2.30 and E.2.31b, they may be analysed in
accordance with 6.3.1.6.
6.3 Supports and mountings for pressure
vessels
6.3.1 General considerations for supports
6.3.1.1 Introduction
This clause and 6.3.2 and 6.3.3 are concerned with
the supports for pressure vessels and the supports for
fittings carried from the shell or ends of the vessel,
with regard to their effect on the vessel. The structural
design of supports is not included because it can be
dealt with by the usual methods of structural design.
Convenient referencees for these are [40]and (411.

O BSI 1997
~~ ~
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1977 l b 2 4 b b ï Ob70929 T7b
Annex G Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5 5 0 : 1997
The supports of vessels and of fittings carried by the Kl...K11 are constantq
shell produce local moments and membrane forces in is the length of cylindrical part of vessel
the vessel wall which can be treated by the methods (in mm);
given in 6.2. Notes and cross-references for applying is the length of part of shell of horizontal
these to various types of support are included. vessel assumed to act with a ring support
The supports of a vessel should be designed to (in mm);
withstand all the extenial loads iikely to be imposed is the bending moment in horizontal ring
on it in addition to the dead weight of the vessel and girder above its own support (in N-mm);
its contents. These loads may include: is the bending moment in horizontal ring
a) superimposed loads; girder midway between its supports
b) wind loads on exposed vesselq (in N . m ) ;
c ) thrusts or moments transmitted from connecting is the longitudinal bending moment in
pipework; horizontal vessel midway between its
d) shock loads due to liquid hamtuner or surging of supports (in N*mm);
the vessel contents; is the longitudinai bending moment in
e) forces due to differential expansion between the horizontal vessel at its supports (in N.mm);
vessel and its supports. is the longitudinal or meridional bending
6.3.1.2 Notation moment per unit circumference (jm N n u n h m j
For the purposes of 6.3 the foliowing symbols apply. is the circumferential bending moment per
a is the area of effective cross section of unit length (in N~r~n-~/mm);
stiffener from horizontal vessel (i mm2); is the longitudinal membrane force per unit
A is the distance from saddle support to circumference (in N/mm);
adjacent end of cylindrical part (in mm); is the circumferential membrane force per
b is the mean depth of dished end of vessel unit length (in N/mm);
(in mm); is the interd pressure at equator (horizontal
bl is the axial width of saddle support (in mm); centre line of vessel) (in N/mm2);
b2 = bl + lot is the shear stress in vessel sheii (in N/mm2);
C is the distance from centroid of effective is the shear stress in vessel end (in N/mm2);
area of stiffener to shell ( i mm); is the mean radius of cylindrical part of
Ci ...C5 axe constants; vessel (in mm);
CX is the half length of rectangular loading area is the inside radius of cylindrical part of
in longitudinal direction ( i mm); vessel (in mm);
is the radius of base of skirt support of
c, is the half length of rectanguh loading area
in circumferential direction (in mm); vertical vessel (in mm);
d is the distance from centroid of effective is the mean radius of horizontal ring girder
area of stiffener to tip of stiffener (in mm); or of ring support ( i mm);
d, is the distance from centroid of effective is the analysis thickness of vessel shell
area of stiffener to tip of stiffener in (in mm);
longitudinal direction ( i mm); is the analysis thickness of reinforcing plate
is the distance from centroid of effective (imm);
d,
area of stiffener to tip of stiffener in is the analysis thickness of ring stiffeners
circumferential direction (in mm); (in mm);
D is the mean diameter of the vessel (in mm); is the analysis thickness of vessel end
e is the perpendicular distance from the line of (in mm);
the reaction to the centroid of the weld area is the maximum twisting moment in
(in mm); horizontal ring girder (in Nmm);
E is the modulus of elasticity (in N/mm2); is the average weight of vertical vessel per
f is the nominal design stress (in Nhnm2); millimetre height (in N/mm);
fl.-flO are the resultant stresses in horizontal vessel
is the weight of vessel ( i N);
due to mode of support (in N/mm2); is the maximum reaction at support (in N);
fn is the nominal stress in dished end is the distance from support of horizontal
calculated as in section 3 (in N/mm2); ring girder to nearest point of m;wrimum
F is the resultant of horizontal forces acting on twisting moment (in mm);
vertid vessel (in N); is the distance of the extenial load from the
H is the resultant horizontal force in least cross vessel wall (in mm);
section of saddle support (in N); is the height of the resultant of horizontal
I is the second moment area of effective cross forces acting on vessel above its supports
section of stiffening ring (in mm4); (in mm>;
~~_________
O BSI
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1777 II LbE‘Libb7 ü b 7 0 7 3 0 7 9 8
BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 1,Jayiuary 1997 Annex G
2 is the section modulus of effective cross 6.3.1.6 Reinforcing plates

section of ring support for horizontal vessel Reinforcing plates are required when the local stresses
(in mm3); in the vessel shell, found as descibed in 6.2 for the
& is the circumferential buckling strain; connection of a support or mounting, are excessive.
8 is the included angle of saddle support The form of reinforcement will depend upon the
( i degrees); direction of load and whether a moment is applied.
01 is the angle between radius drawn to NOTE.Experimental work, discussed in [li’],has shown that there
position of support and vertical centre line of is some stress concentration near the sharp corners of rectanguiar
vessel (in degrees). reinforcing plates. Rounded comers are therefore preferable.
6.3.1.3 Reaction at Uze supports 6.3.1.6.1 Radiadg inward load on a cylinder

The reactions at the supports of a vessel can be found Figure G.49a shows a typical simple reinforcing plate
by the ordinary methods of statics except in the case applied to a cylinder.
of long horizontal vessels supported at more than two The stresses in the vessel shell at the edge of the
positions. reinforcing plate are approximately equal to those
The reactions at the supports of vessels subject to calculated by assuming the load to be distributed over
heavy external loads may need to be examined for the the whole area of the reinforcing plate 2 d , X 2d+ and
following conditions: proceeding as described in 6.2.2.1.
a) working conditions, including full wind load and A safe approl8mation for the maximum stresses in the
loads due to pipework; reinforcing plate, which occurs at the edges of the
b) test conditions, including full wind load, if any, actual loaded area ZC, X 2C+, is given by the following
and forces due to ‘cold puìì up’ of any pipes that will procedure.
remain connected to the vessel during tests, a) Find the maximum moments M+ and M, and the
c) shutdown conditions, vessel empw, and exposed maximum membrane forces N+ and N,, for the same
to full wind load, if any, and the forces due to ‘cold loading applied to a cylinder of thickness (t + ti),
pull up’ in the pipe system connected to it. It is from the charts in 6.2.2.1 for a radial load, applied
essential to provide anchor bolts i€ there is an over a loaded area 2CxX 2C+.
upward reaction to any support under any of these b) Find the resuitant stresses due to these by
conditions. assuming that the vessel shell and the reinforcing
The theoretical reactions at the supports of long plate share the moments M+ and M, in proportion
horizontal vessels supported at more than two to the cubes of their thicknesses and the membrane
positions can be found by the methods used for forces N+ and N, in direct proportion to their
continuous beams but the calculated values are always thicknesses.
doubtful because of settlement of the supports and
initial errors of roundness of or straightness in the
vessel.
6.3.1.4 Brackts
Brackets are fitted to the shells of pressure vessels to
support either the vessel or some stsucture which has
to be carried from it. Typical brackets are shown in
figure G.48. 6.3.1.5.2 Radiady outward load a d o r mornent on a
The brackets themselves are designed by the ordinary Cylinder
methods used for brackets supporhng beams in
These loads require gusset plates as shown on the
structural engineering. typical arrangement in figure G.49b to achieve the load
A bracket always applies an external moment to the transference from the attachment to the vessel.
shell equal to Wig
The stresses in the vessel shell at the edge of the
The effect of this moment on the shell can be found by reinforcing plate are approxjmatly equal to those
the method given in 6.2.3. If the local stresses found calculated by assuming the load or moment to be
in this way are excessive, a reinforcing plate, designed distributed over the whole area of the reinforcing
as described in 6.3.1.6, should be fitted between the plate 2& X 2d+ and proceeding as described in 6.2.2.1
bracket and the vessel wall. for a radial load or in 6.2.3 for a moment. Note that
in addition to the vertical loads, the brackets the sign of the radial load is reversed to that
supporting a vertical vessel may be subject to in 6.3.1.6.1.
tangential forces due to thrusts and moments
transmitted from pipework. Such brackets impose a
circumferential moment on the vessel wall in addition
to the longitudinal moment. The stresses due to this
can be calculated and added to the others but ring or
skirt supports are preferable in cases of this type.

=
~~~~
~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 I1 b 2 4 b b 9 O b 7 0 7 3 1 b2’i

Annex G Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500: 1997
Welded with fillet weld to vessel all round
! Y Backing plate
Support
u
a) Bracket for vessel support
Vessel wall
b) Bracket for external load
Figure 6.48 Typical brackets
A safe approximation for the maximum stresses in the b) Find the resultant stresses due to these by
reinforcing plate, which occur at the edges of the assuming that the vesel wall and the reinforcing
actual loaded area 2Cx X 2C+ is given by the following plate share the moments M+ and M, in proportion
procedure. to the cubes of their thicknesses and the membrane
a) Find the maximum moments M+ and M, and the forces iV+ and Nx in direct proportion to their
maximum membrane forces N+ and Nxfor the same thicknesses, as given in G3.1.6.lb.
loading applied to a cylinder of thickness (t + ti) 6.3.1.5.3 Loads on sph.ericd vessels
from the charts in 6.2.2.1 for a radial load or The principles of 6.3.1.6.1 andG.3.1.5.2 can be
from 6.2.3 for a moment, both applied over the applied using the appropriate charts of 6.2.4.2
loaded area 2Cx X 2C+ and 6.2.4.3.
O BSI 1997 GI59

~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 2 7 7 7 S l b 2 i r b b 7 ü b 7 0 9 3 2 5b0 m
Vessel
-- -_
E
Reinforcing
plate
#
dx4
a) Simple arrangement for radiaily inward load
cx
n
, cx
*dx *
Vessel i I I
, !
/ I
Reinforcing
plate
b) Gusset arrangement for radially outward lodmovement
Figure 6.49 Typical reinforcing plates on cylindrical shells
GI60
O BSI 1997
~
-
STD-BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1977 1 b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70933 4T7
6.3.1.6.4 De&tions 6.3.2.1.2 Discontinuity strases at skirt supports

The deflection at a support or fitting provided with a The presence of a skirt support reduces the
reinforcing plate is approximately equal to the sum of discontinuQ stresses at the junction of the bottom and
the deflections of the wall of a cylinder or sphere of the vessel wall.
thickness (t + ti) loaded over the area of the A procedure for calculating the actual discontinuity
reinforcing plate. These are found from 6.2.2.3 for stresses and also the design of skirt supports for
cylinders or 6.2.4.2 and 6.2.4.3 for spheres and vessels subject to severe cyclic loading due to thermal
spherical parts of vessel ends. stresses is given in [18].
The slope due to an external moment can be found
from the deflection calculated in this way by the 6.3.2.2 Ring supports for vertical vessels
method given in 6.2.3 and 6.2.4. It is often convenient to support vertical vessels from
steelwork by means of a ring support in a convenient
6.3.2 Supportsfor vertical vessels position on the shell as shown in figure G.50.
This clause is concerned with the design of supports Such a ring support corresponds to one flange of a
for vertical vessels except where the conventional bolted joint with the ‘hub’ of the flange extending on
methods of simple applied mechanics can be used both sides and with the couple due to the bolts
directly replaced by that due to the eccentricity between the
The design of brackets used to connect the vessel to supporting force and the vessel waU Its thickness can
its supports is given in 6.3.1.4. therefore be determined by adapting the e q d o n s
in 3.8 and the associated figures.
6.3.2.1 Skirt supports
The stresses should be determined as for an integrai
Skirt supports are recommended for large vertical flange (see 3.8.3.4) except that onehalf of the flange
vessels because they do not lead to concentrated local design moment oniy shail be used in calculating the
loads on the shell, they offer less consbraint against longitudinal hub stress SH.
differential expansion between the part of the vessel
under pressure and its supports, and they reduce the The stresses calculated in this way should not exceed
effect of discontinuity stresses at the junction of the the allowable values for the stresses in flanges
cylindrical shell and the bottom (but see [18] and [22]). specified in 3.8.3.4.2.
Skirt supports should have at least one inspection All ring supports of this type should rest on some form
* of continuous support or on steelwork as indicated in
cn opening to pennit examination of the bottom of the
* figure G.51. They should not be used to connect
vessel unless this is accessible from below through
supporting hming. Such openings may need to be vessels directly to leg or column supports, but should
compensated. rest on a ring girder or other steelwork joining the
tops of the columns.
Skirt supports may also be applied to spherical vessels
and to the spherical parts of vessel ends. The local 6.3.2.3 Leg suppon3 for vertical vessels
stresses due to skirt supports in these positions should Leg supports for vertical vessels can, in general, be
be calculated as in 6.2.4. designed by the usual methods of applied mechanics,
6.3.2.1.1 Overturning moments on skirt supports e.g. those described in chapter Xxm of [6].
At any horizontal section of a skirt support, the They should always be arranged as close to the shell
maximum load per unit length of the skirt as the necessary clearance for insulation will permit
circumference is given by: If brackets are used to connect the legs to the vertical
wall of the vessel as in figure G.52 they should be
N, = 1
2xr x+
= stress x thicimess of s~ designed as described in 6.3.1.4 and fitted with
reinforcing plates if required.
If there is a negative value of Nx anchor bolts will be
necessary because there will be a net moment of Short legs, or legs braced to resist horizontal forces,
M = W-1 - f i tending to overturn the vessel about the may impose a severe constraint on a vessel wall due to
leeward edge of the skirt support fiange. differences in thermal expansion. This constraint can
be avoided by using brackets on the vessel wall
For small vessels the anchor bolts can be designed on provided with slotted holes to allow for expansion. In
the assumption that the neutcd axis of the bolt group addition, the mechanical loads at the points of support
lies along a diameter of the support flange, but this should be assessed and the local sixesses due to these
assumption leads to overdesign in the case of tall determined using the charts of 6.2.4. Reinforcing pads
vessels with large overturning moments because the designed as in 6.3.1.5 should be fitted if nece-.
effect of the elasticity of the foundation, which
produces an additional resisting moment, is neglected.
Suitable design procedures for such cases are given
in [16].
O BSI 1997 GI61

- ~
S T D - B S I EIS 5500-ENGL 1997 R LbZlibbS Ob70934 3 3 3 I

BS 5500 : 1997 h e 1, January 1997 Annex G
Support
ring
Steelwork
Figure G.60 Typical ring support Figure G.51 Typical steelwork under ring
support
Reinforcing pads
if necessary
L Ø
Ik This distance
,e as small
‘Y==
I I I
Figure 6.52 Leg supports for vertical vessels
G/62
O BSI 1997
~
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b ï üb70735 27T m

6.3.2.4 Ring girders Number 4 6 8 12

of legs
The supporting legs of large vertical vessels and
spherical vessels are often connected to a ring girder Loadon W/4 W/6 WB w/12
each leg
that supports the vessel shell. In some designs the
lower part of a skirt support is reinforced to form a Maximum W/8 w/12 W/16 WB4
shear in
ring girder. Figure G.53 shows a typical ring girder. ring
Such girders are subject to torsion as well as bending girder
and require speciai consideration.
JflIW2 - 0.034 2 - 0.0148 - 0.00827 - 0.00365
When the supporímg columns are equdy spaced, the
bending and twisting moments in the ring girder can M2IW2 + 0.0176 + 0.00751 + 0.004 15 + 0.001 90
be found from the foliowing data, taken from [20]. x/r2 0.335 0.222 o.166 o. 111
*
m 2 0.005 3 0.0015 0.000 63 0.000185
p
A bending moment causing tension at the underside of
the girder is taken as positive. The torsion in the girder
is zero at the supports and midway between them and
the bending moment is zero at the points of maximum
tomion.
*
m*
Legs braced
,if required
B.M.= N ,
Torsion = O
B.M = M,
Torsion = O
B.M. = M,
Torsion = O
Points of
maximum
tor si0n
B.M. r. O
Figure 6.53 Typical ring girder
O ES1 1997
G/63
~~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 lbZ’Ibb9 Ob7093b Lob
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 2, September 1997 Annex G
6.3.3 Supports and mountings for horizontal for vessels comprising a number of interconnected
vessek37) sections, where appropriate. This test pressure and
self weight (test liquid and vessel weight) are then
6.3.3.1 Geneml used to recalculate the stressesfl to f4 (considered
Horizontal vessels are subject to longitudinal bending to be membrane stresses) using the equations given
moments and local shear forces due to the weight of in 6.3.3.2. The thickness t for both the pressure
their contents, as well as to local stresses at supports term pmr/2t and the tem containing M3 and M4
and fittings. should be the nominal thickness at the time of the
They are conveniently supported on saddles, rings or test reduced by any allowance for under tolerance.
leg supports (see figure G.54). The use of leg supports oniy, as in figure G . k , should
When vessels are supported at more than two C r o s be confined to small vessels in which the longitudinal
sections the support reactions are significantly affected bending stresses are small compared with the axial
by small variations in the level of the supports, the stress due to the working pressure, and the local
stmghtness and local roundness of the vessel shell and stresses due to the support reactions (found from 6.2)
the relative stif€nessof different parts of the vessel can be kept within allowable limits.
against local deflections. Support at two cross sections Mountings and brackets fitted to the vessel to support
is thus to be preferred even if this requires stiffening of external loads should be designed as described
the support region of the vessel (see [ 191). in 6.3.1.
Ring supports are preferable to saddle supports for The shell thickness should not be less than that
vessels in which support at more than two cross required for internal pressure in 3.6.1.2a.
sections is unavoidable and for vacuum vessels. It may NOTE. Worked examples of the design of supports and mountings
be necessary to provide ring supports for heavy fittings for horizontal vessels are given m Enquiry Case 6500/53.
or structures supported from the vessel.
6.3.3.2 Saddle supports
Vessels designed to contain gases or liquids lighter than
water should be designed as vessels fuü of water when Figure G.54a shows a horizontal vessel fitted with
they are to be hydramiidly tested. saddle supports. The methods given in 6.2 are not
strictly applicable to loaded areas extending over the
6.3.3.2 can be used to asses this design condition large proportion of the total circumference of the
provided that the following three conditions are vessel which is usual for saddle supports.
satisfied.
The following treatment is based on an empirical
a) The stressesfi to fio for the gas (or liquid) are to analysis presented in [19] and extended based on
be limited to the values given in 6.3.3.2, where the experience with largediameter thin-walled vessels with
design stressf = ft at the design temperature. The diameter to thickness ratios up to the order of 1250 : 1.
stressesfi to fio are calculated using the equations The analysis applies to saddles and rings welded to the
given in 6.3.3.2 where p , is the design pressure at vessel. In cases where doubt arises, the method to be
the equator (see 6.3.1.2), the self weight includes used in computing stresses due to support loads, etc.,
both the vessel weight and the contents under the should be agreed between the purchaser and the
design conditions, with the wall thicknes t equal to manufacturer.
the analysis thickness.
Loose rings or saddles depend criticaìly upon fit for
b) The stressesfi tofio for the hydraulic test when their effectiveness and require analysis by alternative
the vessel is just full of liquid with no internal computational methods (see [28]).
pressure are to be limited to the values given
in 6.3.3.2, where the design stressf =fa at the test The method gives approximate values of stress which,
temperature (usually ambient). The stressfi tofio together with the appropriate stress h i t s , provide a
are caiculated using the equations given in 6.3.3.2 reasonable basis for design for non-cyclically loaded
where the wall thickness t is the nominal thickness vessels.
at the time of the test reduced by any allowance for In the case of vessels with significant cyclic loading, a
under tolerance. rigorous analysis is required (see [28], [32], [38]
c) The stressesfi to f4, calculated by the following and [39]).
procedure, are to be limited to 90 % of the minimum Maximum vessel stresses can occur when the vessel is
specified yield or proof stress (as in 6.8.6.2). The fuli of liquid but not subject to internal pressure
value of the test pressure pt is is calculated (see [19] and [21]) and this loading condition should be
using 6.8.6.1, with due regard to the requirements investigated
37) For a derivation of the basic equations and constants in this clause see [37].
G/64
O BSI 1997
~ I
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1797 I 1 b 2 Y b b 7 Ob70737 0 4 2 W

a) Saddle supports
L - b Centroid of
ring suppor
b) Ring supports
L I
9 I
c) Leg supports
Figure 6.54 m i c a l supports for horizontai vessels
O BSI
In the case of large-diameter thin-waled vessels, the A positive bending moment found from these equations
most arduous conditions can occur during filling. is one causing tension at the lowest point of the shell
However, the methods presented, based on the full cross section. The moment M4 may be positive in
condition, produce designs which are satisfactory for vessels of large diameter with supports near the ends
the pastially full condition. because of the effect of hydrostatic pressure (see
The included angle of a saddle support (û in figure G.55).
figure G.54a) should normdy be within the When Llr and blr are known, these reduce to:
range 120" I 6 I 150".This limitation, which is M3 = Wi(CiL - A)
imposed by most codes of practice, is an empirical one
based on experience of large vessels. Saddìe angies where
outside this range would require careful consideration. Cl is a fador obtained from figure G.56, and
When the supports are near the ends of the vessel
(A C- rfi)the stiffnesses of the ends tend to maintain
M4 =-
c2
[ A r
1 - + C3A - c2]
circulas support cross sections and the sheli is said to where C2 and C3 are factors obtained from figure G.57.
be stiffened by the ends.
Similar expressions for the longitudinal bending
Where the stresses in the region of the support are moments can be obtained by the orduiary methods of
found to exceed the allowable values a thickened statics for vessels in which the supports are not
strake may be used The width of this should not be symmetricaJly placed.
less than rfi about the centre saddle profile. That is,
a total length equal to, or greater than, the radius of 6.3.3.2.2 Longitudinal stresses ut mid-spun
the vessel see [38]and [39]. The resultant longitudinal stresses at mid-span due to
NOTE 1. in providing a thickened strake in the region of the pressure and bending are given by the foliowing
saddle it is assumed that the high stresses associated with the eqUati0nS:
saddle have died away. The longitudinal and shear stresses at the
stepped down thickness of the vessel may, therefore, be calculated at the highest point of the cross section
using Ki and K2 = 1.0 and K3 = 0.319.
Although the values of the bending moment and shear force at the
stepped down thickness will be slightly less than M4
and W,[(L- 2A)/(L + 4b/3)] respectiveb, it is recommended that at the lowest point of the cross section
the full values of these are used in equations (G.ll), (G.12)
and (G.13) with the values of the constants quoted above. (G.lO)
NOTE 2. A range of standardized saddle supports welded to
pressure vessels is included in [42]. These equations are based on simple beam theory
6.3.3.2.1 Longitudinal bending m o m i s which assumes that cross sections remain circular.
Figure G.55 shows the loads, reactions and longitudinal The calculated tensile and compressive stresses should
bending moments in a vessel resting on two not exceed the values permitted in A.3.4.2.1
symmetrically placed saddle supports. The bending and A.3.5.
moments are given by the foliowing equations (see [19]
and [37]):
at supports
1--
L
+
G/66 O BSI 1997

Annex G b u e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Y(L%) Load unit length =

' 2w,
- =w
I L I - 46
J
I
A
Hydrostatic
Loads on ends
1 Z W f
I L+ -
I 3
a) Loads and reactions
2bW
3
I i LondTtensityI w
Beam model of vessel
*
v)
*
b) Shear force diagram
c) Bending moment diagram
Positive values of M4 are obtained for the following forms and proportions:
flat ends A h < 0.707

ends with 10 % knuckle radius A/r e 0.44
semi-ellipsoidal ends 2 1 ratio A h < 0.363
M4 is always negative for hemispherical ends.
The dimension 3b/8 is an approximation for the distance from the tangent plane to the centre of gravity of the
dished end and its contents for all ranges of dished end covered by this standard.
Figure 6.55 Cylindrical shell acting as beam over supports
O BSI
BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 1,Jmuaty 1997 Annex G
G
*
O
0.15 0.15
o. 1 0.1
0.05 0.05
O O
1.0 2 .o 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 8.0 10 15 20
Figure G.66 Factor for bending moment at mid-span

*
v)
*
O BSI
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1997 m L b 2 4 b b î 0b70942 4 0 T
~~
BS 5 5 0 : 1997 Issue 2, September 1997 Annex G
6.3.3.2.3 Longitudinal stresses at the saddles Table 6.2 Design factors Ki and K2
Longitudinal stresses at the saddles depend upon the Condition
local stiffness of the shell in the plane of the supports 0 (degrees)
because, if the shell does not remain round under load,
a portion of the upper part of its cross section, as
shown d-i ' c d y in figure G.58, is ineffective
against longitudinal bending (see [ 191).
The resultant longitudinal stresses due to pressure and
or rings, i.e. A 5 r/2 or
rings provided
Shell unstiffened by
135
1150
120
1
11
1
11
0.107 0.192
1
weight should be evaluated at two positions as follows. end or rings,i.e. A > r/2 135 0.132 0.234
a) Either and no rings provided
150 0.161 0.279
1) at the highest point of the cross section when
the shell is swened by rings or by proximity of
the ends, 6.3.3.2.4 lhngentid shearing stresses
i.e. A 5 r/2 ; Tangential shearing stresses are given by the following
or equations.
The values of K3, K4 and the dowable tangentid
2) near the equator when the shell is unstiffened
shearing stress values are given in table G.3.
in both cases 1) and 2) the stress is given by
The thickness of the saddle plate should not be
(G. 11) included when using equations (G.13) to (G. 15).
a) Saddle not near vessel end (A > rn),with or
b) At the lowest point of the cross section: without rings added
(G.12)
(G.13)
Values of Ki and K2 are given in table G.2.
The thickness of the saddle plate should not be This equation does not apply when A > U4,but such
included in the equations. proportions are unusual.
The calculated tensile and compressive stresses should b) Saddle near vessel end (A IrE), without rings
not exceed the values permitted in A.3.4.2.1 added
and A.3.6. in this case there are shearing stresses in both the
shell and vessel end. They are given by:
This area is ineffective 1) in the shell q = K3

- wl (G.14)
rt
against longitudinal bending
in an unstiffened shell 2) in the end qe = K4wl
- (G.15)
fie I
c) Saddle near vessel end (A 5 rD), with rings in I
the plane of the saddle.
When the shell is stiffened by rings in the plane of
the saddle and bl < A 5 r/2 or b1/2 < A Ibl, shear
st-resses are:
1) in the shell adjacent to the ring
q=-sinv,
Wl (G. 15a)
nrt
where
v, is measured form the zenith (top) of the
cylinder
Figure 6.68 Portion of shell q is a maximum at v, = 7d2 in which case: I
ineffective against longitudinal q=- K3wl
bending rt
2) in the end qe = K4wl
- (G.15b)
rte
d) Saddle near vessel end (A 5 rn),with rings
adjacent to the saddle.
Gi70 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

COPYRIGHT
O BSI 1997
When rings are placed e a c e n t to the saddle, it is NOTE. When rings are present, the shear stress in the end, qe, for
assumed that the shear sbresses do not beneñt from cases c) and d) wiU be reduced ikom that given by equation G.16.
However, for simpiiciíy, it is recommended that the procedure
the rings,see table G.3. In Mew of this,the most given by equation G.16 be adopted for these cases.
appropriate equations for the case when
bl < A I r12 or b112 < A I bl are therefore those 6.3.3.2.6 Cimmferentid stresses
given for the shell stiffened by the dished end to the Figure G.59 shows the circumferential bending
vessel. moments diagrammati 'a
1) In the sheii Circumferential &esses should be dculated using the
IntheregionofOcylca equations given in 6.3.3.2.6.1 and 6.3.3.2.6.2. The
numerical values of the circumferenlhl siresesf6, f7
(G.15~) andfs found using these expresions should not
In the region of a c yl c K exceed 1.25$
Unless the saddle is welded to the vessel, the value
(G.15d) Off5 should not exceed EEB, where E is the
circumferential buckling strain which is obtained from
where the equation given in figure 3 . M which in turn uses n
a 20 2 (K -3 from ñgure 3.&2. In this derivation the value of U2R
always equals 0.2 both in ñgure 3.62 and in the
Q, is measured k m the zenith (top) of the equation in figure 3.6-3.
cylinder, NOTE. The background to this design method is given in [U].
û is the included angle of the saddle support When the saddle is welded to the vessel the value of f5
(see ñgure G.54a). should not exceed$
q is a maximum at v, = a, in which
c a ~ eq = K 3 W1/~
2) In the end qe =-K4Wl (G.15e)

rte
Table 6.3 Desim factors E" and KAand d o w a b l e tangential shearing stresses
*
I
rn* Component Condition Sadàìeangie Factor

.9 (degrees)
V h e l shell K 3 A > r12 AI?$!
Shell unstjfîened by rings 120 1.171 0.880
135 0.968 0.654
150 O. 799 0.485
Shell stiffeneà by rings in 120 0.319 0.319
plane of saddles 135 0.319 0.319
150 0.319 0.319
Shell stiffened by rings 120 1.171 0.880
d a c e n t to saàdles 135 0.958 0.654
150 O. 799 0.486
V h e l end K 4 blh! < A 5 bl bl < A 5 r/2
Shell stiffened by end of vessel 120 0.880 0.401
136 0.664 0.344
150 0.485 0.296
II I
Allowable tangential Vessel shell Vessel end
shearing stresses
(seenote 1)
min (0.83 O.oGEt/r) l-%f-f,(d)
ísee note 2)
NOTE! 1. Allowable tangential shearing stress values are derived from strain gauge tests on large vessels (see [19])and experience witl
large diameter thin waüed vessels.
Nû"E 2. The nomind maximum tensile stress in head due to internai pressure, f,(d can be found from figure 3.5-2 using appropriate
vaiues of hJD and dD to give p/f and hence fn(d) = pl@@ where e is the vessel end analysis thickness.
O BSI
COPYRIGHT British Standards
1998 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards GR1
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1977 Sl l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70944 282
BS 6 6 0 : 1997 Issue 2, September 1997 Annex G
Maximum bending
moment on each ring
stiffener
Maximum bending
moment
=Me=KsW,r
a) For no stiffener or for b) For ring stiffeners adjacent to saddle

ring stiffener in plane of
sadàie
Figure G.69 Circumferential bending moment diagrams
6.3.3.2.6.1 She4.J not s t @ i i by rings The stresses in the shell at the edge of the saddle plate
The circumferentiai síreses are calculated as foiìows. should be checked using equations (G.16) to (G.18).
a) At the lowest point of the cross sectio~ The saddle ange 8 may now include the angle of the
saddle plate up to but not exceeding + 12". The value
(G. 16) oft should be taken equaìto the shell thickness; ò2 is
assumedtobe unchanged"
b) At the horn of the saddle (see ñgure G.54a): In,-s when an extended sacidle piate of angle
2 (0 + 12') and width 2 b2 = ù 1 + 10t is used without
the use of a stiffeningring, the stwssesf5 andf6 are
L - w, 12&W1T calculated using equations (G.16) to (G.18) as follows:
for < 4 thenf6 =-
4% - T(G. 18) a) At the edge of the saddle; using a thickness equal
Where b2 = bl + lot. to (t + ti) and constants & and & based upon
Unless the saddle is welded to the vessel, values of & upon an angle 8 and b2 = bl + lot. When the saddle
should correspond to those given in table G.6 for rings is welded to the vessel the dowable value of f5 is f
macent to saddle. When the saddle is welded to the and& is 1.26J where f is the minimum of the design
vessel, K6 may be taken as onetenth of tsuS value. sixes values for the shell and for the saddie plate.
Values for & are given in table G.4. b) At the edge of the extended saddle p b , using a
These stresws may be reduced if necessary by thiclniess t and COnstantS & and &3 based upon an
extending the saddle plate as shown in ñgure G.60. It is angie 8 + 12" and & = ó 1 + lot. When the saddle is
recommended that the thickness of the saddle piate in welded to the vessel the allowable d u e of f5 is f
this case should be equal to the thickness of the shell mdf6 is 1.25J where f is the design stress d u e for
Pb. the shell.
If the width of this plate is not less than ò2 and it if the sh.esses are unacceptable then the width andor
subtends an angle not less than (û + E ) , the reduced the included angle of the saddle should be increased
dresses in the shell at the edge of the saddle can be and the calculations repeated,or alternatively provide
obtaineà by substituting (t + ti), the combined rings and carry out an analysis in accordance
thiclaiess of shell and saddle plate, for t in with 6.3.3.2.6.2.
WOIW (G.16) to (G.18). b2 is ass~meedto be
unchanged

~
S T D - B S I BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1997 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70945 117 I

Annex G Issue 1, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
It has recently been shown that peak stresses in the

shell at the horn of the sadàle can be reduced by
introducing some flexibiìity into the saddle design in
the region of the saddle horn (see [28] and [321).
I Table G.4 Design factor Kf;
!i
I
lAlr
I
5 0.50
û (degrees)
120
0.0132
I 136
0.0103
I 150
0.0079
I 166
0.0059
I
I 1.00 0.0528 0.0413 0.0316 0.0238

2
I I NOTE. For 0.50 < A h the1.00 in thisK6table.

linear internolation of
<
vaiues
should be obtained
vaiues of by
*
u1
*
O BSI 1997
GR2-A
~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~ ~ ~~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 l b Z ' i b b 9 Ob707'ib 055
Annex G b u e 1, January 1997 BS 5500: 1997
/ I Parts of saddle below

this line offer no
H=K, w,
appreciable resistance
to force H
I
J H = Kg W , P a r t s o i saddle below
this line offer no
appreciable resistance
b) Saddle support with extended plate to force H
Figure 6.60 Saddle supports
6.3.3.2.5.2 SheU'ffsit __ - rinas

bu - (see
. fimG.61)
1
The second moment of area, I, is taken about the
The equations for calcuiating circumferential stresses x-x axis parallel to the axis of 'the shell and through
are given in a) and b) following. Positive values denote the centroid of the shaded area With an extended
tensile stresses and negative values denote saddle plate (see 6.3.3.2.5.1 and figure G.60) the
compression. combined thickness (t + ti) may be used for t in
figure G.61a when calculating the stresses at the horn
Values of C4, C5, K7, and& are given in table G.5. The of the saddle. The axial length assumed to cany the
effective cross-sectional area, a, of the stiffener (or moment (t2 + lot) in figure G.61a becomes t2 + lO(t + 1
stiffeners) and the portion of the shell that can be and this axial length and the combined thickness are
assumed to act with it (them) is indicated by the used to calculate I,a,c and d in equations (G.19)
shaded areas in figure G.61. and (G.20).
O BSI 1997
GI73
~
S T D * B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 D Lb24bbS Ob70947 T 9 1 D

Ring in plane of saddle Rings adjacent to saddle

Internal ring Internal rings External rings
(see figure G.61a) (see figure G.61b) (see figure G.61~)

120 135 150 165 120 135 160 165 120 136 150 166
c4 -1 -1 -1 -1 +1 +1 +1 +1 -1 -1 -1 -1
(-75 +1 +1 +I +1 -1 -1 -1 -1 +1 +1 +1 +1
K5 - - - - 0.760 0.711 0.673 0.645 0.760 0.711 0.673 0.645
K7 0.0528 0.0413 0.0316 0.0238 0.0581 0.0471 0.0355 0.0242 0.0581 0.0471 0.0355 0.0242
K8 0.340 0.323 0.303 0.277 0.271 0.248 0.219 0.184 0.271 0.248 0.219 0.184
if the extended saddle plate subtends an angle not less - At the edge
- of" the saddle
than (e + 12") the stsesSesf7 andf8 can be obtained Calculatef5 and,f6 using a thickness (t + ti),
from equations (G.19) and (G.20) using K7 and& constants K5 and K6 based upon and an angle 8,
values corresponding to saddle angle of (e + 12"). with the values K6 for A h 5 0.50, and b2 = bl + lot.
The stiffeners shown in figure G.61 are of rectangular When the saddle is welded to the vessel the
section. Stiffeners of other sections may be used if ailowable value of f5 is f and f6 is 1.25J where f is
preferred. the minimum of the design stress values for the
In summ= when an extended saddle plate of angle shell and for the saddle plate.
1 (e + 12") and width 2 b2 = bl + 10t is used together
with the use of a stiffening ring in the plane of the -At the edge of the exï%m.ùeùsaddle plate
saddle, as in figure G.61, the stressesf7 and f8 are Calcuiate f5 and f6 using a thickness of t, constants
calculated using equations (G.19) and (G.20) as K5 and K6 based upon an angle 8 + 12", with the
follows:- value of K6 for Air 5 0.50, and b2 = bl + lot. When
- At the edge of the saddle the saddle is welded to the vessel the allowable
Using a thickness equal to (t + ti), a length of shell value of f5 is f and f6 is 1.25J where f is the
of t2 + 10(t + ti) to calculate I, a, c and d and minimum of the design stress for the shell.
constants K7 and &3 based upon an angle of 8. The - I n the stgfming ring centre profile
ailowable values of f7 and f8 are 1.25J where f is Calculate f7 and& using a thickness of t, and axial
the minimum of the design stress values for the length of shell of + 10t for each ring for I, a, c
shell, saddle plate and stiffening ring. and d and constants K7 and K8 based on an angle
-At th^ edge of the extmukd saddle plate of 8 + 12". The allowable values of f7 and f8 are
Using a thickness t, a length of shell of + 10t to 1.25J wheref is the minimum of the design stress
calculate I, a, c and d and constants K7 and &3 values for the shell and for the stiffening ring.
based upon an angle 8 + 12". The ailowable values
of f7 and f8 are 1.25J where f is the minimum of the a) A ring in the plane of the saddle
design stress values for the shell and for the At the horn of the saddle, in the shell:
stiffening ring.
When several stiffeners are used, as in figure G.61b (G.19)
and c, the values of I and a are for the sum of the At the horn of the saddle in the flange or tip of the
shaded areas.
ring remote from the shell:
When two ring stiffeners are being used, it is essential
that these be placed adjacent to the saddle and can be (G.20)
welded to either the inside or the outside of the shell
as shown in figure G.61b and c. b) Rings adjacent to the saddle
It is essential that the axial length of shell between the At the lowest point of the cross section:
stiffenerc be not less than bl plus 10times the shell
- K5wl
thickness and not more than the mean radius of the
shell. In this case, it is essential that a further check on
f5 =7 (G.21)
the magnitude of f6 be made assuming the value Of &, Near the equator, in the shell
from table G.4, is that for Ah-5 0.50. cfi7wlTc K8Wl
In s-, when an extended saddle plate of angle f7= I (G.22)
a
2 (8 + 12") and width 2 b2 + 10t is used with
stiffening rings ascent to the saddle, as in figures Near the equator, in the fiange or tip of the ring
G.61(b) and (c), the stressesf5 and f6 are calculated remote from the shell:
using equations (G.17), (G.lS), and (G.21) and stresses
f7 and f8 from equations (G.22) and (G.23) as follows:-
Gff4
O BSI 1997
t.hickness
a) Ring stiffener in plane of saddle
I I
thickness
b,+lOtbxSr
b) Internal ring stiffeners adjacent to saddle
t = shell thickness
b , + l O ' ~ X ~ f
c) External ring stiffeners adjacent to saddle
Figure G.61 Typical ring stiffeners
O LISI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards Gi75
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1977 l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70747
6.3.3.2.6 Design of saddles The longitudinal bending moments in the shell and the
The width bl of steel saddles (see figure G.54a) should corresponding stresses can be found in the same way
be chosen to satisfy the circumferential stress h i t s as as for saddle supports from equations (G.7) to (G.12).
defined by equations (G. 16) to (G.23), where applicable. The tangential shear stresses in the shell a x e n t to
For most cases a width equal to (where D is the the ring support are given by
mean diameter of the vessel in mm) will be
satisfactory (G.24)
The minimum section at the low point of a saddle (see
figure G.60) has to resist a force H equal to the sum of The allowable tangential shearing stress values are
the horizontal components of the reactions on onehalf given in table G.3.
of the saddle. The effective cross section resisting this
load should be limited to the metal cross section The maximum circumferential stsess in the ring, due to
within a distance equal to ris below the shell and the dead loads is given by
average direct stress on this cross section should be f i K1oW1r2
o = z +-KllWl (G.25)
limited to two-thirdsof the allowable design stress. a
H = K9Wl It can be assumed that a length of shell I ( = fi
where + contacting width of support) ads with the ring
support to form a combined section and that, t-2 is the
radius through the centroid of this section, 2 is the
I$ I 120 I 135 I 150 I 165 least section modulus and u is an effective area of the
I IC, 10.204 I 0.231 1 0.259 10.288 I section. The constants Klo and K11 are found from the
table G.6.
The upper and lower h g e s of a steel saddle should
be thick enough to resist the longitudinal bending over Table G.6 Values of K,, and K,,
the web or webs due to the bearing loads as in any
Kll
mache support. The web should be stiffened against
buckling due to vertical shear forces as for structural
beams, and against bending due to longitudinal
external loads on the vessel. 30 0.075 0.41
One saddle of each vessel should be provided with 35 0.065 0.40
some form of sliding bearing or rocker in the following 40 0.057 0.39
cases:
45 0.049 0.38
a) when steel saddles are welded to the vessel shell;
50 0.043 0.37
b) when large movements due either to thermal
expansion or to axiai strain in a long vessel are 55 0.039 0.36
expected. 60 0.035 0.35
6.3.3.3 Ring supports f o r horizontal vessels 65 0.030 0.34
Ring supports for horizontal vessels, as shown in 70 0.025 0.32
figure G.Mb, are used where it is important to ensure 75 0.020 0.31
that the shell of the vessel close to the supports
remains round under load. This is usuaiiy the case for: 80 0.017 0.29
a) thin-walled vessels likely to distort excessively 85 0.015 0.27
due to their own weigh$ 90 0.015 0.25
b) long vessels requiring support at more than two
positions.
G/76
O BSI 1997
Annex G Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500: 1997
The stress in the ringfi0 should not exceedf. In the Since the thickness of branch and shell will usually be
case of category 1 and 2 vessels the rings are in general dissimilar, there will be differentid expansion of the
of the same material as the vessel and constructed to b m c h and shell during the transient, which will
the same category as the vessel with thef value produce additional discontinuity stress.
obtained from tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12. In the case of the A rigorous stress analysis would need the use of finite
rings associated with category 3 vessels, it is element computer methods which, in the case of a
considered acceptable to use the corresponding branch on a cylindrical shell, would involve a complex
category 1 and 2 vesself values as given in tables 2.3-2 threedimensional approach. It would be difficult to be
to 2.3-12, provided the radial weld s e a m joining the equally precise in s p e c m g the heat transfer rates
segments of the rings are located in the region of low operating, which have been shown experimentally to
bending stress in the rings. The distribution of the vary considerably around the circumference of
bending moment in a typical ring support is shown branches in cylinders. The cost of one such rigorous
in [37]. analysis would be prohibitive in most cases and
Where the ring is made of a different material from usually the designer will need to consider several
that of the vessel, thefvalue for the weaker material transient operating conditions.
should be used For mild steel ring girders used on Of more value in general pressure vessel work are
category 3 vessels and not subject to above ambient more simple methods which give realisücaiiy
temperatures, it is acceptable to use the allowable conservative maximum stress levels for use in a fatigue
stresses from [40]. In this case the ring should be assessment.
designed as a separate structure without the benefit of
the length of the shell. 6.4.2 Outline of the suggested design method
Unless a vessel with ring supports works at The method described in 6.4.3 to 6.4.6 first uses well
atmospheric temperature and pressure, at least one known analytical methods for determining
ring support has to be provided with some form of through-thickness temperature distribution and stresses
sliding bearing at its connection to the foundation or in the branch and shell m a t e d during a fluid
supporting stsucture. transient The average temperature of each component
NOTE. The values of Klo and Kll are derived from the absolute is then used in a thin-shell discontinuity analysis at the
maximum circumferential moment and the absolute maximum junction of branch and shell. The total stress is taken
direct force in a ring support as shown in figure G.54b. The to be the sum of the temperatwe and discontinuity
influence of shear forces in the ring due to reactions WIR is not StrES.
taken into account and the designer should satisfy himself that the
ring section is sufficient in cross-sectional area and lateral The solution yields a conservative estimate of the gross
stiffness to resist these forces. It is not necessary to take into section stsesses from which the maximum equivalent
consideration secondary shell bending stresses induced by the stress intensity can be calculated In applying the
rigidity of, for example, a support ring, when evaluating, except results in a fatigue analysis, stress concentsation
where fatigue is a goveming criterion when the permissible stress
is a matter for individual consideration. factors would be applied to allow for the effect of
welds or local geomew.
6.4 Simplified method for assessing transient
thermal stress at a pressure vessel nozzle Graphs and tables are included which reduce the
overall solution to the simple use of thermal and stress
6.4.1 Introduction factors which are applied in a finai set of stress
It is often necessary to consider the stresses that will equations.
arise at the junction of a nozzle with a cylindrical or
spherical shell when the fluid contained in the vessel is
subject to a rise or fall in temperature. The value of
these stresses may decide the number of temperature
transients which can be accommodated without the
risk of fatigue failure or, alternatively, the stress levels
may dictate the rates of temperature variation which
can safely be permitted
During such variation in operating conditions, shell and
branch material will be subject to stresses developed
by transient through-thickness temperature distribution.
The intensity of these stresses will be dependent upon
the rate of fluid temperature rise or fall, the surface
heat-tramfer coefficient and also upon the metal
thicknesses and properties.
O BSI 1997 Gff7

= Lb24bb9
~ ~ ~~
STDmBSI BS 5500-ENGL 1777 O b 7 0 7 5 1 412 9
BS 5500 :1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex G
6.4.3 Notation and derivation of method 6.4.3.2 Derivation of method

6.4.3.1 Notation Consider a cylinder-to-sphere assembly as shown in
figure G.62 with a fluid subject to a rise in temperature
For the purposes of 6.4 the following symbols apply. on the inside. Assume that heat transfer
coefficients (hb and &) apply at the branch and shell
ai, u2, u3 are branch influence coefficients; inner surfaces. The fluid velocity in the branch will
usually be greater than that in the shell and hb may be
are shell influence coefficients; several times larger than &, During a ramp rise in
temperature the timetemperature behaviour of branch
are stress factors (from tables G.7, G.8, and shell material will be similar to that shown in
G.9, and G.10); figure G.63.
is the specific heat of material Branch and shell material away from the discontinuity
(iJKk3.K)); will be subject to thermal stress proportional to the
is the diffusvity of material ( i m2/s); difference between the surface temperature (q or To)
is the modulus of elasticity (i N/m2); and the mean temperature ( T d . These
through-thickness temperature stresses will generaüy
sheas force (in N); be different in branch and shelL
is the surface heat transfer coefficient
(in W/(m2-K)); Solutions are given in [29] for stresses in a fiat plate
subject to a ramp rise in fluid temperature at one
is the surface heat transfer coefficient at surface.
the branch inner surface (in W/(m2-K));
%king Poisson's ratio as equal to 0.3, these solutions
is the surface heat transfer coefficient at may be plotted in the form of figures G.64 and G.65,
the shell inner surface (in W/(m2.K)); where
is the conductivity of vessel material
Si = - KiEüTf
(in W/(mZ-K));
are branch thermal factors (from So = K2EüTf
figures G.64 and G.65); Si and So are the thermal stresses at inner and outer
are shell thermal factors (from figures G.64 surfaces.
and G.65); The d u e s of Ki and K2 are plotted in figures G.64
are branch and shell mean temperature and G.65 against the parameters:
factors (from figure G.66); dû
is the mean temperature difference factor; N=$T
= m,
m = k-
shear moment (in N-m); ht
= doh2; where
is the mean radius of branch (in m); d = Wcp
is the outer radius of branch (in m); Also, from the solutions given in [i],curves may be
is the inner radius of branch (in m); drawn as shown in figure G.66 which give the ratio of
is the mean radius of shell (in m); rise in mean metal temperature to the rise in fluid
is stress (in N/m2) (see text for specific temperature (T,/Tf) using the same parameters N
symbols); and m.
is the nominal branch thickness (in m); Assuming that the thermal expansion of the branch
is the nominal shell thickness (in m); and the shell opening is proportional to the respective
average metal temperatures, the radial discontinuity
is the fluid temperature rise from start of
transient ( i K); introduced at the junction would be
is the inner surface temperature (in K); 6 = (Kb - &)ü'#f
is the outer surface temperature (in K); where & and K, are obtained from figure G.66.
is the mean temperature ( i K); In addition to the relative horizontal displacement of
is the discontinuity of edge rotation; the two parts, a rotational discontinuity (V) will also be
produced by edge rotation of the shell opening.
is the coefficient of linear expansion
(in m/(m*K));
is the radial discontinui@,
is the time from start of transient (in s);
is the density of the material (in kg/m3).
Gff8
O BSI 1997
~-
STD.BSI BS 5500-ENGL 1997 L b Z q b b 7 Ob70952 3 5 7
Annex G h u e 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
In an actual construction these discontinuities wiu be where

removed by shear forces (3') and moments (M)acting Di = A d @ + 8.54(C51°.52?.5
at the junction and their values would be given by the
D2 = A2lC - 3.33(Cs)z2
equations:
D = D1(2.6(CSZ)'.5 + A l ) - 02'
(al + A1)F + (a2 + A2)M = 6
(a2 + A2)F + (a3 + A3)M = V Using the calculated values of junction force and
moment, equations for stsesses in the branch and shell
where u, and& are deflections and rotation influence at the junction may also be written, and stresses will
coefficients for branch and shell respectively The be directly proportional to the difference in mean
values of a,may be obtained form simple thin-cylinder temperature between the two parts. A general
bending theory; values of A , referring to a pierced expression for discontinuity stress may therefore be
hemisphere may be more conveniently obtained from written as:
thin-shell computer analysis.
S, = K&,EaTf
In practice the 'free' rotation at the edge of the shell
where Kd is equal to the difference between the
opening would be small and would in any case tend to
temperature factors Kb and K, given by figure G.66
reduce the values of discontinuity force and moment.
if the value V i s therefore taken to be zero, the
and C, represents factors for the various component
equations offer a more simple solution, giving stresses in the assembly The values of C, for a range
somewhat conservatively high values of F and M. of bmch/sheU geometries have been computed and
are given in tables G.7, G.8, G.9 and G.lO.
Taking Poisson's ratio as 0.3, inserting equations for d,
and letting C = R/z S = r/R, 2 = T/t, a non-dimensional The total stresses will be given by combining the
solution of the equations will be given by discontinuity stresses with those due to
through-thickness transient temperatme distribution
F D1 (Si and So) and may be represented by a general set of
B=D stress equations as given in 6.4.4.
M 0 2
KT=D
t
--m
Figure 6-62 Nozzle geometry
O BSI 1997
Gí79
S T D * B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 E L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70753 275
n
E
al
4-
z
U
c
L
m
4 - I
Time Time -
Figure 6.63 Transient fluid and metal temperatures
GBO
O BSI 1997
=
~
STDOBSI BS 5500-ENGL I777 l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70754 121
9
O
c
9
c
7
O
x
P
<
c
-!
c
9
P
00
O
'9
O
4
O
cv
O
O
1
Y J O 'Y
O BSIStandards
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1977 D L b 2 4 b b 7 ü b 7 0 7 5 5 ObB
BS 6 5 0 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex G
8
c
s
a
3
@
(li
Fi
O
Y
u
4!
(li
(li
2
Y
(li
-. 1
O
E
Q,
s
8
i
7
(li
Fi
Q,
Y
8
c
,8 z
v9
5
M
i2
G/82
O BSI 1997
~
~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 q b b 7 Ob7095b T T 4
Annex G Issue 1, January 1997 BS SMH) : 1997
9
O
O
c
8
c
9
c
-
o
-8
O BSIStandards
~ ~~~ ~~ ~ _ _ _ _ _ ~ ~ ~ ~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 I1 b 2 4 b b 7 ü b 7 0 9 5 7 930 I
6.4.4 lòtal stress equations 6.4.6 Use and limitations of the method
6.4.4.1 Junction stresses The final stress equations should provide a designer
a) sheu with a simple means of estimating stress ranges in a
Inner surface branch due to thermal cycling. Although based upon
the analysis of the rotationally symmetric
circumferential cylinder-to-sphere connection, the results should be
sufficiently accurate for use in the fatigue assessment
of branches in cylindrical shells.
meridional The analysis for through-thickness temperature stress
is based upon a flat-plate solution and is reasonably
accurate for cylinders where rdq is less than about 1.1.
Outer surface For branches thicker than this,the stress factor (kl)
may be multiplied by the ratio r/q for a conservative
circumferential
result
The analysis for discontinuity stress will give
conservative results since it neglects the effects of edge
meridional rotation produced by any axial temperature gradient
on the branch and by temperature gradient through the
shell wali. Both effects would in practice tend to
b) Branch reduce the junction forces and moments.
Inner surface Such a simple type of analysis cannot, of come,
chcumferential predict the peak stresses which would occur due to
local changes in geometsy at the junction and the
s'fi = [&(ci + 0.3c2 - 1.0) - kl]EûTf
designer would need to apply appropriate stress
longitudinal concentration factors before applying stress results in a
s'fi = [&c2 - kl]EûTf fatigue analysis.
Outer surface in practical use the tabulated stress factors Cl, C2, C3
circumferential and C4 will be found to plot as fairly straight lines
s ' h o = [b+&(ci - O.3C2 - l.O)jEûTf against the various parameters, and interpolation for
longitudinal intermediate geometric ratios can be made with
reasonable accuracy.
s i o = [& - &c2]EaTf
where 6.4.6 Worked example
Kd = K - - Ks (read from fim G.66) Problem. A branch 300 mm mean diameter and 50 mm
KI, K2, kl, k2 are temperature factors from thick is welded to a steel vessel 3 m diameter
figures G.64 and G.65 for shell (K) and branch (k) and 100 mm thick. The contained fluid is subject to a
Cl, C2, C3 are stress factors from tables G.7, G.8
ramp rise in temperature of 200 "C in 10 min. The
average heat transfer coefficients to sheli and branch
and G.9.
are estimated as 570 W/(m2.K) and 2850 W/(m2.K)
The maximum equivalent stress intensity will usually respectively Calculate thermal stress in the assembly at
occur at the junction between branch and shell to the end of the transient.
which point the above stress equations refer.
We:
Maximum bending stress in the branch may occur at
k = 41.5 W/(m.K)
a distance 0.62& from the junction. At this point the
total thermal stresses will be given by equations c = 420 J/(kgK)
in 6.4.4.2. p = 7700 kghn3
6.4.4.2 Branch stresses d =-k = 41-5 = 1.28 X 10-5mZ/s
Inner surface cp 420 X 7700
circumferential
S'hi = [Kd(0.322(Cl - 1) + 0.192C2 - 0.3C1) - kl] EaTf
longitudid
s'li = [&(0.644c2 - c4) - kl] EaTf
Outer surface
CirCumferenM k
m=-= 41*5 = 0.73
s ' h o = [Kd(o.322(Ci - 1) + 0.3c1 - 0.192C2) + &] EU? hT 570 X 0.1
longitudinal Ki = 0.32 (from figure G.64)
s'1, = [Kd(c4 - 0.644c2) + b ] EaTf K2 = 0.14 (from figure G.65)
where C4 is a stress factor from table G.lO. K, = 0.30 (from figure G.66)
G/84
O BSI 1997
Branch: Rom this analysis the maximum stress intensity would

dû 1.28 X lû5X 600 occur at the inner surface of the branch and would
N=F= = 3.1 equal
(0.05)z
k 41.5 S,, = 236.4 + 102.8 = 339.2 N h 2
m=--
ht - 2850 X 0.05 = In this example, if the inner surface of a weld at the
branch to shell junction may be considered to be
kl = 0.14 (from figure G.64)
ground flush then the design life, due to thennal
& = 0.08 (from figure G.65) cycling alone, would be obtained by entering the
Kj = 0.82 (from figure G.66) fatigue design curve (see figure C.3) at a value of
Since r,Jq = 1.4 (i.e. rdri > 1.1) altemathg stress of %S,, (see C.8). otherwise, and at
other locations, it may be necessary to apply additional
150 peak stress factom to allow for weld geometry
kl (corrected) = -kl = 0.17
125
If temperature cycling coincides with pressure changes
Kd = Kb - K, = 0.52 then any stresses due to pressure should be added to
Calculate geometric factors (Cl, C2, C3) the component stresses given above, before calculating
RIT = 15, rlR = 0.1, Z = Tlt = 2.0 the maximum stress intensity in accordance with C.2.3.
Cl = 0.26 (from table G.7)
C2 = 0.70 (from table G.8)
C3 = 0.13 (from table G.9)
calculate total themzd stress
Rise in fluid temperature (Tf)= 200 K
E = 21 X 104 MN/m2
a = 12.6 X lO%d(m.K)
EuTf = 21 X 12.6 X 20 X 10-' = 530 MN/m2
sheur
Totai Stress
stress MN^^)
factor
-0.157 -83.2
S,,i = 0.52
("4' - 0.13 1- 0.32 = -0.296 - 157.2
0.248 131.4
-0.019 -9.9
Branch:
Total Stress
stress (MN/m2)
factor
S', = 0.52[0.26 + (0.3 X 0.7) - 1.01 - 0.17 = -0.446 -236.4
S', = (0.52 X 0.7) - 0.17 = O. 194 102.8
S'ho = 0.08 + 0.52 [O26 - (0.3 X 0.7) - 1.01 = -0.414 -219.4
Sio= 0.08 - (0.52 X 0.7) = -0.284 -150.5
O BSIStandards
COPYRIGHT British 1997 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards GI85
~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ub70959 703
rlR 2=5 2=4 2=3 2=2 2 = 1.5 Z=1 2 = 0.66 2 =0.5

0.05 o. 11 O. 15 0.20 0.29 0.36 0.46 0.57 0.66
o. 1 o. 10 O. 13 0.18 0.26 0.32 0.40 0.50 0.59
0.2 o. 11 O. 14 0.20 0.27 0.32 0.39 0.48 0.56
0.3 o. 12 O. 16 0.22 0.30 0.35 0.41 0.49 0.57
0.4 O. 13 O. 17 0.23 0.31 0.37 0.43 0.50 0.57
0.5 O. 14 O. 18 0.24 O. 33 0.38 0.44 0.51 0.58
r/R 2=5 2=4 2=3 2=2 Z = 1.5 Z=1 Z = 0.66 Z = 0.5

0.05 0.08 0.11 0.15 0.22 0.26 0.34 0.48 0.53
o. 1 0.09 0.11 O. 16 0.22 0.26 0.33 0.41 0.49
0.2 o. 10 O. 14 o. 19 0.26 0.30 0.35 0.43 0.50
0.3 o. 11 0.15 0.21 0.27 0.33 0.38 0.45 0.52
0.4 o.12 0.17 0.22 0.30 0.35 0.39 0.47 0.53
0.5 O. 14 0.18 0.24 0.32 0.38 0.43 0.49 0.56
rlR 2=5 2=4 2=3 2=2 Z = 1.5 Z=1 Z = 0.66 2 = 0.5

0.05 0.07 o.10 O. 13 o. 19 0.23 0.30 0.39 0.47
o.1 O. 08 o. 11 O. 15 0.21 0.25 0.30 0.38 0.45
0.2 o. 10 O. 13 0.18 0.24 0.29 0.33 0.41 0.48
0.3 o. 12 O. 15 0.21 0.26 0.32 0.35 0.44 0.50
0.4 o.12 O. 17 0.22 0.28 0.35 0.39 0.46 0.53
0.5 O. 13 o.18 0.24 O. 32 0.37 0.42 0.49 0.55
r/R 2=5 2=4 2=3 2=2 Z = 1.5 Z=1 Z = 0.66 2 =0.5

0.05 1.51 1.39 1.18 0.80 0.52 0.21 0.05 0.01
o. 1 1.48 1.35 1.11 O. 70 0.42 0.13 0 - 0.03
0.2 1.44 1.29 1.04 O. 62 0.34 0.07 - 0.04 - 0.06
0.3 1.41 1.25 1.00 0.58 0.31 0.04 - 0.07 - 0.08
0.4 1.39 1.24 0.98 0.56 0.29 0.03 - 0.08 - 0.09
0.5 1.38 1.22 0.97 0.55 0.28 0.02 - 0.09 - 0.10
r/R 2=5 2=4 2=3 2=2 2 = 1.5 2 =1 2 =0.66 Z = 0.5

0.05 1.50 1.36 1.12 0.70 0.41 O. 13 0.01 - 0.02
o.1 1.45 1.30 1.04 0.60 0.32 0.07 0 - 0.05
0.2 1.41 1.26 0.99 0.56 0.29 0.03 - 0.07 - 0.08
0.3 1.38 1.23 0.97 0.54 0.28 0.01 - 0.09 - 0.10
0.4 1.38 1.23 0.97 0.54 0.28 0.01 - 0.09 - 0.10
0.5 I .37 1.21 0.96 0.54 0.27 0.01 - 0.10 - 0.11
rlR 2=5 2=4 2=3 2=2 2 =1.5 2 =1 Z = 0.66 Z = 0.5

0.05 1.47 1.32 1.06 0.63 0.35 0.09 - 0.01 - 0.03
o.1 1.43 1.26 0.99 0.55 0.28 0.04 - 0.05 - 0.06
0.2 1.40 1.24 0.97 0.54 0.27 0.02 - 0.08 - 0.09
0.3 1.39 1.23 0.97 0.54 0.27 0.02 - 0.08 - 0.10
0.4 1.38 1.22 0.96 0.54 0.27 0.01 - 0.09 - 0.11
0.5 1.37 1.21 0.95 0.54 0.27 0.01 - 0.10 - 0.11
Gí86
O BSI 1997
r/R 2=5 2=4 2=3 2=2 2 = 1.5 Z= 1 Z = 0.66 2 = 0.5

0.05 0.07 0.09 o. 12 O. 18 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.44
o. 1 0.05 0.06 0.09 0.13 O. 16 0.21 0.29 0.35
0.2 0.03 0.04 0.06 0.08 o. 10 O. 14 0.20 0.25
0.3 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.06 0.08 o. 11 O. 15 o. 19
0.4 0.02 0.03 O. 04 0.05 0.06 O. 09 o. 12 O. 15
0.5 0.02 0.02 O. 03 0.04 0.05 0.07 o. 10 0.13
r/R 2=5 2=4 12=3

0.05 0.04 0.05 0.07 0.10 O. 13 O. 18 0.25 0.31
o. 1 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.07 0.09 o. 12 0.18 0.23
0.2 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.06 0.08 o.12 0.15
0.3 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.03 O. 04 0.06 0.09 o.11
0.4 0.01 0.01 o.02 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.07 0.09
0.5 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.06 0.07
RIT = 100
1 r/R \ 2-=5 2=2 12=1.5 \Z=l 2 = 0.66
0.05 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.07 0.09 O. 13 o. 19
o. 1 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.06 O. 09 O. 13
0.2 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.04 O. 06 0.09
0.3 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.06 0.08
0.4 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.06
11.01 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.04
r/R 2=5 2=4 2=3 2=2 2 = 1.5 Z =1 Z = 0.66 Z = 0.5

0.05 1.00 0.94 O. 85 0.67 0.54 0.38 0.27 0.20
o. 1 1.00 0.94 0.84 0.66 0.53 0.39 0.29 0.23
0.2 0.98 0.91 0.80 0.62 0.50 0.37 0.29 0.24
0.3 0.97 0.89 0.78 0.59 0.48 0.35 0.27 0.23
0.4 0.94 0.88 0.76 0.58 0.46 0.34 0.26 0.22
0.5 0.94 0.87 0.75 0.57 0.45 0.33 0.25 0.21
2=5 2=4 2=3 2=2 Z = 1.5 z=1 2 = 0.66 2 = 0.5

1.02 0.96 O. 86 0.68 0.56 0.43 0.33
1.00 0.93 0.82 0.65 0.53 0.41 0.33
0.98 0.91 O. 79 0.61 0.50 O. 39 0.3 1
0.96 0.89 O. 77 0.59 0.48 0.36 0.29 0.25
0.4 0.95 0.88 0.76 0.58 0.46 0.35 0.27
0.5 0.94 0.88 0.76 0.57 0.45 0.33 0.26 0.22
RIT = 100
r/R
0.05
2=5
1.01
2=4
0.95
2=3
0.84
2=2
0.67
Z = 1.5
0.56
z=1
0.44
d
2 = 0.66
0.35
2 = 0.5
o. 1 0.99 0.92 0.81 0.64 0.53 0.42 0.35

0.2 0.97 0.90 o.79 0.61 0.50 0.39 0.32
O. 3 0.97 0.89 O. 77 0.59 0.48 0.37 0.28
0.4 0.94 0.89 O. 75 0.58 0.46 0.35 0.28 0.24
O. 5 0.94 0.85 O. 75 0.57 0.45 0.34 0.26 0.22
O BSI 1997
G/87
~ ~~ ~
~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 E Lb2VbbS Ob707bL 3 6 1
G.6 Bibliography
1. E.S
" Handbook of engineering fundamentals. Wiley.
2. TIMOSHENKO,S. T.heory of elastic imtuòüity. 2nd ed. McGraw Hill, 1961.
3. DONNEU, L H and WAN, C. C. Effect of imperfections on buckling of thin cylinder under axial compression.
J. appl. Mech. 1950, March.
4. SEIDE, l? Axi-symmetrical buckling of circular cones under axiai compression. J. appl. Mech. 1956,
December, 625.
5. HARRIS and LEYLAND. Conical vessels subject to external pressure. lhms. I. chem. E. 1952 30,65 - 74.
6. SEIMON, K. Pressure vessel manual. Edwards Bros., 1942
7. FREESE, C. E. Vibrations of vertical pressure vessels. J. Engng. Ind. 1959, February.
8. BIJLMRD, F! l? Local stresses in spherical shells from radial or moment loadings. Weld. J. (Research
Supplement). 1957,May.
9. BIJLAARD, l? P. On the stresses from local loads on spherical pressure vessels and pressure vessel
heads. 1957. Welding Research Council Bulletin No. 34.
10. BIJLAARD, F! l? Stresses from radial loads in cylindrical pressure vessels. Weld. J. 1954:33, 615s - 6238.
11. BLTLAARD, P. l? Slmsses from radial loads and e x t e d moments in cyhdrical pressure vessels. W&. J.
1955, December, 60% - 617s.
12. HOFF, N. J., KEMPNER, J., NARDO, S. i? and POHLE, E V. Deformation and stresses in circular cylindrical
shells caused by pipe attachments. Part 1, Summary of investigation. Knolls Atomic Power Laboratory
Schenectady 1953. KAPL -921.
13. Hom, N. J., KEMPNER, J., and POHLE, E V. Line load applied along generators of thin-walled circular
cylindrical shells of finite length. Q. appl. Maut. 1954: XI(4), 411 - 425.
14. KEMPNER, J.,SHENG, J., POHLE, F .i? Tables and curves for deformation and stresses in circular cylindrical
shells under localized lo-. J. aeronaut. Sci. 1957, February, 119 - 129.
15. SHOESSOW, G. J., and KOOISTRA, L. E Stresses in a cylindrical shell due to nozzle or pipe connection. Pam.
A.S.M.E., 67,1945. A-107.
16. GARTNER, A. I. Nomograms for the solution of anchor bolt problems. Petroleum Refirm 1951, July.
17. BIJLAARD, F! pi and CRANCH, E. T. Stresses and deflections due to local loaàings on cylindrical shells.
Weld. J. (Research Supplement). 1960, July
18. WEIL,N. A. and MURPm,J. J. Design and analysis of welded pressure vessel skirt supports. J.Engng. Ind.
1960, February
19. ZICK, L I? Stresses in iarge horizontal cylindrical pressure vessels on two saddle supports. W&. J. (Research
Supplement). 1951, September.
20. KETCHUM, M.S. The design of walds, bins and grain elmators. McGraw Hill, 1929.
21. FORBES, P. D. and TOOTH, k S. An analysis for twin saddle supported unstiffened cylindrical Vessels. Joint
British Confwence on Stress Analysis, 1968.
22. BRITISH STANDARDS INSTlTülïON. A r . of ULe methods of calculating sm-esseS due to local loads and
local attachments of pressure vessels. 1969. PD 6439.
23. B W D , l? l? Stresses in spherical vessels from radial loads and external moments acting on a pipe. 1959.
Weld Res. Com. Bull. No. 49.
24. BIJLAARD, l? I! Slx-eses in spherical vessels from local loads transferred by a pipe. 1960.
Weld Res. Coun. Bull. No. 50.
25. LECKE,E k and PENNY, R. K. Solutions for the stresses in nozzles in pressure vessels. 1963.
Weld R e s Com. Bull. No. 90.
26. RODABURGH, E. C., WilT, E J. and CLOUD, R. L,Stresses at nozzles in spherical shells loaded with pressure,
moment and thrust 1966. U.S. Atomic Energy Commission Phase Report No. 2.
27. LECKE, E k and PENNY, R. K. Shakedown loads for radial nozzles in spherical pressure vessels.
Inst. J. Solids and Strueturn. 1967 3,743.
28. WILSON, J. D. and TOOTH,A. S. The support of unstiffened cylindrical vessels. 2nd Int. Con$ Pressure Vessel
Tmhrwl.ASME. 1973.
29. HEELER, M. F! ?kansient thermal stsesses in slabs and circular pressure vessels. J. awl. Mech. 1953
G/88
O BSI 1997
Annex G Issue 1, J a n w 1997 BS SMW): 1997
30. WICHMAN, K. R., HOPPER, A. G. and MERSHON, J. L Local stresses in spherical and cylindrical shells due to
external loadings. 1965. Weld. Res. Com. Bull. No. 107.
31. ROSE, R. T New design methods for pressure vessel nozzles. The Engineq 214, July 20,1962, p.90.
32. DUTHIE, G. and TOOTH, A. S. The analysis of horizontal cylindrical vessels supported by saddles welded to
the vessel - a comparison of theory and experiment.
3rd Int. Conf.I! V ?bkyo 1977
33. KANNAS, A., KITCHíNG, R. and GILL, S. S. A design procedure for pad reinforced flush nozzles in spherical
pressure vessels. Int. J. Pres. Ves. Piping, 1978,6,2.
34. ASH'IUN,J. N., McINTYRE, H. and GILL, S. S. A design procedure based on limit analysis for a pad reinforced
nozzle in a spherical pressure vessel. Int. J .Mech. Sci., 1978, 20,747- 757.
35. SOLIMAN, S. E and GILL, S. S. Stress concentsation factors for integral and pad reinforced nozzles in
spherical pressure vessels subjected to radial load and moment. Int. J. Pres. Ves. Piping, 1979, 7,275 - 307.
36. HSU, I. M., KETTIEWELL, J. and GILL, S. S. Shear loadmg of pad reinforced nozzles in spherical pressure
vessels - a theoretical investigation. Int. J. Pres. Ves.Piping, 1980,8,461- 486.
37. BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Stresses in horizontal cylind&aL pressure vessels supported on twin
saddles: a derivation of the basic equations and constants used in 6.3.3 of BS 5500.1982. PD 6497.
38. DUTHIE, G., WHITE, G. C., TOOTH,A. S. An analysis for cylindrical vessels under local loaàing-
an application to saddle supported vessel problems. J. Strain Analysis. 1982, 17,157- 167.
39. TOOTH, A. S., DUTHIE, G., WHITE, G. C., CARMICHAEL,J. Stresses in horizontal storage vessels -
a comparison of theory and experiment. J. Strain Analysis. 1982, 17,169- 176.
40. BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Sp&fkation for the use of strmcturaì steel in building. BS 449.
41. INSTITUTE OF WELDING. Handbook for weZded structuml steezwork.
42. BRlTISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Pressure vesseì details (dimensions). Part 2. Specifkatwn for saddle
supports for horizontal qlind&d pressure vessels. 1983. BS 5276.
43. TEMERA,MCLEISH, GILL. A simplified approach to calculating stresses due to radial loads and moments
applied to branches in cylindrical pressure vessels. J. StrainAnalysis, 1981, 16, No. 4.
*
m
* 44. KENDRICK, S., TOOTH, A. S. The behaviour of a horizontal vessel on loose saddles - a buckling assessment
of the support region. J. Strain Analysis. 1986, 21,45 - 50.
O BSI 1997 G/89

S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 Z b 2 4 b b 7 Ob707b3 134 I
Issue 2, May 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex H H.4 Pressure part controlling post-weld heat

treatment temperature range for materials
Recommendations for post-weld heat from different groups
treatment of dissimilar ferritic steel H.4.1 Where a weld is between pressure parts of
joints equal importance, post-weld heat treatment should be
NOTE.It is essential that individual clauses of this annex are not in the higher temperature range (see H.6.1).
read in isolation.
H.4.2 Where a weld is between pressure parts of
H.1 Basic conditions differing importance, the post-weld heat treatment
The recommendations in this annex are based on the should be as for the major pressure part (see H.6.1
foliowing conditions. and H.6.2).
a) Post-weld heat treatment should be compatible H.4.3 Where a weld is between a strut- part and a
with the parent materials being welded. pressure part, the post-weld heat treatment should be
b) Post-weld heat treatment should be compatible as for the pressure part.
with the relative importance of the pressure parts
being welded H.4.4 Where the major pressure part does not require I
post-weld heat treatment but the minor pressure part
c) The weld metal should be compatible with the does, then special consideration should be given to
post-weld heat treatment. The materials have been ensure technid acceptabiliw, e.g. buttering of the
classified into five groups (as shown in table El), minor component with the consumable adopted for the
the minimum temperature for post-weld heat buttered component and, separate post-weld heat
treatment in each group being constant. Alternative treatment of the buttered component.
post-weld heat treatments to those listed in table H.l
should take into account the basic conditions a), H.5 General considerations
b) and c). H.5.1 Where the post-weld heat treatment is being
H.2 Welds between material grades within a carried out between Werent material groups in the
group higher temperature range, the average temperature of
the assembly should be held as near to the minimum
H.2.1 The post-weld heat treatment of welds between as is practicable.
material grades within a group is permissible.
Using the example given in H.3.1, if group
H.2.2 Where a weld is made between dissimilar is the ruiing component, then the target is
pressure parts within the same group, the consumables approximately 640 "C.
are to be appropriate to either of the materials.
H.5.2 Where post-weld heat treatment is being carried
H.3 Welds between material grades from out between different material groups in the lower
different groups temperature range, the average temperature of the
assembly should be held as near to the maximum as is
H.3.1 The post-weld heat treatment of welds between practicable.
material grades in different groups should be
permissible where Tlf - T2" is not greater Using the example given in H.3.1, if group HT1
than 10 O C , 7'1' being the lower temperature of the is the niling component, then the target is
material grade requiring the higher temperature approximately 610 "C.
post-weld heat treatment and 7'2' ' being the higher H.6.3 Where the time at temperature of a part of
temperature of the materid grade requiring the lower lower aUoy content being post-weld heat treated at a
temperature post-weld heat treatment. higher temperature is greater than 60 min more than it
Exurnpie. Post-weld heat treatment following welding would normally receive if heat treated in its normal
group HT1 to group "E! materials: temperature range, this should be the subject of
Ti'= 630 OC, T2" = 620 "C agreement between the purchaser and the
manufacturer.
Ti' - T2" = 10 "C which is permissible.
H.5.4 The manufacturing sequence and post-weld heat
H.3.2 Where the temperature difference Tlf - T2" is treatment operations should be so arranged as to
greater than 10 such joints should be the subject of
O C ,
minimize the amount of degraded material.
agreement between the purchaser and the
manufacturer. H.5.5 Assemblies involving welds from three or more
different groups requiring simultaneous treatment are
H.3.3 Where a weld is made between pressure parts to be avoided.
in mate& belonging to different groups, the
consumables should be chosen from the range of
consumables appropriate to the group that controls the
post-weld heat treatment.
O BSI 1997 W1
~~ _ _ _ _ _ ~ ~
~~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 II 1b2LibbS O b 7 0 Y b 4 O70 E

BS 6500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex H
Material Post-weld heat treatment temperature Group

range
Grade Type Tl T2
"C "C
MO, M I Carbon and carbon 580 620 HT1
manganese steel
M5 3%Ni 580 620
M2 CMo 630 670 HT2
M4 MnCrMoVl) 630 670
M7 1Cr%Mo2) 630 670
1YICr%Mo2) 630 670
M9 2 YICrlMo3) 630 670
~~~
M7 1Cr%Mo4) 650 700 m

1%Cr%Mo4)
M8 MCr%Mo%V 680 720 HT4
M9 2 %CrlMo2) 680 720
M9 2 %CrlMo4) 710 750 HT5
M10 5CrMMo 710 750
~ ~ ~~
Hf2
O BSI 1997
Annex J For direct operated safety valves in liquid service (see
figure J.1) the required discharge capacity of the valve
Recommendations for pressure relief may not be reached u na an overpressure of 25 %
protective devices above the set pressure is reached when the valve will
When considering the safety valve characteristics and achieve full lift. To ensure that the maximum
the system requirements, the relationship between the accumulated pressure given in 3.13.2.1 is not
design pressure and the permitted accumulated exceeded, valves in liquid service should be set at a
pressure in a vessel (or system) will be dictated by the lower pressure than those in gas or vapour service. A
requirements of 3.13.2 and 3.13.3. The relationship reasonable margin is required between the nomai
with the set pressure and overpressure at which the operating pressure of the vessel and the reseat
safety valve attains its certified capacity is iliustrated in pressure of the valve and as a result the normal
figwe J.l. operating pressure may be as much as 22 % below the
design pressure of the vessel. I€ this pressure margin is
For direct operated safety valves in gas or vapour unavailable, it may be possible to install a larger
service (see figure J.l) the required discharge capacity capacity valve to give the required discharge capacity
should be achieved at an overpressure not at an overpressure of less than 25 % of the set pressure.
exceeding 10 % above the set pressure. Foìiowing This iarger vabe would not achieve full lift and its
discharge the valve will reseat within the range 5 % selection would require discussion with the valve
to 10 % below the set pressure providing that it is manufacturer. Safety valves certified at 10 %
correctly a u s t e d . The n o d operating pressure of overpressure may be considered as an alternative.
the system should be below the reseat pressure, the
difference being chosen on the basis of the probable NOTE.Further information may be found in the following
American Petroleum institute pubiications, which are available
variations in operating pressure due to process factors from Customer Services, Sales Department, BSI, 389 Chiswick
and the tolerance on cold differential test pressure. High Road, London W4 4AL.
With assisted and supplementary loaded safety valves,
failure of the assist mechanism, or of the MI RP 520 Recommended practice for the design
supplementary load to be released may result in the and instaltation of pressure relieving
systems i n refineries
valve remaining closed untii a pressure higher than the
desired set pressure is reached. if the integrity of the API RP 521 Guide for pressure relief and
depressurizing system
assist mechanism or release of the supplementary load
cannot be assured, the set pressure of the valve should
See also BS 5908 which calls up these MI publications and other
be such that, in the event of failure, the required reference documents.
capacity will still be achieved at the desired
accumulation. Aiternatively, this risk may, by agreement
between the appropriate parties, be covered by the
fitting of adàitional vabecs).
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards JI1
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex J
P r e s s u r e vessel Vessel pressure S a f e t y valve

require ment or design pressure characteristic
1
110 Reiievin g pressure
regulated pressure
Accu mu1a t i o n
Design p r e s s u r e
Usual margin
\
--I
9
Normal o p e r a t i n g
pressure
5
I;
r:
- 105 -
100
-
-
-
-
Overpressure
Set pressure
Blowdown
Reseat pressure
a) Safety valve with 10 % overpressure (gas or vapour service)
Max. p e r m i t t e d Relieving pressure

regulated pressure
Accumulation
Design pressure
Overpressure
Set pressure
Blowdown
Usual margi?
Reseat pressure
b) Safety valve with chosen 26 % overpressure (iiquid service)
Figure J.l Typical pressure term relationships
JI2
O BSI 1997
~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 IL b 2 4 b b 9 0 1 7 0 9 b 7 A B T sl
Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex K Re(n corresponds to the minllnum value of ReL

orRpo.2 (Rp1.0 for austenitic steels) specified
Requhements for the derivation of for the grade of material concerned at a
material nominal design strengths for temperature T (tested in accordance
construction category 1 and 2 vessels with BS EN 10002-5).
K.l General SR, is the mean value of the stress required to
produce rupture in time t (at temperature 7')
This annex describes the principles used to derive the
for the grade of steel in question (tested in
nominal design strengths given in tables 2.32 to 2.3-12
accordance with BS 3500).
which, unless otherwise stated, are related to the
relevant property values given in the following British f~ is the nominal design strength correspondmg
Standards. to the short-tem tensile strength
CharaCtÆristiCS.
f~ is the nominal design strength corresponding
to the creep characteristics.
f is the nominal design strength which has been
taken as the lesser OffE andfF
K.3 Time-independent design strength

'
K.3.1 General
BS 3059 : Part 1: 1987 "he British Standards listed in K . l that have been
BS 3059 : Part 2 : 1990 revised in or after 1978 specify minimum elevated
BS 3601 : 1987 temperature yieldproof stress values derived, in most
cases, in accordance with the procedures specified
BS 3602 : Part 1: 1987 in BS 3920 : 1973.
BS 3602 : Part 2 : 1991 * Pipes and tubes These values show some difference nom the properties
BS 3603 : 1991 specified in previous standards, which were based on
individual assessments of the data then available. The
BS 3604 :Part 1: 1990 procedure described in BS 3920 is essentially empirical
BS 3604 : Part 2 : 1991 and properties derived by it are regarded as
BS 3605 : Part 1: 1991 ,
characteristic values (to be used for quality control
purposes as specified in the relevant materials
standards) rather than as critical properties in the
design context. Nevertheless, it is reasonable and
convenient to base permissible design strengths
The principles given in K.3.1, K.3.2a, K.3.3a, K.4 directly on these characteristic yield/proof stress values
and E 6 are also used to derive the nominal design unless this would result in design strengths for which
stress of materials not listed in tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12, in there is no justification in tem of previous experience
accordance with the provisions of 2.1.2.lb. and current understanding of structural behaviour. This
Appropriate amendments to this annex will be issued has been done except in a few cases, which are
as necessary to cover future revisions of the above identified in tables 2.3-2 to 2.312, where design
standards or additions to tables 2.3-2 to 2.312. strengths based on the simple relationships specified
in K.3.2 and K.3.3 would have resulted in an
K.2 Notation unwarranted reduction or increase in the strength
For the purposes of this annex the following symbols levels that have previously been established for the
apply. materials in question.
The time-independent design strength criteria may be
R,,, is the minimum tensile strength specified for applied to materials not listed in K.l provided that they
the grade of materiai concerned at room comply with 2.3.2. Values of & .
(q for such materials
temperature (tested in accordance are to be verified by tests in accordance with
with BS EN 10002-1). BS EN 100025 at the appropriate temperature, unless
Re is the minimum value of specified yield the values were derived in accordance with BS 3920.
strength for the grade of steel concerned at
room temperature (tested in accordance
with BS EN 10002-1).
Where a standard specifies minimum values
ofReL orRpo.2 (Rp1.0 for austenitic steels)
these values are taken as corresponding to Re.
O BSI 1997 K/1

S T D m B S I BS 5500-ENGL 2 7 7 7 811 l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob707bB 7 1 b W
BS SMH): 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex K
K3.2 Carbon, carbon manganese and low allog b) Matenal without specifkd elevated temperature
steels values (see note f o r values of Recq)
The following strengths apply. 1) Up to and imluding 50 "C:
a) Maîerial with specified elevated temperature
values
1) Up to and including 50 OC: whichever gives the lower value.
Re Rm 2) 150"C and above:
f E = - or -
1.5 2.35
whichever gives the lower value.
2) 150 "C und above: whichever gives the lower value.
3) Between 50 "C and 150 "C :f E has been based
R~o or % on linear interpolation between values obtained
fE = 1.5 2.35
from equations (K.7) and (K8).
whichever gives the lower value. NOTE. For tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12, values ofRe(T)have been taken as
3) Between 50 "C and 150"C :f E has been based equal to those specified for otherwise similar material having
on linear interpolation between values obtained specified elevated temperature values, except that where no
such Re(T)values are available design strength values have been
from equations (K.1) and (K.2). based on conservative interpretation of other available
b) Material without sp&fied elevated temperature information.
values (see notefor v a l m of Re($ For materials not listed in tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12, not listed in
annex P and not specifically listed in Enquiry Cases, the value
1) Up to and including 50 "C: of ReCnshall be established by measuring the ReLor $o.2 at the
Re R, design temperature for each component involved i.e. each plate as
f E = - or - rolled, or forging (or set of forgings as allowed by the appropriate
1.5 2.35 materials specification) and this measured value shall be
whichever gives the lower value. multiplied by 0.85. This reduction in the value offE for design
2) 150 "C and above: purposes does not apply in the specific areas recognized by
Enquiry Case 5500í29.
A l 2 or R,
f E = Re K.4 Time-dependent design strengths
1.6 2.35 The timedependent design slxength is given by:
whichever gives the lower value.
3) Between 50 "C and 150 "C :f j has been based fF = S
- R I (see notes)
1.3
on linear interpolation between values obtained NOTE 1. The appropriate SR,properties agreed by
from equations (K.3) and 6 4 ) . subcommittee 10 of Technical Committee 17 of IS0 have been
NOTE. For tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12 values of ReCnhave been taken as used wherever possible. These do not necessarily correspond to
equal to those specified for otherwise similar material having those specified in the British Standards listed in K.l.
specified elevated temperature values, except that where no In general, timedependent values are not given for materiais that
such ReCnvalues are available design strength values have been are unsuitable, or are unlikely to be used, in the creep range (see,
based on conservative interpretation of other available however, general note b to tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12).
information. NOTE 2. In most cases, the SR,properties agreed by IS0 for
For materials not listed in tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12, and not lifetimes in excess of 100 O00 h have been obtained by extended
specifically listed in Enquiry Cases, the value of ReCnshall be extrapolation of time (more than three times on actual data), and
established by measuring the ReLor &o.2 at the design those towards the upper end of the temperature range by
temperature for each component involved i.e. each plate as rolled, extended stress extrapolation. Muiated design strengths that are
or forging (or set of forgings as allowed by the appropriate significantly lower than values weil established by experience are
materials specification) and this measured value shall be identified by notes 5 and 6 to tables 2.92 to 2.3-12 which permit
multiplied by 0.85. This reduction in the value of fE for design values up to 10 % higher to be used provided that fitness for
purposes does not apply in the specific areas recognized by continued service reviews (see 3.2.4) are instituted at two-thirds
of the agreed design lifetime. Conversely, tabulated design
Enquiry Case 5500/29. strengths that are significantly higher than previously permitted
K.3.3 Austenitic stainless steels are identified by note 7 to tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12 which requires
design strengths to be reduced by 10 % unless fitness for
The following strengths apply. continued service reviews are brought forward as already detailed.
a) Material with sphfied elevated temperature Aluminium and aluminium alloys
&€i
vaLues Design strengths were determined as follows:
1) Up to and including 50°C: a) time-independent design strength: Rp0.2A.5
Re R,
f E = - or -
or &/3 whichever is the lower;
1.5 2.5 (K.5)
b) timedependent design slxength: SR,(100 000)/1.3.
2) 150 "C and above: These are criteria relevant to the annealed materiais
R,o Rm listed for welded construction.
f E = 1.35 O r a NOTE 1. =- - is the expected minimum value determined by
Re min.
whichever gives the lower value. I$,o.z min. = $o,z sample x -
R, sample
3) Between 50 "C and 150 "C :f~has been based NOTE 2. SR~(iû0000) was ob;ained by extrapolating 10000 h test
on linear interpolation between values obtained data when available. Other values have been obtained from
from equations (K.5) and (K.6). relevant experience and other codes of practice.
w2
O BSI 1997
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL L777 I% L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob709b9 b 5 2 I
h e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex L
Not allocated.
*
02
*
O BSIStandards
COPYRIGHT British 1997 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards U1
S T D S B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 E Z b 2 4 b b 9 0 b 7 0 9 7 0 374 E
h e 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex M where
Guidance on safe external working
pressure for cylindrical sections outside
abr =
Ee
w2(1-~u2)
n=2
c
n=N/2
((n2 - 1) + P (F)2}x
the circularity Illnits specified in3.6 x [P n w
@ m ( n ) - P)] { ~ sin + bn COS W }
NOTE. For the purposes of this annex the symbols are as defined
in 3.6 except where modified as follows. e is the analysis thickness of the cylinder,
Methods of calculating the permissible design pressure pm(,) is the value ofpm determined from item b)
speciñed in 3.6 apply only to cylinders that are circuìar of 3.6.2.1 using the appropriate harmonic value
to within 0.5 % on radius. The following procedure of n as used in the summation to evaluate E;
enables a conservative estimate to be found for the
collapse pressure of cylinders which exceed this
tolerance.
The allowable pressure consistent with 3.6 is to be
determined using the following formuh 2 N-l
b, = - R, cos w for all values of n# N12
N*=O
(M-1) N-1
1.5
bn=x R,cosrnp w h e n n = N / 2
where r=
N is the number of measurements of radiusR,
p (allowable) is the external pressure permitted by
this annex;
Pa is the allowable pressure from 3.6 for
an otherwise simiiar cylinder within
0.5 % tolerance;
R is the design mean radius, or the
as-built mean radius derived from
shape analysis if this does not deviate
from the design mean radius by more
than 0.5 %
Wmax is the maximum departure from mean
circle;
pq is the lower bound estimate to the
collapse pressure, i.e. the lowest value
of p at any location T- (see 3.6.8) at
which:
NOTE. Calculation of p , requires trial and error methods or a

systematic iteration to solve equation (M.2). To be readily
practicable it requires a computer (see example 3 of Enquiry
Case 5500/52). Ail locations of r must be considered, and the
lowest value of p found from the solutions of equation (M.2) is
designated a s p , i f p , is greater than 1.5pa,p(ailowab1e) = p,.
O BSI 1997
M/1
~~ ~ ~
~~
S T D m B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 IIb2Ltbb9 Ob70771 2 0 0

Annex N N.1.5 It is only the ultimate ownerhser of the vessel

that has the process, plant characteristics and
Requirements for vessel design and the environmental information, in respect of references [i]
provision of information concerning and [3], to decide what consideration he should give to
statutory obligations for the the determination of the risk to persons and property
consequent to the failure of a pressure vessel; and thus
demonstration of the continued integrity what provisions he should make for limiting that risk
of pressure vessels throughout their through the establishment of appropriate plans and a
service life. written scheme of examination.
N.l General N.2 Purchaser specification
N.l.l This annex is mandatory for vessels to be used N.2.1 The potential for failure of a vessel is increased
in Great Britain when the requirements of the Pressure if the operating conditions are more onerous than
Systems and %ansportable Gas Containers those used in the vessel design, thus the purchaser
Regulations (11 apply For air receivers consideration shall provide a sufficiently comprehensive specification
shall be given to the requirements of the Simple appropriate to the potential consequences of vessel
Pressure Vessels (Safety) Regulations [Z]. These are failure. For vessels subjected to fatigue and/or creep
optiond provisions, to be specified in the purchase loading the specifidon shall provide a definition of
order, in circumstances where the aforementioned the full range of conditions likely to be encountered
legislation does not apply For the benefit of users in and the expected operahg life of the vessel.
Great Britain the wording of this annex is written in NOTE. It is essential that adequate consideration is given to the
the normative form, to suit the former circumstances. pressure system design so that realistic fluid conditions can be
NOTE. The use of normative phraseology is used in the context of speciñed for the expected operating life.
the need to conform with these requirements for the purpose of
being compliant with this standard. Whilst this annex refers to N.2.2 The purchaser shall, from his knowledge of the
legislation it cannot amend or interpret that legislation. potential consequences of vessel failure and his
Compliance with a British Standard does not in itself confer intended approach, both in respect of his risk
immunity from legal Obligations. assessment and the type of written scheme of
N.1.2 Obligations on the parties under this annex are examination, specify the extent of information to be
intended to be consistent with the regulations quoted provided by the manufacturer, beyond that defined
* in N.3.
u) in N.l.l. The intention is to clari@ the requirements as
* they may apply to pressure vessels compliant with this NOTE. Annex S provides an option for the provision of potentially
standard. Reference should also be made to the guide useful information, i.e. design calculations.
to the Pressure Systems and ’ii-ansportable Gas N.2.3 If the purchaser wishes the manufacturer to
Containem Regulations 1989 [3] and the Approved make recommendations for periodic examination he
Code of Practice on the Safety of Pressure Systems [4]. should define his requirements in the specification.
N.1.3 The scope of this annex is limited to: This standard does not recommend plans, techniques
a) the identification of the responsibilities of the or frequencies for periodic examination.
manufacturer of a vessel (as defined in 1.3.2) in NOTE. The purchaser will need to identify conditions or physical
respect of the design of the vessel to allow restrictions which would limit the access to or into a vessel if
they could influence the ability to undertake any periodic
examination; examination. If it is likely that the external vessel surface will
b) the identification of the responsibilities of the have to be examined then the design of any insulation and
manufacturer to provide information relevant to the attachments wili need to be integrated with the scheme of
obligations of the owner/user to undertake a risk examination.
assessment, establish safe operating limits and a N.3 Provision of information by the
written scheme of examination; manufacturer
e) the definition of the information to be included in
the purchaser’s specification so as to allow the N.3.1 Regulation 5 of reference [ 11 requires that any
manufacturer to fulfillhis obligations defined herein person who designs or supplies a pressure vessel, to
which those regulations applx shali provide sufñcient
N.1.4 It is not the intention of this annex to impose written information concerning its design, construction,
obligations on the p h e s involved for the examination, operation and maintenance as may
consideration of issues outside their knowledge, reasonably be foreseen to be needed to enable the
competence and responsibilities or as established by ownerher of the vessel and any other manufacturers
the contractual relationship for the provision of the and installers involved to comply with the regulations.
vessel. The manufacturer can only account for the
desigrdoperathg conditions he has been d e aware N.3.2 The information provided in satisfaction
of. If the manufacturer does not carry out the design, of 6.8.9, for the nameplate of a vessel, is sufficient to
the actual designer shall assume responsibilities, as are sah@ the marking requirements of reference [i]but
herein ascribed to the manufacturer, for those design does not cover the information requirements of this
aspects. annex.
O BSI 1997
N/1
~~ ~-
S T D - B S I 8s 5500-ENGL 1777 M L b 2 4 b b 9 0 b 7 0 7 7 2 147

BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 1, September 1997 Annex N
N.3.3 The minimum infonnation required from the The safe operating limits shall be presented in the form
manufacturer shall be derived from that which he has of a permissible pressurehemperature envelope. This
knowledge of and control over. He shall indicate the should be made up from the various covering the
potential susceptibility to failure of the vessel from his conditions assessed i.e. including those listed above
knowledge of the margins between actual and design (or the ûp if one exists for that condition).
values of stress, the actual material properties and the , and Op are defined in annex D.
NOTE. 8
exisknce of imperfections.
N.4 Manufacturer’s responsibilities for
N.3.4 Based upon the manufacturer’s control and provision of certain features
knowledge of the aforementioned margins the
following types of information shall be provided for N.4.1 Regulation 4 of reference [ 11 places
each vessel. responsibilities on manufacturem to properly design
and construct vessels from suitable material so as to
a) The safe operating h i t s of pressure, temperature prevent danger, facilitate all necessary examinations
(maximum and/or minimum) and where appropriate (including providing safe access where appropriate)
the allowable number of load cycles and the and provide such protective devices as may be
operating life of the vessel, or sufficient information necem.
to allow the user to establish the safe operating
limits. N.4.2 Requirements are identified in 3.12 for the
b) Corrosion allowances, as supplied, and minimum provision of access and examination openings.
allowable metal thicknesses. N.4.3 Requirements are identified in 3.13 for the
c) The nature, location and extent of any concession provision of over pressure protection. The need for
or accepted non conformance to this standard and other protection, such as temperature measuring and
the purchase order, with a definition of any special limiting devices, would need special consideration
monitoring required to allow the above h i t s to be outside this specification when such risks e a t .
achieved References
d) The locations where the design andor operating
conditions give the lowest margin to the allowable [i] GREAT BRITAIN. Pressure Systems and
stsess and, where such conditions are relevant, the Transportable Gas Containem Regulations, 1989,
lowest margin against usage of the creep or fatigue Statutory Instrument 1989 No. 2169,
life. ISBN O 11098169 3, London: HMSO
N.3.6 The manufacturer shall recommend (consistent [2] GREAT BRITAIN. The Pressure Vessels (Safety)
with the safe operating limits) suitable operational and Regulations, 1991, Statutory instrument 1991,
maintenance procedures to ensure that, if followed, the No. 2749, ISBN O 11015902 O. London: HMSO
vessel will continue to be satisfactory for its specified [3] A guide to Uze pressure systems and
safe operating limits.These maintenance procedures tmnsportabìe gas conta.iners regulutions, 1989,
are not periodic examination procedures or written HSE booklet HS(R) 30, ISBN O 118855166
schemes, but actions to control any deterioration of
the vessel from that condition it was specified to be [4]Safety ofpressure systems, HSC Approved Code
provided in. e.g. maintaining corrosion protection. of F’ractice COP 37, ISBN O 11885514 X
N.3.6 For vessels designed for low temperature duty
the minimum metal temperature is the lowest
temperature during each of the following conditions;
normal operations;
start up and shut down procedures;
possible process upsets;
when pressure or leak testing.
O BSI 1997
~~
~
STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL 1997 W Lb2Libb7 Ob70773 083 m

Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex P P.3 Additional limitations

Recommendations for stainless steel All plates are to be solution treated prior to forming.
components With higher design stresses The completed vessel is to be tested to a test
pressure,Pt, at least equal to:
P.l General
This annex is additional to table 2.3-2 to 2.3-12 for the
use of higher design strengths than those given in that but not greater than:
table for common grades of stainless steel plate in
accordance with BS 1501: Part 3 and BS 1449 and is
intended for applications where the dominant loading
is i n k d pressure and where some nominal change in where
the shape of a component can be tolerated as a result
of a pressure test. P is the design pressure;
The use of higher design strengths, up to the values is the design strength at 50 "C fì-omtable P.1;
fa
given in table P.1, is to be limited to the calculation of
design thicknesses in accordance with the following ft is the design strength at design temperature
clauses in the body of this standard: fromtableP.1;
ta is the a c t d wall thickness of shell and ends,
3.6.1 Cylindrical and spherical shells tc is the minimum wall thickness of shell and ends
3.5.2 Domed ends calculated in accordance with 3.5.1, 3.6.2
or 3.5.3 with the design strength& but excluding
3.6.3 Conical ends and truncated cones
corrosion allowance;
3.6.4 Openings and branch connections
c is the corrosion allowance.
P.2 Construction categories The thickness of components covered by clauses other
Components designed on the basis of these higher than3.5.1, 3.5.2, 3.5.3 and3.5.4, e.g. flanges, fiat
design strengths are to be in construction category 1 covers and components subject to external pressure
or 2 subject to the following limitations: has to be determined on the basis of the normal design
strength given in tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12 and a design
Construction Maximum Temperature limits pressure equal to Pt A.3.
category thickness Upper Lower
mm "C
1 30 400 none
2 12.5 150 none
Table P.l Design strength values (in N/mm2)
BS 1501: Part 3-304 S11 I158 I140 1 122 112 I104 199 95 190
BS 1501: Part 3304 S31 169 149 130 120 113 108 102 98
BS 1449-304 S15l)
BS 1501: Part 3-316 S11, S13 165 148 131 121 113 108 103 100
BS 1501: Part 3-316 S31, S33
I
I 176
I
I 158
I
I 140
I
I130
I
I122
I
I117
I
I112
I
I 108 1
BS 1501: Part 3-321531 172 I159 I147 I140 134 I129 124 121
BS 1501: Part 3-347 S31 I
176 I 166
I
I 156
I
I 148
I I
140 I135
I I
132 I
130
1' Use of materials in accordance with BS 1449 is permissible only within the thickness and temperature limits detailed in this annex
for construction category 2 comDonents and subject to the Drovision by the steel sumher of a reDort covering- a)
, the iadie analysis of
the material supplied-and b) the-results of the mechanical &stsas reqkred by ES 1449.
O BSI 1997
Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex Q Q.2 Destructive testing of production control

test plates (see 6.4.1)
Recommendations for preparation and
testing of production control test plates Q.2.1 Test recommendations
Q.1 Preparation of production control test Specimens in accordance with 6.2.3 and table 1 of
plates (see 6.4.1) ES EN 2883 should be cut from production test plates
and tested and assessed in accordance with that
Q.l.1 The material used for the test plates should standard except where otherwise stated in Q.2.2
comply with the same specification as that used in the to Q.2.7.
construction of the vessel and should be manufactured
Production factors result in a scatter of mechanical
by the same steel making process. The plates should
test results which may occasionally fall below the
be of the same nominal thickness as the shell and
agreed specification level. This is recognized in the
preferably selected from the same batch of material as recommendations given in Q.2.3, Q.2.6 and Q.2.7.
that used in fabricating the vessel.
The test plates should be sufficiently large to allow for Q.2.2 lkst temperatures
the preparation of all specimens required in 6.2.3 and The tests should be conducted at room temperature
table 1 of ES EN 2883. In any case the length of the except in the case of impact tests,where required, for
piates should be not less than 350 mm. vessels to operate at low temperature.
Q.1.2 When a vessel includes one or more Q.2.3 All weld tensile test
longitudinal seams the test plates should, wherever
practicable, be attached to the shell plate on one end The following additional recommendations should
of one seam so that the edges to be welded in the test apply.
plate are a continuation and duplication of the Q.2.3.1 The tensile strength and yield s h s s values
corresponding edges of the longitudinal s e m . The determined on the production test plate, are
weld metal should be deposited in the test plates satisfactory provided they exceed 90 % of the minimum
continuously with the welding of the corresponding specified values for the parent metal.
longitudinal seam so that the welding process,
procedure and technique ase the same. When it is Q.2.3.2 The amount by which the tensile strength or
necessary to weld the test plates separately, the yield stress may exceed the specified minimum value
procedure used should duplicate that used in the for the parent metal is subject to agreement between
construction of the vessel. the purchaser and the manufacturer.
Where difficulties are encountered with electroslag Q.2.3.3 The reduction in area should not be less
welds in transferring from seams with different than 35 % for carbon and carbon manganese steels and
curvatures (e.g. &om a cylinder to a fiat coupon plate) not less than the minimum specified for the parent
the test plate may be welded separately, either metal in the case of alloy steels.
immediately before or immediately after the welded
seam, using the same welding parameters. Q.2.4 k n s u e r s e bend test (for piate less
When test plates are required for circumferential welds than 12 mm thick)
they may be welded separately from the vessel Face bend tests should be conducted with the surface
providing the technique used in their preparation corresponding with the outer surface of the vessel in
duplicates, as far as possible, the procedure used in tension. Root bend tests should be conducted with the
the welding of the appropriate seams in the vessel. surface corresponding with the inner surface of the
Q.1.3 Care should be taken to minimize distortion of vessel in tension. On completion of the test, no crack
the test plates during welding. If excessive distortion or other defect at the outer surface of the test
occurs, the test plate should be straightened before specimen should have a dimension greater
post-weld heat treatment. At no time should the test than 1.5 mm. Slight tearing at the edges of the test
plates be heated to a temperature higher than that specimen should not constitute failure of the test.
used or to be used for the final heat treatment of the Q.2.6 Side bend test (for plate exceeding 12 mm
vessel. thick)
The preheat, interpass temperamre, intermediate and On completion of the test, no crack or other defect at
post-weld heat treatments of test plates should be the the outer surface of the test specimen should have a
same as for production welding. At the option of the dimension greater than 3 mm. Slight tearing at the
manufacturer the test plates may be nondesh-uctively edges of the test specimen should not constitute failure
tested in the same manner as the production weld. If of the test.
any defects in the weld of a test plate are revealed by
nondestsuctive testing, their position should be clearly
marked on the plate and test specimens should be
selected from such other parts of the test plate as may
be agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
Inspecting Authoriw.
O BSI
~~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 55UU-ENGL 1777 II l b 2 4 b b 9 0 b 7 0 7 7 5 7 5 b
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Annex Q
Q.2.6 Macro-and micro-examination

The specimen should be prepaxed for
macroexamination, and for microexamination when
the necessity for the latter has been agreed between
the manufacturer and the purchaser. The specimen
should be located in material which has not been
aected by flame cutting operations. The weld should
be sound, Le. free from cracks and substantially free
fi-om discontinuities such as slag inclusions and
porosity, to an extent equivalent to that given in
table 5.7-1. The hardness survey should include the
parent metal and heat affected zone on each side of
the weld as well as the weld metal and the results
should be recorded in the production test reports.
The results obtained from a hardness survey should be
considered satisfactory provided they do not
exceed 110% of the maximum specified value for the
procedure test.
Q.2.7 Impact tests
Charpy V-notch impact tests, when required, should be
considered satisfactom provided the average and
individual results from one production test plate
exceeds 90 % of the minimum average and individual
specified values for the procedure tests, and the
average of all production test plate results for the
vessel or group of vessels, exceed 110 % of the
minimum average and individual specified values for
the procedure tests.
NOTE. For example, assume a specified minimum average
requirement of 40 J permitting an individual minimum requirement
of 28 J (see D.3.2.4.4).Therefore one production test plate with
values 36 5/26 J (90 % of minimum average requiremenîí90% of
individual minimum requirement) would be satisfactory provided
the average of the results of all test plates on the vessels
exceeds 44 5/31 J (110 % of minimum average requirement/llO W of
individual minimum requirement).
Q.3 Retests
Where tests do not comply with Q.2, the following
retests should be made:
a) Tensile
Two retests should be made.
b) Bend tests
Two retests should be made.
c) Impact tests
See annexD.
Should any of the retests fail to comply with Q.2, the
welded seams represented by these tests should be
deemed not to comply with this standard.
w
S T D - B S I BS 55ü0-ENGL 1777 IL b 2 4 b b 7 Db70Y7b 8 9 2 E
Issue 1, Janua,ty 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex R Example
Guidance on additional information for a) Design:
given:
flat ends and flat plates
D = 1200mïiì
In the design of a flat plate forming a head or end of a
cylinder, it is necessary to consider both the plate itself ecyl = 10 mm
and the stresses in the cylinder. The minimum p = 0.15 N/NUII~
allowable value of C (0.41) in figure 3.5-33 provides a f = 150 N/NUII'
margin of 1.5 against gross plastic deformation of the
piate in the simply supported case (with a slightly then:
higher margin if edge support is included). The sloping ecylo= pDBf = 0.6 mm
lines (C > 0.41) ensure that the maximum stress in the p/f= 0.001
cylinder is less than or equal to 2.7J This is to be an&
compared with the 3f allowed in annex A and provides
some ability to accept additional loads. 1) Using figure 3.5-33to evaluate C
The maximum stress in the cylinder is longitudinal, ecyilecyio = 17
and on the inside surface adjacent to the head. The c= 0.585
following equations (taken from [il3*)) were used in e = 0.585 X 1200 @ÖÕ¡ = 22.2 mm
the calculation of C for figure 3.533 and should be
used in computer programs in preference to a curve fit 2) assuming C = 0.41 Cpermissible
(though an iterative procedure to find e is then provided e/ecyl I2.0)
required). The equations may also be useful in a e = 15.56 mm (say 16 mm)
fatigue analysis, when loads are combined, or to find decy]= 1.6
the allowable pressure for a given design. For a
graphical representation of the equations and further b) Stress calculation:
discussion see [2]. The maximum stress in the cylinder, take the design a)2):
S, is given by: D = 1200111l11
S = I X @D/2eCyl) ecyl = 10 mm
where e=16mm
P is the pressure; p = 0.15 N/mm2
D is the mean diameter of cylinder; then:
ecyl is the wall analysis thickness of cylinder; a = 1.6
ecy10 is the minimum thichess of the cylindrical b = 1200/10 = 120
shell as derived from 3.5.1.2; I =95 +(=)=33.07
1524
e is the minimum thickness of end
C1a3- C2a + C3b1.5 + C4ab
I=%+
(
cfjd+ c7a + C ~ +U ~ ~ b U+. 5 S=
33.07 X 0.15 X 1200 = 298 N/mm2
2 x 10
where Thus S is only 2f, conñrming that the stress in the
a = e/ecyl cylinder is not controiiing.
b = D/ecyi
c, =2.943 References
c, = 3.74 1. WAmS, G.W. and LANG, H.k The stresses in a
c3 = 1.0 pressure vessel with a flat head closure. %m. Am.
Soc. Mech. Engr., 1952, 74, 1083-1091.
c4 = 0.909
2. ESDU. Engineering Sciences Data Item No. 66010.
C5 =0.385
c6 = 1.907
c7 =4.848
Cg = 1.027
Cg = 2.667
Cio = 5.875
38) The numbers in square brackets used in this annex relate to the references given at the end of the annex.
O BSI 1997
€U1
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 II L b 2 4 b b 9 Clb70977 7 2 9 I
h e 1,January 1997 BS 5500: 1997
Annex S
Guidance on optional documentation for supply with vessel
This annex lists some of the documentation which a manufacturer is required to generate in accordance with the
provisions of this standard but which he is not required to supply for record purposes in accordance with 1.5.2.
Purchasers wishing to retain permanent copies of any such documents should deñne their requirements in the
purchase order using this,or an equivalent, checklist.
Item if required
1. Design dculations (3.2)
2. Material test certificates (1.4.2,Z.l.Z)
3. Records of heat treatments carried out during fabrication (4.2.2,4.4.2,4.4.3)
components
W h e d vessel
4.Records identifying specific location of each batch of material in finished vessel (4.1.2)
5. Records of: welding procedure tests (5.2)
welder approval tests (5.3)
weld production tests (if required) (5.4)
6. NDT records: parent material (5.6.2)
welds (5.6)
components prepared for welding (5.6.3)
welds (5.6)
7. Records of dimensional checks against specified tolerances (4.2.4)
8. Detailed records of pressure test1)(5.8)
9. Records of checks made to venfy any special purchaser requirements (table 1.51)2)
‘1 Essential details of pressure test are given in the Certificate of Compliance.
2, e.g. speciai tolerances, ‘finger-printing’
O BSIStandards
COPYRIGHT British 1997 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards s/1
~~
STD.BSI B S 55017-ENGL L797 L b 2 4 b b 9 CIL70978 b b 5 P
b u e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Annex T T.1.2 Weld procedure tests

Recommendations for arc welded tube to The testing of weld procedures specified in 6.2 should
be in accordance with BS 4870 : Part 3.
tubeplate joints
T.1.3Approual testing of welders
T.l Joint selection Approval testing of welders or operators involved with
T.1.1 General mechanized or automatic welding, as specified in 6.3,
The type of joint selected for welded tube to tubeplate should be in accordance with BS 4871 : Part 3.
connections may be influenced by consideration of the T.1.4 Welding plus tube expansion
allowable joint load (see 3.9.6) but is more often
determined by consideration of the possibility and lùbe expansion after welding should be considered
consequences of leaks developing in service. Because when:
of the small cross section of weld metal involved, a) corrosive and scale producing media may
minor weld defects may lead to leakage in service as a concentrate in the crevice; or
result of corrosion or propagation by in-service b) severe vibration of the tubes is likely7or
stresses. c) good heat transfer is required between tube and
The assurance of weld quality by volumetric tubeplate.
nondestnictive testing (e.g. radiography or ultrasonics) Tube expansion is not performed for strength purposes
may be difficult for most types of tube to tubeplate (see table 3.9-2), but tubes expanded for the full depth
joint, and particular attention should therefore be given of the tubeplate will have increased ligament efficiency
to controllhg the factors that can influence tube to (see 3.9.2.1).
tubeplate weld quality. These include joint geometry7 T.2 Tube to tubeplate joints preparation for
method of welding, quality control in manufacture and welding
leak testing. Examples of typical joint configurations
are given in figures T.1 to T.8 showing weld details that T.2.1 General
have given satisfactory results under specific The tube holes should be í?ee from burrs and be in
manufacturing conditions. Modifications may be accordance with the tolerances permitted in the
required to suit particular manufacturer's techniques, approved drawing. %be holes for front face welds
but ali details adopted are to be shown by the should have their edges at the back face of the
* manufacturer to have produced satisfactory results tubeplate chamfered or radiused to 2 mm
m* using the procedures specified in section four. approximately
NOTE 1. Typical dimensions.

P=tmax.
Minimum distance between tubes = 2t.
NOTE 2. '&pical welding methods.
a) TIG plus filler or manual metai arc where t = 2.6 mm min.
b) TIG without filler where t = 2.6 mm max. (see T.2.4).
c) Single layer weld.
Figure T.l Tube to tubeplate connections, tube end fusion
O BSI 1997
TA
~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1797 II L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70979 5Tl E

BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Annex T

w =t
D = t min. 2t max.
NOTE 2. ?srpical welding methods.
a) TIG with filler or MMA where t = 2.6 mm min.
b) TIG without filler where t = 2.6 mm max. (see T.2.4).
c) Single layer weld
NOTE 3. Special features.
Provides minimal distortion of tubeplate
Figure T.2 Tube to tubeplate connections, castellated weld
Both faces of the tubeplate, the holes and the tubes Special punches may also be employed to secure tubes
should be free k m dirt, grease, scale and other to the tubeplate, e.g. the punch may be designed to
foreign matter when they are assembled. TO avoid enable three equally spaced teeth to throw burrs from
possible damage during assembly, or enimpment of the tubeplate hole towards the tube provided the burr
contaminants, baffle and support plate holes should be depths are sufficiently shallow to be fused during
free from buns and effectively cleaned prior to the welding.
commencement of tube threading.Immediately prior to
assembly, tubeplates should be thoroughly cleaned and T.2.3Mechanized welding
degreased using a solvent that does not leave a For mechanized welding processes, machine settings
residue. The ends of the tubes that are to be welded and meter readings should be checked at the start of
should be cleaned and degreased with a suitable each shift to ensure that they are in accordance with
non-residue forming solvent both inside and out, for a those detailed in the approved welding procedure.
length equal to the tubeplate thickness plus 25 mm T.2.4Autogenous welding
or 100 mm whichever is the smaller. Chloride free
solvents should be used for amtenitic steels. Autogenous welds may be susceptible to variable
penetration due to cast to cast variations in some
For welding by the TIG process, the outside ends of materials. This may require a revision of the weld
the tubes should be cleaned to bright metal for a procedure and further weld procedure tests being
minimum distance of 15mm. carried out on representative material.
T.2.2Positioning of tubes T.2.6 Expansion of welded joints
Prior to welding of tube to tubeplate joints, light Where expansion after welding is specified for tube to
expansion with taper expanders may be used to locate tubeplate welds, it should not be carried out until after
the tubes. This expansion should be controlled to the successful completion of the low-pressure test.
prevent the tube hole gap being completely closed
beyond the weld as this can give rise to weld faults.
No lubricant should be used during expansion to
ensure cleanliness of the weld preparation.
Ti2 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

~
~~
~~
STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1977 l b 2 4 b b 9 üb70980 213 I
Annex T Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5 5 0 : 1997

W=tmin.
P = 1.5t min.
Minimum tube waii 2.6 mm.
Minimm distance between tubes 2.5 t or 8 mm whichever is least.
NOTE 2. Typical welding methods.
a) Manual metai arc.
b) TIG + filler.
c) MIG/MAG for multilayer welds only. Weld stop/start positions should not be
coincident.
d) ii?igle or multilayer weld.
Figure T.3 Tube to tubeplate connections, plain fillet weld

D = 0.5t to It for mechanized welding; t + 1.5 mm for manual welding.
t = 1.0 mm min.
a) TIG + filler.
b) TIG without filler (see T.2.4).
c) Single layer weld.
1 Figure T.4 Tube to tubeplate connections, front face bore fillet weld
O BSI i997 T/3

S T D - B S I B S 55UO-ENGL 1997 W l b 2 4 b b 9 O 5 7 0 7 8 1 & 5 T =
BS 5 5 0 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Annex T
NOTE 1. Typical àimensions.

ligament
Wmin. = 2t or mm whichever is less.
2
~
Wmax. = 5 mm.
Rmax. = 5 mm.
D = t.
P = 2.5 for TIG welding, and 5 for MMA welding.
a) Manual metal arc throughout.
b) TIG plus filler throughout.
c) Combination of TIG and manual metal arc.
NOTE 3. Multilayer weld.
Weld stop/start positions should not be coincident.
Figure T.6 Tube to tubeplate connections, groove plus fillet weld
Expansion is to be done with the object of sealing the T.3 Post-weld heat treatment
back face crevice in the tube hole. Tube wall thinning Post-weld heat treatment of complex assemblies such
should be controlled to a predetermined range that wiil as welded tube end connections may present
ensure that the expansion remains tight under design difficulties and so, where applicable, consideration
conditions, but not so great as to cause cracking of the should be given to methods of elllninating post-weld
welds or tubes. The expanded region should be heat treatment including the possible use of austenitic
within 3 mm from the back of the tubeplate to 10 nun ñiler metals, the use of extra low carbon ferritic filler
from the weld fusion line. metals or the use of tubeplates clad with austenitic or
T.2.6 Preheat prior to welding extra-low carbon weld metal.
The preheating of tubeplates is difficult to apply, Where post-weld heat tz-eaíment is employed, the
maintain and control. Sufficient temperature heating and cooling rates should be controlled to avoid
measurement should be made to demonstrate that the possibility of weld fracturesand excessive tube
preheat and interpass temperatures are not less than distortion. Adequate tube support to limit tube
those specified in the approved welduig procedure. distortion should be considered at the design stage.
Because of the difficulty in preheating, consideration The post-weld heat treatment procedure should define
should be given to eliminating preheat by use of low charging temperature, heating and cooling rates, soak
hydrogen processes, austenitic ñüer metal or austenitic time and temperature for removal from the furnace.
clad tubeplates. For k e d tubeplate heat exchangers consideration
should be given to the siresses that may arise due to
temperature differentials between tubes and shell or
tubes and tubeplate, and sufficient temperature
measurement points should be defined to monitor and
control temperature differentials.
T/4
O BSI 1997
STDmBSI BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 M l b 2 L i b b 9 Ob7U982 09b
Annex T h u e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
i'
t

ligament
W min. = 2t or - mm whichever is less.
2
Wmax.=5mm.
R m a .= I t to 1.5t.
D = 0.8t min. (Chosen to ensure design minimum throat thickness T after welding).
P = O + 0.8 ïìînî.
TIG manual or mechanized with filler.
NOTE 3. Multilayer welding.
Weld stopistart positions should not be coincident.
Figure T.6 Tube to tubeplate connections, groove weld
T.4 Essential testing of tube to tubeplate joints b) a dye penetrant test in accordance with BS 6443,
the welds and tube wall adjacent to the weld should
T.4.1 General be free from cracks, lack of fusion or surface
Irrespective of vessel categow, tube to tubeplate welds porosity
should be tested in accordance with T.4.2 to T.4.4.The AU unacceptable defects revealed should be repaired
optionai tests detailed in T.6.2 to T.5.6 should be and retested. This testing allows the discovery and
employed only by agreement between the purchaser repair of weld defects before hydraulic testing allows
and the manufacturer. The Vanous testing options for water into the tube to tubeplate crevice.
joint designs shown in figures T.1 to T.8 are
summarized in table T.1. T.4.4 Hgdraulic test
T.4.2 Vîual examination Hyàraulic testing should be in accordance with 5.8.3,
and the tubeplate welds examined for leah.
AU welds should be visually examined and should
comply with the requirements of the procedure welds T.6 Optional tests
as defined in BS 4870 : Part 3 in respect of defects that
can be revealed by visual inspection, unless otherwise T.5.1 GeneraE
agreed. When agreed between the purchaser and the
manufacturer one or more of the tests detailed in T.6.2
T.4.3 Dge penetrant or pneumatic testing to T.5.5 may be carried out.
Before hydraulic testing welds are to be subject to
either:
T.5.2Inter-run testing
a) a shell side pneumatic test at 0.5 bar with the Tests detailed in T.4.3aor T4.3b may be carried out
between runs for multilayer welds.
welds being examined for leaks using soapy water,
or leak detection methods agreed between the NOTE. Care should be taken after any inter-run testing to ensure
that the joint is adequately cleaned to prevent contamination of
purchaser and the manufacturer; or subsequent runs.
O BSI 1997
T/5
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Annex T
Weld set up Typical completed weld

NOTE 1. Dimensions.
Subject to agreement
Only specially designed mechanized TIG equipment can be used. During welding, the back of the tubeplate in
the vicinity of the joint must be protected by flux or inert gas.
Single layer (pass) weld.
NOTE 3. Special features
High reliability in service is possible.
Crevice free welds are obtained.
Ultrasonic examination of the tubeplates for subsurface laminations is desirable for carbon steel.
Figure T.7 Tube to tubeplate connections, back face inset bore weld
T.6.3 Final leak testing Certain materials are subject to cast to cast variations
After completion of the hydraulic test detailed in T.4.4, in autogenous welding and test piece materials should
a sensitive tracer gas leak test may be carried out at a be representative of the production materiai.
pressure not exceeding the design pressure, the Production control welds for manual welds are not
method of test and the acceptance cri te^ being as normally employed but unless otherwise agreed, they
agreed between the purchaser and the mufacturer. should comply with BS 4870 : Part3.
NOTE. Useful guidance on leak testing can be found in Section V Testing is to be in accordance with BS 4870 : Part3 or
of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. BS 4871 : Part3 except that radiography is not
T.6.4Radiography required, the weld being sectioned and subject to
If radiography is used for inspection of back-face visual assessment only When production control test
welds (figuresT.7 and T.8), unless otherwise agreed the pieces are unsatidacto~,acceptance of the welds
acceptance standards are to be as specified in represented will be subject to agreement between the
BS 4870 : Part3. The radiographic technique to be purchaser and the manufacturer.
employed and the extent of radiography should be
agreed between purchaser and manufacturer.
T.6.6 Production control test pieces
Where production control test pieces ase specified, the
frequency of testing is to be agreed between the
purchaser and the manufacturer. The production
control test piece wiìi consist of a representative tube
to tubeplate weld and be designed to facilitate correct
positioning of the welding head.
TI6 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 = L b 2 4 b b 9 Ub70784 9 b 7 B
Annex T h u e 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Weld set up Typical completed weld

NOTE 1. Dimensions.
Subject to agreement.
ûnly specially designed mechanized TIG equipment can be used. During
welding, the back of the tubeplate in the vicinity of the joint must be protected
by flux or inert gas.
Single iayer (pass) weld.
NOTE 3. Special features
High reliability in service is possible.
Crevice free welds are obtained.
Ultrasonic examination of the tubeplate for subsurface laminations is desirable
for carbon steel.
Figure T.8 Tube to tubeplate connections, back face stub bore weld
Weld detail Essential tests for all joints Optional tests (see T.5)
Visual Preliminary Hydraulic Intermediate leak Radiography Final leak

inspection pneumatic (see T.4.4) test (see T.5.4) test
(see T.4.2) leak test (see T.5.2) (see T.5.3)
(see T.4.3a)
or dye
penetrant
(see T.4.3b)
T. 1 I Not amlicable I Not wacticable 1
I Not practicable I
~ ~~~
T.2 b o t applicable
T.3 I Where specified I Not practicable I
T.4 Where
T.5 'Required 'Required .Required specified
T.6
T.7
T.8 , , 1 Not applicable I Where specified 1
O BSI 1997
Tff
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70785 A T 5 R
Issue 2, September 1997 BS SMW) : 1997
Annex U a) the room temperature yield strength of the base

material for as welded components;
Guidance on the use of fracture or
mechanics analyses b) 30 % of yield for post weld heat treated
U.1 General procedure components.
This standard specifies requirements which are NOTE. The toughness requirement of Annex D for the operation
of ferritic steel vessels below O "C were originally based on a
intended to avoid brittle fracture during operation and combination of practical experience and performance of notched
during pressure testing. However these requirements and welded wide plate tests and have evolved as described by
appiy only to a limited range of steels and the Garwood S. J. and Denham B. [i].
combined requirements for limiting stresses and weld The original criterion adopted as the critical conditions for the
defects with certain notch ductilities may be unduly wide plate tests in the work reported by Woodley C. C.,
conservative in some circumstances. Burdekin F. M. and Wells A. A. [Z] was the attainment of 0.5 %
plastic strain. For the steels employed where the yield strength
A fracture mechanics analysis as specified in PD 6493 averaged - 350 N / m 2 this is equivalent to a plastic strain of
and/or PD 6539 may be used as a basis for determining three times yield, i.e. a total strain of four times yield for as
the suitability of particular vessels for their intended welded components. This is consistent with the strain ratio used
for validation purposes reported by Garwood and Denham where
duty when so agreed between purchaser, manufacturer a BS PD 6493 : 1991 level 1 CTOD design curve based procedure
and inspecting authority for the following steels: was adopted. This criteria is in turn comparable with the input
a) those not currently covered by annex D; requirements of U.1.2 to predict fracture toughness requirements
using fracture mechanics principles and reference flaws.
b) those cases where annex D cannot be adhered to;
e) where defects outside the requirements of 6.7 are U.1.3 If nondestructive testing methods are employed
detected; which allow accurate sizing of defects, these values,
together with information on the stress state of the
d) where it is proposed to use MO and M1 materials critical regions in the vessel, can be used with PD 6493
in thicknesses greater than permitted by procedures to specify more accurate toughness
table 4.41 without post-weld heat treatment, requirements than determined in accordance with
Such analyses are to be undertaken generally in annex D and U.1.2.
accordance with the following requirements.
U.1.4 For materials which are covered by annex D
U.l.l F'racture toughness properties should be but where the Charpy energy requirements cannot be
obtained in accordance with PD 6493, PD 6539 andor met, a fitness for purpose analysis as specified in this
BS 7448 procedures on full thickness single edge annex can be employed to assess the integrity of the
notched bend specimens with fatigue cracks located vessel.
through thickness on the weld centre-line and in
parent material. Further tests sampling heat affected U.1.6 A fitness for purpose analysis can also be
zone regions may also be specified particularly when employed to ident@ the ability to tolerate specific
fatigue or some other in-service crack growth defects outside the requirements of table 5.7-1. In this
mechanism may be significant. case the testing of surface notched fracture toughness
specimens may be more appropriate to i d e n w the
When HAZ tests are specified special considerations toughness of specific regions in which the defects are
are necessary with regard to the placement of the situated.
notch and metallurgical sectioning subsequent to
testing. References
[i] Garwood S. J. and Denham B. Thej?mture I
I U.i.2 For materiais not covered by annex D, a similar toughness requimnents of BS 5500, ASME, 88pvP-7, I
I level of tolerance to fracture can be obtained by Pittsburgh, June 1988. I
I s p e c m g fracture toughness requirements determined [Z]Woodley C. C., Burdekin E M. and Wells A h , Mild I
I from the use of an assessment procedure such as in steel f o r pressure equipment at sub zero temperature, I
I PD 6493. "his requires the selection of a reference British Welding Journal, 11,3, March 1964, 123-136. I
I defect size as agreed by the interested parties
I (e.g. a through w d flaw of total length equal to
I 10 mm, or a quarter waìi thickness surface flaw with
I length six times its depth) and determination of an
I equivalent stress (or strain) relating to the hydraulic
I test condition, for a defect in a region of stress
I concentration. Account shall also be taken of residual
I stresses equivalent to:
O BSI 1996
UA
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 Il b 2 4 b b S Ob704ôb 731 m
Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500: 1997
Annex V b) All variables in the manufacturing procedures that

affect the integriw of the vessel are specified,
Requirements for testing and inspection monitored and controlled.
of serially produced pressure vessels c) The testing and examination of the vessel is done
V.l Application at least at the frequency given in this standard, using
This annex specifies requirements for the construction, appropriate test methods.
inspection, testing and certification of serially produced d) The inspection functions within the company are
vessels (see V.2.1). It applies only to vessels made in clearly prescribed.
compliance with the following. V.4 Inspection and non-destructive testing
a) The design and construction of the vessel, except V.4.1 The inspection and nondestructive testing of
where otherwise specified in this annex, is to the firstvessel in a series shall be witnessed by the
category 2 of BS 5500 in MO and M1 materials only Inspecting Authority as follows.
b) The design pressure of the vessel does not a) The whole length of ail welds (100 %) shall be
exceed 30 bar, and the product of that pressure and examined by the method specified in 6.6.4.2 and an
the capacity of the vessel (pV) does not assessment of any flaws shall be consistent
exceed 10 O00 bar.L. The vessel diameter does not with 5.7.2.4.
exceed 1.5m, the nominal length (between tangents) b) The dimensions shall be checked to ensure
does not exceed 3.5 m and the shell thickness does conformity with the approved design drawings.
not exceed 15 mm. The design temperature lies in c) A pressure test in accordance with 5.8.2 shall be
the range 300 "C to 10 "C (see 3.2.4 and D.3.2). camed out.
c) All type A main welds (see 6.6.4) are welded by a
mechanized or an automatic weldmg process. V.4.2 At least 20 % of the weld length of the first
vessel of each batch shall be examined by the method
d) Vessels identification numbers contain the specified in 5.6.4.2. Assessment of any flaws shall be
suffix 'V' to denote that they have been consistent with 5.7.2.4 and witnessed by the
manufactured in accordance with this annex and the Inspecting Authority.
standard.
V.4.3 Except as permitted by V.4.4, each subsequent
V.2 Definitions vessel produced shall be examined by the
V.2.1 serial production manufacturer and assessed in accordance with 5.6.4.2
The manufacture of identical vessels to a common and 5.7.2.4 as follows.
approved design using the same manufacturing a) The whole length of all welds associated with
procedure. nozzles shall be inspected using either a magnetic
Vessels with variations in length, nozzle position, particle or a dye penetsant method.
number of nozzles and supporting locations are b) Each longitudinal and circumferential weld shall
considered as part of the same series, subject to the be radiographed or ultrasonically examined once per
confirmation of the design acceptability by the vessel with a minimum sample length of 150 mm and
Inspecting Authoriw. with a minimum of 10 % of the finished weld per
shift. This 10 % examination shall include 'Tjoints
V.2.2 batch of vessels such that 10 % of the 'T'joints per shift are
A part of a series where the welding of the main seams examined.
and branch welds has been essentially continuous. A c) At least 10 % of the length of other attachment
stoppage in vessel production greater than five welds shall be examined using either magnetic
consecutive days requires the designation of a new particle or dye penetsant inspecting methods.
batch.
NOTE. Stoppages or breakdowns requiring resetting of the
V.4.4 By agreement between the manufacturer and
welding machine constitute a break in continuiw. Adjustments to the Inspecting Authority, the examinations in
the welding machine within the welding procedure limitations do accordance with V.4.3b and V.4.3~may be reduced
not qualify as resetting the welding machine. from 10 % to not less than 5 % if the test results are
V.3 Quality assurance consistently satisfactory. Production shall be
Before production commences, a detailed considered satisfactory if not more than 3 unacceptable
manufacturing and quaMy plan shall be prepared by defects were found in the immediately previous 100
the manufacturer and submitted to an Inspecting nondestructively tested samples of the batch.
Authority for approval. This pian shall indicate the V.4.5 If not less than four and not more than ten of
inspection or sampling points and the frequency of the same unacceptable defects are found in the
testing. Provision shall be made within the plan for immediately previous 100 nondestructively tested
rejected or reworked components to be re-inspected. samples, then the inspecting frequency shall.
The quality p h shall ensure the following. a) be maintained at 10% if the inspecting frequency
a) The materials used in the manufacture of the was 10%;
vessels comply with the materials standards as b) be increased to 10 % if the inspecting frequency
specified. was5%.
O BSI 1997
VI1
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL L797 9 Lb24667 0 6 7 0 9 8 7 678
BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 1, jan^ 1997 Annex V
Where more than 10 of the same unacceptable defects V.6.2.2 If no unacceptable defects are found in the
ase found in the immediately previous 100 appropriate seams of those two vessels, no further
nondestnictively tested samples, then the inspecting special examinations s h d be carried out.
frequency shall be increased to 20 % and maintained at
this level until the number of unacceptable defects in V.6.2.3 if unacceptable defects are found in either of
the immediately previous 100 nondestnictively tested the preceding or following vessels, then further vessels
samples is less than eight, at which the frequency may in sequence s h d be assessed in accordance with V.6.1
be reduced to the 10 % specified in V.4.3b and V.4.3~. until a vessel with no unacceptable defects is found.
V.4.6 Every vessel shall be pressure tested by the V.6 Marking

manufacturer, in accordance with 6.8.6 and witnessed The Inspecting Authority shall inspect all vessels
by the Inspecting Authority at their discretion. before despatch to ensure that the marking conforms
to 6.8.9 of the standard. The vessels shall be marked
V.4.7 The Inspecting Authority shall cany out 'BS 5500V' to denote that they have been manufactured
surveillance during production and testing, to ensure in accordance with this annex.
that the manufacturer produces and inspects vessels in
accordance with the IlliLnufilctuzig and quality plan. Where some time elapses between pressure test and
despatch, e.g. stock vessels, the Inspecting Authority
V.6 Acceptance criteria s h d satisfy themselves that no deterioration or
damage has occurred in the interim period. Where a
V.6.1 Isolated defects
temporary nameplate has been attached the Inspecting
If a defect is found during the partid nondestructive Authority shall ensure that the permanent plate
testing of a vessel, re-examination and repair shall be conforms in all respects to 5.8.9.
in accordance with 6.7.2.3. However, defects found in
"1" joint regions of the vessel examined shall be V.7 Documentation
regarded as representing the seam in which they are A Certificate of Compliance shalì be issued for each
located. batch of vessels (see 1.4.4). The certificate shali state
clearly the serial numbers of the Vessels covered. The
V.6.2 Multiple defects reasons for any missing numbers in the series shall be
V.6.2.1 If a recurrence of the same type of clearly stated.
unacceptable defect is found in that vessel seam when Where vessels in a batch are allocated to different
the whole of the seam is inspected, as required purchasers, a separate copy of the certificate shall be
by 6.7.2.3, then the vessels produced immediately issued to each purchaser.
before and after it in the batch shall also have the Records of manufacture described in 1.5.2 of the
same weld seams examined in accordance with V.5.1. standard shail not be supplied to the purchaser unless
specifically requested
VD British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

Issue 1, January 1997 BS 6600 : 1997
Aluminium supplement 2.3.2 Materials not covered bg British Standards

Requirements for aluminium and 2.3.2.1 other materials as specified in 2.1.2.lb of the
main text shall comply with the general requirements
duminium alloys in the design and of 2.3.2.2 to 2.3.2.4.
construction of unfired fusion welded 2.3.2.2 The material specification shail specify the
pressure vessels composition limits for all constituents, heat tsea4nent
This supplement should be read in conjunction with and the appropriate mechanical properties for
the main body of the standard, so as to convert it into acceptance and other purposes.
one applicable to aluminium and duminium alloy 2.3.2.3 Mechanical properties at room temperature
unfired fusion welded pressure vessels. This shall be specified for acceptance tests in accordance
supplement lists the sections of the main text with BS 18 covering:
applicable to and those not applicable to the design the tensile strength range,
and construction of aluminium and aluminium alloy the minimum 0.2 % proof stress (I$-,),
pressure vessels. In addition the supplement contains the specified minimum percentage elongation at
clauses specific to such vessels which replace the
corresponding clauses of the main text in this context.
fracture, referred to a gauge length of 5.w39)
or 50 nun, shall be appropriate to the type of
Cross-references are to the relevant clauses of this
materiai with a lower limit of 5 %.
supplement unless otherwise stated
2.3.2.4 For materials that will be used at temperatures
above 50 O C , tensile data shall be provided from which
Section 1. General the expected minimum tensile strength and
See main text. minimum 0.2 % proof strength at the operating
temperature can be established. If the operating
temperature equals or exceeds 100 stress rupture
O C ,
Section 2. Materials data shall be available for determining the design
2.1 Selection of materials strength and design lifetime.
See main text. 2.3.2.5 to 2.3.2.11
Main text is not applicable.
* 2.2 Materials for low temperature applications
2.3.3 Aluminium magnesium allogs
vi
* See main text. Pressure vessels in aluminium alloys containing 3.0 %
2.3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys or more of magnesium for use at temperatures
above 65 "C shall be constructed only from material
2.3.1 Materials covered by British Standards supplied in the annealed (O) condition.
2.3.1.1 Permissible materiais complying with the NOTE. Extended service of alloys containing 3.0 % or more
appropriate British Standards shall be as given in magnesium at temperatures above 65 OC can result in grain
boundary precipitation of Mg-Al intermetallic compounds which
table 2.3-1. Nondestructive testing requirements shail corrode in some process fluids leading to disintegration in weld
be as specified in 5.6.2. areas. AUoys of this type should not be used at temperatures
above 65 "C unless tests or service experience have demonstrated
2.3.1.2 The design strength values given in that they are suitable for specific duty.
table 2.3-1 are appropriate to materiais,thicknesses and
fonn as specified in the relevant British Standards Section 3. Design
listed. It is permissible to use other thicknesses of the
same fonn or other product forms, the minimum See main text.
tensile properties being established either by reference
to the material specification or by arrangement with Section 4. Manufacture and workmanship
the material supplier. E the minimum values of Rpo.2 4.1 General aspects of construction
and R, are less than those given in table 2.3-1 for the 4.1.1 General
same temper or condition, the design strengths that are
not timedependent shall be reduced proportionately as See main text.
follows: 4.1.2 Material identtfication
a) materials 10504 3103, 606016063 and 6082 in ratio See main text.
of actual minimum &I& in table 2.3-1; 4.1.3 Order of completion of weld seams
b) other materials in ratio of actual minimum See main text.
Rp0.2lRpo.z in table 2.3-1. 4.1.4 Junction of more than two weld seams
Main text is not applicable.
39) So is the originai cross-sectional area of the gauge length of the tensile test specimen.
O BSI 1997
AA/1
~~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1977 Il b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70767 ‘+‘-In

BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Aluminum supplement
Table 2.3-1. Design strength values (N/mm2) : aluminium and aluminium alloys
Material standards, Condition Minimum Minimum - te Deratures í~ n o t exceedinn3)
Values o f f f o r design
BS references tensile 0.2% roof
BS 1470 to BS 1475 strength2) stress % 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
and BS 4300l) 4 n Rp0.2
N/I& N/Itlm*
1050A O 55 - 11 11 10 10 10 9 8
3103 O 90 - 236)
30034) O 96 34 23 23 23 21 17 12 10
5251 O 160 60 40 40 40 40 33 29 22
5454 O 215 80 53 53 53 52 34 28 22
5154A51 O 215 85 57 576)
50m5) O 275 125 83 836)
6061n T6 280 225 93 93 92 86 74 54 41
6061n T6 welded 165 - 55 55 55 54 51 43 32
60637) T6 185 160 62 60 58 51 38 27 15
6063A T6 230 190 77 75 72 63 47 33 19
-
6063A
6063n I T6 welded 120 40 40 40 38 36 22 14
6082 T6 280 240 93 88 83 71 60 47 33

6082 T6 welded 165 - 55 55 55 54 51 43 32
I) Tubeproduced in accordance with BS 1474 by the portholehridge extrusion method is not acceptable for pressure vessel shells or
nozzles unless agreed between the contracting parties. Its use in such cases is subject to the manufacturer demonstrating to the
Inspecting Authority the effectiveness of the procedures to be used to ensure a consistent quality of the extrusion seam weld.
2, See 2.3.2.4.
3, General note b) to tables 2.3-2 to 2.3-12 of the main text applies.
4, This aiioy is the A.A.A. designation not at present listed in British Standards.
5, See 2.3.3.
‘ See 2.3.3. 5154A and 5083 materials should not be used at temperatures above 65 O C , and 3103 should not be used at temperatures
1
above 50 OC unless tests or senice experience have demonstrated that they are suitable for the specific duty.
7, These alloys are suitable only for tube type welded attachments (e.g. weld neck flanges) not subject to severe weld restraint.
Extrusions and forgings up to 150 mm thick.
4.2 Cutting, forming and tolerances 4.2.1.2 Examination of cut edges

4.2.1 Cutting of material Before canying out further work, cut surfaces and heat
affected zones shall be examined for defects, including
4.2.1.1 Method laminations, cracks and inclusions.
All material shall be cut to size and shape preferably Visual methods may be supplemented by appropriate
by machining, chipping or piasma-arc cutting. However, nondestructive testing techniques when agreed
for plates less than 25 mm thick, it is permissible to use between the purchaser and the manufacturer (see 6.6.3
cold shearing provided that the cut edges are drecsed and table 1.51of the main text).
back mechanically by not less than 1.5mm to provide a Major defects shall be noWied to the Inspecting
suitable surface to permit a satisfactom examination of
Authority and the method of their rectincation agreed
the edges prior to welding. It is pennissible for plates
between the purchaser and the manufacturer (see
less than 10mm thick, which are cold sheared, not to
table 1.51 of the main text).
be dressed where the cut edges are to be subsequently
welded. Any material damaged in the process of cutting to size
and preparation of edges shall be removed by
Surfaces that have been plasma-arc cut shall be
machining or chipping back to undamaged metai.
dressed back by machining to remove severe notches
and scale. 4.2.2 Forming of shell sections and end plates
Edges that are plasma-arc cut shall be dressed back by 4.2.2.1 General
machining for a distance of 1.5mm unless the
manufacturer can demonstmte to the satisfaction of Prior to forming, a visual examination of all plates
the Inspecting Authoril~that the material has not been shall be carried out, followed by measurement of the
adversely affected by the cutting process (see thickness.
table 1.51of the main text).
AA/2 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

-~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 Il b 2 4 b b 9 Ob70990 l b 2 I

Aluminium supplement Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 :1997
Plates shall be formed to the required shape by any 4.2.4 Iblerances for vessels subject to internal
process provided that the quality of the material is not pressure
impaired. It is permissible to apply an effective heat See main text.
treatment following the forming operation to restore
the mechanical properties to their specified values. 4.2.6 Tolerancesfor vessels subject to external
pressure
By agreement, the manufacturer may be required to
demonstsate that the fonning and heat treatment See main text.
operations have not rendered the material unsuitable 4.3 Welded joints
for the intended service (see table 1.5-1of the main
text). 4.3.1 General
As far as is practicable, all hot and cold forming shall See m i n text.
be done by machine; local heating or hammering shall 4.3.2 Welding consumables
be used only by agreement between the purchaser and
the manufacturer (see table 1.51of the main text). Welding consumables (e.g. wire, electrodes, flux,
shielding gas) shall be the m e type as those used in
Lubricant remajning after any forming operation shall the welding procedure. Filler rods and wires shall
be removed by a suitable chemical cleaning process comply with BS 2901 : Part 4 and shall be stored in
that wiii not impair the quality of the material. accordance with the suppliers' recommendations. The
4.2.2.2 Plates welded prior to hot or col&forrning selection of filler rod or wires shall be appropriate to
It is permissible to butt weld plates together prior to the parent alloy(s) (see BS 3019 : Part 1 and BS 3571 :
forming provided that the joint is nondestructively Part 1).
tested after forming by a method agreed between the In all cases where filler metals do not match parent
purchaser and the manufacturer (see table 1.51of the metal compositions, or where alternative m e r metals
main text). are to be used, the purchaser shall be satisfied that the
combination to be used is suitable for the service
4.2.2.3 Col&forrning conditions (see table 1.51of the main text).
If the inside radius of cunTature of a pressure part is
less than 10 times the thickness, an appropriate heat 4.3.2.1 Main text is not applicable.
treatment to reduce the effects of cold work may be 4.3.2.2 Main text is not applicable.
*
m applied by agreement between the purchaser and the
* manufacturer (see table 1.51of the main text). 4.3.2.3 Main text is not applicable.
4.2.2.4 Forming 4.3.2.4 Main text is not applicable.

4.2.2.4.1 Aluminium hot forming 4.3.3 Preparation of plate edges and openings
Aìuminium plates to be treated or hot worked shall be 4.3.3.1 See main text.
heated uniformly in a neutral or oxidizing atmosphere,
without flame impingement, to a temperature not 4.3.3.2 See main text.
exceeding 450 "C. 4.3.3.3 After edges of the plates have been prepared
Deformation shall not be carried out after the for welding they shad be given a thorough visual
temperature of the material has fallen below 300 "C. examination for cracks, laminations, inclusions or
Local heating shall not be used. other defects. It is permissible to supplement visual
methods with nondestructive testing techniques when
4.2.2.4.2 Aluminium COM working
this is agreed between the purchaser and the
It is permissible to soften aluminium that has been manufacturer (see table 1.51 of the main text). It is
cold worked when the purchaser and the manufacturer permissible to restore general deficiency of any plate
agree that the extent of the cold working is sufficient edge by weld metal deposition. The method to be used
to necessitate treatment (see table 1.5-1of the main shall be agreed between the purchaser and the
text). manufacturer (see table 1.51of the main text).
The requirements for any softening treatments shall be 4.3.4 Assemblg for welding
subject to agreement between the purchaser and the
manufacturer (see table 1.51 of the main text). See main text.
4.2.2.6 Manufacture of shell plates and ends 4.3.6 Attachments and the removal of temporary
attachments
See main kxt.
4.3.6.1 Attachments
4.2.2.6 Examinatwn of formed plates
See main text.
See main text.
4.3.6.2 Removal of attuchments
4.2.3 Assembly tolerances
See main text.
See m i n tex%.
O BSI 1997 AN3

BS 5 5 0 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Aluminium supplement
4.3.6.3 Attachments of dissimilar aluminium alloys 4.4 Heat treatment

It is permissible to attach dissimilar aluminium alloy 4.4.1 Preheat requirements
attachments directly to the sheii. Compatible filier
metals shall be used in an approved procedure. 4.4.1.1 Heating prior to welding aluminium is not
normally considered n e c e m . Where preheating is
4.3.6 Butt joints required it shall be specified in the weld procedure.
4.3.6.1 Butt welds between plates of unequal The preheat temperature depends upon the type of
UtickrZRsS joint, the metal thickness, the alloy and the heat input
to each weld run.
See main text.
NOTE. As a general guide temperatures in excess of 150 "C should
4.3.6.2 Backing strips not be necessary.
Permanent backing Stsips shall not be used for 4.4.1.2 The temperature shall be checked during the
longitudinal welds. It is permissible to weld period of application using appropriate methods
circumferential butt joinîs in tubes with temporary, (e.g. thermocouples, contact Pyrometern or temperature
permanent or consumable backing rings oniy by indicating coatings). Where coatuigs are employed they
agreement between the purchaser and the shali not be applied to fusion faces.
manufacturer (see table 1.51 of the main text).
4.4.1.3 Main text is not applicable.
Where a backing strip is to be used, the material shall
be such that it will not adversely innuence the weld. 4.4.1.4 Main text is not applicable.
Unless otherwise agreed between the purchaser and
4.4.2 Normalizing:ferritic steels
the manufacturer, backing strips shall be carefdly
removed prior to any special non-destructive tests on Main text is not applicable.
the joint (see table 1.51 of the main text). 4.4.3 Post-weld heat treatment
4.3.7 Welding:general requirements 4.4.3.1 For aluminium the d e W of any post-weld
4.3.7.1 All fusion faces shall be thoroughly cleaned of heat treaiment shall be agreed between the purchaser
oil or other foreign substances and oxide ñìms and the manufacturer (see table 1.51 of the main text).
removed to give a clean metal surface. Such cleaning NOTE. Stress relieving heat treatment is not normaily necessary
shall extend for a distance of 12 mm íi-om the edge of or desirable for aluminium pressure vessels.
each fusion face. 4.4.3.2 Main text is not applicable.
Filler materials for TIGwelding shall be cleaned
immediately before use. Fiiier wire for MiG-welding
shall be protected from contamination during use and, 4.4.3.4 Main text is not applicable.
in particdar, between shifts.
4.3.7.2 See main text.
4.4.4 Methods of heat treatment
4.3.7.3 Each run of weld metal shall be thoroughly Main text is not applicable.
cleaned before the next run is deposited. All scratch
brushes shall be of stainless steel and shall be used 4.4.6 Post-weld heat treatment procedure
only on aluminium. Main textis not appliccsble.
4.3.7.4 See main text 4.6 Surface finish
4.3.7.6 Arcs shall be struck oniy where weld metal is See main text.
to be applied or in the fusion path.
4.3.7.6 See main text. Section 5. Inspection and testing
4.3.7.7 Not less than two iayers of weld metal shall be 6.1 General
deposited at each weld attaching branch pipes, flanges Each pressure vessel shall be inspected during
and pads except where the particular welding construction. Sufficient inspections shall be made to
procedure has been agreed between the purchaser and ensure that the materials, construction and testing
the manufacturer (see table 1.51 of the main text). comply in all respects with this standard. Inspection by
4.3.7.8 When welding stops for any reason, care shall the Inspecting Authority shall not absolve the
be taken when r&arthg to ensure proper fusion and manufacturer from his responsibility to exercise such
penetration between the weld metal and previously quality assurance procedures as will ensure that the
deposited weld metal. requirements and intent of this standard are satisfied.
AM4 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

~~
STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1777 Lb24bb9 Ob70772 T 3 5 W

Aluminium supplement Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
The Inspecting Authority shall have access to the A preexisting weld procedure test performed in
Worb of the manufacturer at all times during which accordance with BS 4870 : Part 2, previously acceptable
work is in progress, and shall be at liberty to inspect to an Inspecting Authority, shall remain acceptable
the manufacture at any stage and to reject any part not providing it satisfies the intent of the technical
complying with this standard. The Inspecting Authority requirements of BS EN 2884. However, the range of
shall have the right to require evidence that the design approval of such a test shall be in accordance with the
complies with this standard ranges in BS EN 2884 except as modified by 5.5.
The Inspecting Authority shall notify the manufacturer NOTE. Existing procedures to BS 4870 : Part 2 are considered
before constniction begins regarding the stages of the technically equivalent to BS EN 2884 when similar types of tests
have been carried out. Thus the bend tests in BS 4870 : Part 2 are
construction at which special examinations of considered equivalent to those in BS EN 288-4 even though the
materials will be Made, and the manufacturer shall give exact number and the bend angle differ. Similarly visual,
reasonable notice to the Inspecting Authority when radiographic, ultrasonic, surface crack detection, transverse
such stages will be reached, but this shall not preclude tensile, hardness, macro and impact tests are considered
equivalent.
the Inspecting Authority from making examinations at
any other stages, or from rejecting material or Where BS EN 288-4 calls for a type of test to be performed that
has not been carried out on the preexisting BS 4870 :
worlunanship whenever they are found defective. Part 2 procedure qualification tests, additional tests as described
NOTE. Table 5.8-1 is included in this supplement for guidance in clause O of BS EN 288-4 should be carried out
purposes oniy. The alternative methods of approval of welding
6.2 Approval testing of fusion welding procedures addressed in BS EN 2881 are not permitted
procedures for welding on pressure vessels made in accordance
with BS 5500.
6.2.1 Approval testing of welding procedures shall be
conducted, recorded and reported in accordance with 6.2.4 Main text is not applicable.
BS EN 2884 except as stated in 6.5. 5.2.5 Main text is not applicable.
For fusion welding methods other than MIG and TíG
(e.g. plasma arc or electron b e m ) the general 6.2.6 Main test is not applicable.
principles of BS EN 2884 shall be complied with. 6.3 Welder and operator approval
6.2.2 The manufacturer shall supply a list of all the 6.3.1 Approval testing of welders and operators shall
c welding procedures required in the fabrication of the be conducted, recorded and reported in accordance
v; vessel, together with test pieces which are with BS EN 2884.
representative of the various thicknesses and materials
to be used to prove each welding procedure. The 6.3.2 See m i n text.
production and testing of these pieces shall be 6.3.3 See m i n text.
witnessed by the purchaser or his Inspecting Authority
except that, in cases where the manufacturer can 6.3.4 See main text.
furnish proof of previously authenticated tests and 5.3.5 Welders who previously held approvals in
results on the same type of joint and materiai within accordance with BS 4871 : Part 2 are considered to be
the permitted variables of BS EN 2884 he shall be approved to work subject to the following provisos.
deemed exempt from any further tests.
a) The range of approval of the welder is in
5.2.3 Ail welding shall be performed in accordance accordance with BS EN 287-2.
with a welding procedure specification, or other work
b) Welder approval tests in accordance
inshction, conforming to BS EN 2882. with BS 4871 : Part 2 are considered technically
A welding procedure test on a branch connection will equivalent to BS EN 287-2 except that for all MIG
only qual@ a WPS for welding a branch connection to and MAG welding, bend tests should have been
BS 5500 when mechanical properties of the joint have carried out. If bend tests for these processes have
been established by an equivalent butt weld. not been carried out during the BS 4871 : Part 2 test,
Alternatively a weld procedure approval test on a butt reapproval to BS EN 287-2 should be performed.
joint in pipe shall give approval for pipe branch e) The prolongation of a BS 4871 : Part 2 approval
connections and nozzle to shell connections, where: test should be made at six-monthly intervals by the
a) the joint details and geometry for the branch employer/manufacturer, in accordance with 10.2 of
connections have been accepted by the contracting BS EN 287-2, for the period of two years from the
parties; and date of effect of BS EN 287-2, i.e. from 1May 1992.
b) a welded branch connection using the same joint d) The prolongation of a BS 4871 : Part 2 approval
details and geometry has been previously test in excess of the initial two year period (i.e. after
demonshted as sound in any steel, on the basis of 1May 1994) shall be made in accordance with 10.2
volumetric and surface non-destructive examination. of BS EN 287-2 in corljunction with an Inspecting
Authority.
O BSI 1997 AA/5

=
~ ~
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 E Lb2LibbS Ub70993 771

BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 2, September 1997 Aluminium supplement
5.4 Production control test plates When the test plates are required for circumferential
6.4.1 Production control test plates shall not be welds, it is permissible to weld them separately from
required unless specified by the purchaser at the time the vessel providing the technique used in their
preparation duplicates, as far as possible, the
of order (see 1.6.1). in such cases they shall be
prepared and tested in accordance with 5.4 and the procedure used in the welding of the appropriate
seams in the vessel.
number of test plates shall be subject to agreement
between the purchaser and the manufacturer 5.4.4 Care shall be taken to minimize distortion of the
(see table 1.51of the main text). test plates during welding. If excessive distortion
occurs, the test plate shall be straightened before
6.4.2 The material used for the test plates shall comply post-weld treatment. At no time shall the test plates be
with the same specification as that used in the heated to a temperatwe higher than that used or to be
construction of the vessel. used for the final heat treatment of the vessel, if
The plate shall be of the same nominal thickness as any (see 4.4.3).
the shell and should preferably be selected from the At the option of the manufacturer it is permissible for
same batch of material as that used in fabricating the the test plates to be nondestructively tested in the
vessel. The test plates shall be sufficiently large to same manner as the production weld. If any defects in
allow for the preparation of ali the specimens required the weld of a test plate are revealed by nondestructive
in BS EN 2884 and for any additional specimens that testing, their position shall be clearly marked on the
may be required The minimum width shall be in plate and test specimens shall be selected from such
accordance with the following values: other parts of the test plate as may be agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the inspecting Authority
Thickness of plate Minimum width (see table 1.51 of the main text).
(each of two plates)
On completion, specimens in accordance with
Up to and including 6 mm 250 mm 5.4.2 shall be cut from the production test plates and
Over 6 mm up to and 300 mm tested in accordance with 5.5.
including 13mm 5.5 Details of destructive tests for procedure,
Over 13 mm up to and 450 mm welder and production control testing
including 25 mm 5.5.1 Test requirements
Over 25 mm up to and 600 mm Weld procedure and production control testing shall be
includuig 51 mm in accordance with BS EN 2884, except where
otherwise stated in 5.5. Approval testing of welders
However, if it can be demonstrated to the &faction shall be in accordance with BS EN 287-2, except where
of the Inspecting Authority that the equalization otherwise stated in 5.5.
t e m p e m e of the test plates has not exceeded 6.5.2 Test temperature
approximately 100 "C during weldin&O)it is The tests shall be conducted at room temperature.
permissible to reduce these widths to the following 6.6.3 l'hnsverse tensile test
values (see table 1.51of the main text):
For weld procedure and production control testing,
Thickness of plate Minimum width imnsverse tensile tests shall be in accordance with
(each of two plates) BS EN 2884. For welder approval, such testing is
optional but if required by the purchaser (see
Up to and including 6 mm 150 mm
table 1.51 of the main text) shall be in accordance
Over 6 mm 250 mm with BS EN 2884.
5.5.4 Bend test
5.4.3 When a vessel includes one or more longitudinal
seams the test plates shall, wherever practicable, be Bend tests shall be in accordance with BS EN 287-2 as
attached to the shell plate on one end of one seam so appropriate.
that the edges to be welded in the test plate are a 5.5.6 Macro- and micro-examination
continuation and duplication of the corresponding The specimen shall be prepared for
edges of the longitudinal seams The weld metal shall macro-examination, and for microemination when
be deposited in the test plates continuously with the the necessity for the latter has been agreed between
welding of the corresponding longitudinal seam so that the manufacturer and the purchaser (see table 1.51of
the welding process, procedure and technique are the the main text).
same. When it is necessary to weld the test plates The weld shall be sound, i.e. free from cracks and
separately, the procedure used shall duplicate that used substantially free from discontinuities such as porosity,
in the construction of the vessel. to an extent equivalent to that given in table 5.7-1.
40) This may be achieved by applying suitable temperature indicating paints to the outer edges (remote from the weld) of the test plates
before welding. It is suggested that an 80 "C indicator and a 120 "C indicator be employed on each plate.
~ ~~
AAí6
O BSI 1997
Aluminium supplement Issue 2, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
6.6.6 Retests 5.6.4.1.2 Examination for suyfdce Jaws

Retests shaii be as specified by BS EN 287-2 for weld The full length of all welds other than full penetration
approvaìs and as specified by BS EN 2884 for weld butt welds shall be examined in accordance
procedure and production control testing. with 6.6.5.2. Fùll penetration butt welds shall be
Should any production control retest specimens not examined by these methods when agreed between the
comply with the requirements, the welded seams manufacturer, the purchaser and the Inspecting
represented by these tests shall be deemed not to Authority (see table 1.51 of the main text).
comply with this standard. If any retest specimens fail Defects revealed by nondestructive testing shall be
during weld procedure approval testing the cause of assessed in accordance with 6.7.
faiiure shall be established and the whole procedure
test shall be repeated 6.6.4.2 Components to construction categorg 2
6.6 Non-destructive testing (see table 3.41 of the main text)
6.6.1 General At least 10 % of the length of all full penetration butt
See main m. welds, including the welds of forged butt welded
nozzles, shall be examined by radiographic and/or
6.6.2 Parent materials ultrasonic methods. Such examination shall include
Acceptance standards for defects revealed by each intersection of longitudinal and circumferential
nondestructive testing of unwelded parent materials seams. For each longitudinal and circumferential seam
shall be subject to agreement between the and for each forged butt welded nozzle there shall be
manufacturer and the purchaser, and/or the Inspecting at least one radiograph, or where ultrasonic testing is
Authority (see table 1.51 of the main text). Where specified, at least a 200 mm length shall be examined
repairs by welding are authorized, nondestructive
testing techniques for the repair and subsequent At least 10 % of the length of all other welds shall be
acceptance standards shall also be subject to examined by the peneb,-ant method. It is &o
agreement between the manufacturer and the permissible to examine full penetration butt welds by
purchaser, and/or the Inspecting Authority (see these methods when agreed between the purchaser,
table 1.51 of the main text). the manufacturer and the Inspecting Authoriíy (see
table 1.51 of the main text).
6.6.3 Components prepared for welding
In adàition, when openings occur in, or within 12 mm
See main text. of, welded seams, such seams shall be examined each
6.6.4 Non-destructive testing of welded joints side of the opening for a distance not less than the
I See main W . diameter of the opening. Defects revealed by
6.6.4.1 Components to construction category 1 nondestructive tesimg shall be assessed in accordance
(see table 3.41 of the main text) with table 5.7-1.
With the exception of materials and thicknesses Where a particular examination reveais defects in
permitted for construction category 2, the final excess of the levels given in table 5.7-1all welds
nondestructive testing shall be carried out after represented by the original examination shall be
completion of any post-weld heat treahnent required examined by the same nondestmctive testing method
(see 4.4.3). and the results assessed in accordance with 5.7.
6.6.4.1.1 Examination fw internd jlaws 6.6.4.2.1 Examination for i n t e m a l ~ w s
The full length of all full penetration butt welds See main text.
including the welds of forged butt welded nozzles shall
be examined by radiographic and/or ultrasonic 5.6.4.2.2 Examination for suflme jluws
methods. Unless otherwise agreed between the See main t a t .
purchaser and the manufacturer (see table 1.51 of the
main text), the full length of ali other welds 6.6.4.3 Components to construction category 3
(e.g. nozzles and branches) in or on pressure parts See main text. I
shall be examined by u l m n i c and/or radiographic 6.6.6 Choice of non-destructive test methods for
methods where the thickness of the thinnest part to be
welds
welded exceeds 40 mm.
Where a branch compensation plate is used, the shell 6.6.5.1 Intmnd jluws
and the compensation plate shall be considered as one See main text.
component of total thickness equal to the combined
thickness of the shell and compensation ring unless:
a) the branch to shell weld is separate from, or is
completed and inspected before, the branch to
compensation ring, and
b) the outer compensation ring to shell weld is not
completed until the welds referred to in (a) have
been completed.
O BSI 1997
~ ~
STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1 7 7 7 lb21-1bb7 O b 7 0 9 9 5 71-19
BS 6500 : 1997 Issue 2, September 1997 Aluminium supplement
6.6.6.2 Surjàce jlaws 6.7 Acceptance criteria for weld defects

The choice of method for surface crack detection revealed by visual examination and
depends on material. Magnetic methods are not non-destructive testing
suitable for aluminium alloys. It is permissible to 5.7.1 General
employ one of the following: Subject to the provisions of annex C, the main
a) visual examination supplemented by a X2 or X5 constructional welds of pressure vessels shall comply
magmfícation giass; with 6.7.2. It is permissible for other joints such as
b) dye penetrant examhation; tube to tubeplate welds to be the subject of special
c) eddy current methods; requirements agreed between the purchaser and the
by agreement with the purchaser andlor the Inspecting manufacturer (see table 1.51of the main text).
Authority (see table 1.51 of the main text). 6.7.2 Qualitg control level of acceptance
6.6.6 Non-destructive testing techniques for welds The defect acceptance levels given in table 5.7-1 shall
6.6.6.1 h'adiogmphic techniques be imposed during fabrication as a means of quality
Normally radiographic examination shall be in control. With the exception of inclusions these are, for
accordance with BS 3451. Because several techniques practical purposes, the same as those adopted for
with differing sensitivities are detailed in BS 3451, it is welder approval and procedure approval in
necessary to spec@ for each particular application BS EN 2ûû4 and BS EN 287-2. When inclusions are
which technique is required to be used. For greater than those permitted in these two standards,
thicknesses up to 50 mm X-ray techniques shall but less than those permitted in table 5.7-1, or where
normally be used. It is permissible to use other defect acceptance is based on 6.7.3.2 or 6.7.3.3, the
techniques provided it can be demonstrated to the reasons for the occurrence of such defects shall be
satisfaction of the Inspecting Authority that adequate investigated.
sensitivity can be obtained (see table 1.51 of the main 6.7.2.1 Main text is not applicable.
text). 6.7.2.2 Main text is not applicable.
6.6.6.1.1 Marking and ident$l?cation of radiographs 6.7.2.3 Main text is not applicable.
See main text.
6.6.6.2 ultmonic techniques
6.7.3 Assessment of dqfects
It is permissible to use ultrasonic examination
generaìly in accordance with BS 3923 : Part 1, provided Defects shall be assessed according to one or other of
due allowance is made for different calibration tests the alternatives in 6.7.3.1 to 6.7.3.3.Defects that are
due to the changed sound velociQ. unacceptable shall be deemed not to comply with this
Before canying out uìlximnic examination of welds, standard or be repaired.
the e a c e n t parent metal shall be ultrasonically 6.7.3.1 if defects do not exceed the levels specified in
examined to establish the thickness of the material and table 5.7-1 the weld shall be accepted without further
to locate any flaws which may prevent effective action.
examination of the weld. NOTE. Details for vessels intended for service in the creep range
may require special consideration.
6.6.6.3 Magnetic particle techniques
Main text is not applicable. 6.7.3.2 When acceptance levels41) difïerent from those
permitted in table 5.7-1 have been established for a
6.6.6.4 Penetrant techniques particular application and are suitably documented, it
See main text. is permissible for them to be adopted by specific
6.6.6.6 S u v i e condition and preparation for agreement between the purchaser, the manufacturer
non-destructive testing and the Inspecting Authority after due consideration of
See main text. material, stress and environmental factors (see
6.6.6.6 Marking, aU non-destwtive testing methods table 1.51 of the main text).
Permanent marking of the vessel alongside welds shall 6.7.3.3 It is permissible to accept particular defects41)
be used to provide reference points for the accurate in excess of those permitted in table 5.7-1 by specific
location of the seam with respect to the test report. agreement in the same way as in 6.7.3.2.
The method of marking shall be agreed between the 6.7.4 Repair of welds
purchaser and the mufacturer (see table 1.51 of the No rectification, repair or modification shall be made
main text). Stamping shall not be used on vessels without the approval of the purchaser (see table 1.51
intended for low temperature service or where of the main text).
stamping may have a deleterious effect on the material Unacceptable defects shall be either repaired or
in service. deemed not to comply with this standard. Repair welds
6.6.6.7 Reporting of non-deshctive testing shall be carried out to an approved procedure and
examinations subjected to the same acceptance criteria as original
See main h t . work.
41) For example see annex C or PD 6493.
AA.@ British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

Aluminium supplement Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Table 6.7-1 Acceptance levels

Abbreviations used:
e is the parent metal thickness. In the case of dissimilar thicknesses e applies to the thinner component;
W is the width of defect;
E is the length of defect;
h is the height of defect;
9 is the diameter of defect.
Defect type')
.- 1 Permitted maximum
I
Planar Cracks and lamellar tears I Notpermitted

defects Lack of root fusion
Lack of side fusion
Lack of inter-run fusion
Lack of root penetration
Cavities Category 1 Categorv 2
a) Isolated pores (or individual pores in a 9 max. 3 mm (grade D) Such cavities may be accepted
group) 9 5 e/4 without limit provided
b) Uniformly distributed or localized e 5 3 mm Scattered, grade A representative mechanical
porosity e > 3 mm up to 6 mm Scattered specimens from production test
grades A and B plates comply with requirements
e > 6 mm Scattered grades A and B
plus isolated, grade C not more in
number than e/2 Der 1000 mm2 of
I radiographic are21
c) Linear porosity I Linear indications parallel to the a: i of the weid may indicate lack of
I fusion or lack of oenetration and are therefore not Dermitted
d) Wormholes isolated E 5 3mm w 5 1.5 mm -
e) Wormholes aligned As linear porosity
f ) Crater pipes Not permitted
g) Surface cavities
Solid a) Oxide inclusions, linear Not permitted
inclusions b) Oxide inclusions, diffuse Isolated patches permitted provided that they do not exceed e/4
or 3 mm max. in average diameter and provided that they are not
repetitive
c) Tungsten inclusions No limit except that they shali not be accompanied by oxide inclusions
and that the max. diameter of individual inclusions does not exceed e/4
or 3 mm max.
d) Copper inclusions Not permitted
Profile and a) Insufficient weld size
visible b) Overlap Not permitted
surface c) Shrinkage grooves and root concavity
defects
d) Undercut Slight intermittent undercut permitted, should not exceed
I approximately 0.5 mm
e) Excess penetration 1 h 5 3 mm. Occasional local slight excess is allowable
f) Reinforcement shape The reinforcement shall blend smoothly with the parent metal and
dressing is not normally reauired Drovided the shaDe does not interfere
I with th&speciñed nondes&ctive-testing techniques
g) Linear misalignment I See 4.2.3 of the main text
Grade of uniform porosity Approx. average diameter of pores

mm
A 0.4
B 0.8
C 1.5
D 3 or greater
O BSI 1997
M 9
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Alumjnium supplement
6.8 Pressure tests 6.8.6.4 The highest pressure which is applied shall be
maintained for the time su£ocient to permit inspection
6.8.1 General in accordance with 6.8.2.3 of the main text.
See m i n text.
6.8.6.6 Strain readings shail be taken as the pressure is
6.8.2 Basic requirements increased. The pressure shall be increased by steps of
See main text. approximately 10 % and unloaded between steps, untii
the ‘standard’ test pressurePt is reached or until
6.8.3 H@raulic testing significant general sbain occurs. Strain readings shall
See main text. be repeated during unloading. Should the plot of strain
6.8.4 Pneumatic tests versus pressure during the application of pressure and
unloading show evidence of non-linearity it is
See main &t. permisible for the pressure reached to be reapplied
6.8.6 ‘Standanl’ test pressure not more than five times until the loading and
unloading curves corresponding to two successive
See main text. pressure cycles substantially coincide. Should
6.8.6 Proof hgdraulic test coincidence not be attained, the pressure py
(see 6.8.6.6.2 of the main text) shall be taken as the
6.8.6.1 A proof testing procedure to be foilowed for pressure range corresponding to the linear portion of
vessels (or vessel parts) of which the strength cannot the curve obtained during the final unloading.
be satisfactorily calculated (see 3.2.2 of the main text)
shall be agreed (see 6.8.2.2 and table 1.51 of the main 6.8.6.6.1 See main text.
text). 6.8.6.6.2 See main text.
6.8.6.2 Before the test is begun or any pressure has 6.8.6.6 Main text is not applicable.
been applied to the vessel, strain gauges of electrical
resistance or other types shall be affixed to both the 6.8.7 Combined hI/drauli&neumatic tests
inside and outside surfaces of the vessel. The number See m i n text.
of gauges, their positions and their directions shall be 6.8.8 Leak testing
chosen so that principal strains and stresses can be
determined at all points of interest. The type of gauge See main text.
and the cementing technique shall be chosen so that 6.8.9 Vessel nameplate
strains up to 1 % can be determined.
See main text.
6.8.6.3 Pressure shall be applied gradually until either
the ‘standard’ test pressure for the expected design 6.8.10 Final inspection
pressure is reached or significant strain of any part of An internal and extenial examination of the completed
the vessel occurs. vessel shall be carried out prior to despatch and the
When either of these points is reached, the pressure marking on the vessel shall be checked
shall not be further increased (see table 5.81).
It is permissible to disregard indication of localized
permanent set provided that there is no evidence of
general distortion of the vessel.
AA/10
O BSI 1997
~ ~~ ~~~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 7 9 7 l b 2 L i b b 7 Ob70798 453 D
Aluminium supplement Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
Table 5.81. Principal stages of inspection

~ -
Stages of inmection Responsible party Remarks Clame reference

Examine materials at product Inspecting Authority
maker’s works, select test pieces and purchaser
witness the appropriate mechanical
tests
Correlate the material certificates of Manufacturer and The manufacturer is 1.5.2 of the main
mechanical tests and chemical Inspecting Authority responsible for forwarding text
analyses with the materials and the certificates to the
check them with the specifications Inspecting Authoritv
Idenbfy material and i t n e s s transfer Manufacturer and Origin of material to be 4.1.2 of the main
of identification marks in Inspecting Authority demonstsated from available text
manufacturer’s works records to the satisfaction of
the Inspecting Authority and
any transfer of identification
marks in manufacturer’s
works to be witnessed
Visually examine material for flaws,
laminations, etc. Check thichess
Manufacturer Examination by Inspecting
Authority is outional I 4.2-2.1
Examine material cut edges and heat Manufacturer and Examination by Inspecting 4.2.1.2
afïected zones Inspecting Authority Authority is optional
Approve weld procedures to be Inspecting Authority Inspecting Authority to 6.2
employed witness tests unless the
procedures are already
approved
Approve welders and operators Inspecting Authority Inspecting Authority to
* witness tests unless the
ui
* welderc and operators are
already approved
Witness production weld tests Inspecting Authority When required by the
Examine welded joints after cold

forming
Manufacturer
purchaser
Examination by Inspecting 4.2.2.2
Authority is optionai
i
Examine plates &er forming Manufacturer Examination by Inspecting 4.2.2.4.1
Authority is optional 14.2.2.4.2
Examine set up of s e m for Manufacturer and Examination by Inspecting 4.3.4 of the main
welding, includllig dimensional Inspecting Authority Authority is optional text
check, examination of weld
preparations, tack welds, etc.
Inspect second side weld preparation Manufacturer and Examination by Inspecting 4.3.7.4 of the
after the first side weld is completed Inspecting Authority Authority is optional main text
and root cleaned. This is applicable
to main seams where manual or
semi-automatic welding from both
sides is employed
Examine non-destructive test reports Inspecting Authority The mufacturer is 5.6.6.7 of the
before andor after post-weld heat responsible for presenting main text
treatment as required by the the reports to the Inspecting
procedure and consider acceptability Authority
of any defects
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards M11
=
~~ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 q b b 7 ü b 7 0 7 7 7 37T
BS 5500 : 1997 h u e 1, January 1997 Aluminiurn supplement
Table 6.5-1. Principal stages of inspection (continued)

Stages of inspection Responsible party Remarks Clause reference
Check all main dimensions on Manufacturer and The Inspecting Authority 4.2.4, 4.2.5 of the
completion of fabrications Inspecting Authority should witness these checks. main text
This stage may be omitted if
the vessel is to be heat
treated
Check post-weld heat treatment Manufacturer and The Inspecting Authority 4.4.3
procedure Inspecting Authority should carry out this check
when required
Check ail main dimensions on Manufacturer and Inspecting Authority to 4.2.4, 4.2.5 of the
completion of manufacture Inspecting Authority witness these checks main text
Witness pressure test and where Manufacturer and 6.5
necessary record the amount of any Inspecting Authority
permanent set
Examine completed vesel before Manufacturer and 5.8.9, 5.5.10 of
dematch. Check marhng Inspecting Authority the main text
M 1 2 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

S T D - B S I BS 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 2 9 9 7 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob71000 70T
Issue 2, September 1997 BS 5500 :1997
Index
abrasion, allowance for 3.3.4 defects see welding defects heads see domed ends
access openings 3.12 definition of parties 1.3 heat treatment
aluminium and aluminium design pressure 3.2.3 methods 4.4.4
alioys aluminium design stress limits 3.4.2 normalizing 4.4.2
supplement design temperature preheat 4.4.1
approval maximum 3.2.4 post-weld heat
nondestructive testing minimum 3.2.5 treatment 4.4.3
operator 5.6.1 dimensional checking see hemispherical ends 3.5.2.3.1
nondestructive testing tolerances hydraulic pressure test 5.8.3
procedure 5.6.1 dissimilar materials,
weld procedures 5.2 post-weld heat identification, materials 4.1.2
welder and operator 5.3 treatment annex H impact test, requirements annex D.4
attachments 3.7 distortion, due to welding 4.3.7.2 in service inspection and
dissimilar metals 4.3.5.3 documentation, integrity annex N
distance between welds 3.10.12 completion report 1.5.2.2 Inspecting Authority,
removal of temporary 4.3.5.2 domed and bolted ends 3.5.6 responsibilities 1.4.3
welding 4.3.5.1 domed ends inspection openings 3.12
external pressure 3.6.5 to 3.6.7 inspection requirements 5.1.2
backing strips 4.3.6.2 internal pressure 3.5.2 internal structures 3.7
bolting shape limitations 3.5.2.2
design stress values table 3.8-1 dye penetrant examination 5.6.4.2.2 jacketed vessels
fatigue analysis annex C.3 design 3.11
brackets annex G.3.1.4 earthquake loading annex B.6 pressure test 5.8.5.6
branch compensation ellipsoidal ends 3.5.2.3.2 weld details annex E.2.9
see opening erosion, allowance for 3.3.4
compensation exclusions to scope 1.1.4 leak testing 5.8.8
branches, minimum 3.5.4.3.3 external pressure ligament efficiency of
thickness aluminium vessels 3.4.2.1~)3) openings 3.5.4.4.2
cones 3.6.3 lining
cast components cylinders 3.6.2 general 3.3.3
design stress limits 3.4.2.3 cylinders outside pressure test 5.8.5.4
inspection 5.9 tolerance annex M loads, for design
quality specification 2.1.2.3 domed ends 3.6.5to 3.6.7 consideration 3.2.1
certificate of compliance spheres 3.6.4 local loads
(Form x> 1.4.4 stiffener proportions 3.6.2.2.2 general annex G.2.1
certification, testing 5.8.5.2 moments on cylinders annex G.2.3
non-destructive testing pipework annex G.2.7
personnel 5.6.1 fatigue radial loads on
cladding see lining analysis not required annex C.2 cylinders annex G.2.2
coatings see lining analysis of bolts annex C.3.5 rigid attachments on
combined loadings annex B corrosion interaction annex C.1.2 spheres annex G.2.4
compensation see opening design annex C spherednozzles annex G.2.5
compensation temperature effects annex C.1.3 spherednozzies
cones flanges shakedown annex G.2.6
cylinder junction at 3.5.3.4l.5 bolting requirements 3.8.1.4 local post-weld heat
large end design full-face 3.8.4 treatment 4.4.4
cylinder junction at desim full-face with low temperature
small end 3.5.3.6 me$ to metal contact 3.8.8 design annex D.5.1
external pressure 3.6.3 design narrow-face 3.8.3 manufacture annex D.5.2
thickness for internal design reverse full-face 3.8.7 materials 2.2
pressure 3.5.3.3 design reverse material requirements annex D.4
construction categories 3.4.1 narrow-face 3.8.6 reference thickness annex D.3.3
corrosion design seal welded 3.8.5 requirements annex D
allowance 3.3.2 split ring 3.8.3.7
assessment 3.3.1 types 3.8.1.3 magnetic particle
fatigue interaction annex ‘2.1.3 flat ends examination 5.6.4.2.2
inspection access 3.12 additional design manholes 3.12
creep, fatigue interaction annex C.1.5 equations annex R manufacturers
cutting of material 4.2.1 design 3.5.5 information supplied by 1.5.2
cylinders forming of sections and optional documentation annex S
combined loading 3.5.1.3 plates 4.2.2 responsibilities 1.4.2
external pressure 3.6.2 fracture mechanics marking
internal pressure 3.5.1.2 analysis annex U non-destructive testing 5.6.6.6
local loads see local transfer after cutting 4.1.2
gasket
loads
contact surface finish table 3.83
material factors table 33-5
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards I
~ ~ ~~ ~~~
S T D * B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 IL b 2 4 b b 9 O b 7 L O O L b 4 b
BS 5500 :1997 Issue 2, September 1997
materials production control test torispherical ends 3.5.2.3.2

additional for plates 5.4 tube to tubeplate welds annex T
category 3 construction table 2.3-13 preparation and testing annex Q tubesheets
C, CMn and alloy steels proof pressure test 5.8.6 fixed 3.9.4
not to BS 2.3.2 purchaser floating head 3.9.3
C, CMn and alloy steels information supplied by 1.5.1 limitations 3.9
to BS 2.3.1 responsibilities 1.4.1 perforated plate
design strength values, post-weld heat treatment 4.4.3 characteristics 3.9.2
index table 2.3-1 dissimilar metals annex H tube and shell stresses 3.9.5
design stress derivation annex K local 4.4.4.4 tube joint end load 3.9.6
identification 4.1.2 methods 4.4.4 tube joint welds annex T
low temperature tube to tubeplate joint annex T U-tubed 3.9.3
application 2.2
‘ M banding 2.1.1.3 qualification ultrasonic examination
modulus of elasticity table 3.Q3 of nondestructive see non-destructive
requirements for testing personnel 5.6.1 testing
non-pressure parts 2.1.3 of welders 5.3 unequal thickness plate,
requirements for 2.1.2 welding 4.3.6.1
pressure parts radiography see
nondestructive testing vacuum protection see
nameplate 5.8.9 reinforcing pads 3.5.4.5 pressure protection
nondestructive testing ventilation hole 3.5.4.5.3 ventilation, reinforcing
general requirements 5.6.1 relief devices see pressure plates 3.5.4.5.3
methods 5.6.5 protection visual examination, plates 4.2.2.1
operator approval 5.6.1 repair of welds 5.7.3
parent materials 5.6.2 heat treatment 4.4.3.4 weld defects
procedure approval 5.6.1 acceptance levels table 5.7-1
techniques 5.6.6 saddles, design annex G.3.3.2.6 assessment 5.7.2
welded joints 5.6.4 thickened strakes annex G.3.3.2 repair 5.7.3
normalizing,ferritic steels 4.4.2 safety valves annex J weld seam
nozzle screwed connections 3.5.4.8 cleaning 4.3.7.1
compensation see serially produced vessels, junction 4.1.4
opening compensation testing and inspection annex V order of completion 4.1.3
minimum thickness 3.5.4.3.3 socket welded connections3.5.4.8 welding
transient thermal spheres agreement for
stresses annex G.4 combined loading 3.5.1.3 commencement 4.3.1
external pressure 3.6.4 approval of procedures 5.2
offset cones 3.5.3.7 internal pressure 3.5.1.2 assembly 4.3.4
outside diameterhside local loads see local attachments 4.3.5
diameter range 3.2.2 loads butt joints 4.3.6
opening compensation split ring flanges 3.8.3.7 consumables 4.3.2
external pressure 3.5.4.6 stainless steel, lugher details for non-principal
flat ends 3.5.5.2.1 design stresses annex P seams annex E.2
I groups of openings
intemaipressure
iimitations
3.5.4.4
3.5.4.3
3.5.4.2
strain indicating coatings 5.8.6.2
stress corrosion
stress systems, general
3.3.1, 4.4.3.1
details for principal
seams
edge prepardon
annex E.l
4.3.3
pressure area method annex F criteria annex A general requirements 4.3.7
reinforcing pads 3.5.4.5 studded connections 3.5.4.8 nondestnictive testing
supports 3.7 see non-destructive
pierced ends 3.5.2.4 brackets annex G.3.1.4 testing
plate general design annex G.3.1 unequal thickness
edge cutting 4.2.1 horizontal vessels annex G.3.3 plates 4.3.6.1
edge preparation 4.3.3 vertical vessels annex G.3.2 welder and operator
forming 4.2.2 surface finish 4.5 approval 5.3
visual examination 4.2.2.1 welds
pneumatic pressure test 5.8.4 tack welds 4.3.4.2 general design 3.10.1
preheating 4.4.1 test water non-principal seams 3.10.3
preparation plate edge 4.3.3 recommendations 5.8.3.2 principal seams 3.10.2
pressure protection thermal cutting of tack 4.3.4.2
capacity 3.13.2 materials 4.2.1.1 wind loading annex B.5
devices annex J thickness definitions 1.6
general requirements 3.13.1 threaded connections 3.5.4.8
setting 3.13.3 tolerances
pressure test assembly 4.2.3
general requirements 5.8.2 vessels under external 3.6.2.1
hydraulic 5.8.3 pressure
jacketed vessels 5.8.5.6 vessels under internal 4.2.4
linings 5.8.5.4 pressure
pneumatic 5.8.4
pressure 5.8.5
proof test 5.8.6
vacuum vessels 5.8.5.5
II
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 Lb24bb7 Ob71002 582
Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
List of references
See also references given in A.5, C.9, 6.5 and annex R
NOTE. Where standards are identified as being withdrawn, reference should be made to the foreword.
BSI publications
BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION, London
BS 21 Specification for pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-tight joints are made on
the threads (metric dimensions)
BS 449 Specification for the use of structural steel in building
BS 470 Specification for inspection, access and e n t q openings for pressure vessels
BS 499 Welding terms and symbols
Part 1 Glossarg for welding, brazing and thermal cutting
Part 2Specification for symbols for welding
BS 639 Specification for covered carbon and carbon manganese steel electrodes for manual metal-arc
welding
BS 709 Methods of destructive testing fusion welded joints and weld metal in steel
BS 799 Oil burning equipment
BS 806 Specification for design and construction of fèrrous piping instaUations for and in
connection with land boilers
BS 903 Methods of testing vulcanized rubber
Part A26 Determination of hardness
BS 970 Specification for wrought steels for mechanical and d i e d engineering purposes
BS 1113 S’cification for design and manufacture of water-tube steam generating plant (including
superheaters, reheaters and steel tube economizers)
BS 1123 Safety valves, gauges and fusible plugs for compressed air or inerì gas installations
BS 1134 Assessment of su-rface texture
* Part 1 Methods and instrumentatwn
rn*
BS 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip
Part 1 Carbon and carbon-manganese plate, sheet and strip
Part 2 Specification for stainless and heat-resisting steel plate, sheet and strip
BS 1470 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering
purposes -plate, sheet and strip (withdrawn)
purposes - drawn tube
purposes -forging stock and forgings
purposes - rivet, bolt and screw stock
purposes: bars, extruded round tubes and sections
purposes - wire
BS 1500 Specification f o r fusion welded pressure vessels for geneml purposes (withdrawn)
BS 1501 Steels for pressure purposes
Part 1 Specification f o r carbon and carbon-manganese steels: plates (withdrawn)
Part 2 Specification f o r aüoy steels: plates
Part 3 Specification for corrosion- and heat-resisting steels: plates, sheet and strip
BS 1502 Specification for steels for fired and unfired pressure vessels: sections and bars
BS 1503 Specification for steel forgings for pressure purposes
BS 1504 Specification for steel castings for pressure purposes
BS 1506 Specification for carbon, low aUoy and stainless steel bars and billets f o r bolting muterial to
be used in pressure retaining applications
BS 1510 Steels for use in the c h i c a l , petroleum and allied industries (low temperature
s u p p h e n t a r g requirements to BS 1501-1506) (withdrawn)
O BSI 1997 III

S T D - B S I ES 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 1 7 7 7 .
Il b 2 4 b b 7 Ob7L003 4 1 7
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, January 1997
BS 1515 Fusion welded pressure vessels for use in the chemical, petroleum and allied industries
(withdrawn)
BS 1560 Circularjlangesfor pipes, valves and fittings (Class designated)
BS 1580 Specification for Unified screw threads
Parts 1 & 2 Diameters Vi in and larger
BS 1768 Specifkation for Unified precision hexagon bolts, screws, & nuts (UNC & UNF threads).
Normal series (obsolescent)
BS 1769 Specification. Unified black hexagon bolts, screws, nuts (UNC & UNF threads). Heavy s&s
(obsolescent)
BS 2594 Specification for carbon steel welded horizontal cylindrical storage tunhx
BS 2600 Radiographic examination of fusion welded butt joints in steel
Part 1 Methods for steel 2 mm up to and including 50 mm thick
Part 2 Methods for steel over 50 mm up to and including 200 mm thick
BS 2654 Spec?@ation for manufacture of vertical steel welded non-refrigerated storage tanks with
butt-welded sheUs for the petroleum industry
BS 2901 FiUer rods and wires for gas-shielded arc weiding
Part 4 Aluminium, aluminium alloys and magnesium alloys
BS 2910 Methods for radiographic examination of fusion welded circumferential butt joints in steel
Pipes
BS 2915 Specification for bursting discs and bursting disc d,evices
BS 3019 TIG weiding
Part 1 Spdfication for TIG welding of aluminium, magnesium and their alloys
BS 3059 Specification for steel boiler and superheater tubes
Part 1 Specification for low tensile carbon steel tubes without specified elevated temperature
properties
Part 2 Specification for carbon, alloy and austenitic stainless steel tubes with specified
elevated temperature properties
BS 3076 Specij?cation for nichzl and n i c m alloys: bar
BS 3111 Steel for cold forged fasteners and similar components
BS 3274 Specification for tubular heat exchungers for general purposes
BS 3381 Specification for spiral wound gmhzts for steeljìanges to BS 1560
BS 3451 Methods of testing fusion welds in duminium and aluminium dloys
BS 3500 Methods for creep and rupture testing of metals
BS 3571 MIG weiding
Part 1 SpeFificationfor MIG welding of aluminium and aluminium alloys
BS 3601 Specifkatwn for carbon steel pipes and tubes with specified room temperature properties for
pressure purposes
BS 3602 Specification for steel pipes and tubes for pressure purposes: carbon and carbon manganese
steel with specified elevated temperature properties
Part 1 Specification for seamless and electric resistance welded including induction welded
tubes
Part 2 Specification for longitudinally arc welded tubes
BS 3603 Specification for carbon and alloy steel pipes and tubes with specified low temperature
properties for pressure purposes
BS 3604 Steel pipes and tubes for pressure purposes: femitic alloy steel with specified elevated
temperature properties
Part 1 Specifkation for seamless and electric resistance welded tubes
Part 2 Specification for longitudinally am welded tubes
BS 3605 Austenitic stainless steel pipes and tubes for pressure purposes
Part 1 Specification for seamless tubes
Part 2 Sp&fication for longitudinally welded tubes
BS 3606 Specifkation for steel tubes for heat mhungers
BS 3636 Methods for pmving the gas tightness of vacuum or pressurized plant
BS 3643 I S 0 metric screw threads
Part 1 Principles and basic data
IV
STDmBSI B S 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob7LOûLi 355 I
I
Issue 1, January 1997 BS 6600 : 1997
BS 3692 Specifications for IS0 metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Metric units.
BS 3799 Specification for steel pipe fittings, screwed and socket-welding for the petroleum industry
BS 3915 Specification for carbon and low d o y steel pressure vessels for primary circuits of nuclear
reactors
BS 3920 Derivation and verification of elevated temperature properties for steel products f o r pressure
purposes
BS 3923 Methodsfor ultrasonic examination of welds
Part 1 Methods for manual mamination of fusion welds inferritic steels
BS 3971 Specification f o r image quality indicatorsf o r industrial radiography (including guidance
o n their use)
BS 4080 Specificatwn for severity levels for discontinuities in steel castings
BS 4124 Methods for ultrasonic detection of impwwtions in steel forgings
BS 4190 Specification for IS0 metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS 4300 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloYS for general engineering purposes (supplementary
Series)
BS 4360 Specification f o r welduble structural steels
BS 4504 Circulurjlangesfor pipes, valves and fittings (PN designated)
BS 4825 Stainless steel tubes and fittings for the food i n d u s t q and other hygienic applications
BS 4870 Specification f o r approval testing of welding procedures
Part 1 Fusion welding of steel (withdrawn)
Part2 TIG or MIG welding of aluminium and its d o g s (withdrawn)
Part 3 Arc welding of tube to tube-plutejoints in metallic materials
BS 4871 Specification f o r approval testing of welders working to approved welding procedures
Part 2 TIG or MIG welding of aluminium and its alloys (withdrawn)
Part 3 Arc welding of tube to tube-platejoints in metallic materials
BS 4882 specification for bolting f o r jlanges and pressure containing purposes
BS 5044 Specification for contrast aid paints used in magnetic particlejlaw detection
BS 5046 Method for the estimation of equivalent diameters in the heat treatment of steel
BS 5135 Specification for arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels
BS 5276 Pressure vessel details (dimensions)
Part 1 Specification for davits f o r branch covers of steel vessels
Part 2 Specificationf o r saddle supports f o r horizontal cylindrical pressure vessels
Part 4 Standardized pressure vessels
BS 5289 Code of practice. Visual inspection of fusion welded joints
BS 5400 Steel, comete and composite bridges
Part 10 Code of practice for fatigue
BS 5447 Methods of test for plane strain f m t u r e toughness ( K i d of metallic materials (withdrawn)
BS 5762 Methodsf o r crack opening displacernent (COD) testing (withdrawn)
BS 5908 Code of practice for fire precautions in the chemical and allied industries
BS 5950 Structural use of steelwork in building
BS 5996 Methods f o r ultrasonic testing and specifyi.ng quality grades of ferritic steel plate
BS 6072 Method f o r magnetic particle jlaw detection
BS 6399 Loading f o r buildings
Part 2 Code of practice for wind loads
BS 6443 Method f o r penetrant .flaw detection
BS 6759 Safety valves
Part 1 Specvication for safety valves for steam and hot water
Part 2Specification for safety valves for compressed air or inert gases
Part 3 Specificationfor safety valves for process .fluids
BS 7257 Methodsfor radiographic examination of f w i o n welded branch and nozzle joints in steel
BS 7448 Fracture mechanics toughness tests
BS 7777 Flat-bottomed, vertical, cylindrical storage t a n k .for low temperature semiice
Part 2Specification for the design and construction of single, double and fuU containment
metal tccnlcsfor the storage of liquefied gases at temperatures down to -165 "C
BS 8110 Structural use of concrete

~~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL L777 l h 2 4 b b 9 Ob71005 2 9 1 I
BS 6600: 1997 h u e 1, January 1997
BS EN 287 Approval testing of welders for fusion welding

Part 1 Steels
Part 2 Aluminium and aluminium au0Y S
BS EN 288 Specification and approval of welding procedures for metallic materials
Part 1 General rules for fusion welding
Part 2 Welding procedures specvieation for arc welding
Part 3 : 1992 Welding procedure tests for arc welding of steels
Part 4 Welding procedures specvication for arc welding of aluminium and its aUoys
BS EN 10002-1 Tensile testing of metaüic materials
Part 1 Method of test at ambient temperature
BS EN 10002-5 Tensile testing of metallic materials
Part 5 Method of test at elevated temperature
BS EN 10025 Specification for hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steels and their technical delivery
conditions
BS EN 10028 Specifkation f o r m t products made of steels for pressure-purposes
BS EN 10029 Specification for tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass for hot rolled steel plates, 3 mm
thick or above
BS EN 10045-1 Charpy impact test on metallic materials
Part l-Test method (V and U notchesj
BS EN 20898 Mechanical properties of fasteners
BS EN 25817 Arc-weùìed joints in steel. Guùlunce on quality levels for impe@ections
CP 3 Code of basic data f o r the design of buildings
Chapter V Loading
Part2 Wind loads
PD 6439 A revlew of the methods of cdculating stresses due to local loads and local attachments of
pressure vessels
PD 6493 Guidance on methods for assessing the acceptability of &ws in fusion welded structures
PD 6497 Stresses in horizontal cglindrical pressure vessels supported on twin saddles: a derivation of
the basic equations and constants used in G.3.3 of BS 5500 :1982
PD 6539 Guide to methods for the assessment of the influence of crack growth on the signifkance of
defects in components operating at high temperatures
PD 6550 Explanatov supplement to BS 5500 :1988
‘Specificationfor unfired fusion weùìed pressure vessels; section three ‘Design’
Part 1 Domed ends (hxulsj
Part 2 ûpenings and branch connections
Part 3 Vessels under external pressure
Part 4 Heaft exchanger tubesheets
VI
O BSI 1997
~ ~~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 II l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob7100b 1 2 8
Issue 1,January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997
IS0 publications
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (EO), Geneva
(AU publications are available from Customer Services, BSI.)
IS0 1302 Technical drawings - Method of indicating surface texture on drawings

ISO/DIS 269442) Pressure vessels
IS0 6303 Pressure vessel steels not included in I S 0 2604, Parts 1-6. Derivation of long-term stress
rupture properties
American Petroleum Industry RP 520
Recommended practice for the design and installation of pressure relieving systems in
refineries
American Petroleum Industry RP 521 Guide for pressure relief and depressurizing systems
Institution of Chemical Engineers, Guide Notes on Safe Use of Stainless Steel in Chemical
Process Plant
ANSI B16.5 Pipe flanges and flanged fittings
MME VIII ASME Boiler and pressure vessel code. Rules for the construction of pressure vessels
div 1
Other publications
Health and Safety Executive. Standards Signi$?cant to Health and Safety at W ~ r h ? ~ )
Engineering Equipment and Materials User’s Association Publication 143. Recommendations for Tube End
Welding. Tubular Heat Transfm Equipment Part 1. Ferrous Matemals
Building Research Establishment Digest No. 119. The assessment of wind loads
SOEHRENS, J.E. The design of floating heads for heat exchangers. Pressure Vessel and Piping Design.
Collected Papers 1927 to 1959, ASME
WEILL,N.A. and MURPm, J.J. Design and analysis of welded pressure vessel supports. Tram. ASME J. Eng.
for Ind. 1960, February: I
BERGMAN, D.J. Temperature gradients for skirt supports of hot vessels. Tram. M M E J.Eng. f o r Ind. 1963,
May: 219
GARDNER, K.A. Tubesheet design - A basis for standardization - 1. Delft, 1969. Proc. 1st int. Con$ on
Pressure Vessel Technology
MEIJERS, F? Plates with doubly periodic pattern of circular holes leaded in plane stress or in bending.
Delft, 1969Proc. 1st int. Con$ on Pressure Vessel Technology
MURRAY, N.W. and STUART, D.G. Behaviour of larger taper hub flanges. Symposium o n pressure vessel
research towards design. I. Mech. E., 1961
FREESE, C.E. Vibrations of vertical pressure vessels. J. Engng. Ind. 1959, February
DE GHE?TO and LONG. Check towers for dynamic stability. Hydrocarbon Processing. 1966,45(2)
TEIXEIRA, M.A. McLEISH, R.D. and GILL, S.S. A simplified approach to calculating stresses due to radial loads
and moments applied to branches in cylindrical pressure vessels. J. Stmin Anal., 16, No. 4,1981
COE, ER. Welding steels without hydrogen cracking. The Welding Institute
Mild steel for pressure equipment at sub-zero temperature. Brit. Weld. J. 1964, March
GALLETLY, G.D. and AYLWARD, R.W. Buckling under external pressure of cylinders with either torispherical or
hemispherical end closure. C187/72 Proc. I. Mech. E. Conf. December 1972
KENDRICK, S.B. Collapse of stiffened cylinders under external pressure. C190/72 Proc. I. Mech. E.Conf.
December 1972
NEWLAND, C.N. Collapse of domes under extemal pressure. C191/72 Proc. I. Mech. E. Con$ December 1972
42) in preparation
43) Referred to in the foreword only.
O BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards
~
S T D * B S I BS 5500-ENGL 2 9 9 7 l b 2 4 b b 7 Ob7LD07 Ob4 111
BS 5500 : 1997
BSI - British Standards Institution
BSI is the independent national body responsible for preparing British Standards.It
presents the UK view on standards in Europe and at the international level. It is
incorporated by Royal Charter.
Contract requirements
A British Standard does not purport to include ail the necessary provisions of a
contract. Users of British Standards are responsible for their correct application.
Revisions
British Standards are updated by amendment or revision. Users of British Standards
should make sure that they possess the latest amendments or editions.
It is the constant aim of BSI to improve the quality of our products and services. We
would be grateful if anyone finding an inaccuracy or ambiguity while using this
British Standard would inform the Secretasy of the responsible technical committee,
the identity of which can be found on the inside front cover. Tel 0181 996 9000; Fax:
O181 996 7400.
BSI offers members an individual updating service called PLUS which ensures that
subscribers automatically receive the latest editions of standards.
Buying standards
Orders for all BSI, international and foreign standards publications should be
addressed to Customer Services, Sales Department at Chiswick Tel 0181 996 7000;
Fax: 0181 9967001.
In response to orders for international standards, it is BSI policy to supply the BSI
implementation of those that have been published as British Standards, unless
otherwise requested
Information on standards
BSI provides a wide range of information on national, European and international
standards through its Libmy, the Standardline Database, the BSI Information
Technology Service (BITS)and its Technical Help to Exporters Service. Contact the
Information Department at Chiswick Tel: 0181 996 7111; Fax: O181 996 7048.
Subscribing members of BSI are kept up to date with standards developments and
receive substantial discounts on the purchase price of standards. For details of
these and other benefits contact Customer Services, Membership at Chiswick
Tel 0181 996 7002; Fax: 0181 996 7001.
Copyright
Copyright subsists in all BSI publications. BSI also holds the copyright, in the UK, of
the publications of the international standardization bodies. Except as permitted
under the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 no extract may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means - electronic,
photocopying, recording or otherwise - without prior written permission from BSI.
This does not preclude the free use, in the course of implementing the standard, of
necessary details such as symbols, and size, type or grade designations. If these
details are to be used for any other purpose than implementation then the prior
written permission of BSI must be obtained
If permission is granted, the terms may include royalty payments or a licensing
agreement. Details and advice can be obtained from the Copyright Manager, BSI,
389 Chiswick ?3ghRoad, London W4 4AL
BSI
389 Chiswic, High Road
London
w4 4AL4
ISBN O 580 27047 5 PVW1

AMD 9641
Amendment No. 2
published 15 September 1997 and effective from 1 January 1998
to BS 5500 : 1997
Specification for unfiied fusion welded pressure vessels

~
Instructions for replacement of pages

Where oniy one of the two pages on each sheet has been updated, the other page has been reprinted.
Front cover and inside front cover Replace the pages

uitovi Replace the pages
2 3 fi xvi Replace the pages
u1 to u4 Replace the pages
1/7 to u10 Replace the pages
2/1 and 292 Replace the pages
2/27 and 2tB Replace the pages
2/41 and 2/42 Replace the pages
3l3tom Replace the pages
3/11 to 3/18 Replace the pages
3/107 to 3110 Replace the pages
Y113 and W114 Replace the pages
3,415 to W118 Replace the pages
4l1 and 4L2 Replace the pages
4/5tom Replace the pages
5/7and5/8 Replace the pages
C/1 and CIZ Replace the pages
Cl/A and CIA3 Insert the pages
Cß and C/4 Replace the pages
Ch to c/8 Replace the pages
CY15 to CE2 Replace the pages
D/1 and DL2 Replace the pages
Dîi and DA Replace the pages
D7/A and D7/B insert the pages
El11 and E42 Replace the pages
\

STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 m L b 2 4 b b ï Ob71009 9 3 7 W
w47 to mo Replace the pages

G/1 and GE Replace the pages
GA3 and GI14 Replace the pages
GE9 and GßO Replace the pages
G/55 and Gß6 Replace the pages
G/63 to G/% Replace the pages
G/@ to Gff2 Replace the pages
Gfl2A, Gfl2B, 6/73 and G/74 Insert the pages
N/1 and N a Replace the pages
U/1 and VE Replace the pages
.i'
,- AA/5toAA/8 Replace the pages

Index I and II Replace the pages
EC/1 and ECE Replace the pages
ECß and EC/4 Insert the pages
5 and 6 of EC 5500/53 Replace the pages
1 and 2 of EC 5500/64 Remove the pages
1 and 2 of EC 5500B1 Remove the pages
1 and 2 of EC 5500B7 Replace the pages
1 of EC 5500/103 Remove the pages
1 and 2 of EC 5500/1M Remove the pages
1 and 2 of EC 5500/1051) insertthe pages
1 of EC 5500/1201) Insert the pages
You may wish to retain the superseded pages, e.g. for reference purposes, if so please mark them 'Superseded by
issue X, where 'X is the appropriate issue number. if you do not wish to retain the superseded pages, please
destroy them.
'%"his is a new Enquiry Case which is Wing published at the same time as this amendment
2
AMD 9830
Amendment No. 3
published 15 October 1997 and effective from 1 January 1998
to BS 5600 : 1997
Specification for d i e d fusion welded pressure vessels

Where oniy one of the two pages on each sheet has been updated, the other page has been reprinted.

-,, xi and xiii Replace the pages
3115 and Y116 Replace the pages
DI7 and D/7-A Replace the pages
You may wish to retain the superseded pages, e.g. for reference purposes, if so please mark them 'Superseded by
issue X', where 'X' is the appropriate issue number. If you do not wish to retain the superseded pages,please
deshuy them.

AMD 9873
Amendment No. 4
published and effective from 15 January 1998
to BS 5500 : 1997
Specification for unfired fusion welded pressure vessels

Where only one of the two pages on each sheet has been updated, the other page has been reprinted.
xiandxji Replace the pages
xiii and xiv Replace the pages
2/31 and 2132 &place the pages
255and2ßô Replace the pages
3/27 and 3LB Replace the pages
G/71 and 6/72 Replace the pages
You may wish to retain the superseded pages, e.g. for reference purposes, if so please mark them 'superseded by
issue X', where X is the appropriate issue number. if you do not wish to retain the supemded pages, please
destroy them.

~~~~ ~ ~~
S T D - B S I B S 5 5 0 0 - E N G L 2 9 9 7 IL b 2 4 b b 9 O b 7 1 0 1 2 4 2 2
BRITISH STANDARD BS 5500 :1997
Specification for
Unfíred fusion welded

pressure vessels
ICs 23.020.30
NO COPYING WITHOUT BSI PERMISSION EXCEPT AS PEIUWITED BY COPYRIGHT LAW

BS 6600 :1997 Issue 5, January 1998
Committees responsible for this

British Standard
The preparation of îhis British standard was en& to TechnicalCommittee
PW1, Pressurevessels, upon which the following bodies were r e p m e n W
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Industry Board (ACRIB)

British Chemicai Engineering Contractors' Association
British Compressed Air Society
British Compressed Gases Association
British Gas pic
British Refrigeraton Association
D e m e n t of Trade and Indushy (Mechanid Engineering Division (ME))
Electricity Association
Energy Industries Council
Engineering Equipment and Materiais Users' A s s o c i o n
Health and Safety Executive
Institution of Chemicai Engineem
LP Gas Association
Lloyd's Register of Shipping
Power Generation Contsactors Association (PGCA (I3EXM.A U))
Process plant Association
Safety Assessment Federation Ltd.
Society of British Gas Industries
The Welding Institute
The following bodies were also represented in the drafting of the standard, through
subcommittees and paneh
AEX Technology
Association of Consulting Engineers
BEAMA Ltd.
British Cryogenics Council
British Iron and Steel Producers' Association
GAMEHCA (BEAMA La)
Institute of Refrigeration
This British Standard, hawig
been prepared under the Institution of Gas Engineers
direction of the Engineering Institution of M e c h a n i d Engineem
sector Board,was published Institution of Plant Engineeis
under the authorim of the
Standards Board and comes into Ministry of Defence
effect on Thnsmision and Distribution Association (BEAMA L a )
16 January 1997
'ïûbes investments Limited
Q BSI 1998 University of Liverpool
First published March 1976 Welding Ma-n'- * 'on(F3EAMALtd.)
Second edition January 1982
Third edition January 1986
Fourth edition January 1988 Amendments issued since publication
FiRh eäition January 1991 ~~
Sixth edition January l!B4 Amd No. Date Text affected

Seventh edition January 1997
9601 May 1997 Indicated by a sideline in the margin
The foiiowing BSI references
relate to the work on this 9641 September 1997 Indicated by a sideline in the margin
standard:
committeereference Wl 9830 October 1997 Indicated by a sideline in the margin
ISBN O 580 27047 B 9873 I January 1998 1 Indicated by a sidelinein the margin

S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1977 I1 b 2 4 b b 7 O b 7 L O L 4 2 T 4
Issue 1, January 1997 BS 6600 :1997
page
6.34 Maximum stress in sphere for thrust loading (flush nozzles) GI&
6.36 Maximum stress in sphere for thrust loading (prohding nozzles) g149
6.36 Maximum stress in sphere for moment loading (flush nozzles) 6/50
6.37 Maximum stress in sphere for moment loading @rohding nodes) 6/50
6.38 Maximum stress in sphere for shear loading (flush nozzles) G/51
6.39 Maximum stress in sphere for shear loading (protruding nozzles) GE1
6.40 Shakedown values for pressure loading (flush nozzle) GE2
6.41 Shakedown values for pressure loading (protruding nozzle) GA53
6.42 Shakedown vaìues for thnist and moment loadings (flush nozzle) g153
6.43 Shakedown values for thrust and moment loadings @retruding
nozzle) g154
6.44 Shakedown values for thrust and moment loadings (flush nozzle) g154
6.46 Shakedown values for thrust and moment loadings (protruding
nozzle) G/55
6.46 Shakedown values for thrust and moment loadings (flush nozzle) G/55
6.47 Shakedown values for thrust and moment loadings (protruding
nozzle) Gß6
6.48 Qpical brackets g159
6.49 Qpical reinforcing plates on cyiindrical shells g16û
6.60 Qpical ring support 6/62
6.61 Qpical steelwork under ring support 6/62
6.62 Leg supports for verticai vessels g162
6.63 Qpical ring girder g163
6.64 Qpicai supports for horizontal vesseis g165
6.66 Cylindrical shell acting as beam over supports 6/67
6.66 Factor for bending moment at mid-span 6168
6.57 Factors for bending moment at supports GI@
6.68 Portion of shell ineffective against longitudinal bending 6/70
6.69 Circumferential bending moment diagrams 6/72
6.60 Saddle supports 6/73
6.61 Qpical ring stiffeners G/75
6.62 Nozzle geometry G/79
6.63 'ihnsknt fluid and metal temperatures g180
6.64 Inner surface thermai stress factors Ki and IC1 G/81
G.66 ûuter surface thermal stress factom K2 a n d h 6/82
6.66 Mean temperature factors Kb and& G/83
J.l Qpkal pressure term relationships JE
T.1 %be to tubeplate connections,tube end fusion t11
T.2 lùbe to tubeplate connections,caste- weld TE
T.3 %be to tubeplate ~o~ecti~ns, plain fillet weld T/3
T.4 lùbe to tubeplate connections,h n t face bore fillet weld TB
T.6 lùbe to tubeplate connections,groove plus fillet weld t14
T.6 lùbe to tubeplate connections,groove weld T/5
T.7 lùbe to t u b e p h connections,back face inset bore weld t16
T.8 %be to tubeplate connections,back face stub bore weld t17
index 1
List of references m
Q BSI
Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards xi
~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~
S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1797 R l b 2 4 b b 9 Ob73935 130 P
BS 5600 : 1997 Issue 5, January 1998
Summary of pages
The following table identifies for each page of the standard the issue which forms the authorized version of the
document when assembled to include the original pages and amendments identified on the inside front page.
Page no. Issue Page no. Issue Page no. Issue Page no. Issue
Front cover 5 2/17 1 3/20 1 3/66 1
Inside h n t cover 5 2/18 1 3/21 1 3/67 1
i 1 2/19 2 3/22 1 3/68 1
ii 1 2/20 1 3/23 2 3/69 1
iii 1 2/21 1 3/24 1 3/70 1
iv 2 2/22 1 3/25 1 3/71 1
V 1 2/23 1 3/26 1 3/72 1
vi 2 2/24 2 3/27 1 3/73 1
vii 1 2/25 1 3/28 2 3/74 1
viu 1 2/26 1 3/29 2 3/75 2
ix 1 2/27 2 3/30 2 3/76 2
X 1 2/28 1 3/31 2 3/77 1
xi 1 2/29 1 3/32 1 3/78 2
rru 5 2/30 1 3/33 1 3/79 2
Jau 4 2/31 3 3/34 1 3/80 2
xiV 4 2/32 1 3/35 1 3/81 2
xv 2 2/33 1 3/36 3 3/82 1
xvi 2 2/34 1 3/37 3 3/83 2
Secth1 2/35 2 3/38 3 3/84 1
U1 1 2/36 1 3/39 3 3/85 1
in 2 2/37 1 3/40 3 3/86 1
l/3 2 2/38 1 3/41 2 3/87 2
l/4 2 2/39 1 3/42 1 3/88 2
fi 1 2/40 1 3/43 2 3/89 1
l/6 1 2/41 3 3/44 1 3/90 1
Ir7 2 2/42 blank 3/45 1 3/91 1
IA 2 Smth3 3/46 1 3/92 1
LQ 3 3/1 1 3/47 1 3/93 1
1/10 2 3/2 1 3/48 2 3194 1
Section 2 3/3 2 3/49 1 3/95 1
2/1 2 3/4 2 3/50 1 3/96 1
2/2 1 3/6 2 3/51 2 3/97 1
2ß 1 3/6 1 3/52 1 3/98 1
2/4 1 3/7 3 3/53 1 3/99 1
2/6 1 3/8 1 3/54 2 3/100 1
2/6 1 319 1 3/55 1 3/101 1
2R 1 3/10 1 3/56 1 3/102 1
243 1 3/11 3 3/57 1 3403 1
2/9 1 3/12 2 3/58 1 3/104 1
2/10 1 3/13 1 3/59 1 3/105 1
2/11 1 3/14 2 3/60 1 3/106 1
2/12 1 3/15 2 3/61 1 3/107 2
2/13 1 3/16 2 3/62 1 3/108 1
2/14 1 3/17 2 3/63 1 31109 2
2/15 1 3/18 1 3/64 1 3410 1
2/16 1 3/19 1 3/65 2 3/111 1

S T D - B S I B S 55UD-ENGL 2 9 7 7 R L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob7101b 0 7 7 R
Issue 4, odober 1997 BS 6500 : 1997
- I Issue
Page no. - Page no.
Issue Page no. Issue Page no. issue
U112 1 sect.ion 5 CI12 1 Es24 1
U113 2 5/4 1 CI13 1 Es26 1
U114 1 5/5 1 CI14 1 En6 1
U115 1 5/6 1 CI15 2 En7 1
U116 3 5R 2 CI16 2 Es28 1
Y117 2 5/8 2 CI17 2 Es29 1
W18 1 w9 1 CI18 2 EX30 1
m19 1 5/10 1 CI19 2 EBl 1
31120 1 kill 1 1 cl20 1 EB2 1
U121 1 5/12 1 ci21 2 Ex33 1
U122 2 5/13 1 CI22 2 EB4 1
U123 1 5/14 1 cl23 1 Ex35 1
U124 1 5/16 1 Cl24 EB6 1
U125 1 5/16 1 Annex D EB7 1
U126 1 5/17 1 DI1 2 Ex38 1
U127 1 5/18 1 Dl2 2 EB9 1
U128 1 5/19 2 DL3 2 W40 1
U129 1 5/20 1 Dl4 1 W41 1
U130 2 5/21 1 DE 1 V42 1
U131 1 5122 1 Dl6 1 W43 1
U132 1 AnnaA Dff 3 V44 1
U133 1 Af1 DR-A 1 W45 1
31134 1 Df7-B blank El46 1
31135 2 DA3 1 w47 1
3/l36 1 DEI 1 El48 2
Y137 1 DI10 1 V49 2
31138 2 Annex E E/50 1
31139 1 W1 1 E61 1
31140 2 Ex? 1 Ex2 1
3441 2 Annex B E/3 1 Em3 1
W142 2 BI1 w4 1 Ex4 1
3/143 2 BI2 W5 1 Ex5 1
3/14 -
1 Bß W6 1 Ex6 1
sectzon 4 BI4 Es7 1 E67 1
4/1 1 w5 Ex3 1 E/58 blank
4n 2 B/6 lm 1 Annex F
443 1 Anna C W10 1 FI1 1
4/4 1 CI1 2 W11 1 FI2 1
# 2 CA-A 1 W12 2 FA 2
4/6 1 CA-B blank W13 1 FI4 1
47 2 CI2 2 W14 1 F/5 1
4k3 1 CA 2 W15 1 FI6 1
419 1 CI4 1 W16 1 FR 1
4/10 1 C/5 1 W17 1 FA3 2
4/11 1 Cl6 2 W18 1 F19 2
4/12 blank CR 2 W19 1 FI10 1
i
secczon5
5ß
Cl8
Cl9
CI10
CI11
1
1
1
1
E/20
Ml
Ei22
E/23
1
1
1
1
FI11
FI12
F/13
F/14
1
2
1
1
QBSIStandards
COPYRIGHT British 1997 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards xiii
S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1777 W L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob7L017 T O 3
BS 6600 : 1997 Issue 4, January 1998
Annex G
GI1
G/2
Gß
GI4
2
1
1
1
Page no.
GI49
GßO
GE1
Gß2
GI53
--
Issue
1
1
1
1
1
Annex K
KI1
KI2
Annex L
Il
I l
q=?
M12
Gß
GI6
GR
1
1
1
G/54
GI66
GI56
1
1
2 Annex M
12
List of references
G/8 1 Gß7 1 M/1 11 m
G/9 1 GI58 1 M/2 I blank [v
G/10 1 Gß9 1 Annex N v
GI11 1 GI60 1 NI1 12 M
GI12 1 GI61 1 NE Il bide back covei
GI13 1 GI62 1 Annex P Back cover
GI14 3 GI63 1 PI1 11
GI15 1 GI64 2 PE I blank
GI16 1 GI65 1 Annex Q
GI17
GI18
GI19
1
1
1
GI66
GI67
GIM
3
1
1
7
Annex R
GD0 1 GI69 1
GD1 1 G/70 2
GD2 1 GR1 4 Annex S
6/23 1 GR2 2 SI1
6/24 1 GRZA 1
6125 1 Gi72B blank Annex T
6126 1 GI73 1 TI1 1
GD7 1 GR4 2 TE 1
GI28 1 GR5 1 TB 1
GE9 1 G/76 1 TI4 1
GBO 2 GR7 1 Tß 1
Gß1 1 Gi78 1 TI6 1
GB2 1 GR9 1 Ti7 1
GI33 1 GM 1 TB blank
GM 1 GB1 1 Annex U
Gß5 1 6/82 1
GI36
GB7
1
1
GI83
G/84
1
1
i
b ,
,
Annex V
GB8 1 GI85 1 VI1 Il
GI39 1 GM 1
GI4 1 GA7 1
GI41 1 GI88 1 AA/1 1
GI42 1 6/89 1 AA/2 1
GI43 1 GI90 blank AAl3 1
GI44 1 Annex H AA/4 1
GI45 1 AA6 1
GI46 1 M 6 2
GI47 1 Annex J AAf7 2
GI48 1 JI1 Il AAla 2

Section 2 Issue 2, January 1998 BS 6 6 0 : 1997
8 F
4
4
b
3 sfsf
4 4
2
4
3 3
4 4
O 0
2
4 33
h,
3 55
3 t-b
E: 3 3
f- mL0
E: 23
8 NCI
2 2
,+il
1 3
COPYRIGHT British
Q BSIStandards
1998 Institution on ERC Specs and Standards 2/19
3 8 3 8
533% 5 3 8 %
%gik?i?
$ 8 8 8
N
m
3 ID N
p! m
3 3
2 f-
3
3
41

m
Y m
d m 0- a2 m
Q BSIStandards
BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1, J a n m 1997 Section 2
- Ti- (D
883365%
% 8 % 8
3 2 2 2
W
m
ci? 8
U
i?2ss% 3
Cu
u
a % 5 * % %
8-
u
VI VI
YI VI 2 VI YI
2 $ VI s o

____~ ~ ~~
S T D - B S I BS 55UO-ENGL 1997 I1 b Z 4 b b 9 Ob710Z2 370 ]

II
Section 2 Issue 2, January 1998 BS5500:1997
8
U
z (D
8 5
O
Y
CI
Q BSI
COPYRIGHT British 19%
BS 6600 :1997 Issue 1, January 1997 Section 2

Table 2.3-13 Additional materials that may be used for eatertors 3 construction
Product form Materid stamdaràs, BS references Conditions for use
Plate BS EN 10025 Fe3ôûBF" Seenotes1,4and5
Fe 36ûC
Fe 43OA
Fe 430 B
Plate) sheet BS 1449 : Part 1 37L23H.R See notes 1,2 and 4
or stzip 37L23CR
w5H.R
BS 1449 : Part 2 304 S15 See note 3
310 S24 I
NOTE 1. The copper content shall not exceed 0.30%.

NOTE 2. Rimming steel shall not be used.
NOTE 3. The steel suppiier shall provide a certificate of compliance which shall also state:
a) the ladie analysis of the material supplied,
b) the resuits of mechanical tests on test pieces taken h m samples representing the material supplied.
Nû"E 4. The negative tolerance on thickness permitted in the matmial standard shall be taken into account in specifying the ordering
thickness (see 3.1.6).
NûTE 5. The additional procedure for correction of minor defects specified in 9.2.2 of ES 4360 : 1986 only applies with the agreement
of the purchaser. Speciñc inspection should be carried out and a certificate issued.
0 ES1
COPYRIGHT British I998
section 3 Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 :1997
h
or
CTJT Y
3.00 0.12
2.67 0.15
2.45 0.18
2.24 0.22
2.14 0.24
2.02 0.28
1.94 0.30
1.82 0.35
1.74 0.38
1.60 0.46
1.48 0.54
1.42 0.60
1.34 0.68
1.26 0.78
1.19 0.90
1.12 1.05
1.06 1.20
1.00 1.40
O 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
Y
NOTE 1. This figure may be represented by the following expresion which may also be used for C!í',JT values
greaterthan3
64
Y=
[ M T ~ + 0.8 + ( i q c T y y - 1 2 . 8 c ~ +p 0.64p512
NOTE 2. For values of 0.2 < cL/D < 0.3 see 3.6.4.3.3.
Figure 3.6-12 Design curves for flush nozzles in cylindrical shells
(0.2 c d !5 1.0)

= lb24bb7
~~ ~
STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1777 Ob7L02b TLb M
BS 6500 :1997 Issue 3, January 1998 sectaon 3
3.6.4.3.4 Limits on M n f m t The rim shail be designed to a smooth profile,

The iimits on reinforcement shall be as follows. concentrating material near the edge of the opening,
a) Where reinforcement is provided by uniform such that one-haif of the total cross-sectional area
branch thickening, the thickness 4 of the branch, failing within the outermost extremities of the
and protrusion if fitted, shall not be reduced within dimensions h and H as calculated and measured
I a distance h=@measured h m the relevant
d a c e of the shell of thickness Tr(see
in 3.6.4.3.4a and b shall be not less than the folle-.
[ult,+ Tr (H + O](f$fn> if the rim protsudes;
figures 3.516, 3.816, 3.517, 3.519, 3.520 and 3.521). [ht, + Tr (a+ t,)] (rg/fnr if the rim is flush.
It is permissible to modify the disiribution of NOTE.The cross-sectional area of the rim required in this
reinforcement so as to concentmte the material derivation wiii vary depending on the particuiar combination of
and ti. A trial procedure using different combinations of T, and t,
close to the opening in the shea For flush nozzles, may be employed to estabiish the minimum area required. For the
one-half of the totaì c r o e o n a ì area of the protruding rim, the crosssectionai area should be equally disposed
branch walls failing within the distance h as about the shell mid-thickness.
calculated and measured in this item a) shalì be not 3.6.4.3.6 û h n d , eüiptical openings and obiiqw
less than ht, (see ñgure 3.829). For protruàing no*
nozzles, the corresponding cross-sectional area shall Noncircular openings and oblique nozzles shall be
be not less than 2ht,,and the reinforcement shall be treated according to the rules for circular openings and
(approximately) equally disposed about the shell nozzles n o d to the shell with the following
mid-thickness (see figure 3.530). The value of h is exceptions.
established for the uniform branch thickening case a) For a cylinàrical shell with the minor axis of the
and shall not be recalculated if 4 is varied. opening parallel to the axis of the shell and for a
b) Where reinforcement is provided by uniform shell c o n i d shell with the minor axis of the opening
thickening, the thickness Tr of the shell shail not be lying in a plane containing the axis of the conid
reduced within a distance H measured from the shell, d is the dimension of the minor axis of the
outer surface of the branch piece of thickness .$. or opening where a branch is not provided and d is the
the bore of the opening if no branch is fiaed (see corresponding dimension of the opening plus the
figures 3.814, 3.517, 3.518, 3.1521 and 3.526), where nozzle thickness where a branch is attached.
H is the smaller of H = d/2 and H = @. For all other cases,d is the dimension measured
It is permissible to concentrate the reinforcing across the major axis of the opening where a branch
materiai close to the opening. In this case,one-half is not provided and d is the corresponding
of the total c r o d o n a i area taken between the dimension of the opening plus the nozzle thickness
outermost exbremity of the dimension H on one side where a branch is aüached.
of the nozzle and a similar point on the opposite b) in determining dimensions H and h, the value of
side of the nozzle, but excluding any are included d shall be as given ina).
in a), shall be not less than Tr(H+ i$).The value of H c) In the case of multiple openings the value of dA
shaii be d c - and measured as in this item b)
(seefigures 3.529 and 3.530) and once established it used in 3.6.4.4.1 shall be determined using d as
shail not be recalculated.
given in a).
c) The required thickness of the branch, t, (except 3.6.4.3.7 Dissim.uar materials
for studded pads, see 3.6.4.8) shail be not greater The design procedure normaüy assumes the use of
than (2 - diD)Tr. Where the distribution of the similar material in the branch and shell but where this
reinforcement has been concentrated close to the is not the case and provided that the design strength of
opening, as permitted in a) and b), the modined the branch, fn, is within the range 0.6f, to 1.5fs, the
thicknesses ti and (see figures 3.529 and 3.530) following shall aJ?pb
if0.6fs < fn <&, the calculated branch thickness
shall be substituted in this relationship as (disregarding here the requirement of table 3.52)
appropriate. shailbeincreasedto
d) The transiüons between sections of shell or
between sections of branch or n o d e connections of
different thicknesses shail be achieved by means of
a smooth tapei:The requirements of 3.10.2 shall A check shail be made-toensure that l& complies
appiy in the case of shell sections. with the mínimum thickness requirements given in
table 3.52.
3.6.4.3.5 Rim reinforcements and set-innozzle
Where the thickness .,t is modiñed in accordance
forsings with this subclause,it shaii not be necessary to
It is permissible for the design of rim reinforcements recalculate the mean branch diameter, d, and itemte
(seengureS 3.522 and 3.523) to be derived from that further and neither is it necessary to recale- h.
for branch connections in the following manner.
If fn >f,, no reduction in t, is permitted.
in accordance with 3.6.4.3.3, a combination of Tr and NOTE 1. Where reinforcement is concentrated near the
& shall be determined, using figwe 3.59 if the rim is to opening, see also iigures 3.529 and 3.W.
be protruding (seefigure 3.822) and ñgure 3.510, NOTE 2. For forged nozzle inserts, the pmedure in 3.5.4.3.5
3.511 or 3.512 for a flush rim (see figwe 3.523). includes the necessary thickening correction factor.

~~ ~ ~~~
~~
STD.BS1 BS 5500-ENGL 1777 l b 2 4 b b 7 O b 7 1 0 2 7 752 W
Annex G Issue 4, January 1998
When rings are placed adjacent to the saddie, it is NOTE. When rings are present, the shear stress in the end, Qe, for
assumed that the shear &esses do not benefit h m cases c) and d) will be reduced from that given by equation G.15.
However, for simpliciQ, it is recommended that the procedure
the rings,see table 6.3. In view of this,the most given by equation G.15 be adopted for these cases.
appropriate equations for the case when
bl < A srlzor b1lz < A I bl are therefore those 6.3.3.2.6 Circumfmiaì stress&
given for the shell stiffened by the dished end to the Fïgure 6.59 shows the circumferentiai bending
vessel moments dhgmmmh‘caiur.
1) In the shell Circumfemtiai &esses should be calculated using the
IntheregionofO<g,<a equations given in 6.3.3.2.6.1 and 6.3.3.2.6.2. The
q=- Wl numericai d u e s of the circumferential Streswf6, f7
(G.16~) andf8 found using these expressions should not
7crt sinQ,
In the region of a e Q, e n exceed 1.25$
W,(a - sin acosa) shy, Unless the saddle is welded to the vessel, the value
(G.la) of f5 should not exceed &/3, where E is the
‘= m-t(n-a+sinacosa)
circumfemtiai buckling strain which is obîained from
where the equation given in ngUre3.6-3 which in turn usesn
from ngUre 3.62. In this derivation the value of Ls2R
a m
i equals 0.2 both in Ggure 3.62 and in the
Q, is measured from the zenith (top) of the equation in figure 3.6-3.
cylinder; NûTE.The background to this design method is given in [MI.
6 is the included angie of the saddle support When the saddle is welded to the vessel the value off5
(seeñgure G.54a). should not exceed$
Q is amaximum at Q, = a, in which
c a ~ e = K3 Wilrt
2) In the end qe =-K4Wl (G. 1%)

rte
ihble 6.3 Design factors K3 and and allowable tangential shearing stresses -
Eomponent Condition Sadàle angie Factor
B (degrees)
V e l shell & A > rlz IA 5 rlz

Shell unstiffened by rings 120 1.171 0.880
136 0.968 0.654
150 O. 799 0.485
Shell m e n d by rings in 120 0.319 0.319
plane of saddles 135 0.319 0.319
150 0.319 0.319
Shell stiffened by rings 120 1.171 0.880
adjacent to saddles 135 0.958 0.654
150 0.799 0.485
Vessel end K4 bllz < A I bl bl < A 5 rlz
Sheil stjffened by end of vessel 120 0.880 0.401
136 0.654 0.344
150 0.485 0.295
Allowable tangential Vessel shell Vessel end
shearing stresses
[see note 1)
Design min (0.8J O.oGEt/r) 1-25f-fn(d)
(see note 2)
NOTE 1. Aiiowable tangential shearing stress values are derived h m strain gauge tests on large vessels (see [19])and experience with
large diameter thin waìied vessels.
NOTE 2. The nominal maximum tensile stress in head due to internal pressure, f& can be found from ñgure 3.b2using appropriate
values of h$o and dD to give p!f and hence fn0 = p/(pm where e is the vessel end analysis thickness.
O BSI
BS 660:1997 Issue 2, September 1997 Annex G
Maximum bending
moment OR each ring
stiffener
Maximum bending
moment
= Ms= K6 W, r
a) For no stiffener or for b) For ring stiffeners adjacent to &die

ring stiffener in plane of
saddle
Figure 6.69 Circumferential bending moment diagrams
6.3.3.2.6.1 sheu not stiflèned by rings The striesses in the shell at the edge of the saddle plate
The circumferentiai stsesses are caicuìated as follows. should be checked using equations (G.16) to (G.18).
a) At the lowest point of the cross section:
The saddie angle 8 may now include the angle of the
saddie plate up to but not exceeding + 12". The value
(G. 16) oft should be taken equai to the shell thicknesq b2 is
assumedtobeunchanrred.
b) At the horn of the saddie (see figure G.54a): in smw,when an extended saddie plate of angle
5 (8 + 12") and width 2 b2 = bl + 10t is used without
the use of a stiffening ring,the s b . x s s e f 5 and& are
for
L
8, then f6=-
- W, - 12liijWir (G. 18)
calculated using equations (G.16) to (G.18) as follows:
4th LtZ a) At the edge of the saddie; using a thickness equai
where b2 = bl + lot. to (t + ti) and constants K5 and & based upon
Unless the saddie is welded to the vessel, values of K5 upon an angle 8 and b2 = bl + lot. When the saddle
should correspond to those given in table G.5 for rings is welded to the vessel the ailowable value of fs is f
a a c e n t to saddie. When the saddie is welded to the and f6 is 1.25J where f is the minimum of the design
vessel, K5 may be taken as onetenth of this value. stress vdues for the shell and for the saddle piate.
Vu' es for & are given in table G.4. b) At the edge of the extended &die plate; using a
These &reses may be reduced if necessary by thickness t and constants K5 and & based upon an
extending the saddie piate as shown in figure G.60. It is angle 8 + 12" and b2 = bl + lot. When the saddie is
recommended that the thickness of the saddle piate in welded to the vessel the allowable value off5 isf
this case should be equal to the thickness of the sheli and f6 is 1.25J where f is the design stress value for
P h the shell.
if the width of this piate is not less than b2 and it if the strews are unacceptable then the width andor
subtends an angie not less than (8 + 123, the reduced the included angle of the saddle should be increased
sireses in the shell at the edge of the saddle can be and the caicWons repeated, or alternatively provide
obtained by substituting (t + ti), the combined rings and cany out an analysis in accordance
thickness of shell and saddle piate, for t in with 6.3.3.2.6.2.
equati~ (G.16)
~ to (G.18). b2 is ass~medto be
unchange&


BS 5500-1997

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS 5500-1997

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BRITISH STANDARD BS 5500 : 1997

Unfired fusion welded

NO COPYING WITBOUT BSI PERMISSION EXCEET AS PEBNII"ED BY COPYRIGHT LAW

COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

Committees responsible for this

Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Industry Board (ACRIB)

British Gas pic

COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

S T D m B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 II L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob705L3 T 8 5 I

II N Requirements for vessel design and the provision of information

COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 Lb2LibbS Ob70515 8 5 8

BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 2, September 1997

O BSI 1997 vii

STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL L777 L b 2 4 b b 9 Ob705L8 5b7

S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 PI Lb2LibbS Ob70519 LIT3 W

miliimetre width g17

COPYRIGHT British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards xi

Page no. I Issue Page no. issue Page no. I issue

Fusion welded pressure vessels for general purposes

Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997

1.1 scope b) Low pressure, above ground storage tanks which

' ) 1 mbar = lo2 N/m2 = 100 Pa.

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70527 5 7 T 9

BS 5500 : 1997 h e 2, September 1997 Section 1

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1997 1 6 2 4 b b 9 Ob70528 40b m

Form X Certificate of Compliance

Vessel description m e ..................................................

Year of manufacture ...................... Relevant BS 5500 edition including Amd. No..............................................

Manufacture Name of manufacturer ..............................................................................

Design Design conditions of Design Design temp. Construction Corrosion

Other factors affecting design (e.g. weight, nature of contents, environment)

Pos&weld heat treatment Component Temperature Holding time

l/4 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

Certificate of Compliance (design)

Position: Name of company

Position: Name of company:

Certificate of Compliance (construction and testing)

Position: Name of company

Position: Name of company:

O BSI 1997 lI5

BS 5500 : 1997 Issue 1,January 1997 Section 1

1.5 Information and requirements to be 1.5.2.1 Before commencement of manlCfucture

Requirements for additional records, documentation additional to that Purchaser option

S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1997 W L b 2 4 b b 9 Ub70533 873 W

STD.BS1 B S 5500-ENGL 1777 m l b 2 L i b b ï Ob7053Li 70T H

Mon1 Issue 3, September 1997 BS 5500 : 1997

Table 1.5-1 Purchaser options and features requiring

STDmBSI B S 5500-ENGL 1777 L b 2 4 b b 7 ü b 7 0 5 3 5 blrb H

BS 6500 : 1997 h u e 2, September 1997 section 1

1.6 Thicknesses The relationships between the defined thicknesses are

Figure 1.6-1 Relationship of thickness definitions

1/10 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

S T D - B S I BS 5500-ENGL 1777 m L b 2 4 b b 7 Ob7053b 582 =

2.1 Selection of materials 2.1.2 Materials for pressure parts

STDmBSI B S 5500-ENGL 1777 m lb24bb7 Ob70537 417 m

Carbon and carbon

2/2 British Standards Institution on ERC Specs and Standards

i'able 2.2-1 Bolting materials for low-temperature

BS 1506 grade 630 B7/B7M Nuts and bolts

STD.BSI B S 5500-ENGL 1 9 9 7 291

tubes yield point or proof stress properties shall be specified

M o n2 Issue 1, January 1997 BS 5500 : 1997

S T D - B S I B S 5500-ENGL 1797 D 1 b 2 4 b b 7 Ob70541 7LiT D